# 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


.•a««M1Wltf^*"r' 


Technical  and  Bibliographic  Notes/Notes  techniques  et  bibliographiques 


The  institute  has  attempted  to  obtain  the  best 
original  copy  available  for  filming.  Features  of  this 
copy  which  may  be  bibliographically  unique, 
which  may  alter  any  of  the  images  in  the 
reproduction,  or  which  may  significantly  change 
the  usual  method  of  filming,  are  checked  below. 


^ 


D 
D 


D 


D 


Coloured  covers/ 
Couverture  de  couleur 


I      I    Covers  damaged/ 


Couverture  endommagde 

Covers  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Couverture  restaur^e  et/ou  pellicul6e 

Cover  title  missing/ 

Le  titre  de  couverture  manque 

Coloured  maps/ 

Cartes  g^ographiques  en  couleur 

Coloured  inl(  (i.e.  other  than  blue  or  black)/ 
Encre  de  couleur  (i.e.  autre  que  bleue  ou  noire) 


I      I    Coloured  plates  and/or  illustrations/ 


L'Institut  a  microfilm^  le  meilleur  exempiaire 
qu'il  lui  a  6t6  possible  de  se  procurer.  Les  details 
de  cet  exempiaire  qui  sont  peut-dtre  uniques  du 
point  de  vue  bibliographique,  qui  peuvent  modifier 
une  image  repioduite,  ou  qui  peuvent  exiger  une 
modification  dans  la  methods  normale  de  filmage 
sont  indiqu6s  ci-dessous. 


I     1   Coloured  pages/ 


Pages  de  couleur 

Pages  damaged/ 
Pages  endommagdes 

Pages  restored  and/or  laminated/ 
Pages  restaur6es  et/ou  pellicuides 

Pages  discoloured,  stained  or  foxed/ 
Pages  d6color6es,  tachet6es  ou  piqu6es 

Pages  detached/ 
Pages  d6tach6es 


D 


Showthrough/ 
Transparence 


Planches  et/ou  illustrations  en  couleur 

Bound  with  other  material/ 
Reli6  avec  d'autres  documents 

Tight  binding  may  cause  shadows  or  distortion 
along  interior  margin/ 

La  re  liure  serrde  peut  causer  de  I'ombre  ou  de  la 
distortion  le  long  de  la  marge  int^rieure 

Blank  leaves  added  during  restoration  may 
appear  within  the  text.  Whenever  possible,  these 
have  been  omitted  from  filming/ 
11  se  peut  que  certaines  pages  blanches  ajouttes 
lore  d'une  restauration  apparaissent  dans  le  texte, 
mais,  lorsque  cela  dtait  possible,  ces  pages  n'ont 
pas  6X6  filmdes. 

Additional  comments:/ 

Commentaires  suppl6mentaires:  '^ 

This  item  is  filmed  at  the  reduction  ratio  checked  below/ 

Ce  document  est  fiimd  au  taux  de  reduction  indiqu6  ci-dessous. 

10X  14X  18X  22X 


I      I    Quality  of  print  varies/ 


Quality  in6gaie  de  I'impression 

Includes  supplementary  material/ 
Comprend  du  materiel  suppi^mentaire 


Only  edition  available/ 
Seule  Edition  disponible 

Pages  wholly  or  partially  obscured  by  errata 
slips,  tissues,  etc.,  have  been  ref limed  to 
ensure  the  best  possible  image/ 
Les  pages  totalement  ou  partiellement 
obscurcies  par  un  feuillet  d'errata,  une  pelure, 
etc.,  ont  6t6  fiimies  d  nouveau  de  fa^on  d 
obtenir  la  meilleure  image  possible. 


26X 


30X 


J 


12X 


16X 


20X 


24X 


28X 


32X 


lt;.tfw^ 


Is 

u 

ifier 

ne 

ige 


The  copy  filmed  here  has  been  reproduced  thanks 
to  the  generosity  of: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

The  images  appearing  here  are  the  best  quality 
possible  considering  the  condition  and  legibility 
of  the  original  copy  and  in  keeping  with  the 
filming  contract  specifications. 


Original  copies  in  printed  paper  covers  are  filmed 
beginning  with  the  front  cover  and  ending  on 
the  last  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, or  the  back  cover  when  appropriate.  All 
other  original  copies  are  filmed  beginning  on  the 
first  page  with  a  printed  or  illustrated  impres- 
sion, and  ending  on  the  last  page  with  a  printed 
or  illustrated  impression. 


The  last  recorded  frame  on  each  microfiche 
shall  contain  the  symbol  — ►  (meaning  "CON- 
TINUED"), or  the  symbol  V  (meaning  "END"), 
whichever  applies. 

Maps,  plates,  charts,  etc.,  may  be  filmed  at 
different  reduction  ratios.  Those  too  large  to  be 
entirely  included  in  one  exposure  are  filmed 
beginning  in  the  upper  left  hand  corner,  left  to 
right  and  top  to  bottom,  as  many  frames  as 
required.  The  following  diagrams  illustrate  the 
method: 


L'exemplaire  filmd  fut  reproduit  grdce  d  la 
g6n6rosit6  de: 

Library  of  Congress 
Photoduplication  Service 

Les  images  suivantes  ont  6t6  reproduites  avec  le 
plus  grand  soin,  compte  tenu  de  la  condition  et 
de  la  nettetd  de  l'exemplaire  film6,  et  en 
conformity  avec  les  conditions  du  contrat  de 
filmage. 

Les  exemplaires  originaux  dont  la  couverture  en 
papier  est  imprim6e  sent  filmds  en  commenpant 
par  le  premier  plat  et  en  terminant  soit  par  la 
dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration,  soit  par  le  second 
plat,  selon  le  cas.  Tous  les  autres  exemplaires 
originaux  sont  fiimds  en  commenpant  par  la 
premidre  page  qui  comporte  une  empreinte 
d'impression  ou  d'illustration  et  en  terminant  par 
la  dernidre  page  qui  comporte  une  telle 
empreinte. 

Un  des  symboles  suivants  apparaitra  sur  la 
dernidre  image  de  cheque  microfiche,  selon  le 
cas:  le  symbols  — ►  signifie  "A  SUIVRE  ",  la 
symbols  V  signifie  "FIN". 

Les  cartes,  planches,  tableaux,  etc.,  peuvent  dtre 
film6s  d  des  taux  de  reduction  diffdrents. 
Lorsque  le  document  est  trop  grand  pour  fttre 
reproduit  en  un  seul  clichd,  il  est  film6  d  partir 
de  {'angle  supdrieur  gauche,  de  gauche  d  droite, 
et  de  haut  en  has,  en  prenant  le  nombre 
d'images  n^cessaire.  Les  diagrammes  suivants 
illustrent  la  m^thode. 


ita 


lure. 


: 


!X 


1  2  3 


1 

2 

3 

4 

5 

6 

iaa^Mirarii  iii<iHaB  ' 


a 


(gonikimiewL  id 


Iticfiiirdson  Clotiert 


(i»i-ia-'9i>-(ioo.) 


miHi 


dioalakfie 


lei. 


..^i 


I, 


^fi«ct'iiL:t£i::Jr^^i]S? 


-,^:ruu'^iij/fa?» 


L 


iiii 


No.  100. 


w 


_ 


r 


SAILING  DIRECTIONS 


roB 


Gulf  and  River  St.  Lawrence  and 
Cape  Breton  Isund. 


Compiled  by 
]{.  H.  ORI?.  U.  S.  Hyduoghaphic  Ofkick. 


By  (lirectiou  of 

Liiu  T.  Commander  RICHARDSON  CLOVER,  (\    -.  N., 

Hydrographer. 


WASHINGTON: 

GOVERNMENT  PRINTING  OFFICE. 

1891. 


H 


'''■^''•^^-■'''*''~^'-^ 


I 

'i          '                                                                                   ■'                        '. 
t' 

• 

r 

: 

f    ■ 

C 


^t 


<»• 


i.fa— ■.>»i,'n"itrii  ■'    '•[  -y  iVi'lti'V 


i«1  %  .Tif'>lJr\<i''i 


n 


AT 


CONTENTS 


Preface V 

Note VI 

Index  chart vii 

CHAPTKR  I. 
Directionft  auro88  the  Onlf— winds,  ioe,  currents,  etc 1 

CHAPTER  II. 
iHlands  in  the  Onlf  of  8t.  Lawrence '^8 

CHAPTER  III. 
Cape  Breton  Island,  NW.,SE.,  and  east  coasts  47 

CHAPTER  IV. 

West  shore  of  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  and  south  shore  of  river  from  Miramiehi 
Bay  to  Green  Island fi 

CHAPTER  V.  ' 

North  shore  of  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  from  Grand  Point  to  Cape  Whittle I'i'S 

CHAPTER  VI. 

North  shore  of  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  from  Cape  Wliittle  to  Sagueuay  River  ..       14S) 

CHAPTER  VII. 

River  St.  Lawrence  from  Green  Island  to  Montreal,  .Sagiienay  River itii 

ADDENDA. 

List  of  Lights viJC 

Coaling  and  docking  facilities '^40 

Opening  and  closing  of  ports.     (Ice) -24^ 

III 


r 


. 


4J 

I 

'i 

I 


t 


»ll 


'  i'*^VfitMVi'..l»  ;^«i^ 


. 


t 


IMiKFACK. 


Tliis  uditioii  (joiitiiiiis  sailing  directioiKs  for  tim  (JuU"  and  River  Ht. 
LawrHiico,  l>('<;iiiiiiiii;' atUrand  Point  on  the  nortii  and  EscniuitnK^  Point 
oil  the  weHt  HJiore,  and  running;  np  the  river  as  tar  as  Montreal,  also 
Cai»e  Breton  (exeept  south  shore),  Aiitieosti,  and  smaller  islands  lying 
in  the  Gulf. 

Ill  the  (jonipilation  oftiiis  volume  the  following  autliorities  have  been 
consulted : 

St.  Lawrence  Pilot,  vol.  r  (Admiralty). 

St.  Lawrence  Pilot,  vol.  ii  (Admiralty). 

Anihives,  U.  S.  Hydrographic  OtTice. 

Ottlce  of  Naval  Intelligen(!e,  Navy  Department. 

Port  Charges  of  tiie  World  (Hunter). 

Hydrographic  Oflice  Charts. 

Britiah  Admiralty  Charts. 

TtioHA-RDSON  Clover, 
Lietit.  Comvn  xler,  L.  S.  Narn,  JJydrof/rapher. 

IJ.  S.  Hyuroorapiiic  Office, 

Wanhington,  August,  1891. 


-^ 


r 


NOTE. 

Tlie  bearings,  courses,  and  trend  of  the  land  are  true.  The  direction 
of  the  winds,  Ww  point  from  which  thej'  blow;  of  currents,  the  points 
toward  which  they  sot.  Distances  are  expressed  in  nautical  miles  \ 
soundings,  unless  otherwise  stated,  are  reduced  to  mean  low  water. 

VI 


ilirection 
ie  points 
a.1  miles  f 
ivater. 


INDEX   TO    I 

ALLUDED  TO  IN  PUBLI 


lliiisiiin  ot'f'hiirt  i'fii»tni'tu-ii  OWLtalrhtiUs  A:iai»liinl  In  I'hun/r. 


INDEX   TO    H.  O.   CHARTS 

UDED  TO  IN  PUBLICATIONS  N03  «9  AND  IDO 


•| 


J^r-^vn,  ^  O.Jfomtx£iL  JSn^r^tm'eti  by  JtAManjiAi  ofut  CAKoU 


i 


LIST  OF  HARBOK  ;.ND  SPECIAL  CHARTS. 


THE  HANKS  OK  NEWFOUNDLAND,  NOVA  SCOTIA,  AND  THK  GULF   OF  MAINE. 

The  Great  Baiika  of  Nowfoundland,  with  the  adjacent  coast  from  Cape 
Bonavista  to  Cape  8t.  Mary , 

Virgin  Rocks  and  Kastern  Shoals 

Cape  St.  Mary  iind  the  Miquelou  Islands  to  Halifax,  with  off-lyinj{  banks, 
including  (Jreen,  St.  Pierre,  Artinion,  Misaine,  Canso,  Sable  I,  and  Sam- 
bro  l)anks,  the  Middle  Ground  and  Banquereau 

Halifax  to  New  York,  with  Roseway,  La  Have,  Brown,  and  Georges  banks, 
Cashes  Ledge,  Nantucket  Shoals,  aud  the  inshore  banks 

OULF  OK  ST.  LAWHENCE  AND  ADJACENT  COASTS  AND  J8LAND8.  I 

River  and  Gnlf  of  St.  Lawrence,  Nova  Scotia,  and  adjacent  banks,  with 

plans  of  Georges  Shoals  and  Gut  of  Canso,  Chedabuctou  Bay  etc 

Gnlf  of  St.  Lawrence 

Magdalen  Lsliinds,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence 

Amherst  aud  Grand  Entry  harbors,  Magdalen  Islands 

OULK  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE— NORTH  AND  WEST  COASTS. 

Newfoundland;  northern  half 

West  coast  of  Newfoundland  from  St.  Genevieve  Bay  to  Bonne  Bay,  and 

south  coast  of  Quebec  from  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  to  Cape  MacKinnon 

South  coast  of  Quebec,  Washtawooka  Bay  to  Cape  MacKinnon 

Anticosti  Island  and  adjacent  coast  of  Quebec 

Antioosti  Island  to  Point  de  Monts 

River  St.  Lawrence  ;  Point  de  Monts  to  Saguenay  River 

River  St.  Lawrence;  Saguenay  River  to  Quebec ...'. 

Quebec  Harbor '. JI!! !!!. . 

Bay  of  Chaleurs  aud  adjacent  coi.sts,  New  Brnnswick  '.'.'.'....... 

Gasp^  Harbor,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  coast  of  New  Brnnswick !.. 

Caraquette,  Shippegan,  and  Miscou  harbors,  Bay  of  Chaleurs 

Miraniicbi  Bay,  New  Brunswick 


PRINCE    EDWARD    ISLAND  AND    ADJACENT    COASTS    AND   NEW  BRUNSWICK 

AND  NOVA  SCOTIA. 

Prince  Edward    Island    and    adjacent    coast,  inluding   Northumberland 

Strait  and  northern  approaches  to  the  Gut  of  Canso ; 

Shediac  Bay  and  Harbor,  New  Brunswick ...!     "I 

Pngwash  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Wallace  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia !!!!!!  !]!!i 

Amet  Sound  and  Anchorages,  Nova  Scotia ! 

Caribou  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia "[j 

Piotou  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia,  plan  of  entrance  and  liar  ..[....".[].". 

Merigomish  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia ; 

Pomquet  Harbor  and  Road  and  Tracadie  aud   Li  tile  Tracadie  harbors, 

Nova  Scotia 

I 

vii 


»rtO 
863 


198 
'J41 


15 
1013 
1092 
1107 


581a 

1105 
1108 
1109 
1110 
1111 
1112 
1-207 
1067 
1167 
1217 
1179 


106<i 
1081 
1094 
lli-1 
1098 
1140 
1076 
1099 

1148 


t 


VIII 


LIMT    OK    HARBOR    AND    SPECIAL    CHARTS. 


Title. 


triiit, 


rillN'CE   KDWAKD  ISLAXH. 

INiiict- Kdwiiiillslaiul  1111(1  iidjaceiit  coftHt,  iiicIii(liiiK Nortliiiinboilan(l 8tr 
aiKl  tim  iNortlioni  Apiiroarlii'H  to  the  Gut  of  CaiiNo 

HfileciiU!  Harbor,  incliKliiij;  Smninerside  Harbor  .... 

C'rii|iaud  Harbor 

HillHboroiiffh  Bay  and  Cbarlottetown  Harbor..!...        11 

Murray  Harbor '.'.'.'.'.'.'..'. 

Cardigan   Bay,   witli  Cardinal),  MontaKne'/and   iW-mlmiVl'l Vivms.Panniure' 
iHiaud,  and  Oeorjjetowii  Harbor. 


Nutiibcr 

of 
cbartf*. 


io«o 

10!»,5 

10«.8 

lir.() 


CAl'K   HRKTON  ISLAND  AND  ADJACENT  COAST. 

Capo  Brtstoii  Island.    Phin  of  St.  Paul  Island    .... 

Port  Hood,  Cape  Breton  Isbind  

Great  and  Little  Bran  d'Or  laken,  Capo    BretonlVland". 

Saint  Anne  Harbor  and  Gr.-at  Bias  d'Or,  Cape  Breton  Island 
.Sydney  Harbor,  (Jape  Breton  iHl.tnd  .    . . 


Scatan  Island  an<l  .Menadoii  Passawe,  Cape  Breton  Island 

Lonisbnrg  Harbor,  Cape  Breton  Island 

Gut  of  Canso  with  itssonthern  appi 
Gnt  of  Cnnso  and  Cliedabnclon  Bay 
Madame  Island  and  LtMiox  Pas,sa<{i'' 
Gnysboroujrh  Harbor,  Cliedabuctoii  Bay. 


Gilt  o(^  Canso  with  itssonthern  approaebes  and  ChedabuctoiiBav 
Gnt  ot  Canso  and  Cliedabnclon  Bay.     (See  jilan  on  H.  O.  15).....' 


NOVA   SCOTIA— BAST  COAST. 


Sainbro  Island  to  Cape  Canso;  Sheet  II 

Cunso  Harbor  and  Approaclies,  including  Glasgow  Hr'r'bo'r  anV  Auil're'w" 

Island  and  Passage 

Whitehaven,  Nova  Scotia 

Country  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia  . 


Niconitau  Bay,  with  adjacent  coast  and  islands.  Nova  Scotia 

.Sheet  Harbor  and  adjacent  anchorages,  including  Mushaboon,  Sprv'.'and 
•ope  harl)ors,  and  Taylor,  Spry,  and  Tomlees  bays 


Beaver  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia 

Ship  Harbor,  Nova  Scotia,  and  adjacent  anchorages 

Halifax  to  New  York,  with  Kosewav,  La  Have,  Brown,  and  Georges" banks',' 
Cashes  Ledge,  Nantucket  Shoals,  and  inshore  banks.. 

Halifax  Harbor,  Nova  .Scotia 

Capo  Sable  to  Sainbro  Island;  Sheet  I  ....'.'.".'  j " 

Port  Moiiton  and  Liverpool  bays,  Nova  Scotia 


BAY  OF  FUNDY. 


Bay  of  Fnndy,  southern  part 

Grand  Manau  Island  and  adjacent  coast,  Bay  of  Fund v 

Passamaq  noddy  Bay  and  Approaches '       

L'Ktang  Harbor  and  Approaches,  with  adjacent  harbors"  Vnd  anchorageV." 
including  Bhss  Harbor,  Petite  Harbor,  etc  ....  ' 

Port  St.  Andrews.  Pa88ahia(iuod<iy  Bay 

Bay  of  Fundy,  northern  part.     Plan  of  Avon  River  !!..!.!!..' 

.St.  John,  New  Brunswick,  enlarged  plan  of  entrance  to  harbor..". 


UNITKD  STATES— KA8T  COAST. 

assainaquoddy  Bay  and  Approaches,  including  Lepreau  Bay,  Beaver 
Harlxn-,  L  Ltaug  Harbor,  Quoddy  Roads,  Cobscook  Bay,  Friar  Roads. 
St.  Andrew  Harbor,  and  the  St.  Croix  River  to  Calais  and  St.  Stephens 


10T7 


r.ii 

ll)71» 

ia:i7 
1134 
lOlil 
1097 

i3r> 

18:<6 

l.i 

l-.i78 

107.-) 


0-& 

1074 
11-24 
UK) 
ll:« 

1173 
106tt 
113.-1 

041 
147 
524 

not! 


610 
1057 
1247 

1054 

1051 

600 

U9 


1247 


NutlllliT 

of 

— 

cbarts. 

Ait, 

-  •  •  • 

lotus 

-  -  •  • 

10»0 



I09i> 

10t)8 

.... 

1160 

1077 


fill 
1079 

ian7 

1134 
10(il 
1097 
155 
12:'6 
15 

lara 

1075 


5!>5 

1074 
ll',>4 
UK) 
ll:« 

1173 
1069 
1135 

941 
147 
524 

not) 


610 
1057 
1247 

1054 

1051 

609 

149 


1247 


CHAPTER  I. 

DIREOTION.S   ACROSS   THE  GULF.  *  "    '  *' 

General  Remarks—The  navigation  of  the  gulf  ami  r.ver  of  St 
Lawrence  (m  the  present  chapter  spoken  of  as  the  g.ilf  and  the  river)' 
requires  much  careful  attention ;  the  irregularity  of  the  tides  and  cur- 
rents,  the  severity  of  the  climate,  especially  towards  the  close  of  the 
navigable  season;  and,  above  all,  the  frequent  fogs,  are  difficulties 
which  may  well  cause  much  anxiety  iu  the  miud  of  the  seaman,  and 
which  call  for  the  exercise  of  all  his  vigilance,  prudence,  and  ability. 

The  Variation.— The  navigator  is  reminded  that  the  variation  of 
the  compass  differs  nearly  two  points  betwen  the  limits  of  the  places 
described  in  this  work,  viz,  at  Grand  Point  36o,  and  at  Quebec  17*0 

The  Deviation  or  local  attraction  of  the  compass  needle  is  another 
source  of  error,  independent  of  charts  altogether.  This  subject  is  one 
ot  great  importance  in  approaching  and  navigating  the  gulf,  as  from 
the  increase  of  the  magnetic  dip  and  the  decrease  in  the  horizontal 
magnetic  force  that  is  found  here-two  dements  affecting  the  shin's 
magnetism-tlie  original  deviation  of  the  compass  will,  in  all  probabilitv 
be  much  inoreased.  In  many  vessels  it  has  been  ascertained  by  direct 
observation  that  their  maximum  deviation  have  been  increased  by  one- 

Magnetic  Attraction  of  the  Shores.-An  opinion  is  prevalent  that 
the  compasses  of  vessels  are  disturbed  in  the  gulf  and  river,  and  such 
disturbance  has  been  attributed  to  the  magnetic  ores  of  iron  in  the 
hills,  particularly  those  of  the  north  coast.  The  magnetic  oxide  of 
iron  does  exist  abundantly,  and  attracts  the  needle  verv  powerfullv  at 
some  points,  particularly  along  the  coast  from  the  bay  of  Seven  Islands 
eastward.  Among  the  Mingan  Islands  the  variation  was  found  to  vary 
from  this  cause  from  19o  to  31o  w.  At  Port  Neuf  and  on  Manicougan 
Point  the  needle  was  also  disturbed.  But  these  effects  were  onlv 
noticed  when  the  instrument  was  placed  on  the  shore. 

When  running  from  place  to  place,  at  greater  distances  than  2  miles 
from  the  coast  nothing  of  the  kind  was  noticed ;  so  that  in  nine  cases  out 
oJZ  '^^^'^  *,'»•«  ««"r«e  of  erroneous  reckoning  has  been  alleged  as  the 
cause  of  accidents  to  vessels  they  probably  originated  either  in  errors 
of  the  chart  or  in  th^  local  attraction  on  board  the  vessels  themselves 
,v«     T  °^^^®  difficulties  of  the  navigation  may  be  mentioned  the 

ZrJnfTT^'  fr''^^ '"  '^^  '°^°*^  °^  ^^y*  ^^^  «°*^«°««  a°d  eastern 
parts  of  the  gulf  are  frequently  covered  with  drift  ice,  and  vessels  are 

5489       ■! 


•^■■i 


1 


2 


GULF   AND    RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


sometimes  beset  by  it  for  many  days.  Being  unprepared  for  contend- 
ing with  this  danger  they  often  suffer  from  it  and  are  occasiotially  lost ; 
but  serious  accidents  from  tliis  cause  do  not  frequently  occur,  because 
the  ice  is  gcMierally  more  or  less  in  a  melting  state  fr  >m  the  i)owerful 
effect  of  the  sun  in  spring.  In  the  fall  of  the  year  accidents  from  ice 
seldom  happen,  except  when  the  winter  commences  unusually  early,  or 
when  vessels  have  lingered  imprudently  late  from  the  temptation  of 
obtaining  high  freights. 

Cabot  Strait  is  never  frozen  over,  but  vessels  built  in  the  ordinary 
way  can  not  navigate  it  in  safety  between  1st  January  and  1st  May  on 
account  of  (he  heavy  drift  ice,  and  frecjuenily  not  until  later  on  account 
of  the  block  caused  by  the  "  Bridge." 

Sealing  steam  vessels  i)ass  through  at  all  times,  but  are  occasionally 
fast  in  the  ice  for  days  together. 

Nearly  every  year  the  great  rush  of  ice  out  of  the  Gulf  of  the  St. 
Lawrence  in  the  spring  causes  a  stoppage,  locally  known  as  '•  the  Bridge,'' 
between  St.  Paul  Island  and  Cai)e  Riiy.  The  "  Bridge  "  sometimes  lasts 
for  2  or  3  weeks,  and  completely  prevents  the  passage  of  ships ;  it  is 
recorded  that  300  sail  have  at  one  time  been  detained  by  this  obstacle, 
and  many  wrecks  have  occurred  in  consequence  on  the  Newfoundland 
coast. 

The  usual  time  of  the  formation  of  the  "  Bridge"  is  between  the 
middle  and  end  of  April  to  thw  middle  of  May. 

Small  vessels  are  engaged  ui  the  seal  fishery  duving  March  and  April, 
and  occasionally  reach  Anticosti.  The  diffl«ult  portion  is  between  the 
Bird  Rocks  and  Cape  St.  George  as  the  stream  presses  the  ice  on  to 
the  coast.  The  wind  between  NVV,  and  SW.  closes  the  coast.  A  SW. 
gale  occasionally  brings  the  ice  out  from  the  channel  between  the  Mag- 
dalen Islands  and  Cape  Breton,  which  meets  the  main  bodj'  flowing  past 
the  Bird  Rocks  and  closes  the  strait  between  St.  Paul  and  Cape  An- 
guille.  The  wind  between  NW.  and  NB.  clears  the  strait  rapidly  and 
the  wind  between  NE.  and  south  opens  the  Newfoundland  coast.  The 
stream  of  the  St.  Lawrence  is  generally  setting  to  the  southward  and 
often  with  considerable  speed,  particularly  during  westerly  winds. 

The  strait  often  appears  to  clear  rapidly ;  in  36  hours  very  little  ice 
may  be  seen  from  Cai)e  Ray,  but  bodies  of  ice  will  pass  many  days 
after  navigation  is  open,  particularly  if  the  winds  are  northerly.  NE. 
of  Anticosti  ice  may  be  met  with  in  May,  long  after  the  strait  is  clear. 
The  ice  usually  presses  out  of  the  gulf  in  the  direction  of  Banquereau, 
the  eastern  edge  extending  half-way  between  Scatari  and  St.  Pierre. 
Occasionally  it  is  drifted  along  the  south  coast  of  Newfoundland  and 
reaches  St.  Pierre.  The  coast  between  Cape  North  and  Scatari  often 
holds  the  ice  during  easterly  winds  late  in  May. 

The  early  stream  of  slob  made  on  the  Labrador  coast  and  the  north 
nsuaily  passes  into  the  gulf  during  the  month  of  December  and  mixes' 
with  the  gulf  sheet  when  it  is  made  early,  but  it  is  often  open  water. 


;^i-^t!a»rR"    n  r  'Wur  ,ihn,r  ,   .  n"  ■     '    fyf  |-|--,    ,  ,         '  i||ii;iiiM,|j,'u-;i 


lOK.  _         ^ 

The  eaHt  winds  arwl  snow  bnild  this  thin  ice  and  produce  a  form  of  white 
slob.  The  northern  slob  enters  tlie  Rulf  about  tlie  Otii  of  .lanuaiy  with 
variations  extending  over  a  niontii,  but  it  may  not  be  permitted  to  pass 
lilanc  Sablon  if  the  wind  is  N\V.  The  ice  can  not  at  present  be  foL 
lowed  ;  It  may  arrive  off  Bonne  Bay  during  January  or  February,  or  it 
may  be  driven  into  the  Labrador  coast,  all  depending  on  the  wind. 

The  gulf  sheet  makes  early  and  rapidly  during  tiie  cold  season  and 
is  often  in  sheets  a  mile  or  two  in  length  and  occasionally  it  will  be  fast 
for  a  few  days  from  Meccatiua  to  Cow  Head  in  February,  (ienerally 
spealviug,  it  is  loose,  with  lanes  and  lakes  extending  in  the  direction  of 
tlie  wind  and  current,  and  is  navigated  by  snmll  vessels  during  March 
and  Aprd  sailing  from  Natashquan  and  Esquiineaux  foint. 

lOE  IN   THE   GULP  OF   ST.   LAWRENCE  AND  VHINITV. 

During  December  and  January  the  harbors  and  bays  around  theCJnIf 
of  St.  Lawrence  begin  to  freeze,  and  by  January  20,  ice  will  have  fornied 
over  most  of  them.  In  some  the  ice  made  there  will  eventually  become 
thick  enough  to  interfere  with  navigation,  wliile  in  others  it  will  com- 
pletely close  the  i)ort  and  prevent  the  entrance  of  all  vessels.  By  Feb- 
ruary  1,  the  open  water  in  the  gulf  will  be  full  of  ice-fields  formed  there 
while  other  ice  will  enter  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  fsle  and  from  the 
River  St.  Lawrence. 

Off  the  coast  the  ice  is  inconstant  motion,  drifting  with  the  winds, 
tides,  and  currents,  and  is  slowly  working  down  towards  Cabot  Strait', 
through  which  it  passes  and  finds  its  way  to  seaward.  Its  path  broad- 
ens when  through  the  strait,  and  will  be  governed  generally  by  the  pre- 
vailing  winds.  Under  the  influence  of  currents  alone  it  will  drift  to 
the  southward  and  westward,  and  in  latitude  45°  N.  may  be  from  10  to 
75  miles  wide.  Much  of  this  is  very  heavy,  and  will  prevent  the  pas- 
sage through  it  of  all  vessels  not  specially  built  to  go  through  ''?e. 

Its  thickness  will  be  anything  from  a  few  inches  to  several  feet.  It 
is  only  in  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  that  bergs  are  encountered,  but  rarely 
farther  west  than  Greenly  Island,  though  a  few  have  been  known  to 
find  their  way  south  through  Cabot  Strait. 

Field  ice  will  be  found  in  the  gulf  until  May  and  often  lasts  until 
June,  when  it  is  generally  replaced  by  bergs. 

Much  of  the  ice  in  the  gulf  will  be  rough  and  rafted  full  of  hummocks 
and  in  extensive  fields.  Some  of  the  Arctic  ice  in  finding  its  way  into 
the  gulf  IS  forced  ashore  at  times,  but  large  quantities  mix  with  the  gulf 
ice  and  make  it  very  heavy  and  close.  Once  the  ice  forms  on  open  water 
sufficiently  strong  to  interfere  with  navigation  it  begins  to  drift,  filling 
some  ports  that  may  remain  closed  all  winter,  while  a  favorable  or 
adverse  wind  may  continue  to  open  or  close  them  the  entire  winter. 

Leads  may  be  found  extending  through  the  ice  at  any  time,  but  they 
can  not  be  depended  upon  for  any  length  of  time. 
Heavy  ice  is  noticed  at  the  month  of  the  River  St.  Lawrence  in  the 


4  GULF   AND    RIVEIl    ST.    LAWRENCE. 

latter  purt  of  Deeeinlx^r,  and  IiiHtH  until  April  10  or  15,  but  all  during 
the  aua.son  luadn  can  be  found  when  the  wind  drives  the  ice  to  either 
sule  of  the  river. 

The  Gut  of  CauHo  is  blocked  at  times  by  drift  ice  from  the  northward, 
but  will  be  opened  with  a  southerly  wind. 

West  of  Cape  Canso  the  ice  rarely,  if  ever,  interferes  with  navigation. 
Halifax,  for  example,  has  only  been  closed  once  in  25  years,  and  then 
only  for  a  short  time,  by  ice  frozen  in  the  harbor,  though  ice  an  inch  or 
two  in  thic'Miess  frequently  freezes  there. 

Fogs  may  occur  at  any  time  during  the  open  or  navigable  season, 
and  they  sometimes  last  several  days  in  succession,  but  are  most  fre- 
quent in  the  early  part  of  summer,  and  seldom  fail  to  accompany  an 
easterlv  wind  of  any  strength  or  duration.  In  the  months  of  October 
and  November  the  fogs  and  rain  that  accompany  easterly  gales  are 
replaced  by  thick  snow.  During  westerly  winds  they  are  rare,  and 
never  of  long  continuance. 

The  above  general  observation  is  subject,  however,  to  restriction,  ac- 
cording to  locality  or  season.  Thuswiuds  between  the  south  and  west, 
which  are  usually  clear  weather  winds  above  Anticusti,  are  frequently 
accompanied  with  fog  in  the  eastern  parts  of  the  gulf.  Winds  between 
the  south  and  east  are  almost  always  aocom])anied  with  rain  and  fog  in 
every  part.  NE.  winds  above  Point  de  Mouts  are  often  east  or  more  to 
the  southward  in  the  gulf,  changed  in  direction  by  the  high  lauds  of 
the  south  coast,  and  have  therefore  in  general  the  same  foggy  charac- 
ter. Winds  of  considerable  strength  and  duration  are  here  meant,  and 
which  probably  extend  over  great  distances. 

Moderate  and  partial  Une  weather  winds  may  occur  without  fog  in 
any  season  and  in  any  locality.  In  the  early  part  of  the  uavigable  sea- 
son, especially  in  the  months  of  April  and  May,  clear  weather  NE. 
winds  are  of  frequent  occurrence,  and  they  also  sometimes  occur  at 
other  seasons  in  every  part  of  the  gulf  and  river. 

The  fogs  which  accompany  easterly  gales  extend  high  above  the  sea, 
and  can  uot  be  seen  over  from  the  masthead  of  a  vessel ;  occasionally 
they  admit  the  land  or  other  objects  to  be  distinguished  at  the  dis- 
tance of  ^  mile  or  more  in  the  day  time.  The  fogs  that  occur  in  calms, 
especially  after  strong  winds,  are  frequently  so  dense  as  to  conceal 
a  vessel  within  hail ;  these  fogs  are  usually  not  much  elevated  above  the 
sea,  so  that  when  objects  are  hidden  at  50  yards  from  the  deck  they  can 
be  plainly  seeu  by  a  person  50  or  CO  feet  up  in  the  rigging. 

When  within  sight  of  land  in  foggy  weather  the  usual  effect  of  fog 
is  that  of  causing  estimations  of  distance  to  be  erroneously  in  excess.  No 
great  reliance  should  be  placed  upon  an  assumption  of  position  de. 
pending  upon  the  distance  at  which  the  sound  of  surf  breaking  on  a 
rocky  shore  can  be  heard,  but  on  many  portions  of  the  coast  where 
steep  clifls  extend  to  the  shore  the  proximity  of  a  steam  vessel  to  them 
may  be  detected  by  the  echo  of  the  whistle.  There  is  no  safe  guide  but 
the  constant  use  of  the  lead. 


•      I     liinrniaii 


>ll  (luring 
to  eitlier 

)r til  ward, 

iviRiitioii. 
and  tlitMi 
kii  iiiuli  or 

le  season, 
most  fre- 
npaiiy  an 
f  October 
gales  are 
rare,  and 

iction,  ac- 
and  west, 
requeiitly 
9  between 
bud  fog  in 
tr  more  to 
[i  lauds  of 
;y  clmrac- 
leaut,  and 

)ut  fog  in 
gable  sea- 
,ther  NB. 
I  occur  at 

B  the  sea, 
:asionally 
■j  the  dis- 
in  calms, 
D  conceal 
above  the 
c  they  can 

3«t  of  fog 
:ce88.  No 
isitiou  de. 
king  on  a 
ast  where 
)1  to  them 
guide  but 


WIND8.  5 

Winds.— Tlu'  prevailing  winds  during  the  navigable  season  areeitiior 
directly  up  or  directly  down  the  estuary,  following  tin-  course  ot  the 
chains  of  highlands  on  either  side  of  the  great  valley  of  the  St.  Law- 
rence. The  westerly  winds  do  not  a|ipeiir  to  he  so  much  guided  in  «lirec- 
tion  by  the  highlands,  excepting  along  the  south  coast,  where  ,\  SW. 
wind  at  the  island  of  Hie  was  observed  to  become  a  N\V.  wind  at  Cape 
Oaspe.  These  winds  frequently  blow  strong  for  .'{  or  4  days  in  succes- 
sion; the  westerly  winds  being  almost  always  accompanied  by  line,  dry, 
clear,  and  sunny  weather;  the  easterly  winds  as  fre(|uently  the  tioii- 
trary — cold,  wet,  and  foggy. 

In  the  si)ring  easterly  winds  mostly  prevail,  frequently  l)lowing  sev- 
eral  weeks  in  succession.  As  the  summer  advances  the  westerly  winds 
become  more  frequent,  and  the  SW.  wind  may  be  said  to  be  the  pre- 
vailing  wind  in  summer  in  all  parts  of  the  river  and  gulf.  Light 
south  winds  blow  occasionally ;  but  north  winds  are  not  common  in 
summer,  although  they  sometimes  occur.  Steady  NW.  winds  do  not 
blow  frequently  before  September,  excepting  for  a  f.-w  hours  at  a  time, 
when  they  generally  succeed  easterly  winds  which  have  died  away  to  a 
calm,  forming  the  comnieucemeiit  of  strong  winds  and  usually  veering 
to  the  SW.  The  NW.  wind  is  dry,  with  bright  clear  sky.  Hying  clouds, 
and  showers.  After  the  autumnal  equinox,  winds  to  the  northward  of 
west  become  more  commoii,  and  are  then  often  strong  steady  winds  of 
considerable  duration.  In  the  months  of  October  and  November  the 
NW.  wind  frequently  blows  with  great  violence  in  heavy  squalls,  with 
passing  showers  of  hail  and  snow,  and  attended  with  sharp  frost. 

Thunder-storms  are  not  uncommon  in  July  and  August.  They  sel- 
dom last  more  than  an  hour  or  two,  but  the  wind  proceeding  from  them 
is  in  general  violent  and  sudden,  particularly  when  near  the  niountiiinous 
part  of  the  coast.  Sail  should,  therefore,  be  fully  and  quickly  reduced 
on  their  approach. 

Strong  winds  seldom  veer  quickly  from  one  quarter  of  the  comjiass 
to  the  otiposite.  They  generally  fail  calm,  and  are  succeeded  by  a  wind 
in  the  opposite  direction.  It  is  not  meant,  however,  by  this  observa- 
tion that  they  may  not  veer  to  the  amount  of  several  points.  The  N  W. 
winds  seldom  or  never  veer  round  by  north  and  NE.  to  east  and  SK., 
but  they  do  frequently  by  degrees  to  the  S  W.,  after  becoming  moderate. 
SW.  winds  seldom  veer  by  the  NW.  and  north  to  the  eastward,  but 
sometimes  by  the  south  to  SK.  and  east.  Easterly  winds  generally 
decrease  to  a  calm,  and  are  succeeded  by  a  wind  from  the  opposite 
direction. 

In  the  fine  westerly  winds  of  summer  a  fresh  breeze  will  often  de- 
crease to  a  light  breeze  or  calm  at  nigiit,  and  spring  ui)  again  from  the 
same  quarter  on  the  following  morning.  Under  these  ciniumstiiiices 
only  may  a  land  breeze  oft"  the  north  coast  be  looked  for.  The  same 
has  been  observed  oft'  the  south  coast  also,  but  not  so(leci«leilly  or  ex- 
tending so  far  oft"  shore.    The  north  land  wind  may  occasioiiaily  be 


6 


GULF    AND    HIVKU    NT.    LAWUKNCK. 


f 


I' 


I  : 


ciirriiMl  lu^iirly  over  to  tlie  Noutli  (iouHtjuHt  boforii  iliiyliKlit,  Init  t\w  N<»utli 
itiiitl  vvihil  Mt^ltloiii  I'xteinlH  mow  tliuii  5  or  «{  inilt^H  oil",  and  that  very 
rarely.  llrnU'r  tlie  Haiiie  oirciiiiiMtaiKU'H,  that  in,  with  a  tlim  weather 
westerly  wind  Koinj;  down  with  the  nun,  a  H\V.  land  breeze  will  tr«- 
<iuently  he  found  biowinj;  otV  the  north  eoaHt  of  AnticoHti  at  ni^ht 
and  duriny  the  earl.\  part  of  the  niorninn.  If,  however,  the  weather 
be  not  Mettled  fair,  and  the  wind  docN  not  fall  with  the  mm,  it  will 
U8ually  prove  worse  than  iweleHH  to  run  u  vcBsel  close  inshore  at 
id);ht  in  the  hope  of  a  breeze  otl'  the  land. 

rtueh  is  the  usual  course  of  the  winds  in  common  seasons,  in  which  a 
very  heavy  ^ale  of  wind  will  probably  not  be  experienced  from  May  to 
October,  although  close  reefed  topsail  breezes  are  usually  common 
«notiKh.  Occasionally,  however,  there  are  years,  the  character  of  which 
is  decidedly  stormy.  Gales  of  wind  of  considerable  strengtii  then  fol- 
low  each  other  in  «|uiek  succession  and  from  opposite  quarters. 

Barometer. — When,  after  a  continuance  of  westerly  winds  and  tine 
weather,  the  barometer  has  risen  nearly  to  its  greatest  height,  say  some 
tenths  above  .JO  inches,  or  begins  to  fall  a  little,  an  easterly  wind  may 
soon  be  expected.  If  to  this  notice  given  by  the  barometer  be  added 
a  warm  hazy  atmosphere  during  the  day,  and  a  heavy  precipitation  of 
dew  at  night,  with  very  bright  twinkling  stars,  or  a  colored  aurora 
borealis,  the  approach  of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  wind  is  almost  cer- 
tain. If  land  be  in  sight  at  such  a  time,  and  appears  much  distorted 
by  teri'estrial  refraction,  or  if  vessels  in  sight  have  the  relative  propor- 
tion of  their  hull  and  sails  changed  by  the  mirage,  or  present  double  or 
treble  images,  such  appearances  will  render  the  before  probable  indi- 
cations of  the  barometer  certain.  At  the  commencement  the  southerly 
or  easterly  wind  will  probably  be  light,  with  tine  clear  weather;  but 
this  will  not  last  above  a  few  hours  if  the  barometer  continues  to  fall- 
On  the  contrary,  the  wind  will  gradually  increase,  and  as  itdt)es8othe 
8ky  will  become  overcast  by  degrees  until  it  is  comi)letely  clouded. 
Rain  and  fog  will  follow,  and  continue  during  the  continuance  of  the 
souiiierly  or  easterly  wind,  with  little  intermission  until  they  are  dissi- 
pated by  a  fresh  breeze  from  the  contrary  quarter. 

If  the  fall  of  the  barometer,  during  the  continuance  of  the  southerly 
or  easterly  wind,  be  very  slow,  the  gale  will  probably  continue,  and  not 
be  violent ;  if  rapid,  it  will  probably  be  of  short  duration,  and  of  greater 
strength ;  at  any  rate,  when  the  mercury  falls  towards  20  inches,  a 
change  is  certainly  at  hand,  and  the  gale  will,  in  general,  come  from  the 
N  W.  The  strength  of  this  succeeding  gale  will  be  in  proportion  to  the 
fall  of  the  barometer,  and  to  the  strength  of  the  southerly  or  easterly 
gale  which  preceded  it.  In  such  a  case  there  is  seldom  many  hours 
interval  between  the  one  gale  and  the  other.  The  southerly  or  easterly 
wind  generally  dies  away  to  a  Cdim,  and  in  a  very  few  hours,  and  some- 
times in  a  much  less  time,  tjie  NW.  gale  springs  up.  A  heavy  cross 
sea  remains  for  some  time  from  the  previous  gale. 


JWlJUrumiUJiffi'^i    - 


It  tllO  N(»Utll 

,  tilut  very 
m  w»'iitli«r 
zo  will  fw 
ri  lit  tii^lit 
10  woiitlier 
Htm,  it  will 
iiiHliore  nt 

ill  which  u 
tun  Miiy  to 
y  coiiiiiioti 
IT  of  wliich 
li  tliuii  t'ol- 

I'H. 

Ih  hikI  tliie 
t,  Hay  Home 

wiinl  may 
r  be  added 
pitatlon  of 
led  aurora 
diiioHt  cer- 
I  distorted 
ive  propor- 
:  double  or 
bable  iiidi- 
)  Houthorly 
ither;  but 
ue8  to  fall- 
lues  so  the 
y  clouded, 
kuce  of  the 

are  dissi- 

southerly 
le,  and  not 
of  greater 
inches,  a 
u  from  the 
tion  to  the 
•r  easterly 
any  hours 
>r  easterly 
find  some- 
savy  cross 


IIAUOMKTKK.  7 

The  Imroiin'ttT  Homefimes  bt<j,'ins  to  riniuii  the  interval  of  the  i'lilin 
which  piect'des  the  N\V.  gale,  ur  orlu'iH,  at  its  coiiiiiienct'inent  ;  the  fog 
and  rain  <'ease,  an«l  the  wciiln^r  becoiiun  quite  dear,  generally  in  a  few 
hours,  and  soinetiiu("<  iilinost  iinin'Mlirttely.  The  strength  »>f  the  west- 
erly gale  is  usually  gii  'fst  soon  uUrr  its  coiiimeiKtemenl,  ami  dimin- 
ishes as  the  barometer  rise-*,  veering  gnvdually  to  the  west  and  S\V. 
It  is  worthy  of  remark  that  the  cireumHtances  Just  mentioned  are  ex- 
actl.v  the  reverse  (»f  those  attending  the  easterly  gale.  Tlie  latrer  usu- 
ally commeiKies  with  clear  weather  and  a  high  barometer,  light  at  llrst 
from  the  south  or  SK.,  and  gradually  increasing  as  it  veers  to  the  east- 
Vvard,  with  a  falling  barometer. 

To  return  to  the  westerly  gale.  If,  after  it  has  veered  to  the  8VV.  and 
become  moderate,  the  barometer  remains  steady  at  a  moderate  height, 
tine  weather  may  be  expecttcd.  If  it  remains  at  a  considerable  height, 
but  Htill  Huctiiating  and  unsteady,  within  certain  limits,  variable,  liut 
not  heavy,  winds  and  variable  weather  may  be  expected.  If,  on  the 
contrary,  it  rises  quickly  to  a  great  height,  a  repetition  of  the  south- 
erly or  easterly  gale  will  not  lie  improbable.  Seasons  have  been  ex- 
perienced in  which  the  l)arometer  may  be  said  to  have  lieen  no  sooner 
blown  up  by  one  wind  than  it  has  been  blown  down  l)y  another,  and 
this  stormy  alternation  to  have  (iontinned  for  several  month  ,  whilst  ia 
others  there  has  been  scarcely  a  ilouble-reefed  topsail  breeze  during 
the  whole  summer. 

There  is  in  fact  so  great  adit!ereiicein  tlie  phenomena  of  the  weather 
^n  different  seasons,  that  it  becomes  dilllcult  to  write  anything  respect- 
ing it  that  shall  not  be  liable  to  many  exceptions.  There  are,  however, 
some  strongly  marked  cases  of  connection  between  the  indications  of 
the  barometer  and  changes  of  the  winds  and  weather  which  have  been 
subject  to  few,  or  almost  no  exceptions.  The  (Irst  of  these  cases  is  that 
most  common  one,  of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  j;ale,  with  a  falling 
barometer,  being  always  wet  and  foggy,  and  succet-ded  by  a  strong 
wind  from  the  opposite  quarter,  with  a  rising  barometer,  and  tine 
weather. 

A  second  case,  not  of  so  frequent  occurrence  in  common  seasons,  ex- 
cepting in  spring  or  early  in  summer,  is  the  northeasterly  wind  with  a 
rising  barometer ;  which,  although  it  may  not  l)e  at  ti  rst  for  a  few  hours, 
will  almost  always  become  fine  and  clear,  and  end  iii  tine  weather.  A 
third  case  may  be  considered  certahi :  If  the  barometer  fall  suddenly  and 
greatly  at  any  time,  a  northerly,  and  most  probably  a  NW.  gale,  of 
great  strength  may  be  confidently  expected.  It  does  not  follow  tiiat  it 
will  be  immediate,  for  it  may  l)e  preceded  by  a  strong  gale  from  SW. 
for  a  few  hours,  during  which  the  barometer  will  seldom  rise,  and  event 
probably,  continue  to  fall ;  but  when  the  S  W.  gale  dies  away  the  north- 
erly or  NW.  will  soon  succeed,  with  a  rising  barometer. 

In  conclusion  it  may  bo  remarked  that  as,  on  the  one  hand,  a  consid- 
erable fall  of  the  barometer  may  occur  without  being  followed  by  a 


mwii!Ul(U>^,,^4, 


8 


GULP   AND   RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


Strong  wiud,  so,  on  the  other,  a  breeze  of  considerable  strength  may 
come  on  without  any  indication  from  the  barometer;  but  not  anything 
that  deserves  the  name  of  a  gale.  There  has  never,  within  our  experi- 
ence, occurred  a  gale  so  heavy  as  to  be  of  serious  consequence  to  a  good 
vessel  the  approach  of  which  has  not  been  indicated  by  the  barometer. 
But  it  must  be  remembered  that  a  high  barometer  in  this  climate,  and 
under  the  circumstances  which  have  been  mentioned,  is  often  indicative 
of  a  southerly  or  an  easterly  gale.  It  is  remarkable  that  in  the  gulf 
and  estuary  of  the  St.  Lawrence  a  iiigli  barometer  may  be  considered 
as  the  forerunner  of  wet  and  foggy  weather,  which  usually  accompanies 
its  fall;  whilst  a  low  barometer  renders  it  equally  probable  that  dry 
weather  will  ensue,  since  it  as  often  accompanies  its  rise.  The  marine 
barometer,  therefore,  is  of  the  greatest  assistance  in  the  navigation  of 
the  gulf  and  river;  and  by  attending  constantly  to  its  state  and 
changes,  with  reference  to  the  winds  and  weather  which  preceded  them, 
combined  with  the  indications  afforded  by  the  appearance  of  the  sky, 
etc.,  those  changes  of  the  wind  and  weather  which  are  about  to  take 
place  may  be  anticipated  with  a  degree  of  certainty  sufiBcient,  in  most 
cases,  to  enable  a  vessel  to  avoid  being  caught  on  a  lee-shore  or  in  au 
•ausafe  anchorage,  as  well  as  to  regulate  her  course  in  anticipation  of 
the  coming  change 

Currents. — In  the  main  entrance  of  the  gulf,  between  Newfound- 
laud  and  Cape  Breton  Island,  a  current  is  very  often  found  setting  to 
the  southeastward  during  westerly  winds,  or  in  calm  weather  ;  but  east- 
erly winds  retard  it  and  sometimes  cause  it  to  run  in  the  contrary  di- 
rection. It  is  frequently  deflected  to  the  southward  towards  Cape  Bre- 
ton Island  by  northerly  winds,  and  by  the  current  from  the  northward 
which  has  entered  the  gulf  through  the  strait  of  Belle  Isle.  But  winds, 
both  present  and  at  a  distance,  act  so  powerfully  and  irregularly  on  the 
rate  and  direction  of  the  currents  and  tides  in  this  entrance  of  the  gulf, 
as  to  render  it  difficult  to  say  anything  respecting  them  that  is  not  sub- 
ject to  exceptions. 

Through  Strait  of  Belle  Isle.— The  reality  of  a  current  inwards 
through  the  strait  of  Belle  Isle  is  confirmed  by  the  presence  of  icebergs, 
which  it  transports  into  the  gulf  every  summer,  against  the  prevailing 
SW.  winds,  frequently  carrying  them  as  far  as  Mecattina,  and  some- 
times to  Natashquan,  and  the  neighborhood  of  the  east  point  of  An- 
ticosti.  It  is  probable  that  this  is  a  branch  of  the  great  current  from 
Davis  Strait,  which  is  known  to  run  along  the  coast  of  Labrador,  and  to 
transport  numerous  icebergs  far  to  the  southward  every  year.  This 
current  will  be  mentioned  again  under  the  head  of  the  strait  of  Belle 
Isle.  Its  strength  is  much  increased  by  a  prevalence  of  NE.  winds ;  at 
such  times  it  runs  at  the  rate  of  2  knots  through  the  strait,  and  for  30 
to  40  miles  farther  to  the  westward,  diminishing  gradually  in  force  as 
it  spreads  out  in  the  wider  parts  of  the  gulf.  Usually,  however,  its  rate 
is  much  less.    At  times,  when  SW.  winds  prevail,  it  becomes  very  weak, 


at»i>wge*«  szM-v^f^-m 


wiia9t^K«eN3?N»aeea)iigaag^<WSai»'iaMtiwW^ 


CURRENTS. 


0 


rength  may 
ot  anything 

our  experi- 
ce  to  a  {food 

barometer, 
slim  ate,  and 
u  indicative 

in  the  gulf  • 

considered 
ccompanies 
lie  that  dry 
The  marine 
vigation  of 
state  and 
ieded  them, 
of  the  sky, 
out  to  take 
)nt,  in  most 
•re  or  in  au 
cipation  of 

Newfound- 
I  setting  to 
' ;  but  east- 
iontrary  di- 
3  Cape  Bre- 
northward 
But  winds, 
arly  on  the 
of  the  gulf, 
b  is  not  sub- 

ut  inwards 
3f  icebergs, 

|)revailing 
,  and  some- 
>int  of  Au- 
irrent  from 
,dor,  and  to 
V'ear.  This 
lit  of  Belle 
.  winds ;  at 

and  for  30 
in  force  as 
^er,  its  rate 
very  weak. 


aud  it  has  even  been  reported  that  a  current  has  been  observed  setting 
out  of  the  gulf  in  a  contrary  direction  to  the  NE.  for  dayri  together» 
but  this  was  never  observed  by  us  during  either  of  the  three  seasons 
which  we  passed  there.  There  is,  however,  no  doubt  that  tliis  current 
is  extremely  irregular,  as  might  be  expected  at  the  narrow  outlet  of  a 
great  inland  sea,  wh'-re  winds,  both  within  and  without,  must  of  neces- 
sity possess  great  intluence. 

After  entering  the  gulf  the  current  sets  westward  along  the  north  or 
Labrador  coast,  at  a  distance  of  2  or  3  miles  from  the  outer  islands, 
leaving  a  narrow  space  inshore  in  which  the  streams  of  the  tides,  when 
uniniluenced  by  winds,  are  tolerably  regular.  Passing  outside  of  Mis- 
tanoque,  the  islands  of  the  Great  Mecaltina  and  South  Makers  Ledge, 
it  pursues  a  direction  given  to  it  by  the  trending  of  the  coast  till  it  is 
turned  gradually  to  the  southward  by  the  weak  current,  which  is  often 
found  setting  to  the  eastward  between  Anticosti  aud  the  north  coast 
during  westerly  winds,  and  which  is  set  off  to  the  southward  from 
Nathashquan  Point.  The  united  streams  continue  their  southern  course 
at  a  rate  diminishing  as  they  become  more  widely  spread,  and  which  rate 
seldom  exceeds  half  a  knot;  and  finally  joining  the  main  downward  cur- 
rent out  of  the  river  St.  Lawrence,  of  which  an  account  will  be  given 
immediately,  they  all  pursue  a  SB.  direction  towards  the  main  entrance 
of  the  gulf,  between  Cape  Ray  and  the  island  of  St.  Paul.  It  is  this  south- 
erly current  which  is  felt  by  vessels  crossing  from  off  Bird  Hocks  to- 
wards Anticosti,  and  which,  together  with  neglecting  to  allow  for  the  local 
attraction  of  the  compass,  has  been  the  principal  cause  of  vessels  so 
often  finding  themselves  unexpectedly  on  the  south  coast.  Many  ship- 
wrecks have  arisen  from  this  cause  near  Cape  Rosier,  Gasp6,  Mai  Baj', 
etc. 

Both  these  currents,  viz,  that  from  the  northward  and  the  main  down- 
ward current  of  the  river  St.  Lawrence,  are  modified  by  the  tides,  but 
in  a  way  directly  contrary;  for  the.  northern  current  in  through  the 
Strait  of  Belle  Lsle  is  accelerated  by  the  flood  and  checked  by  the  ebb, 
whilst  the  other  is  accelerated  by  the  ebb  and  cheeked  by  the  flood  tide. 
These  modifying  causes,  namely,  the  tides  and  winds,  give  rise  to  vari- 
ous combinations  and  consequent  irregularities  in  the  direction  and 
strength  of  these  streams,  which  it  is  extremely  difflcultat  ail  times  to 
estimate  and  allow  for  correctly. 

Main  Current  of  the  River. — The  current  along  the  south  coast 
appears  to  be  superficial,  at  least  it  was  found  so  in  tlie  lower  i)arts  of 
the  estuary,  where  observations  upon  the  specific  gravity  of  the  water  on 
the  surface  aud  taken  up  from  different  depths  prove  that  the  water 
of  the  St.  Lawrence  and  its  numeviuis  tributary  streams  was  widely 
diffused  over  the  estuary.  It  has  also  been.observed  that  the  current  is 
strongest  in  spring  soon  after  the  opening  of  the  navigation,  when  the 
rivers  are  swelled  by  the  recently  dissolved  snows  of  the  winter;  but 
although,  generally  speaking,  there  seens  no  doubt  that  this  current  is 


sis#- 


10 


GULP   AND    RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


!    I 


the  tribute  of  the  St.  Lawrence  ou  its  way  to  the  ocean  vet  in  H,« 
upper  part  of  the  estuary,  it  is  not  alone  and  at  a  1  times  caused  by  tSe 
discharge  o  the  St.  Lawrence,  but  depends  also  upon  pecul  arises  in 
he  set  ot  the  tales.  Thus,  when  our  observations  had  co.2i  the 
tru  h  ot  the  report  that  the  current  always  ran  down  on  the  sonth  s  d! 
of  the  estuary  fro,n  a  few  miles  below  Red  Island  towrnirtir/s land  of 

th^;  ts tuld  be'th""'  ''  ''''  ''  ^^^"^*"''^'  '''  ''  appeareXt;?b^' 
tiiat  this  could  be  the  comparatively  fresh  water  of  the  St.  Lawrence 

^Ze'Zyl  W  "',  '"T'^  *'^''  «^*'  ^'•-  ''  -«  known  tiraHh 
^bole  I  ody  a  few  miles  above,  from  shore  to  shore,  on  eituer  tide  of 

t^e  flood  tm'  "^  f '  •"  '''  ^'*^'"°*^^  «'-^'  --«  running  u,  during 
the  flood  tide.    Attention  and  numerous  observations,  together  wit  I  an 

Z7:::rjtt:  r*^"'^^""  ^^^  ^^^•'''^«  ^^^^''^  ofTe  wZ  r 

The  flood  tl  ,'  "'^"^''  '*^*^^  ^°"^'  ^'^'^'^  •«  '^^^  «-P'ainec. 

The  flood  tide  ascends  in  a  wide  channel  more  than  100  fathoms  deen- 

Tnd'R  TrT?.''  ^''^ comparatively  narrow  pass  formed  by  a^eenlsl'- 
and,  Red  Islet  Reef,  and  the  extensive  shoals  off  the  entrant  o?  the 

the'  "Zefr:. "'  "  f  ?'  ''''''''''  ^'  ^«»  -  h^  the  shol  s  of 
ffreat  a  voh,  n  r  'T""^''^'^  ^^''  ^'^"''^'  '^^''^  '«  "^^  room  forso 
IZT    U  ""^^^^  '"  ''^'''  ^"♦^  P^*-*  of  >t  is  in  consequence  turned 

the  RrzadflT  r  "''f  '^"'  ^^'""^  ^^""^  ^^'-^  Ked  Islet^eef  towards 
the  Raza  e  Islets,  as  shown  by  the  arrows  in  the  chart.    During  the 

a^r tltd^  :T  ''  ?:  '*^"^"^^  ««^«  --  ^'^  '^^  southward  in    he 

estTary.  '  '  '^^  '"'''■'°*  ^°  *^^'  «*^«  '«  ^^^^y^  down  the 

There  is  no  upward  stream  of  the  tide  (excepting  so  close  inshore  as 

to  be  useless  to  ships)  all  along  the  south  coast  from  Cape  C  Ho  a 

flood":^tl  thr  "*'"  '''''''  "  consequence  Of  the  union'of  th  f  eddy 
flood  with  the  mam  current  of  the  river;  and  they  have,  therefore  so 

c:rir;re2,r"''°''  *" ''  -"'  ^-"^-^^^ 

Commencing  from  a  short  distance  below  the  Red  Islet  Reef  the  enr 
rent  is  there  very  strong,  about  4  knots.    It  increases  n  velocity  as  [t 
proceeds  to  the  southeastward,  slanting  over  towards  t^e  rI^^^^^^^ 
oft  wh.ch  Its  rate  is  from  2  to  3  knots.    It  runs  strongly  ak.ng  the 
northern  edge  of  the  bank  of  soundings  oft"  the  south  coast^  upon  which 
esi^ciaily  ,n  spring  tides,  a  weak  stream  of  flood  will  be  fouml  flowing 

marked  b>  a  strong  ripple.  Prom  Father  Point  to  Oane  Gh^tta  fwl 
rate  of  the  <lownward  current  varies  from  J  to  H  lots,  aXrS  to  ll 
tide,  <l.reotiou.s  of  the  winds,  and  the  seasL  of  the  year.  ' 

the  sZ'h  thl?M'  ''^V''''''''^-  r""«down  on  both  sides,  strongeron 
the  south  than  the  uorth  coast,  and  weakest  in  the  middle  of  the  estuarv 
It  IS  deflected,  or  turned  off  to  the  southward,  by  the  po  nts  of  MUIe 
Vaches,  Bersimis,  Manicouagan,  and  Point  de  Monts,  and  by  the  ebb 
•ng  streauis  of  the  large  rivers  between  them,  a  cir  umstance  ^hich 


4^ 


msamnisim 


SSSKSasges^ 


CURRENTS. 


11 


I,  yot,  in  the 
aiised  by  the 
iuliarities  in 
nfirmed  the 
e  south  side 
the  island  of 
1  impossible 
t.  Lawrence 
vn  that  the 
tuer  tide  of 
:  up  during 
ther  with  an 
I  water,  dis- 
plained, 
horns  deep; 
r  Green  Isl- 
»nce  of  the 
[loalness  of 
room  for  so 
ince  turned 
Jef  towards 
During  the 
rard  in  the 
down  the 

inshore  as 
j^asptS  to  a 
this  eddy 
erefore,  so 
irace  their 

if,  the  cur- 
>city  as  it 
:ade  Islets 
along  the 
>on  which, 
id  flowing 
is  usually 
hatte,  the 
iog  to  the 

Tongeron 
B  estuary. 
I  of  Mille 
the  ebb- 
ce  which 


should  be  carefully  attended  to  by  vessils  coining  up  with  a  northerly 
wind;  as  they  will  infallibl  be  set  over  to  the  southward  upon  a  lee 
shore,  if  they  do  not  mak  the  necessary  allowance  by  keeping  their 
wind  well  over  to  the  northward. 

During  the  flood  tide  this  stream  still  continues  to  run  down  outside 
the  bank  of  soundings  off  the  south  coast,  although  with  diminished  ve- 
locity, and  it  is  lelt  about  halfway  towards  north  shore.  In  the  middle 
of  the  estuary  there  is  usually  slack  water,  whilst  along  the  north  coast 
the  stream  of  flood  is  regular  in  its  recurrence,  increasing  in  force  as 
we  ascend  the  estuary.  The  strength  of  the  stream  of  flood  is  greatest 
inshore,  and  diminishes  as  we  proceed  over  to  the  southward,  till  at  the 
distance  of  about  9  miles  it  becomes  imperceptible.  These  diftereuces 
in  the  strength  and  direction  of  the  streams  produce  strong  ripples  in 
various  parts  of  the  estuary,  but  their  position  varies  with  the  different 
times  of  tide,  and  perhaps  from  other  causes,  so  that  they  can  not  safely 
be  trustod  for  any  guidance  to  the  seamen. 

Kouud  Point  de  Monts  there  is  little  or  no  stream  of  flood,  excepting 
very  close  inshore ;  the  downward  current  is  constant,  or  nearly  so, 
off"  that  point  and  it  requires  a  fast-sailing  vessel  to  beat  round  it 
against  a  westerly  wind.  Point  de  Monts  turns  this  current  over  to  the 
SE.,  at  a  rate  varying  from  one  to  2  knots,  so  that  a  vessel  having  a  west 
wind,  and  standing  over  to  the  southward  on  the  starboard  tack,  will 
be  carried  towards  the  south  coast  at  a  rapid  rate,  having  the  current 
on  her  weather  quarter ;  during  her  board  back  to  the  northward  she 
will  be  retarded,  the  current  being  then  directly  opposed  to  her  course. 
When  sailing  at  the  rate  of  4  knots  it  will  usually  require  only  about 
half  the  time  to  go  from  near  Point  de  Monts  over  to  the  south  coast 
that  it  will  take  to  return  from  the  latter  to  the  former.  This  is  a  most 
important  circumstance,  which  it  is  necessary  to  carefully  guard  against 
when  beating  up  the  estuary  in  this  part  during  dark  nights,  and, 
especially,  in  foggy  weather. 

Below  Point  de  Monts  the  current  is  no  longer  felt  near  the  north 
coast,  nor,  indeed,  anywhere  to  the  northward  of  a  line  joining  Point 
de  Monts  and  Anticosti.  It  is  confined  to  the  neighborhood  of  the 
south  coast,  which  it  follows  in  its  curve  to  the  southward,  running 
strongly  past  Cape  Gaspe,  Flat  Island,  and  Bonaventure  Island ;  whence 
curving  gradually  to  the  south  and  SE,  it  continues  its  course  to- 
wards the  entrance  of  the  gulf,  with  a  rate  very  much  lessened  in 
consequence  of  the  great  space  over  which  it  is  now  spread.  The  usual 
breadth  of  this  stream  from  Magdalen  River  to  Cape  Gasp6  is  9  or  12 
miles ;  but  this  we  believe  is  not  uniform. 

When  SW.  winds  prevail  it  appears  that  this  current,  or  a  branch 
of  it,  is  driven  over  from  the  vicinity  of  Magdalen  River  towards  Anti- 
costi ;  part  of  the  stream  running  round  the  west  point  of  that  island  sets 
across  nearly  towards  Large  Island  (one  of  the  Mingan  Islands),  whence 
turning  gradually  down  outside  the  Mingan  and  Esquimaux  Islands, 


I  iiiiiii'tllTiBifiajgiigiBTiM|iBrHi^<u<«».iBfr.:-g^^>a-ffhrt 


12 


GULF   AND    RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


^afiiiiaE^ 


and  along  the  north  coast,  it  sweeps  round  the  cnrve  to  the  westward 
of  Natasliqnan  Point,  and  is  turned  off  to  the  southward,  as  has  been 
already  mentioned.  The  other  part  sweeps  round  the  hirge  curve, 
or  bay,  between  the  west  and  8W.  points  of  Anticosti,  and  is  turned 
off  to  the  southward  by  the  latter  point,  frequently  causing  a  great 
ripple  off  it,  which  has  been  mistaken  for  breakers  on  a  much  more 
extensive  reef  than  exists  tht^re.  The  rate  of  this  current  has  been 
noted,  off  different  parts  of  the  south  coast  between  Cajjos  Chatte  and 
Gaspe,  in  the  months  of  June,  July,  August,  aud  September,  and  in 
different  years,  and  scarcely  ever  found  the  same.  It  varied  between  one 
and  '2  knots  in  westerly  winds.  It  was  weaker,  often  nearly  insensible, 
In  easterly  winds  ;  and  in  one  instance,  off  Mont  Louis  Kiver,  in  a  calm 
which  was  followed  by  a  strong  breeze  from  the  eastward,  it  could  not 
be  perceived. 

Vessels  beating  up  the  St.  Lawrence  against  westerly  winds  usually 
experience  little  difficulty  in  making  good  way  to  windward,  after  hav- 
ing  weathered  the  west  point  of  Anticosti  and  arrived  on  the  north 
coast ;  because  there  is  seldom  any  current  on  that  side,  and  the  tides, 
although  weak,  are  tolerably  regular.  It  is  in  general  easy  to  beat  from 
the  Seven  Islands  to  Point  de  Monts,  lor  there  the  stream  of  flood  is 
stronger  than  the  ebb ;  the  latter,  as  well  as  the  current,  being  turned 
off  to  the  southward  by  the  point.  There  seems  at  times  also  to  be  an 
eddy  current  there,  sweeping  round  the  great  bay  or  curve  between  the 
above-named  points.  It  sets  off  from  about  Egg  Islet  to  the  southward ; 
and  is  the  probable  cause  why  vessels,  which  shape  a  direct  course  for 
Point  de  Monts  with  a  leading  NW.  wind  off  the  land  at  night,  so  often 
find  themselves  obliged  to  haul  up  for  or  unable  to  fetch  the  light. 

Any  further  remarks  respecting  the  tides  and  currents  will  be  of  a 
more  lo(!al  nature,  and  will,  therefore,  be  best  given  where  the  particu- 
lar places  or  parts  of  the  coast  are  described.  The  object  here  was  to 
give  a  condensed  view  of  the  princi|)al  streams  wliich  mainly  affect  a 
vessel  ill  her  voyage  either  up  or  down  through  the  gulf  anil  estuary. 

Directions  across  the  Oulf.— Lights.— All  the  lights  in  the  gulf 
and  river  St,  Lawrence  are  lighted  on  the  1st  April  and  extinguished 
on  2()th  December,  except  the  lights  on  Bird  Kock  aud  St.  Paul  Is- 
land, which  are  exhibited  until  31st  December. 

All  the  lightshii)s  in  the  river  St.  Lawrence  below  Quebec  leave 
Quebec  each  spring  for  their  stations  as  early  as  ice  will  permit. 

Tlie  Manicouagan  lightship  leases  her  station  for  winter  quarters  on 
the  lOth,  and  ti»e  Eed  Island  lightship  on  the  15th  of  November  an- 
nually. 

All  the  gas  buoys  in  the  river  St.  Lawrence  will  be  set  out  as  soon 
as  possible  after  the  lUh  of  May  each  spring,  and  taken  u|)  as  soon  as 
convenient  after  the  10th  of  November,  when  they  will  be  replaced  by 
wooden  can  buoys. 

All  buoys  in  the  river  St.  Lawrence  below  Quebec  will  be  removed 


CURRENTS — DIRECTIONS. 


13 


10  westward 
a8  has  been 
large  curve, 
itl  is  turned 
ing  a  great 
much  mure 
It  has  been 
Chatte  and 
ber,  and  iu 
l)etween  one 
'  insensible, 
ir,  in  a  calm 
it  couhl  not 

n<ls  usually 
,  after  hav- 
1  the  north 
:1  the  tides, 
0  beat  from 
of  flood  is 
)ing  turned 
so  to  be  an 
>etween  the 
southward; 
;  course  for 
ht,  so  often 
)  light, 
ill  be  of  a 
he  particn-  ' 
ere  was  to 
ly  affect  a 
id  estuary, 
in  the  gulf 
tiiiguished 
t.  Paul  Is- 

ebec  leave 
mit. 

uarters  on 
ember  an- 

>ut  as  soon 
as  soon  as 
placed  by 

e  removed 


after  the  14th  of  November,  excepting  five,  viz:  Those  replacing  the  gas 
buoys  at  each  end  of  the  Beaujeu  Bank  and  at  the  Channel  Patch,  one 
at  the  west  end  of  Middle  Bank  and  one  at  St.  Roch,  East  Point,  in  the 
Traverse,  wliich  will  be  left,  weather  permitting,  until  the  last  ocean 
vessel  has  passed  out. 

Vessels  bound  to  any  of  the  ports  in  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  should 
endeavor  to  make  St.  Paul  Island,  which,  being  of  considerable  elevation 
and  bold  all  around,  may  with  care  and  a  good  lookout,  be  made  at  night, 
or  even  in  fogs,  unless  the  former  be  very  dark  or  the  lattei'  very  thick. 

Caution.— In  a[>proaching  St.  Paul  from  the  SK.  with  northerly 
winds,  the  current  mentioned  at  page  8  as  at  times  coming  from  the 
northward  and  setting  towards  the  shore  of  Cape  Breton,  should  be 
guarded  against  by  attending  to  the  soundings  on  the  bank,  which 
extend  7  or  8  leagues  off  Scatari  Island,  and  off  the  eastern  coast  of 
Cape  Breton  Island  as  far  northward  as  Ingouish,  beyond  which  the 
depth  is  too  great  to  afford  any  guidance.  The  lights,  together  with 
the  soundings,  afford  abundant  guidance  to  vessels  passing  the  eastern 
extremity  of  Cape  Breton  Island.  The  south  coast  of  Newfoundland, 
eastward  of  Cape  Ray,  is  broken,  rocky,  and  dangerous.  The  tides  and 
currents,  being  influenced  by  the  winds,  are  irregular,  whilst  all  south- 
erly and  easterly  winds,  and  often  also  southwesterly  winds,  bring  a 
thick  fog,  which  is  most  dense  near  the  lee  shore.  On  these  accounts 
this  coast  should  not  be  approached,  excepting  with  a  decided  north- 
erly wind  and  clear  weather. 

St.  Paul  to  Bird  Rocks  and  Magdalen  Islands.— After  having 
passed  St.  Paul  Island  vessels  bound  to  Canada  should  endeavor,  if 
the  weather  be  clear,  to  make  the  Bird  Rocks ;  Great  Bird  Rock,  the 
largest  or  southeasternmost,  boars  from  the  north  point  of  St.  Paul  N. 
48°  W.  55  miles. 

There  is  a  deep  channel  between  St.  Paul  and  the  bank  on  which 
Magdalen  Islands  are  situated. 

Following  the  eastern  edge  of  the  Magdalen  Bank  to  the  northward, 
inclining  gradually  to  the  NW.,  regular  soundings  extend  from  28  to 
35  fathoms  over  sand,  stones,  and  broken  shells,  the  latter  depth  being 
where  Great  Bird  Rock  bears  west,  and  when  the  same  rock  bears  S. 
45°  W.,  distant  Vih  miles,  there  will  be  50  fathoms  over  fine  sand  on  the 
edge  of  the  bank,  shoaling  gradually  in  to  24  fathoms  within  one  mile 
of  the  rocks.  In  thick  weather,  which  almost  always  accompanies  east- 
erly and  southerly  winds,  this  bank  is  an  excellent  guide  up  to  Bird 
Bocks,  but  under  such  circumstances  if  the  light  can  not  be  seen  it  will 
be  safer  to  run  along  the  northern  edge  of  the  bank,  taking  care  not  to 
come  into  less  than  40  fathoms  than  to  attempt  to  make  the  rocks. 
When  well  past  them  by  the  reckoning  a  course  can  be  shaped  up  the 
gulf. 

In  northerly  winds  the  weather  is  usually  clear ;  and,  if  the  vessel  be 
far  enough  to  windward,  it  will  be  advisable  to  stand  to  the  westward  and 


'  TMi^smsiMwtJlst  ■nun— tiMi 


u 


GULP    AND    RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


endeavor  to  make  Entry  Island,  taking  care  to  avoid  Doyle  Reef  and 
tlie  sandy  spit  off  the  east  end  of  Magdalen  Islands  by  not  approaching 
tlio  islands  in  that  part  nearer  than  the  depth  of  20  fathoms.  Under 
the  lee  of  these  islands  a  smooth  sea  will  be  found,  sntticient  guid- 
ance by  the  soundings,  and  good  shelter  and  excellent  anchorage  in 
Pleasant  Bay. 

Another  advantage  of  following  this  course  arises  from  the  circum. 
stance  that  the  winds  generally  veer  to  the  SW. ;  so  that,  if  a  vessel 
has  i)a.sse(l  to  leeward  of  Magdalen  Islands  with  northerly  or  NW. 
winds  on  the  starboard  tack,  the  succeeding  SW.  wind  will  enable  her 
to  stand  on  the  opposite  tack  towards  Cape  Gasped. 

Bird  Rocks  to  Anticosti  Island. — In  making  this  part  of  the  voy. 
age  up  the  gulf,  the  frequent  current  from  the  northward,  mentioned  in 
page  1>,  should  be  considered,  and  the  lead  should  be  frequently  hove. 
By  consulting  the  chart  it  will  be  seen  that  there  are  soundings  to  be 
obtained  nearly  all  the  way  upon,  aud  to  southward  of,  a  line  joining 
Bird  Rocks  and  Cape  Gaspe,  whilst  a  few  miles  to  the  northward  of  that 
line  tiiere  is  no  bottom  with  80  fathoms  of  line. 

With  a  fair  wind  the  object  should  be  to  make  the  SW.  point  of  An- 
ticosti marked  by  a  remlinnn  light;  and,  with  westerly  winds,  any  part 
of  the  coast  of  that  island  which  can  be  attained.  The  fixed  light  on 
Heath  Point,  at  the  east  end  of  that  island,  will  render  it  easy  to  make 
the  east  end  of  the  island  at  night,  if  the  weather  be  clear;  and,  if  the 
weather  be  thick,  the  bank  of  soundings,  which  extends  off  it  28  miles 
to  the  southeastward,  may  serve  to  determine  the  vessel's  position  by 
the  lead.  At  the  distance  from  the  island  above  named  the  depth  is  C2 
fathoms,  shoaling  gradually  in  towards  the  island. 

Passage  North  of  Anticosti.— In  the  event  of  a  vessel  being  near 
the  eastern  extremity  of  Anticosti,  and  having  succeeded  in  making 
East  Cape,  or  the  light  on  Heath  Point,  with  a  SW.  wind,  it  will  often 
be  preferable  to  proceed  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  where  there  is 
a  good  channel,  rather  than  to  tack  aud  stand  back  to  the  southward 
and  eastward.  Under  the  lee  of  Anticosti,  she  will  in  this  case  have  a 
smooth  sea,  and  often  also  clear  weather,  whilst  there  is  a  heavy  swell 
and  frequently  a  thick  fog  to  windward  of  it.  She  will,  moreover, 
avoid  the  current  out  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  which  runs  constantly  with 
westerly  winds  between  the  south  coast  and  Anticosti ;  aud  thus  be 
able  at  all  times  to  make  way  to  the  westward  in  moderate  weather. 
At  night,  or  in  foggy  weather,  the  bank  of  soundings  off  the  north 
coast,  and  farther  westward  the  banks  off  Mingau  Islands,  will  safely 
guide  her,  even  although  the  land  should  not  be  visible. 

All  the  way  from  Natashquan  Point  to  the  river  St.  John,  westward 
of  Mingan  Islands,  there  are  banks  of  sand,  gravel,  broker,  ,0'ells,  and 
bits  of  coral  extending  off  the  coast  many  miles.  Off  Mi.igan  Islands 
these  banks  extend  halfway  across  to  Anticosti.  The  depth  of  water 
varies  upon  them ;  to  the  eastward,  or  below  Mingan  Islands,  it  is  in 


DIRECTIONS. 


15 


e  Beef  and 
.pproacliiiig 
ns.  Under 
iuient  giiid- 
icborage  iu 

;Uo  circiiiu. 

if  a  vessel 
ly  or  NW. 

enable  her 

of  the  voy. 
entioiied  in 
lently  liove. 
dings  to  be 
ine  Joining 
rard  of  tbat 

int  of  An- 
8,  any  part 
ed  liglit  on 
sy  to  make 
and,  if  the 
it  28  miles 
►osition  by 
depth  is  G2 

being  near 
in  making 
;  will  often 
jre  there  is 
southward 
sase  have  a 
leavy  swell 

moreover, 
;antly  with 
id  thus  be 
;e  weather. 

the  north 
will  safely 

westward 
.O'ells,  and 
an  Islands 
1  of  water 
is,  it  is  in 


general  between  30  and  50  fathoms;  but  in  sonie  few  places  it  exceeds 
the  latter  depth,  whilst  in  others  there  is  as  little  as  19  fathoms.  I'ro- 
cceding  westward  the  depths  gradually  decrease  to  CO  fathoms  otV  the 
north  point,  where  they  become  irregular  tor  a  few  miles,  varying  from 
50  to  70  fathoms  with  occasional  rocky  bottom,  and  then  deepen  again, 
with  mud  bottom,  farther  to  the  westward. 

In  all  this  deep-water  channel,  with  the  single  exception  which  has 
been  stated,  the  bottom  is,  for  the  most  part,  of  blue  mud.  vSuch  a  re- 
markable difference  in  the  nature  of  the  bottom,  as  well  as  in  the  depth 
of  water,  renders  it  comparatively  easy  to  take  a  vessel  throngli  this 
channel  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather.  But  in  order  to  effect  this  with 
safety  the  vessel  should  be  furnished  with  Massey's  patent  sounding 
machine  .;'<'!  lead,  or  other  similar  instrument,  which  must  be  (reely 
used  as  she  runs  along  the  southern  edge  of  the  banks  of  sand,  gravel, 
and  shells,  sheering  occasionally  to  the  southward  into  the  deep  water 
and  muddy  bottom  to  make  sure  of  not  getting  too  far  to  tiie  north- 
ward. 

The  reefs  off  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands  are  very  dangerous, 
for  there  are  some  deep-water  soundings,  between  50  and  70  fathoms 
inside  the  outer  banks,  which  might  lead  to  a  mistake  if  care  were  not 
taken  to  keep  on  the  southern  edge  of  the  outer  banks. 

Proceeding  westward,  the  channel  contracts  gradually  to  the  nar- 
rowest part,  which  is  between  the  reefs  off  the  north  point  of  Anticosti 
and  oft"  Mingan  Islands,  where  it  is  13i  miles  wide.  To  i)as8  this  safely 
at  night  or  in  foggy  weather,  it  is  necessary  that  the  lead  should  be 
kept  constantly  going  as  the  vessel  runs  along  the  southern  edge  of  the 
bank  oft"  the  Mingan  Islands,  and  she  should  not  be  allowed  to  go  to 
the  northward  into  less  than  30  fathoms  of  water. 

If  the  vessel  should  be  met  by  a  westerly  wind,  down  the  channel,  it 
will  be  attended  with  clear  weather,  and  the  white  cliffs  of  Anticosti, 
which  extend  from  the  east  point  westward  to  opposite  St.  Genevieve, 
will  easily  be  seen.  A  vessel  may  stand  in  without  fear  to  within  a  mile 
or  two  of  this  part  of  the  coast,  which,  with  the  exception  of  the  reefs 
oft'  Fox  Bay,  is  bold  and  free  from  danger.  Farther  westward  the  coast 
is  low  and  shelving,  and  reefs  extend  further  off.  In  the  board  to 
the  northward  at  night,  the  sounding  oa  the  banks  will  show  when  to 
tack. 

Currents. — It  has  been  remarked  already  (page  11)  that,  in  westerly 
winds,  there  is  a  weak  current  down  this  channel,  but  it  is  not  constant 
and  its  rate  seldom  exceeds  half  a  knot.  Sometimes  it  is  imperceptible 
during  the  flood  tide  and  runs  even  the  other  way  on  the  approach  of 
easterly  winds.  Vessels,  however,  should  be  aware  that  on  arriving  off 
the  north  point  of  Anticosti  with  a  west  or  SVV.  wind  this  current  will 
almost  always  be  found  setting  to  the  NE.,  being  turned  off'  into  that 
direction  by  the  west  end  of  the  island.  Couflued  within  a  compara- 
tively narrow  channel,  it  is  here  stronger  than  elsewhere,  running  iu 


i» 


•  — ^u^Vmh;'^ 


\ 


t 


•" 


16 


GULF    AND    RIVER   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


the  ebb  tide,  about  a  knot,  and  in  the  Hood  tide,  half  a  icaot  in  the 
offiug. 

Passage  South  of  AnticostL — Vessels  meeting  with  a  westerly 
wind  in  the  soutli  citannel  Hhould  stand  over  towards  the  island  of  An- 
ticosti  and  make  boards,  off  and  on,  of  9  or  12  miles,  to  avoid  the  cur- 
rent out  of  tlie  St.  Lawrence.  In  beating  between  Oormorant  Point 
and  Soutli  Point,  off  whicli  there  is  a  dangerous  reef,  keep  the  ligbt- 
houMc  on  Heath  Point  open  of  Oormorant  Point. 

Caution. — In  moderate  weather  a  vessel  will  generally  gain  ground 
to  windward  all  along  the  south  coast  of  Anticosti,  but  care  should  be 
taken  to  avoid  being  becalmed,  near  the  shore  between  the  SW.  and 
West  Points,  where  both  the  swell  and  current  set  iusliore,  and  where, 
the  bottom  bei?ig  of  clean  flat  limestone,  an  anchor  wili  not  hold.  It 
is  by  no  means  uncommon  off  this  part  of  the  coast  for  the  flue  weather 
westerly  breeze  of  summer  to  die  away  suddenly  to  a  calm,  so  that  a 
vessel  beating  here  should  stand  off  shore  on  the  ftrat  appearance  of  a 
decrease  of  wind  to  avoid  being  driven  on  shore. 

Having  made  the  SW.  Point,  and  being  4  or  6  miles  off  it,  with  a 
fair  wind,  a  course  should  be  steered  along  the  coast,  so  as  to  pass  8  or 
10  miles  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Cape  Henry  and  West  Point. 
N.  08'3  W.  will  be  a  safe  course  at  night  or  in  thick  weather,  when  the 
lead  should  be  hove  every  hiilf  hour.  With  this  precaution  there  is  no 
danger  of  being  too  near  the  coast,  even  when  the  lights  can  not  be 
seen,  since  there  are  soundings  in  less  than  40  fathoms,  at  a  distance 
varying  from  5  to  3  miles  off  shore  all  the  way  from  SW.  Point  to  the 
west  end  of  the  island. 

Anticosti  to  Point  de  Monts. — When  the  vessel  has  arrived  off 
the  West  Point  of  Anticosti,  with  a  fair  wind  still  continuing,  a  course 
should  be  steered  well  to  the  northward,  especially  with  northerly  winds, 
say  for  about  Egg  Island.  She  will  thus  avoid  the  strength  of  the  cur- 
rent and  the  possibility  of  being  set  over  too  near  the  south  shore  by  its 
acting  on  her  starboard- bow.  When  she  has  run  about  halfway  across 
she  should  haul  more  to  the  southward  so  as  to  insure  clearing  Point  de 
Monts. 

Caution.— If  the  weather  be  thick,  as  it  commonly  is,  with  a  fair  wind 
for  running  up,  great  caution  is  necessary.  In  such  circumstances, 
after  having  run  within  about  15  miles  of  Point  de  Monts  by  the  reck- 
oning, sail  should  be  reduced,  so  as  to  have  the  vessel  under  complete 
command,  and  she  should  be  rounded  to,  and  a  good  deep  cast  with 
Massey's  patent  lead  obtained,  so  as  to  insure  that  she  is  not  to  the 
northeastward  of  the  point,  and  this  should  be  repeated  every  half  hour, 
until  the  light  be  seen,  the  fog  gun  heard,  or  until  it  is  certain  that  it 
is  past. 

If  the  vessel  be  to  the  northeastward  of  Trinity  Bay,  soundings  will 
be  obtained  in  less  than  60  fathoms,  from  4  to  6  miles  off  shore.  Di- 
rectly off  Trinity  Bay,  there  is  the  same  depth  3  miles  off  shore ;  whilst 


DIRECTIONS. 


17 


^DOt  ill  the 

a  westerly 
laud  of  Au- 
oid  the  cur- 
>raiit  Point 
p  the  light- 

aiii  gronad 
)  should  be 
e  SW.  and 
and  where, 
9t  hold.  It 
Ino  weather 
I,  80  that  a 
mrance  of  a 

f  it,  with  a 
to  pass  8  or 
West  Poiut. 
r,  when  the 

there  is  no 
can  not  be 

a  distance 
?oiut  to  the 

arrived  oflF 
ag,  a  course 
lierly  winds, 
1  of  the  cur- 
shore  by  its 
f  way  across 
ng  Point  de 

ii  a  fair  wind 
Bumstauces, 
by  the  reck- 
er  complete 
)  cast  with 
not  to  the 
•y  half  hour, 
'tain  that  it 

ndings  will 

shore.    Di- 

lore ;  whilst 


at  the  same  distance  oft'  Point  de  .Moats,  there  is  no  bottom  at  100  fath- 
cms.  If  the  distance  to  Point  de  Monts  has  been  run  by  the  rockoning 
without  finding  bottom  at  70  fathoms,  it  will  be  almost  c«»rtrti:  at  the 
vessel  is  not  to  the  northward;  but  still,  as  the  effects  of  currents  can 
not  be  exactly  calculate<l  and  reckonings  are  liable  to  error,  it  will  be 
prudent  to  shape  a  course  well  to  the  southward  of  the  i>oint,  till  there 
remains  no  doubt  of  its  having  been  passed. 

In  making  the  light  on  Poiut  de  Monts,  renuMubtT  that  it  is  not  on 
the  extremity  of  the  point,  but  has  been  placed  (it  is  thought  very  im- 
properly) 14  miles  to  the  northeastward,  along  the  coast  towards  Trinity 
Bay. 

The  foregoing  remarks  apply  where  the  object  is  to  nmke  the  light- 
house, or  light,  on  Poiut  de  Monts,  which  should  always  be  attempted 
where  there  is  any  ehaiice  of  success,  because  it  is  extreniely  desirable 
to  obtain  a  fresh  departure  before  running  ui)  the  comparatively  nar- 
row estuary.  But  if. the  weather  be  so  thick  as  to  leave  no  reasonable 
hope  of  succeeding,  or  if  the  wind  be  from  the  southward,  a  (lourse 
should  be  steered  more  to  the  southward,  so  as  to  pass  well  clear  of  the 
point. 

Working  to  Windward.— Vessels  beating  up  against  westerly 
winds  should  stand  over  to  the  northward,  as  soon  as  they  can  weather 
Anticosti,  unless  the  i)arometer,  or  other  indications,  render  it  probable 
that  the  wind  will  veer  to  the  southward,  louring  the  Hood  tides,  make 
short  boards  off"  ami  on  the  north  coast,  to  take  advantage  of  it,  for  it 
runs  strongest  inshore.  During  the  el)b,  keep  farther  oil'  the  land,  for 
that  tide  svlso  runs  strongest  near  the  shore.  The  tides,  in  general,  are 
weak  along  this  coast,  and  a  vessel  will  always  make  way  to  windward 
in  moderate  weather. 

From  the  Seven  Islands  to  Point  de  Monts  is,  in  general,  the  easiest 
part  of  the  passage,  for  the  westerly  wind,  which,  in  this  i>art,  is  the 
most  common,  is  oft'  the  land,  so  that  a  vessel  can  frequently  fetch  up 
to  Point  de  Monts  in  smooth  water,  particularly  at  night,  when  the  wind 
in  tine  weather  generally  veers  a  point  or  two  to  the  northward.  She 
will  also  have  the  beneftt  of  the  flood  tide,  whilst  the  ebb,  being  turned 
oft' by  Poiut  de  Monts,  is  scarely  felt. 

If  it  blow  fresh,  and  the  flood  be  nearly  done  on  arriving  near  Point 
de  Monts,  there  will  be  no  use  attempting  to  beat  roun<l  it  till  next  tide, 
and  then  only  in  fine  weather.  In  this  case.  Trinity  Bay,  where  with 
westerly  winds  is  a  good  anchorage  with  moderate  depth  of  water,  good 
ground,  and  plenty  of  room  to  get  under  way. 

Point  de  Monts  to  Bicquette  Island. — Prom  the  south  extremity 
of  Point  de  Monts,  the  lighthouse  on  the  north  side  of  Bicquette  Island 
bears  S.  50°  VV.  80  miles,  and  Manicou«gan  lightvessel  S.  Gio  VV.  38 
miles ;  but  as  this  great  shoal  extends  towards  English  Bay,  its  NE.  end 
is  only  28  miles  distant  from  Point  de  Monts. 
5489 2 


18 


OULF    AND    RIVKR    8T.    LAWRENCK. 


\ 


^ 


! 


Currents.— After  tukiiig  adopartmo  from  Point  de  Monts,  the  course 

to  bo  Htweri'tl  must  viiry  umU'r  difturout  circumstances  of  wind  and  tide. 

Tlic  downward  current  is  not  only  turned  oil'  to  tiio  soutliward  by  I'oint 

de  Monts,  but  tlie  Mauicoua(jaii  and  Bersimis  Points  also  protluce  tlie 

same  effect,  althoufjii  in  a  less  degree,  during  llio  ebbtide;  to  wliicli 

must  be  added  tlie  streams  out  of  the  large  rivers  ManicouaRan,  Outiirde* 

and  Hersimis.     During  the  Hood  tide,  the  streams  out  of  these  rivers 

cease,  the  general  current  is  checked  in  the  ottlng,  whilst  in-shore, 

withiu  a  few  miles  of  the  north  coast,  a  stream  of  flood  will  be  found. 

A  vessel  taking  her  departure  fronj  Point  de  Monts  with  a  whole  ebb 

tide  before  her  is   therefore  very  differently  circumstanced  from  one 

which  does  the  same  at  the  commencement  of  the  flood,  and  must 

reckon  ui)ou  being  set  over  towards  the  south  coast  much  faster  in  the 

former  than  in  the  latter  case. 

Directions  will  first  be  given  for  a  fair  wind,  and  afterwards  for  beat- 
ing winds. 

Directions  up  the  Estuary. — Having  made  the  light  on  Point  de 
Monts,  and  being  3  or  4  miles  oft'  it  to  the  southward,  nitb  the  nsual 
easterly  winds,  nearly  or  right  up  the  estuary,  steer  S.  .''ii.^  W.  until 
nearly  abreast  the  Manicouagan  light  vessel,  then  keep  half  a  point 
more  to  the  southward,  S.  47°  W.  These  are  safe  courses  with  either 
ebb  or  flood,  and  if  the  vessel  has  left  Point  de  Monts  at  or  near  the 
commencement  of  the  ebb  tide,  will  usually  bring  her  into  soundings 
oft"  Metis,  where  .lO  fathoms  over  sandy  bottom  will  be  found  3  miles  oft' 
shore,  and  50  fathoms  5  miles  oft'  shore,  and  on  the  edge  of  the  bank. 

If,  on  the  contrar/,  the  vessel  has  left  J';:ut  da  Monts  early  on  the 
flood,  she  will  probably  be  farther  to  the  northward  ;  we  say,  probably, 
because  the  strength  of  the  current  is  too  uncertain  to  allow  of  saying 
that  she  positively  will  be  so.  However,  the  degree  of  uncertainty, 
which  the  irregular  rate  of  current  gives  rise  to,  must  be  met  by  the 
use  of  the  lead.  If,  therefore,  the  weather  be  thick,  and  the  land  not 
seen,  round-to  in  time,  i)articularly  if  the  vessel  has  had  the  ebb  tide 
against  her,  and  get  a  cast  of  the  lead,  to  make  sure  that  she  has  not 
been  set  too  near  the  south  coast. 

If  no  bottom  be  found  at  60  fathoms,  the  S.  47°  W.  course  may  be 
continued  until  the  vessel  is  up  as  high  as  Metis  by  the  reckoning,  then 
let  soundings  again  be  tried  for,  and  if  still  without  finding  bottom 
haul  in  gradually  to  the  southward,  under  easy  sail,  and  with  the  deep- 
sea  lead  going,  ao  as  to  endeavor  to  strike  soundings  on  the  bank  oft' 
Father  Point,  which  may  be  accomplished  safely,  since  the  bank  in  that 
part  extends  several  miles  oft'  shore. 

To  Pass  Bicquette  Island. — The  revolving  light  on  Bicquette  Island 
will  now  be  distant  about  15  miles  to  the  SW.,  and  visible  in  clear 
weather ;  but  if  it  be  foggy,  and  the  light  not  seen,  proceed  as  follows, 
attending  to  the  fog  whistle:  Run  along  the  northern  edge  of  the  bank 
of  soundings,  with  the  lead  going,  taking  particular  care  not  to  go  to 


DIHECTIONH — PILOTS. 


1* 


•f-'rait^'  ■   wwi^ 


s,  the  (lourne 
iiuliin*!  tide, 
ird  by  I'oiiit 

prudiK'u  the 
le;  to  wliich 
aii,Oiitiir(le> 

tliese  rivers 
il8t  iii-Hhore, 
ill  be  t'oiiiid. 

a  whol*-!  ebb 
od  IVuiii  one 
>d,  and  inuHt 

faster  in  the 

irds  for  beat- 
on  Point  de 
ith  the  usual 
.'io-^  w.  until 
half  a  point 
38  with  either 
It  or  near  the 
ito  soundings 
nd  3  miles  off 
)f  the  bank. 

early  on  the 
lay,  probably, 
low  of  saying 
'  uncertainty, 
(i  met  by  the 
the  land  not 
the  ebb  tide 
,t  she  has  not 

jourse  may  be 
ickoning,  then 
iiding  bottom 
ivitli  the  deep- 
1  the  bank  off 
a  bank  in  that 

jquette  Island 
isible  in  clear 
ted  as  follows, 
^e  of  the  bank 
e  not  to  go  to 


the  southward  into  less  tlian  30  fathoms.  When  it  is  judged  that  the 
vessel  is  approaching  near  Hicquetto,  having  passed  Marnaby  ishind, 
haul  out  a  little  to  the  northward  until  siie  is  out  of  soundings,  anil 
then  steer  S.  fiP  VV.,  still  heaving  the  lead,  and  having  tiie  vessel  under 
moderate  sail  for  the  purpose  of  getting  bottom,  till  certain  that  she  is 
well  above  the  NW.  reef  of  Biccpiette.  If  soundings  are  striuik  at  all, 
whilst  running  jiast  this  dangerous  island,  on  which  many  vessels  have 
been  wrecked,  the  vessel  must  be  hauled  off"  immediately  to  the  north- 
ward out  of  soundings,  and  then  steer  as  before.  Two  miles  north  of 
Blccpiette  there  are  30  fathoms,  and  only  1\  miles  north  of  the  NW. 
reef  there  is  the  same  depth,  with  sandy  bottom.  Farther  otf  no  bottom 
will  be  found  at  fiO  or  «0  fatlioms.  lioth  the  island  and  reef  are  bold  to 
the  northward,  having  12  fathoms  close  to  them. 

When  it  is  quite  certain  the  vessel  is  past  Hicquette  and  its  reefs, 
haul  in  to  the  southward  by  degrees,  till  the  edge  of  the  bank  is  gained 
again,  and  keep  it  up  to  Green  Island  reef. 

It  would  not  be  prudent  for  vessels,  without  a  pilot,  to  attempt  run- 
ning inside  of  Bic  Island  in  foggy  weather,  unless  well  acquainted.  If, 
however,  it  be  necessary  to  do  so,  for  'the  purpose  of  anchoring,  see 
directions  for  that  island. 

Pilots. — Pilots  for  the  St.  Lawrence  cruise  in  the^r  schooners  in  the 
entrance  of  the  river,  and  during  the  day  these  vessels  carry  a  white 
and  red  ilag  (upper  half  white,  lower  half  red) ;  by  night  two  lights 
vertically,  the  upper  light  white,  the  lower  re<l.  Their  cruising  ground 
is  comprised  in  four  stations,  namely.  Pilot  Station  No.  1,  between  Fa. 
ther  Point  and  Barnaby  Island  on  the  south,  and  Jeremy  Islands  and 
Cape  Colombier  on  the  north ;  Pilot  Station  No.  2,  between  Barnaby 
Island  and  Bic  Island  on  the  south,  and  Cape  Colombier  and  Port  Neufr 
on  the  north ;  Pilot  Station  No.  3,  between  Bic  Island  and  the  Itazades 
on  the  south,  and  Port  Neuf  and  the  Escoumains  Islands  on  the  north ; 
Pilot  Station  No.  4,  between  Kazades  and  Green  Island. 

Many  of  the  pilots  live  on  Father  Point. 

In  a  foggy  night  a  tolerably  correct  opinion  may  be  formed  whether 
the  vessel  be  up  to  Father  Point  or  not,  for  an  inspection  of  the  chart 
will  show  that  the  soundings  shoal  more  gradually  to  the  southward 
there  than  they  do  farther  to  the  eastward.  And  if  the  vessel  be  hove 
to,  in  10  or  11  fathoms,  low  water,  with  her  head  off"  shore,  a  gun  or 
two  will  sometimes  bring  oft'  a  pilot. 

From  Point  de  Monts  with  Southerly  Winds.— We  have  hith- 
erto been  speaking  of  the  case  when  vessels  are  running  up  with  east, 
erly  winds  and  thick  weather ;  but  a  second  case  is  when  the  wind  is 
from  the  southward ;  then  the  direct  course,  S.  50°  W.,  may  be  steered, 
if  the  vessel  be,  as  before,  close  off  Point  de  Monts,  or  S.  56<^  W.  if  she 
be  nearer  the  south  coast ;  allowing  still  for  the  set  of  the  current  to  the 
southward,  according  to  the  tide,  and  sounding  in  time  if  the  land  be 
not  in  sight.    Whenever  the  weather  is  foggy,  and  the  land  can  not  be 


!;i 


'r .' 


iJ  ' 


,  '•■, 


t>  1  ' 


S» 


20 


GULF    AND    KIVKU    8T.    LAWKKNCE. 


seen,  t\w  oUJwit  should  alwiiyH  h«  to  Htriko  tlio  bunk  of  houiuUiiks  along 
tlio  Noiitli  <!oiiHt  about  M««tiM,  or  Katlier  Point  at  farthoMt,  and  then  fol- 
low it  as  a  jjiiitle  to  the  w«Htwanl. 

With  Northerly  Winds.— A  tliinl  inwo,  of  fiJMiuent  occnrrcnce  in 
th«  autiuiui,  is  winMi  tliore  is  a  fnssh  noithorly  wind.  Tliii  weather  is 
then  invariiil)ly  elear,  and,  aH  tlie  land  can  l»e  neen,  there  is  no  danger 
of  getting  on  shore  witli  a  good  look  out;  but  tlie  Htrengtii  of  llie  cur- 
rent to  tlte  Hoiitliwanl  in  lucreaHed  by  thin  wind,  and  therefore  the  v««- 
sel  niUMt  be  kept  well  to  the  northward,  to  prevent  l>eing  set  over  to  the 
lee  HJiore,  being  in  consecpience  ol»iigo<l  to  tack  (upon  tlie  wind  veering 
a  point  or  two  to  the  westward)  an<l  Htand  all  the  way  bacjk  again. 

Suppo-sing  the  veMsel  to  be  in  the  .same  position  as  before,  ,i  or  4  miles 
to  the  s<»ntiiward  of  Point  de  .Moiits,  she  may  fearlessly  steer  8.05^  VV. 
for  the  first  'JO  miles,  or  as  long  as  tlie  light  is  seen.  Take  tlie  bearing 
of  the  light  every  half  hour,  and  lay  it  down  on  tlie  chart,  in  order  that 
the  effect  of  the  current  may  be  Been ;  take  care  not  to  bring  the  light 
to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  n;P  B,,  as  in  that  case  the  vessel  would  be 
set  too  near  Manicouagan  Shoals.  Abreast  Manicouagan,  if  the  light- 
vessel  should  be  out  of  positi(ni,  luff  up  in  the  wind,  and  get  a  deep  cast 
of  the  lead,  for  although  these  shoals  are  steep-to  on  their  east  side, 
and  also  to  the  westward  of  Manicouagan  Point,  yet  there  are  soundings 
off' their  south  point.  When  Manicouagan  Point  bears  N.  25°  VV.  the 
depths  will  be  from  50  to  (50  fathoms,  at  the  distancj;  of  5^  miles  off 
shore,  and  from  30  to  40  fathoms  at  4  miles  oil'  shore,  the  bottom  being 
of  very  tine  sand.  In  the  first  case,  she  will  bo  li^  miles  off'  the  south 
point  of  the  shoals,  and  in  the  latter  case;  only  1^  miles. 

When  past  these  dangerous  and  extensive  shoals,  the  south  point  of 
which  extends  2^  miles  off  a  low  point  of  the  same  name,  which  can 
seldom  be  clearly  distinguished  at  night  in  consequence  of  the  higher 
land  behind  it,  a  vessel  may  haul  up  well  under  the  north  shore,  coming 
no  nearer  than  3  miles,  and  taking  care  to  avoid  the  shoal  off  Bersimis 
Point,  which  extends  nearly  li  miles  off  a  low  point,  also  difficult  to  be 
seen  at  night. 

After  passing  Mille  Vaches  Point  the  north  coast  is  bold  and  without 
anchorage  all  the  way  to  within  3  miles  of  the  Saguenay  River. 

In  running  up  to  Green  Island,  after  passing  the  NW.  reef  of  Bic- 
quette,  a  S.  4!)<^  W.  course  will,  in  general,  take  a  vessel  along  the  edgeof 
the  bank  as  far  as  Razades  islets  ;  but  above  those  islets  both  flood  and 
ebb  .set  to  the  SE.,  and  render  it  necessary  to  steer  more  to  the  west- 
ward, with  a  scant  northerly  wind.  But  the  lead  and  a  reference  to  the 
soundings  in  the  chart  are  the  only  sure  guides.  With  an  easterly 
wind  the  fog  will  seldom  be  so  thick  as  to  prevent  either  the  Kazades, 
Basque,  or  Apple  islands  from  being  seen  in  the  daytime.  They  may 
be  safely  ai>proached  by  the  lead,  and  an  attempt  should  be  made  to 
make  the  two  last,  especially  Ai)ple  Island,  which  is  bold-toon  the  north 
side,  in  order  that  the  position  of  the  vessel  may  be  exactly  ascer- 


'*'WWa!»5K>JE»Sfl«B.« 


,  ,MawiMMwa>|JWIBMi'.aWB«P' 


DIKIU 'TION8. 


SI 


idiiiKa  liloiig 
kiul  then  t'ol- 

(•(Mirreiicp  In 
Li  weather  Is 
H  no  (laiiitur 
li  of  the  liiir- 
fort'  tlio  v««- 
itnvtT  to  tlio 
iviiul  vooring 
V  a^aiii. 
,  3  or  4  miles 
KT  8.  06^  VV. 
i  tlie  bearing 
ill  onl«'r  tlirtt 
liiiK  tlie  liRlit 
Hsel  would  be 
I,  if  the  li^'ht- 
I't  a  ileep  (iast 
eir  east  side, 
iro  soiindingB 
N.  2'>°  W.  the 
f  5A  miles  off 
bottom  being 
off  the  south 

Houth  j)ointof 

le,  which  can 

of  the  hijjher 

bore,  coming 

off  Bersimis 

lilHcult  to  be 

and  withoat 
iiver. 

reef  of  Bic- 
(ug  theedgoof 
both  tlood  and 
re  to  the  west- 
ference  to  the 
h  an  easterly 

the  Kazades, 
e.  They  may 
Id  be  made  to 
0  on  the  north 
exactly  ascer- 


rained  before  hauling  out  into  det^p  water  for  the  luirpose  of  eloaring 
the  ilnngeroiiH  (heen  Islaiiil  Iteef.  In  the  eireuniHtances  we  are  hu|)> 
posing,  of  an  easterly  wind  with  fog  in  the  daytime,  it  is  much  nxue 
safe  to  attempt  to  make  Apple  Island  than  the  lighthouse,  since  a  vessel 
can  appro;i<-li  within  less  than  4(H)  yards  of  the  former,  but  would  be 
ashore  befun  -the  saw  the  latter  if  the  fog  were  thick,  since  the  reef 
exteiuls  nearly  1^  miles  to  the  northeastward  of  it. 

Having su<;ceeded  in  making  Apple  Island,  the  vohscI  may  be  sheered 
out  to  the  eilge  of  the  bank  of  soundings,  and  us  the  distance  is  short, 
't  is  easy  tojudge  when  she  is  coming  near  the  ;vef,  taking,  of  course, 
^he  tide  into  account,  whether  it  be  Hood  or  ebb,  ami  keeping  the  lead 
constantly  going.  Then,  if  the  lighthouse  be  not  seen,  sheer  out  to  the 
northward  into  more  than  .'tU  fatlioms  water,  and  shape  a  course  up  to> 
wards  the  Brandy  Pots,  according  to  the  tide. 

If  the  lighthouse  be  seen,  or  the  light  at  night,  there  is  still  less  diill- 
culty  ill  avoiding  the  reef  and  regulating  the  (!ourse  afterwards,  pro- 
vided the  chart  be  consulted,  the  lead  used,  and  the  tide  considered. 

But  Green  Island  Heef  is  extremely  dangerous,  and  is  rendered 
doubly  so  by  the  strong  tides  whi<th  set  upon  it,  and  which  produce 
breaking  ripples  that  try  the  nerves  of  strangers  during  a  dark  night 
or  foggy  weather.  Therefore,  in  a  strong  easterly  gale,  dark  night,  fog, 
or  snow  so  thick  that  there  is  little  chance  of  seeing  the  light,  the  at- 
tempt  to  run  through  between  Ked  and  Green  islands  will  be  attended 
with  great  risk,  especially  during  the  ebb  tide,  which,  coming  from  be- 
tween Hare  Island  Keef  and  Bed  Islet,  sets  over  towards  the  Green 
Island  Keef  at  the  rate  of  5  knots.  It  requires  an  experienced  ])ilot  to 
take  a  vessel  safely  through  this  dangerous  jiassnge  under  these  circum- 
stances; it  will  therefore  be  prudent,  in  the  case  of  a  vessel  approach- 
ing fiic,  in  such  weather,  towards  the  close  of  the  day  and  without  a 
pilot,  rather  to  heave  to,  or  stand  on  and  off  the  south  bank,  than  run 
this  risk,  although  there  may  be  sonie  danger  in  so  doing  from  other  ves- 
sels running  up. 

If  the  soundings  about  Bic  be  well  known,  or  that  island  or  Bicquette 
has  been  seen  the  safest  pian  would  be  to  run  under  the  lee  and  anchor 
to  the  westward  of  them  in  from  8  to  10  fathoms  low  water  (page  119), 
where  the  holding  ground  in  excellent  and  the  vessel  would  ride  in 
safety  till  daylight.  Even  as  far  as  G  or  7  miles  to  the  westward  of  these 
islands,  in  from  12  to  13  fathovns  at  low  water,  the  Oulnare  rode  out  a 
heavy  breeze  from  the  eastward,  the  sea,  although  considerable,  being 
nothiu,<;  in  comparison  with  that  which  was  running  at  the  same  time 
in  the  deep  water  outside  of  her  and  oft"  the  bank. 

Working  from  Point  de  Monts  to  Green  Island,  against  westerly 
winds,  which  are  almost  always  accompanied  with  clear  weather,  there 
is  little  difficulty,  with  the  assistance  of  the  charts,  other  than  that 
which  arises  from  the  set  of  the  tides  and  currents. 

It  requires  a  tolerably  good  sailing  vessel  and  a  flood  tide  to  beat 


22 


GULF    AND    KIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


i    i 


past  Point  de  Monts  against  a  foul  wind,  but  short  boards  round  the 
point  and  along  the  north  coast  up  to  Cape  St.  Nicholas  will  most  read- 
ily succeed.  It  is  not,  however,  advisable  to  keep  this  shore  close  aboard 
mnch  farther  to  the  westward,  lest  the  wind  should  tall  to  a  calm,  for 
there  is  a  strong  indraught  towards  the  mouth  of  Manicouagan  Kiver 
during  the  flood  tide;  and  if  an  easterly  wind  should  chance  to  spring 
up,  after  the  vessel  had  been  drifted  in  near  the  mouth  of  Englis:!  Bay, 
it  might  be  difficult  to  beat  out,  or  to  weather  the  eastern  side  of  the 
Manicouagan  Shoals.  The  light  on  Point  de  Monts  can  not  be  seen  on 
any  bearing  to  the  southward  of  N.  07°  E.,  being  intercepted  by  the 
high  land  to  the  westward  of  it ;  and  when  it  disappears  a  vessel  oft 
Godbout  River  will  be  only  one  mile  from  the  bar,  or  off  Cape  St. 
Nicholas  little  more  than  2  miles  off  shore ;  so  that  it  is  a  safe  rule,  in 
standing  in  towards  the  coast  at  night,  to  tack  as  soon  as  the  light 

bears  N.  60°  E. 

Whpn  the  ebb  makes,  stretch  over  to  the  southward  into  the  middle 
of  the  estuary,  where  that  tide  is  less  strong  than  near  either  shore, 
but  do  not  go  farther  to  the  southward,  and  be  back  again  at  the  north 
coast  at  the  return  of  flood. 

The  best  time  to  get  past  Point  de  Monts,  when  fine  weather  and 
westerly  winds  prevail,  is  at  night,  or  in  the  first  hours  of  the  morning, 
for  then  vessels  are  often  assisted  by  a  northerly  land  wind.  If  it  has 
blown  fresh  from  the  westward  during  the  preceding  day  a  heavy  head 
sea  may  be  expected  off  the  pitch  of  tha  point ;  the  flood  from  along  the 
land  in  the  direction  of  the  Seven  Islands  meeting  the  downward  cur- 
rent off  the  point  assists  in  causing  this. 

If,  after  passing  Point  de  Monts  in  the  morning,  with  a  northerly  land 
wind,  there  are  signs  of  itS  dying  away,  or  veering  to  the  westward  as 
the  day  advances,  continue  the  board  to  the  southward  and  westward, 
instead  of  tacking  to  keep  the  north  land  on  board,  as  directed  when 
the  wind  is  settled  right  down  ;  for  the  land  wind  of  the  night  will  pro- 
bably be  succeeded  by  the  flne-weather  day  wind,  which  usually  be- 
comes a  steady  breeze  about  9  a.  m.,  after  commencing  at  SW.,  and 
thus  affords  an  advantageous  board  towards  the  north  coast. 

In  the  fine  weather  of  the  summer  the  wind  will  probably  veer  by 
degrees  during  the  day  back  to  west,  thus  ottering  another  good  board 
to  the  south  westward.  Pilots  and  others,  who  are  experienced  in  read- 
ing the  indications  of  the  winds  and  weather,  frequently  gain  more 
ground  to  the  westward  by  calculating  upon  these  probable  changes  of 
the  wind  than  by  keeping  on  the  north  shore  out  of  the  current 

With  the  exception  of  the  low  points  of  Manicouagan,  Bersimis,  and 
Mille  Vaches,  the  land  can  in  general  be  plainly  seen  at  night  during 
the  continuance  of  westerly  winds ;  and  where  its  features  are  suifi- 
ciently  remarkable,  there  will  be  little  difficulty  in  making  it  out. 
Mount  Camille,  especially  being  an  isolated  mountain,  2,036  feet  above 
high-water  matk,  can  easily  be  distinguished,  as  well  as  the  summit  of 


\ 


mimeiiM>.i.%jmi)mmmummMm 


l^S^" 


.•as^i:ivss^ft'iTf-.te'. 


DIRECTIONS. 


33 


rds  round  the 
vill  most  read- 
•e  close  aboard 

to  a  calm,  for 
jouagan  Kiver 
ance  to  spring 
t  English  Bay, 
5rn  side  of  the 
not  be  seen  on 
cepted  by  the 
irs  a  vessel  oft 
r  off  Cape  St. 

a  safe  rule,  in 
)u  as  the  light 

nto  the  middle 
ir  either  shore, 
in  at  the  north 

le  weather  and 
if  the  morning, 
ind.  If  it  has 
J  a  heavy  head 
from  along  the 
downward  cur- 

I  northerly  land 
ie  westward  as 
and  westward, 

directed  when 
)  night  will  pro- 
lich  usually  be- 
ng  at  SW.,  and 
coast. 

•obably  veer  by 
her  good  board 
rienced  in  read- 
lutly  gain  more 
)able  changes  of 
3  current. 
n,  Bersimis,  and 
at  night  during 
itures  are  suifl- 

making  it  out. 
2,036  feet  above 
IS  the  summit  of 


the  high  land  of  Bic,  1,234  feet  high.  Their  beatings  will  often  be  of 
great  service  to  vessels  in  clear  nights,  and  will  show  when  tliey  are 
high  enough  up  to  fetch  Father  Point. 

On  arriving  ott"  Father  Point,  or  anywhere  between  it  and  Bic,  if  the 
flood  be  done  and  the  wind  be  ligiit  it  will  hh  better  to  anchor  on  the  bank 
of  soundings,  weighing  again,  if  there  be  a  breeze,  in  suflicient  time  to 
stand  over  and  meet  the  lirst  of  the  flood  on  the  north  sliore.  By  this 
mode  of  proceeding  vessels  will  gain  much  more  ground  to  the  west- 
ward than  by  remaining  on  the  south  shore,  for  although  there  be  a 
weak  stream  of  flood  upon  the  bank  of  soundings  from  Father  Point  to 
the  Island  of  Bic,  yet  there  is  little  above  that  island,  and  none  after 
the  first  quarter  flood,  excepting  so  close  inshore  as  to  be  useless  to 
large  vessels. 

From  the  Bay  of  Mille  Vaches  to  within  3  miles  of  the  entrance  of 
the  Saguenay  River,  with  the  exception  of  a  shoal  extending  a  short 
distance  offshore  from  the  bay  next  westward  of  Cape  Bondesir,  the 
coast  is  moderately  high  and  very  bold,  the  flood  strong,  and  the  ebb 
comparatively  weak.  Vessels  should,  therefore,  make  short  boards 
along  this  shore  until  up  to  Bergeron  Coves,  and  then  stretcli  over  to 
the  anchorage  under  Green  Island  Reef,  to  wait  for  the  next  flood  ;  for 
it  will  retiuire  a  whole  tide,  even  with  a  good  working  breeze,  and  a  fair 
sailing  merchant  vessel,  to  beat  through  between  Green  Island  and 
Red  Islet,  and  reach  good  anchorage  above,  before  the  ebb  makes. 

Red  Islet  Bank  is,  however,  very  dangerous,  and  the  first  of  the  flood 
sets  strongly  over  it,  in  a  direction  from  Bergeron  Coves  towards  Green 
Island.  The  ebb  out  of  the  Saguenay  also  sets  upon  it,  so  that  a  stran- 
ger should  not  make  too  free  with  it.  If  a  vessel  can  not  fetch  the 
anchorage  under  Green  Island  Reef,  she  may  anchor  anywhere,  in  fine 
weather,  along  the  south  bank  between  Bic  and  Green  Island,  and  will 
have  good  ground  in  12  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  plenty  of  room  to 
get  under  weigh. 

In  coming  up  with  a  NW.  wind,  the  north  shore  should  be  kept  close 
aboard  until  up  to  Bergeron,  and  if  it  be  flood  tide,  the  vessel  may  pass 
either  northward  or  southwanl  of  Red  Islet,  as  may  be  preferred,  but 
the  former  passage  should  not  be  attempted  with  this  wind  during  the 
ebb,  nor  yet  the  other,  except  by  those  who  are  well  acquainted  with 
the  set  of  the  tides. 

Although  the  passage  to  the  northward  of  Red  Islet  is  the  quickest, 
there  being  a  much  stronger  stream  of  flood  in  that  channel,  yet  it  can 
not  by  any  means  be  recommended;  on  the  contrary,  it  should  never 
be  attempted  unless  the  breeze  appears  certain  to  continue,  for  if  it  fell 
calm  the  vessel  would  run  great  risk  of  being  drawn  in  by  the  stream 
of  flood  among  the  ?langerou8  shoals  off  the  mouth  of  the  Saguenay,  or 
being  set  down  upon  Red  Islet  Bank  when  the  rapid  ebb  made  out  of 
that  river,  which  is  so  strong  and  the  water  so  deep  that  no  anchor 
would  hold.  1 


«^*^?^^^^?^r!^?!!rr*~  "" " ' 


24 


GULF   AND    RIVER    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


!    V 


To  pass  to  the  southward  of  Red  Islet  with  the  same  wind,  haul  round 
the  east  end  of  the  reef,  and  as  close  to  the  southward  of  it  as  is  prudent, 
coming  no  nearer  than  a  depth  of  20  fathoms  until  past  the  islet.  To 
those  who  are  well  acquainted  both  with  the  soundings  and  set  of  the 
tides  it  maybe  desirable  to  keep  closer  in  attemptiug  the  passage  with 
an  ebb  tide  but  it  can  not  be  recommended  to  strangers. 

Directions  down  the  Estuary  and  O-ulf.— For  the  return  voyage 
down  the  estuary  and  gulf  little  or  no  instruction  seems  necessary  as 
long  as  the  wind  remains  fair  and  the  weather  clear,  beyond  what  may 
be  gathered  Irom  the  charts  and  the  preceding  remarks.  But  where 
vessels  are  met  by  easterly  winds  and  thick  weather  anywhere  above 
Point  de  Monts,  great  caution,  attention  to  the  soundings  and  set  of 
the  tides  and  currents,  become  necessary  to  insure  safety,  particularly 
during  the  long  nights  and  wild  weather  in  the  fall  of  the  year. 

Vessels  beating  down  the  St.  Lawrence  usually  stop  at  the  Brandy 
Pots  for  a  fair  wind.  But  supposing,  after  they  have  passed  Greeu 
Island,  that  the  fair  wind  fails,  and  they  are  met  with  an  easterly  wind 
before  they  have  arrived  near  the  Island  of  Bic,  they  should,  in  that 
case,  run  up  again  to  the  Brandy  Pots,  especially  if  late,  or  very  early 
in  the  navigable  season ;  for  all  that  they  will  gain  by  beating  about  in 
thick  weather,  probably  for  several  days  and  nights  in  succession,  will 
not  be  worth  the  risk.  But  if  they  have  reached  farenough  down  at 
the  commencement  of  the  adverse  wind,  the  Island  of  Bic  aifords  good 
shelter  and  anchorage,  which  should  be  sought  in  time,  before  ti«e  fog 
commences. 

There  is  no  other  anchorage  which  can  be  recommended  lower  down 
nearer  than  the  Seven  Islands,  and  after  that  Gasp^.  There  are  other 
places,  which  will  be  mentioned  hereafter,  in  some  of  which  vessels  ride 
for  taking  in  timber;  but  such  places  are  not  fit  for  occasional  anchor- 
ages, or  for  a  heavy  laden  ship  to  run  for  on  an  emergency. 

In  a  vessel  beating  down,  the  south  bank  should  be  the  guide  in  thick 
weather  or  at  night.  She  should  tack  from  it,  after  striking  soundings 
on  its  edge,  and  should  not  stand  to  the  northward  more  than  lialf-chan- 
nel  over  in  any  part ;  thus  keeping  in  the  strength  of  the  downward 
current,  and  avoiding  the  possibility  of  accident  from  the  shoals  of  the 
north  coast,  which  being  very  steep,  and  affording  little  or  no  warning 
by  the  lead,  have  proved  fatal  to  many  vessels  under  these  circuni. 
stances. 

Effects  of  Tides. — It  will  be  almost  always  seen,  when  the  vessel 
comes  upon  the  south  bank  of  soundings,  by  there  being  so  much  less 
sea  there  than  in  the  deep  water,  and  strength  of  the  weather  current, 
outside;  a  strong  ripple  will  be  observed  at  the  edge  of  the  bank  dur- 
ing the  flood  tide. 

In  the  board  from  near  Blcquette,  during  the  flood  tide,  the  vessel 
will  go  to  the  northward  rather  faster  than  to  the  southward  bt«ck  again, 
whilst  in  the  ebb  the  contra   •  will  be  the  case.    But  ^bove  Razade 


iBtim-iimnimltigamfT: 


■  'i.Jf.KUM■.%'l!":J^ 


'i^^:,-:,-^i^'.r  ;>  ■■  .-im  -i^  i. 


DIRECTIONS. 


m 


,  buul  rouud 
J  is  prudent, 
le  islet.  To 
(I  set  of  the 
assage  with 

turn  voyage 
necessary  as 
d  what  may 
But  where 
Inhere  above 
3  and  set  of 
particularly 
year. 

the  Brandy 
issed  Green 
isterly  wind 
»uld,  in  that 
>r  very  early 
ing  about  in 
icessiou,  will 
igh  down  at 
aObrds  good 
Bfore  tiie  fog 

lower  down 
sre  are  other 

vessels  ride 
onal  auchor- 

uide  in  thick 
ig  soundings 
m  iialf-chan- 
le  downward 
shoals  of  the 
•  no  warning 
hese  circuni. 

m  the  vessel 
so  much  less 
ther  current, 
lie  bank  dur- 

le,  the  vessel 
I  buck  .again, 
3ove  Razade 


Islets  she  will  go  much  faster  lo  the  southward  than  to  the  northward 
in  both  tides.  Lower  down  the  estuary,  and  as  far  down  as  (Jape  3l. 
Anne,  she  will  generally  go  faster  to  the  southward  than  to  the  north- 
ward during  the  ebb  tide;  whilst  in  the  Hood  an  iuilraft  into  the  rivers 
will  be  felt  on  approaching  near  the  north  coast  from  Bersimis  Point 
nearly  down  to  Cape  St.  Nicholas.  The  least  reflection  upon  what  has 
been  previously  said  of  the  set  of  the  tides  and  currents  will  account  for 
these  eftects. 

Caution. — In  a  vessel  beating  down  in  a  dark  night  or  thick  weather 
there  is  no  safety  unless  the  lead  be  kept  constantly*  going;  when  she 
M  approaching  the  south  coast,  in  the  board  to  the  southward,  sail  should 
be  sufficiently  reduced  for  soundings  to  be  easily  obtained  and  every- 
thing iu  readiness  to  tack  or  veer  at  the  shortest  notice.  These  pre- 
cautions become  the  more  necessary  as  the  vessel  descends  the  estuary 
and  the  bank  of  soundings  becomes  narrower.  Off  Matane  there  are 
30  fathoms,  sat\dy  bottom,  I^  miles  offshore ;  and  60  fathoms  at  3  miles 
off,  whilst  at  the  distance  of  5  miles  from  the  land  no  bottom  will  be 
found  at  100  fathoms.  The  south  bank  becomes  narrower  still  to  the 
eastward  of  Matane,  and  cease^s,  in  consequence,  to  be  of  use  to  vessels. 
Off  Gape  Chatte  there  are  30  fathoms  water  little  more  than  ^  a  mile 
from  the  shore;  a  short  distance  farther  off'  there  are  no  soundings  at 
70  fathoms ;  and  between  it  and  the  Point  de  Monts,  from  150  to  170 
fathoms,  blue  mud  bottom. 

Below  Point  de  Monts  there  is  plenty  of  sea  room,  and  although 
the  lead  will  there  be  of  little  use,  yet  the  south  coast  is  so  high  and 
bold  that  it  may  generally  be  seen,  if  the  fog  be  no  thicker  than  is  usual 
with  a  regular  easterly  wind  up  i:he  St.  Lawrence. 

Lower  down  still,  with  a  beating  wind  and  thick  weather,  soundings 
may  be  struck  off  the  west  end  of  Anticosti,  or  between  the  west  and 
SW.  Points  of  that  island,  if  it  be  wished  to  ascertain  how  far  the  vessel 
is  over  to  the  northward  before  night.  Eastward  of  the  SW.  Point  of 
Anticosti  to  Pavilion  River  the  bank  of  soundings  oft'  the  south  side 
of  the  island  is  very  narrow  ;  but  from  the  latter  to  the  East  Point  there 
is  plenty  of  warning  by  the  deep-sea  leaii,  as  will  be  seen  by  the  i^ound- 
ings  in  the  chart. 

The  channel  to  the  northward  of  Anticosti  can  not  be  recommended 
in  the  voyage  down  the  St.  Lawrence,  because  there  is  not  only  less 
room,  but  also  less  current  in  favor ;  neither  the  route  by  the  Strait  of 
Belle  I.«ile,  on  account  of  the  straggling  icebergs,  which  are  iu  general 
to  be  met  with  there  through  all  the  navigable  season.  Towards  the 
fall  of  the  year,  however,  vessels  occasionally  pass  through  it,  in  antici- 
pation oc  the  northerly  winds  which  prevail  at  that  season  in  the 
Atlantic. 

Systen?.  of  buoyage. — Approaching  from  seaward,  all  buoys  on  the 
starboard  side  of  the  channel  are  painted  red,  and,  if  numbered,  marked 
with  even  numbers,  and  must  be  left  on  the  starboard  hand. 


7-^- 


t 

■ 


26 


GULF   AND    RIVEK   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


i 


Approaching  from  seaward,  all  buoys  on  the  port  side  are  painted 
black,  witli  odd  numbers,  if  any,  and  must  be  left  on  the  port  hand. 

Buoys  painted  red  and  black,  in  horizontal  bands,  mark  obstructions 
or  middle  grounds,  and  may  be  left  on  either  hand. 

Buoys  painted  white  and  black  in  vertical  stripes  mark  mid-channel, 
and  must  be  passed  close  to,  to  avoid  danger. 

All  other  distinguishing  marks  to  buoys  are  in  addition  to  the  fore- 
going, and  indicate  particular  spots;  a  <letailed  description  of  which 
is  given  when  the  mark  is  first  established. 

Perches  with  balls,  cages,  etc.,  will,  when  placed  on  buoys,  be  at 
turning  points,  the  color  and  number  indicating  on  which  hand  they 
are  to  be  left. 

Starboard  hand  spar  buoys,  entering  channels  or  harbors,  will,  in 
some  cases,  be  surmounted  by  a  ball;  these  buoys  will  always  be 
painted  red. 

The  rule  for  coloring  buoys  is  equally  applicable  to  beacons  and  other 
day  marks,  so  far  as  it  may  be  practicaole  to  carry  it  out. 

Telegraph  and  Signal  Stations — The  following  stations  of  the 
marine  telegraph  systems,  established  in  the  gulf  of  and  river  St.  Law 
rence,  in  the  interests  of  navigation  and  fisheries,  are  now  in  operation 


f 


j 


Nameof  Mtatioo. 


'11 


. 


\ 


\ 


§  I: 


GroHse  Isle  Teloprapli  Office 

Etanc  da  Nonl  Liglitlioiigt- 

Amberat  Inland  LiuhtlxoiiHe 

Heath  Point.  LiKlitlioiise 

South  Point  Lit;l>thou8e 

Scut  Invest  Point  Lighthouse  ... 

West  Point  Litthtlionse    

Cape  d'Kspoir  LiKlithoiige 

Point  Mavquureau  Lij;ht-honge  . 
Point  (1e  Uonta  LiKbthouau 


SigoaU  in 
nse. 


...do  .. 

...do.. 

...do.. 

...do.. 

...do.. 

...do.. 

...do.. 

...do. 

...do  .. 


Maniconagan  Telegraph  Station |...do 

Purtneuf  Lighthouse ...do 

Cape  Rosier  Lighthouse l..,do 

Fame  Point  Ughtliouse  L.  do 

Cape  Maedalen   Lightliouse i...do j 

Martin  Kiver  Lighthouse j..  do i 

Cape  (;hatte  Liglitlionse   |...do 

Matane  Liglithouse  ....do 

Little  Metis  LighthouKe |...do 

Father  Point  Liglithouse i...do 

Brandy  I'ots  Lighthouse I  Semaphore 

I      ami  ilagg. 

Riviere  dn  Loup  Lighthouse .do 

L'Islet  Telegrapli  Ottico |  Flags 

Escuininao  Point i..  do 

Meat  Cove  Telegraph  Office,  near  Cape  St.    ..  do 

Lawrence. 
Flat  (Low)  Point  Lighthouse i...do 


Situation. 


Magdalen  Islands. 

Do' 
Anticoiiti  Island. 

1)0. 

Do. 

Do. 
Western  shore,  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence. 

Du. 
Northern  shore  of  river  and  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence. 

Do. 

Do. 
Southern  shore  of  river  and  Gulf  of  St. 
Lawrence. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do. 

Do.     • 

Do. 

Do. 
New  Brunswick. 
Cape  Breton  Island. 

.Do. 


1.  Vessels  exhibiting  their  distinctive  numbers  will  have  their  names 
transmitted  to  the  local  press  (for  publication  only),  free  of  charge. 

2.  Dispatches  to  or  from  vessels  within  signaling  distance,  by  the 
international  code  of  all  nations,  either  by  flags  or  semaphores,  will  be 
duly  delivered  as  addressed. 

3.  Dispatches  will  be  charged  for  at  the  ordinary  telegraph  rates, 


cs,  will,  in 
always  be 

s  aud  other 

)n8  of  the 
er  St.  Law 
operation 


y'Tl.av.'w.i^t-jiPi-mi'lifeaS-,'  ■  , r-. :„<■-■... :--.^J--^-,.y'ji<.^^-..    J    , 


BUOYAGE SIGNAL    STATIONS. 


re  painted 
t  hand, 
istructions 

d-channel, 

o  the  fore- 
)  of  which' 

oys,  be  at 
hand  they 


between  stations ;  but  no  charge  will  be  made  for  signaling  between 
coast  stations  and  vessels  at  sea. 

4.  Dispatches  may  (by  special  re(iuest)  be  delivered  in  cipher,  other- 
wise tliey  will  be  transmitted  in  ordinary  language. 

5.  Vessels  may  obtain  information  as  to  winds,  weather,  and  ice  at 
any  signal  station  within  the  Gulf  of  8r.  Lawrence yV<'e  of  charge. 

6.  The  stations  on  Anticosti,  Amherst,  Grosse  Isle,  and  St.  Paul  Is- 
lands, at  Meat  Oove  and  Cape  Kay  are  kept  specially  informed  respiMit- 
ing  the  state  of  navigation  in  the  river  and  gulf  of  St.  Lawrence  dur- 
ing the  mouths  of  April  and  May. 


.  Lawrence, 
tnd  Gulf  of  St. 

ind  Gulf  of  St. 


heir  names 
harge. 
ce,  by  the 
■es,  will  be 


aph  rates, 


J 


CHAPTER     II. 

ISLANDS  IN  THE  GULF  OF  ST.  LAWRENCE. 

St.  Paul  Island,  lying  in  tbe  main  entrance  to  the  Gulf  of  St.  Law- 
rence, between  tbc  SW.  extreme  of  Newfoundland  and  the  north  ex- 
treme of  Cape  Breton  Island,  ia  composed  of  granitic  rocks,  dipping 
at  an  angle  of  not  less  than  45°  to  the  southward.  It  is  nearly  3  miles 
long,  by  one  mile  broad.  Its  NE.  point  is  a  small  detached  islet,  sepa- 
rated by  a  very  narrow  channel  from  a  peninsula,  the  whole  so  precipi- 
tous as  to  be  nearly  inaccessible.  The  remaining  greater  part  of  the 
island,  which  is  also  i)recipitous  towards  the  sea,  has  two  parallel  ranges 
of  hills,  that  on  the  eastern  coast  being  the  higher. 

Two  small  lakes  or  ponds  supply  the  principal  stream  on  the  island, 
which  is  of  yellowish  brown  water,  well-tasted  and  wholesome,  and  de- 
scending into  the  sea  in  the  southern  part  of  Trinity  Cove.  There  are 
several  other,  but  much  smaller,  runs  of  water,  one  of  which  is  into  At- 
lantic Cove.  These  coves  afford  the  only 'shelter  for  boats,  and  the  only 
good  lauding  on  the  island,  which  is  easier  of  ascent  from  them  than 
at  any  other  part. 

Supplies.— Tbe  island  is  partially  wooded  with  dwarf  and  scrubby 
spruce  trees,  useless  except  for  fuel.  The  only  inhabitants  are  two  men 
in  charge  of  a  depot  of  provisions  for  tbe  relief  of  shipwrecked  persons, 
supported  by  tbe  government  of  New  Brunswick.  These  men  reside  on 
the  north  point  of  Trinity  Cove,  where  there  is  a  dwelling  bouse  and 
store.  A  few  foxes  are  the  only  wild  animals  upon  the  island  j  there  is 
no  feathered  game,  or  anything  else  to  support  life. 

A  Boat  is  kept  on  tbe  island. 

Anchorage.— Off  Trinity  and  Atlantic  Coves  small  fishing  schooners 
anchor,  with  the  wind  off  shore,  in  10  or  12  fathoms,  sand  and  gravel 
bottom,  and  at  the  distance  of  400  yards  from  the  rocks.  In  very  fine 
weather  large  vessels  might  venture  to  ride  in  from  25  to  30  fathoms, 
about  ^  mile  off  shore,  but  should  be  in  constant  readiness  to  weigh 
at  the  first  sign  of  a  change  in  the  wind  or  weather.  There  is  little  or 
no  warningby  the  lead  in  approaching  this  island  in  foggy  weather.  On 
this  account,  although  so  bold  and  high,  it  is  extremely  dangerous,  and 
many  shipwrecks,  attended  with  sacrifice  of  human  life,  have  taken 
place  upon  its  shores. 

Tbe  irregularity  of  tbe  tidal  streams  and  currents  add  much  to  the 
danger  arising  from  tbe  fogs,  which  prevail  in  southerly,  easterly,  and 
often  also  with  SW.  winds.    During  the  whole  of  a  fine  calm  day  at  the 


:  I 


"^-wl 


aHss!caw»!"*" 


'lau^'r 


'*»Aa,wt,timM^:^tti^<,,  -^:  ■.^■. . 


BIRD    ROCKS — BRYON    ISLAND.  8^ 

end  of  June,  the  current  set  to  the  SB,  at  the  rate  of  one  knot  past  the 
north  point  of  the  island. 

Bird  Rocks  of  coarse  red  sandstone,  in  strata  dipping  very  slightly 
to  the  SW.,  are  constantly  diminishing  in  size  from  the  action  of  the 
sea.  They  present  perpendicular  dirt's  on  every  side,  yet  it  is  possible 
to  ascend  them  with  great  difficulty  in  one  or  two  i)liices,  but  there  is 
no  landing  upon  them  except  in  the  calmest  sea.  Every  ledge  and 
fissure  of  the  cliffs  is  occupied  by  gannets.  The  white  i)lumage  of  these 
birds  gives  these  rocks  the  appearance  of  being  capped  witli  snow,  and 
renders  them  visible  through  a  night  glass  in  a  moonlight  night  from 
the  distance  of  7  or  S  miles. 

The  two  rocks  are  about  '^  mile  apart.  Sunken  rocks  leave  only  a  boat 
passage  between  them.  The  southeastern  most  is  the  larger  and  higher, 
though  scarcely  400  yards  long,  and  not  more  than  140  feet  higli  above 
the  sea.  The  otiier  is  divided  into  two  precipitous  mouiuls  Joined 
together  by  a  low  ledge.  The  lesser  of  these  mounds  resembles  a  tower. 
A  reef  extends  about  .^  mile  to  the  eastward,  from  the  Little  or  NVV.  Bird 
Rock,  and  there  is  a  patch  of  breakers  nearly  midway  between  the 
two,  and  rather  to  the  SVV.  of  the  line  drawn  from  one  to  tlie  other. 
The  Great  or  SE.  Bird  Rock  is  quite  bold,  excepting  in  the  direction  of 
the  other  rock. 

Caution.— Between  the  Bird  Rocks  and  Bryron  Island  there  is  a 
ridge  of  rocky  and  foul  ground,  on  some  parts  of  which,  it  has  been 
said,  there  is  as  little  as  4  fathoms  water,  because  bottom  has  been 
seen  in  calm  weather.  Nothing,  however,  less  than  7  fathoms  could  be 
found ;  but  it  may  nevertheless  exist,  so  that  a  vessel  of  large  draft 
had  better  not  cross  this  ridge  when  there  is  much  sea  running.  The 
two  cliffy  points  on  the  north  side  of  Bryon  Island,  in  line,  mark  the 
northern  limits  of  it. 

Bryon  Island,  which  is  uninhabited,  is  about  4  miles  long,  with  the 
extreme  breadth  of  rather  more  than  a  mile.  There  was  no  opportu- 
nity of  measuring  the  height  of  Bryon  Island,  but  it  nowhere  exceeds 
200  feet  above  the  sea.  The  cliff's  on  the  north  side  are  much  higher 
than  those  on  the  south,  where  there  are  several  small  coves  in  which 
boats  may  land  easily  with  the  wind  oflf  shore. 

The  island  is  formed  of  alternating  and  nearly  horizontal  strata 
of  red  sandstone,  red  ocherous  clay,  and  shaley  gray  sandstone. 
The  rocks  are  soft  and  friable,  forming  perpendicular  or  overhanging 
cliffs  nearly  all  around  the  island,  which  are  broken  in  holes  and  cav- 
erns, snowing  how  fast  they  are  giving  way  to  the  action  of  the  waves. 
A  great  part  of  the  island  is  wooded  with  dwarf  spruce  trees,  and 
there  is  a  large  upland  tract  covered  with  good  native  grass. 

Water.— Water  may  be  had  in  small  quantities  by  digging,  and 
there  is  a  spring  on  the  north  side  of  the  narrow  isthmus  which  joins 
the  eastern  peninsula  to  the  remainder  of  the  land. 

Reefs.— There  are  three  reefs  off'  Bryon  Island.    One  oflf  its  east  end 


30 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


exteiuls  nearly  1^  of  a  mile  to  the  nor tbeast ward;  another  off  the  west 
end  extends  1^  miles  to  the  westward;  and  tlie  third,  off  the  sandy 
SW.  point,  1(1  miles  to  the  southward.  No  marks  can  bo  given  for 
clearing  these  reefs,  but  the  bearings  of  the  land  will  aftbrd  suiTicient 
guidance  to  the  seamen.  The  reef  otf  the  S  W.  point  obstructs  the  chan- 
nel so  much  that  it  may  be  useful  to  add,  that  from  the  southern  ridge 
of  this  reef  Hryou  Island  subtends  an  angle  of  07°,  so  that  with  the 
island  subtending  any  less  angle  the  reef  may  be  passed.  The  south  reef 
assists  greatly  in  turning  off  the  sea  from  tlic  roadstead  to  the  eastward 
of  it,  where  vessels  may  safely  anchor  in  6  fathoms  water  and  a  sandy 
bottom,  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  or  more  from  the  shore,  and  with  all 
winds  from  the  northward.  Small  vessels  during  NW.  gales  lie  at 
anchor  close  under  the  reef. 

ShoaL — There  is  an  extensive  patch  of  foul  and  rocky  ground  lying 
8.  41°  W.  from  the  west  end  of  Bryon  Island,  and  having  a  clear  chan- 
nel on  either  side  of  it.  Not  less  than  6  fathoms  could  be  found  here, 
and  although  the  tishermen  see  bottom  upon  it  in  calm  weather,  there 
is  every  reason  to  think  that  there  is  no  less  water.  Nevertheless,  ves- 
sels of  large  draft  had  better  not  run  over  it  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea 
running,  for  a  small  point  of  rock,  with  a  few  feet  less  water,  might 
escape  the  most  rigorous  examination. 

Fishing  Grounds. — The  rocky  places  are  called  fishing  grounds  by 
the  inhabitants  of  Magdalen  Islands,  because  codfish  abound  upon 
them.  There  is  one  having  11  fathoms  water,  2|  miles  north  of  Bryon 
Island,  and  which  extends  a  considerable  distance  parallel  to  the  island. 
There  is  sandy  bottom,  and  a  great  depth  of  water  within  this  ridge, 
and  vessels  may  anchor  in  fine  weather  and  southerly  winds,  off  the 
bay  on  the  north  side  of  the  island.  The  soundings  extend  so  far  off 
Bryon  Island  to  seaward  in  every  direction,  that  there  is  no  possibility 
of  a  vessel  on  a  voyage  being  endangered  by  it  if  the  lead  be  used. 
Great  caution  is  requisite  in  approaching  the  reefs,  for  they  are  very 
steep,  especially  that  which  extends  to  the  southward. 

Magdalen  Islands. — This  chain  of  islands  assume  an  irregular 
curved  direction,  the  greatest  length  of  which,  from  the  SW.  cape  of 
Amherst  Island  to  East  Point,  is  35  miles. 

The  central  parts  of  these  islands  rise  into  hills,  with  rounded  and 
frequently  dome-shaped  summits,  and  which  are  in  general  of  igneous 
or  trap  rocks.  No  rock  salt  has  been  found  upon  the  islands,  but  the 
water  of  many  springs  and  small  streams  is  sufficiently  saline  to  be 
nearly  unfit  for  use.  Gypsum  forms  an  article  of  commerce,  and  some 
valuable  oclierous  pigments  are  also  found  upon  the  islands,  but  the 
principal  dependence  of  the  inhabitants  is  upon  the  codfishery.  The 
herring  and  seal  fisheries  are  also  prosecuted  to  a  limited  extent.  The 
islands  are  partially  wooded,  but  the  trees  are  small,  and  mostly  spruce, 
juniper,  birch,  and  Canadian  poplar.  The  unwooded  parts  produce 
good  grass,  and  afford  pasturage  for  cattle  and  sheep. 


j|ijnyjiiiBW,'i-J!.UMJ!.ni  .■a'i,i..jiJi,'Hjuij,ULnmiij!jj 


•aawseeggjoi::;  ^^^fe^tg^..  :^^^ 


MA(»DALEN    ISLANDS. 


ft 


the  west 
he  sandy 
given  for 

Hufflcient 
\  the  chan- 
tern  ridge 
b  with  the 
south  reef 

I  eastward 
d  a  sandy 

II  with  all 
lies  lie  at 

und  lying 
lear  chan- 
»und  here, 
her,  there 
eless,  ves- 
heavy  sea 
ter,  might 

rounds  by 
and  upon 
of  Bryon 
;he  island, 
his  ridge, 
is,  oflf  the 
so  far  off 
[)ossibility 
I  be  used, 
r  are  very 

irregular 
N.  cape  of 

luded  and 
)f  igneous 
8,  but  the 
line  to  be 
and  some 
3,  but  the 
ery.  The 
ent.  The 
ly  spruce, 
3  produce 


The  climate  is  severe;  not  quite  so  coM  as  at  Quebec  in  winter,  but 
less  warm  in  surunier.  Rains,  and  especially  fogs,  are  extrt-MU'Iv  fre- 
quent,  and  without  this  liumid  atmosphere  the  islands  would  be  deprived 
of  the  little  fertility  which  they  possess,  the  dry  and  meager  soil  requir- 
ing continual  supplies  of  nwh  <ire. 

When  first  siglited  from  sea,  Magdalen  Islands  appear  like  several 
hilly  islands,  with  channels  between,  but,  on  a  nearer  approach,  thev 
are  seen  to  be  all  connected  together,  with  the  exception  of  Entry 
Island,  by  a  double  line  of  sand  bars  and  beaches,  incloning  extensive 
lagoons,  having  very  narrow  entrances,  by  wliich  the  tide  finds  access 
and  egress.  Tliese  sand  bars  are  in  some  parts  only  a  few  feet  above 
tiio  sea,  whil.3  in  others  they  rise  into  hills  of  blown  sand  of  consider- 
able elevation.  They  appear  to  be  increasing,  since  they  are  generally 
ridges  of  sand  with  from  9  to  12  feet  of  water  parallel  to,  and  from  50 
to  100  fathoms  outside,  the  beach.  Tliere  are  3  and  4  fathoms  water 
between  these  ridges  and  the  shore,  a  circumstance  which  has  often 
proved  fatal  to  the  crews  of  vessels  wrecked  upon  these  shores  In 
stormy  weather  it  is  dangerous  to  attempt  making  the  islands,  for  in 
approaching  the  lower  parts  the  breakers  would  probably  be  the  first 
thing  seen  from  a  vessel. 

Population.— According  to  a  census  taken  in  1871,  there  were  upon 
Magdalen  Islands  3,171  inhabitants;  these  are  distributed  on  Amherst 
Gnudstone,  and  Alright  Islands,  with  the  exception  of  about  11  or  l'> 
famdies  divided  between    Entry  Island,  Grosse  Isle,  and  East  isluuf 
near  the  NB.  extremity  of  the  chain.  ' 

Seals.— During  the  spring  of  the  year  the  fishermen  leave  the  islands 
for  seal  hunting  on  the  ice  of  the  gulf.  Tliousands  of  seals  which  are 
dnven  on  the  ice  to  the  shores  of  the  islands  by  winds  are  kille«l  by  the 
inhabitants.    Seals  are  also  taken  by  means  of  nets  in  PieasantBay 

Supplies.— Vessels  may  obtain  limited  supplies  of  fresh  provisions 
especially  at  Entry  Island,  and  water  most  readily  from  Amherst  Har' 
bor,  either  from  a  spring  which  issues  from  under  Demoiselle  Hill  or 
from  a  small  stream  which  falls  into  A  use  A  la  Cabane,  near  the  SW 
cape  of  the  island.     Wood  for  fuel  is  becoming  scarce  near  the  set" 
tlements.    Large  spars  are  not  to  be  had,  unless  when  they  chance 
to  be  saved  from  wrecks,  but  small  ones,  of  spruce  and  juniper  may  be 
obtained.    The  latter,  of  which  the  inhabitants  build  their  flshinff 
boats  and  shallops  or  small  schooners,  somewhat  resembles  larch  wood  • 
It  IS  said  to  be  extremely  strong  and  durable.  ' 

East  Point  is  of  low  sand,  inclosing  several  shallow  ponds,  and  hav 
ing  several  sand  hills,  some  of  which  are  near  its  extremity  while 
others,  of  greater  elevation  and  farther  to  the  westward,  extend  in  a 
Cham  near  y  to  the  IfB.  Cape.    These  last-mentioned  sand  hills  are 

Th  "t?;*^  """  *^^  "''''^'"  ^^  "'*  "ortheastem  part  of  the  great  lagoon. 
The  NE.  Cape  is  a  hill  at  the  head  of  Grand  Entry  Harbor;  it  can  be 
seen  oyer  all  the  sand  hills  and  sand  bars,  and  at  a  distant  appears 
to  be  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  chain. 


i.j8SSf  ■;?.'"'';'' 


32 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


Loog  Spit.— A  ridgu  of  aand,  with  2  to  3  fatlioma  water,  extcndfi  S. 
(50^  E.  rather  more  than  li  miles  ot!'  East  Point,  and  for  i\  miles  far- 
ther in  the  same  direction  the  deptii  is  from  4  to  0  fathoms.  To  clear 
this  spit  the  north  side  of  the  peninsula  on  the  south  shore  of  Oyster 
Pond,  in  line  with  Old  Harry  Head,  beariuK  S.  ()1°  VV.,  will  lead  over  it 
in  4  fathoms.  North  Cape  in  line  with  the  east  side  of  NE.  Capo 
leads  nearly  A  mile  to  the  south  westward,  a  mark  which  will  he  useful 
to  a  vessel  approachiuf;  it  from  the  westward.  This  shoal  is  extremely- 
dangerous,  as  tlie  thles  set  rapi«lly  over  it  and  cause  a  heavy  breaking 
sea. 

Doyle  Reef,lyinK  S.  7(P  E.  from  East  Point,  isvery  small,  being  only 
(iOO  yanls  liinj,'  and  100  yards  wide,  with  a  depth  of  (>  fathoms  on  each 
side  of  it.  The  least  water  is  3  fathoms  on  one  spot,  nearly  in  the  cen- 
ter, and  there  is  deej)  water  all  around  it.  The  only  nuirk  for  it  is 
Xortli  Cape,  open  twothinis  of  its  breadth  to  the  ME.  of  NE.  Cape. 
This  reef  seldom  shows,  as  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  only  in  heavy  gales. 

Old  Harry  Head,  tlie  SE.  ixnnt  of  Cot!ln  Island,  Is  formed  of  red 
sandstone  clilVs  of  moderate  height,  with  a  reef  otf  it  i\  mile  to  the  SE. 
Between  it  and  East  Point  is  Saudy  Hay,,  in  which  vessels  may  anchor, 
witli  good  shelter,  in  all  winds  from  west,  round  by  north  to  NE. ;  but 
it  is  nf)t  a  place  to  be  recommended,  because  a  vessel  would  be  there 
very  much  embayed  by  the  shoals  on  either  side,  and  might  find  it  ditB- 
(!ult  to  get  out  on  the  occurrence  of  a  sudden  shift  of  wind,  cither  at 
night  or  during  a  fog. 

Columbine  Shoals  consist  of  numerous  small  ]>atches  and  ])ointed 
rocks,  on  some  of  which  there  is  not  more  than  3  feet  at  low  water. 
NE.  Cape,  well  open  of  Old  Harry  Head,  bearing  N.  11°  W.,  will  lead 
clear  of  the  outermost  of  the  shoals.  There  is  no  good  mark  for 
clearing  the  west  side.  On  the  outer  edge  ol  these  shoals  the  angle 
between  Old  Harry  Head  and  the  west  extremity  of  Coffin  Island  is  77°. 

Coffin  Island  has  on  its  south  side  a  lagoon  with  a  very  narrow  out- 
let, named  the  Oyster  I'ond,  and  which  boats  can  only  enter  in  fine 
weather.  Off  the  coast  of  the  island  there  are  several  rocks,  besides 
Columbine  Shoals,  but  they  are  inshore,  and  out  ot  the  way  of  vessels. 

Grand  Entry  Harbor  has  its  entrance  between  theSW.  end  of  Cotfiu 
Island  and  the  sand  bars  to  the  westward  of  it,  and  has  water  enough 
within  it  for  large  vessels ;  but  its  entrance  is  extremely  narrow,  not 
exceeding  100  yards  in  breadth,  between  sandy  shoals  which  are  said 
to  shift.  A  native  pilot  should  be  emjjloyed,  or  the  channel  buoyed 
or  staked,  and  even  then  the  entrance  should  not  be  attempted  except, 
in?  in  fine  weather.  The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in,  at  spring  tides, 
is  13  feet.  The  tides  run  with  great  rapidity.  There  are  no  settle. 
ments  at  the  harbor,  but  there  are  a  few  families  in  the  vicinity  of  the 
NE.  Cape  who  Iweed  cattle. 

Within  this  harbor  there  isa  iargeex|)an8eof  water,  extending  north- 
eastward to  the  southern  shores  of  Grosse  Isle,  and  communicating  by 


.p)JU4.ii.iuiwiinimigi,,..»,Ha.!i.'- 


CAPE    ALKIOUT — MKULK    ROCKH. 


88 


XtOIulH  S. 

miles  far- 

To  clear 

jf  Oyster 

ad  over  it 

NE.  Cape 

he  iiReful 

uxtremely 

breaking 

x'ingouly 
IB  on  each 
II  the  cen- 
L  for  it  is 
NE.  Cape, 
avy  gales, 
led  of  red 
to  tlie  SE. 
i»y  anchor, 
NE. ;  but 
il  be  there 
iiid  it  dilfi- 
,  either  at 

1(1  pointed 

low  water. 

,  will  lead 

mark  for 
the  angle 
and  is  77°. 
arrow  cut- 
ter in  fine 
{8,  besides 
of  vessels. 
idofOotfin 
er  enough 
arrow,  not 
are  said 
lel  buoyed 
;ed  except, 
ring  tides, 

no  settle- 
lity  of  the 

ling  north- 
icating  by 


a  narrow  ehannel  with  a  large  shallow  pond,  enstwiinf  of  the  NE.  Cape. 
It  also  exteiiils  southwestward,  between  a  double  line  of  sand  bars,  to 
the  eastern  shores  of  (iriiidstone  Island.  There  are  three  entrances 
from  the  sea;  namely,  (irand  Entry  Harbor;  another  3A  iiiiles  to  the 
westward,  which  is  very  shallow;  and  House  Harbor,  near  its  SW. 
extremity,  between  Alright  and  Orindstone  Islands. 

Shag  Island  is  small  and  low,  and  lies  about  A  mile  from  the  sand 
bars,  nearly  midway  between  Cotllii  and  Alright  islands. 

Cape  Alright  is  the  southern  point  of  Alright  iKlnixI.  The  clitt's,  of 
a  grayish  white  color,  with  occasional  brick-red  low  down,  are  400  feet 
high  at  the  highest  part,  which  is  about  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
cape,  and  those  to  the  westward  of  the  cape,  towards  House  Harbor? 
are  also  very  high  and  of  the  same  color.  Nearly  a  mile  inland  is  the 
summit  of  Alright  Island.  lietween  this  summit  and  the  cajie  there  is 
a  hill  named  Itutte  Konde.  The  south  extremity  of  the  cape  is  low, 
with  a  small  rock  close  oft'  it. 

Alright  Reef,  the  outer  edge  of  which  lies  N.  72°  E.,  3^  miles  from 
Cape  Alright,  is  800  yards  long  by  600  yards  wide,  and  is  composed  of 
white  and  pointed  rocks,  with  6  feet  least  water.  When  on  this  reef  the 
Butte  Konde  is  in  one  with  the  summit  of  Grludstone  Island;  the  west 
side  of  Cape  Alright  is  in  line  with  the  west  side  of  Cape  Meule,  and 
the  whole  of  the  woody  Wolf  Island  is  Just  open  to  the  westward  of 
Shag  Ik.  ind.  The  well-rnarked  summit  of  Grindstone  Island,  ojieii  to 
the  south  westward  of  Cape  Alright,  will  lead  to  the  8W.,  and  the  east 
side  of  the  woods  of  Wolf  Island  (seen  over  the  sand  bars),  open  to 
the  eastward  of  Shag  Island,  will  lead  to  the  SE. 

Pearl  Reef  is  of  white  pointed  rocks,  like  most  of  the  reefs  around 
these  islands.  It  is  round  and  about  400  yards  in  diameter,  with  0  feet 
least  water;  and  even  with  a  moderate  swell  the  sea  breaks  heavily 
upon  it.  From  the  reef  Cape  Alright  bears  N.  06°  W.,  8J  miles  j  the 
NB.  point  of  Entry  Island  S.  53°  W.,  4^  miles.  The  Demoiselle  Hill, 
shut  in  behind  the  north  side  of  Entry  Island,  S.  66°  W.,  will  lead  to  the 
southward  ;  and  the  Demoiselle,  kept  more  than  halt  a  point  open  to 
the  northward  of  Entry  Island  will  lead  to  the  northward. 

House  Harbor  is  distant  2^  miles  to  the  NW.  from  Cape  Alright. 
Its  entrance  is  a  narrow  and  crooked  channel,  carrying  only  6  feet  at 
low  water. 

Meule  Rocks,  extending  }  mile  seaward  of  Cape  Meule,  are  marked 
on  their  outer  extremity  by  a  red  buoy  moored  in  14  feet  water  100 
yards  N.  86°  E.  from  a  6-foot  patch.  Nearly  midway  between  the  bay 
and  Cape  Meule  there  is  a  channel  having  18  feet  water,  but  this  should 
not  be  used  in  rough  weather. 

Red  Cape  is  the  SE.  point  of  Grindstone  Island  and  the  north 
point  of  Pleasant  Bay.  The  opposite  point  of  the  bay,  Sandy  Hook,  is 
the  east  point  of  Amherst  Island,  and  bears  from  the  Red  Cape  S.  40° 
5489 3 


-.'.jU'iJ^UCJ.idiir.'-  ■:j-'S'iMi^:'    *  .,.,.-.■.' 


II 


\ 


I 


5    ' 


V.  , 


ii' 


11 ; 


H;  li 


IMLANUH    IN    GULP    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


E.,  6  inil«8.     From  thii*  lino  to  tlie  Hbore  uf  Auiberat  ImIhihI,  at  the  hettd 
ot'thvi  Imy,  tlio  diHtaiiKe  In  4,^  miloH. 

Q-rindatone  Island  iH  tlie  Hecuiul  larg«>Ht  of  tlio  chain,  being,  in  tliiH 
reHpect,  int«rnie<liat«  l>«twe«n  Ainhei'Mt  and  Alrigtit  IslandH.  Itm  Kimi- 
init  Ih  65(1  foet  above  tliu  Hea. 

Amherst  Island,  the  larguHt  sinl  Houth\vi'8tt>rnnioHr  of  tlui  Magila- 
Ion  iHlandH,  is  connoctod  witli  Grindstono  iHliind  by  a  doiiblo  lino  of 
sand  Imiih,  incloHing  an  oxttMiHlvo  lajjoon  from  one  to  3  milt'n  wi<lo,  thd 
Houthern  i)art  of  wliich  is  called  UaHque  Harbor.  TImh  lagoon  is  full  of 
sandH,  which  are  dry  at  low  water,  and  Iuih  three  outlets  into  IMoasant 
Bay,  the  Houthernmost  boing  the  deepest,  but  having  only  A  feet  water 
over  its  bar  at  low  water.  The  others,  indu<ling  three  through  the  sand 
bars  of  the  NW.  coast,  will  ordy  a<lmit  boats  at  high  water,  and  when 
the  surf  is  not  too  higli. 

The  hills  in  the  interior  of  Andierst  Islan«l  riso  to  a  height  «»f  550 
feet.  About  a  niile  to  the  westward  of  Amherst  Harbor  is  the  conical 
hill,  named  the  Dcmoisolle,  of  trap  rock,  and  liHO  feet  high. 

Amherst  Harbor. — The  entrance  is  'J^  miles  to  the  westward  of  the 
extremity  of  Sandy  Hook,  which  is  a  long  and  narrow  sandy  point  with 
sand  hills.  This  harbor  is  the  easie  '  of  access  and  egress  of  any  in  the 
Magdalen  Islands,  and  has,  moreover,  the  advantage  of  an  excellent 
roadstead  outside,  where  vessels  may  wait  their  opportunity  of  running 
iu.  The  entrance  to  Amherst  Harbor,  which  has  been  deei)ened  to  13 
feet  (at  high  water),  is  75  to  80  feet  wide,  and  rather  crooked,  so  that 
without  a  pilot  it  would  be  necessary  to  buoy  the  channel.  There  are 
from  12  to  17  feet  iu  the  harbor,  over  a  bottom  of  soft,  black  mud, 
well  sheltered  from  every  wind. 

Pleasant  Bay  is  the  best  roadstead  in  the  Magdalen  Islands,  and 
the  only  one  where  vessels  can  venture  to  lie  with  all  winds,  during  the 
three  finest  months  of  summer,  June,  July,  and  August.  In  those 
months  a  gale  of  wind  from  the  eastward,  so  heavy  as  to  endanger  a 
vessel  with  good  anchors  and  cables,  does  not  occur  above  once  in 
3  or  4  years.  The  riding,  however,  is  often  heavy  enough  iu  NE.  gales, 
and  a  vessel  should  be  well  moored  and  all  snug  aloft. 

Anchorage. — The  best  and  most  sheltered  anchorage  is  in  4  fathoms^ 
with  the  rocky  point  of  entrance  of  Amherst  harbor  bearing  S.  27°  W., 
§  mile,  and  a  little  more  than  ^  mile  from  high-water  mark  on  the  sandy 
I  teach  to  the  southward.  A  vessel  of  large  draft  should  anchor  farther 
off.  The  bottom  is  everywhere  excellent  for  holding,  and  of  red  sandy 
clay.  Even  when  the  wind  comes  right  in,  the  sea  is  much  lessened 
by  passing  over  so  much  of  shoal  water ;  nevertheless,  the  attempt 
to  ride  out  a  heavy  easterly  gale,  either  before  June  or  after  August,  will 
be  attended  with  great  danger. 

Sandy  Hook  Channel,  between  Amherst  and  Entry  Islands,  has  a 
navigable  breadth  of  little  more  than  J  mile  between  Sandy  Hook  Flat 
and  the  rocky  shoals  off  the  west  side^of  EutryJIsland.    There  are  sev- 


l 


M  'I 


.m^,»,gjym!M!BJi..'t...  <  j  <•  <.  d  u. 


miSiuuNi. 


it  tliti  iiea«l 
iti^,  in  tliiH 

ItH  Hlllll* 

blu  lino  of 
H  wide,  tb(i 
>n  is  full  of 

0  IMoHHiint 
fei'f  water 

;h  tliu  8iUHl 
,  and  when 

gilt  of  560 
the  conical 

ivard  of  the 
'  point  with 
■  any  in  the 

1  excellent 
of  running 
)ened  to  13 
;ed,  so  that 

There  are 
jlack  mud, 

iland8,  ami 
during  the 
In  thoae 
endanger  a 
ve  once  in 
1  NB.  gales, 

4  fathoms 
S.  27°  W., 
ri  the  sandy 
ihor  farther 
F  red  sandy 
ih  lessened 
he  attempt 
Lugust,  will 

ands,  has  a 

Hook  Flat 

ere  are  sev- 


AMHERST    ISLAND— ENTRY    FfiLAND. 


35 


eral  rocky  patchen  of  2*  falhon.H  off  the  HW.  point  ot  Entry  Island 
reaching  to  f u  1  v  i  mile  fron.  the  shore.    The  el.h  tide  sets  Htrr'ngly 
hrough  this  <,l,annel  an.l  over  San.ly  Flook  Flat,  so  that  vessels  ..f 
larue  draft  should  go  round  to  the  eastward  of  Kntry  Island 

Sand.N  Hook  (,hannel  by  a  good  pilot,  hut  3i  fathoms  is  the  utmost  that 
can  >'«  HHh>Iv  reckoned  on  by  a  stranger.    Off  the  NK.  en.l  of  HauiW 
Hook  Shoal,  which  is  steep-to,  a  re.l  btn.y  is  „,„ore.l  in  T,  fathoms     ' 
To  run  through  Sandy  Hook  Channel  from  the  southward  keep'tl.e 
east  snie  ol  Alnght  Island    ust  op..,,  to  the  westward  of  N  W.  spit,  u,  t^d 

:!!zz:::'i::.r'-'"''''^-^^^^^'-^ th^su,..,ie 

,   ^"*Zw"^""^''  ^'"^  '''*'''""^  "'^  ^'""  ^^"»f«'"l«''«   Islands,  its  sunnnit 
bemg  5s,Meet  above  the  sea  at  high  water;  the  red  clitVs  .'ising  TJ  the 

ni-'.r'in     "■"*-"''  "*■  •''"''  '■""^'  ""•'  '''  *'"'  «•»"»•'  Po'-'t  to  400  f,.et. 
O     the  Nh.  ,,o,„t  the,e  is  the  High   F{o<,k,  about  100  y«,,|s  from  the 

-  Ills  ami  on  ,t«  north  side  the  Tower  Rock,  of  red  sandst.nu,,  joined  to 
the  island,  ami  whic'-  can  be  seen  from  the  S\V.  over  the  low  WV 
point.  ^1  »» . 

Supplies.-The  inhabitants  of  Kntry  Island  raise  cattle  and  sheen, 
depending  mo..,  upon  the  sale  of  fresh  pn.visions  than  the  fisheries 
Vessels  may,  therefore,  almost  always  obtain  supplies. 

Anchorage.-\'essels  generally  anchor  under  Entry  Island  in  north'- 
erly  and  easterly  winds,  but  it  is  rough  riding.  The  best  anchorage  ia 
easterly  winds  ,s  in  Sandy  Hook  Channel,  under  the  NVV.  spit  i„  5 
fathoms,  sand.  '     ,  m  1/ 

iuf^w^'~^f1"^  ""  7?^'  '"'*"''"'''  '"  ^'"''^y  "«°k  Channel  and  ofl 
the  SW.  point  of  Entry  Island,  there  are  others  off  the  south  and  SE. 
sides,  extending  i  mile  offshore. 

Andromache  Rocks  are  several   mere    points  of  rock  with  deei)     ' 
water  between   them,  extending  *  mile  off  the  NE.   point  of  Entry 

«.„!^,?^f''**  ^«/«"d— The  south  coast  of  A.nherst  Island,  consisting  of 
sand  hiUs  and  beaches,  curves  round  to  the  westward,  for  6  or  7  miles 

^ifUuT'T^  1  '^'  ''^'""'  '"'•"'^  "^^""•^'^  '''^'^y  ^^'^'^  the  island  to 
w.thin  less  than  ^  mile  of  Pleasant  Bay.    The  basi,.  is  now  so  nearly 

closed  w,th  sand  that  boats  can  only  enter  at  high  water  and  in  the 
finest  weather.  There  is  good  anchorage  off  the  entrance,  in  from  6 
to  0  fathoms,  sandy  bottom. 

A  mile  and  a  half  to  the  westward  of  the  entrance  of  the  basin 
c  itts  commence  and  continue,  except  in  Oabane  Bay,  to  the  West 
Cape  which  is  the  highest  cliff  of  Amherst  Island,  its' summit  ZTg 
cJUO  feet  above  the  sea.  * 

C.f"r!f  V*,  ^^?*f^*  ''  "  '"'^"  ^'^''^'  ''^^^««"  "'«  '^o^th  and  SW. 
er^vT/  T  r*  ?''f  °'''  ''^'''^  ''^''^^'  "'"^  '■■'''^y  '-^"^hor  with  north- 
erly  and  easterly  winds,  and  where  good  water  may  easily  be  obtained.       " 


HP*- 


86 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


"'i   '    .  -v.. 


The  best  berth  is  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  sandy  bottom,  off  the  center  of  the 
bay,  ^  mile  off  shore. 

beadman  Islet,  bearing  N.  70°  VV.,  I'i  miles  from  the  West  (Jape 
of  the  Magdalen  Islands,  is  small,  being  not  more  than  600  yards  long, 
and  less  than  half  that  in  breadth.     It  is    about  170  feet  high,  with 
steeply  sloping  sides,  meeting  at  the  summit  like  a  prism,  so  that  when 
seen  end  on  it  resembles  a  pyramid.     On  the  west  side  a  vessel  may 
pass  within  the  distance  of  400  yards  with   safety,  but  a  reef  extends 
J  mile  oft"  the  east  side.    There  is  no  dunger  nearer  than  the  White 
Horse.     At  niglit  or  in  foggy  weather  the  lead  will  give  little  warning. 
O-ull  Island.— From  the  West  Cape  of  Amherst  Island   the  re. 
mainderof  the  sea  coast  of  Amherst  Island  consists  of  red  cliffs,  with, 
out  beach,  all  the  way  to  West  Lake,  a  small  pond  at  the  SW.  end 
of  the  sand  bars,  which  joins  Amherst  and  Grindstone  Islands.    At 
the  NE.  extremity  of  these  sand  bars  is  Gull  Islet,  which  is  small, 
rocky,  and  close  to  the  western  point  of  Grindstone  Island,  and  has 
shoal  water  off  its  west  point  to  the  distance  of  i  mile.    About  IJ 
miles  to  the  SW.  of  it,  and  with  the  west  side  of  Gull  Islet  and  Gros 
Cap  in  line,  lies  a  rocky  shoal  with  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  and  leav- 
ing no  good  passage  between  it  and  the  shore.    Close  to  the  NE.  of 
Gull  Island  is  the  Etang  du  Nord,  a  small  inlet,  affording  good  shelter 
to  boats. 

Hospital  Rock.— The  northern  shore  of  Grindstone  Island  is  of  red 
sandstone  cliffs,  less  high  than  those  of  Amherst  Island.  Near  their 
NE.  extreme  lies  Bospital  Rock,  close  to  the  shore,  and  also  some  rocky 
3-fathom  patches,  more  than  J  mile  from  the  shore. 

White  Horse  is  the  uame  of  a  dangerous  reef,  lying  N.  36°  E.,  7 
miles  from  Deadman  Islet,  and  west  5 J  miles  from  Gull  Islet.  It  is 
scarcely  more  than  200  yards  in  diameter,  and  has  9  feet  least  water 
over  pointed  rocks,  on  which  the  sea  often  breaks.  Ou  this  reef  the  sum- 
mit of  Entry  Island  is  seen  over  a  low  part  of  the  sand  bars,  at  the 
NE.  outlet  of  Basque  Harbor,  but  this  mark  can  not  be  easily  discerned 
by  a  stranger. 

When  on  the  reef  the  western  extremity  of  Amherst  Island  and 
Hospital  Cape  subtend  an  angle  of  91°  30'. 

Pierre  de  Gros  Cap,  another  dangerous  reef  of  rocks,  nearly  of 
the  same  size  as  the  White  Horse,  and  having  18  feet  least  water,  is 
seldom  seen,  as  the  sea  breaks  upon  it  only  in  very  heavy  weather.  It 
lies  N.  58°  W.,  3%  miles  off"  Cape  le  Trou,  the  nearest  point  of  Grind- 
stone Island. 

Wolf  Island.— From  Hospital  Cape  to  Wolf  Island,  the  northern 
coast  of  the  Magdalen  Islands,  con.sist  merely  of  sand  beaches  and  sand 
hills  for  a  distance  of  9  or  10  miles.  The  low  sandstone  cliffs  of  Wolf 
Island,  which  is  about  J  mile  long,  interrupt  the  continuance  of  the 
sandy  shore  for  only  ^  mile ;  the  sand  beaches  then  recommence  and 
continue  with  high  sand  hills  to  the  North  Cape. 


L 


DIRECTIONS — TIDES. 


37 


enter  of  the 

West  (Jape 
yards  long, 
higli,  with 

0  that  when 
vessel  may 
eef  extends 

1  the  White 
:le  warning, 
ind   the  re. 

clitts,  with. 
10  SW.  end 
stands.  At 
cb  is  small, 
nd,  and  has 
About  1^ 
)t  and  Gros 
r,  and  leav- 
)  the  NE.  of 
^ood  shelter 

and  is  of  red 

Near  their 

)  some  rocky 

N.  360  E.,  7 
Islet.  It  is 
;  least  water 
reef  the  sum- 
bars,  at  the 
ily  discerned 

Island  and 

IS,  nearly  of 
ast  water,  is 
weather.  It 
nt  of  Grind- 

;he  northern 
les  and  sand 
jliffs  of  Wolf 
uance  of  the 
tmmence  and 


North  Cape. — The  north  coast  of  Magdalen  Islands  continues  from 
the  North  Cape,  a  precipice  of  considerable  height,  in  a  curved  line  of 
sand  beaches  and  sand  hills  as  far  as  Bast  Point. 

North  Cape  Rocks,  some  of  which  always  show,  lie  to  the  west- 
ward of  North  Cape,  the  outermost  being  1,200  yards  offshore. 

Water  may  be  had  in  small  quantities  near  the  houses  on  the  east 
side  of  the  North  Cape. 

Anchorage. — To  the  eastward  of  North  Cape  vessels  inay  ride  in  8 
or  9  fathoms,  over  sandy  bottom,  with  all  southerly  winds,  with  good 
holding  ground. 

•  Directions.— Entry  Island,  when  tirst  made  from  the  eastward,  will 
appear  like  a  double-peaked  hill,  siloping  somewhat  abruptly  down  to 
perpendicular  and  liigh  cliffs  on  either  side.  The  S  W.  point  of  Amherst 
Island  is  also  a  steep  cliff",  but  of  less  height,  and  as  there  is  no  land  to 
the  southward  and  westward  of  it,  it  can  not  be  mistaken.  The  land 
rises  from  it  in  undulations  to  the  higher  parts  of  the  island. 

The  general  soundings  around  Magdalen  Islands  will  afford  an  in- 
valuable assistance  to  vessels  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather,  and  will  be 
better  understood  from  the  charts  than  by  any  written  directions. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  or  currents  around  Magdalen  Islands  are 
so  irregular  that  the  most  experienced  and  intelligent  pilots  ior  the 
islands,  who  are  also  fishermen,  and  have  passed  their  lives  in  fishing 
craft  around  them,  can  give  no  certain  account  of  their  rate  and  direc- 
tion, but  all  agree  in  stating  that  they  vary  in  both  respects,  either 
from  the  effects  of  winds,  or  other  and  unknown  causes.  Nevertheless, 
the  following  observations  will  hold  good  as  a  general  rule,  and  although 
Subject  to  occasional  interruption,  the  set  of  the  tidal  streams  about  to 
be  described  will  be  found  to  recur  with  considerable  constancy  in  tine 
weather. 

A  few  miles  outside  Bryou  Island  and  Bird  Rocks  there  ai)pears  to 
be  usually  a  current  setting  to  the  southeastward,  out  of  the  gulf  of 
St.  Lawrence ;  but  the  stream  of  flood  tide  flows  between  them  and 
Magdalen  Islands.  The  stream  of  flood  comes  from  the  SE,,  and  is 
divided  by  the  east  point  of  Magdalen  Islands.  One  branch  of  the 
stream  sets  strongly  over  the  Long  Spit,  which,  with  Old  Harry  Head 
and  the  shoals  off'  it,  turn  it  off"  to  the  southwestward  towards  Entry 
Island,  leaving  nearly  slack  water  in  the  bay  between  Coffin  Island 
and  Cape  Alright,  and  also  in  Pleasant  Bay.  The  other  branch,  to  the 
northward  of  the  islands,  follows  the  shore  from  East  Point  round  to  the 
SW.  Cape  of  Amherst  Island,  whence  the  greater  part  of  the  stream 
continues  its  course  to  the  SW. ;  whilst  the  remainder,  following  the 
shore,  runs  round  and  along  the  southern  coast  of  Amherst  Island, 
until  it  meets  the  before-mentioned  other  branch  of  the  stream  from  the 
East  point,  setting  off  the  east  side  of  Entry  Island.  It  is  overcome  by 
this  other  branch,  and  turned  gradually  round  to  join  the  general  weak 
stream  of  flood  to  the  westward  in  the  offing. 


38 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


I. 


On  the  SE.  side  of  the  islands  the  stream  of  the  ebb  tide  sets  strongly 
out  of  the  lagoons  and  out  of  Pleasant  Bay,  between  the  Sandy  Hook 
and  Entry  Island.  It  is  also  often  found  running  to  the  westward 
along  the  southern  shores  of  Amherst  Island,  and  right  round  it  in  like 
manner,  but  contrary  in  direction,  to  the  course  of  the  flood  already 
described.  In  the  offing,  at  the  same  time,  the  stream  of  ebb  is  from 
the  SW.,  and  sets  over  the  Long  Spit  oflf  the  east  point,  where  it  meets 
the  stream  from  the  NW.,  which  has  followed  the  north  shore  of  the 
islands,  round  from  Amberst  Island  to  the  east  point.  The  meeting  of 
these  two  streams  of  the  ebb  tide,  together  with  the  shoalness  of  the 
water,  causes  so  heavy  a  breaking  sea  in  strong  easterly  winds  that 
the  fishing  shallops  dare  not  venture  at  times  to  pass  the  point. 

The  rate  of  either  stream  seldom  amounts  to  a  knot,  excepting  close 
in  shore,  or  round  the  points.  The  ebb,  however,  is  generally  the 
strongest  stream,  and  its  rate  is  increased  by  westerly  winds,  as  is  that 
of  the  flood  by  winds  from  the  eastward. 

Anticosti  Island  is  122  miles  long  and  30  miles  in  extreme  breadth. 
Its  shores  are  everywhere  of  rock,  affording  in  some  parts  excellent 
building  stone,  of  which  the  two  lighthouses  have  been  constructed. 
On  and  near  the  coasts  the  limestone  is  covered  with  a  thick  and  often 
impenetrable  forest  of  dwarf  spruce,  which,  in  some  exposed  situations, 
is  only  a  few  feet  in  height,  with  gnarled  branches,  so  twisted  and 
matted  together  that  a  man  may  walk  for  a  considerable  distance  on 
their  summits.  Extensive  banks  of  limestone  shingle,  bush-swamps, 
morasses,  and  also  beds  of  peat  are  of  common  occurrence. 

Anticosti  ie  nowhere  higher  than  700  feet  above  the  sea.  Its  south 
coast  is  low  and  shelving,  with  reefs  of  flat  limestone  which  dry  at  low 
water.  There  is,  however,  a  range  of  highlands  in  rear  of  the  S  W.  point, 
and  extending  for  some  miles  both  to  the  northwestward  and  southeast- 
ward of  it.  The  north  coast,  for  70  or  80  miles  to  the  westward  of  the 
East  cape,  is  bold,  precipitous,  and  of  considerable  elevation.  The  head- 
lands end  in  magnificent  cliffs  of  limestone,  which  are  externally  so 
nearly  white  from  the  effects  of  the  weather  as  to  resemble  cbalk.  The 
remainder  of  the  north  coast  is  low,  with  reefs  of  flat  limestone,  like  the 
southern  shores. 

Harbors.— It  is  unusual  to  find  an  island  so  large  as  Anticosti  with- 
out a  good  harbor ;  the  best  are  only  suitable  for  vessels  drawing  10  to 
15  feet.  Limestone  coasts  are  in  general  characterized  by  deep  inlets 
and  bays  and  detached  islets  and  rocks,  but  nothing  of  the  kind  will 
be  found  here,  and  there  is  not  a  single  detached  shoal  off  any  part  of 
the  coasts. 

Coasts. — The  coasts  of  this  island  have  been  generally  believed  to 
be  extremely  dangerous.  The  reefs  of  flat  limestone,  extending  in  some 
parts  to  1 J  miles  from  the  shore,  the  want  of  anchorage  off  most  parts 
of  the  coast,  and  above  all  the  frequent  fogs,  justify  this  belief  in  part, 
but  not  in  so  great  a  degree  as  to  render  reasonable  the  dread  with 


n 


i;afeag!a^&femJAte«MUJWtd«a^^ 


-■^■■^•"'l'*"-''^-'^ 


ANTICOSTI    ISLAND. 


39 


which  they  seem  to  have  been  occasionally  regarded,  and  which  can 
only  have  arisen  from  the  natural  tendency  to  magnify  dangers  of  which 
we  have  no  precise  knowledge. 

Productions. — The  interior  of  Anticosti  is  probably  less  sterile,  for 
white  spruce  spars  have  been  seen  large  enough  for  the  masts  of  a 
schooner  of  GO  tons,  and  others  of  Juniper  of  excellent  quality,  and  of 
sufficient  size  to  form  the  keel  of  a  vessel  of  the  same  dimensions.  Black 
and  white  birch  and  ash,  the  latter  of  bad  quality,  complete  the  list  of 
trees  which  attain  to  any  size  upon  the  island. 

Land  birds  appear  to  be  very  scarce ;  in  winter,  however,  the  white 
partridge,  probably  ptarmigan  or  willow  grouse,  is  seen  in  the  interior. 
There  are  as  few  varieties  of  quadrupeds  as  of  the  feathered  tribes. 
The  squirrel  and  Canadian  hare  are  reported  not  to  exist  here.  There 
are  only  four  or  live  species  of  quadrupeds  upon  the  island,  namely,  the 
black  boar,  fox,  otter,  martin,  and  a  few  mice. 

Climate. — The  climate  of  Anticosti,  from  its  proximity  to  an  open 
sea,  is  probably  not  more  severe  in  winter  than  that  of  Quebec,  although 
farther  to  the  north,  but  the  summers  are  cold,  wet,  and  stormy,  with 
frequent  fogs.  Frosts  are  common  in  August,  and  in  some  severe  sea- 
sons they  occur  in  every  month  of  the  year.  It  is  probable  that  no  other 
grain  but  barley  would  ripen  here,  unless  it  might  be  oats  occasionally 
in  r*^"1te''ed  situations.  Potatoes  are  frequently  prevented  hy  v^arly 
ftjisi;  '  .-?;n  coming  to  perfection,  although  planted  in  the  roost  favorable 

situ         ai! 

li  /;  ^i.a. — Streams  of  excellent  water  descend  to  the  sea  on  every  part 
of  the  coasts  of  Anticosti.  They  are  generally  too  small  to  admit  boats, 
becoming  rapid  immediately  within  their  entrances,  and  even  the  larg- 
est of  them.  Observation  River,  to  the  westward  of  the  SW.  point  of 
the  island,  is  barred  with  sand,  excepting  for  short  intervals  of  time 
after  the  spring  freshets  of  heavy  rains. 

Fisheries  and  exports. — Many  of  the  above  streams  abound  with 
trout,  and  are  visited  periodically  by  great  numbers  of  salmon,  which 
are  taken  by  the  two  or  three  resident  families,  and  salted  for  the  Que- 
bec market. 

Codfish  are  taken  occusionally  off  several  parts  of  the  coast  in  small 
schooners  from  the  Magdalen  Islands  and  other  parts  of  the  gulf.  Their 
crews  often  join  the  occupation  of  wrecker  to  that  of  fishermen.  The 
black  bears  are  very  numerous,  and  may  frequently  be  seen  wandering 
along  the  shores.  Their  skins,  together  with  a  few  of  the  other  animals 
named,  salted  salmon,  seal  skins,  and  seal  oil,  are  the  only  exports,  and 
are  taken  to  Quebec,  together  with  occasional  cargoes  of  goods  and 
people  saved  from  wrecks  in  a  schooner,  the  only  vessel  belonging  to 
the  island.  Wild  geese,  outards,  anrl  ducks  of  various  species  are 
abundant,  and  breed  upon  the  island. 

Provision  Posts. — The  people  in  charge  of  the  lighthouses  and  i)ro- 
vision  posts,  and  one  man  at  Fox  Bay,  are  the  only  residient  inhabitants 


i|i 


} 


II 


t 


* ,. 


u 


V 1 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF   ST.    LAWRENCE. 


of  Anticosti.  The  provision  posts  have  been  established  by  the  Gov- 
eminent  o^  the  Dominion  of  Canada  for  the  relief  of  the  crews  of  ves- 
sels wrecked  upon  the  island.  Vessels  are  more  frequently  lost  here 
in  the  bad  weather  at  the  close  of  the  navigable  season  than  at  any 
other  times,  and  their  crews  would  perish  from  want  and  the  rigors  of 
a  Canadian  winter  if  it  were  not  for  this  provision.  TLe  first  of  these 
posts  is  at  Ellis  Bay,  the  second  at  the  lighthouse  at  the  SW.  point, 
and  the  third  at  the  lighthouse  on  Eleath  Point. 

There  are<lirection  boards  erected  on  the  shore,  or  nailed  to  trees  from 
which  the  branch»^N  have  been  cut  off,  near  the  beach,  and  on  various 
parts  of  the  roast.  These  boards  are  intended  to  point'  out  to  ship, 
wrecked  per.  ons  the  way  to  the  provision  posts,  and  were  placed  on 
the  following  jarts  of  the  shore:  at  30  miles  westward  of  Shallop  Creek; 
and  at  21  mibs  eastward  of  Shallop  Creek.  And  there  were  formerly 
others  on  Heath  Point  and  the  SW.  point  which  the  lighthouses  have 
rendered  unnecessary. 

East  Cape  of  Anticosti  is  a  perpendicular  cliff  of  limestone,  rising 
100  feet  above  the  sea.  Between  East  Cape  and  Heath  Point  is  Wreck 
Bay,  which  is  dangerous,  and  affords  no  anchorage.  A  reef  extends 
rather  more  than  ^  mile  to  the  SE.  from  East  Cape. 

Heath  Point  is  of  limestone,  about  10  feet  high,  with  a  super- 
stratum of  peat,  in  which  there  are  several  ponds  of  dark  bog  water. 
At  the  distance  of  a  few  miles  the  lighthouse  appears  like  a  sail  off 
the  island,  and  is  extremely  useful  in  marking  the  extent  of  the  low 
land  to  vessels,  either  from  the  eastward  or  westward. 

Heath  Point  Reef  extends  nearly  3  miles  from  Heath  Point.  Within 
that  distance  the  reef  is  composed  of  large,  square  blocks  of  limestone 
with  irregular  soundings,  so  that  vessels  should  not  approach  nearer, 
with  the  point  bearing  between  N.  03°  W.  and  S.  72°  W.  With  the 
East  Ca{)e  bearing  N.  40°  W.  a  vessel  will  pass  just  outsi.Ie  of  the 
shallow  and  irregular  soundings  in  about  20  fathoms  water. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  is  in  10  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand 
and  mud,  with  the  lighthouse  bearing  N.  49°  E.,  and  Cormorant  Point 
nothing  to  the  southward  of  S.  83°  W. 

The  Coast  from  the  South  Point  of  Anticosti  to  Cormorant  Point  is 
low  and  undulating,  with  points  of  low  limestone  cliffs,  and  beaches  of 
sand  and  shingle  in  the  bays,  inclosing  large  ponds  or  lagoons,  into 
many  of  which  the  tide  flows,  and  also  small  streams  from  the  interior 
of  the  island.  This  part  of  the  coast  may  safely  be  approached  by  the 
lead,  for  the  reefs  nowhere  extend  farther  oft'  than  ^  mile  till  we  come 
to  the  South  Point. 

South  Point  is  low,  and  dense  brushwood  reaches  nearly  to  the 
water's  edge.  No  trees  intervene  between  the  lighthouse  and  the 
shore,  nor  does  the  ground  rise  until  the  lighthouse  is  appioached- 
Eastward  of  the  point  the  ground  is  flat  for  some  miles. 

Beacon.— On  South  Point  is  a  beacon  40  feet  high,  painted  white. 


aaami«kif'  iaf:',;f,:L£SA: 


SOUTH    AND   8W.    POINTS. 


41 


y  the  Gov- 
)W8  of  ves- 
'  lost  here 
lan  at  any 
e  rigors  of 
nt  of  these 
5W.  point, 

trees  from 
an  various 
it  to  ship- 
phiceil  ou 
lop  Creek ; 
e  formerly 
juseshave 

)ne,  rising 
:  is  Wreck 
)f  extends 

a  super- 
tog  water. 

a  sail  off 
>f  the  low 

fc.  Within 
limestone 
3h  nearer, 
With  the 
le  of  the 

m  of  sand 
ant  Point 

t  Point  is 
teaches  of 
sons,  into 
e  interior 
ed  by  the 
we  come 

ly  to  the 

and  the 

51  cached* 

ed  white. 


A  reef  runs  out  about  2  miles  to  the  southward  from  South  I'oint,  and 
the  sea  usually  breaks  upon  it.  The  outer  point  of  this  shoal,  stated 
to  be  600  or  700  feet  in  diameter  with  21  feet  on  it,  lies  with  South 
Point  bearing  N.  72°  E.,  distant  about  3  miles. 

Caution. — As  the  survey  of  this  coast  is  very  incomplete,  mariners 
are  advised  to  give  this  locality  a  good  berth. 

Aspect  of  Coast — From  South  Point  to  the  lighthouse  on  the 
SW.  Point,  a  distance  of  .TO  miles  west,  there  is  such  a  sainoness  in  the 
character  of  the  coast,  that  it  is  very  difficult  to  make  out  one  part  from 
another. 

•In  this  distance  the  coast  is  very  low,  but  it  begins  to  rise  at  Pavilion 
River,  there  being  a  high  ridge  close  in  rear  of  the  coast  all  the  way  to 
the  SW.  Point  and  beyond  it  for  some  miles. 

Beacon. — At  the  entrance  of  Pavilion  Kiver,  wiiere  there  is  a  lime- 
stone clit),  is  a  white  beacon  40  feet  high. 

Beacon. — A  large  white  beacon  40  feet  high  is  placed  4  miles  SE.  of 
Salt  Lake  Bay. 

Salt  Lake  Bay  has  flue  sandy  beaches  inclosing  lagoons  or  ponds 
into  which  the  tide  flows.  Ott'  the  center  of  this  bay,  and  with  its  N  W. 
point  bearing  N.  12°  W.,  distant  1|  miles,  there  is  very  indifferent 
anchorage,  iu  7  fathoms,  over  sandy  bottom.  Vessels  should  be  careful 
not  to  anchor  farther  to  the  southward  and  eastward,  since  there  is 
some  foul  and  rocky  ground  about  a  mile  in  that  direction  from  the 
position  which  has  just  been  recommended. 

Caution. — Between  the  south  and  SW.  points  of  Anticosti  the  reefs 
extend  a  mile  from  the  shore,  and  are  so  steep  that  there  is  little  warn- 
ing by  the  lead.  This  part  of  the  south  coast  of  the  island  should 
therefore  be  approached  very  cautiously  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather. 

The  SW.  Point  of  Anticosti  island  is  a  low  projecting  mound  of 
limestone,  having  a  small  cove  on  its  north  side,  which  forms  it  into  a 
peninsula.  The  land  rises  gradually  in  the  rear  of  this  to  the  summit 
of  the  ridge  already  mentioned.  Ou  the  south  side  of  the  point  there 
is  a  beach  of  limestone  gravel  on  which  boats  may  land,  .as  well  as  in 
the  cove  ou  the  north  side,  when  the  wind  is  offshore  and  the  sea 
smooth.  On  the  north  side  of  the  point,  and  for  several  miles  along 
the  coast  to  Observation  Kiver,  the  cliffs  are  perpendicular  and  washed 
by  the  sea.  A  reef  extends  out  from  the  point  to  the  west  and  SW. 
not  more  than  ^  mile.  At  ^he  distance  of  0  miles  to  the  southward 
and  westward  of  the  poii.  ^  depth  is  about  110  fathoms,  with  mud 
bottom,  and  increases  to  200  fathoms  nearly  midway  towards  the  south 
coast. 

Anchorage.— Vessels  may  anchor  in  the  bay  ou  the  north  side  of  the 
point,  iu  12  or  13  fathoms,  over  a  bottom  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken 
shells,  with  the  extremity  of  the  point  bearing  south  distant  ^  mile,  when 
the  cliffs  to  the  eastward  will  be  at  the  same  distance.  It  is  a  danger- 
ous state  to  be  caught  iu  by  westerly  winds,  which  are  preceded  by  a 


■i.VjU^tyl* 


1l 


i|: 


i 

,1 
T 

ii   •■ 
I'     ' 


\  q 


ISLANDS    IN    GULP    ST.    LAWRENCE. 

heavy  swell.    The  ground  is  not  to  be  trusted,  and  no  vessel  oaa  be 
recomnietided  to  anchor  here  unless  in  case  of  necessity. 

From  SW.  Point  to  Ellis  Bay  the  reefs  of  flat  limestone  extend  oif  iu 
most  parts  fully  a  mile,  and  often  have  10  or  12  fathoms  of  water  close 
outside  of  them. 

Observation  River  ?'j  the  largest  stream  on  the  island,  having  5  or 
6  feet  water  in  its  entrance  after  the  melting  of  the  snows  iu  the  spring 
of  the  year,  but  soon  becomes  barred  with  sand  by  the  SW.  gales.  Its 
source  does  not  appear  to  be  known  to  the  people  of  the  island.  Im- 
mediately to  the  northward  of  this  river  there  are  conspicuous  and  high 
8andy  clift's. 

St.  Marys  Cliffs,  21  miles  from  SW.  Point,  are  also  of  sand,  less 
high,  and  less  remarkable,  but  yet  not  difficult  to  distinguish. 

Beacoa— On  St.  Marys  Cliffs  is  a  beacon  40  feet  high,  painted 
white. 

Becscie  River,  12  miles  southeastward  of  Ellis  Bay,  is  a  small 
stream  at  the  head  of  a  cove  affording  shelter  to  boats,  and  where  there 
is  a  hut  at  which  a  hunter  and  fisherman  occasionally  resides. 

BlUs  Bay  affords  the  only  tolerably  sheltered  anchorage  in  Anti- 
costi.  Vessels,  if  their  draft  is  not  too  great  for  a  depth  of  3  fathoms, 
may  safely  lie  there  during  the  three  finest  months  of  summer,  namely, 
June,  July,  and  August,  but  they  should  moor  with  an  open  hawse  to 
the  southward.  If  of  larger  draft,  and  only  wishing  to  remain  for  a 
few  hours,  they  may  anchor  farther  out,  in  3^  and  4  fathoms,  but  nei- 
ther the  ground  nor  the  shelter  will  be  found  so  good  as  farther  up  the 
bay. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  in  Ellis  Bay  is  in  a  line  between  Cape 
Heury  and  the  White  Cliff',  Gamache  House,  bearing  N.  15^  W.,  and 
Cape  Eagle,  S.  51°  E.  The  vessel  will  then  be  in  3  fathoms,  over  muddy 
bottom,  distant  about  600  yards  from  the  flats  on  either  side,  and  about 
i  mile  from  those  at  the  head  of  the  bay.  Southerly  winds  are  of  rare 
occurrence,  and  never  last  long.  When  they  do  occur  the  sea  is  much 
less  at  the  anchorage  than  might  be  expected,  although  very  heavy  in 
the  entrance  between  the  reefs. 

Reefs.— The  reefs  are  of  flat  limestone  and  dry  at  low  water.  The 
entrance  between  them  is  1,200  yards  wide,  from  the  depth  of  3  fathoms 
to  3  fathoms.  Extensive  flats  proceed  from  these  reefs  quite  round  the 
bay,  and  do  not  entirely  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  in  very  low  spring 
tides,  but  there  are  immense  bowlder  stones  upon  them  which  always 
show.  These  flats  occasion  the  landing  to  be  very  bad  excepting  at 
high  water,  which  is  the  only  time  that  supplies  of  good  water  can  be 
obtained  from  Gamache  River. 

Directions.— In  approaching  Ellis  Bay  from  the  westward,  with  west- 
erly winds,  run  down  the  outside  of  the  reefs  off  Cape  Henry  by  the  lead, 
and  in  10  fathoms  water,  until  the  west  side  of  White  Cliff  is  in  line  with 
the  east  side  of  the  westernmostof  two  hills  far  back  in  the  country,  and 


'~'»T'-"rT»ffnninir Tr— int  n rr  riiTTn-mni 


ELLIS    BAY — CAPE    0H8ERVATI0N. 


43 


isel  can  be 

ctend  off  in 
water  close 

laving  5  or 
the  spring 
gales.  Its 
iland.  Im. 
IS  and  high 

'  sand, less 

b. 

h,  painted 

is  a  small 
^here  there 
s. 

e  in  Anti- 
3  fathoms, 
3r,  namely, 
a  hawse  to 
aain  for  a 
IS,  bnt  nei- 
her  up  the 

ween  Cape 
P  W.,  and 
ver  maddy 
and  about 
ire  of  rare 
)a  is  much 
7  heavy  in 

Iter.  The 
3  fathoms 
round  the 
low  spring 
ch  always 
septing  at 
ter  can  be 

with  west- 
y  the  lead, 
a  line  with 
intry,  and 


bearing  N.  7°  E. ;  tlien  haul  nj)  with  these  marks  on,  and  tliey  will  lead 
into  smooth  water  close  under  Cape  Henry  Reef,  in  3^  fathoms.  Con- 
tinue running  in  with  these  marks  on  till  Gamache  House  bears  N.  15^ 
W..  then  haul  up  lor  it,  and  anchor  in  the  line  between  Cape  Henry  and 
White  Cliff,  as  previously  recommended.  The  lead  should  be  kept  go- 
ing, and  the  reefs  on  either  side  should  not  be  approached  nearer  than 
S  fathoms  in  any  part  until  the  vessel  arrives  at  the  anchorage. 

In  running  for  the  bay  from  the  southeastward,  with  an  easterly  wind, 
come  no  nearer  to  the  west  point  of  Cape  Eagle  Heef  than  the  depth  of 
7  fathoms,  until  the  east  side  of  White  Cliff  comes  in  line  with  the  east 
side  of  the  same  hill  as  before;  then  haul  up  with  this  mark  on  until 
the  houses  bear  N.  l8o  W.  '  I  proceed  as  above  directed.  Take  notice 
that  the  west  side  oi  hi.,  "ff  is  used  for  the  let  uh;  nark  in  west, 
erly  winds,  and  the  east  side  .^  easterly  winds,  the  intention  being  to 
keep  the  vessel  in  either  case  from  going  too  near  the  lee  side  of  the 
channel. 

West  Point  is  low  and  wooded,  with  reefs  which  do  not  extend  be- 
yond a  mile  from  the  shore. 

North  Coast— The  north  coast  of  Anticosti,  between  the  West  and 
North  Points,  is  low,  with  reefs  of  flat  limestone  extending  one  mile 
from  the  shore. 

North  Point  is  wooded,  of  moderate  height,  and  without  any  cliff, 
It  can  only  be  distinguished  by  the  change  which  takes  place  at  it  in 
the  direction  of  the  coast. 

High  Cliff  Point,  distant  13  miles  from  North  Point,  is  easily  recog- 
ized,  being  the  only  cliff  on  the  island  that  has  a  talu8  in  front  of  it,  or 
that  has  not  its  base  washed  by  the  sea  at  high  water. 

Beacon.— On  North  Point  is  a  whitewashed  beacon,  30  feet  high. 

Coast— From  High  Cliff  Point  to  West  Cliff,  a  distance  of  26  miles, 
the  coast  is  low  in  front,  with  rijdges  of  considerable  elevation  a  few 
miles  back  in  the  country.  This  is  the  most  dangerous  part  of  the  north 
coast,  for  the  reefs  extend  nearly  2  miles  out  from  high- water  mark,  be- 
ginning at  some  low  cliffs  7  miles  eastward  of  High  Cliff  Point,  and 
continue  to  do  so  for  4  or  5  miles  to  the  southeastward,  after  which 
they  gradually  diminish  in  breadth  till,  at  West  Cliff,  they  are  not  more 
than  ^  mile  from  the  shore. 

Beacon.— On  West  Cliff  is  a  whitewashed  beacon,  30  feet  high. 

West  Cliff  has  no  other  high  cliff  near  it.  It  appears  like  a  white 
natch  on  the  land,  and  can  be  seen  from  a  distance  of  20  miles.  Low 
cliffs  commence  4  miles  southeastward  of  West  Cliff,  and  continue  to 
Charleton  Point. 

Cape  Observation  has  on  its  west  side  a  range  of  grayish  whit« 
cliffs  several  hundred  feet  high.  At  the  extremity  of  the  cape  these 
cliffs  become  suddenly  much  lower,  and  then  rise  again  to  their  former 
elevation  for  a  short  distance  on  the  east  side. 


:4 


i  M 


f  1 
> 


1  :•., 


ISLANDS    IN    (JUL,F    ST.    LAWRENCE. 


Supplies. — At  Cliiiiietoii  I'oiiit  and  Ca{ie  Obaervntiuii  wood  and 
wivtwr  may  b«  obtained. 

Bear  Head  coiiHJMtH  of  ^rayiHli  white  cliff's,  40i)  feet  high  and  reHein- 
bliiij;  in  some  «legrce  Cape  Observation.  The  coast  between  is  also  of 
hifjh  grayish  white  clitt's.  (Jape  Observation  has  no  equally  high  head- 
hinds  to  the  westward  of  it,  while  Hear  Elead  lias,  which  will  prevent 
the  one  being  mistaken  for  the  other. 

Beacon. — On  the  western  extremity  of  Boar  Head  Clitf  is  a  beacon« 
30  feet  higli,  with  diamond-shaped  toi>,  and  whitewashed. 

Bear  Bay,  is  by  far  the  best  roadstead  on  the  north  coast  of  Anti- 
costi,  and,  indeed,  the  only  one  in  which  a  vessel  of  large  draft  would 
like  to  anchor,  unless  she  had  some  particular  object  in  view.  It  is 
sufliciently  roomy,  the  bottom  is  excellent  for  holding,  the  depth  of  water 
moderate. 

Cape  Robert  consists  of  clift's  of  the  same  color  and  elevation  as  those 
of  Bear  Head.  There  are  two  other  points  of  cliffs  300  feet  high,  within 
the  bay,  the  southeasternmosc  of  which  is  named  Tower  Point.  The 
best  anchorage  is  on  the  line  between  Tower  Point  and  Cape  Robert* 
at  a  distance  of  one  mile  from  the  former,  as  well  as  from  the  wesiern 
shore,  and  in  13  fathoms  water  over  a  bottom  of  brown  mud. 

Bear  Bay  is  divided  into  3  smaller  bays  by  the  two  high  points  of  cliff 
already  mentioned.  In  each  of  these  bays  there  are  fine  bold  beaches 
of  sand  and  limestone  shingle,  and  streams  where  water  may  be  easily 
obtained.  But  the  principal  stream  is  Bear  River,  which  enters  the 
southernmost  of  the  three  bays,  close  to  the  southeast  side  of  Tower 
P<»int.  It  is  too  shallow  and  rapid  to  admit  boats,  but  the  water  is 
clear  and  good.  The  cliffs  in  Bear  Bay  are  of  grayish  white  limestone. 
At  the  extremities  of  the  points  they  are  rounded  by  the  action  of  the 
waves  and  atmosphere  so  as  to  resemble  towers,  which  resemblance 
is  rendered  stronger  by  the  masonry-like  appearance  of  the  rock. 

Table  Head.— From  Cape  Robert  to  Table  Head  the  coast  is  broken 
into  small  bays,  with  shingle  beach  and  small  streams  between  high 
headlands,  terminating  in  perpendicular  cliffs,  the  bases  of  which  are 
washed  l>y  the  sea.  None  of  these  bays  afford  good  anchorage.  Table 
Head  is  rendered  remarkable  by  the  hill  from  whence  it  derives  its 
name,  and  which  rises  immediately  from  the  summit  of  the  cliffs.  Fox 
Point  is  4  miles  farther  to  the  southeastward,  and  much  lower  than 
Table  Head. 

Fox  Bay,  situated  a  little  less  than  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  Fox 
Point,  is  about  a  mile  wide,  and  deep,  with  a  sandy  beach  at  its  head, 
where  there  is  a  considerable  stream  issuing  from  a  small  lake.  Boats 
may  enter  the  outlet  of  this  lake  at  high  water. 

Reef  Point,  of  very  low  limestone,  is  the  southern  point  of  Fox  Bay, 
from  which  a  reef  of  flat  limestone,  covered  with  only  a  few  feet  water, 
runs  out  to  thedistance  of  fully  \^  miles.  There  is  a  depth  of  10  fathoms 
close  off  the  end  of  this  reef,  so  that  it  is  extremely  dangerous.    To  be 


wood  and 

and  resell)  • 
III  iH  alHO  of 
hi^h  head- 
ill  prevent 

0  a  beacuut 

i8t  of  Anti- 

1  raft  would 
?iew.  It  is 
[)th  of  water 

[on  as  those 
ligh,  within 
.»oint.  The 
upe  Robert? 
the  western 
1. 

)iuts  of  cliff 
old  beaches 
ly  be  easily 
enters  the 
e  of  Tower 
lie  water  is 
» iimestoue. 
jtion  of  the 
eseniblauce 
rock. 

jt  is  broken 
tween  high 
r  which  are 
ige.  Table 
derives  its 
cliffs.  Fox 
lower  than 

rurA  of  Pox 
it  its  head, 
ike.    Boats 

>f  Fox  Bay, 
feet  water, 
10  fathoms 

aus.    To  be 


MliTl  I  iT'liliit 


ii'ifl  i'""^ 


NORTH    COAST — TIDES. 


4ft 


Til 

Ml 


snre  of  clearing  it  to  the  northeastward  a   vessel  should  not  staiid 
nearer  by  the  lead  than  IS  or  17  fathoms. 

From  the  northern  point  of  Pox  Bay,  whiiih  is  a  cliff  of  moderate 
height,  another  reef  runs  out  more  than  i  mile  to  the  eastward.  A 
point  of  the  southern  reef,  before  mentioned,  extends  to  the  northward 
in  such  a  way  as  to  overlap  the  reef  off  the  northern  point,  leaving  an 
entrance  into  the  bay  from  the  northward  between  the  two  reefs  only 
J  mile  wide  and  13  feet  in  it  at  low  water.  Insido  there  in  a  space  i 
mile  wide,  from  the  dei)th  of  2  fathoms  to  3  fathonis,  and  with  16  feet 
in  the  nuddle  over  muddy  bottom.  It  is  said  that  the  sea  does  not  roll 
in,  but  in  heavy  weather  breaks  on  the  reefs  and  in  the  entrance.  This 
account  we  believe  to  be  correct,  and  that  small  vessels  would  be  quite 
safe  there  during  the  summer  months. 

Coast.— Between  Pox  Bay  and  East  Cape  the  coast  is  of  limestone 
cliffs  100  feet  in  height,  bold,  and  free  from  danger.  Between  Cape 
Sand-Top  and  East  Cape  vessels  may  anchor  with  all  westerly  winds, 
in  from  16  to  20  fathoms,  over  fine  sand,  at  a  distance  of  one  mile  from 
the  shore. 

Tides  and  Currents.— The  stream  has  run  along  the  land  for  a  whole 
day  at  the  rate  of  a  knot  an  hour,  in  either  direction,  without  any  ap- 
parent cause,  and  altogether  regardless  of  the  change  of  tide.  At  other 
tiines  the  tides  have  been  found  regular  inshore.  Under  these  circum- 
stances it  is  evident  that  the  set  of  the  stream,  at  any  time  or  place,  can 
not  be  reckoned  upon  with  certainty.  Usually,  however,  there  is  very 
little  stream  in  any  direction  on  the  north  coast  from  West  Cliff  southeast- 
ward to  Table  Head.  Prom  the  latter  to  East  Cape,  on  the  contrary, 
there  is  frequently  a  stream  from  the  northward,  running  at  a  rate  varj'- 
ing  from  h.alf  to  one  knot.  In  one  or  two  instances  this  stream  has  been 
seen  to  commence  and  end  with  the  flood  tide,  so  that  there  was  reason 
to  imagine  a  connection  between  them ;  and,  if  this  be  the  ca^e,  it  may 
arise  from  the  circumstance  of  its  being  high  water  sooner  on  i  ;e  north 
coast  up  as  high  as  the  Esquimaux  Islands  than  at  the  east  point  of 
Anticosti.  The  waters  having  thus  attained  a  higher  level  to  the  north- 
ward may  in  consequence  flew  to  the  southward.  On  the  other  hand,  it 
must  be  mentioned  that  this  stream  was  observed  at  times  during  the 
ebb  tide. 

It  frequently  happens  that  when  this  current  from  the  northward  is 
running  another  from  the  westward  comes  along  the  south  coast,  in 
which  case  they  meet  at  the  reef  pff  Heath  Point,  and  cause  a  great 
ripple  or  irregular  breaking  sea.  When  this  has  been  observed  there 
has  been  usually  a  fresh  breeze  along  the  land  on  either  side  of  the 
island,  the  wind  on  the  north  side  of  the  island  beiug  from  the  north- 
ward whilst  that  along  the  south  side  was  westward.  Both  these  winds 
were  observed  blowing  a  smart  double-reefed  topsail  breeze  at  the  same 
time,  and  for  a  whole  day  together,  and  yet  never  meet  round  the  east 
end  of  the  island,  which  is  nowhere  more  than  200  feet  in  height.    Be- 


ISLANDS    IN    GULF   ST.    LAWRENCK. 

Mveen  the  two  wi.uls  there  was  a  triai.KuIar  space  of  cal,,.  and  licht  baf. 
liiijf  airs.  The  base  of  this  triangle  extended  from  Heath  Point  to  East 
CHi)e,  and  its  apex  from  6  to  8  miles  to  tlio  eastward  of  the  island.  This 
oircmu«tuM.,e  is  mentioned  because  it  would  Ih>  dangerous  for  a  vessel 
to  stand  into  the  calm  space  between  the  two  winds  where  the  hiirh 
cross  sea  and  constantly  changing  light  airs  might  leave  her  at  the 
mercy  of  the  current,  in  no  sn.all  danger  of  being  set  on  the  Heath 
x^oint  Iveei. 


if- 

■I  ■ 


T 


li^lit  baf- 
lit  to  East 
11(1.  This 
r  n  v(>H8eI 
the  high 
er  at  the 
lie  Heath 


C  II  A  P  T  K  K  I  I  I . 

OAPE  BRETON  ISLAND. 

Cnpe  Breton  Island  i»  of  an  irrcifular  trian^iiliirHhupo,  ntitl  its  weHt 
coa>ft  is  duiij^uroiis  ol'  accoss  and  possosstis  no  harbor  bnt  Port  Hood. 
Its  other  Hliores,  though  rut^ged,  are  indented  witii  lunnt'roiis  iiaysand 
inlets,  the  hirgost  of  which,  the  Hraa  d'Or  Lake,  nearly  divides  the 
island  into  two,  and,  boinff  deep  enoujjh  for  vessels  of  large  draft, 
att'ords  great  facilities  for  commerce. 

The  Resources  of  the  island  consist  ehietly  in  its  tiinlun',  its  agri- 
cnltnral  productions,  and  its  fisheries.  The  coal  mines  are  wori<e«l  in 
the  neighborliood  of  Sydney.  There  is  abundant  room  and  fair  means 
of  providing  subsistence  for  a  population  ten  times  its  i)resent  amount, 
which  numbers  about  76,000. 

West  Coast. — Crossiug  the  northern  entrance  of  the  Out  of  Canso, 
from  the  lightliouse  to  Cape  Breton  Ishiiid  at  Hett'ernan  Point,  a  dis- 
tance of  IJ  miles,  the  description  will  be  continued  northward  along  the 
western  shore  of  the  island.  For  the  first  7  miles  there  are  no  detached 
dangers,  nor  does  the  sliallow  water  anywhere  extend  to  the  distance 
of  A  mile  from  the  shore.  Tlie  land  is  high  and  rather  barren  looking, 
rising  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  from  the  shore  to  the  summit  of  a  ridge 
850  feet  above  the  sea,  and  which  continues  ]>arallel  to  the  coast  line 
for  5  or  6  miles.  The  only  remarkable  object  in  this  interval  is  the 
church  at  Craignish,  which  will  be  aeen  distant  2'^  miles  from  the  light- 
house. At  Long  Point,  a  low  cliff  of  red  sandstone,  the  coast  becomes 
dangerous  of  approach,  and  continues  so  to  Emersion  Point,  a  distance 
of  7  or  8  miles. 

Judique  Shoal,  the  greatest  danger  in  St.  George  Bay,  is  of  rock 
and  about  ^  mile  in  length,  if  the  very  shallow  part  is  only  reckoned,  but 
there  are  patches  with  2  or  3  fathoms  and  much  rocky  ground  both  to 
the  north  and  south  of  it.  The  least  water,  4  feet,  is  close  to  the  outer 
point  of  the  shoal,  and  when  on  it  the  western  extremity  of  the  high- 
land of  Cape  Porcupine  will  appear  in  the  same  line  as  Flat  and  Hef- 
fernan  Points,  bearing  S.  20°  B.  By  keeping  the  whole  of  the  highland 
of  Cape  Porcupine  oi)en  to  the  west  of  Heffernan  Point,  it  will  lead  to 
the  westward  of  the  shoal  in  6  or  7  fathoms ;  or  if  the  church  at  Port 
Hood  be  kept  open  to  the  west  of  Cape  Susan  the  shoal  will  be  cleared 
in  not  less  than  4  fathoms.  There  are  4  fathoms  water  between  the 
shoal  and  land,  but  only  small  craft  should  attempt  the  passage. 

47 


.  iiMiBiif-wtMMiMBinattmwtw^^  titbmiII 


48 


CAPE    BBKTON    ISLAND — N\V.    COAST. 


t  i.. 


i  J 


A  rw\  Imoy  in  placed  on  Ju(li(iue  Slioal  about  the  iHt  of  May,  and 
takiMi  up  in  November. 

Judique  Bank  Vh-h  NW.  2^  miles  from  the  Jndiqiie  Slioal,  4^  futh- 
oiiiM  U'liMt  water  on  a  Hnuill  rocky  |»atcli,  with  much  foul  ground  around  it. 
Wlien  on  tliiH  pat(!h  I'ortHmoutli  l'oint(tiu'  Hontli  end  of  Smith  iHhvnd) 
and  Cape  Linzee  will  aj)|>ear  touoiiiuK,  and  beariuK  N.  4"^  K.;  .luditpie 
cliurch,  N.  H-l'^  It).  3.^  mlleH,  and  the  left  or  eaHtern  termination  of  the 
hijjhiand  of  Cape  Porcupine  just  shut  in  behind  llett'ernan  Point.  A 
veHHel  will  paHH  to  the  weHtward  of  this  bank,  which  i8  only  danKerou.s 
to  vessels  of  larjfc  <lraft  when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running,  by  keep- 
ing; Cape  liin/ee  shut  in  behind  Smith  Island,  or  the  whole  of  the 
highland  of  Cape  Porcupine  open  to  the  westward  of  llett'ernan  Point. 

Judique  Pond,  close  to  the  north  of  Judique  church,  is  barred  by  a 
sandy  ridge,  so  as  only  to  admit  boats  at  high  water.  The  shallow 
water  extends  ott'it  to  the  distance  of  1|  miles.  Catherine  Pond  and 
Susan  Creek,  distant  3  aud  5  miles  respectively  to  the  north  of  the 
church,  are  similar  places. 

Fort  Hood,  the  only  safe  anchorage  on  the  west  coast  of  Oape  Bre- 
ton Island  to  the  north  of  the  Gut  of  Causo,  was  formerly  a  much  more 
secure  harbor.  Smith  Island  being  theu  a  peninsula,  united  to  the  main- 
land by  a  range  of  high  sand  hills,  which  has  since  been  eutirely  swept 
away. 

Anchorage.--At  the  anchorage  in  the  NW.  part  of  Port  Hood, 
formed  by  the  east  side  of  Smith  Island,  there  are  depths  of  3  to  4J 
fathoms,  mud,  and  the  heavy  swell  is  prevented  from  rolling  in  round 
the  NE.  extreme  of  the  island  by  a  shoal  which  extends  about  800 
yards  to  the  southward  from  Smith  Point,  with  2  to  4  feet  water,  and 
marked  by  a  small  red  buoy. 

Supplies.— The  village  of  Port  Hood  will  be  seen  on  the  mainland 
opposite  the  northern  part  of  Smith  Island ;  it  is  well  situated,  aud 
will  be  recognized  by  the  steejde  of  the  church  aud  the  court-house  of 
stone.  Supplies  of  fresh  provisions  may  be  obtained  there,  but  there 
is  no  good  watering  place,  the  supply  from  the  wells  of  Smith  Island 
being  scanty  aud  not  very  good,  while  the  brooks  of  the  mainland  are 
difficult  of  access,  and  sometimes  nearly  dry  in  summer. 

Spithead,  a  sandy  flat,  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  extending  1,200 
yards  northeastward  from  Portsmouth  Point,  the  south  extremity  of 
the  island,  affords  partial  shelter  from  south  winds,  but  a  strong  south 
or  southwesterly  gale  of  any  duration  sends  in  a  heavy  swell. 

Dean  Shoal,  on  the  mainland  side  of  the  port,  extends  from  the 
sandy  beach  at  Mill  Creek  to  the  distance  of  600  yards.  It  is  a  steep 
sandy  flat,  which,  together  with  the  shallow  water  as  far  out  as  oppo- 
site Portsmouth  Point,  but  not  farther  to  the  south,  will  be  cleared  at 
200  yards  distance  by  keeping  Oape  Linzee  and  Isthmus  Point  in  line, 
bearing  about  N.  10°  W.  On  the  same  side,  but  outside  the  entrance 
of  the  harbor,  a  rocky  shoal,  with  12  feet  of  water,  runs  out  700  yards 


HMITll     IHLANI) COAHT. 


40 


May,  aud 

il,  4^  futh- 
nrouiul  it. 
ith  InIiiikI) 
;  Jiulique 
ion  of  the 
I'oiiit.  A 
ilatiKerouti 
by  keep- 
ole  of  the 
I  all  Point, 
irred  by  a 
e  Hhallow 
Pond  aud 
th  of  the 

Dape  Bre- 
inch  more 
the  main- 
ely  swept 

jrt  Hood, 
of  3  to  4J 
:  in  round 
ibout  800 
rater,  aud 

mainland 
ated,  and 
;-house  of 
but  there 
;h  Island 
ilaud  are 

lug  1,200 
remity  of 
mg  south 

from  the 
is  a  steep 
as  oppo- 
leared  at 
it  in  line, 
entrance 
00  yards 


from  tile  Hliore  ^  mile  to  tlio  nortiiward  of  Ilajjged  Point.  TIiIh,  being 
Htt-epto,  must  lie  carefully  avoided  l)y  a  vensel  of  large  driifr.  Cape 
Hu.san  uml  Kate  I'oiiit  in  one,  l>earing  H.  !;]'>  K.,  juHt  lead.s  outside  it, 
but  may  not  be  eaHily  mad«^  out  Ity  HtrangcrN. 

Smith  Island  Ih  2  miles  long  and  210  feet  high,  and  it  po.sNeMNt's 
miu!h  IV'rtile  laud.  With  the  exception  of  tiie  sanely  \u:iw\i  in  the  Imy, 
the  island  is  eveiywlu-it^  surrounded  l)y  dirt's  of  various  luMglits  up  to 
123  feet.  Tln'y  are  foinied  of  soft  reddish  saiuistones,  sluiles,  and 
marls,  uontaining  oecasioiuilly  thin  seams  of  coal,  witli  IhmIs  of  gyp> 
sum,  limestone,  and  trap,  wliieli  last  are  well  shown  at  the  N\V.  end 
of  the  island. 

Henry  Island,  or  Just  au  Corps,  lies  about  one  mile  outside  of  Smith 
Island.  It  is  nuuth  the  smaller  of  the  two,  being  one  mile  long,  atid  is 
greatest  height  is  lO.'i  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water.  It  is  of  the 
flame  rock  fornuition,  and  also  nearly  surrounded  wil.iclitt's,  which  yield 
rapidly  to  the  action  of  the  waves  and  of  the  atnu)sphere,  an<l  which 
on  the  outer  side  attain  the  elevation  of  100  feet  above  the  3ea.  It  has 
no  permanent  inhal)itants,  but  is  much  frecpu^nted  by  <i8herme:'  during 
the  fishing  seasons. 

The  island  is  l)old  to  seaward,  but  shallow  water  runs  out  from  Fipb 
ery  Point,  its  SB.  extremity,  )(  mile  to  the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  ami  jj 
mile  to  5  fathoms. 

The  passage  between  these  islands  is  rendered  so  extreme'v  in  ricate 
aud  dangerous  by  rocky  shoals,  that  it  should  never  be  attempted  unless 
in  a  very  small  ve^isel  and  with  line  weather. 

Directions. — Uaving  a  fair  wiiul,  pass  to  the  southward  of  Uenry 
Island  at  a  distance  not  less  than  ^[  mile,  steering  N.  77°  E.  until  the 
south  end  of  the  trees  is  in  line  with  the  spire  of  the  Roma  Catholic 
church,  l)earing  N.  21°  K.,  which  will  lead  east  of  the  Portsmouth  and 
Si)ithead  Shoals,  and  when  the  east  end  of  II,  Smith's  house  is  in  line 
with  the  west  end  of  the  chapel,  bearing  N.  24°  W.,  steer  for  the  an- 
chorage in  the  NW.  part  of  the  port. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  are  weak  at  the  anchorage,  and  their  rate 
does  not  ordinarily  amount  to  one  knot  anyw»'pre  within  the  harbor. 
The  flood  comes  from  the  north  and  the  ebb  fr'^:,;  ri.e  south.  The  flood 
stream  from  the  north  meets  that  which  comes  in  through  the  (lut  of 
Oanso  off  Long  Point,  whence  they  set  to  the  NVV.,  curving  round  the 
bay  towards  Cape  St.  George. 

Aspect  of  Coast — From  Cape  Linzee  to  Cape  St.  Lawrence,  a  dis- 
tance of  73  miles,  the  coast  is  without  either  harbor  lOr  safe  anchorage 
for  ships.  The  general  character  is  high  and  bold,  the  dangers  being 
few  and  close  in  shore,  but  ii,  is  nevertheless  a  dangerous  coast  to  be 
near  in  autumn  or  early  winter,  when  the  prevailing  NW.  winds  send 
in  a  heavy  sea,  and  the  set  of  the  current  is  often  in  the  same  direc- 
tion. The  swell  frequently  precedes  the  wind  by  many  hours,  and  as 
6489 4 


g;»  i  twiiiiwa»SMi»iiiaaBa^ifssirjW*»maiij:..i:ir7iJi.ti;a^^ 


^ 


60 


CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND NW.    COAST. 


hi 

ill 


}■, 


;!    j'il 


' 


there  is  no  good  holding  ground,  becomes  dangerous  to  vespsls  caught 
close  in  shore. 

The  prevailing  rocks  of  this  coast  are  sandstones,  shales,  and  con- 
glomerates,  with  occasional  beds  of  gypsum  and  thin  seams  of  coal,  to- 
gether with  a  more  ancient  slate  formation  in  nearly  vertical  strata, 
forming  the  higher  hills  and  rising  in  one  part  to  nearly  1,300  feet  above 
the  sea.  These  rocks  form  precipitous  shores,  on  which  boats  can  land 
only  in  fine  woather  at  the  mouths  of  ravines  or  small  streams.  The 
settlements  continue  along  the  coast  as  far  northward  as  Clieticau, 
after  which  the  mountains  approach  close  to  the  shore,  excepting  at 
Grandanse,  where  there  art  seven  resident  families. 

The  Fisheries  are  valuable.  Salmon  are  taken  in  all  the  principal 
streams,  and  the  Margaree  is  so  celebrated  for  its  salmon  fishery  that 
it  has  sometimes  been  called  the  Salmon  River.  Herring,  mackerel, 
cod,  etc.,  abound  in  their  seasons,  and  are  frequently  taken  in  large 
quantities.  The  seal  fishery  is  also  attempted  occasionally,  but  is  a  pre- 
carious pursuit. 

Currents. — Eveu  with  a  smooth  sea  and  in  fine  summer  weather 
vessels  are  set  in  towards  this  coast,  an  effect  which  seems  to  be  due 
someiiuies  to  the  general  current  from  the  NW.  coming  from  between 
the  Magdale.T  Islands  and  Prin(!e  PJdward  Island,  and  at  other  times 
to  the  direction  of  the  ebb  stream  from  Northumberland  Strait,  inclining 
towards  these  shores.  These  streams,  being  inconstant  and  irregular 
both  in  strength  and  direction,  are  therefore  the  more  dangerous,  and 
require  the  moro  to  be  guarded  against.  In  the  summer  months,  how- 
ever, the  rate  of  the  current  or  tides  will  not  be  found  to  exceed  one 
knot  even  close  inshore,  excepting  round  Cape  St.  Lawrence  and  Cape 
North,  where  it  sometimes  runs  at  the  rate  of  2  or  3  knots,  causing  a 
heavy  breaking  sea.  Its  direction  for  three-fourths  of  the  time  is  from 
the  westward ;  this  appears  to  b",  due  to  the  combined  action  of  the 
current  and  ebb  tide  predominating  over  the  flood  stream  from  the  NE., 
so  as  to  render  it  nearly  imperceptible,  excepting  at  or  near  the  spring 
tides.  There  is  no  doubt  that  winds,  present  or  at  a  distance,  also  in- 
fluence these  streams,  as  they  have  been  observed  to  do  in  all  parts  of 
the  gulf. 

IvZabou  River,  at  5  miles  from  Fort  Hood,  admits  small  schooners, 
having  6  feet  at  low  water  over  its  bar  of  sand  through  a  dredged  chan- 
nel. The  bar  shifts  occasionally  during  heavy  NW.  gales,  but  is  seldom 
disturbed  during  the  summer  months,  when  those  gales  are  of  rare  oc- 
currence. 

From  the  er. trance  to  the  bridge,  a  distance  of  3 J  miles,  this  river 
resembles  a  mountain  lake,  being  in  one  part  5  miles  wide  and  carrying 
8  fathoms  water.  Boats  can  ascend  with  the  tide  to  2  or  3  miles  above 
the  bridge,  where  the  fresh  water  forms  only  a  small  stream.  Besides 
the  Mabou,  which  is  the  main  branch,  there  are  two  other  smiiHer 
streams,  the  SW.  Arm  and  Becket  River,  which  last  enters  from  the 


e' 


astward. 


i*t^e=5»;s»K  ^*&^ 


MABOU    RIVER — CHETICAN   ISLAND. 


61 


P3l8  caught 

ss,  aiu?  con- 
5  of  coal,  to- 
tical  strata, 

0  feet  above 
ata  can  land 
eanis.  The 
8  Clieticau, 
xceptiug  at 

lie  principal 
flahery  that 
J,  mackerel, 
eii  in  large 
but  is  a  pre- 

ler  weather 
}  to  be  due 
)in  between 
other  times 
;it,  inclining 
id  irregular 
gerous,  and 
onths,  how- 
exceed  one 
e  and  Cape 
!,  causing  a 
time  is  from 
ition  of  the 
om  the  NE., 
r  the  spring 
nee,  also  in- 
all  parts  of 

1  schooners, 
edged  chan- 
ut  is  seldom 
)  of  rare  oc- 

s,  this  river 
nd  carrying 
miles  above 
in.  Besides 
her  smiiHer 
!rs  from  the 


The  shores  of  the  Mabou  are  well  settled,  principally  by  Scotch 
highlanders;  flourishing  farms  are  seen  on  either  side,  and  there  IkS  a 
church  on  the  northern  bank  3  miles  within  the  entrance.  The  scenery 
is  very  beautiful,  the  mountains  rising  immediately  from  the  northern 
shore  to  the  height  of  870  feet. 

Tides.— The  entrance  to  Mabon  River,  at  the  southern  end  of  a  low 
sand  bar,  is  only  100  yards  wide,  and  the  tides  frequently  run  there  at 
the  rate  of  4  knots  ,  it  is  therefore  a  dangerous  place  to  enter,  except- 
ing with  a  flowing  tide  and  a  smooth  sea.  NE,  winds  often  cause  high 
tides  ;  SW.  winds  the  contrary. 

The  Mabou  Highland  is  a  very  remarkable  feature  of  the  coast, 
seen  from  great  distances  seaward.  It  extends  II  miles  along  tlia coast 
to  the  NE.,  forming  a  lofty  and  precipitous  shore,  and  rising  to  the 
height  of  1,000  feet  above  the  sea.  After  passing  these  highlands,  the 
coast  becomes  less  elevated,  the  beaches  and  landing  places  more  fre- 
quent, and  the  settlements  are  continuous  until  past  Chetican  Island. 

Sea  Wolf  Island  is  of  an  oval  shape,  I  i  miles  long  and  200  feet 
high.  It  is  of  sandstone,  precipitous  and  quite  bold  all  around,  excei)t- 
ing  at  the  NE.  point,  and  there  the  shallow  water  extends  only  200 
yards,  it  attbrds  some  shelter  to  small  Ashing  vessels  and  boats,  which 
can  land  upon  it  only  in  tine  jummer  weather;  at  other  times  the  sea 
rolls  completely  round  it,  and  the  anchorage  is  never  safe,  the  ground 
being  everywhere  rocky.  Between  this  island  and  the  shore  the  bot- 
tom is  of  rock,  with  loose  sand  and  gravel  occasionally.  The  neigh- 
boring sea  abounds  with  tish. 

Margaree  River  has  5  feet  over  its  rocky  bar  at  low  water,  in  a  very 
narrow  and  intricate  channel,  through  which  the  tides  run  at  tlic  rate 
of  4  knots.  It  is  only  under  tVivorable  circumstances  of  wind  and 
weather,  and  with  a  smooth  sea,  that  schooners  can  safely  attempt  to 
enter  it.  The  surf  on  the  bar  is  at  times  heavy  and  dangerous  to  boats, 
especially  when  the  strong  tide  is  running  out  against  the  wind  and 
sea.  The  shores  of  this  river  are  well  settled,  principally  by  Acadians 
and  Scotch  highlanders,  who,  besides  farming,  prosecute  the  salmon 
and  other  fisheries  (1860). 

Squirrel  Pon«l.— Between  the  Margaree  and  Chetican  Island  there 
are  several  places  v-here  boats  can  land  in  fine  weather,  especially  at 
Squirrel  Pond,  distant  3  miles  from  Chetican.  There  are  farms  all 
along  this  part,  the  mountains  running  parallel  to  the  shore,  at  a  short 
distance  back,  and  attaining,  at  Mount  Squirrel,  in  rear  of  Squirrel 
Pond,  the  elevation  of  1,220  feet  above  the  sea, 

Chetican  Island,  distant  10  miles  NE,  from  the  Margaree,  is  only  an 
island  when  high  tides  overflow  the  low  and  narrow  beach  of  sand  and 
shinirle  wliicii  unites  it  to  the  mainland  at  its  southern  extremity.  This 
beadi  forms  the  shore  of  the  bay,  within  the  SW,  point  of  the  island. 
The  depth  of  water  in  this  roadstead  is  U  ftithoms,  but  the  bottom,  of 
sand  and  gravel,  is  so  loose  and  bad  for  holding  that  the  anchorage 
becomes  quite  unsafe  after  the  mouth  of  August. 


f^S 


4f 


V,, 


IP 


I  fif; 
!ti; 


^\: 


&2 


CAPE    BRETON    I8LAKD — N\V.    COAST. 


Anchorage. — At  no  time  is  this  anchorage  to  be  recommended,  and 
therefore  vessels  merely  wishing  to  communicate  with  the  shore  had 
better  anchor  outside  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  or  two,  where  they  will 
have  room  to  weigh  in  the  event  of  the  wind  coming  in  from  the  west- 
ward. 

Coast— There  is  no  landing  on  the  outside  of  Chetican  Island,  where 
the  cliffs  of  sandstone,  containing  coal  fossils,  are  everywhere  perpen-  . 
dicular  or  overhanging,  being  constantly  undermined  by  the  sea.  These 
cliffs,  which  extend  the  whole  len  ?th  of  the  island,  from  Chetican  Point 
northeastward  to  Enragee  Point,  are  nearly  equal  in  elevation  to  any 
part  of  the  island,  rising  in  one  part  to  the  height  of  200  feet  above  the 
sea. 

Chetican  Harbor,  between  the  island  and  the  mainland,  is  entered 
from  the  NE.  between  the  shingle  spit  at  Cape  Gros,  the  NE.  extreme 
of  the  island,  and  Caveau  Point.  Within  this  entrance,  but  outside  the 
bar,  which  is  ^  mile  farther  in,  small  fishing  vessels  sometimes  anchor, 
but  the  northerly  winds  send  in  so  heavy  a  sea  that  this  is  considered 
even  less  secure  than  the  unsafe  anchorage  at  the  SW.  end  of  the  island. 
There  is  a  dept|i  of  3^  fathoms  within  the  harbor,  but  only  2  feet  at  low 
water  over  its  bar  of  sand,  which  is  then  in  great  part  dry. 

Supplies.— The  establishment  of  Messrs.  Robin  &  Co.,  of  Jersey,  on 
Chetican  Point,  is  the  principal  fishing  station  on  this  coast,  and  will  be 
easily  recognized  by  the  buildings,  fish  stages,  and  flagstaff.  There  are 
several  other  houses  on  the  inner  side  of  the  island,  and  a  settlement  of 
Acadians  on  the  mainland  opposite,  where  supplies  of  fresh  provision 
to  a  limited  extent  may  be  obtained,  and  also  water,  which  can  not  be 
had  good  or  in  any  considerable  quantity  upon  the  island. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Chetican  Harbor  at  8  J  h. ; 
ordinary  springs  rise  3J  feet,  neaps  2  feet.  NE.  winds  cause  high  tides, 
and  SW.  winds  the  contrary. 

Caveau  Shoals. — The  Caveau  Shoals,  which  are  much  in  the  way  of 
vessels  wishing  to  anchor  oft"  the  entrance  of  Chetican  Harbor,  are  two 
rocky  patches,  with  II  feet  least  water,  lying  at  the  distance  of  J  mile 
oft"  Caveau  Point,  and  N.  30=>  E.  from  J  to  J  mile  from  Cape  Gros. 

The  Jerome  Ledge,  with  only  5  feet  water,  lies  in  the  same  direction 
from  Cape  Gros,  and  at  the  distance  of  IJ  miles.  It  is  of  considerable 
extent,  being  'i  mile  long,  and  its  NE.  point  reaches  to  the  distance  of 
a  mile  from  the  shore.  The  line  of  10  fathoms  water  is  only  600  yards 
outside  this  ledge  nd  the  Caveau  Shoals;  there  is  therefore  little  warn- 
ing from  the  lead ;  but  vessels  beating  along  shore,  and  standing  towards 
them,  will  avoid  them  by  tacking  when  the  points  on  the  outside  of 
Chetican  Island  come  in  line,  bearing  S.  27°  W. 

At  Fresqu'ile  the  foot  of  the  niountains  are  close  to  the  shore,  after 
which  there  are  no  inhabitants  nor  any  good  landing  place,  up  to  Grand 
Anse,  15  miles  from  Chetican,  where  there  is  a  settlement,  and  a  small 
river  silted  up  by  a  shingle  beach,  on  which  boats  can  land,  and  be 


CAPES    ST.    LAWRENCE   AND    NORTH. 


53 


tded,  aud 
bore  had 
they  will 
the  west- 
id,  where 
e  perpeu- 
a.  These 
jan  Point 
3ti  to  any 
ibove  the 

s  eutered 
.  extreme 
itside  the 
IS  anchor, 
jnsidered 
he  island, 
jet  at  low 

ersey,  on 
tid  will  be 
rhere  are 
:lement  of 
provision 
an  not  be 

rat  8 J h.; 
igh  tides, 

ihe  way  of 
r,  are  two 
of  J  mile 
rros. 

direction 
isiderable 
istance  of 
600  yards 
ttle  waru- 
g  towards 
oatside  of 

lore,  after 
I  to  Grand 
id  a  small 
id,  and  be 


hauled  up  in  case  of  need.  From  Grand  Ause  to  Cape  St.  Lawrence,  a 
distance  of  13  miles,  the  coast  is  mountaitious,  with  precipitous  shores, 
aftbrdiugau  inditterent  landing  for  boats  at  one  or  two  places,  an«l  there 
only  with  a  smooth  sea. 

Cape  St.  Lawrence,  svliich  forms  the  termination  of  the  NVV.  coast 
of  Cape  Breton  Island,  is  of  slate  rock,  affording  no  landing  excepting 
on  the  west  side,  where  there  is  a  brook,  aud  a  steep  stony  beach,  on 
which  a  boat  can  be  hauled  up  with  ditticulty.  Round  this  headland  to 
the  SE.  is  Bear  Hill,  a  sugar  loaf  750  feet  high,  and  close  to  the  shore. 
This  is  distant  less  than  a  mi'e  fiom  the  cape  ;  and  at  an  equal  distance 
farther  is  Black  Kock,  al»Vc.ys  above  water,  and  about  350  yards  off 
shore.  Meat  Cove,  where  there  is  a  settlement,  and  good  lauding  for 
boats,  lies  one  mile  NW.  from  Black  Point.  It  is  in  telegraphic  com- 
munication with  the  Magdalen  Islands,  Bird  Bock,  and  the  United 
States. 

St.  Lawrence  Bay,  between  Black  Point  and  Cape  North,  is  4^  miles 
wide  and  IJ  miles  deep,  with  bold  shores,  and  .i  depth  of  water  not  too 
great  for  anchoring;  but  the  bottom  is  not  to  be  trusted,  being  either 
of  rock  or  loose  sand.  Vessels  requiring  supplies  may  anchor  there  in 
the  summer  months,  when  strong  northerly  winds  are  of  rare  occur- 
rence, and  will  find  9  or  10  fathoms  water  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile 
off  shore  in  the  bottom  of  the  bay,  but  they  should  be  ready  to  weigh 
immediately  on  the  anproach  of  a  wind  from  the  sea.  At  Wreck  Cove 
and  at  Deadman  Pond  there  are  settlements,  and  good  landing,  the 
principal  fishing  establishment  being  at  the  last-named  place. 

Cape  North,  the  NE.  extremity  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  is  a  bold 
and  rocky  headLiud,  of  slate  in  nearly  vertical  strata,  rising  abruptly 
from  the  sea  to  the  height  of  1,100  feet.  There  is  no  shallow  water  off 
it,  only  some  rocks  above  water,  which  at  Money  Point,  a  mile  to  the 
SE.  of  the  cape,  run  off  a  short  distance. 

SE.   COAST   OF   CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND. 

Coast. — From  Michaux  Point  to  Cape  Gabarus  the  land  is  low  and 
has  a  barren  aud  rocky  ajtpearance,  and  the  shore  is  broken  into  numer- 
ous lakes  and  ponds,  protected  from  the  sea  by  beaches  of  gravel  and 
some  small  rocky  islands  and  ledges.  Occasionally  there  are  reddish  clay 
cliffs  70  to  00  feet  high,  but  at  a  distance  from  the  land  there  are  no  re- 
markable features  to  be  easily  recognized  by  a  stranger. 

The  Bank  of  Soundings  again  contracts  off  Santosprit  Island,  and 
at  2  miles  from  the  shore  the  depth  is  40  fathoms.  C  i;  thiM  account,  in 
foggy  weather,  the  lead  should  on  no  account  be  nc  .r.^jted,  and  no  jiart 
of  this  coast  approached  nearer  than  the  latter  depth. 

Current. — About  3  miles  off  this  coast,  a  current  is  often  experienced 
running  nearly  one  knot  per  hour  to  the  SW. ;  nearer  the  shore  it  is 
much  less  constant. 

Michaux  Point,  the  eastern  limit  of  Chedabucto  Bay,  is  a  wooded 


(  I 


If  '■ 


'*  *■ 


u 


CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND — 8E.    COAST. 


peninsula,  not  more  than  40  feet  high,  joined  to  the  !nain  bind  by  a 
beech  of  sand.  The  tliree  low  Basque  Islets  of  clay  resting  on  slate 
lie  to  the  (iaatward,  and  are  distant  one  mile  from  it.  There  is  deep  wa- 
ter north  of  these  islets  as  well  as  between  the  islets  and  Michaux  Point: 
and  m  Michaux  Cove  there  is  good  holding  ground  and  some  shelter  to 
vessels  during  the  prevalence  of  westerly  winds,  on  which  account 
coasters  deeply  laden  occasionally  anchor  there.  A  few  fishermen  fre- 
quent this  cove  during  the  summer,  and  their  huts  are  found  on  the 
north  side  of  Michaux  Point  and  on  the  Basque  Islets. 

Shoals.— The  water  is  deep  to  the  southward  of  Michaux  Point,  but 
around  the  Basque  Islets  are  several  dangers.  A  shoal  carrying  3  fath- 
oms  water  extends  SE.  ^mile  from  the  south  islet;  a  reef  of  rocks  west 
3t)()  yards ;  a  shoal,  having  a  rock  with  9  feet  water  on  it,  N  W.  600  yards 
from  the  same  islet ;  and  a  rock,  dry  at  half  tide,  west  400  yards  from 
the  north  islet. 

The  Basque  Shoal,  lying  8. 24°  E.,  J  mile  from  the  South  Basque 
Islet,  has  4  fathoms  of  water  on  it,  and  breaks  only  in  heavy  weather. 
Red  Island,  just  open  of  Michaux  Point,  bearing  N.  80'^  W.,  will  lead  to 
the  southward. 

Directions.— When  standing  for  the  anchorage  in  Michaux  Cove, 
Vring  the  east  side  of  Michaux  Point  to  bear  N.  24°  VV.,  and  then  run  in 
for  the  cove  N.  13o  W.  Having  passed  the  point  at  the  distance  of  400 
yards  in  9  fathoms  water,  round  to  and  anchor,  with  Michaux  Point  S. 
20°  W.,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  sand  and  clay. 

Anchorage. — It  would  not  be  safe  to  remain  at  this  anchorage  if  the 
wind  veers  to  the  SE.  or  east,  with  a  falling  barometer.  In  leaving 
it,  if  the  wind  is  scant  for  the  south  passage,  there  is  a  good  channel 
free  from  danger  between  the  Basque  Islets  and  the  Shag  Ledge. 

Black  Breaker,  with  6  feet  water,  is  a  rock  lying  one  mile  southward 
of  Bell  Point.  The  north  side  of  the  Basque  Islets  and  the  north  side 
of  IMichaux  Point  in  line,  S.  77°  W.,  will  lead  i  mile  northward  of  the 
least  water  on  the  Bad  Neighbor,  and  the  same  distance  southward  of 
the  Black  Breaker. 

Coast— Between  Michaux  Point  and  Saut^sprit  Island  the  shore  is 
rocky  and  dangerous  of  approach. 

Grand  River  enters  the  sea  about  4  miles  east  of  Michaux  Point, 
between  Ked  Head  (70  feet  high)  and  Bell  Point,  which  is  a  low  point, 
forming  the  east  point  of  entrance,  and  from  which  shoal  water  and  a 
reef,  with  only  6  feet  on  it  at  low  tide,  extends  i  mile  to  the  SW. 
Although  the  tide  flows  up  this  river  3  miles,  the  narrowness  of  the 
entrance,  an<l  the  rapidity  of  the  current,  make  it  dangerous  of  access, 
even  for  boats,  except  at  high  water.  The  shores  are  settled  by  people 
of  Highland  desc(  nt. 

L'Archeveque  Cove,  at  3J  miles  west  of  Santesprit  Island,  affords 
shelter  at  high  water  to  small  vessels  drawing  less  than  6  feet. 

Bad  Neighbor,  a  rocky  shoal  with  2  fathoms  water  on  it,  lies  S. 


i<?^^£Srt±«^4«'SeT  ^  i.-Kv^ 


SANTK8PRIT    ISLAND OABARU8    BAY. 


55 


29°  W.,  IJ  miles  from  Sautosprit  Lighthonse.    It  only  breaks  in  heavy 
weather. 

Santbsprit  Island  is  30  feet  high  and  nf  clay  banks  resting  on  slate, 
and  partly  wooded.  A  reef  of  rocks,  partly  dry  at  low  water,  extends 
from  it  to  the  mainland,  and  leaves  no  channel.  The  island  may  be  ap- 
proached on  its  sonth  side  to  4  mile. 

The  Tilbury  Rocks  rise  from  a  shoal  of  sand  and  stones,  which  ex- 
tends i  mile  from  the  shore  at  1^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Capelin 
Cove. 

The  Seal  Rocks,  a  reef  nearly  dry  at  low  water,  lie  400  yards  from  the 
shore,  and  1 J  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Capeline  Cove.  A  few  fishermen 
have  their  hnts  on  the  east  side  of  this  cove,  where  their  boats  have  the 
protection  of  a  point  of  rocks. 

Frambois  Rock,  with  4  fathoms  least  water  on  it,  lies  off  the  center 
of  Frambois  Cove,  at  2  miles  distance  from  the  shore.  The  cove  affords 
no  shelter,  and  has  a  dangerous  reef  named  the  Outer  Breaker  lying  oft' 
its  western  shore,  5  mile  from  Cape  lied. 

Pot  Rock  lies  nearly  ^  mile  from  Fourche  Head,  and  only  breaks 
in  heavy  weather.  The  Shag  Rock,  kept  in  line  with  the  Green  Kock, 
and  touching  Cape  Gabarus,  bearing  N.  40°  E.,  will  lead  to  the  SW. 
of  this  danger,  and  outside  all  tiie  shoal  water  in  Fourche  Bay. 

Fourche  Bay  and  Inlet. — Between  Fourche  Head  and  Cape  Gabarus 
are  many  rocks  and  shoals,  inside  of  which  is  Fourche  Bay,  affording 
no  shelter,  and  dangerous  of  approach.  Fourche  Head,  the  west  ex- 
treme of  the  bay,  is  a  hummock,  bare  of  trees,  and  40  feet  high.  A  bell 
buoy,  surmounted  by  a  staff"  and  cage,  and  painted  red,  is  moored  in  10 
fathoms,  about  ^  mile  SE.  from  Fourche  Head. 

On  the  north  side  of  Fourche  Head  is  Fourche  Inlet,  on  the  shores  of 
which  are  settled  a  few  families  engaged  in  fisheries.  The  inlet  has  a 
bar  at  its  entrance,  nearly  dry  at  lo  w  water,  and  only  affords  secure 
shelter  to  boats. 

Q-abarus  Bay. — From  White  Point,  a  low  rocky  point,  2  miles  west 
from  Louisburg,  the  land  trends  round  to  the  westward,  forming  a  deep 
and  capacious  inlet,  named  Gabarus  Bay.  The  fishermen,  whose  scat- 
tered houses  are  principally  situated  on  the  southern  shores  of  the  bay 
(1800),  are  an  industrious  and  thriving  people. 

Rocks. — The  centev  of  this  bay  is  entirely  free  from  danger,  but  on 
the  north  shore,  ^  milofrom  Simon  Point,  lie  some  rocks  nearly  dry  at 
low  water,  and  a  shoal  with  18  feet  on  it  extends  600  yards  from  the 
same  point. 

Cormorant  and  Harbor  Rocks. — The  Cormorant  Kocks,  of  bare 
slate  and  only  15  feet  high,  lie  off  the  northern  shore  of  Gabarus  Bay, 
800  yards  from  Kennington  Head.  They  are  bold-toon  their  south  side ; 
but  east  from  them,  rocky  grounds  extend  400  yards.  Near  the  head 
of  the  bay,  NE.  ^  mile  from  the  Harbor  Rock  (a  low  dry  ledge),  lies  a 
rock  with  18  feet  water. 


j.LiIWI4MJi-l-UW|ii^tfi>UtfMi.l|Wi'liillWI,ilfclijl> 


•itiii 


66 


CAPE    BKETON    ISLAND 8E.    COAST. 


h 


Ronse  Point— Rouse  Point  is  a  peninsula  60  feot  liigh,  witii  clitts 
ot  slate,  and  wooded.  It  is  bold  to,  except  on  the  SE.  side,  where 
a  reef  extends  200  yards  from  the  shore.  Between  this  peninsula  and 
Harbor  i'oint  is  the  only  secure  boat  harbor  in  the  bay. 

Anchorage.— Oabarus Cove  affords  during  the  summer  months  toler- 
ably  safe  ancihorage  in  i  fathoms,  sand  and  clay,  to  vessels  of  moderate 
burden.  The  only  other  anchorage  in  Gabarus  Bay  is  the  roadstead, 
north  of  Cape*  Gabarus,  where  in  8  or  9  fiithonm,  sand,  and  at  the  dis- 
tance  of  600 yards  from  the  high  red  bauk,  a  vessel  during  the  preva- 
lence of  westerly  winds  may  find  good  shelter  and  smooth  water. 

Supplies.— Good  water  can  be  obtained  with  some  difficulty  from 
Irish  Brook,  1^  miles  from  Gabarus  Cove,  and  small  supplies  of  fresh 
provisions  may  be  obtained. 

Cape  Gabarus,  low  and  rocky  at  its  extremity,  may  be  recognized 
at  the  distance  of  some  miles  in  clear  weather  by  some  houses  and  a 
chapel  situated  on  the  rising  ground,  J  mile  Inland  from  the  cape.  A 
rocky  reef  extends  eastward  600  yards  from  the  cape;  whilst  several 
islets,  ledges,  and  rocks  lie  at  various  distances  to  the  southward. 

Mark.— A  vessel  will  pass  to  the  southward  of  all  these  dangers  by 
keeping  the  Shag  Rock— of  slate,  and  20  feet  high— open  south  of  Guyo'n 
Island,  which  is  low  and  bare  of  trees,  and  in  line  with  the  houses  on 
the  north  side  of  Fourche  Inlet,  bearing  S.  66°  W. 

Tides.— The  tidal  streams  in  the  bay  are  weak,  seldom  exceeding 
half  a  knot.  ^ 

Louisburg  Harbor.— Louisburg  contains  now  only  a  few  scattered 
houses,  and  the  ruins  of  its  walls  may  still  be  traced  on  the  west  side 
of  the  harbor.  Its  population  of  1,000  persons  is  principally  employed 
m  the  fisheries  but  all  cultivate  small  farms.  The  land  affords  good 
pasturage,  and  small  supplies  of  fresh  provisions  maybe  generally  pur- 
chased. Good  water  may  be  obtained  from  a  brook  near  Gerratt  Head, 
on  the  western  shore  of  the  harbor.  There  are  two  churches  on  the 
north  sule  of  the  harbor,  but  from  sea  they  are  not  easily  distinguished. 
There  is  railway  communication  with  the  SE.  bar  and  the  town  of 
Sydney. 

Pilots— There  are  no  branch  pilots,  but  any  of  the  fishermen  are  well 
qualified  to  bring  vessels  into  the  harbor. 

Coal  can  be  obtained  in  large  quantities,  and  be  put  on  board 
quickly.  It  is  shipped  at  wharves,  alongside  which  vessels  can  lie  at 
all  times  when  the  harbor  is  open ;  the  mines  are  distant  21  miles  bv 
railway. 

Ice. -The  SW.  Arm  is  sometimes  accessible  to  vessels  all  the  winter. 
The  NE.  Arm  freezes  over  about  15th  January,  but  the  ice  breaks  up  at 
anytime  with  southerly  winds,  andthat  arm  is  only  completely  closed  at 
intervals.  The  first  vessel  usually  arrives  about  15ih  March,  and  the 
last  one  leaves  about  20th  February.  Steam  vessels  coaled  at  Louis- 
burg continuously  during  the  winters  of  1882  and  1883. 


L0UI8BURU. 


m 


The  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  abuuc4()0  yards  wide,  and  beinj; exposed 
to  the  ocean  swell,  should  not  be  attempted  by  vessels  of  hirijo  driifr,  ex- 
cept with  a  leading;  wind,  as  the  shoals  on  either  side  are  of  rock,  aiid 
the  wind  often  battling  and  unsteady.  There  is  no  channel  between 
the  islands  forming  the  SW.  side  of  the  entrance,  and  at  low  water 
Fort  Island  is  so  nearly  joined  by  a  rocky  ledge  to  Rocliford  Point  as 
to  leave  oidy  a  boat  passage. 

Automatic  Signal  Buoy. — A  buoy,  painted  red,  and  fitted  with  an 
automatic  whistle,  is  moored  S.  73^  E.,  and  distant  1^  miles  from  Louis- 
burg  Lighthouse.  From  this  buoy  a  N.  8P  W.  course  will  dear  the 
Broad  Shoal  and  lead  to  the  fairway  of  Louisburg  ITarbor. 

Harbor  Shoal,  with  19  feet  water,  lies  olt'the  entrance  to  Fiouisburg 
Harbor,  N.  53°  B.  J  mile  from  Green  Island,  and  only  breaks  in  very 
heavy  weather.  There  are  reefs  extending  250  yards  in  an  easterly  di- 
rection from  Rocky  and  Fort  Islands.  It  is  marked  by  two  black  spar 
buoys. 

The  north  nhore  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  is  bold-to,  except  south 
from  the  lighthouse,  and  200  yards  from  the  shore,  where  there  is  a  rock 
with  4  fathoms  on  it. 

Nag  Rock. — The  Nag  Rock,  which  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy,  lies  S. 
87°  VV.  800  yards  from  the  lighthouse,  with  5  feet  least  water  on  it.  The 
shoal  extending  about  750  yards  from  Rochford  Point  will  be  cleared  by 
keeping  Loran  Head  and  Lighthouse  Point  in  line. 

White  Rock,  the  shoal  ground  oil"  Russel  Point,  has  extended  to  the 
westward,  and  the  red  buoy  is  now  moored  in  4  feet  at  low  water,  with 
Russell  Point  bearing  X.  70°  E.  distant  300  yards. 

Battery  Shoal.— The  Battery  Shoal,  lying  half  way  between  Battery 
and  Careening  Points,  has  3  fathoms  least  water  on  it;  a  black  spar 
buoy  marks  the  NE.  edge  of  this  shoal.  A  black  spar  buoy  is  also 
mooi'p<l  about  \  mile  south  of  Battery  Point. 

Directions. — To  enter  the  harbor  with  a  leading  wind,  bring  the 
lighthouse  on  any  bearing  from  N.  48°  W.  to  S.  87°  W.,  and  run  in 
upon  it  until  Fort  Island  bears  S.  7<P  W.  Steer  with  Fort  Island  on 
the  latter  bearing  until  the  lighthouse  bears  N.  48°  W.,  then  after 
course  to  N.  87°  W.,  taking  care,  as  the  rocky  ground  ott"  the  Nag  Hock 
J9  approached,  that  Loran  Head  is  not  shut  in  by  Lighthouse  Point, 
until  the  whol3  of  Green  Island  opens  westward  of  Fort  Island;  then, 
if  wishing  to  proceed  to  the  best  anchorage,  steer  N.  48°  W.  for  about  J 
mile,  then  N.  36°  E.  as  Railway  Pier  Point  opens  west  of  Careening 
Point.  Having  passed  Battery  Shoal,  which  will  be  done  by  keeping 
the  summit  of  Green  Island  open  east  of  Fort  Island,  steer  to  the 
northward  up  the  cove  and  anchor  in  5  fathoms,  over  mud  bottom, 
when  Rochford  Point  touches  Careening  Point. 

Anchorage. — In  this  anchorage  there  will  be  some  swell  and  under- 
tow after  heavy  gales  from  the  eastward,  but  the  holding  ground  is 
good,  and  the  water  generally  smooth.    Vessels  sometimes  anchor  in 


tr'P' 


iri 


68 


CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND — 8E.    COAST. 


fi(,: 


■ll 


the  western  part  of  tbu  hiirbor,  but  the  Hiichorage  is  neither  j^ood  nor 
well  Hheltered. 

Tides. — There  is  but  little  tidal  stream  except  at  the  highest  tides, 
when  at  the  entrance  the  rate  of  the  flood  is  about  ^  knot. 

Aspect  of  Coast. — From  Cape  Gabarus  to  Cape  Breton  the  land 
is  of  moderate  height,  and  the  shore  broken  into  coves  and  small  liar- 
bor8,with  some  hummocks  in  the  back  ground,  rising  to  the  height  of  200 
feet.  The  north  coast  of  Gabarus  Bay  is  steep,  the  hills  200  feet  high, ' 
rising  abruptly  ftoui  the  shore;  on  the  south  coast  the  land  is  much 
lower. 

Between  Louisburg  and  Cape  Breton  there  are  three  small  harbors, 
Baleine,  Little  and  Big  Loran,  too  intricate  and  rocky  in  their  entrances 
to  admit  vessels  of  any  harden,  but  affording  excellent  fishing  stations. 

Cape  Breton,  the  extreme  eastern  point  of  Cape  Breton  Island,  is 
low,  rocky,  and  covered  with  grassy  moors.  It  is  bold  to  the  eastward, 
with  the  exception  of  a  rocky  12foot  patch  bearing  S.  53°  E.  distant  4 
mile. 

Lansecoin  Island  is  about  400  yards  in  diameter  and  50  feet  high, 
and  IS  bold  to  seaward ;  but  a  rock,  dry  at  low  water,  lies  between  it 
and  the  cape. 

Portnova  Island  is  rocky  and  precipitous,  300  yards  in  diameter, 
and  50  feet  high.  It  is  bold  to  seaward,  with  the  exception  of  a  rock 
with  only  VJ  feet  water  lying  650  yards  from  its  SW.  side;  but  the 
Chameau  Rock,  which  is  awash,  and  on  which  a  French  frigate  was  lost, 
lies  nearly  midway  between  it  and  the  cape,  leaving  no  passage  for  ships. 

The  Bar  Reef,  which  runs  out  from  Bar  Point  to  the  southward  of 
]\Ienadou  Bay,  and  more  than  half  way  across  to  the  island  of  Scatari, 
was  formerly  a  dry  bar  covered  with  sand  and  grass ;  at  present  the 
only  part  uncovered  at  high  water  is  the  Bar  Stone,  a  single  mass  of 
rock,  about  4  feet  high,  but  at  low  water  the  reef  still  dries  extensively, 
and  completely  shelters  Menadou  from  the  south  wind  and  swell.  The 
Bar  Stone  lies  <{  mile  off  shore,  and  the  reef  continues  ^  mile  farther  out 
towards  the  west  point  of  Scatari.  The  eastern  extremity  a'  this  dan- 
gerous reef,  in  5  fathoms,  bears  S.  15°  E.  1^  miles  from  the  west  point 
of  Scatari,  and  north  2  miles  from  Cape  Breton.  A  line  from  one  of 
those  points  to  the  other  passes  over  the  east  end  of  the  reef  iu  6  feet  at 
low  wat^r;  and  vessels  wi.l  pass  to  the  eastward  of  it,  if  Portnova  Is- 
land be  not  entirely  shut  in  behind  Cape  Breton. 

Menadou  Harbor,  on  the  north  side  of  Menadou  Bay,  ^  mile  within 
Moque  Head,  is  a  semicircular  cove  ^  mile  wide.  Its  shingle  beach  is 
occupied  by  flsh  stages,  and  its  shores  by  a  busy  village  of  fishermen 
and  small  traders.  It  has  two  chapels,  one  of  which  is  distinguished 
by  a  steeple. 

The  depth  at  low  water  in  this  small  harbor  is  from  10  to  14  feet  over 
sandy  bottom.  It  is  sufficiently  sheltered  by  the  numerous  rocks  in  the 
bay,  and  by  the  island  of  Scatari,  to  afford  safe  anchorage  to  fishing 


i.  '-'I 


est  tides, 

the  land 
mall  har- 
jUt  of  200 
feet  high, 

is  much 

harbors, 
Hitraiices 
stations. 
Island,  is 
lastward, 
distant  ^ 

;et  high, 
itween  it 

liameter, 
of  a  rock 

but  the 
was  lost, 
for  ships, 
iward  of 

Scatari, 
sent  the 
mass  of 
Misively, 
ill.  The 
rtherout 
his  dan- 
!st  point 
a  one  of 
6  feet  at 
nova  Is- 

e  within 
beach  is 
shermen 
guished 

ieet  over 

:s  in  the 

fishing 


mrm 


MENADOU    HAKliOli    AND    I'AHHAGK. 


schooners  and  coasting  vessels  drawing  less  than  1«)  feet  water.  Tiie 
approach  to  the  harbor,  however,  is  so  ditticult  and  dangerouH  that  no 
written  directions  could  avail. 

Tides. — It  1(4  higii  water,  full  and  change,  at  Menadou,  at  8h.  lam.; 
springs  rise  5^  feet,  neaps  .'J^  feet. 

The  Menadou  Passage  has  a  clear  deep-water  channel  of  nearlj*  ^ 
mile  in  the  narrowest  i)art,  which  is  between  the  (Ireatand  Little  Shag 
Itocks  in  the  northern  part  of  the  entranue.  Nevertheless,  it  should 
only  be  used  iu  cases  of  emergency,  or  in  such  circumstances  of  wind 
and  weather  as  would  insure  the  not  being  surprised  by  the  i)revailing 
deiMe  fog  in  a  channel  rendered  indirect  by  numerous  dangers,  desti- 
tute of  good  holding  ground,  and  in  which  there  is  no  shelter  from  the 
heavy  sea  which  accompanies  all  easterly  and  southerly  winds. 

Shag  and  Gary  Rocks.— The  Shag  liock  is  black,  (10  yards  long 
and  15  feet  high.  It  will,  therefore,  readily  be  seen;  but  a  rocky  shoal 
extends  from  it  800  yards  NB.,  and  nearly  400  yards  to  the  eastward. 
In  this  latter  direction  there  is  a  patch  with  12  feet  least  water  on  the 
extreme  edge  of  the  shoal.  The  Little  Shag  and  the  Cary  Rocks,  ^  mile  to 
the  eastward  of  it,  can  also  be  seen,  being  small  black  trap  rocks,  respec- 
tively 0  and  4  feet  above  high  water.  The  Little  Shag  lies  300  yards 
north  from  the  west  point  of  Scatari,  and  the  shoal  water  outside  of  it 
does  not  extend  more  than  100  yards. 

Neering,  Duck,  Dick,  and  Black  Rocks. — Neering  P^ck,  with  9 
feet  least  water,  lies  700  yards  N.  70°  W.  from  the  Shag  Kock.  Duck 
Rock  is  awash  at  high  water,  and  lies  330  yards  8.  25°  E.  from  Moque 
Head ;  and  the  Mad  Dick,  with  3  feet  least  water,  lies  400  yards  far- 
ther to  the  south.  To  these  <langers  on  the  west  side  of  the  channel 
may  be  added  the  Black  Rock,  which  can  always  be  seen,  and  the  other 
rocks  in  the  mouth  of  Menadou  Bay,  but  they  are  out  of  the  way  of 
passing  vessels. 

Hatch  and  Ragged  Rocks. — The  reefs  oft' the  SW.  side  of  Scatari 
can  always  be  seen,  and  do  not  extend  more  than  400  yards  offshore. 
The  Hatch  Rocks  and  Ragged  Rocks  need  only  to  be  mentioned  here; 
the  former  being  most  in  the  way,  will  be  cleared,  as  long  as  the  Shag 
Rock  is  not  shut  in  behind  the  west  point  of  Scatari. 

Directions. — The  Menadou  Passage  may  be  taken  without  danger 
iu  case  of  need  under  favorable  circumstances  of  wind  and  weather. 
All  southerly  and  easterly  winds  are  unfavorable  because  either  accom- 
panied by  or  liable  to  the  sudden  arrival  of  dense  fogs.  Winds  between 
west  and  north  are  as  constantly  free  from  fogs,  and  being,  moreover, 
smooth  water  winds,  are  favorable  for  this  passage. 

A  vessel  approaching  from  the  southward  with  a  westerly  wind,  and 
wishing  to  avoid  running  to  leeward  outside  of  Scatari,  should  pass 
Portnova  Island  and  Cape  Breton  at  the  distance  of  J  mile  or  more, 
steering  for  a  remarkable  hill  called  Steering  Hummock,  which  rises 
1,200  yards  to  the  eastward  of  the  west  point  of  Scatari.    Take  care 


V 


1 


60 


CAPE    HRETON    ISLAND — NE.    COAST. 


'•j'l 

V  ' 
l\  : 

11 

r 

'  :"i 

uut  to  shiit  in  I'ortnova  IhIuikI  huliind  Caix*  Hri^ton  until  Nurt>  tliat  the 
Kill'  Iti^et'  lias  Ix^eii  pasHcd ;  ami  wIkmi  tliit  weMi  point  of  Stiatari  hflarit 
N,  .'{(»o  \V.  or  nior*^  to  tlic  weHtwanl  Nt«M'r  ho  as  to  toiumI  it  at  a  <li.stan«;o 
iM^wtu'ii  \  iind  A  niii(>i,  io't^pini;  ^'railually  awn)'  to  tlie  nortliward  and 
HaHtwnrd,  su  hh  to  ]>artH  ItetwtuMi  tlit^  Litti«t  Sliat;  Koul^  and  tli*^  ii\mg 
SIiohI.  WlH-n  tiic  Little  Sliay  Hocii  conioHiu  onu  with  tlu'  wost  point  of 
Scatari,  or  wlu-n  the  latter  Iumii-h  to  the  Kontliwaid  of  8.  li(»°  K.  the 
8ha^  8iioaI  will  lie  past,  and  a  conrne  may  be  shaped  tor  dapu  Morien. 

It'e.oniin};  from  the  northward  with  a  fair  wind,  brinj;  the  west  point 
of  a(!atari  to  bear  to  the  Honthward  of  H.  2<io  K.,  and  Hteer  Utr  it  until 
the  eastern  extremity  of  the  Slia^  8hoal  is  past,  which  will  be  when 
the  Shat;  itoek  an<I  Mo(pie  Head  come  in  one ;  then  alter  course  so  an 
to  pass  the  Little  Sha^  and  the  west  point  of  Scatari  at  the  distance 
of  o(K)  yard;4 ;  which  having  doiie,  steer  out  to  the  8E.,  remembering 
the  marks  for  clearing  the  Hatch  Uocks  and  the  east  end  of  the  Bar 
Reef. 

Tides. — The  ordinary  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  in  the  Menadoti  pas- 
sage is  from  one  to  2  knots,  the  flood  from  the  southward  and  the  ebb 
in  the  opposite  direction ;  but  they  are  often  very  irregular. 

Scatari  Island. — The  natural  fe.aturos  of  this  island  are  similar  to 
those  of  the  adjacent  mainland,  the  highest  hill  rising  100  feet  above 
the  sea.  It  is  not  permanently  inhabited,  but  is  much  frequented  by 
the  flsbermen  in  the  summer  season  (ISflO).  Near  the  center  of  its 
northern  shore  is  the  NW.  Cove,  aflfording  a  smooth-water  anchonige 
in  southerly  winds ;  but  the  holding  ground  is  not  good,  and  vessels 
shonUl  be  |)repare<l  to  weigh  promptly  with  the  change  of  wind.  The 
SW.  and  the  SE.  sides  of  the  island  are  broken  by  the  heavy  and  almost 
incessant  Atlantic  swell  into  rocky  points  and  coves,  which  attbrd  ex 
cellent  iislijug  stations,  but  no  shelter  to  shipping. 

East  Harbor,  formed  by  Hay  Island,  on  the  south  side  of  the  east 
l)oint  t  H<!atari,  does  not  deserve  the  name,  being  merely  a  very  inse- 
cure iiiiehorage  within  the  reefs  ;  but  it  is  used  occasionally  in  tine 
summer  weatlit>rl)y  small  vessels  employed  in  the  fisheries  and  in  sav- 
ing things  from  wrecks. 

Caution. — The  principal  dangers  are  on  the  SE.  side,  where  a  reef 
runs  out  ^  mile  from  Hay  Island.  Outside  of  this,  and  bearing  8.  25^ 
E.  1^  miles  from  the  lighthouse,  lies  the  Wattie  Hock,  with  4  fathoms 
on  it  at  low  water  ;  and  still  farther  ont,  and  bearing  S,  30°  E.  H  miles 
from  the  lighthouse,  there  are  two  rocky  patches,  5  fathoms,  on  which 
the  sea  occasionally  breaks. 

The  Cormandiere  Rocks  lie  nearly  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
ighthouse.    They  are  small  black  trap  rocks  from  6  to  IG  feet  high, 
and  can  therefore  always  be  seen.    They  are  bold  to  seaward,  and 
there  is  no  passage  between  them  and  the  lighthouse  for  ships. 

Mira  Bay  is  open  to  winds  from  the  eastward,  and  affords  no  safe  an- 
chorage.   The  Mira  River,  after  tiowing  for  several  miles  between  pre- 


'•y^ 


MIIU    HAY — CAI'E    PKRCY. 


ii 


vi  tliiit  the 
iiri  hfliirN 
» (listaiKiu 
want  iind 

Ht  point  of 
TP  10.  the 
)e  Muriuii. 
veNt  point 
or  ir  until 
bo  wlieu 
ir.se  HO  aH 
^  distance 
einberinf? 
r  the  Bar 

adou  pas- 
d  the  ebb 

liniilar  to 
iuet  above 
lented  by 
ter  of  its 
nuhopiige 
id  vessels 
nd.  The 
h1  almost 
iittord  ex 

the  east 
ery  inse- 
ly  in  line 
d  in  sav- 

?rH  a  reef 

i{?  s.  250 

fathoms 
,  H  miles 
on  which 

d  of  the 
eet  high, 
ard,  and 

safe  an- 
reen  pre- 


cipitous hanks,  enters  the  head  of  tin  bay  between  points  of  sand  and 
shingle,  so  yards  apart.  It  disciiarm's  the  waters  of  the  -Mira  Lake  and 
Salmon  Itiver,  and  is  the  outlet  of  an  interior  navigation  of  al»out  '-'(► 
miles;  'mt  the  ordiiuiry  tiepth  on  its  bar  of  sand  and  stones  is  oidy  I 
feet  at  low  water,  and  seldom  exceeds  8  feet,  except  in  extraordiimry 

spring  tides. 

Catalogne  Lake  has  only  one  foot  at  low  water  in  its  very  narrow 
outlet,  through  a  sand  and  shingle  beach,  2  miles  south  of  the  Mira 
Kiver.  It  is  broken  into  coves,  peninsulas,  au«l  islets,  forming  pictu- 
reH(|ue  scenery.  There  is  a  church  at  its  head,  '{  miles  in  from  the 
entrance,  and  its  shores  are  occ  upied  by  farmers  and  Hshermeu. 

Coast.— Mii'rt  Hay,  and  probably  the  valley  0  ts  river  and  lake, 
define  another  very  remarkable  change  in  the  character  of  the  coast 
and  nature  of  tue  country.  Instead  of  the  undulating  and  compara- 
tively fertile  laud,  and  the  loug  ranges  of  sandstone  cliffs,  abounding 
in  coal,  which  form  the  north  side  of  the  bay,  the  country  to  the  south- 
ward, including  the  island  of  Scatari,  is  all  hummocky  land,  in  wliich 
small  round  or  conical  hills  rise  from  among  swamps,  shallow  ponds, 
and  dwarf  spruce  trees. 

Morion  or  Cow  Bay  is  2^  miles  wide  at  its  entrance,  between  Capes 
Percy  and  Morien.  On  its  north  side,  just  within  Cape  Percy,  lies 
Cow  Ueef,  dry  in  part  at  low  water,  and  extenditig  to  ^  mile  from  the 
shore.  The  head  of  the  bay  is  occupied  by  fiats  of  sand  and  mud, 
partly  dry  at  low  water,  and  through  which  a  narrow  and  shallow  chan- 
nel leads  to  False  Bay  Beach,  on  the  north  side  of  Mira  Bay.  Being 
completely  open  to  easterly  winds,  Morien  Bay  affords  no  safe  anchor- 
age. 

Cape  Morien  is  a  bold  headland,  the  shoal  water  exteiuling  only  300 
yards  from  its  sandstone  (difVs,  which  abound  m  coal,  and  rise  on  its 
south  side  150  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  the  NE.  extremity  of  a  penin- 
sula, which  forms  the  precipitous  north  shore  of  Mira  Bay  for  a  dis- 
tance of  5  miles,  and  terminates  at  the  shingle  isthmus  of  False  Bay 
Beach. 

Coal.— About  400  tons  can  be  shipped  from  the  wharf  in  one  day 
the  mines  are  distant  one  mile  (and  one,  100  yards)  from  the  wharf. 
About  130,000  tons  are  shipped  annually  from  Cow  Bay. 

Ice.— Cow  Bay  rarely  freezes  over  ;  drift  ice  arrives  about  the  mid- 
dle of  February  and  usually  disappears  about  1st  May,  tlie  bay  being 
only  closed  at  intervals  by  field  ice.  The  first  vessel  arrives  early  in 
March  and  the  last  one  leaves  about  Ist  February.  In  188«  coal  was 
shipped  at  Morien  (Cow)  Bay  every  month  in  the  year,  and  an  iron  ves- 
sel has  made  fortnightly  visits  during  the  whole  of  one  winter. 

Cape  Percy  is  a  precipitous  headland,  where  the  cliffs  of  coal-bearing 
sandstone  rise  110  feet  above  the  sea.  Off  its  north  side  lies  Schooner 
Rook,  with  6  feet  least  water,  being  the  shallowest  part  of  a  reef  which 


u. 


ii 


T 

• 

:     i'r 

;i 

;•* 

(i2 


(.'AI'K    URKTON    ISLAND — NK.    COAHT 


vxtuiitlH  8(H)  yards  from  tli«  hIiohj.  Th«  IVniy  Rock,  witli  ■  'wtt  WBter, 
lieH  4(M»  yiinl.H  off  tliti  NK.  Hlioiiltlur  of  tli«  cap«. 

Flint  Island,  Imurinjj  N.  "r)^  10.  1  ,"„  milcH  from  i)n\w  Percy,  in  of  hhimI- 
Atone,  Itrtiki'ti  Ity  tlio  wiiveM,  preiMpitoiiN,  (i(>  f(>(>t  lii^li  xiid  (HMI  yanlH 
lon^;.  On  itM  nortli  point  there  is  a  llsli  store,  where  alone  boats  eaii 
hind.  Ott"  its  west  end,  to  tlie  distanite  of  SOO  yartls,  there  are  very 
irre(;idar  NonndiiiKs,  >A  to  12  fatliomsin  a  east  of  th(*h'ad,  whittii  eause, 
witli  tile  tide,  a  stron^^  rippling,  and  nt  times  a  lioavy  l)reakin<;  sea. 

lietween  these  dangers  and  tlieeape  tliere  isaclear  einmnel  a  mile  in 
breadth,  throii);li  wliieli  an  irreunlar  tidal  stream  runs  at  times  li  knots. 

Glace  Bay  atVords  nosafeanclioia^e.  At  its  head  is  Dyson  i'ond,  ex- 
tending; 1!  ndles  inland,  and  havinfra  narrow  outlet  through  sand  hills 
and  sand  l)ea(;li,  whi(;li  is  usually  dry  at  low  water. 

Indian  Bay  atVonIs  a  safe  anehora^re  only  in  olVstiore  winds  and  fine 
weather.  At  its  lieati  a  dry  sand-bar  a  mile  Utun  (>.\tendH  aiMoss  iVoiM 
the  southern  to  within  150  yards  of  the  northern  shore,  leavintj  an  en- 
traiKH'  of  that  breadth  into  Hrid;;e])ort  Harbor,  which  is  a  shallow  pond 
extending  L'  miles  inland.  Tlie  depth  of  S  feet  at  low  water  is  all  that 
can  be  (tarried  into  this  harbor,  the  interior  of  which  is  occupied  by 
tiats  ol  sand  and  weeds,  i>artly  dry  at  low  tide. 

Coal  Mines.— Tlie  coals  from  the  mines  at  nrid^e|)ort,  on  the  south 
side  of  Indian  Hay,  is  conveyed  by  a  railroad  alon;;  the  dry  sand  bar  to 
a  wharf  at  its  nortliern  extremity  ;  but  as  tlie  shallow  and  narrow  en- 
trance admits  only  small  vessels,  and  the  anchorai^e  outside  ia  unsafe, 
the  export  in  this  manner  is  limited.  The  t^oal  is  said  to  be  of  excellent 
(|uality  and  easy  of  access ;  and  with  the  aiiove  exception  all  the  out- 
jmt  is  conveyed  by  railroatl  across  to  the  South  Arm  of  Sydney  Harbor 
for  shipnienf. 

Anchorage' — The  best  anchorage  is  near  the  middle  of  the  bay,  and 
within  tlie  de|>ths  of  5  fathoms  ;  in  greater  depths  the  bottom  is  in  geu- 
eral  rocky,  and  not  to  be  trusted. 

Tides. — The  ordinary  rate  of  the  stream  In  tlie  entrance  is  2  knots. 

Sydney  Harbor  is  a  tine  harbor,  being  eipially  easy  of  access  and 
egress,  and  capable  of  containing  a  large  number  of  vessels  in  safety. 
It  is  3  miles  wide  at  the  outer  entrance ;  but  the  navigable  clianuel 
contracts  rai>idly  to  the  breadth  of  ^  mile  between  the  two  bars,  which 
are  of  sand  and  shingle,  and  extend  from  tlie  shore  on  eithei  side.  The 
West  Arm  is  open  to  NE.  winds,  except  at  the  coal  loading  ground, 
where  vessels  anchor  under  shelter  of  the  NW.  Bar;  and  at  North 
Sydney,  where  they  may  lie  in  like  manner  under  Allen  Point. 

The  South  Arm,  being  completely  sheltered  from  the  sea  by  the  SE. 
Bar,  affords  safe  anchorage  iii  every  part.  Tlie  town  of  Sydney,  3^ 
miles  up  this  arm,  is  exceedingly  well  situated  on  the  west  side  and  sum- 
mit of  a  peninsula  55  feet  high,  and  has  a  population  of  about  0,000.  It 
has  deep  water  close  to  its  wharves,  and  the  arm  continues  navigable 
for  vessels  to  Sydney  Bridge,  a  distance  of  2  miles ;  and  for  Imats  to 


F 

w 


ot 

VI 


^«i.iii. 


SVDNHY — DIRKCTIONH. 


68 


Ih  of  Hand' 
<MM>  ynnU 
ItoiitH  rail 
1  nvvt  ^■^^ry 
>i(!li  cuitHe, 
\ji  sen. 
I  a  mile  in 
'H  IJkiiotH. 
I'oiid,  ox- 
Hand  liillH 

H  and  tliio 
uuss  troiH 
injr  an  en- 
How  pond 
H  all  Mmt 
I'Upied  by 

tlie  Noutli 
ud  bar  to 
iirrow  en- 
is  nnNafe, 
excellent 
I  the  out- 
V  Harbor 

bay,  and 
is  in  sen- 

;  2  knots. 
cesH  and 
n  safety. 

channel 
•8,  which 
le.    The 

ground, 
It  North 

'  the  SE. 
diiey,  3J 
md  Hiini- 
,000,  It 
ivigable 
boats  to 


ForkH  Hridjje,  where  the  tide  ends  0  miles  aliove  the  town,  and  front 
which  a  roatl  leads  across  to  the  Kast  Hay  of  the  Itrasd'Or. 

The  only  drawl)a(!k  is  the  lateness  of  the  spring  ;  the  advance  of  sum- 
mer iM'ing  retarded  by  the  cold  winds  from  the  neighboring  sea,  which 
is  )isnally,  until  late  in  May,  laden  with  drift  ice,  large  masses  of  which 
are  frequently  driven  into  the  harltor  by  the  Nl<].  winds. 

Coal  (Mill  be  obtained  in  any  ipiantity,  and  put  on  board  at  the  rate 
of  r)00  tons  per  day.  It  is  shipped  at  the  wharves,  alongside  which 
vessels  (miii  lie  at  any  time  when  the  harbor  is  open  ;  thu  mines  are  Uitt* 
taut  tVoin  North  Sydney  L*A  miles  by  railway.  . 

There  are  coal  wharves,  with  railway  to  the  mines,  at  Fishery  (!ove, 
Wintering  Cove,  and  northward  of  Freshwater  (Jreek  ;  there  is  also  a 
ballast  wharf  400  yards  southward  of  .Vinelia  Point,  at  the  entrance  to 
Crawley  Creek. 

Telegraph  and  Railway. — Sydney  is  in  telegraphic  commnnuratioti 
with  St.  I'ierre,  I'laccntia,  Xewtouiidland,  and  Magdalen  Islands  by 
Hiibmarino  cables,  and  with  Canada  by  land  lines.  It  is  connected 
with  Lotiisbui'g  by  rail. 

Telegraph  Cables. — (Ireat  <;are  must  be  used  win^ii  aiK^lioring  in  the 
outer  anchorage  to  avoiil  the  teleguijih  cables,  four  in  number.  Tlieso 
cables  are  laid  down  in  a  southerly  direction  from  Lloyd  Cove  across 
the  hariior,  and  thence  in  a  northeasterly  direction  seaward. 

Water. — The  most  convenient  watering  place  is  at  the  creek,  which 
discharges  the  waters  of  the  Sawmill  Lake,  a  short  distance  to  the 
westward  of  the  coal  loading  ground  ;  but  goo«l  water  may  be  obtained 
on  the  east  side  of  the  South  Ann,  also  opposite  the  town  of  Sydney, 
or  by  the  steam  water  tank,  and  in  several  other  places  where  brooku 
enter  the  sea.  The  country  is  well  settled  around  thu  harbor,  and  sup- 
plies of  every  kind  may  bo  roadilj'  obtained. 

Charges. — I'ilotage  for  vessels  of  100  tons  to  Sydney,  !J12  ;  to  North 
Sydney,  $11;  and  for  each  additicmal  50  tons,  |l.  Vessels  not  taking 
pilots  are  re(iuired  to  pay  half  pilotage.  Tugboat  charges  as  per  agree- 
ment;  light  dues,  2  cents  per  ton. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Directions. — When  approaching  the  harbor  from  the  eastward  pass 
the  lighthouse  no  nearer  than  J  mile,  and  to  avoid  the  Petre  Reef 
do  not  haul  into  the  harbor  until  Daily  Point  opens  out  to  the  north, 
ward  of  Gillivray  Point;  and  to  clear  the  shoal  at  Petre  Point  and 
farther  in,  do  not  approach  nearer  than  A  mile,  or  than  the  depth  of 
5J  fathoms  in  running  along  the  eastern  shore.  When  the  lighthouse 
and  Petre  Point  come  in  line  keep  them  so,  which  will  lead  clear  of  the 
NW.  Bar,  which  is  very  steep,  having  .5i  fathoms  dose-to.  When  the 
wharves  at  the  loading  ground  bear  N.  71°  W.  the  vessel  will  be  well 
within  the  bar,  and  may  haul  in  and  choose  her  berth  in  5  or  0  fathoms, 
mud  bottom,  and  at  a  short  distance  from  the  wharves.  If  bound  up 
the  South  Ann  or  to  Sydney,  run  wilh  the  lighthouse  and  Petre  Point 


I 


•i. 
I, 
li 

I 

H- 


*" 


64 


CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND NE.    COAST. 


in  line,  or  with  the  former  only  just  shut  in,  until  Mines  Point  bears 
N.  8°  E.,  thence  steer  i'\  8^  W.  until  the  SE.  Bar  lighthouse  bears  N. 
64°  E. ;  the  western  extreme  of  the  SE.  Bar  will  then  be  passed,  and 
the  vessel  may  either  haul  to  the  eastward  and  anchor  in  Fishei-y  Cove 
in  6  or  7  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  or  proceed  on  to  the  town  of  Sydney. 

Caution. — In  beating  into  this  harbor  great  care  must  be  used,  espe- 
cially when  between  the  NW.  and  SE.  Bars,  both  of  which  are  so  steep 
that  the  lead  will  afford  little  or  no  warning. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  is  good  anywhere  off  the  wharves  of 
the  town  outside  a  line  joining  the  English  church  and  Shingle  Point ; 
within  that  line  there  are  shoals.  TLe  depth  of  this  anchorage  is  from 
5  to  8^  fathoms,  over  mud  bottom,  and  there  is  suflBcient  depth  for  large 
vessels  all  the  way  to  the  bridge,  between  which  and  the  town  is  the 
most  secure  part  of  the  harbor. 

Tides. — The  ordinary  rate  of  the  streams  is  half  a  knot  off  the  town, 
but  much  weaker  farther  out  in  the  wider  parts  of  the  harbor. 

The  Bird  Rock,  C  feet  high,  will  be  seen  on  the  reef,  lying  800 
yards  from  Mope  Head,  and  the  Bonar  Rocks  dry  at  low  water,  at  the 
same  distance  off  Bonar  Head.  There  is  also  a  rocky  shoal  off  Katon 
Pond,  the  least  water  on  which,  3  feet,  bears  from  Lawler  Point  N.  T^ 
E.,  nearly  1,200  yards.  In  addition  to  these  dangers,  observe  that,  in 
the  distance  of  6  miles  from  Aconi  Point  to  Cranbarry  Head,  the  shoal 
water  for  a  vessel  of  large  draft  frequently  extei'ds  to  nearly  a  mile  off- 
shore. 

Little  Bras  d'Or  can  only  be  entered  by  small  v-^.raft  and  boats  under 
fai'orable  circumstances,  the  entrance  being  closed  with  breakers  when 
there  is  a  heavy  sea  running,  and  especially  when  the  strong  tide  is  run- 
ning out  against  the  wind.  There  is  a  fishing  establishment  on  the 
shingle  point  just  within  the  entrance  and  scattered  houses  and  farms 
at  either  side. 

Great  Bras  d'Or. — Its  entrance,  between  Carey  Point  and  Noir 
Point,  is  only  340  yards  wide,  with  deep  water,  and  at  a  short  distance 
outside  the  channel  is  still  further  contracted  by  shoals  to  220  yards, 
measuring  from  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  on  either  side. 

Within  the  entrance,  off  the  small  light  between  Duffus  and  Macken- 
zie Points,  lies  the  Eddy  Eock,  with  one  foot  least  water.  A  vessol  will 
pass  clear  to  the  westward  of  it  by  keeping  Blackrock  Point  open  to 
the  northward  of  Noir  Point.  On  the  opposite  or  northern  side  of  the 
channel,  from  Carey  Point  to  Kolley  Cove,  a  distance  of  one  mile,  the 
shore  is  quite  bold. 

Anchorage. — Off'  the  mouth  of  Kelly  Cove,  in  5  or  6  fathoms,  over  a 
bottom  of  sand,  the  anchorage  is  good,  and  out  of  the  strength  of  the 
tide ;  but  it  is  still  more  secure  farther  in,  within  200  yards  of  its  head, 
where  the  bottom  is  of  mud  and  the  depth  3  to  4  fathoms. 

To  this  cove,  which  is  a  convenient  anchorage,  we  shall  restrict  our 
present  notice  of  Bras  d'Or,  the  object  of  this  chapter  b^ing  the  eastern 


"^ 


GREAT    BRAS    D*OR    ENTRANCE. 


65 


*oint  bears 
56  bears  N. 
>assed,  and 
shei'y  Cove 
■  Sydney, 
used,  espe- 
re  so  steep 

ivharves  of 
igle  Point ; 
ige  is  from 
b  for  large 
3WU  is  the 

the  town, 
)r. 

lying  800 
iter,  at  the 

off  Katon 
»oiut  N.  1^ 
ve  that,  in 
,  the  shoal 
a  mile  off- 

9ats  under 
iikers  when 
bide  is  run- 
mt  on  the 
and  farms 

and  Noir 
■t  distance 
320  yards, 

i  Macken- 
vessiil  will 
t  open  to 
ide  of  the 
mile,  the 

ns,  over  a 
?th  of  the 
f  its  head, 

(Strict  our 
le  eastern 


seaboard  of  Gape  Breton  Island,  leaving  the  description  of  its  inland 
waters  for  another  part  of  the  chapter. 

Carey  Point,  the  NW.  side  of  the  entrance  of  Great  Bras  d'Or  is  a 
shingle  beacli,  quite  bold  at  its  southern  extremity,  but  having  a  dan- 
gerous shoal  running  out  froni  it  so  as  to  form  tbe  northern  side  of  the 
channel  outside  for  I  mile.  On  many  parts  of  this  shoal  the  depth  is 
only  3  feet  at  low  water,  so  that  it  is  shown  by  breakers  when  there  is 
any  sea  running  ;  and  a  wide  bar  commences  immediately  outside  of  it 
and  continues  a  mile  farther  out,  with  irregular  soundings,  from  3  to 
6  fathoms,  over  gravel  and  sand  bottom.  The  shallowest  pait,  3  fath- 
oms", called  the  Middle  Shoal,  lies  on  the  north  side  of  the  cliaunel,  and 
1 J  miles  from  Carey  Point.  Nearly  opposite  to  this,  and  on  the  south 
side  of  the  channel,  is  Blackrock  Shoal,  extending  400  yards  north  from 
the  red  cliffs  of  Blackrock  Point,  and  i  mile  in  a  NE.  direction. 

The  Haddock  Bank  has  4  fathoms  least  water,  and  lies  from  one  to 
IJ  miles  off  shore  midway  between  Table  Head  and  Aconi  Point,  the 
last  k,"ing  the  NB.  extremity  of  Boulardrie  Island,  formed  in  cliffs  of 
the  coal  formation,  which  are  ftist  yielding  to  the  waves,  and  from 
which  a  rocky  shoal  extends  to  the  distance  of  |  mile. 

Supplies.— There  are  houses  and  farms  on  either  side  of  the  entrance 
of  Great  Bras  d'Or,  at  whi'ih  supplies  of  fresh  provisions  may  be  ob- 
tained.    Water  is  easily  i)rocured.    (1860.) 

Directions.— Before  advancing  farther  in  than  Table  Island,  bring 
Carey  Point  and  Duncan  Head  to  touch,  bearing  S.  36°  W.,  and  steer 
for  them  until  Cape  Smoke  and"  the  north  end  of  Hertford  Island  are  in 
one ;  then  alter  course  to  tie  southward  and  keep  those  marks  in  one 
astern,  running  from  them  for  about  400  yards  until  Mackenzie  and 
Duffus  Points  come  in  one,  when  steer  S.  30°  W.  for  them,  or  so  as  not  to 
open  out  Mackenzie  Point  until  Blackrock  Point  and  Table  Head  come 
in  one. 

These  last-named  well-defined  points  kept  in  one  astern,  or  as  the 
vessel  runs  from  them  on  a  S.  47°  W.  course,  will  lead  nearly  in  mid- 
channel  through  the  narrow-  entrance  between  Carey  and  Noir  Points; 
after  which  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  of  a  vessel  hauling  up  for  Kelly 
Cove.  Should,  however,  the  strong  flood  tide  carry  her  above  the  cove, 
she  will  find  good  anchorage  2  miles  farther  in  on  the  same  side,  in  5 
fathoms,  and  to  the  westward  of  Jane  Point. 

If  the  weather  should  be  so  hazy  that  Cape  Smoke  can  not  be  seen, 
run  in  upon  the  S.  36°  W.  course,  with  Carey  Point  and  Duncan  Head 
touching,  until  Blackrock  Point  is  abeam ;  then  sheer  to  the  southward 
until  Mackenzie  and  Duffus  Points  come  in  one,  and  proceed  as  before 
directed. 

Tides.— The  usual  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  in  the  entrance  is  from  4 
to  5  knots ;  but  in  the  spring,  or  after  long-continued  NE.  gales,  which 
have  previously  raised  the  level  of  the  Bras  d'Or  Lake,  thev  may 
o489 5 


66 


CAPE    BRETON   ISLAND — NB.    COAST. 


amount  to  G  knots.    Tbey  form  strong  ripples  and  eddies,  especially  off 
Carey  Point. 

In  tine  settled  weather  the  stream  runs  out  until  half  an  hour  before 
high  water  by  the  shore,  and  in  until  half  au  hour  before  low  water; 
but  strong  winds  cause  great  irregularities.  It  will  be  observed,  there- 
fore, that  the  stream  runs  out  nearly  all  the  time  the  water  is  rising 
and  in  nearly  all  the  time  it  is  falling. 

The  rise  of  the  tide  diminishes  rapidly  within  the  Bras  d'Or,  and  be- 
yond Barra  Strait  it  becomes  nearly  or  altogether  insensible. 

Caution. — The  dangers  of  this  coast  are  such  as  to  render  great  cau- 
tion necessary  at  night  or  in  fogs,  when  30  fathoms,  or  at  least  20  fath- 
oms, water  is  as  near  as  a  stranger  should  approach ;  the  latter  depth 
beiug  in  some  parts  within  2  miles  of  the  shore. 

Hertford  and  Cibouz  (Bird)  Islands  are  long  and  narrow  islands 
of  sandstone,  precii)itous  on  every  side,  nearly  bare  of  trees,  and  ^  mile 
apart.  There  is  uo  passage  for  ships  between  them,  but  boats  or  small 
craft  can  pass  through  a  narrow  channel  which  is  distant  from  100  to 
200 yards  from  Hertford  Island  and  between  it  and  the  middle  rock. 

Hertford  Island  is  the  highest,  and  100  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  dis- 
tant from  Cape  Dauphin  1^  miles,  but  the  dangerous  Hertford  Ledge, 
which  has  5  feet  least  water,  extends  from  it  nearly  halfway  across  to 
the  cape,  leaving  a  channel  1,200  yards  wide  and  carrying  7  or  8  fathoms 
water.  To  avoid  this  ledge  vessels  should  keep  well  over  towards  the 
cape,  from  which  the  shallow  water  does  not  extend  beyond  the  dis- 
tance of  400  yards. 

Ciibouz  Rock. — From  the  outer  point  of  Ciboux  Island  a  reef  runs 
off  ^  mile  to  the  NE. ;  and  the  dangerous  Ciboux  Shoal,  with  15  feet 
least  water,  and  on  which  the  sea  at  times  breaks  heavily,  lies  g  mile 
farther  out  in  the  same  direction. 

St  Anne  Harbor  (formerly  Port  Dauphin)  is  capable  of  containing 
any  number  of  vessels  in  security,  but  the  entrance  is  very  narrow, 
with  a  tide  of  4  knots;  and  there  is  a  dangerous  bar  outside,  over 
which  a  stranger  unacquainted  with  the  leading  marks  could  only 
safely  rely  on  finding  12  teet. 

In  a  strong  NE.  wind,  and  especially  when  the  tide  is  running  out, 
the  bar  is  covered  with  heavy  breakers.  The  harbor  is  completely 
sheltered  by  Be;tch  Point,  whioii  is  formed  of  large  rolled  stones  and 
shingle,  and  reaches  across  from  the  northern  to  within  180  yards  of  the 
southern  shore  ;  it  is  quite  bold  at  its  southern  extremity,  and  the  en- 
trance channel  between  it  and  the  Weed  Pond  Shoal  carries  13  fathoms 
water,  but  is  only  130  yards  wide.  Within  the  entrance,  on  the  north 
side  of  the  channel,  lies  the  Port  Shoal,  of  mud,  extending  J  mile  in 
from  Beach  Point,  and  just  cleared  to  the  southward  by  the  line  of 
Weed  Pond  Beach  and  Bar  Point  in  one. 

Cape  Dauphin,  the  dividing  point  between  St.  Anne  Bay  and  the 
Great  Bras  d'Or,  is  a  hifeh  and  precipitous  headland  and  the  northeast- 
ern termination  of  the  range  of  mountains  which  separate  them. 


\ 


8T.    ANNE    HARBOR — DIRECTIONS. 


67 


Water.— Tbe  best  watering  place  (18G0)  is  oti  tiie  northern  side  of 
St.  Anne  Harbor,  1=|  miles  from  the  entrance,  where  a  torrent  descends 
a  ravine  in  the  mountains  o*"  St.  Anne,  which  rise  preoipitonsly  to  the 
heiffht  of  1,070  feet  above  the  sea. 

Directions.— Vessels  bound  to  St.  Anne  Harbor  from  the  northward 
with  a  fair  wind  should  pass  to  the  NW.  of  Ciboux  and  Hertford 
Islands,  avoiding,  if  it  be  wished,  the  rocky  Gfathom  fishing  ground, 
iu  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  by  keeping  welt  over  towanls  Cape  Dauphin. 
Go  no  nearer  to  the  shore  between  Bentinck  and  Island  Points  than 
the  depth  of  7  fathoms.  Observe  that  the  line  of  Bentinck  Point  and 
Cape  Smoke  in  one  clears  the  shoal  off  [sland  Point  in  5  fatiioins,  and 
that  in  approaching  the  bar  Cape  Smoke  should  be  kept  open.  Before 
arriving  at  the  steep  outer  side  of  the  bar,  which  is  distant  one  mile 
from  the  entrance,  bring  the  white  gypsum  cliff  of  Macleod  Point  in  line 
with  the  summit  of  Old  Fort,  and  steer  for  them  until  Fader  Point  is 
seen  oidy  just  open  dear  of  VVilhausen  Point  (the  vessel  will  then  be 
only  about  100  yards  distant  from  the  shore  near  Bar  Point) ;  then  i)ort 
the  helm  instantly  and  run  from  the  last-named  leading  marks,  keep- 
ing Fader  Point  a  little  open,  until  Conway  Point  is  seen  to  the  west- 
ward of  Ijead-in  Point,  or  until  the  gypsum  elite  of  Macleod  Point  is 
open  only  half  a  point  to  the  southward  of  Beach  Point,  or  until  the 
latter  bears  S.  20c  W.,  and  is  distant  J  mile ;  then  again  alter  course, 
and  keeping  Conway  Point  in  sight  (to  avoid  Weed  Pond  Ledge),  steer 
so  as  to  pass  Beach  Point  at  a  distance  between  GO  and  100  yards. 

If  the  gypsum  cliff  of  Macleod  Point  can  uot  be  made  out,  pass  VVil- 
hauseu  Point,  at  the  uistanye  of  250  yards,  steering  for  the  Old  Fort 
until  Fader  Point  is  only  just  open;  then  proceed  as  already  directed. 

Having  now  entered  the  harbor,  avoid  Port  Shoal  by  not  opening  out 
Bar  Point  to  the  northward  of  Weed  Pond  Beach,  until  the  shingly 
Price  Point  bears  to  the  northward  of  N.  71^  W. ;  the  vessel  will  then 
be  within  the  shoal  and  may  haul  to  the  northward  and  anchor  to  the 
westward  of  it,  in  8  fathoms,  mud,  and  out  of  the  uvsam  of  the  en- 
trance. 

Anchorage.— The  best  sheltered  anchorage  is  in  t'.M  i-ntrauce  of  the 
north  arm,  the  riding  elsewhere  in  so  large  a  harbor  being  at  times 
rather  rough  for  a  small  vessel.  The  XK.  gales,  on  entering  thi  har- 
bor, between  mountains  1,000  feet  high,  and  jn^y  2  miles  aj'^rt,  blow 
with  concentrated  force.  They  may  be  expected  at  any  time  after  the 
middle  of  A  igust,  and  a  vessel  should  be  well  moored  to  withstand 
their  fury. 

Tides.— The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  iu  the  eiilrance  is  from  3  to  4 
knots. 

The  Coast  from  Bentinck  Point  to  Cape  Smoke  assumes  a  les.s  sterile 
appearance,  the  mountains  receding  a  short  distance  from  the  sho-e,  so 
as  to  leave  space  for  scattered  farms.  At  a  brook  called  French  River, 
and  especially  at  Breeding  Cove,  there  is  good  landing  for  boats. 


CAPE    BRETON    ISLAND NE.    COAST. 


kl 


At  the  distance  of  IJ  miles  south  of  Beiitinck  Point  there  are  clitts 
of  white  gypsum ;  and  at  Indian  Brook,  one  mile  north  from  Island 
Point,  there  is  good  lauding.  Island  Point  looks  like  an  island,  bnt  is 
a  small  wooded  peninsula  joined  to  the  main  laud  by  stony  beaches 
inclosing  McDonald  Pond. 

Ingonish  Island  is  of  rock,  ^  mile  in  diameter  and  200  feet  high. 
The  Kast  Kock.s,  12  feet  high,  lie  ott'  it  to  seawrrd  and  extend  out 
to  the  distance  of  nearly  800  yards.  There  are  several  high  rocks 
close  to  the  outer  shores  of  the  island,  and  a  small  rock  oft"  its  SVV.  ex- 
tremity at  the  distance  of  1(50  yards.  The  NW.  side  of  the  island  forms 
a  small  bay,  in  whi(!h  there  are  several  buildings  (18(50)  and  where  the 
small  fishing  vessels  and  boats  are  sheltered  from  the  swell  from  the 
southward,  and  from  all  but  easterly  winds.  From  the  west  point  of 
this  small  bay  a  spit  and  reef  exte?id  nearly  halfway  across  to  Archi- 
bald Point,  leaving  a  channel  of  18  or  20  feet  in  de()th,  but  so  narrow 
and  crooked  that  only  14  feet  can  be  relied  on  at  low  water. 

Ingonish  Bay,  between  Archibald  Point  and  ('ai)e  Smoke,  is  S-^  miles 
■wide  and  2;|  miles  deep.  It  is  divided  into  north  anvl  south  bays  by 
Middle  Head,  a  long,  narrotv,  rocky,  and  prei}ii)it()us  peninsula,  off 
which  lies  the  Fisherman  Rock  at  the  distance  of  200  yards  to  the  SE. 
At  the  head  of  South  Bay  there  are  two  ponds, having  a  common  outlet, 
which  boats  can  enter  only  at  high  water.  Th(Me  are  several  houses 
near  these  ponds,  as  well  as  on  the  tongue  dividing  the  two  bays,  but 
the  principal  settlement  of  Ingonish  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  bay. 

The  mountains  in  rear  of  Ingonish  are  the  highest  on  this  coast,  at- 
taining an  elevation  of  1,390  feet ;  and  Cape  Smoke,  its  south  point, 
rises  precipitously  from  the  sea  to  the  height  of  050  feet.  The  squalls 
from  these  highlands  are  at  times  very  violent. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  usually  ancshor  on  tho  north  side  of  ingonish 
Bay  within  Archibald  Point,  shifting  their  berths  as  the  winds  may 
render  necessary.  The  bottom  is  a  thin  coating  of  sand  over  hard  mud. 
The  anchorage  is  unsafe  with  easterly  winds,  which  send  in  a  very 
heavy  sea. 

Cape  Egmont  is  a  comparatively  low  headland  of  granite,  and  nearly 
bare  ot  trees.  At  Neal  and  Blackbrook  Coves,  which  are  distant  2^ 
miles  and  4  miles  respectively,  to  the  southward,  thero  is  good  landing 
for  boats.  Oft'  South  Point,  between  those  coves,  there  is  a  sunken  rock 
lying  400  yards  offshore ;  and  there  is  also  a  rocky  shoal,  with  2  fath- 
oms least  water,  i  mile  from  the  shore  at  Rocky  Bay,  where  there  are 
several  buildings,  2  miles  to  the  northward  from  Ingonish. 

Aspee  Bay  is  8  miles  wide  and  4^  miles  deep.  There  are  flourishing 
farms  in  the  neighborhood  ;  the  principal  trade  is  with  St.  Pierre,  con- 
sisting of  the  following  exports,  viz.,  cattle,  sheep,  butter,  oak  staves, 
etc. 

The  fishermen  supply  the  Newfoundland  fisheries  with  a  large  quan- 
tity of  squid  for  bait. 


A8PEE    BAY — CURRENTS. 


69 


Telegraph. — The  shore  ends  of  the  Atlantic  telegraph  cables  from 
Newfoundland  are  lauded  hero,  and  the  telegraph  station,  a  prominent 
building,  is  seen  standing  to  the  westward  of  a  small  village  on  the 
north  side  of  the  bay.  A  fishing  village  is  situated  on  a  barren  part  of 
the  ba>  inside  White  Head,  and  a  church  stands  far  back  on  the  hills  in 
the  center  of  the  bay.  On  its  north  side  is  Wilkie  Sugar  Loaf,  a  re- 
markable conical  hill  1,200  feet  high. 

Supplies. — To  the  southward  of  this,  and  occupying  the  head  of  the 
bay,  are  three  ponds  with  narrow  entrances  through  sandy  beaches,  and 
into  which  boats  can  only  psiss  at  high  water.  There  arc  settlements 
at  all  these  ]>ond8,  where  fresh  ^.rovisivjns  and  water  may  ive  obtained. 

Anchorage. — The  best  anchorage  in  Aspee  Bay  with  NW.  winds  is 
off  the  North  Pond,  in  8  or  9  fathoms,  sand  bottom  j  a-m  with  south 
winds  off  the  South  Pond,  or  in  the  cove  under  White  Head,  which, 
with  a  small  inland  lying  close  off  it,  forms  the  SB.  point  of  the  bay. 
In  this  cove  there  is  a  settlement  for  prosecuting  the  fisheries,  and  good 
landing  for  boats  in  all  but  northerly  winds.  It  is  the  anchorage  gen- 
erally preferred,  especially  by  small  vessels,  as  being  the  least  embayed, 
and  the  most  sheltered  from  the  prevailing  swell  from  the  SE.  Fisher- 
men state  that  there  is  good  holding  ground  in  this  cove  inside  the 
depth  of  10  fathoms  (blue  mud).  To  vessels  unable  to  beat  around 
Cape  North,  or  in  want  of  supplies,  this  bay  affords  convenient  anchor- 
age; but  it  is  only  safe  in  fine  weather  and  with  westerly  winds;  a 
vessel  should  therefore  be  in  readiness  to  weigh  instantly  on  the 
approach  of  a  wind  from  the  opposite  quarter. 

Coast. — The  NE.  coast  from  St.  Anne  Harbor  to  Cape  North  is  bold, 
mountainouit,  and  f.ee  from  outlying  dangers,  except  near  Ciboux  or 
Bird  Island.  The  mountains  attain  the  elevation  of  1,390  feet  above  the 
sea,  and  are  composed  of  primary  and  metamorphio  rocks,  principallj' 
granite,  with  clay  slate,  in  nearly  vertical  strata.  These  rocks  form  the 
princii)al  headlands ;  while  sandstone,  conglomerate,  shale,  limestone, 
and  occasionally  beds  of  gypsnm  and  red  and  yellow  marl  occur  on  the 
intervening  shores.  These  last-namiMl  rocks,  the  lowest  members  of  the 
coal  formation,  rest  uucouformably  on  the  older  rocks,  and  they  are 
occasionally  covered  with  beds  of  drift  oand,  red  clay,  and  bowlders. 
They  are  seen  in  the  valleys  and  are  di-splayed  on  the  eastern  slopes  of 
the  mountains,  where  they  form  cliffs  which  are  washed  by  the  sea. 
They  furnish,  with  the  beds  of  drift,  tolerably  productive  soil,  support- 
ing, with  the  aid  of  the  fisheries,  a  thinly  scattered  population  (1860). 

Currents.— Notwithstanding  the  bold  nature  of  this  coast  wrecks 
have  not  i)een  unfrequent  upon  it  in  the  dense  fogs  which  accompany 
the  easterly  winds.  They  have  generally  occurred  to  vessels  running 
and  steering,  as  they  sujiposed,  a  safe  course  to  pass  St.  Pauls  Island 
into  the  Gulf  of  Sr.  Lawrence.  Unaware  of,  or  not  allowing  for,  the 
current  so  frequently  found  "uoning  onto"  the  gulf  from  the  northward, 
and  which  had  been  actin;,  upon  their  starboard  bows  for  many  hours. 


Ksu-a^. 


70 


BRAS    DOR    LAKES. 


pr 


'  ;;i 


setting  tliein  many  miles  to  the  SW.  of  their  reckoning,  they  ran  on 
shore  under  full  sail. 

On  one  oceasioii  this  current  was  found  running  out  of  the  gulf  for 
many  successive  hours  at  the  rate  of  2  knots  from  the  north  ;  at  another 
time  its  rate  was  one  knot  from  the  NW.;  and  at  a  third  it  was  imper- 
ceptible. After  long-continued  winds  from  the  east  or  NE.,  which  raise 
the  level  of  the  water  in  the  Bras  d'Or  Lake  and  neighboring  harbors,  it 
is  not  unusual  to  Hud  a  current  of  one  knot  running  for  several  succes- 
sive days  along  the  laud  from  olf  St.  Anne  to  near  Cape  Iforth,  wliere  it 
meets  the  current  oat  of  the  gulf  and  is  turned  to  the  east  with  a  great 
rippling.  The  iisherraen  afllrm  that  it  as  ofteu  runs  in  the  opposite 
direction;  and  again,  that  at  other  times  there  is  a  regular  alternatiou 
of  the  flood  and  ebb  streams. 

These  remarks  are  intended  to  show  th«  inconstant  nature  of  these 
currents,  and  the  consequent  great  (tare  required  for  the  safety  of  a  ves- 
sel when  ap:-.roachinf.>.  this  neighborhood  in  the  fogs  which  so  often  hide 
the  lights  on  St.  Pari  Island. 

OAPE  BRETON   ISLAND;   UTTLK  AND  GREAT  BRAS  D'OR  LAKES. 

Boulardrie  Isit-.  id — The  Great  and  Little  Bras  d'Or  are  two  channels 
'•ading  to  the  Bras  d'Or  Lake.  BonUirdrie  Island,  which  forms  these 
'  Ixannels,  is  22  miles  long,  with  an  extreme  breadth  of  5  miles.  Sand- 
stone, in  some  parts  containing  coal,  shale,  limestone,  and  gypsum,  are 
found  on  its  shores,  which  are  thinly  settled  (1860);  the  interior  being 
thickly  wooded,  and  risin^'  to  the  height  of  400  feet  above  the  sea. 

St.  Andrew  Channel,  on  the  SB.  side  of  Boulardrie  Island,  is 
easily  navigable,  being  from  IJ  to  2J  miles  wide,  with  a  great  de[>th  <rf 
water,  but  it  is  only  accessible  to  shipping  from  within  or  round  tine 
SW.  extremity  of  Boulardrie  Island,  the  direct  entrance  from  sea  through 
the  Little  Bras  d'Or  Channel,  adu.i'  ting  only  small  craft  and  boats. 

Five  miles  within  this  narrow  entrance  th«  ekannwl  bn^cins  tot.vpand, 
and  there  is  secure  anchorage  ott"  the  establisiiment  of  Messrs.  Gammel 
and  Moore ;  which,  with  its  wharf  and  a  chapel,  will  be  seen  on  Chapel 
Point  (1860).  From  the  settlement  here  tUtse  are  roads  across  to  Syd- 
ney and  its  coal  mines. 

Great  Bras  d'Or  Channel.— Having  entered  the  Great  Bras  d'Or 
Channel,  as  already  directed,  there  is  nothing  in  the  way  of  vessels 
until  they  approach  tht  -  >.al  ui'ands.  These  two  islands  are  low  and 
wooded,  and  separated  from  the  meuntainot  ^  northwestern  shore  by  a 
narrow  and  difficult  chi^uif^l,  which  is  almost  closed  to  large  ships  at 
its  NE.  end,  by  a  reef  which  runs  out  J  mile  from  the  islands  in  that 
direction. 

The  Seal  Reefs,  with  2  feet  least  water,  lie  to  the  SB.  of  the  Seal 
Islands,  directly  in  the  fairway  of  vessels.  There  is  no  passage  for 
yessels  of  large  draft  between  them  and  the  islands,  and  thP  ship  chan- 
nel between  them  and  the  shore  of  Boulardrie  Island  is  only  240  yards 


im^-Kite- 


SEAL    REEFS — COFFIN    ISLAND. 


71 


wide.  This  narrow  passage  has  2  small  rocky  shoals  on  the  eoutheast- 
erii  side  of  the  channel ;  one,  vrith  11  feet  water  on  it,  lying  200  yards 
west  from  Long  Beach,  and*  the  other,  with  only  4  feet  on  if,  400  yards 
'n  the  same  direction  from  McLean  Point. 

The  sonndings  in  this  narrow  part  of  the  channel  are  from  0  to  13 
fathoms,  over  rocky  bottom,  the  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  from  '2  to  2 J 
knots,  and  the  mark  which  hads  tliroujjh  is,  Dnffus  I'oint  kept  jnst 
open  of  Duncan  Head,  bearing  N.  43°  E. 

Otter  Harbor  is  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  and  affords  seciire 
Jinchorage  in  from  5  to  9  fathoms,  mnd,  the  best  berth  being  ott"  the 
nioath  of  the  small  bay  of  the  main,  which  forms  the  head  of  the  har- 
bor, and  has  a  small  islet  in  its  center.  The  western  point  of  this  bay 
has  a  reef  oflf  it  to  the  distance  of  100  yards.  Its  eastern  point,  a  i)en- 
insula  separating  it  from  the  shallow  cove  to  the  eastward,  is  named 
Harbor  Point. 

Directions. — When  approaching  the  anchorage  in  Otter  Harbor  from 
the  eastward  the  reef  ott"  the  islets  will  be  cleared  by  keeping  some 
part  of  the  Seal  Islands  to  the  southward  of  Seal  Point  until  Harbor 
Point  appears  to  tlie  westwar<l  of  the  westernmost  islet,  then  haul  in, 
so  as  to  pass  the  islet  at  a  distance  betwen  60  and  200  yards,  and  when 
Otter  Point  is  seen  to  tlic  northwnrd  of  Otter  Island  the  vessel  will  b© 
within  the  reef  and  may  choose  her  berth  at  pleasure. 

Port  Bevis  is  a  large  cove  running  in  to  the  NVV.,  and  curving  round 
the  southwestern  termination  of  thd  range  of  mountains,  which  has 
continued  unbroken  all  the  way  from  Cape  Dauphin. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  in  the  port  is  quite  secure,  in  from  7  to 
4  fathoms,  mul;  the  latter  depth  being  ^  mile  in  from  the  entrance, 
where  the  cove  is  divided  into  two  shallow  arms. 

Th'o  ontuiii  :e  to  this  port  being  free  from  danger,  the  only  direction 
necessary  is  t3  anchor  about  two-thirds  over  towards  tlie  northeastern 
shore;  the  Sdundings  being  rocky  and  comparatively  shoal,  3  to  4 
fathoms,  200  ,\  anls  out  from  the  opposite  shore. 

Gypsum  abounds  in  the  cliff  on  the  SW.  side  of  Port  Bevis,  and  also 
along  the  shore  to  Red  Head  at  the  entrance  of  St.  Patrick  Cliannel,  a 
distance  of  5  miles. 

CofBn  Island,  a  small  narrow  bank  of  red  clay  fast  wasting  by  the 
waves,  lies  i  mile  to  the  northward  of  Kemp  Head,  the  B^Y.  extreme 
of  Boulardrie  Ishmd.  A  leef  extends  off  either  end  of  Cothn  Isiand  to 
t'e  distance  of  ^  mile;  and  there  is  a  channel  for  small  craft,  but  not 
for  ships,  between  it  and  the  ishore.  A  vessel  will  pass  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  ret-f  if  McParland  Point  be  not  shut  In  behind  Krazer  Point. 

Rocky  Patches. — In  the  channel,  to  the  northward  ot  Coflin  Island, 
tliere  are  two  small  rocky  ])atcbe«  on  which  no  less  tlian  i  fathoms  could 
be  found,  hut  Nrhich  nevertlieiess  had  better  be  avoidoil  in  a  large  ship. 
One  of*  them  lies  N.  52^  W.  HiU)  yards  from  Coflin  Point,  .wl  the  other 
S.  30°  E.  900  yards  from  Macrae  Point,  on  the  northwestern  shore. 


J 


72 


HBA«    DOR    LAKES. 


il 


In  the  17  iniloa  of  the  Great  Bras  d'Or  Channel  just  described  from 
Carey  Tuiut  to  Kemp  Head,  the  only  good  anchorages  are  those  which 
have  been  noticed.     In  tlte  channel  tho  long  reaches  allowing  of  con 
Hiderable  swell,  and  in  many  parts  the  great  depth  of  water,  amounting 
ott' Otter  Island  to  58  fathoms,  render  the  anchorage  insecure. 

St.  Patrick  Channel  extends  from  lied  Point  to  Whycocomagh,  a 
distance  of  21  miles  in  a  westerly  direction,  with  an  average  breadth 
of  one  mile.  It  is  navigable  throughout  for  vessels  of  large  draft,  but 
not  much  frequented  nor  much  known.  Its  banks,  moderately  high, 
rise  into  hills  of  considerable  elevation  at  a  short  distance  from  the 
shore,  and  the  land  is  generally  susceptible  of  profitable  culture.  Tbis 
channel  during  rough  and  blowing  weather  is  subject  to  heavy  squalls 
of  wind,  making  navigation  often  dangerous  to  open  boats  under  sail. 

Anchorage.— There  are  excellent  anchorages  iu  Baddeck,  Cow,  and 
Indian  Bays  on  the  north  side  of  the  channel,  and  Washaback  liiver 
on  the  south  side;  indeed,  the  whole  affords  fair  anchorage  and  good 
holding  ground.  But  for  these  anchorages,  as  well  as  to  navigate  safely 
St.  Patrick  Channel,  a  pilot  should  be  employed,  and  on  this  account 
the  directions  will  be  brief. 

Baddeck  Bay  is  free  from  danger  to  its  head,  where  it  receives  the 
waters  of  a  small  river.  The  best  anchorage  is  after  passing  the  long 
shingle  beaches. 

Baddeck  Harbor,  formed  by  Eidston  Island  on  the  western  shore 
of  Baddeck  Bay,  affords  snug  anchorage  for  small  craft.  The  village 
of  Baddeck  derives  some  little  importance  from  being  the  county  town. 
One  or  two  vessels  of  large  burden  are  built  here  annually,  and  several 
schooners  sent  with  agricultural  produce  to  Newfoundland,  whilst  a 
small  steamer  i)lios  between  Baddeck  and  Sydney  twice  a  week  during 
the  summer  months.  Fresh  meat  can  be  purchased  at  the  village,  and 
good  water  obtained  from  a  brook  one  mile  west  o^  the  harbor. 

Directions. — With  a  fair  wind,  having  passed  Bed  Point,  which  is 
bold-to,  steer  N.  35°  W.  for  the  church,  which,  situated  close  to  the 
shore,  foims  a  prominent  object  about  ^  mile  east  of  the  village.  Con- 
tinue on  this  course  until  the  western  passage  opens,  then  steer  S.  55° 
W.,  and  passing  the  low  beach  point  of  Kidston  Island,  anchor  in  4^ 
fathoms,  mud. 

Cow  Bay  has  a  sandy  shoal  with  18  feet  water  stretching  from  its 
west  pointy  and  by  passing  round  its  east  end  good  anchorage  can  be 
obtained  in  7  fathoms,  rau  i. 

Indian  Bay  receives  the  waters  of  two  rapid  but  shallow  streams 
called  Middle  and  Baddeck  Elvers;  the  latter  flows  through  a  rich 
alluvial  valley  for  some  miles.  This  bay  is  gradually  filling  up  and  is 
very  shoal  near  the  mouth  of  the  rivers,  but  there  is  good  sheltered 
anchorage  in  other  parts. 

Washaback  River,  on  the  south  side  of  St.  Patrick  Channel,  is 
more  i)roperly  a  (jreek,  as  it  only  receives  a  small  run  of  indifi'erent 


kmtumJkd 


8T.    PATRICK    CHANNEL. 


73 


water  about  3  miles  from  its  entrance.  Ve.s.sels  of  large  draft  may 
ttnd  siiii}?  aiKiliorafjo  soiiie  little  (lisJtaiice  up  tliis  (sreek,  but  tlie  eutraiiee 
is  narrow,  and  tbe  deep-water  channel  runs  clone  to  Plaster  Point,  the 
east  point  of  entrance.    Oysters  of  a  jjood  quality  abound  up  t!ie  creek. 

Directions.— St.  Patrick  Channel,  to  the  eastward  of  Maciver  Point, 
being  wide  and  free  from  danger,  may  bo  navigated  without  dilliculty, 
the  use  of  the  lead  giving  sutticient  warning  in  approachingeithei' shore  ; 
but  to  the  westward  of  Maciver  Point,  a  shoal  extending  ^  mile  east 
irom  a  small  stony  islet  called  Bell  Rock,  and  on  the  oth^'r  side  of  the 
Maciver  Bank,  of  mud,  with  4  feet  least  water,  extending  SVV.  one  mile 
from  Maciver  Point,  narrows  the  channel  to  4  mile. 

To  pass  between  these  shoals,  bring  Cranberry  Point  to  touch  Cow 
Point,  bearing  X.  43^  E.,  and  steer  with  this  mark  on  astern  until  Bell 
Eock  comes  in  line  with  Flume  Islet,  when  alter  course  to  the  south- 
ward, keeping  this  latter  mark  astern  until  the  Narrows  church  is  seen 
touching  the  bank  of  Curlew  Point,  S.  48°  W.  This  latter  mark 
will  lead  in  raid  channel  between  Kel  Shoal  and  the  rock  off  Green 
Point;  on  approaching  Curlew  Point  alter  course  to  8.65°  VV.,  when 
ba\  iug  cleared  its  low  marshy  point,  steer  for  the  sandy  spit  on  the 
Houth  side  of  the  entrance. 

Having  parsed  this  spit,  which  is  bold- to,  steer  with  the  Narrows 
church  and  sandy  spit  astern,  to  clear  the  shoal  extending  200  yards  to 
the  southward  from  Narrows  Point,  which  having  passed,  the  vessel 
will  enter  a  lake  l^  miles  wide,  6  miles  long,  and  free  from  danger. 

The  water  is  shoal  towards  the  head  of  the  lake,  but  the  bottom  is 
mud,  and  the  anchorage  safe.  There  are  sheltered  anchorages,  with 
deeper  water,  on  the  SW.  side  of  Indian  Island  and  the  south  side  of 
Maciver  Island,  but  as  these  ''vc  not  frequented,  it  is  not  necessary  to 
describe  them. 

There  are  no  tidal  currents,  nor  any  perceptible  rise  of  tide,  but  the 
waters  of  the  lake  are  affected  by  the  prevalent  winds,  being  highest 
during  NB.  winds,  and  lowest  during  SW.  winds;  the  difference  of 
level  is  seldom  more  than  one  foot. 

Little  Bras  d'Or  Lake  is  0  miles  long  from  Kemp  Head  to  Bara 
Strait,  and  from  3  to  5  miles  wide.  The  depth  of  water  in  it  is  very 
irregular,  exceeding  60  fathoms  in  some  parts,  while  in  others  there 
are  tlangerous  shoals.  There  are  settlements  thinly  scattered  along 
the  shores  of  the  lake  (1860). 

Double  Island  and  Burnt  Shoal.— Double  Island,  lying  at  the 
entrance  of  St.  Patrick  Channel,  between  Red  and  McKay  Points, 
should  not  be  approached  on  its  eastern  side  nearer  than  J  mile,  or 
the  depth  of  6  fathoms.  Half  a  mile  SW,  from  McKay  Point  is  Burnt 
Point,  from  which  a  reef  runs  out  350  yards. 

Boulaceet  Harbor  is  700  yards  wide  at  the  entrance  between  Par- 
liament and  Gillis  Points.    The  latter  is  the  western  point  of  entrance, 


taife»aai^<'i..'att.iii!fcifet>fj-  - 


_J 


74 


URA«    DOR    LAKK8. 


'<lt^ 


Ui;,t 


and  tlu'  only  dniiKer  tu  \m  avoidt'tl  \h  the  nw(  whicli  ruiiH  out  200  yards 
to  the  «'ust  ward. 

Prowedinj;  suiilliward  from  Iloulaciu^t  Harbor,  llie  8li<»r«  iis  l)ol«l  for 
the  lir.st  li  iiiilea;  it  th<Mi  lie»H)ine!S  daiiv:eroitH  to  HtraiijjtMa  for  th«  re- 
iiiaiiiiii;;  2  iiiiles  to  liarra  Htrait ;  nhoaU  extending otY'  Lit'  )f.(  iiaiit  Pond 
and  .Mn<!pli(>rs(ni  Point, 

Macphee  Shoal. — OW  tlie  southeastern  shore  of  the  Little  Hras  d'Or 
Ij!ik('  tlie  eastei'nniost  daupn-  is  ]\Iac|>ii('eSii(»al,  witii  18  feet  least  water 
and  'f  mile  ofl  shore.  It  l.oars  from  Hla(!i<  Point  N.  14°  K.  one  mile; 
and  with  muoh  rocky  and  irnvidar  souiulinj^s  to  the  northward  of  it, 
lies  in  the  entrance  of  Ht.  Andrew  Channel. 

Big  Bhoal  is  an  extensive  rooky  bank  with  very  irregular  sournlinKS. 
Uesiiles  several  patcjhos  of  3  fatiioms,  there  is  one  near  the  northern 
edjj:e  wliieli  dries  at  low  water. 

Christmas  Island. — The  shoal  water  extends  only  300  yards  ott"  this 
island  l,o  liie  northward,  and  there  is  an  excellent  harbor  within  it  for 
boats  and  small  craft,  the  narrow  etdrance,  carryingO  feet  water,  being 
from  the  westward. 

A  channel  has  been  dredged  southeastward  of  Christnnis  Island;  the 
west  side  of  the  ehanuel  is  marked  by  4  red  spar  buoys,  and  the  east 
side  by  4  black  spar  buoys. 

Anchorage. —There  is  good  anchorage,  excepting  in  sti'ong  NE. 
wind.s,  .\  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  island,  in  the  bay  between  it 
and  Neilban  Cove,  in  9  fathoms,  mud ;  observing  that  the  shoal  water 
extends  400  yard.s  from  the  island  in  that  direction.  A  chapel,  a  large 
white  wooden  ?niiiding,  will  be  seen  on  the  mainland  near  the  island 
(18f!<>\ 

Barra  Btralt,  cotnmo  ily  called  by  the  country  people  the  Big  Nar- 
rows, is  l\  ndl  's  long  and  ^  mile  wide,  excepting  at  its  northeastern 
entrance,  whe;e  the  breadth  is  reduced  by  the  sand  and  shingle  beaches 
of  Uniacke  and  Kelly  Points. 

These  points  are  connected  by  a  railroad  bridge,  the  draw  of  which  is 
on  the  southeastern  side  of  the  strait. 

The  beaches  are  bold  at  their  extreme  points,  but  shallow  on  their 
northeastern  sides  to  the  distance  ^  mile  from  the  shore.  There  are 
settlements,  on  the  siiores  of  the  strait. 

Barra  Shoal,  of  rock,  .md  ^  mile  in  length,  lies  across  I  he  entrance 
of  the  strait,  and,  together  with  t!',e  sh<'al  oft"  Kelly  Point,  render  the 
passage  indirect  and  ditlicult  at  times  for  n  vessel  of  large  draft.  The 
least  water,  1 1  feet,  bearing  from  Uniacke  Point  X.  32°  B,  1,300  yards, 
is  just  cleared  to  the  southwaril  by  the  line  of  Derby  Point  and  Kelly 
Point  in  one,  bearing  S.  11°  W.,  or  by  the  summit  of  Hector  Eill  in 
line  with  Uniacke  Point  S.  4G°  VV. ;  but  those  marks  only  clear  the 
least  water,  not  the  whole  of  the  shoal,  which  they  lead  over  in  3  fath- 
oms water.  Kelly  and  Hector  Points,  touching  and  bearing  S.  43°  W., 
lead  into  the  entrance  of  the  ship  channel,  which  is  to  the  southward 


of 


HAKRA    8H0AL — DKNNY    RIVIiR. 


T5 


of  the  shoal,  betwutiu  it  niid  the  shoal  oti'  Kelly  Point,  and  wlii(;li  carrioH 
from  0  to  15  fathoms  water  over  rocky  bottom.  Within  the  strait  the 
depth  in  miicli  K>'t)<i>ter.  an<l  the  HliuaLs  art*  bold  on  either  Hi<h*. 

Tides. — Tlh'  rise  of  tlie  tide  in  Harra  Strait  in  nearly  insensible, 
ainonntin^  onis  to  a  few  inehes;  it  is  ditllciilt  to  distin^nisi*  it  tVnm 
changes  of  level  caused  by  the  winds.  The  rate  of  the  streams  is  also 
very  irrejfnhir,  and  seldom  exceeds  one  knot,  excepting  when  incri-ased 
by  winds,  prt'sent  or  at  a  distance. 

Directions. — With  the  assistance  of  the  chart,  and  the  des(;ription 
of  the  dangers  already  };'^'«"i  little  dirtlunlty  will  be  expt'rieiiecMl  in 
passinn  throiigli  the  Great  Hras  d'Or  Oiiannel  imd  into  the  LittU'  Uras 


■'■  preferreil,  in  order 

ssci  1ms  advanced  as 

iirds  the  western 

Mats  are  tonching, 

points  tonchin};  until 


d'Or  Lake,  the  northern  shore  of  which  hIk 

to  avoid  the  daii(<;erous  131^  Shoal  until 

far  as  Bonlaceet  Harbor;  from  thence  stei 

end  of  Christmas  Island  nntil  Kelly  and  !.• 

when  alter  course  to  SW.,  or  so  as  to  keep  tli 

the  west  side  of  Neilban  Cove  bears  S.  26°  E.;  then  steer  8.  08°  VV.  for 

Uiuacke  Point  nntil  the  leadinj;  marks  for  clearing  the  shoal  ofV  Kelly 

Pond,  namely,  Derby  Point  open  to  the  northward  of  Kelly  Point,  come 

ou;  then  a  course  may  be  shapetl  so  as  to  pass  through  the  strait  into 

the  Great  Bras  d'Or  Lake. 

The  Great  Bras  d'Or  Lake  is  12  miles  wide,  fron;  Barra  Htrait  to 
the  entrance  of  St.  I'eter  Inlet,  and  37  miles  long,  measuring  from  the 
head  of  the  west  bay  to  that  of  the  east  bay.  The  <lei>th  of  wat  jr  in 
this  marine  lake  is  extremely  irregular. 

McKinnon  Shoal  is  an  extensive  rocky  bank,  with  18  feet  least 
water,  stretcliing  out  1^  miles  from  McKinuon  Point.  A  vessel  will 
pass  to  the  eastward  of  it  by  keeping  Hector  and  Kelly  Points  touch- 
ing anil  bearing  NE. 

The  Rivor  Denny  has  its  source  in  the  eastern  slope  of  the  hills  east 
of  Judiqiie.  It  enters  the  Great  Bras  d'Or  Lake  through  two  deep  water 
inlets  called  North  and  South  Basins,  the  real  mouth  of  tlie river  being 
at  the  west  extremity  of  the  South  Basin.  Eight  feet  water  can  be 
carried  up  the  river  for  2  miles,  and  boats  may  ascend,  with  some  <lini- 
culty,  on  account  of  sunken  driftwood,  about  o  miles  farther  to  the 
bridge  ;  but  above  this  the  stream  becomes  rapid  and  shalKr.v. 

The  main  entrance  of  this  river  from  the  lake  lies  between  the  low 
wooded  entry  island  and  Mackeane  Point,  and  is  one  mile  wide.  It  may 
easily  be  recognized  as  the  first  opening  in  the  low  land  after  passing 
the  hilly  country  forming  the  west  side  of  Barra  Strait.  If  the  channel 
be  kept,  more  than  4  fathoms  water  can  be  carried  for  a  distance  of  6 
miles  into  the  South  Basin,  and  an  excellent  anchorage  obtained  off  the 
settlement  at  Plaster  Cove. 

Excepting  the  range  of  hills  between  this  river  and  W^est  Bay,  the 
land  is  generally  low  and  wooded,  and  the  absence  of  any  remarkable 


■••MdiiiMi 


!<P***'-7S 


7fi 


BRAH    DOK    LAKKFl 


III!' 


fiMituroH  iiDikeH  it  (|iiito  tuuinHHiiry  for  itM  Hiit'e  nuvi^atioii  that  there 
Hhouhi  \w  II  loiiiil  kii<>\vUMl);(4  of  thu  ixiiiitH  and  oltji^utH  iiaiiuMl. 

Cod  Shoal. — Th«^  (Jod  ShoaU,  i^xttMi.sivu  rocky  tlsliin^f  baiikH,  with  21 
tu(>t  Uy.iHl  wati^r,  atitl  lyiiiK  ^  to  .'iiniluH  to  tho  south  of  the  Moiitlii^ni  <-ii- 
traiKte  of  Harra  Strait,  are  only  ilaii}(eroiiH  to  vhhmoIh  of  htr^e  draft. 
IIt><;tor  and  (Iniacku  Poitits  in  oms  and  hearing  N.  'JU^  K,  lead  h  mile 
to  the  \v«^st^vard  of  them,  and  thronjfh  the  chanind,  2  mile.s  widi^,  be- 
tween them  and  MuKinnnn  Shoal. 

Kelly  ShoaL — 'L'iie  approach  to  this  Hhoal  in  indicated  by  the  open- 
ing out  of  the  marks  for  leatling  to  the  north  wanl  of  them,  namely,  the 
Houtli  extremity  of  the  Red  iHlandH  bearing  X.  (iU^  !<}.,  and  in  one  with 
Mill  Cape,  a  rocky  and  precipitoiiH  point,  distant  2  miles  from  the  islands. 
There  is  deep  water  all  around  these  shoals,  but  the  passage  to  the 
westward,  between  them  and  Macrae  Point,  is  the  most  direct ;  and  the 
marks  for  ulearing  them  on  that  side  are  Trap  Point  and  Indian  Point 
in  one,  bearing  9.  21°  B.,  the  former  being  the  extreme  western  point 
of  Chapel  Island,  in  St.  Peter  Inlet,  and  which  will  be  recognized  by  the 
large  crosH  on  its  summit.  These  marks  lead  over  the  west  end  of  the 
Kelly  Shoals  in  .'>  fathoms  water,  and  also  close  to  the  eastward  of  the 
3-fathoms  shoal  otf  Cape  George,  which  having  passed,  the  vessel  will 
enter  St.  Peter  Inlet. 

St.  Peter  Inlet. — On  the  eastern  side  of  the  entrance  to  this  inlet 
are  Macnab  Creek  and  Soldier  Cove,  which  have  depth  of  water  sutti- 
oient  for  vessels  of  large  draft,  but  can  only  be  approached  by  passing 
between  dangerous  nhoalr  ;  but  '>v  keeping  over  towards  Cape  George, 
and  steering  so  as  to  pas:-.  tb  .i^estward  of  Chapel  Island,  there  is 
nothing  in  the  way  until  t'le  vessel  arrives  oil'  its  west  point,  where  the 
ship  channel  between  <  and  Dock  Point,  a  shingle  beach  of  the  main- 
land inclosing  a  smali  i>ound,  ia  ^  mile  wide. 

Anchorage. — Off  the  western  side  of  Chapel  Island  there  is  good 
anchorage  in  11  fathoms  water,  mud,  with  the  large  cross  bearing  N. 
10°  E.,  the  chapel  near  the  south  end  of  the  island,  S.  64°  B.,  and  at  a 
distance  of  3U0  yards  off  shore.  This  anchorage  is  between  Chapel  and 
Doctor  Islands,  the  latter  lying  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  former 
and  diagonally  across  the  inlet,  leaving  passages  on  either  side  about  4 
mile  wide. 

Of  these  passages  the  easternmost,  between  the  island  and  ludian 
Point,  is  so  intricate  as  to  be  only  fit  for  small  vessels ;  but  the  ship 
channel,  which  curves  round  the  island  and  between  it  and  the  main- 
land to  the  westward,  is  clear  from  detached  dangers,  and  carries  from 
8  to  10  fathoms  water.  It  is,  however,  reduced  by  shoals  on  either  side, 
and  is  still  narrower  and  more  crooked  in  several  other  parts  of  the  in- 
let. Referring,  therefore,  to  the  chart,  the  aid  of  which,  or  a  properly 
qualiUed  pilot,  would  be  indispensable  to  a  stranger,  it  will  merely  be 
added  that  the  channel  is  everywhere  deep  enough  for  the  largest  ves- 
sels that  could  enter  the  Bras  d'Or,  until  they  arrive  at  the  Haulover, 


that  there 
(I. 

ikH,  with  21 
oiithurii  (;ii- 
hir^e  (Iriit't. 
lend  A  inilo 
iM  wide,  be- 

y  the  open- 
iiaiiieiy,  the 
ill  one  with 
the  IhUiikIs. 
uige  to  the 
it ;  and  the 
(liaii  Point 
Hterii  point 
ized  by  the 
end  of  the 
vard  of  the 
vessel  will 

0  this  inlet 
(rater  siitti- 
by  passing 
pe  George, 
id, there  is 

where  the 
'  the  main- 
re  18  good 
t)eariug  N. 
M  and  at  a 
/hapel  and 
the  former 
de  about  :J 

ad  Indian 
it  the  ship 
the  main- 
irries  from 
ither  side, 

1  of  the  in- 
a  properly 
merely  be 
^rgest  ves- 
Hau  lover, 


-'^^'^S^^&ii^^mm^^i^^^^^^f^^^mmmsm^^mmm&mwmms'rrrw^ 


..■^.-^ 


*^.*r. 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


liilM    |2.S 

1.8 


ui  lii 

31° 


m 

■UUu 


Photographic 

Sdences 

Corporation 


^. 


1.25 

1  1.4     |l.6 

- 

■« 6"     

► 

23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  M580 

(716)  872-4  Jd3 


v 


Is 


«' 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHM/ICMH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  Microreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


V 


-■  '.-wjiiP^ffBJSSMWeS 


'r 


ii 


ST.    PETER    INLET — MtADAM    POINT. 


77 


at  St.  Peter.  To  reach  the  wharf  they  would  have  to  paas  over  15  feet, 
whicli  is  the  depth  of  water  between  st  and  Cara[)l)ell  Ishmds. 

Barachois  and  Johnson  Harbors. — For  these,  togetlier  with  Camp- 
bell Harbor,  and  other  csoves  and  poud»  capable  of  attbrding  ahi^lter  to 
small  vessels  and  boats,  and  also  for  the  dangers  in  tl.n  passage  between 
those  places  and  the  Kelly  Shoals  and  lied  Islands,  the  mariner  is  re- 
ferred to  tlje  chart. 

Red  Islands,  so  called  from  their  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  and  clay, 
are  four  in  number,  two  of  them  very  small,  and  they  are  so  arranged 
as  to  form  a  secure  boat  harbor,  open  to  the  southward  towards  the 
mainland,  in  wliich  direction  they  are  prolonged  under  water,  so  as  to 
leave  a  navigable  passage  onlj'  J  mile  wide. 

Lochmore  Harbor,  a  harbor  for  small  craft,  on  the  southern  shore, 
distant  10  miles  from  the  Red  Islands,  is  formed  by  a  long  shingle 
beach,  having  its  entrance  from  the  eastward,  and  8  feet  water  on  its 
bar.  There  is  a  chapel  here,  and  the  country  is  well  settled  between 
the  sea  and  the  hills,  which  rise  to  the  height  of  500  feet  i  mile  back 
from  the  shore. 

Christmas  Fond. — Directly  opposite,  on  the  northern  shore  of  East 
Bay,  arid  distant  2i  miles,  Christmas  Island  will  be  seen,  and  i  mile  to 
the  westward  of  it  the  sand  and  shingle  beach  of  Christmas  Pond, 
forming  another  boat  harbor,  rendered  difficult  of  access  to  strangers 
by  the  shoals  off  either  end  of  the  island.  On  the  mainland,  nearly 
opposite  the  island,  and  ou  the  banks  of  a  considerable  stream,  are  the 
Indian  chapel  and  settlement  of  Eskiscogumic  (1860). 

Macphee  Island  is  composed  of  three  parts  connected  together  by 
shingle  beaches.  The  easternmost  part  of  the  island  is  joined  to  the 
mainland  by  a  beach  of  sand  and  shingle,  one  mile  in  length  in  a  NW. 
direction;  and  to  the  westward  of  this  beach,  and  ou  the  northern  side 
of  the  island,  there  is  a  small  but  secure  harbor  for  small  vessels  and 
boats.  The  reefs  off'  the  southern  side  of  this  island,  and  also  off  its 
east  and  west  points,  are  exceedingly  dangerous,  being  covered  by  only 
2  or  3  feet  of  water,  and  extending  J  mile  from  the  shore. 

Marble  and  Macdougal  Points. — Half  a  mile  eastward  of  Marble 
Point,  a  shingle  beach  incloses  a  large  pond,  and  has  a  long  reef  run- 
ning out  from  it  to  the  eastward,  and  at  the  distance  of  ^  nn\e  from  the 
shore.  On  the  eastern  side  of  Macdougal  Point,  1 J  miles  farther  to  the 
east,  there  is  a  similar  pond.  The  shoal  water  runs  out  400  yards  from 
this  point  towards  the  shoals  which  have  been  mentioned  off  the  oppo- 
site shore,  the  channel  between  them  being  1,300  yards  wide. 

Cosset  Point. — On  the  northern  shore  of  East  Bay,  and  3  mil^s 
eastward  from  Macphee  Island,  there  is  aiiother  small  harbor  open  to 
the  eastward,  and  formed  as  usual  by  a  sand  and  shingle  beach,  from 
which  a  dangerous  reef  runs  out  800  yards  to  the  SE. 

McAdam  Point,  one  mile  farther  to  the  eastward,  has  also  a  reef  off 
it  to  the  distance  of  350  yards;  and  one  equally  long  runs  out  from  a 


78 


BRAS    D  OR   LAKES. 


point  a  little  farther  up  the  bay  on  the  southern  shore.    The  remaining 
tlistance  of.'U  miles  to  the  head  of  Bast  Bay  is  free  from  danger. 

Head  of  East  Bay.— At  the  head  of  East  Bay  shingle  beaches  iu- 
close  a  large  pond,  which  boats  can  enter,  and  ascend  to  the  bridge,  a 
distance  of  '^  mile.  The  pond  continues  one  mile  farther,  shallow  and 
full  of  mud  and  weeds;  and  from  its  head  the  distance  is  2  miles  to 
Forks  Lake,  and  4  miles  to  the  south  arm  of  Sydney  Harbor,  into  which 
thelake.just  named  discharges  its  waters. 

The  main  |)ost  road  from  Elalifax,  which  crosses  the  Gut  of  Canso  at 
Port  Hastings,  and  passes  by  St.  Peter,  continues  along  the  southern 
shore  of  East  Bay,  and  from  its  head  across  to  Sydney  Harbor.  There 
is  a  chapel  on  this  road  near  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  there  are  thinly 
scattered  houses  along  the  whole  route. 

Malagawatchkt  Harbor.— The  entrance  of  this  fine  harbor,  between 
Gillis  and  Pellier  Points,  the  latter  on  the  south  side,  is  f  mile  wide, 
but  Sheep  Island,  separated  by  a  narrow  channel  from  Pellier  Point, 
reduces  the  breadth  to  800  yards.  At  the  distance  of  one  mile  in  from 
the  entrance,  at  the  first  Narrows,  the  channel  contracts  to  320  yards, 
and  the  deep  water  tb  half  that  width ;  it  then  expands  into  a  flue  basin, 
affording  secure  anchorage  to  any  number  of  the  largest  ships.  Prom 
the  north  side  of  this  basin  the  second  Narrows,  270  yards  wide,  and 
carrying  4  fathoms  water,  communicates  with  the  inner  harbor,  which 
has  deep  water  quite  to  its  head. 

Oillis  Shoal,  lying  otf  Gillis  Point,  is  the  principal  danger  to  be 
avoided  iu  entering  Malagawatchkt  Harbor.  There  is  deep  water  all 
around  the  shoal,  but  the  widest  and  most  direct  channel  into  the  har- 
bor is  to  the  southward  of  it,  where  the  breadth  of  the  deep  water  be- 
tween it  and  the  reefs  off  Pellier  Point  and  Sheep  Island,  is  600  yards. 
Pellier  Point  Reef  is  also  dangerous.  The  marks  which  just  lead 
to  the  southward  of  it  are  Militia  Point  and  the  south  extremity  of 
George  Island  in  one,  bearing  S.  60°  W.,  and  it  will  be  cleared  to  the 
NE.  if  the  south  side  of  the  first  Narrows  be  not  shut  in  behind  Sheep 
Island ;  this  last-named  mark  leads  over  the  northern  side  of  the  reefs 
off  Sheep  Island. 

Directions.— To  run  into  Malagawatchkt  Harbor  with  a  leading  wind, 
bring  Militia  Point  and  the  south  extremity  of  George  Island  in  one, 
bearing  S.  60°  W.,  and  run  towards  them  until  the  northern  side  of 
Sb'dep  Island  comes  on  with  the  eastern  point  of  Johnson  Cove,  bearing 
S.  88°  W. ;  then  alter  course  to  8.  88°  W.  or  so  as  to  keep  those  marks 
on,  until  Militia  and  Pellier  Points  are  in  one,  bearing  S.  47°  W.;  then 
steer  N.  58°  W.  until  Militia  Island  and  '^ellier  Point  are  touching, 
aiKl  then  N.  75°  W.,  or  so  as  to  keep  in  aannel,  until  the  vessel 

arrives  at  the  first  Narrows,  when  the  oou.  ^ust  be  changed  2  points 
to  the  northward,  or  so  as  to  avoid  the  shoal  just  within  the  Narrows, 
which  extend  250  yards  from  the  southern  shore,  causing  the  channel 
to  curve  to  the  northward.    Having  passed  the  Narrows,  which  will 


-^!iH.^->,*?S- 


■mil I  >LMi'i, 


MALAQAWATCHKr    HARBOH — WEST    BAY. 


79 


The  remaiiiiiig 
>iu  danger, 
ingle  beacbes  in- 
to the  bridge,  a 
her,  shallow  and 
uce  is  2  miles  to 
irbor,  into  which 

Gilt  of  Oanso  at 
ng  the  southern 
Harbor.  There 
there  are  thinly 

harbor,  between 
,  is  5  mile  wide, 
n  Pellier  Point, 
one  mile  in  from 
5ts  to  320  yards, 
into  a  tine  basin, 
St  ships.  From 
yards  wide,  and 
r  harbor,  which 

tl  danger  to  be 
i  deep  water  all 
lel  into  the  har- 
i  deep  water  be- 
id,  is  600  yards, 
which  just  lead 
th  extremity  of 
B  cleared  to  the 
n  behind  Sheep 
3ide  of  the  reefs 

I  a  leading  wind, 
i  Island  in  one, 
ortheru  side  of 
n  Cove,  bearing 
lep  those  marks 
J.  47°  W.;  then 
t  are  touching, 
intil  the  vessel 
iianged  2  points 
n  the  Narrows, 
ig  the  channel 
3WS,  which  will 


require  great  care,  the  deep  water  being  there  only  100  yanks  wide,  the 
vessel  may  be  anchored  over  towards  the  northiM-a  side  of  the  basin,  in 
6  or  7  fathoms,  mud,  and  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

Pellier  Harbor,  into  which,  with  a  fair  wind,  the  depth  of  21  feet 
can  be  carried  without  dilHculty,  is  formed  by  the  peninsula  of  Pellier 
Point,  which  has  several  buildings  on  its  SVV.  extrenuty,  and  a  long 
shingle  beach  which  shelters  the  harbor  and  forms  the  eastern  side  of 
the  entrance. 

Directions.— Approaching  Pellier  Harbor  from  the  eastward,  and  by 
the  preferable  channel  to  the  northward  of  Militia  Island,  where  the 
deep  water  is  250  yards  wide,  attend  to  the  marks  already  given  for 
clearitig  the  reef  off  Pellier  Point.  Bring  Militia  Point  to  bear  B.  06^ 
W.,  and  run  towards  it  until  Pellier  Point  and  Sheep  Island  are  touch- 
ing;  then  steer  for  the  harbor's  mouth,  observing  that  George  Island 
must  be  shut  in  behind  Militia  Point  to  clear  the  reef  off  Militia  Island. 
In  entering  the  harbor,  haul  round  the  shingle  beach  at  200  yards  dis- 
tance and  anchor  within  it  in  4  or  4^  fathoms,  mud. 

West  Bay  is  3^  miles  wide  at  entrance,  between  Militia  Point  and 
Poor  Islet,  on  the  southern  shore.  The  soundings  are  irregular  to  an 
extraordinary  degree,  numerous  rocky  shoals,  covered  by  only  a  few 
feet  of  water,  having  a  depth  of  20  fathoms  or  more  near  and  between 
them.  In  this  bay  cliffs  of  red  sand  and  clay,  and  of  sandstone  alter- 
nating with  shingle  beaches,  inclosing  ponds  or  uniting  [)eninsulas  to  the 
mainland,  form  the  predominating  features  of  the  southern  shore,  in 
rear  of  which,  and  at  distances  varying  from  a  half  to  one  mile,  ri(?os 
a  range  of  wooded  hills  to  the  height  of  600  feet.  On  the  northern 
shore  a  parallel  range  of  wooded  hills  runs  westward  from  Little  Har- 
bor, separating  West  Bay  from  the  River  Denny,  and  attaining  the  ele- 
vation of  750  feet.  These  hills  are  more  steep  than  those  on  the  oppo- 
site side  of  the  bay,  leaving  a  smaller  space  for  settlements,  which  are 
not  extensive,  excepting  at  Little  and  Malagawatchkt  Harbors. 

Little  Harbor,  which  is  distant  IJ  miles  to  the  NW.  from  Militia 
Point  has  a  narrow  but  unobstructed  entrance,  80  yards  wide,  and  with 
3  fathoms  water,  and  which  leads  into  a  land-locked  basin  f  mile  across, 
and  carrying  3.J  to  4^  fathoms  water,  over  a  bottom  of  mud. 

Between  George  Island  and  Madeod  Point  on  the  southern  shore,  a 
distance  of  3J  miles,  are  numerous  rocky  shoals,  so  scattered  about  that 
a  chart  on  a  large  scale  resulting  from  this  survey,  and  to  which  the 
following  remarks  refer  would  be  indispensable  to  the  safety  of  a  large 
ship  among  them. 

Paddle  Shoal  lies  S.  58°  E.,  one  mile  from  George  Island,  and  ex- 
tends ^  mile  farther  in  the  same  direction,  the  least  water  on  it  being 
13  feet.  Malagawatchkt  Point  kepi  in  one  with  Pellier  Point,  bearing 
N.  26°  E  ,  or  midway  between  it  and  Militia  Island,  will  lead  to  the  SE. 
of  the  shoal,  and  between  it  and  the  Outer  Shoal,  which,  with  22  feet 
least  water,  lies  ^  mile  from  it  to  the  southward.    The  marks  for  the 


II 


'::^"'Lv'i^^^*Wr?*^i^t-liV^i^eEtr^'.'^fe?v.'.- 


80 


HRAS    D'oK    lakes. 


soutlieasfein  edge  of  the  last-named  shoal  are  Malaga wachkt  Point  just 
open  to  the  eastward  of  Militia  Island  bearing  NE. 

Morrison  Head  will  easily  be  recognized,  being  a  small  peninsula, 
60  feet  high,  with  red  clirts,  and  united  to  tiie  southern  shore  by  a  shingle 
beach.  It  has  a  small  boat  harbor  on  its  eastern  side,  and  shallow  water 
off  it  to  the  distance  of  \  mile.  There  is  also  a  rocky  bank,  with  4i 
fatlioms  water,  lying  jj  mile  from  it  to  the  NE. 

Macrae  Point  is  distant  2^  miles  to  the  SE.  of  Morrison  Head,  and 
midway  between  them  lies  a  rocky  l)ank,  with  21  feet  water,  the  north- 
ern end  of  which  is  .listant  !f  mile  north  from  Scott  Eiver.  A  more 
dangerous  shoal,  hiiving  only  U  feet  water,  lies  northward  of  Macrae 
Point,  and  CAM  yards  off  sliore ;  after  which  there  are  no  farther  dangers, 
exce|)t  a  small  patdi  of  4:\  fathoms  up  to  the  3fathoms  shoal  off  Cape 
George,  at  the  entrance  of  8t.  Peter  Inlet. 

Mcintosh  Cove  is  easily  recognized  by  Mcintosh  Islet,  which,  with 
the  reef  uniting  it  to  the  mainland,  shelters  the  cove  from  easterly 
winds.  The  anchorage  here  is  good  in  4^  tiithoms,  mud,  but  there  is 
little  room,  the  cove  being  only  ^  mile  across,  and  the  deep  water  only 
200  yards  wide,  from  .'?  fathoms  to  3  fathoujs  on  either  side. 

The  Mclnnis  Shoals,  of  rock,  lie  off  the  mouth  of  this  cove,  the 
least  water,  18  feet,  bearing  from  Mcintosh  Islet  N.  80°  W.  about  300 
yards;  and  from  Mclnnis  Point,  on  the  west  side  of  the  cove,  north 
i  mile.  Vessels  may  pass  between  these  shoals  and  the  islet,  but  the 
widest  and  best  passage  is  between  them  and  the  point.  The  outermost 
of  these  shoals,  on  which  the  de|)th  is  22  feet,  extends  to  the  distance 
of  J  mile  ]Sr.  80oW.  from  Mclnnis  Point. 

Black  River — Off"  the  mouth  of  Black  River,  2  miles  farther  west- 
ward, there  is  another  confined  anchorage  sheltered  by  McKae  Islet 
and  its  reefs,  which  to  the  eastward  unite  it  to  the  peninsula  of  Goose- 
berry Pond,  and  to  the  NW.  run  out  to  the  distance  of  750  yards; 
but  the  place  is  narrow  and  intricate  and  only  lit  for  small  vessels. 

Ballam  Shoal  is  an  extensive  rocky  bank,  with  17  feet  least  water, 
running  out  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  from  Ballam  Head,  from  whence  to 
Head  Bay  Cove,  which  affords  shelter  to  boats,  the  distance  is  2  miles. 
Clarke  Cove.— On  the  northern  shore  of  West  Bay  a  group  of 
wooded  islands,  about  50  feet  high,  with  cliffs  of  red  sand,  clay,  and 
bowlders,  and  connected  by  shingle  beaches  when  not  separated  by  nar- 
row  channels,  will  be  seen  extending  from  George  Island  to  Ranald  Is- 
let, a  distance  of  4  miles  to  the  westward.  The  anchorage  is  good  be- 
tween them  and  the  northern  shore  of  the  bay,  but  especially  in 
Clarke  Cove,  which  may  be  approached  either  through  the  narrow 
channel  between  George  and  Cameron  Islands,  or  by  the  wider  one 
between  Cameron  and  Green  Islands.  This  last  is  J  mile  wide,  but  a 
dangerous  reef,  with  only  5  feet  water  on  it,  extends  from  Cameron 
Island  600  yards  across  towards  Green  Island,  and  reduces  the  navi- 
gable breadth  to  400  yards. 


fichktPointjust 

mill!  peiiiimnia, 
ore  by  aHliirif^Ie 
(I  shallow  water 
y  bank,  with  4i 

ivsoii  Head,  alul 
ater,  the  north- 
iiver.  A  more 
i^ard  of  Macrae 
irtlier  dangers, 
slioal  ott"  Cape 

at,  which,  with 
from  easterly 
I,  but  there  is 
eep  water  only 
de. 

this  cove,  the 
5  W.  about  300 
lie  cove,  north 
e  islet,  but  the 
The  outermost 
to  the  distance 

i  farther  west- 
y  McKae  Islet 
isula  of  Goose- 
of  750  yards; 
ill  vessels. 
et  least  water, 
rom  whence  to 
nee  is  2  miles. 
ly  a  group  of 
and,  clay,  and 
arated  by  nar- 
[  to  Ban  aid  Is- 
ge  is  good  be- 
especially  in 
:h  the  narrow 
the  wider  one 
le  wide,  but  a 
rom  Cameron 
uces  the  navi- 


WE8T    BAY — HEAD    BAY    COVE. 


81 


Ploda  and  Crammond  Islands.--Floda  Island  and  the  two  Cram- 
mond  Islands  are  of  similar  formation  to  those  already  described,  pre- 
senting cliffs  of  red  sand  and  clay  to  the  sea,  and  being  from  50  to  70 
feet  in  height. 

Between  the  two  Crammond  Islands  there  is  a  secure  harbor  for 
small  craft  and  boats,  having  otf  its  SH.  entrance  Smitii  Shoal,  one  of 
the  principal  dangers  in  West  Bay.  The  least  water,  only  3  feet,  is  on 
the  southwest  side  of  the  shoal,  and  bears  SK.  050  yards  from  the  south 
point  of  the  eastern  Crammond  Island,  and  N.  77°  E.  1,100  yards  from 
the  south  point  of  the  western  island,  from  which  a  reef  runs  out  to  the 
distance  of  (iOO  yards  towards  it,  leaving  only  a  narrow  channel  bo- 
tweeu.  The  SE.  extremes  of  Floda  and  Tailor  Islands  touching,  and 
bearing  N.  21°  E.,  lead  close  outside  of  this  shoal,  which  is  i  mile  in 
diameter. 

The  anchorage  is  not  good  around  these  islands,  because  of  the  great 
depth  of  water,  which  amounts  to  25  fathoms  between  them  and  Mid 
Shoal,  which  has  3  fathoms  on  it,  and  lies  N.  43°  W.  l  mile  from  the 
NE.  point  of  the  Crammond  Islands. 

There  is  a  deep  and  clear  channel  on  the  west  side  of  the  Crammond 
Islands,  between  them  and  Spruce  and  Widow  Points,  the  only  dangers 
being  a  shoal,  with  15  feet  least  water,  in  Malcolm  Cove,  and  the  reefs 
off  either  end  of  Dumpling  Island. 

Macleod  and  Moss  Creeks,  and  North  Cove  to  the  northward  of 
Widow  Point,  afford  secure  anchorage  in  from  3  to  3i  fathoms,  mud, 
but  must  be  entered  through  channels  only  80  yards  wide,  from  the 
depth  of  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms  on  either  side. 

Head  Bay  Cove.— The  head  of  West  Bay  between  Spruce  Point 
and  Ballam  Head,  is  1?^  miles  wide,  and  3  miles  deep  from  Spruce  Point 
to  Head  Bay  Cove,  which  affords  shelter  to  boats.  The  head  of  the  bay 
has  no  secure  anchorage,  and  on  its  northern  shore  there  are  dangerous 
reefs,  especially  at  Magnus  Islet,  which  lies  SW.  nearly  one  mile  from 
Spruce  Point,  and  J  mile  off  shore.  Off  the  first  point,  westward  of 
Spruce  Point,  a  reef  extends  eastward  J  mile,  and  oft"  Magnus  Islet,  in 
the  same  direction.  A  reef  partly  dry  connects  this  islet  with  a  po'int 
i  mile  to  the  westward,  and  then  runs  out  i  mile  to  the  southward  to 
the  depth  of  3  fathoms,  and  an  equal  distance  farther  with  22  feet 
stretching  nearly  across  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  to  within  A  mile  of 
Ballam  Head. 

5489 6 


r 


mm 


^ 


CHAPTER  IV. 


WEST    SIIOUE    OF    GULP    OF    ST.   LAWRENCE   AND    SOUTH  SIIOIIE   OF 
EIVER  ST.  LAWRENCE  FROM  MIRAMICHI  BAY  TO  GEEEN  ISLAND. 

Escuminac  Point,  theSE.  poiut  of  Miraraichi  Bay,  is  of  peat,  upon 
a  very  low  sandstone  cliff,  and  is  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  which 
form  a  dark  ground  for  the  white  lighthouse  on  it,  rendering  it  so  ci  ii- 
spicuous  that  it  can  be  seen  at  times  from  a  distance  of  13  or  14  miles. 
It  is  80  difficult,  especially  for  a  stranger,  to  distinguish  one  point  of 
this  low  coast  from  another,  that  this  lighthouse  is  very  useful  to  ves. 
sels  bound  to  Miramichi,  and  making  the  land  trom  sea.  It  also 
points  out  the  jmsition  of  the  dangerous  Escuminac  Keef,  which  exiends 
2  miles  out  to  the  northward  from  the  lighthouse  to  the  3fathoms  mark, 
and  2.^  miles  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water.  A  vessel,  drawing  21 J  feet,  is 
reported  to  have  stirred  up  the  mud  4  miles  N.  78°  E.  of  Escuminac 
lighthouse  without  touching  bottom. 

Miramichi  Bay  is  nearly  14  miles  wide  from  the  sand  bars  of  Black- 
land  Poiut  to  Escuminac  Point,  and  GJ  miles  deep  from  that  line  across 
its  mouth  to  the  main  entrance  of  the  Miramichi,  between  Portage 
and  Fox  Islands.  The  bay  is  formed  by  a  semicircular  range  of  low 
sandy  islands,  between  which  there  are  three  small  passages  and  one 
main  or  ship  channel,  leading  into  the  Inner  Bay  or  estuary  of  the 
Miramichi. 

Tides.— It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Escuminac  Point  at 
4h.  10  m.;  springs  rise  4  feet,  neaps  2  J  feet. 

Coast— At  6|  miles  from  Escuminac  Point,  along  the  low  shore  of 
the  mainland,  is  Huckleberry  Gully. 

Several  lobster  factories  have  been  built  between  Escuminac  Point 
and  Escuminac  village,  the  most  conspicuous  at  Herring  Cove  and  Win- 
ter Portage,  distant  one  and  2  miles  respectively  from  Escuminac  light, 
house. 

The  lioman  Catholic  church,  west  of  Escuminac  village,  has  a  square 
tower,  and  is  a  conspicuous  object  from  the  eastward,  when  north  of 
Escuminac  Point. 

There  are  houses,  where  some  of  the  pilots  reside,  for  2  miles  along 
the  shore  to  the  eastward  of  the  South  beacon. 

Huckleberry  Island  has  decreased  considerably,  being  now  only  one 
mile  long,  and  elevated  33  feet  above  high  water.    The  gullies  on  each 
side  of  this  island  are  almost  dry  at  low  water.    Fox  Gully  is  difficult 
88 


FOX    ISLAND PILOTS. 


88 


TTH  SHORE  OP 
3EN  ISLAND. 

I  of  peat,  upon 
ce  trees,  wbich 
Bring  it  so  con- 
13  or  14  miles, 
h  one  point  of 
y  useful  to  vea. 
I  sea.  It  also 
,  which  extends 
•-fathoms  mark, 
ring  21J  feet,  is 
of  Escuminac 

I  bars  of  Black- 
}hat  line  across 
tweeu  Portage 

range  of  low 
isages  and  one 

estuary  of  the 

ninac  Point  at 

e  low  shore  of 

cuminac  Point 
Cove  and  Win- 
3cumiuac  light. 

:e,  has  a  square 
when  north  of 

r  2  miles  along 

g  now  only  one 
gullies  on  each 
uUy  is  difficult 


to  distinguish,  and  the  church  at  French  village  can  not  be  recognized. 
There  is,  liowevcr,  a  conspicuous  clump  of  pine  trees  on  French  Kiver 
Point.  A  black  spar  buoy,  in  2  feet  water,  marks  the  entrance  to 
Huckleberry  Gnlly. 

Fox  Island,  3'|  miles  long,  in  a  SK.  direction,  is  narrow  and  partially 
wooded ;  like  I'ortage  Island,  it  is  formed  of  parallel  ranges  of  sand 
hills,  which  contain  embedded  drift  timber,  and  have  evidently  been 
thrown  up  by  the  sea  in  the  course  of  ages.  These  islands  are  merelj' 
sand  bars  on  a  large  scale,  and  nowhere  rise  higher  than  50  /eet  above 
the  sea.  They  are  incapable  of  agricultural  cultivation,  but  yet  they 
abound  in  plants  and  shrubs  suited  to  such  a  locality,  and  in  wild  fruits, 
such  as  the  blueberry,  strawberry,  and  raspberry.  Wild  fowl  of  vari- 
ous kin<is  are  also  plentiful  in  their  season,  and  so  also  are  salmon,  which 
are  taken  in  nets  and  weirs  along  the  beaches  outside  the  island  as  well 
as  in  the  gullies. 

Portage  Island  has  extended  considerably  southward,  and  the  north- 
ern part  of  Fox  Island  has  been  washed  away.  Several  conspicuous 
houses  have  been  built  on  Portage  Island,  the  most  prominent,  a  lob- 
ster factory  with  <lwellings  attached,  on  the  east  coast,  about  lA  miles 
from  the  south  extreme  of  the  island  ;  also  a  similar  group  of  buildings 
on  the  west  coast,  at  the  same  distance  from  the  north  extreme.  Port- 
age Island  shows  from  a  distance  in  three  parts,  composed  of  clumps  of 
trees  (JI  feet  high,  with  marshes  between. 

Miramichi  Bar  commences  from  the  SE.  end  of  Portage  Island,  and 
extends  across  the  main  entrance,  and  parallel  to  Fox  Island,  nearly  6 
miles  in  a  SE.  direction.  It  consists  of  sand,  and  has  not  more  than  a 
foot  or  two  of  water  over  it  in  some  i)arts  at  low  spring  tides.  There 
is  a  part  near  its  SE.  end  called  the  Swashway,  where  the  depth  has 
increased  to  10  feet,  whilst  it  has  decreased  in  the  Ship  Channel  to  17 
feet  at  low  water,  or  22  feet  at  high  water  in  ordinary  spring  tides. 

Horseshoe  Shoal  consists  of  sand  and  gravel,  and  is  of  great  ex- 
tent. The  least  water  on  it  is  3  feet,  and  it  is  se})arated  from  the  shoal 
on  the  inner  side  of  Portage  Island  by  a  narrow  and  intricate  channel, 
which  is  seldom  or  never  used. 

Inner  Bar. — To  the  southward,  the  Horseshoe  is  separate'  '"om  the 
shoal  which  connects  together  Fox,  Egg,  and  Vin  Islands,  by  lie  very 
narrow  ship  channel  (over  the  Horseshoe  or  Inner  Bar),  which  is  only 
200  yards  wide. 

Pilots. — Pilotage  is  compulsory  in  Miramichi  Bay  and  Itiver.  Pilots 
are  generally  to  be  met  with  in  the  entrance  of  the  bay,  though  their  dis- 
trict extends  eastward  to  Magdalen  Islands,  southward  to  Kouchibou- 
guac  Kiver,  and  westward  to  Miscou  Point. 

Tugs  may  be  obtained  from  Chatham  by  signal  to  Escuminac  light- 
house, but  there  is  no  regular  charge. 

Bar  Buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  white,  in  vertical  stripes, 
and  numbered  1,  is  moored  in  22  feet  water,  at  the  south  extreme  of 


J 


84 


^ 


MirUMICni    BAY    TO   ORKKN    I8LAND. 


tlie  outur  bar,  with  K.sciiminiu;  li^^litliouHO  bearing  S.  75<^  10.,  diHtaiit  (\\ 
inlioH,  iiiul  soiitli  extreme  of  Hiicjkli'berry  Isliiiid  8.  20*3  VV.  (Jhme 
Hotitli  of  this  buoy  thoru  in  n  (h^ptli  of  ',\2  feet,  tlie  western  liiiiit  of  u 
deep  (^liiuiiiel  from  seaward. 

Lump  Buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  lilack  and  numbered  2,  i8  moored 
in  1({  feet  water  on  a  shoal  between  tlie  Hli,  extreme  of  the  bar  and  Vox 
Island,  and  lies  N.  43'^  VV. -westerly,  distant  1,.S(M)  yards  from  \i\\v  IJuoy. 
A  black  spar  buoy  lies  a  short  distaiuie  northward  of  liiimp  Huoy. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  3,  lies  in  13!)  feet  water,  N.  34° 
W.  nearly  1  ,-„  miles  from  Bar  Buoy,  and  at  the  HVV.  anj^le  of  the  bar 
northward  of  the  Swashway.  Tlie  water  shoals  rapidly  to  11  feet, 
northward  of  this  buoy. 

Spit  Buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  black  and  numbered  4,  is  moored  iu 
18  feet  water,  at  tlie  east  extreme  of  a  shoal  extending;  one  mile  from 
the  northern  end  of  Fox  Island,  and  lies  with  Portajjc  Island  lijjfht- 
houso  bearinfj  N.  40^  W.,  distant  nearly  1{\)  miles,  and  NW.  extreme 
of  Fox  Island  S.  Mo  W. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  5,  is  moored  in  18  feet  water, 
bearing  8.  SCP  W.  distant  1 1',,  miles  from  Spit  Buoy,  and  at  the  eastern 
edge  of  the  inner  bar.  Three  buoys  similar  to  No.  5,  numbered  re- 
spectively 0,  7,  and  8,  mark  the  channel  southward  of  Horseshoe  8hoal, 
Nos.  0  and  7  being  eastward  and  No.  8  westward  of  the  lightvessel. 
They  are  moored  in  18,  21,  and  20  feet  water  respectively. 

A  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  9,  is  moored  in  23  feet  water, 
at  the  SW.  extreme  of  Horseshoe  Shoal. 

Three  spar  buoys,  painted  black,  lie  southeastward  of  Grandoon 
Island,  the  two  eastern  buoys  are  in  a  depth  of  16  feet,  and  the  western 
one  in  1!)  feet. 

Grandoon  Buoy,  a  can  buoy,  painted  red  and  numbered  10,  is 
moored  in  25  feet  water,  400  yards  southeastward  of  a  shoal  extending 
from  the  shore  eastward  of  Oak  Point. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage,  in  4  or  5  fathoms,  between 
the  Horseshoe  and  the  southern  end  of  Portage  Island,  where  vessels 
may  safely  anchor  during  the  summer  mouths. 

Within  the  buoy,  on  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  Horseshoe  Shoal,  is  the 
usual  place  where  vessels,  bound  to  sea,  anchor,  to  wait  for  a  wind,  or 
high  tide,  to  enable  them  to  cross  the  inner  bar. 

Tides.  — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Portage  Island  light, 
house  al  4h.  45m. ;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  rise  If  feet,  and  neaps 
range  5  of  a  foot.  Easterly  winds  cause  the  highest  tides  and  north- 
westerly winds  the  lowest. 

Prom  observations  made  during  the  survey  of  1885,  the  flood  stream 
was  found  to  flow  strongest  through  ship  channel  towards  Portage  Is- 
land; whence  it  divided,  a  strong  stream  that  runs  southward  along 
the  vfest  coast  of  that  island  meeting  the  flood  stream  there.  The 
stream  then  decreases  in  strength,  and  distributes  itself  generally  over 


.iA.*. 


MIKAMICM'    HAV — DIRKCTIONS. 


85 


K.,  (liHtailt  0:^ 
)o  W.  Close 
>rii  limit  of  a 

il  L',  Ik  moori'd 
<^  l)ur  hihI  Fox 
rom  Hiir  lUioy. 
inp  IJiioy. 
t  water,  N.  34° 
{le  of  tli«  bar 
lly  to  U  feet, 

I,  is  moored  in 
one  mile  from 
I  Island  liglit- 
NW.  extreme 

1 18  feet  water, 
[  at  the  eastern 
,  numbered  re- 
jrseshoe  Shoal, 
he  lifjhtvessel. 

y- 

I  23  feet  water, 

of   llrandoon 
Au\  the  western 

mbered  10,  is 
loal  extending 

lonis,  between 
where  vessels 

oe  Shoal,  is  the 
for  a  wind,  or 

e  Island  light. 
uet,  and  neaps 
lies  and  north- 

le  flood  stream 
ds  Portage  Is- 
athward  along 
m  there.  The 
generally  over 


MiramicJii  Hay,  tlu^  greatest  veloeity  being  obstTVed  in  the  ehannel 
south  of  Horseshoe  Shoal,  and  between  that  shoal  and  the  I'ortage 
Island. 

Southward  of  Horseshoe  Shoal,  the  ebb  stream  runs  in  the  dirirtion 
of  the  ehannel,  straight  to  seaward,  its  velocity  gradually  ditninishing 
as  ihe  bay  is  reached.  It  is  joined  by  a  stream  running  down  the  west 
side  of  I'ortage  Island,  which  tletlects  it  slightly  to  the  southward. 
The  stream  down  Ship  (Jhannel  is  not  very  strong,  and  runs  in  the  line 
of  that  channel.  There  is  scarcely  any  ebb  stream  eastward  of  the 
liar  Buoy. 

The  greatest  velocity  of  tidal  stream  ascertained  near  Miramichi  Bay 
was  2^  miles  an  hour. 

At  the  anchorage  south  of  Portage  Island,  the  ebb  stream  makes 
about  an  hour  after  high  water,  and  runs  7  hours,  whilst  the  Hood 
stream  begins  about  1^  hours  after  low  water,  ami  runs  'itV  hours,  with 
about  half  an  hour  slack  water  between  each  tide. 

Directions. — Kscuminac  Point,  having  been  made,  should  be  rounded 
in  5  fathoms  by  day  and  10  fathoms  by  night,  or  at  distances  of  2^  and 
4  miles,  respectively ;  thence  steer  for  the  liar  buoy,  which  should  be 
passed  close  to  on  its  south  side,  and  immediately  alter  course  to  bring 
the  beacons  or  lights  at  Preston  beach  in  line,  bearing  S.  4P  B. 

Keep  the  Preston  Beach  beacons  or  lights  in  line  until  theSwashway 
beacons  or  lights  are  also  in  line,  bearing  S.  8(P  W. ;  then  steer  N.  54° 
W.  for  a  distance  of  3  miles,  which  will  lead  to  the  Spit  buoy.  Con- 
tinue that  course  until  the  light-vessel  at  the  inner  bar  bears  S.  72°  W., 
when  the  spit  oft"  Fox  Island  will  be  cleared,  and  a  course  may  be 
steered  for  No.  5  buoy,  at  the  eastern  edge  of  the  inner  bar.  With  a 
long  vessel,  buoys  5,  0,  and  7  should  be  brought  in  line  before  reaching 
No.  5  buoy,  and  then  to  obtain  the  deepest  water  in  the  channel,  18 
feet,  vessels  should  pass  (luite  close  to  the  buoys  and  on  the  south  side 
of  them.  From  No.  7  buoy  steer  for  No.  8  buoy,  and  thence  for  No.  0, 
at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Horse  Shoe  Shoal.  From  No.  9  buoy 
steer  N.  82°  VV.  to  the  eastern  extreme  of  Oak  Channel,  passing  GOO 
yards  northward  of  the  southeastern  spar  buoy.  Not  more  that  10  feet 
at  low  water  will  be  found  over  the  flats  southeastward  of  Oak  Channel. 
There  are  only  15  feet  for  a  short  distance  in  the  direct  line  from  No. 
9  buoy  to  the  southeastern  spar  buoy,  but  the  mud  is  so  soft  that  with 
a  strong  fair  wind  vessels  can  force  their  way  when  drawing  2  feet  more 
water  than  the  apparent  depth. 

From  the  eastern  end  of  Oak  Channel  the  course  is  S.  50°  W.  to 
Grandoon  buoy,  passing  close  north  of  the  northwestern  spar  buoy  ;  or 
if  the  spar  buoy  be  seen  steer  for  it,  and  then  for  Grandoon  buoy.  Pass 
close  southward  of  Grandoon  buoy,  and  then  alter  course  to  S.  72°  W. 
until  Oak  Poiut  beacons  are  in  line,  bearing  N.  30°  E. ;  keep  these 
beacons  in  line  astern  past  Mussel-bed  buoy,  and  up  to  Narrows  buoy. 

The  mark,  Black  Brook  mill-chimney,  on  St.  Andrew  Point,  open 


■.•tH^^rr^^^B?ai!r>a-,jKWSi'itW 


i-f.t^^-'^ 


.Aim 


80 


MIKAMICHI    HAY    TO    (JKl.KN    IHLANI). 


\ 


north  of  till"!  tr»M>H  on  Slmldriike  InIiuhI,  now  IimkIh  ovvv  13  U>H  water 
only,  and  Sln'l(lraU«^  Islantl  IlKlitH  in  lino  ovor  15  ftn't.  Tim  Hlioal  Moutli- 
wPMtwanl  nl  .Slii^ldniko  Island  has  apparently  oxtcndtMl. 

Hlack  Krook  mill  is  sitnated  on  St.  Andrew  I'oint,  ami  has  a  larjjo 
chimney,  whieh  mIiowh  plainly  from  (Jrandoon  hnoy. 

The  Inner  Bay  of  Miramichi  is  ot'  tjreat  extent,  beinj;  about  l.'i 
miles  lonK  IVom  ils  t^itrantie  at  Fox  Island  to  .Sheldrake  Island  (where 
the  river  may  prop«'rly  be  said  to  (loinmemie),  and  7  or  8  miles  wide. 
The  depth  ol"  water  aeroHs  tli-  bay  is  snllhiient  for  the  hufjest  vesselH 
that  ean  moss  the  iniuM-  bar,  Ik  nff  li'j  lathoms  at  low  water  in  onlinary 
spring  tiili's,  with  mnddy  bottom. 

Egg  and  Vin  Islands  are  on  th(>  southern  sitle  of  the  bay  ;  the  tlrst 
gmall,  l()w,  and  swampy,  the  other  much  larger,  beintf 'J j  miles  l«)n|,', 
and  for  the  moKt  part  thickly  wooded. 

Vin  Harbor  is  to  the  southward  of  Vin  iHland,  and  must  be  ap- 
proached around  its  west  cud,  which  is  distant  nearly  M  miles  from  the 
north  point  of  Fox  Island.  It  is  quite  sheltered  from  all  winds,  ami 
has  plenty  of  water  for  the  larjyest  shiiis  that  can  enter  the  inner  bay 

Anchorage.— Anchor  near  the  center  of  the  harbor,  in  10  or  11 
fathoms,  mud  bottom. 

Tides.— Spriiifjs  rise  5  feet,  neapH  3  feet,  but  the  rise  is  at  nil  times 
uncertain,  neap  tides  sometimes  not  ranginfj  above  a  foot  and  sprinp  tides 
not  above  2  feet.  It  must  also  bo  remembered  that  the  a.  m.  tides  rose 
hipther  in  fjeneral  by  2  feet  than  the  p.  m.  tides  in  the  beginning  of 
Aufrust,  which  was  the  only  opportunity  of  observing  them. 

Directions.— A  pilot  can  readily  be  j)rocured  to  take  a  ship  into  Vin 
Harbor,  or  with  the  assistance  of  the  chart,  as  follows  :  Steer  S.  5(P  VV. 
from  the  8VV.  buoy  of  the  Ilorse-shoe  for  about  3  miles,  and  then  to  the 
southward  around  the  west  end  of  Vin  Island,  at  a  distance  not  less  than 
3  mile,  until  the  sandy  i)oints  on  the  south  side  of  the  island  open,  bear- 
ing N.  5!)o  E.  Steer  for  them,  keeping  them  just  open,  and  on  a|»proach- 
ing  the  sandy  S\V.  point  of  the  island  sheer  to  the  southward  sudi- 
ciently  to  give  it  a  berth  of  150  yards  as  the  vessel  rounds  it  into  the 
harbor.  Do  not  go  to  the  southward  of  the  line  joining  the  sandy  jmints 
of  the  harl)or,  or  she  will  be  on  shore  on  the  sandy  shoal  whieh  extends 
off  the  main  land  opposite.  The  harbor  is  a  bay  of  the  island,  '^  mile 
wide  and  000  yards  deep. 

The  long  sandy  Vin  Spit  and  shoal  of  the  main  runs  out  to  the  north- 
ward, nearly  to  the  line  joining  the  sandy  points  of  the  harbor,  but 
leaves  a  narrow  channel  to  the  eastward,  which  continues  for  about  2 
miles,  and  may  be  considered  as  a  prolongation  of  the  harbor  in  that 
direction,  or  towards  French  River  Point.  French  liiver  is  small  and 
shallow,  and  has  a  village  of  Acadians  and  a  church,  which  bears  S. 
65°  \V.  from  Fox  Gnlly,  from  which  it  is  distant  1^  miles.  The  space 
to  the  eastward  of  the  line  joining  Egg  Island  and  French  Kiver  and 
in  the  bay  to  the  southward  of  the  latter,  is  occupied  by  flats  of  sand, 


;y.ii*i:,v_- 


VIN    HARHOIt — HIIKLDHAKK    INLAND. 


87 


(  f«'i>t  water 
hIioiiI  .south' 

lia.s  a  liirf^e 

IK  about  13 
III  ml  (wlit>ro 

miles  widi'. ' 
y:t'st  vvh.scIh 

ill  onliiiiiry 

ly ;  tlio  llfHt 
iiiik>.s  l«)iit;, 

iiUHt  h(>  ap- 
ilt'sfrom  the 
wiiuls,  aiui 
e  inner  bay 
ill  10  or  :i 

at  nil  times 

sprinp  tides 

II.  tides  rose 

lepfinniiig  of 

I. 

tiip  into  Via 

Br  8.  5()o  VV. 

then  to  the 
ot  less  than 
lopen,  bear- 
11  approach- 
iward  siilJi- 

it  into  the 
andy  jmiiits 
lich  extends 
land,  '^  mile 

0  the  north- 
harbor,  but 
for  about  2 
bor  in  that 
<  small  and 
ch  bears  S. 

The  space 

1  Kiver  and 
Its  of  sand, 


mud,  and  eelgracs,  the  home  of  oysters,  lobsters,  and  otiu'r  shell  (Ish. 
Shallow  and  intrieate  boat  ehannels  lead  through  the.se  Hats  to  Fox 
and  Huckleberry  (}ulli(>s. 

Vin  Bay  is re  than .'{  miles  wide  and  nearly  as  deep.     I'oint  Quart, 

its  western  point,  is  a  l(»w  eliir  of  sandslone  with  hiuh  trees,  .{(^  mJloH 
from  the  west  end  of  V\n  Island.  Tiiere  is  rooiI  an<!hora;,'e  in  the  east- 
ern parr  oi  this  bay  in  .'{  fatiioms,  'inid  bottom,  and  about  ■}  iiiil«>  to  the 
westward  of  the  i.sland.  The  western  side  of  the  l)ay  is  shallow.  In 
its  SW.  corner  is  HIack  IMver  into  which  )»  feet  can  be  carried  at  low 
water  throiiph  a  narrow  and  dilllciilt  channel,  and  the  river  has  3 
fathoms  in  it  for  .some  distainie  \>ithiii  tlu^  eiitraiuie. 

Vin  River  also  runs  into  this  bay  -J^  miles  to  the  southward  from 
the  HVV.  point  of  the  island.  It  is  a  .smaller  river  than  HIack  Uiver, 
haviiijj  only  (I  feet  at  low  water  in  its  entraiuie.  There  is  a  small  but 
neat  church  on  its  eastern  shore,  a  short  distaniie  within  its  entrancie, 
and  llourishiiif;  farms  on  either  side,  where  supplies  may  best  be  ob. 
tabled.  The  best  watering  place  will  also  bo  found  at  this  river;  but 
it  is  ditlleult  to  obtain  large  supplies  of  good  water  in  so  tiat  a  country 
near  the  sea.  There  is  a  tolerable  road  from  V' in  Itiver  to  Chatham, 
the  principal  town  on  the  Miramichi  Itiver. 

Point  Cheval,  bearing  S.  87°  VV.  nearly  3  miles  from  I'oint  Quart, 
is  sandy,  with  a  clump  of  high  trees  ui)on  it. 

Immediately  to  the  westward  of  Point  Cheval  is  the  shallow  Napan 
Bay  and  Kiver,  which  boats  can  ascend  for  several  miles,  or  as  far  as 
the  tide  reaches.  Above  that  point  the  river,  which  is  small,  runs 
through  a  fertile  and  well-cultivated  valley,  extending  westward  in  rear 
of  the  town  of  Chatham. 

Middle  Ground  is  a  long  sandy  bank,  which  stretches  down  the 
center  of  the  estuary  from  I'oint  Cheval  and  (-vtends  Irom  it  n  miles  to 
the  eastward.  The  east  end  of  this  bank  will  be  i'l.-ared  by  keeping 
Freii(!h  Kiver  Point  open  to  the  eastward  of  Vin  Island,  bearing  S.  (}80 
E.  The  Ship  Channel  is  between  the  Middle  Ground  and  tin'  north 
shore  of  the  bay. 

Sheldrake  Island  is  low,  swampy,  partly  wooded,  and  has  two 
buildings  on  its  eastern  side,  which  were  formerly  used  as  a  cholera 
hospital.  The  island  is  i\  mile  long  by  \  mile  wide,  and  is  separated 
from  the  north  shore  by  a  channel  A  mile  wide,  but  with  only  one  or  2 
feet  in  it  at  low  water.  Shallow  water  extends  far  oil'  this  island  in 
every  direction  westward  to  Bartiboque  Island  and  eastward  to  Oak 
Point 

Murdoch  Spit  and  Murdoch  Point  are  two  sandy  points  on  the 
south  shore,  4  mile  apart,  with  a  cove  between  them,  and  about  a  mile 
SW.  of  Sheldrake  Island.  The  entrance  of  Mirimichi  Kiver  is  ^  mile 
wide  between  these  points  and  Moody  Point,  which  has  a  small  Indian 
church  upon  it,  and  is  the  east  point  of  entrance  of  Bartiboiiue  Kiver. 

St.  Andrews  Point,  lA  miles  above  Murdoch  Point,  and  on  the  same 


>^ 


J' 


I 


ill 


i! 


\- 


8.8 


MIRAMICHI    BAY   TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


or  Houtl),  side  of  the  river,  is  St.  Amlrews  Point  showing  as  tlie  extreme 
of  the  land  from  Sheldrake  Island.  Both  these  points  were  wooded  at 
the  time  of  the  survey,  in  18;i7,  and  used  as  leading  marks. 

Bartiboque  River  is  ^  mile  wide  at  the  entrancse,  between  Malcolm 
and  Moody  Points,  but  contracts  to  300  yards  a  short  distance  within, 
where  a  wooden  bridge  is  thrown  across.  Bartiboque  Island  lies  in  the 
entrance  of  tlie  river,  and  has  steep  banks  or  clay  clifts  on  every  side, 
and  is  nearlyjoinetl  to  the  shore  to  the  northward  by  asandy  spit.  The 
narrow  channel  into  the  river  passes  close  to  the  east  end  of  the  island, 
^iid  has  not  more  than  4  feet  in  it  at  low  water. 

Oak  Point. — Returning  back  to  the  eastward,  along  the  north  shore, 
the  first  point  requiring  notice  is  Oak  Point,  nearly  opposite  Clieval 
Point.  The  eastern  part  of  this  point  has  dark-colored  sandstone 
clitt's,  about  12  feet  high  and  forming  au  extreme  point,  with  a  beacon 
on  it;  it  is  used  as  a  leading  mark  with  a  white  beacon  which  stands 
N.  34°  E.,  at  the  distance  of  %  mile  from  it  on  the  shore  of  the  l)ay. 
The  latter  beacon  is  lofty  and  large,  and  shows  so  consi>icuously  on  the 
dark  background  of  the  wojds  that  it  can  be  easily  seen  on  a  fine  day 
from  Fox  Island. 

O-randoon  Island,  low  and  marshy,  and  difficult  to  distinguish  from 
the  main  land  till  very  near,  is  distant  2 J  miles  from  Oak  Point;  and 
3J  miles  northward  of  Quart  Point.  Farther  eastward,  along  the 
northern  shore  of  the  Inner  Bay,  are  Burnt  Church  and  tlie  Indian 
vilhige  and  small  river  of  the  same  name;  also  Hay  Island,  and  the 
Acadian  villages  of  Upper  and  Lower  Il^"eguac,  inhabited  bv  fishermen 
and  farmers,  lie  out  of  the  line  of  ship  navigation. 

They  will  require  no  further  notice  here  than  to  remark  that  there  is 
a  clear  channel,  with  3^  to  2^  fathoms  water  in  it,  to  the  northward  of 
the  Florseshoe  and  the  shoals  of  Portage  Island  as  far  northeastward 
as  Hay  Island,  where  a  narrow  channel  leads  out  to  sea  through  the 
Neguac  Gully. 

Miramichi  River  maj^  be  said  to  commence  at  Shi  Idrake  Island  ; 
for  below  that  point  the  Inner  Bay,  with  its  low  and  widely  receding 
shores,  bears  no  resemblance  to  a  river.  At  its  entrance,  the  country 
begins  to  rise  into  gentle  undulations,  terminating  in  steep  banks  and 
clili's  of  sandstone,  which  in  some  places  at  tain  a  height  of  50  feet  above 
the  river.  The  settlements,  too,  increase  in  number  and  extent,  and  soon 
become  continuous  on  either  side,  dot  ted  here  and  there  with  steam  saw- 
mills. Written  directions,  however,  will  not  much  avail  above  Shel- 
drake Island,  not  only  on  account  of  the  contracted  nature  of  the  navi- 
gation, but  also  because  there  are  few  leading  marks  of  a  permanent 
nature  which  could  be  certainly  recognized  by  a  stranger.  Directions, 
too,  are  not  so  requisite  for  this  inland  navigation,  for  which  there  are 
abundance  of  well-qualified  pilots. 

Jjeggat  Shoals  at  the  time  they  w  ere  surveyed  had  12  feet  upon  them 
at  low  water ;  but  this  depth  is  said  to  vary,  and  also  upon  the  banks 


% 


^--t 


CHATHAM — NEWCASTLE. 


9B 


ig  as  tlie  extreme 
i  were  wooded  at 
irks. 

etweeii  Malcolm 
distance  within, 
[slandlies  in  the 
fs  on  every  side, 
sandy  spit.  The 
id  of  the  island, 

the  north  shore. 
Dpposite  Clieval 
lored  sandstone 
t,  with  a  beacon 
in  which  stands 
ore  of  the  hay. 
>icuously  on  the 
en  ou  a  fine  day 

Llistinguish  from 
Dak  Point ;  and 
rard,  alonj;  the 
and  the  Indian 
Island,  and  the 
id  bv  fishermen 

irk  that  there  is 
e  northward  of 
■  northeastwaid 
ea  through  the 

Idrake  Island  ; 
^'idely  receding 
ce,  the  country 
teep  banks  and 
tf  50  ft*et  above 
stent,  and  soon 
^ith  steam  saw- 
lil  above  Shel- 
ire  of  the  uavi- 
f  a  permanent 
r.  Directions, 
'hich  there  are 

"eet  upon  them 
)on  the  banks 


of  St.  Andrew,  in  consequence  of  old  trees,  logs,  and  other  lumber  lodg- 
ing upon  them.  The  same  (sause  is  said  to  render  the  depth  uncertain  to 
the  soutliward  of  these  shoals,  where  thero  is  a  wider  channel  (1800). 
Tlie  river  is  clear  of  detached  slioals  to  Middle  Island,  which,  together 
with  its  shoal,  confines  the  ship  cliannel  to  the  north  side  of  the  river, 
where  the  aiiore  is  so  bold  that  there  are  7  or  8  fathoms  close  to  the 
sandstone  dirts  until  the  vessel  is  ort'  the  Gilmour  Mills  and  Cove, 
nearly  opposite  the  west  end  of  Middle  Island. 

Middle  Island  is  rather  smaller  than  Sheldrake  Island,  and  there  is 
no  channel  to  the  southward  of  it  at  low  water.  There  is  nothing  in 
the  way  of  vessels  from  Gilmour  Mill  to  the  wharves  at  Chathan>. 

Chatham,  the  principal  tow  u  on  the  Miramichi,  and  containing,  in 
!i83,  about  6,000  inhabitants,  commences  ft  a  mile  above  Middle  Island, 
and  extends  along  the  south  shore  for  1\  miles  to  the  westward.  It  is 
conveniently  situated  for  shipping,  having  0  to  8  fathoms  water  close 
to  its  wharves.  It  is  a  straggling,  but  rapidly  increasing  town,  having 
some  good  houses,  3  (jhurches,  and  2  other  chapels  or  places  of  worship. 

Water  and  Supplies. — The  surface  water  is  quite  fresh,  on  the  ebb 
tide,  at  (Jhatham.  Supplies  of  any  kind  can  be  procured  at  Chatham 
or  Newcastle. 

Coal. — A.bout  1,000  tons  of  coal  are  usually  kept  in  store  at  Chatham, 
and  about  200  tons  at  Newcastle,  butany  (luantity  can  easily  be  obtained 
at  short  notice  by  Intercolonial  Railway  from  Springhill  or  Pictou. 

Trade. — The  chief  exports  from  Chatham  and  Newcastle  are  timber, 
deals,  palings,  salmon,  lobster,  and  extrac  t  of  hemlock  bark  for  tanning. 

Repairs. — There  is  neither  dock  nor  slip  in  Miramichi  Kiver,  but  at 
Chatham  there  is  a  wharf  for  heaving  down  vessels  in  need  of  repairs. 

Telegraph  and  Railways. — Chatham  is  in  telegraphic  communica- 
tion with  all  towns  of  the  Domini  on  of  Canada  and  the  United  States, 
and  is  <lirectly  connected  by  the  Intercolonial  Kailway  with  Halifax,  St. 
John  in  New  Brunswick,  and  Quebec,  also  by  a  direct  rsiilway  with 
Fredericton,  New  Brunswick. 

Ice. — Prom  observations  taken  each  year  from  1830  to  1885,  the 
average  date  of  the  opening  of  navigation  at  Chatham  is  April  20,  and 
of  the  close  Decembers,  the  river  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates.  At  Portage  Island,  navigation  opens  about  a  week  earlier,  and 
closes  about  a  week  later  than  at  Chatham. 

Douglastowu,  on  the  opposite  or  northern  shore,  about  1.^  miles 
above  Chatham,  is  a  much  smaller  place,  containing  about  1,100  inhab- 
itants. It  is  prettily  situated  on  a  rising  ground,  and  has  sufticient 
water  at  its  wharves  for  large  vessels.  The  most  remarkable  building 
is  the  Marine  Hospital,  built  of  stone.  Mr.  Abram's  shipbuilding  es- 
tablishment is  li  miles  above  Douglastowu,  on  the  same  side  of  the 
river;  and  opposite  to  it  on  the  south  side  shore  is  the  church  of  St. 
Paul. 

Newcastle,  12  miles  farth  er  up  the  river,  and  on  the  north  shore,  is 


I 


« 


■m-ir-.tt-^i'      —  — 


90 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


i 
j 
s 


the  county  town,  containing  the  court-house  and  jail,  a  church  a  chanel 
and  sou.e    ew  other  good  buildings.    The  nulei  of    .  I  ab  ta.  t?  i' 

vie«  ovir  rh  T  *  "*  ",'"'"  '™"'  "•«  "^'•^'''^"•^  connnand.nga 
v.e«   over  the  lower  ground  westwanl  a..d  southward  to  BeaubL 

ne  uTv  r:  ,^^'T"^"-''  .«-l  ^1--  t"«  "ver  to  Chatham,  a  disttnoe  o f 
ne.  Ij  o  ,  des,  ,ts  s.tuat.on  is  as  beautiful  as  could  have  been  selected, 
whde  at  the  sa.ne  tnne  it  is  not  unfavorable  for  mercantile  purpose  ' 

and  <»  or  <  fafho.ns  water  close  to  the  wharves  of  the  town. 

riSnTsT?  '"'/•'''  1"^^'  ^*''""  ''^•^  "^^^''S'^^'«  ^^^t«rs  of  the  Mi- 
nim,ch,  IS  a  straggling  place  with  L>0()  or  300  inhabitants,  pnucipally 

Is"   urs'lf "  ""^  '-«-f  "^^^  '-Se  wooden  church,  which  stands  on 

banks'"'l!'.*^'^,  '^^*'°*;  ^*  '"""'  '^"^  ^^'"^  *  ™"«  ^^••l^'  ''««  «teep  clay 
ban     ,  based  on  sandstone,  and  rising  toabout  20  feet  above  the  river 

critsTH'  ''  7''^"r^"^^>'*^  to  this  poiut  by  any  vessels  that 
can  cr(  88  the  Horseshoe  or  Inner  Bar.  There  are  some  parts  of  the 
channel  above  Chatham  where  there  are  only  2i  fathoms  and  whch 
would  have  to  be  avoided  by  a  large  vessel  at  low  water,  but  there  is 
on. V  one  detached  shoal,  which  has  0  feet  least  water,  and  lies  ess  than 
Do'Sto'r."  ""  '''"""'  sbore,S.28ow.fr;nx  the  hospital  at 
Tides.-The  usual  average  rate  of  the  ebb  tide  is  2  knots  and  the 

'HnoT  alir-  'T'  '''''  ^'*'^'  ^'^^«-^-    ^"«  «^^  •"  some  pSce"  r  u 
Jth   Mu,'  A     '"  .      T""^  ^*  '^'  '''^'' '«  «^"'^  '''  ^«  «ti»  stronger.    In 
Jid;^  and  August,  when   the  observations  were  made,  exceptin-^  for  2 
or  3  days  at  neap  tides,  the  morning  tides  rose  2  or  3  feet  h  ght^r  than 
the  evening  tules,   and  were  of  longer  duration  by  one  or  even  two 

nul'lvb^r""    """'  "'."  "  "'"^''  •"""•^"«^^"   by  winds,  and  cine 
qnently  by  no  means  regular.     The  mean  length  of  the  flood  tide  is  6 
hours,  and  of  the  ebb  G,^  hours.    The  <luration  and  length  o    tl     ti  a! 
streams  are  also  inrtuenced  by  the  winds,  but  in  general  they  cont    ue 
in^the  Channel  about  half  an  hour  after  it  is  higli  or  low  water  by  th" 

NW.  and  SW.  Anns.-At  Beaube.e  Island  the  two  great  arms  of 
he  M.rannch,  meet.  The  NW.  Am.  is  much  the  largest,  as  respects 
he  fda  water,  although  the  SW.  Arm  is  considere.1  the  n  ain  brTnch 


i^^,-..,..  ^i'  .       .         7       .c  v.wi.omcic«i  Lue  main  oi 

ben.g  ot  greater  length,  and  discharging  more  water.  The  N  W  Arm 
would  be  navigable  for  large  vessels  to  Shilelah  Cove,  7  miles  above 
BeauWre  Island,  as  there  is  sutHcient  depth  of  water  if  he  channel 
were  buoyed  or  staked  in  the  narrow  parts,  which  are'  not  .^c!;' Zn 

watt  ,  in  ntricate  and  narrow  channels  between  shoals  of  m.ul  and  low 
marshy  islands,  all  the  way  to  the  rapids,  which  flow  in  narrow  chl 


%su^ 


MIRAMICHI    RIVER NEQUAC    QULLY. 


n 


lurch,  a  cbapel, 
inhabitHiit8  iu 
i>h  rises  to  the 
cummaiidiiig  a 
il  to  Beaub^re 
1,  a  distance  of 
been  selected, 
utile  |)iir|)08e8, 
ilear  of  shoals, 
u. 

ters  of  the  Mi- 
ts,  i)riiicii>ally 
liich  stands  on 
I,  and  1^  miles 

las  steej)  clay 
)ove  the  river, 
y  vessels  that 
5  parts  of  the 
ns,  and  which 
r,  but  tiiere  is 
lies  less  than 
he  hospital  at 

nots,  and  the 
e  places  runs 
stronger.  In 
cepting  for  2 
t  higher  than 
>  or  even  two 
s,  and  conse- 
lood  tide  is  6 
of  the  tidal 
hey  continue 
water  by  the 

reut  arms  of 
,  as  respects 
lain  branch, 
le  NVV.  Arm 
miles  above 
the  ciiaunel 
>t  more  than 
0  H  fathoms 
nud  and  low 
arrow  chan- 


nels between  meadow  islands.  There  the  tide  ends,  and  the  water  be- 
comes quite  fresh  13  miles  from  Beaub^re  Island,  and  39  miles  from  the 
entrance  of  the  inner  bay  at  Fox  Island. 

The  SVV.  Arm  is  not  navigable  for  large  vessels,  as  not  more  than 
(J  or  7  feet,  at  low  water,  si)ring  tides,  can  be  carried  through  between 
Beanbfere  Island  and  the  mainland;  and  even  above  tliat  shallow 
j)art,  although  therv  is  often  -lore  than  2  fathoms  wat(M-,  yet  the  chan- 
nel is  too  narrow  and  intr'  te  for  any  but  very  small  vessels.  The 
arm  is  about  ^  mile  widt  f  iie  lirst  5  miles,  or  up  to  Barnaby  Island  ; 
after  which  it  varies  from  :.,  -0  to  400  yards  up  to  the  rajtids.  12  miles 
from  Beaubere  Island.  Botli  shores  of  this  arm  are  settled,  and  niany 
of  the  farms  appear  to  be  in  a  flourishing  condition. 

Tides —The  tide,  which  ends  at  the  rapids,  was  observed  to  rise  2 
feet  there,  and  it  was  high  water  on  the  day  of  the  full  moon  at  about 
8  hours;  as  it  was  also  at  the  foot  of  the  rapids  in  the  NW.  Arm. 

The  Neguac  Gully,  between  the  saml  bar  of  the  same  name  and 
a  small  one  to  the  S\V.,  is  nearly  600  yards  wide  and  carries  3 
fathoms  water;  but  a  sand  bar,  of  the  usual  mutable  character,  lies 
off  it  nearly  a  mile.  Within  the  gully  a  narrow  channel,  only  fit  for 
boats  or  very  small  craft,  leads  westward  up  the  Inner  Bay.  The  shoal 
water  extends  IJ  miles  off  this  gully,  but  there  is  excellent  warning  by 
the  lead  here,  and  everywhere  in  this  bay.  Shoals,  nearly  dry  at  low 
water,  extend  from  the  Neguac  Gully  to  Portage  Island,  a  distance  of 
li  miles.  A  can  buoy,  paijited  red,  is  moored  in  four  fathoms  at  the 
entrance  to  Neguac  gully.  A  similar  buoy  is  moored  northwestward  of 
the  first  buoy,  to  show  the  direction  of  the  channel.  A  church  with  a 
spire  has  been  built  at  Neguac  Village,  about  2|  miles  northwestward 
of  Neguac  Lighthouse. 

Blackland  Point,  the  north  point  of  Miramichi  Bay,  is  low  and 
swampy,  with  steep  and  black  peaty  banks,  and  there  is  a  conimuni- 
catiou  round  it  for  boats  within  the  sand  bars,  from  Tabusintac  lagoon 
into  the  Inner  Bay  of  Miramichi. 

Tabusintac  River.— Tabusintac  Gully  is  about  30()  yards  wide  at 
high  wa  er,  and  has  a  shifting  bar  of  sand,  over  which  0  or  7  leet  could 
be  carried  at  low  water  when  it  was  surveyed,  and  II  or  12  feet  at  high 
water  in  spring  tides.  The  entrance  of  the  Tabusintac  Kiver  from  the 
lagoon  inland  is  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  gully  and  can  be  seen 
over  the  sand  bars.  There  is  plenty  of  water  iu  this  river  when  once 
over  the  bar ;  2  and  3  fathoms  is  the  depth  in  the  channel  through  the 
lagoon,  and  there  is  as  much  as  4  and  5  fathoms  in  some  jmits  of  the 
river  ;  but  the  channel  is  too  narrow  and  intricate  for  anything  larger 
than  boats  or  very  small  vessels.  The  tide  flows  10  miles  up  the  river, 
through  an  undulating  country,  and  occasionally  between  steep  banks 
of  sandstone,  which  rise  to  about  100  feet  above  the  .«ea.  There  are 
settlements  on  either  shore,  consisting  principally  of  Scotch  fjimilies, 
and  there  is  a  church  on  the  south  bank  1|  miles  up  from  the  lagoon. 


92 


MIRAMICni    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


Salinon  are  taken  iu  considerable  quaatites  in  tbe  Tabusintac.     There 
are  lobsters,  oysters,  an.l  other  shell  fish  in  the  lagoon ;  ami  coddsb 

tl  Jp!!L!.*^*  ^'''*' !'  f '"^^^'^^f  l^'-g^r,  but  in  other  respects  si.nilar  to 
the  I  okemouche.     It  has  a  church  and  village  on  the  south  side  of  its 
entrance  fro„,  the  lagoon  inland,  which  can  be  seo-  over  t  e  ^a  cl  bars 
but  the  church  bears  SW.  3i  miles  frou.  the  nortl,  ,a.d  princina   gullv' 
instead  ot  west,  as  at  Pokemouche,  which  will  help  to  d  s  hc^^  st   h' 

td  d^ls.  "''"  '"'''"^  "  considerable  quantity  of  pine  tiLber 

th^'vefv'll't.t-"-'  ?'  ''^'"'*?''  '^  "'  '^'^^^"^  *^«  P^'"«'I»-'  «"trance  to 
the  very  extensive  lagoon,  through  which  the  river  flows  in  a  narrow 

channel  between  flats  of  sand,  mud,  and  weeds.    There  are   everarhuti 

S  wZ.  tutVkrr:?  ^'  *?  r:''^  ^^^^'  ^«  '^  yardr:i't 

s  n    ofJ  rL      '     M         "^^^  '""*  ***  ^'^'^  «'^^«*' »»««  a  ^''ifting  bar  of 
sand  ott  t,  causing  the  depth,  breadth,  and  directions  of  the  clmnnel  to 

ou?s  .r«L!n  '"'"'*"""  ^'^  ''^^  ^""^'  *^°*^  «'>«l«^«r«d  by  the  bar 

lage  bJt  tL    L         r'1 '"  "*'  "•"^"°"'  ^*"  '^^  river  opposite  the  vil- 
will  .         ?  ^"'^  ""^  '^^''^^^  ^^'  t»^««'n&  through  the  la^^oon 

:i;e:rrtr;:t'"  ^-^^^^""^^  ^^^"^-^^-  ^«—  -'^v- 

At  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  the  North  Gully  is  the  Old  Gullv  now 
nearly  blocked  up  with  sand,  but  which  was  formedy    he     SaT 

traversing  a  lagoon,  by  the  Little  Traca<lie  Gully  into  the  sea  is  spn» 
rated  from  the  Iforth  Tracadie  by  a  point  of  the  linLunhi.L  an" 
t'hr  f'm'Zr  ^"^"^  'T  '^"^^"^  'eaves  a  comZSil  "with  n 
tJnntrT,u.e  of  1^'"  n'  ''"  f ''"'•  ^^^'^^  ""'^  ^'"*«  ^"^  fish  stores  at 
tie  ri  i  WiH  tr''^'  T^  ^""•'''*°  settlements  at  the  entrance  of 
the  rn  er.  VV  ith.n  the  send  bars  which  inclose  the  lagoons  of  Tracadie 
th^e  ,s  a  wellsheltered  boat  or  canoe  navigation  fori  or  9  miles       " 

Tracad!e  TaTa  r^l  TT""  *'"  '^"^""^  "*'  Pokemouche  and  Great 
iracadie,  has  a  rocky  shoal  extending  off  it  3  mile  to  the  denth  of  S 
fathoms  and  1^  miles  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water  ^ 

Pokemouche  River,  5*  miles  SW.  of  Shippegan  Gullv  after  trav 
ersing  as  allow  and  extensive  lagoon,  enters  the  g^lf  by  a  gully  S.  rough 

Tener^lfv t^s  :"'  '''  T'^  "l'^'    ^  ''^'''''  bar'of  3  oZd 
generally  leaves  a  narrow  channel  with  4  or  5  feet  in  it  at  low  water 


— ^.vmmm^Yr^mt^s^^: 


8HIPPE0AN   GULLY — MISCOIT   ISLAND. 


93 


;busintac.  There 
)on ;  ami  codttab 
fished  tor  upuu  a 

>ii  through  Raft 
,  but  it  is  nearly 
ay  between  Raft 

aspects  similar  to 
south  side  of  its 
er  the  sand  bars ; 
1  princii)al  gully, 
9  distinguish  the 
are  principally 
;y  of  pine  timber 

cipal  entrance  to 
ows  in  a  narrow 
'  are  several  huts 
0  yards  wide  at 
k  shifting  bar  of 
of  the  channel  to 
jctious  for  enter- 
tered  by  the  bar 
{  fathoms  water, 
opposite  the  vil- 
ugh  the  lagoon, 
;s  can  only  pass 

Old  Gully,  now 
the  principal 
its  waters,  atter 
;he  sea,  is  sepa- 
land  whiuL  ap- 
nication  within 
d  fish  stores  at 
the  entrance  of 
ons  of  Tracadie 
ar  9  miles, 
uche  and  Great 
the  depth  of  3 

illy,  after  trav- 
i  gully  through 
sand  outside 
at  low  water 


into  the  gully,  and  there  are  from  0  to  12  feet  for  some  distance  witiiin. 
The  spring  tides  rise  5  feet,  so  that  large  schooners  can  be  taken  in  by 
a  native  pi'  Jt,  ;md  in  line  weather.  On  the  south  side  of  the  entrance 
of  the  river  from  the  lagoon  inland  and  1^  miles  from  the  gully,  there 
is  a  church,  village,  and  sawmill.  The  inhabitants,  300  or  400  in  num- 
ber, and  principally  of  Acadian  French  and  of  Irish  origin,  live  by  fish- 
ing,  a  very  limited  agriculture,  and  lumbering. 

Shippegan  Gully,  with  its  bar  of  sand,  its  rapid  tide,  and  danger- 
ously heavy  surf  occasioned  by  easterly  gales,  is  distant  22  miles  from 
the  north  point  of  Miscou.  The  bar  of  sand,  which  dries  in  part  at  low 
water,  shifts  in  heavy  gales;  but  there  is  generally  a  channel  with -l 
or  5  feet  in  it  at  low  water,  and  the  tide  rises  from  3  to  5  feet,  accord- 
ing as  it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tide.  The  3-fathora8  edge  of  the  shoal 
water  outside  the  bar  is  '^  mile  ott' shore,  after  which  thedei)th  increases 
rapidly. 

Birch  Point. — About  li  miles  to  the  southeastward  from  the  north 
point  of  Miscon  is  Birch  Point,  a  steep  clift"  of  sandstone  about  10  feet 
high,  and  which  will  be  easily  recognized  by  the  white  birch  trees,  which 
are  higher  there  than  in  any  other  parts  near  the  shore.  A  reef  of 
stones  and  sand  extends  there  J  mile  out  from  the  shore.  The  sound- 
ings in  the  chart  will  euable  the  mariner  easily  to  avoid  the  shoal  off 
the  North  Point,  either  by  night  or  by  day.  There  is  good  anchorage 
on  either  side  of  it ;  under  the  North  Point  in  from  5  to  10  fathoms,  in 
southerly  winds,  and  oft"  the  light-house  on  Birch  Point,  in  from  3^  to  6 
fathoms,  in  westerly  winds,  the  bottom  being  of  sand,  which  holds  suf- 
ficiently well  for  ottshore  winds. 

Miscou  Island. — The  Miscou  Flats,  which  are  of  sandstone,  coiitinue 
4  or  5  niiles  to  the  NK.  of  the  harbor;  and  near  their  northern  termina- 
tion there  is  an  opening  in  the  trees  which  extends  across  the  island, 
and  which  has  been  mistaken  by  vessels,  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather, 
either  for  the  harbor  or  the  gully,  according  as  they  were  west  or  east 
of  the  island.  There  is  moderately  good  anchorage  during  the  summer 
season  with  this  opening  S.  52°  E.  in  10  to  11  fathoms;  it  is  easily  dis- 
tinguished, very  useful  in  pointing  out  a  vessel's  position,  and  espe- 
cially to  clear  Miscou  Flats  when  working  out  with  a  light  breeze  and 
flood  tide.  The  remainder  of  the  shore  is  tolerably  bold,  with  steep, 
sandy  beaches  which  surround  the  north  end  of  the  island,  where  sev- 
eral stores  and  huts  of  the  fishermen  will  be  seen  along  the  shore.  The 
north  point  is  distinguished  by  a  green  mound,  or  grassy  sand  hill,  and 
the  shallow  water  does  not  there  extend  to  more  than  ^  mile  off  shore ; 
but  a  sandy  shoal  commences  immediately  to  the  eastward  of  the  point, 
and  fronting  the  outlet  of  a  small  lagoon,  where  there  are  several  fish- 
ng  stores  and  huts,  stretches  oft"  a  mile  to  the  NE. 

Miscou  Banks  extend  about  22  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Miscou,  and 
the  soundings  upon  them  will  afford  full  and  sufticient  guidance  for  a 
vessel  approaching  this  part  of  the  coast. 


94 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


Tlioir  nortbern  edge,  in  30  fathoms,  is  7  or  8  miles  to  the  northward 
of  the  liglit-hoiiso  on  Birch  Point,  and  passes  tlie  north  point  of  Miscou, 
at  tlie  distance  of  4  miles,  into  Chaleurs  Bay,  thus  aftbrding  excellent 
guidance  to  vessels.  These  banks  continue  to  extend  off  the  coast  to 
the  southward,  but  with  more  regular  soundings  and  a  greater  general 
depth  than  in  the  part  to  which  the  name  of  Miscou  Banks  has  been 
applied. 

Bay  of  Chaleurs  is  the  largest  bay  in  the  gulf,  being  25  miles  wide 
from  Cape  d'Espoir  to  Miscou  Island  ;  but  the  entrance  is  more  gener- 
ally considered  to  be  at  Macqnereau  Point,  from  which  the  north  point 
of  Miscou  Island  is  distant  14^  miles.  The  depth  of  the  bay  from  Mis- 
cou to  the  entrance  of  the  Restigouche  River  is  about  75  miles. 

The  northern  shore  of  the  bay  is  of  moderate  height,  but  an  irregular 
range  of  hills  of  considerable  elevation  is  every  where  visible  a  few  miles 
back  from  the  coast,  the  predominating  features  of  which  are  red  cliffs  of 
sandstone  and  shale,  with  intervening  shingle  and  sand  beaches.  Trap 
rocks  and  limestone  are  occasionally  met  with  also,  but  more  sparingly. 
The  southern  or  New  Brunswick  shore  is,  generally  speaking,  much 
lower,  and  for  the  most  part  composed  of  similar  rocks  ;  but  between 
Batliurst  and  Caraquette  the  cliffs  of  red  sandstone  rise  to  a  height  of 
200  feet  above  the  sea.  The  sandstone  either  belongs  to  or  is  very 
nearly  connected  with  the  coal  formation,  fossil  vegetable  remains  of 
which,  as  well  as  thin  veins  of  bituminous  coal,  being  not  unfrequently 
met  with.  There  are  numerous  settlements  all  around  the  bay,  and  the 
several  harbors,  roadsteads,  and  rivers  are  frequented  by  numbers  of 
vessels  engaged  in  the  lumber  trade  and  the  fisheries. 

Tlie  climate  is  warmer  and  the  weather  in  general  much  tiner  within 
this  bay  than  it  is  outside  in  the  adjacent  parts  of  the  gulf.  The  fogs, 
which  prevail  so  much  with  southerly  winds  on  the  Miscou  Banks,  sel- 
dom enter  the  bay,  although  rain  and  mist  accompany  easterly  gales 
here  as  elsewhere. 

The  navigation  is  by  no  means  difficult ;  for  although  there  are  some 
dangerous  shoals,  yet  there  is  everywhere  good  warning  by  the  lead. 

Tides. — The  tidal  streams  are  regular  within  the  bay,  and  seldom 
amount  to  the  rate  of  one  knot  per  hour ;  but  outside,  off'  its  mouth,  and 
especially  on  the  Miscou  Banks,  the  currents  and  tidal  streams  are  so 
irregular,  both  in  strength  and  direction,  that  nothing  deflnito  can  be 
said  of  them ;  and  their  dangerous  effects  upon  the  course  of  vestols 
can  only  be  guarded  against  by  the  constant  use  of  the  deep-sea  lead 
and  attention  to  the  soundings. 

Directions  at  Night  and  in  Fogs. — Vessels  bound  for  Chaleurs  Bay 
and  approaching  its  entrance  in  a  dark  night  or  foggy  weather  should 
not  attempt  to  make  Macqnereau  Point,  which  is  so  bold  that  there  is 
little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead ;  but  should  strike  soundings  on  the 
Miscou  Banks,  which  extend  nearly  22  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Miscou 
Island.    A  cautious  lookout  should  be  kept  for  the  numerous  fishing 


ftijrj^i^'umwatiMyw 


BAY    OF    CHALEUK8 — MI8C0U    HARBOR. 


96 


to  the  northward 
I  point  of  Miscou, 
tl'ordiug  excellent 
il  off  the  coast  to 
a  greater  general 
1  Banks  has  been 

ng  25  miles  wide 
ee  is  more  geuer- 
h  the  north  point 
he  bay  from  Mis- 
75  miles. 
,  but  an  irregular 
risible  a  few  miles 
Bh  are  red  cliffs  of 
d  beaches.  Trap 
t  more  sparingly. 

speaking,  much 
is ',  but  between 
se  to  a  height  of 
gs  to  or  is  very 
table  remains  of 
uot  unfrequently 
the  bay,  and  the 

by  numbers  of 

uch  finer  within 
gulf.  The  fogs, 
jcou  Banks,  sel- 
easterly  gales 


? 


there  are  some 

by  the  lead, 
ay,  and  seldom 

its  mouth,  and 
streams  are  so 
definite  can  be 
urse  of  vesbols 

deep-sea  lead 


r  Chaleurs  Bay 
eather  should 
1  that  there  is 
mdings  on  the 
if  ard  of  Miscou 
uerons  fishing 


schooners,  which  are  generally  riding  on  the  banks ;  and  the  northern 
edge  of  the  latter,  being  followe«l  in  30  fathoms  of  water,  will  safrly 
conduct  vessels  past  the  north  point  of  Miscou,  at  the  distance  of  i 
miles,  and  form  a  sure  guide  up  the  bay. 

The  bank  of  soundings  off  the  north  shore  is  also  sutticiently  wide  to 
guide  vessels  everywhere  within  Macquereau  Point;  nevertlielcss,  in  a 
dark  night  and  bad  weather,  vessels  had  better  not  approa(;h  the  shore 
much  nearer  than  the  depth  of  30  fathoms  in  any  part  of  the  biiy  to  the 
eastward  of  Carlisle  Point.  The  soundings  are  generally  of  sand  and 
shells  on  the  banks,  while  in  the  central  parts  of  the  bay  black  and 
brown  mud  pievail,  with  depths  between  30  and  50  fathoms.  Within, 
or  to  the  westward  of  Carlisle  Point,  and  theop])osite  bay  of  Nipisighit, 
the  depth  decreases  to  less  than  30  fathoms,  but  there  is  still  sulllcient 
warning  everywhere  by  the  lead  quite  up  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 

Miscou  Harbor,  freiiuently  called  Little  Shippegan  by  the  fishermen, 
lies  between  Miscou  and  Shippegan  Islands,  and  just  within  the  sandy 
spit  at  the  SVV.  extreme  of  Miscou,  where  the  space  of  deep  water,  trom 
4  to  G  fathoms,  forming  the  harbor  for  large  vessels,  is  400  yards  wide 
and  upwards  of  a  mile  in  length.  The  harbor  for  small  craft  is  more 
extensive,  with  2  and  2J  fathoms  water,  and  also  a  narrow  channel 
extending  eastward  through  the  fiats  of  mud  and  weeds  to  within  a 
mile  of  Miscou  Gully,  which  boats  can  only  enter  at  high  water.  The 
bottom  within  the  harbor  is  soft  mud ;  in  the  channel,  Just  outside  the 
entrance,  sand,  and  between  the  shoals,  farther  out,  sandstone. 

Directions. — The  Miscou  Channel,  leading  to  the  harbor,  between  the 
Shippegan  and  the  Miscou  Flats,  is  in  one  part  only  350  yards  wide,  be- 
tween shoals  so  steep  that  there  is  not  the  slightest  warning  by  the 
lead.  In  short,  none  other  than  small  vessels  should  attempt  this  har- 
bor without  having  first  buoyed  the  channel  or  secured  the  assistance 
of  a  competent  pilot.  A  vessel  of  12  feet  draft  may,  however,  run  in 
with  the  assistance  of  the  chart  and  the  following  brief  directions  : 

If  to  the  eastward  of  the  harbor,  cross  the  Miscou  Flats  to  the  SW., 
at  the  distance  of  3  miles  offshore,  in  no  less  than  4  fathoms  wa- 
ter; if  to  the  westward,  follow  the  northern  edge  of  the  Shippegan 
Flat,  in  4  or  5  fathoms.  In  either  case,  open  out  the  NE.  extreme  of 
the  trees  of  Shippegan  Island,  just  clear  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  the 
trees  of  Miscou  Island,  or  keep  the  former  in  one  with  the  extreme 
of  the  sandy  spit  at  the  SW.  end  of  Miscou  Island,  the  latter  being 
preferable  if  it  can  be  made  out.  These  marks  will  bear  a  little  to 
the  eastward  of  S.  69°  B. ;  steer  for  them  until  the  water  shoals  to 
less  than  4  fathoms,  which  will  be  on  a  point  of  the  Miscou  Flats. 
Sheer  to  the  SW.  for  about  ^  mile,  or  so  as  to  deepen  the  water  to  4 
and  5  fathoms ;  then  steer  S.  64°  B.  or  for  Pandora  Point,  a  wooded 
extreme  of  Shippegan,  ^  mile  within  Pecten  Point,  which  is  the  sandy 
south  point  of  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

In  running  this  course  the  vessel  will  cross  a  bay  in  the  Miscou  Flats 


i^f 


96 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    UREBN    ISLAND. 


ill  4  and  5fatlioiiiH;  if  tliu  HOUiidint^H  duepcn  to  more  tlitiii  tlu^  latter 
depth  at  low  water,  sheer  to  the  eastward,  for  the  object  is  to  keep  on 
the  MiNco'.i  and  least  dangerous  side  of  the  channel;  and  that  will  lie 
ettected  withont  dilllcnlty  by  the  load,  since  there  are  8  and  1)  fathoms 
ill  the  channel.  After  runiiiii};  a  short  mile  towards  Pandora  Point, 
the  points  on  the  north  side  of  Shippej;aii  will  be  observed  to  come 
in  one,  bearing  S.  4?)'^  VV. ;  and  about  the  same  time  a  liifili  sand  hill, 
on  the  sand  bars  at  the  heatl  of  the  harlxu',  will  come  on  with  the 
high-water  extreme  of  the  sandy  spit  of  Miscoii,  bearing  S.  83°  E. 
The  vessel  will  now  beat  the  narrow  part  of  the  channel,  and  must  fol- 
low the  edge  of  the  Miacon  Flats  by  the  lead,  in  from  4  to  (J  fathoms, 
sheering  to  the  eastward  the  instant  the  depth  is  more  than  the  latter, 
and  to  the  westward  when  less  than  the  former.  Tiie  general  direction 
of  the  conrse  will  be  still  towards  Pandora  Point,  until  the  points  on 
the  SK.  shore  of  Miscoii  within  the  harbor  open  out,  when  the  vessel 
will  be  in  safe  anchorage,  although  outside  the  entrance.  If  wishing 
to  proceed  farther,  hanl  up  for  the  high  sand  hill  on  the  sand  bars  already 
mentioned,  and  when  within  the  sandy  point,  steer  for  the  gully,  for  a 
short  distance,  choosing  a  convenient  bertli. 

Tides — The  tides  appear  to  set  fairly  in  and  out  of  the  harbor,  at  a 
rate  seldom  amounting  to  a  knot. 

Shippegan  Flat  is  an  extensive  shoal  of  sandstone,  thinly  and 
l)artly  covered  with  sand.  It  is  the  most  northern  of  the  Shippegan 
Shoals,  and  extends  2'^  miles  off  the  north  side  of  the  island,  separating 
the  channel  leading  to  the  harbors  of  Caraquette  and  Shippegan  from 
that  which  leads  into  Miscou  Harbor.  There  is  good  warning  by  the 
lead  all  along  its  northern  side,  which  may  be  safely  approached  to  6 
fathoms  in  a  large  and  to  3  fathoms  in  a  small  vessel. 

Foquesuedie  Shoal  is  an  extensive  tlat  of  sand  extending  2  miles 
to  the  northward  and  eastward  from  Poquesuedie  Island,  and  having 
only  C  or  7  feet  water  over  the  greater  part  of  it.  Caraquette  Steeple 
and  the  sandy  SE.  extreme  of  Uaraquette  Island  in  line,  bearing  S. 
03°  W.  lead  over  its  north  point  in  2  fathoms  at  low  water ;  and  if  the 
steeple  be  kept  halfway  between  the  extreme  of  the  sandy  point  and 
the  extreme  of  the  trees  on  the  same  island,  the  north  point  of  the  shoal 
will  be  cleared  in  4^  fathoms;  but  as  both  the  sandy  point  and  the  trees 
may  change  in  the  course  of  years,  those  marks  should  not  be  relied  on 
without  previous  examination. 

Shippegan  Sound. — On  the  western  side,  within  Poquesuedie 
Island,  is  Simon  Inlet,  the  best  harbor  in  the  sound.  Within  its  en- 
trance, between  Marcel le  and  Brule  Points,  the  anchorage  is  quite  land- 
locked, with  water  sufficient  and  space  enough  for  vessels  of  large 
draft.  On  the  opposite  or  Shippegan  side  are  the  bays  of  Aleniek 
and  Little  Aleinek.  The  latter  is  a  shallow  place,  but  has  good  anchor- 
age off  its  mouth.  The  former,  which  is  most  to  the  southward,  and  by 
far  the  larger  bay  of  the  two,  is  an  excellent  harbor  with  3  and  4 


tafc 


D. 

)re  than  tlm  latter 
)juct  is  to  ktH^p  on 
1;  and  that  will  Im 
ru  S  and  0  fathoms 
Is  Pandora  I'oint, 
observed  to  »!oin« 
3  a  hi^h  sand  hill, 
jomo  (Ml  with  the 
bearing  S.  83°  B. 
iinel,  and  ninst  tbl- 
)ni  4  to  (>  fathoms, 
)ro  than  the  latter, 
e  {general  direction 
mtil  the  points  on 
it,  when  the  vessel 
ranee.  If  wisiiing 
e  sand  bars  already 
for  the  gully,  for  a 

jf  the  harbor,  at  a 

[stone,  thinly  and 
I  of  the  Shippegau 
a  island,  separating 
ul  Shippegau  from 
}d  warning  by  the 
ly  approached  to  6 

extending  2  miles 
Island,  and  having 
Jaraquette  Steeple 
n  line,  bearing  S. 

water ;  and  if  the 
sandy  point  and 

point  of  the  shoal 
point  and  the  trees 

d  not  be  relied  on 

thin  Poquesuedie 
Within  its  en- 
rage is  quite  laud- 
vessels  of  large 
bays  of  Alemek 
has  good  anchor- 
iouthward,  and  by 
)or  with  3  and  4 


HHII'PEGAN    HARHOK — CARAyUKTTK    ISLAND. 


97 


fathoms  vor,  and  secure  in  all  winds.  There  is  a  chunih  and  village 
of  A(!adian.s  at  the  head  of  this  bay;  and  on  Alexander  Point,  its 
north  |)oiiit.  stands  the  establishmtMit  of  Mr.  Alexander.  There  isa  l)ar 
of  sand  and  mud  extending  across  the  sound  from  Alexander  Point  to 
Brule  Point,  which  limits  the  depth  that  can  be  (Mrrietl  into  Alemek 
Bay  to  2'f  fathoms;  and  into  Shippegau  Harbor  to 'J^  fatlioiiis  at  low 
water. 

Shippegan  Harbor. — On  the  mainland,  nearly  o|)i)(>site  the  south 
point  of  Alemek  Hay,  there  is  a  windmill  on  Bornaclie  Point,  the  sandy 
north  point  of  Basse  Bay.  On  the  soiitii  |>oiiit  of  this  l»ay  stands  the 
church  and  village  of  Shippegan,  and  oil"  them  is  Shippegau  Harbor, 
which  is  a  narrow  channel  with  '2S  to  1  fatiioms  water,  and  between 
shoals  of  mud  and  eelgrass  nearly  dry  at  low  tide.  This  narrow  chan- 
nel cuitiiiues  2<V  miles  beyond  the  chur(!li,  terminating  at  Shipi»egan 
Gully,  the  southern  entrance  of  the  sound.  Tlie gully  is  used  by  shal- 
lops and  lishing  boats.  The  tide  is  generally  extremely  rapid  in  it,  and 
there  is  often  a  heavy  surf  on  its  bar  of  sand,  which  dries  in  part  at 
low  tide,  leaving  a  cliaiinel  with  only  4  or  .T  feet  water.  Shippt^gan 
Harbor  is  (piite  seiuire  in  all  wiuils,  Tlie  watering  place  is  at  a  small 
stream  in  Basse  Bay,  a  short  distance  to  the  westward  of  the  chunth. 

Slii|)pegan  Channel,  leading  into  the  sound,  is  dee|>,  but  the  pa.ssage 
is  narrow  and  without  leading  marks.  For  3  miles  the  breadth  of  the 
channel  between  the  shoals  is  only  \  to  !\  mile.  Four  buoys  mark  the 
edges  of  the  shoals  and  render  the  navigation  comparatively  easy. 

Tides. — It  would  require  a  much  longer  experience  than  was  afforded 
by  the  few  weeks  employed  in  the  Admiralty  survey'  to  be  fully  ac- 
quainted with  the  set  of  the  tides  in  the  entrance  of  the  Oaracpiette 
and  Shippegan  Channels,  where  they  doubtless  change  with  the  time 
of  tide  and  other  circumstances.  The  rate  of  the  tides,  however,  .sel- 
dom exceeded  a  knot  even  in  the  channels,  where  of  course  they  are 
stronger  than  elsewhere.  In  Shippegan  Harbor  the  stream  was  very 
regular  in  fine  weather,  running  in  at  the  gully  and  to  the  northward, 
through  the  sound,  into  Ohaleurs  Bay  from  about  half  ebb  to  half  Hood 
by  the  shore,  and  in  the  reverse  direction,  or  to  the  southward,  from  about 
hivlf  flood  to  half  ebb.  It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  in  Shippegau 
Harbor  at  3h.  42m.,  which  is  about  an  hour  later  than  at  Caraqiiette 
and  Paspebiac;  springs  rise  54  or  6  feet,  neaps  3  feet. 

Shippegan  Sound. — Ice.  —The  sound  is  usually  frozen  over  about 
1st  December  and  clear  of  ice  about  lOth  May,  being  completely  closed 
between  those  dates.  The  tirst  vessel  arrives  from  sea  about  21st  May 
and  the  last  one  leaves  about  13th  November.  In  1870  fleld  ice  drifted 
into  Shippegau  Sound  on  14th  .May  and  «lid  not  disappear  until  4th 
June. 

Caraquette  Island  is  of  sandstone,  low  and  wooded,  and  1.^  miles 
long  in  a  direction  nearly  parallel  to  the  coast.    Sandy  points  extend 
from  both  ends  of  the  island  towards  the  mainland,  or  to  the  southward, 
5489 7 


98 


MIKAMICHI    BAY    To    (iRKKN    ISLAM). 


(toiiH  to  form  It  l))i,v,iii  which  thitrti  \h  Imidlockcd  aiiulioiaKc  for  vchnoIs  not 
<li'<iwiii(;  more  tliaii  lo  fcot  wiitor.  Thu  iHhiiul  riHt'H  Iroiii  iiii  (txtuii.sivu 
bank  of  Hat  Handstoni^,  puitially  (M)V(>t'i><l  witli  Hand,  and  wliii^h,  com- 
in«'n(;iiiK  at  Mi/xctivttu  Point,  oxttMidH  to  tlii^  eastward  parallel  to  tliu 
coast  all  the  way  to  the  entrance  of  tShippcgau  Hound,  a  distance  of  8 
or  0  miles. 

Caraquette  Shoal  extends  i\  ndles  to  the  eastward  of  the  island, 
from  which  it  dries  out  occasionally  in  very  low  tides  to  the  distance  of 
2  miles,  and  is  shallow  in  every  part.  From  its  east  end  Cara<]iiette 
steeple  and  the  HIC.  extreme  of  the  trees  of  Caraquette  Island  are 
in  line,  bearing  H.  (V<i°  W.,  und  Shippegan  steeple  and  I'oquesnedie 
Point  beariiij^  8.  li(P  E.  The  laat-named  marks  in  line  lead  totlit^  east- 
ward of  this  shoal  in  3  fathouiH  at  low  water,  but  a  large  ship  requiring 
a  great  depth  of  water  would  have  to  i)a8s  farther  to  the  eastward  by 
keeping  Marcelle  and  Poquesuodie  Points  in  line,  bearing  8.  2°  K. 

Fisherman  Ledge  is  a  detached  bed  of  rocks,  with  10  feet  least  water, 
lying  to  the  northward  of  the  Caraquette  Bank  and  separated  from  it 
by  Fisherman  Channel,  which  is  one  mile  wide  and  carries  from  4  to  7 
fathoms  water.  This  dangerous  ledge,  which  lies  more  in  the  way  of 
vessels  than  any  other  in  Chaleurs  liay,  is  1;^  miles  long  and  k  mile  wide 
from  the  dei>th  of  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms.  There  are  no  marks  for  it. 
Its  northern  edge  is  distant  3  miles  from  Caraquette  Tsland,  and  its  east 
and  west  ends  bear  north  from  the  corresponding  points  of  the  island. 
The  points  of  cliff's  at  Great  Anse  and  Doua  Point  in  one,  bearing  S. 
77°  W.,  lead  through  Fisherman  Channel,  which,  however,  has  not  been 
examined  very  closely,  and  can  not  in  any  case  be  recommended  to  ves- 
sels of  large  draft. 

Caraquette  Channel,  between  the  Poquesuedie  and  Caraquette 
Shoals,  forms  the  entrance  to  the  harbor  of  Caraquette  for  a  distance 
of  2j  miles,  and  has  water  enough  for  vessels  of  the  largest  draft ;  but 
it  is  crooked  and  only  450  yards  wide  between  very  steep  shoals,  and 
without  sufficient  leading  marks,  hence  it  becomes  a  very  difficult  chan- 
nel. 

Caraquette  Harbor  may  be  said  to  commence  immediately  within  or 
to  the  westward  of  Poquesuedie  island,  extending  westward  between 
the  maiidand  and  the  Caraquette  Shoal  and  Island.  The  church  at 
Caraquette  will  be  seen  standing  conspicuously  on  the  ridge  nearly 
opposite  to  Mizzenette  Point,  and  the  houses  and  fish  stores  of  Lower 
Caraquette  nearlj'  opposite  to  the  island.  In  the  eastern  part.of  the 
harbor,  immediately  within  Poquesuedie,  the  depth  is  o  and  0  fathoms, 
and  there  is  not  less  than  3^  fathoms  till  within  i  mile  of  the  SE.  point 
of  the  island.  Between  the  islandand  the  main  the  channel  is  only  250 
yards  wide  and  carries  only  2J  fathoms  water ;  but  farther  westward  it 
increases  to  J  mile  and  4^  fathoms  water,  and  is  there  sheltered  by  the 
Mizzenette  sands,  which  dry  at  low  water  nearly  across  to  the  island. 
The  bottom  is  of  mud  within  the  harbor  and  of  sand  in  the  entrance, 
or  Caraqnette  Channel. 


CAKAt^UHTTE    IIAItUUR — DIHKCTIONS. 


1)9 


;t»  for  \  t'ssi'ls  imt 
[>tu  III!  (txt(;ii.sivu 
iind  \vlii(;|i,  foiii- 
I  i»aral!('l  to  tliu 
,  a  (liHtancc  of  8 

1  of  tlio  islatii], 
I  till'  (iJHtancu  of 
tMid  CaiiKjiictte 
otte  Inland  are 
lid   L'oqnosticdie 
lead  totlici  east- 
e  Mbip  requiring 
;lie  eantward  by 
ing  S.  2o  K. 
feet  least  water, 
iparated  from  it 
•rioH  from  4  to  7 
e  in  tlie  way  of 
and  !^  mile  wide 
10  marks  for  it. 
ud,  and  its  east 
8  of  tlie  island, 
one,  bearing  S. 
)r,  lias  not  been 
mended  to  ves- 

id  Caraqiiette 
I  for  a  distance 
rest  draft ;  but 
ep  sboals,  and 
difflcnltcbau- 

.tely  within  or 
ward  between 
The  church  at 

ridge  nearly 
ores  of  Lower 
rn  part, of  the 
nd  a  fathoms, 

the  SE.  point 

el  is  only  2.50 

ir  westward  it 

jltered  by  the 

to  the  island. 

the  entrance, 


Caraquette  Bay  extends  4  or  ri  miles  to  tin-  wt^stwardof  Mizzcnette 
Point,  being  all  shoal  watiT  exci-pt  the  narrow  channel  of  the  harl»or 
and  terminating  in  the  two  shallow  rivers,  the  South  and  the  North,  in 
the  inoiitlis  of  which  there  are  oyster  beds.  Tlie  best  watering  place  is 
at  a  siuhII  stream  which  descends  the  steep  banks  at  Ifpper  ('araqnette, 
near  Hrideau  Point. 

Ice.— The  harbor  is  usually  frozen  over  about  llth  I)e(!ember,  and 
clear  of  uw  about  8th  May,  being  completely  closed  between  those 
dates.  Tiie  (Irst  vessel  arrives  from  sea  about  l-'th  May,  and  the  last 
one  leaves  about  2.'>th  November. 

Directions.— If  bound  from  the  eastward,  having  brought  the  en* 
trance  of  Miscou  Harbor  to  bear  to  the  eiistward  of  S.  2P  I'}.,  stand  in 
towards  it  to 8 fathoms  water;  then  run  to  the  westward  in  that  de|>tU 
until  the  NK.  extreme  of  the  trees  of  Shippegan  Island  opens  to  the 
southward  of  the  SW.  extreme  of  Miscou  Island,  bearing  S.  «5o  E., 
when,  if  the  weather  be  clear,  Caraquette  steeple  will  be  seen  in  line 
with  the  north  extreme  of  Caraquette  Island,  bearing  S.  51°  W.  From 
thence  steer  for  Blanchard  Point,  the  wooded  north  extreme  of  Pocpie- 
suedie  Island,  which  may  or  may  not  be  made  out,  as  it  will  be  on  with 
the  mainland  and  distant  7  or  8  miles.  Do  not  a|>proach  the  Shippe- 
gan Flat  nearer  than  the  depth  of  7  fathoms,  and  having  run  about  3^ 
miles,  Marcelle  Point,  the  wooded  SE.  extreme  of  Poquesuedie  Island, 
will  be  in  line  with  Poquesuedie  Point,  which  is  the  sandy  east  extreme 
of  the  same  island. 

These  points  in  line  bearing  south  will  lead  westward  of  the  NW.  ex- 
treme of  the  Shippegan  Flat.  Steer  for  these  points  in  line  until  Cara- 
quette steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  SB.  extreme  of  the  trees  of  Cara- 
quette fsland,  bearing  S.  03°  W.,  immediately  after  which,  or  when  the 
north  extreme  of  Shipjiegan  is  in  line  with  the  south  extreme  of  Mis- 
cou, bearing  N.  74°  E.,  steer  towards  Blanchard  Point,  bearing  S.  37° 
W.  IJaviiig  run  not  <piite  1.^  miles  towards  Blanchard  Point  Shippe- 
gan steeple  will  come  in  line  with  Poquesuedie  Point,  bearing  S.  24°  E., 
and  at  the  same  time,  or  immediately  afterwards,  Caraiiuette  steeple 
will  be  ill  lino  with  the  sandy  SB.  extremity  of  Caraquette  Island,  bear- 
S.  03°  W. 

The  vessel  will  now  be  within  the  entrance  of  the  Caraquette  Channel, 
between  the  Caraquette  and  Poquesuedie  Shoals,  and  must  haul  to  the 
westward  immediately  for  Caraquette  Steeple,  keeping  it  carefully  in 
line  with  the  sandy  SE.  extreme  of  Caraquette  Island,  until  the  wind- 
mill on  Alexander  Point  (Shippegan  Isl<ind)is  in  line  with  Poquesuedie 
Point,  bearing  S.  47°  E,,  when  the  course  must  instantly  be  changed  to 
S.  40°  W.  The  vei^sel  will  now  be  about  to  pass  through  the  narrowest 
and  most  difficult  part  of  the  channel,  and  the  course  must  be  strictly 
attended  to,  and  the  lead  kept  going  on  both  sides.  If  the  water  shuals 
to  less  than  4  fathoms,  after  the  vessel  has  run  upon  this  course  from 
4  to  ^  mile,  it  will  be  on  the  Poquesuedie  side,  and  she  must  therefore 


r* 


100 


MIKAMK'MI    KAY    To   OKKKN    isLAiNt). 


Hteor  to  tlio  north wiinl  li  littlu,  or  into  5  t'litlioiiiH,  iinil  thou  rcHitnio  tho 
&.  40  '  W.  cuiir.Hc  iii;iiiii  until  (<iini(|n«tt«^  8t('(^pl«>  coint'M  in  lino  witii  tho 
uliil' of  Itriih'siii  I'oint,  Itoiirin^  8.  Tf  W.  Alter  tlio  conrHt*  uKain  ini- 
nnHliiitoly  tlic  liiMt-niitncMl  iniirks  (M)ni««  in  lin*',  and  intoor  tor  tlh'ni  tor  <{ 
iniUs  tluMi  Mlu'or  to  tho  Hontliwiirtl  ii  little,  ho  tliiit  th»  Mteeple  iiiuy  bw 
Hccii  u  little  within  an*l  over  the  extremity  of  the  point,  or  in  line  with 
tlie  Htore  npon  it ;  keep  it  ho  nntil  the  clitVy  points  on  the  SK  nide  of 
CariKpn'tte  IhIsiihI  are  all  nlint  in  behind  tlie  east  point  of  the  isliind, 
anil  it  will  have  led  elear  of  the  Honth  extremity  of  the  ('arutpiette 
Shoiil.  Tiie  vessel  will  now  be  in  nafe  aiuthora^e,  and  a  Iterlh  may  be 
chosen  at  pleasure  with  the  asHintanue  of  the  chart,  and  in  from  1  to  '2^ 
fathoms  at  low  water. 

Mizzenette  Ledge  of  rockn,  with  T)  feet  leant  water,  bearn  X.  4'P  \V. 
1\  miles  from  the  west  end  of  (7ara(iiiette  Island,  and  a  vt'ssel  will  pass 
to  the  northward  of  it,  in  .'M  fathoms,  by  keeping  Dona  Point.just  open 
to  the  northward  of  Mi/,zeiiette  Point,  luMirin^  S.  H.'Jo  VV.  Tlu'se  marks 
will  alst)  lead  to  the  eastward  alou);  the  northern  ed^re  of  theCaraqnette 
Shoal  until  they  strike  Scallop  Patirli,  wliitdi  has  10  feet  least  water  over 
a  rocky  bottom;  and  on  whittli  tlie  NW.  extreme  of  Caraijuette  Island 
and  Caracpu'tte  Steeple  are  in  line,  the  SIC.  extreme  of  the  island 
beariii),'  S.  4'^  VV'.,  distant  nearly  2  miles.  The  marks  for  clearing 
the  northern  edjje  of  the  Caraqnette  Shoal,  to  the  eautwurd  of  Scallop 
patch,  and  in  .'i  fathoms  water,  are  the  south  extreme  of  Miscou  Island 
kept  plainly  oi)en  to  the  northward  of  the  north  point  of  ShippeKan 
Island,  bearing;  N.  74°  K.  But  those  marks  are  low  and  distant,  and 
often  not  well  dellned,  therefore  they  should  not  be  trusted  alone, 
neither  will  they  be  reipiired  if  the  northern  edjje  of  the  shoal  be  not 
api>roa(rhed  nearer  than  the  d«'pth  of  4  fathonm  at  low  water. 

Norton  Shoal,  carrying;  3  fathoms  water,  and  lyiii};  'i  of  a  mile  ot} 
shore,  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  Norton  Point,  and  U  miles  eastward 
of  the  NipiHighit,  is  the  only  dan^^er  in  the  way  of  vessels  alonp;  the 
coast  from  Mizzenette  Point  to  Bathurst  Harbor,  a  distance  of  2.1  nnles. 

The  Coast,  which  for  the  most  |)art  is  of  high  sandstone  clitls,  is  very 
low  near  Mizzenette  Point ;  and  about  3  miles  to  the  westward  of  that 
point,  where  the  sandy  cliffs  end,  the  shoal  water  extends  to  ^  mile 
from  the  shore ;  but  in  |ruiii>ral  it  docs  not  extend  to  more  than  half  that 
distance,  and  the  coast  may  everywhere  be  approached  by  the  lead  to 
10  or  12  fathoms  with  care,  the  greater  depth  being  quite  near  enough 
at  niy;ht  time.  There  are  settlements  all  along  the  coast,  and  villages 
and  llsliing  establishments  at  Great  Anseand  Pokeshaw.  Great  Anse, 
where  there  is  a  church,  is  8  miles,  and  Pokeshaw  11  miles  westward  of 
Mizzenette  Point.  There  are  small  bays  at  both  places  where  boats 
find  shelter,  and  a  small  river  at  Pokeshaw. 

Bathurst  Harbor,  at  the  mouth  of  the  Ni|)isighit  River,  is  400  yards 
wide  at  the  entrance  between  Alston  and  Carron  Points,  which  are  of 
sand,  with  several  stores  and  other  buildings  upon  them  (1800). 


^Ss* 


BATHirRST    IIARHOR — HKRON    IHLAND. 


101 


I  \hw  with  tliu 
ii'Ho  i\\tii\\\  iiii- 
tor  tlh'in  lor  Jf 
(tt'cpli^  limy  b« 
or  ill  liiit^  with 
lit«  NK.  Hidti  of 
t  of  tli<t  ishuid, 

IxM'lli  limy  bu 
ill  from  1  to  '2if 

jiU-M  N.  4->'^  VV. 

■CMHOI  will  pIlSH 
'oillt  jllHt  0|)(MI 

Tiicsu  timrkH 

tlU'ClUlKHUlttO 

•list  wiitcr  over 

luiiu'ttci  Isltuul 
of  Mie  ishviKl 

:n  for  cloiu'iiif; 

'anl  of  Sjiullop 
Mis<;ou  IhUiikI 

:  of  Shippefrau 
(1  (liNtant,  and 
triiHted  alone, 

e  HJioal  1)0  not 

liter. 

1'^  of  a  mile  off 
niles  ciiHtward 

Isels  along  the 
ice  of  2.»  miles, 
le  (!litt8,  is  very 
stward  of  that 
nds  to  ^  mile 
than  half  that 
|by  the  lead  to 
near  enough 
,  and  villages 
(jlreat  Anse, 
8  westward  of 
where  boats 

^r,  is  4(K>  yards 
which  are  of 

1(1800). 


The  lightlioiiHeN  kept  in  line  will  lead  in  through  the  imrrow  clmiinel 
over  the  l»ar  in  7  feet  at  low  watt>r,  or  in  1 1  feet  at  high  wat;-i'  in  the 
beHt  Hpring  tides.  The  distance  trotii  the  outsulr  of  tlie  bar  in  .'i  lath* 
ouiM  to  Mie  entraiiee  of  the  riviTls  l,j  inlleN;  and  for  the  whole  of  that 
distaii(;u  the  very  narrow  channel  -<  between  sandy  shoah,  nearly  dry 
at  low  water,  and  extending  from  fitlierside  of  the  tivrr's  month. 

Within  the  entraiKie  there  is  an  extensive  anil  well  shellereil  bitsin, 
nearly  .'<  inileN  long  and  2  miles  widt^  but  nearly  all  dry  at  low  water, 
excepting  thtt  cliannels  of  the  four  rivers,  whicrli,  alter  uniting  their 
streams  beh)W  Batlinrst,  How  through  it  to  the  entrance,  Idiining  by 
theirjuiictioii  what  is  called  the  Main  (Miannel.  On  the  eastern  sitle 
of  the  basin  tliere  is  an  islet  (!alled  tliu  Imlian  or  liathiirst  Island.  The 
town  of  Uathurst  is  well  situated  at  the  head  of  the  basin,  2^  miles 
within  the  entrance,  and  oii  the  point  of  land  wlii(;h  divides  the  Hiver 
Nipisighit  tVom  the  Middle  and  N.n-th  Rivers. 

Anchorage. — In  the  entrance  between  the  sandy  points,  or  rather 
just  outside  it,  there  are.'iand  4  fathoms  water;  and  here  vessels  usually 
moor  to  take  in  timber,  sheltered  by  the  bar  and  the  sandy  shoals  on 
either  side.  Some  of  the  larger  ones  complete  their  loading  outside 
the  bar,  where  the  anchorage,  in  U  or  7  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  is  con- 
sidered safe  in  the  summer  months,  although  the  NK.  gales  send  in  a 
heavy  se;i. 

Pilots. — There  are  good  pilots  for  the  Hiver  Nipisighit,  and  no  one 
should  attem|)t  the  bar  without  one,  excei>tingin  case  of  necessity. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Bathurst  at  3  h.  1  .*»  m.; 
springs  rise  7  feet,  neaps  4  feet.  The  rate  of  the  tides  in  the  main  chan- 
nel is  about  2  knots,  and  over  the  bar  about  \ft  knots.  The  stream  sets 
fair  in  and  out  and  over  the  bar. 

Belledune  Point  is  13  miles  from  Heron  Island,  and  the  extreme 
seen  from  it  is  low  and  sandy,  and  has  shoal  water  oil  it  to  the  east* 
ward  ''^  mile.  At  8  miles  to  the  southward  of  this  point,  on  the  west- 
ern shore  of  Nipisighit  Bay,  is  the  chnrch  and  village  of  Kochette ;  and 
8.<{  miles  farther  in  the  sane  direction  is  the  entrance  of  the  Nipisighit 
River  at  the  head  of  the  bay.  The  whole  of  this  coast  is  low,  and  com- 
posed of  sandstone,  limestone,  and  trap  rocks.  The  shoal  water  gen- 
erally extends  to  ^  mile  from  the  shore  ;  and  vessels  of  large  draft  had 
better  not  stand  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms,  especially  at 
night,  unless  it  be  in  the  head  of  the  bay,  where  they  may  safely  ap- 
proach the  sandy  beach  to  7  or  6  fathoms. 

Heron  Island. — Heron  Island,  at  5:^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Tra- 
cadigash  Point,  is  of  moderate  height,  wooded,  and  with  red  sandstone 
clilfs  at  both  its  NVV.  and  SE.  points.  Shoal  water  extends  off  both 
those  points  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile ;  »«  it  does  also  all  along  the 
northern  side  of  the  island,  where  the  3-fathoms  line  of  soundings  is  ^ 
mile  out  from  the  shore.  The  island  is  4  miles  long,  i)arallel  to  the 
coast,  and  there  is  gooi\  anchorage  in  the  channel  between  it  and  the 


.■t«p*wtfr>r'Eft".^:cT""'^ 


■•■I 


I:  t 


102 


MIRAMIf'HI    BAY    TO   GREEN    ISLAND. 


mainland  ;  but  the  channel  is  rendeivl  narrow  and  difficult  by  shoals, 
which  extend  a  great  distance  out  on  either  side. 

Heron  Channel — At  the  western  end  the  cliannel  is  only  40U  yards 
wide,  with  ."{  fathoms  water  in  it.  It  becomes  wider  to  the  eastward, 
and  the  deptlis  are  4  and  5  fathoms;  but  there  the  dangerous  Heron 
Kock  lies,  nearly  in  mid-channel,  and  consequently  right  in  the  way  of 
vessels.  When  on  this  small  rock,  which  has  0  feet  least  water,  and  4 
or  b  fathoms  all  around  it,  the  SB.  extreme  of  Heron  Island  bears  N.  44° 
E.,  about  one  mile ;  the  nearest  sandj'  south  point  of  Heron  Island 
N.  li3o  W.,  1,200  yards;  Beaver  Point  S.  18°  W.,  ^  mile;  and  a  rock 
lying  600  yards  north  of  Beaver  Point  and  almost  always  above  water, 
S.  67<^  VV  ,  700  yards.  This  latter  rock,  which  lies  on  tiie  edge  of  the 
shoal  oft' the  mainland,  is  quite  bold;  and  a  vessel,  by  sailing  within 
the  distance  of  300  yards  of  it,  will  pass  to  the  southward  of  the  Herou 
Bock  ;  as  she  will  also  to  the  northward,  by  running  along  the  southern 
edge  of  the  shoal  oft"  the  island,  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  But  this 
is  an  intricate  and  dangerous  channel  for  a  vessel  of  any  size,  and 
requires  the  aid  of  a  good  pilot. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  occasionally  anchor,  for  the  purpose  of  load- 
ing with  timber,  in  the  bay  of  Nash  Kiver,  in  4  fathoms,  mud  bottom, 
where  they  are  much  exposed  to  easterly  winds,  but  the  ground  is  so 
good  that  they  ride  safely  during  the  summer  months.  At  this  anchor- 
age the  east  point  of  Heron  Island  bears  N.  37°  W.,  2^  miles;  and 
Black  Point  N.  08°  W.,  one  mile. 

The  shoal  water  extends  off  Fowler  Point  a  mile  out  to  the  3-fathom 
line  of  soundings.  There  is  also  good  anchorage  in  4  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  to  tiie  westward  of  Heron  Island,  and  nearly  midway  between 
it  and  the  River  Charlo.    Tiiis  river  will  only  admit  boats. 

Carleton  Road. — This  name  has  been  given  to  an  excellent  and 
capacious  anchorage  safe  in  all  winds.  It  is  situated  on  the  west  side 
of  Tracadigash  Point,  which  consists  of  silnd,  inclosing  a  shallow 
lagoon,  capahlo  of  admitting  boats,  or  very  small  craft,  at  high  water. 
On  the  northern  shore  of  this  lagoon  stands  the  church  and  village  of 
Carleton,  the  latter  extending  to  the  westward  to  the  shore  of  the  bay, 
where  the  sand  beach  of  the  lagoon  joins  the  mainland.  A  small  stream, 
with  a  bridge  across  it,  there  enters  the  NW.  corner  of  the  lagoon ; 
and  one  mile  farther  to  the  westward,  near  the  commencement  of  the 
Clay  Clitts,  another  small  stream  will  be  seen,  which  is  the  watering 
place.  Immediately  in  rear  of  the  village,  the  Carleton  Mountain  rises 
abruptly  to  the  height  of  1,830  feet  above  the  level  of  the  sesi — the 
hills  of  the  range  trending  from  it  both  to  the  northward  and  westward 
for  many  miles. 

Anchorage. — Vessels  may  anchor  anywhere  in  from  5  to  6  fathoms, 
remembering  that  although  the  sandy  beach  of  Tracadigash  Point  is 
quite  bold  on  the  west  side  within  the  spit,  yet  shoal  water  extends  olf 
the  mainland  to  the  distance  of  nearly  i  mile.    The  best  berth,  espe- 


D. 

lifflcult  by  shoals, 

l  is  only  400  yards 
'  to  tiie  eastward, 
dangerous  Heron 
nght  in  the  way  of 
least  water,  and  4 
[aland  bears  N.  44° 
;  of  Mer<)n  Island 
\  mile ;  and  a  rock 
ways  above  water, 
)n  tlie  edge  of  the 
by  sailing  within 
ward  of  the  Heron 
iilong  the  southern 
V  water.  But  this 
}1  of  any  size,  and 

B  purpose  of  load- 
oius,  mud  bottom, 
the  ground  is  so 
s.  At  this  anchor- 
W.,  2^  miles ;  and 

ut  to  the  3-fathom 
n  4  fathoms,  mud 
y  midway  between 
boats. 

an  excellent  and 
I  on  the  west  side 
closing  a  shallow 
aft,  at  high  water, 
rch  and  village  of 
!  shore  of  the  bay, 
.    A  small  stream, 

r  of  the  lagoon ; 
neiicement  of  the 
is  the  watering 
;on  -Mountain  rises 

1  of  the  sea — the 
ard  and  westward 

>ni  5  to  G  fathoms, 

cadigash  Point  is 

water  extends  oti" 

best  berth,  espe- 


CAKLETON    ROAD — DALHOUSIE    IIAKBOK. 


10.5 


cially  with  easterly*  winds,  is  in  5k  fathoms,  mud,  with  Tra(!ailigash 
Point  bearings.  38^  R. ;  Carleton  steeple  N.  78^  K, ;  and  tlie  watering 
place  N.  37°  W. 

Tides. — The  tides  are  weak  in  Carleton  Itoad,  seldom  exceeding  one 
knot. 

Maguacha  Point,  of  red  sandstone  cliffs,  is  the  NE.  point  of  en- 
trance of  the  liiver  liestigouclie,  atul  bears  frou)  Tracadigasii  Point 
S.  81°  W.,  ()A  miles.  In  the  X\V.  corner  of  the  bay  between  them  is 
uew  basin  and  river,  nearly  dry  at  low  water. 

Directions. — Tracadigash  8pit,  of  sand,  aiul  running  out  fi  mile  to 
the  SW.  from  the  sandy  point  of  the  same  name,  is  the  only  danger 
in  the  way  when  approaching  the  anchorage  in  Carleton  lioad  from 
the  eastward.  Observe  that  Maguacha  Point  and  the  summit  of  Dal- 
housie  Mountain  in  line,  bearing  S.  83*^  W.,  pass  the  extremity  of  the 
spit  in  3  fathoms.  Therefore,  to  clear  it  keep  the  'nountain  well  open, 
or  at  night  go  no  nearer  than  10  or  9  fathoms  water.  As  soon  as  Carle- 
ton steeple  comes  in  line  with  the  southwest  extreme  of  Tracadigash 
Point,  bearing  N.  M3°  E.,  the  spit  will  have  been  passed,  and  the  vessel 
may  haul  in  to  tiie  northward,  going  no  nearer  than  7  fathoms  till  the 
point  bears  to  the  southward  of  east. 

Bonami  Rocks.— The  entrance  of  the  Restigouche  River,  between 
Maguacha  Point  and  the  Bonami  Rocks,  is  nearly  two  miles  wide.  The 
rocks  are  steep  and  high,  and  so  rough  and  broken  that  a  stranger 
would  be  led  to  expect  danger  on  their  side  iustead  of  on  the  opi)osite, 
where  the  steep  red  cliffs  of  Maguacha  Point  give  the  usual,  although 
in  this  case  deceptive,  indications  of  a  clear  channel. 

Tiie  extreme  point  of  the  Bonami  Rocks  may  be  safely  passed  within 
the  distance  of  400  yards,  but  shallow  water  extends  from  the  rocks  to 
Bonami  Point,  from  which  a  reef  runs  J  mile,  aiul  the  shoal  continues 
from  it  to  Dalhousie  Island. 

Maguacha  Spit,  of  sand  and  stones  with  only  H  feet  at  low  water 
runs  out  nearly  a  mile  to  the  west  from  Maguaciia  Point,  or  towards 
the  Bonami  Hocks,  thus  occujyying  fully  half  the  channel.  To  clear 
the  SW.  extreme  of  this  steep  aiid  dangerous  spit,  keep  the  highest 
summit  of  the  Scaumenac  Mountains  open  to  tlie  SW.  of  Dalhousie 
Island  ;  tor  the  summit  of  the  mountain  and  the  south  side  of  the 
island  in  one,  bearing  X.  08°  W.,  lead  over  the  extieme  end  of  the 
spii;  in  34  fathoms.  The  eastern  side  of  the  sjjit  will  be  avoided  l)y  not 
entirely  shutting  in  the  south  extreme  of  the  Carleton  Mountains  be- 
L    h\  the  east  side  of  Maguacha  Point. 

Dalhousie  Harbor. — Dalhousie  (Douglas)  Island,  400  yards  long, 
is  high  and  rocky,  round-backed  and  wooded,  and  joined  by  a  shoal, 
which  dries,  to  the  low  jmint  of  Dalhousie.  On  that  point  there  are 
large  storehouses  belonging  to  the  town  of  Dalhousie,  which  with  its 
church  will  be  seen  situated  on  the  side  of  a  hill  to  the  SW.  of  the 
island.     Westward  of  Dalhousie  Island  there  is  a  small  rocky  islet  at 


1U4 


MIRAMICHl    BAY    TO    GUEEX    ISLAND. 


i 

I 


the  oxtremity  ot  a  uarroNv  san.ly  spit  fonniii-  tbe  western  side  of  the 

Zlr'l  ;  ;  "  ^'V  ''""''"''''•  ^'"^  «'^""«^^  ^^'*^'^'-  -steads  from 
the  iHlet  to  the  island,  and  the  timber  ships  lie  moore<l  along  its  e.lge 
in  6  or  <  athoms,  muddy  bottom,  directly  off  the  town  ;  by  keeping  just 
outs.de  these  deep  water  is  obtained.  This  is  Dalhousie  liarbo  which 
IS  quite  secure  in  all  winds. 

thf  *h^°?',^  f  *'^°'  '"?^'  ^'  approached  ia  two  ways,  either  through 
the  dnec  but  narrow  channel  between  the  Middle  Ground  and  Dal- 
hous.e  Island,  or  round  to  the  northward  and  westward  of  the  .Vlid.lle 

!^Z'"  '.T  .T  '*'''  f '''""^"'  •'  '"^"^"•^^  ^^^  "««"««*'•>•  «f  P'i^^i^g  over 
a  Hat  ol  .{  fathoms  at  low  water,  is  the  route  usually  taken,  because  of 

there  be.ng  plenty  of  room  there,  whereas  the  channel  firs   mentioned 

IS  only  3()()  yards  whle.    The  naz-row  channel  has,  however,  the  a.lvl!:^ 

tage  ot  g()o<l  leading  marks,  and  carries  (J  fathoms  water 

Tho  Middle  Ground,  separated  from  Dalhousie  Island  by  the  uar- 

Jt  Iw  ;r;"  /'''  ;"'^""""«'^'  •«  ^'^^O  ^^^^^^  'o»g.  nnd  SOO  yards  wide. 
It  consists  ot  saml  and  stones  with  (i  feet  least  water,  and  is  very  steep 
on  Its  eastern  side,  where  a  buoy  is  placed  near  its  north  point. '  There 
are  no  sntticient  leading  marks,  but  beacons  might  be  easily  so  placed 
on  the  shore  as  to  clear  ,t  on  every  side.  The  main  channel  between 
th  s  shoal  and  the  shore  to  the  northward  and  eastward  is  more  than  l 
mile  wide,  and  in  some  places  there  are  15  fathoms  water.  The  rate  of 
kn'ots     '  '  *'  '''"""^^'  *'**'™  ^^'^''  elsewhere,  does  not  exceed  2 

Supplies.— Fresh  provisions  can  be  obtained  at  Dalhousie 
Anchorage—The  best  anchorage  in  Dalhousie  Harbor  is  in  GA  or  7 
fathoms,  with  Dalhousie  Island  and  Bonami  Point  in  line 

Directions.-When  within  a  mile  or  two  of  Maguacha  Point,  bring 
summirof  tZ's'  ^'^^"'"^  *^«  Maguacha  Spit;  namely,  the  highest 
iZ!.      i      .  .^"^"''"•^"'^«  Mountains  open  to  the  SW.  of  Dalhousie 

h...n    1      !'  «w"'"'''.^  '^''''  ^•''"^  ^''"  ^«  ^^^^«"  the  Bonami  Rocks 
Oe..r  about  SW,,  and  are  distant  about  J  mile.     Then  haul  to  the 

nol"n?Tn  H  '  '*"  "!  '"  ""f "  '"  '^*'  ^^'P'"'  ""^'^  ^^•''"^  Point  (the  extreme 

point  to  the  westward  on  the  Xew  Brunswick  shore)  comes  just  open  to 

he  northward  of  Dalhousie  Island  and  of  the  islet  and  r^  ks    o    be 

wes  ward  ot  ,t  bearing  S.  80o  W.    Then,  if  wishing  to  enter  the  har- 

.ZX  ^no'u'™''       ;"'"'  **"  '^^  southward  of  the  Middle  Ground, 
steer  b.  SOo  W .  upon  those  leading  marks  until  near  Dalhousie  Island 
which  leave  to  the  southward  at  a  distance  of  200  yards,  an,l  the  ves- 
sel will  pass  safely  into  the  harbor. 

If  wishing  to  take  the  more  roomy  route  to  the  northward  of  the 
Middle  Ground,  instead  of  steering  S.  80o  W.  for  Lalime  Point,  as  soon 
as  It  opens  to  the  northward  of  the  island,  sheer  over  to  the  NE  until 
the  soundings  are  S  lathoms,  and  follow  thatdepth  round  to  the  north- 
ward and  westward  until  Dalhousie  Church  opens  out  to  the  westward 


DALHOUSIE    HARBOR — RESTIGOUCHE    RIVER. 


105 


tern  sIiIh  of  tbo 
Br  exteuils  from 
I  aiou^  its  edge 
b.vkeeiiiiigjust 
i  Harbor,  wbicli 

either  through 
romul  aiul  Dal- 
i  of  the  Miiiaie 
of  pAssiugover 
ken,  because  of 
first  mentioned 
ver,  the  ad  ran - 
ir. 

and  by  the  uar- 
iOi)  yards  wide. 
id  is  very  steep 
li  point.  There 
jasily  so  placed 
1  aim  el  between 

is  more  than  $ 
sr.  The  rate  of 
i  not  exceed  2 

ousie. 

jor  is  in  6J  or  7 

e. 

la  Point,  bring 

y,  the  highest 

of  Dalhousie 
'  or  8  fathonjs 
Boiiami  Rocks 
■n  Iiaul  to  the 
t  (the  extreme 
esjustopen  to 

rocks  to  the 
uter  tlie  har- 
ddle  Ground, 
lousie  Island, 

auil  the  ves- 

hward  of  the 
Point,  as  soon 
the  NE.  until 
to  the  north- 
tlie  westward 


of  the  island  bearing  S.  10°  W.  Then  steer  uj)  the  estuary,  until  Dal. 
bnusie  Church  appears  midway  between  Dalhousie  Iisland  and  the  islet 
to  the  westward  of  it,  bearing  S.  12°  K.  Steer  now  for  the  church, 
taking  care  not  to  bring  it  to  bear  to  the  southward  of  S.  12°  E.,  or 
with  the  two  churches  in  line,  the  vessel  will  pass  over  the  extensive 
3-fathon)s  flat,  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground,  into  the  harbor. 

Tides. — The  rate  of  the  tidal  streams  in  the  entrance  does  not  ex- 
ceed 2  knots. 

Restigouche  River,  from  its  entrance  at  Maguacha  Point,  varies  in 
breadth,  for  the  first  17  miles,  from  IJ  to  3  miles.  At  that  distance 
.Oampbelltown  is  situated  on  the  southern  or  New  Brunswick  shore, 
and  at  the  foot  of  a  remarkable  conical  mountain  called  the  Sugar 
Loaf.  Between  Campbelltown  and  Indian  Point,  on  the  northern  shore, 
the  breadth  of  the  estuary  is  only  ^  mile;  but  it  expands  again  to  IJ 
miles  at  its  head,  just  below  the  islands.  At  Indian  Point,  a  mile  above 
Oampbelltown.  the  navigation  for  shipping  ends,  there  being  only  12 
feet  in  a  narrow  channel  at  low  water ;  but  small  craft  may  ascend 
through  very  narrow  passages,  on  either  side,  carrying  from  6 1<»  9  feet 
water,  to  within  '^  mile  of  the  head  of  the  estuary  ;  where  the  Resti- 
gouche Kiver,  properly  so  called,  enters  it  through  narrow  channels 
between  the  islands,  21  miles  from  the  head  of  Chaleurs  Baj'. 

Off  Loup  River,  which  enters  a  bay  from  the  northern  shore  2  miles 
below  Oampbelltown,  there  is  a  shallow  part  of  the  channel  called  the 
bar,  over  which  there  is  not  more  than  1 4  or  14  feet  at  low  water ;  but 
the  tide,  which  rises  from  6  to  9  feet,  enables  vessels  of  moderate  draft 
to  ascend  to  Oampbelltown,  off  which  they  may  moor  in  from  3  to  3J 
fathoms  at  low  water.  Vessels  of  about  18  feet  draft  may  ascend 
at  all  times  of  the  tide  nearly  to  Oak  Point,  which  is  about  14  miles  up, 
and  within  a  mile  of  the  bar ;  and  larger  vessels  might  proceed  10  miles 
u|),  or  nearly  to  Guarde  Point,  with  assistance  of  buoys  and  a  good 
pilot. 

The  charts  and  directions  will  enable  the  seaman  to  take  his  vessel 
in  as  far  as  Dalhousie  Harbor,  or  the  anchorage  off  Fleurant  Point ; 
but  to  proceed  farther  up,  the  services  of  a  pilot  should  be  engaged,  for 
there  are  no  good  leading  marks  beyond  the  above  places,  where  the 
shoals  become  too  steep  for  the  lead  to  give  sufficient  warning,  and  the 
channels  too  narrow  for  a  large  ship. 

Anchorage. — The  most  convenient  amhorage  for  men  of-war,  or 
other  vessels  visiting  the  Restigouche  for  supplies  of  wood  or  water,  is 
off  Fleurant  Point  on  the  northern  shore,  and  about  2  miles  to  the  north- 
ward of  the  Harbor.  There  a  vessel  can  weigh  in  all  winds,  and  at  all 
times  of  tide ;  and  no  other  directions  are  necessary  than  to  anchor 
anywi.i're  off  the  point  in  6  or  7  fathoms  of  low  water.  There  is  a  tol- 
erably good  watering  place  at  a  brook  i  mile  to  the  westward  of  the 
point,  and  a  little  farther  westward  the  Mussel  Bank,  a  dangerous  reef, 
extends  out  from  the  high  cliffs,  nearly  halfway  across  tiie  estuary. 


106 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


Cascapediac  Bay  \n  of  considentble  extent,  being  L3  inileH  wide 
and  5  or  ((  inileH  deep.  At  its  lieud  is  the  Casitiipeilisic  River,  a  eonaid- 
entble  Htreain,  but  wiii(;li  can  only  l)e  entered  by  boats,  in  consequence 
of  the  extensive  shoals  of  sand  and  mud,  which  dry  out  2  miles  from  its 
entrance,  and  occupy  all  the  iiead  of  the  bay.  Black  Point,  bold  and 
rocky,  and  risinfj  400  feet  above  the  sea,  is  the  eastern  point  of  the  bay. 
The  shoals  commence  about  lA  miles  to  the  northward  of  Black  Point, 
and  at  Indian  Point,  on  the  east  side  of  Little  River,  they  extend  out 
to  the  westward  nearly  li{  miles,  sheltering;  the  anchorage  from  SE. 
winds. 

Duthie  Point,  the  east  point  of  entrance  of  the  Cascapediac  River, 
bears  N.  51  °  W.,  5  miles  from  lilack  Point.  One  mile  to  the  eastward 
of  Duthie  Point,  and  in  the  bay  between  it  and  Little  River,  stands 
the  church  and  village  of  Richmond. 

The  Settlements  on  the  western  side  of  the  bay  are  mostly  of  French 
Canadians  and  Acadians,  and  they  extend  alongshore  all  the  way  from 
the  river  to  Tr.'icadigash  I'oint,  which  is  the  west  point  of  the  bay.  lu 
rear  of  the  settlements  the  Carleton  mountain  range  will  be  seen  2  or 
3  miles  back  frouj  the  shore. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  in  Cascapediac  Bay,  where  the  timber 
ships  moor  in  3  fathoms,  is  off  Richmond  village,  with  Duthie  Point 
bear.ng  N.  23°  W.  f  mile,  the  church  N.  33°  E.,  and  Black  Point  S. 
57°  E.  Vessels  may  anchor  farther  out  in  4,  5,  or  G  fathoms,  but  they 
will  not  be  then  so  well  sheltered  from  easterly  winds. 

Directions. — In  running  for  this  anchorage  from  the  eastward,  ob- 
servt^  that  the  marks  for  the  southwestern  or  outer  edge  of  the  shoal 
oft'  Indian  Point  (already  mentioned  as  sheltering  the  anchorage  from 
•SK.  winds)  are  Red  Point  a  little  open  to  the  southward  of  Bliick 
Point,  bearing  S.  72°  E.  Keep  these  marks  therel'ore  well  open  as  the 
vessel  runs  to  the  westward  with  the  lead  going,  and  go  no  nearer  the 
shoal  than  the  depth  of  5  or  4  fathoms,  until  the  church  I)ears  N.  33°  B. 
Then  haul  boldly  in,  steering  directly  for  the  church  until  the  vessel 
is  at  the  anirliorage  already  pointed  out. 

Bonaventure  Point  is  formed  by  a  low  red  sandstone  clitt",  with  a 
thin  superstratum  of  sand  and  clay  containing  tertiary  shells.  The 
Bonaventure  River,  with  only  2  feet  over  its  bar  at  low  watei'.  together 
with  the  village  and  church  with  tall  spire  and  red  roof  of  the  same 
name,  will  be  seen  in  the  bay  2  or  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  point. 
A  rocky  sh(»al  extends  oft"  this  point  to  the  westward  fully  a  mile,  and 
continues  round  the  bay  to  the  northward  and  westward  nearly  to  Red 
Point,  a  distance  of  7  or  8  miles. 

In  the  bay  between  Red  and  Black  Points,  aud  ~>  miles  to  the  NW, 
of  the  former,  is  the  small  river  Caplin,  remarkable  only  for  a  reef 
whi(;h  lies  oft"  its  mouth  i  mile  from  the  shore. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  under  Bonaventure  Point, 
with  easterly  winds,  in  0  tathoms,  mud  bottom,  with  the  point  bearing 


i 


ii_. 


PA8PEBIAC    BAY — CARLISLE. 


107 


13  miles  wiile 
Kivor,  a  conaid- 
in  consequence 
2  miles  from  its 
Point,  bold  and 
>ointof  thebay. 
if  JMack  Point, 
:liey  extend  out 
iiage  from  SE. 

apediac  River, 

0  the  eastward 
i  River,  stands 

ostly  of  French 
II  the  way  from 
of  the  bay.  In 
ill  be  seen  2  or 

ere  the  timber 

1  Duthio  Point 
Black  Point  8 . 
loms,  but  they 

eastward,  ob- 
re  of  the  shoal 
nchorage  from 
\'»r(l  of  Black 
ell  open  as  the 

no  nearer  the 
ears  N.  S'io  E. 
ntil  the  vessel 

e  cliif,  with  a 
V  shells.  The 
atct',  toj^ether 
f  of  the  same 
d  of  the  point, 
ly  a  mile,  and 
nearly  to  Red 

s  to  the  NV7. 
ily  for  a  reef 

inture  Point, 
[)oint  bearing 


S.  74°  B..  the  church  N.  27°  E.,  and  the  entrance  of  the  river  N.  61° 
E.,  li  miles. 

Faspebiac  Bay.— Paspebiao  has  an  excellent  roadstead,  and  is  the 
princii»al  fishing  establishment  in  Chaleurs  Bay.  A  triangular  point  of 
sand  and  shingle  beach,  inclosing  a  lagoon,  extends  out  from  the  niaiii- 
laiid  to  the  distance  of  a  mile,  and  has  on  its  west  side  several  buildings 
together  witn  numerous  huts  belonging  to  the  fishermen.  On  the  west 
side  of  the  sandy  point,  and  close  to  the  cliffs,  the  lagoon  has  an  outlet, 
which  has  a  rough  bridge  across  it,  and  will  admit  boats  at  high  water. 
In  rear  of  this  the  mainland  rises  from  the  edge  of  dark  red  sandstone 
.cliffs.  , 

Carlisle,  the  county  town,  with  its  jail  and  court-house,  stan(iing  on 
the  ridge  in  rear  of  Carlisle  Point,  are  seen  from  the  anchorage.  Car- 
lisle Point,  which  is  wooded,  and  consists  of  sand,  is  distant  3*  miles 
from  the  sandy  point  of  Paspebiac,  and  the  roadstead  is  between  them, 
but  much  nearer  the  latter.  In  this  excellent  and  convenient  anchorage 
vessels  are  sheltered  from  the  west,  round  north  and  east,  to  SE.;  and, 
although  it  is  completely  o|)en  to  the  SW.  winds,  which  send  in  a  very 
considerable  swell,  yet  the  ground  is  so  good  that  the  Jersey  vessels 
ride  here  moored  all  through  the  season  without  accident. 

Anchorage.— The  best  anchorage  is  in  G  fathoms,  clay  bottom,  with 
Robin's  flagstaff",  the  most  eastern  one  adjacent  to  the  store  with  a  green 
verandah,  and  Single  Tree  Point  (the  extreme  to  the  eastward  seen  over 
the  sandy  point)  in  line,  liearing  N.  67°  E.  and  the  extremity  of  the  sandy 
point,  8.07°  B.  A  sandy  spit  extends  under  water  rather  more  than 
^  mile  to  the  westward  from  the  sandy  point  and  nearly  as  far  to  the 
southward  likewise;  it  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy  at  its  western  ex- 
treme. 

Supplies.— At  Paspebiac  there  is  an  excellent  watering  place  at  a 
stream  which  will  be  seen  falling  from  the  cliff's  just  to  the  westward 
of  tlie  outlet  of  the  lagoon.  Supplies  of  all  kinds  may  be  obtained  here, 
but  to  a  limited  extent. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  an  agent. 

Directions.— VVhen  the  vessel  has  passed  Nouvelle  River  and  is  ap- 
proacliing  within  2  or  3  miles  of  the  point,  keep  the  summit  of  Daniel 
Hill  open  to  the  southward  of  Nouvelle  Point,  bearing  N.  49°  B.,  until 
the  easternmost  church  is  seen  well  open  to  the  westward  of  tli<^  south 
extremity  of  the  sandy  point,  north.  Then  steer  for  Carlisle  Point, 
keeping  the  lead  going  till  Le  Boutellier'a  store  is  on  with  the  above- 
mentioned  church. 

Steer  in  now  for  the  anchorage,  taking  care  not  to  open  out  the  same 
church  to  the  westward  of  the  store  until  Single  Tree  Point  (the  extreme 
to  the  westward)  is  well  shut  in  behind  the  sandy  point,  when  the  ves- 
sel will  be  within  the  spit,  and  a  berth  may  be  chosen  by  the  lead,  or 
by  a  bearing  of  the  lighthouse,  at  or  near  the  position  already  pointed 
out. 


ftC^^^^t^r^-^^SSjis-"'  ' 


\% 


V 


108 


MIRAMICHI    BAY   TO    OKEEN    ISLAND. 


>! 


Nouvelle  River,  5  mik>s  eastward  uf  Paspebiac  Point,  Iuih  only  2 
feet  over  itH  bar  at  low  water,  and  will  be  known  by  tbe  ti8h  Htorea  and 
stages  on  1  he  sandy  bead'  on  the  east  ijide  ot  its  entrance.  Tbe  west- 
ern side  is  formed  by  Nouvelle  Point,  wbich  is  a  higb  cliff  of  red  sand- 
stone. 

Port  Daniel  is  a  tine  bay,  o|)en  to  tbe  eastward,  and  about  H  miles 
wide  and  deep.  In  the  nortberu  corner  of  tbe  bay,  ^  mile  witbin  Wbite 
Point,  which  is  high  and  of  wbite  limestone,  a  small  river  enters. tbe 
bay  through  a  sandy  beacb  after  descending  a  valley  between  wooded 
bills.  There  are  many  liouses  and  stores  near  tbe  entrance  of  tbe  river, 
wbich  will  oidy  admit  boats  at  higb  water,  being  nearly  dry  when  tbe 
tide  is  out. 

A  shoal  extends  !^  mile  from  the  shore  all  around  tbe  port  south- 
westward  from  White  Point  to  West  Point.  West  Point  is  of  craggy 
gray  limestone,  with  a  high  and  remarkable  semi-isolated  rock  at  its 
SE.  extremity ;  on  its  north  side  there  is  a  small  cove  and  a  good  laud- 
ing for  boats.  Daniel  Hill,  about  one  mile  to  the  westward  of  West 
Point,  an<l  rising  400  feet  above  the  sea,  is  remarkable  as  the  highest 
land  close  to  the  shore  on  this  part  of  the  coast.  It  serves  to  point  out 
the  situation  of  Port  Daniel,  as  does  also  Reddish  Point,  which  often 
appears  like  an  island  close  to  the  shore. 

The  points  in  order  westward  from  Macquereau  Point,  and  between 
it  and  tbe  river,  are  Reddish  Point,  Pillar  Point,  and  Wbite  Point, 
which  will  all  be  easily  recognized,  tbe  first  and  last  by  their  color  and 
the  other  by  a  remarkable  rock  close  off  its  extremity.  The  ground  is 
not  good  outside  the  line  joining  Pillar  and  West  Points. 

Supplies  of  wood  and  water  may  be  obtained  at  Port  Daniel,  but 
fresh  provisions  are  not  plentiful. 

Anchorage. — Tbe  best  anchorage  in  Port  Daniel  is  in  6  or  7  fathoms, 
mud  or  clay  bottom,  in  tbe  line  between  Wbite  and  West  Points,  with 
the  entrance  of  tbe  river  N.  28°  W.,  and  Reddish  Point  and  Macquereau 
Point  in  one  bearing  N.  74°  B.  Strong  SE.  winds  roll  in  a  heavy 
swell,  but  there  is  no  ditflculty  in  getting  out  on  their  approach,  for 
the  points  are  all  bold,  and  in  standing  out  or  in  vest^'els  may  safely 
pass  West  Point  at  the  distance  of  400  yards. 

Macquereau  Point  is  of  bold  and  dark-colored  craggy  rocks.  It  is 
also  wooded,  and  rises  to  about  200  feet  above  the  sea. 

Newport,  situated  S  W.  3^  miles  from  Great  Pabos,  and  6  miles  NE. 
of  Macquereau  l^oiut,  is  another  fishing  place,  where  a  small  vessel  or 
two  may  be  moored  (under  shelter  of  a  shoal  and  at  some  risk)  to  take 
in  fish  during  tbe  summer  months. 

Grand  and  Little  Pabos  are  fishing  places  fit  only  for  boats  or  very 
small  craft.  There  is  but  a  foot  of  water  over  the  bar  of  tbe  latter  at 
low  tide,  and  ordinary  springs  do  not  rise  over  5  feet.  Great  Pabos, 
which  is  a  similar  but  much  larger  place,  had  5  feet  over  its  bar  at  low 
water  when  it  was  surveyed,  but  the  depth  and  situation  of  the  very 
narrow  channel  change  with  easterly  gales. 


UiL^_ 


lint,  has  only  2 
I  tish  Htorea  and 
nee.  The  west- 
lift'  of  red  sand- 

I  abont  U  miles 
le  within  White 
iver  enters  the 
etween  wooded 
lice  of  the  river, 
r  dry  when  the 

the  port  south- 
int  is  of  craggy 
ted  rock  at  its 
ud  a  good  laud- 
tward  of  West 
as  the  highest 
res  to  point  out 
It,  which  often 

t,  and  between 

I  White  Point, 

their  color  and 

The  ground  is 

). 

rt  Daniel,  but 

or  7  fathoms, 
It  Points,  with 
d  Macquereau 

1  in  a  heavy 
approach,  for 
Is  may  safely 

rocks.    It  iB 

1 6  miles  NE. 

aall  vessel  or 

risk)  to  take 

boats  or  very 

the  latter  at 

[xreat  Pabos, 

ts  bar  ac  low 

of  the  very 


CAPE    DESPOIR — MAL    HAY. 


109 


Grand  River,  7  miles  westward  of  Cape  d'Esi)oir,  is  a  consiiU'rablo 
stream,  but  has  only  li  foet  at  low  water  over  its  bar.  There  is  a  vil- 
lage and  a  considerable  fishing  establishment  there,  and  inimediati'Iy 
to  the  westward  of  the  river  a  shoal  extends  fully  A  mile  out  from  the 
Hliore. 

Cape  d'Espoir,  the  NE.  point  of  Chalenrs  Bay,  consists  of  red  sand- 
stone (ilitts,  without  beach,  and  of  a  moderate  height  above  the  sea. 

Leander  8hoal,  lying  SE.  distant  rather  more  than  l.\  miles  from 
Cape  d'Espoir,  is  about  \  mile  in  diameter,  and  has  1(»  feet  least  water 
on  one  spot,  which,  however,  it  is  very  ditticult  to  find.  It  is  a  rocky 
shoal,  and  there  is  a  clear  passage  between  it  and  the  cape.  White 
Head,  in  line  with  the  inner  or  NW.  end  of  Perce  Uock,  leads. just  out- 
side of  the  shoal.  From  a  half  to  the  whole  of  the  Perce  Hock,  shut  in 
behind  the  White  Head,  will  lead  clear  between  the  shoal  ami  Cape 
d'Espoir. 

Bonaventure  Islrnd  has  bold  and  perpendicular  clitt's  of  red  sand- 
stone and  conglomerate  on  all  sides  excepting  the  west.  Iti  the  ledges 
and  fissures  of  those  clifts  are  innumerable  gannets.  From  the  west 
side  .shoal  waterextends  to  the  distance  of  i  mile,  and  there  is  anchor- 
age in  J 5  fathoms  between  it  and  White  Head,  but  the  riding  is  inse- 
cure and  heavy  in  bad  weather.  The  channel  between  Bonaventure 
Island  and  Perc6  Rock  is  free  from  danger. 

Fercd  Bay.— Perc6  Rock  is  precii)itous  all  round  and  bold  to  sea- 
ward, and  has  two  large  holes  w>nch  have  been  perforated  through  it 
by  the  waves  and  through  one  of  which  a  boat  can  pass  at  high  water. 
Between  this  rock  and  White  Head  is  the  Bay  of  Perc6,  having  a  reef 
at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  to  the  SW.  of  Perc6  Rock  and  extending  out 
nearly  ^  mile  from  the  shore.  Small  vessels  engaged  in  the  fisheries 
anchor  on  either  side  of  this  reef,  with  winds  off  the  land,  but  it  is  a 
dangerous  place  and  not  to  be  recommended  for  large  vessels. 

Percd,  principally  inhabited  by  persons  engaged  in  the  fisheries, 
occupies  the  shores  of  the  bay,  and  Mont  Perc4,  or,  as  it  is  sometimes 
calleil,  the  Table  Roulante,  rises  immediately  from  it.  A  reef  connects 
the  Perce  Rock  with  Perc4  Point,  and  off  the  NB.  side  of  the  latter 
small  vessels  anchor  with  westerly  winds. 

Tides — There  is  generally  a  regular  tide  of  flood  and  ebb  of  about 
a  knot  between  Bonaventure  Island  and  the  mainland  ;  the  flood  tide 
running  to  the  SW.  round  Cape  d'Espoir  and  up  the  Bay  of  Chaleurs; 
and  the  ebb  in  the  contrary  direction .  Two  or  3  miles  outside,  or  to 
the  eastward  of  Bonaventure  Islaiul,  the  current  will  often  be  found 
running  to  the  southward  out  of  the  St.  Lawrence. 

Mai  Bay  is  between  5  and  6  miles  wide  by  4  miles  deep  and  entirely 
open  to  the  SE.  On  its  SW.  side,  and  under  the  Perc6  Mountains, 
there  are  maguificent  cliffs  6C«  feet  in  perpendicular  heiglit  above  tlie 
sea.  Its  NE.  side  has  low  clifts  of  samlstoue,  with  occasional  beaches. 
A  fine  broad  sandy  beach  extends  across  the  head  of  the  bay  and 


I 


t 

"A 


i! 


no 


MIRAMICHI    HAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


indoHes  a  Hhallow  lagoon.  A  cousidorable  river  and  Heveral  Hinall 
8tr(MraH  (ILsKhurtj^e  tlieir  waters  into  tlie  lajijoon,  wliiuli  lias  an  ontlet  in 
the  NVV.  corner  of  the  bay,  called  the  Tickle,  admitting  boats  't  high 
water  and  in  line  weather.  Th<?re  is  anchorage  all  round  the  shores  of 
Mai  Bay,  but  as  a  heavy  sea  and  thick  fog  often  precede  a  SK.  gale 
and  render  it  ditlicnlt  for  a  vessel  to  beat  out  it  can  not  be  rec^om- 
mended.  An  open  cove  or  small  bay  is  formed  on  the  NK.  side,  iu 
which  a  vessel  can  be  occasionally  moored  close  to  the  shore  and  in  3 
fathoms  water,  but  this  is  of  no  use  for  the  general  purposes  of  navi- 
gation. 

Gasp6  Bay. — St.  Peter  I'oint,  the  south  point  of  Gaspe  Hay,  is  of 
low  sandstone  and  thickly  covered  with  the  white  houses  of  the  Hsher- 
men.  Flat  Kock,  lying  about  8UU  yards  off  the  point,  is  small,  low, 
and  of  sandstone.  There  is  a  clear  chauuel  between  tlie  island  and  the 
point,  but  no  good  anchorage;  for  although  vessels  occasionally  anchor 
to  the  northward  of  the  island,  yet  the  ground  is  so  foul  that  there  is 
great  danger  of  losing  au  anchor  from  its  hooking  the  rocks. 

Gaspd  Bay  contains  an  excellent  outer  roadstead  off  Douglastown, 
a  harbor  at  its  head,  capable  of  holding  a  numerous  Heet  in  {terfect 
safety,  and  a  basin  where  large  ships  might  be  hove  down  and  retltted. 

American  Bank  is  reported  by  the  local  fishermen  to  have  a  least 
depth  of  5  fathoms;  this  bank  is  situated  with  Cape  Gasp6  lighthouse, 
bearing  N.  52°  W.,  distant  11  miles. 

Cape  Gasp6  is  a  remarkable  headland  of  limestone,  having  on  its 
NE.  side  a  range  of  cliffs,  which  rise  from  the  sea  to  the  height  of  692 
feet.  The  Flower  pot  Rock  lies  close  off  the  SB.  extremity  of  the  cape; 
it  is  still  visible,  the  sea  washing  over  it  only  at  high  water.  16  is 
sometimes  called  the  "Ships  Head,"  at  others  the  "Old  Woman,"  by 
the  fishermen,  and  is  so  bold  that  vessels  may  haul  round  it  into  Gasp^ 
Bay  within  the  distance  of  J  mile.  Boats  may  pass  between  it  and 
the  cape  when  there  is  no  surf.  The  cliffs  within  the  bay  are  very 
much  lower  than  those  on  the  outside  of  the  cape. 

At  Grande  Gr6ve,  3^  miles  within  Cape  Oasp^,  the  ridge  of  land 
dips  and  narrows,  so  that  there  is  a  portage  across  it,  leading  to  the 
settlements  at  Cape  Rosier.  On  the  NW.  side  of  the  portage  a  range 
of  mountains  commences,  and  they  continue  along  the  NE.  side  of  Gasp^ 
Bay  and  the  NW.  Arm. 

Anchorage. — The  NE.  side  of  Gasp^  Bay  is  thickly  covered  with  the 
houses  of  the  fishermen,  for  a  distance  of  5  miles  within  Cape  Gasp6; 
the  principal  fishing  establishments  belonging,  as  at  Perc6,  to  Jersey 
merchants.  There  is  an  anchorage  with  good  holding  ground,  but  in 
not  less  than  17  fathoms,  except  within  ^  mile  of  the  shore  abreast  of 
St.  George  Cove,  Grande  Gr6ve,  and  Ijittle  Gaspd.  The  word  cove  is, 
however,  inappropriately  applied  to  any  part  of  the  shore  between 
Grande  Greve  and  the  cape,  for  though  there  are  fishing  establishments 
there  are  no  coves  whatever. 


(JAMPfc    BAY    AND    BASIN. 


Ill 


I  Revernl  Hiiiall 
liis  nil  outlet  in 
f  boiits  "t  liigli 
nl  tli«  shores  of 
cede  A  Shj.  gale 
1  not  be  reoom- 
lie  NR.  aide,  iu 
shore  and  in  3 
rposes  of  navi- 

ispo  Bay,  is  of 
!S  of  the  Hsher- 
;,  i»  Hinall,  low, 
)  island  and  the 
sionally  anchor 
I  that  there  is 
ock8. 

['  Douglastown, 
tieet  in  perfect 
vn  and  reiltted. 
to  have  a  least 
.sp<^  lighthouse, 

having  on  its 
I  height  of  692 
ty  of  the  cape; 
water.  It  is 
1  Woman,"  by 
d  it  into  Gasp^ 
i)etween  it  and 

bay  are  very 

ridge  of  land 
eadiug  to  the 
3rtage  a  range 
.  side  of  Gaspd 

vered  with  the 
Cape  Gaspfi ; 
rc6,  to  Jersey 
ground,  but  in 
ore  abreast  of 
word  cove  is, 
jhore  between 
stablishinents 


Seal  Rock  is  the  only  detnchtMl  danger  on  this  sidr  tli«'  buy.  The 
length  of  this  ie«'f,  from  the  depth  of  ,i  fatlioms  to  .i  fathoms,  and  in  a 
diri'ction  parallel  to  the  shore,  is  ^  mile;  and  its  bn-adtli  \  mil*'.  The 
least  water  is  4  feet,  and  there  are  '.^  hithoms  between  it  and  the  shore. 
When  on  the  outer  edge  of  the  rocks,  Cape  Itrnle  is  in  line  with  the 
next  elitly  point  up  the  bay,  bearing  N.  OOo  W. 

Coast— The  8W.  shore  of  (hispc''  iJay  from  St.  I'eter  Point  to  Doug 
lastown,  a  distance  of  lli  miles,  preseiits  a  succession  of  preciiiitous 
headlands,  rising  to  the  height  of  'JdO  feet  ai)ove  the  sea     The  shoals 
extending  out  into  the  bay  are  too  steep  for  the  lead  to  give  warning. 

Douglastown  is  a  village  of  tishermeii  and  farmers,  standing  lui  the 
rising  ground  at  the  south  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  river  St.  .John. 

Cape  IJaldimand,  2  miles  northward  of  Douglas,  is  a  bliitf  point  of 
cliff,  and  the  southeastern  termination  of  the  range  of  hills  which  sep- 
arates the  harbor,  basin,  and  SW.  Arm,  from  the  valley  of  the  river 
St.  John. 

Water  may  be  obtained  by  ascending  the  river  St.  John  to  the  isl- 
ands, a  distance  of  2  miles.  In  the  siding  of  the  year  there  is  often  a 
depth  of  0  feet  in  the  entrance  of  this  river,  which  is  between  two  points 
of  sand  ;  and  there  are  12  feet  in  the  narrow  channel  for  some  distance 
within.    At  the  islands  the  river  becomes  shallow  and  rapid. 

Anchorage.— The  roadstead  off  the  town  of  Douglas  is  extensive  ; 
vessels  may  anchor  in  any  part  of  it,  and  in  any  depth  from  (Mo  11 
fathoms,  over  sand  and  clay  bottom  ;  but  the  best  berth  is  in  7  fathoms, 
off"  the  entrance  of  the  river  St.  John.  The  riding  is  much  less  heavy 
in  southeasterly  winds  than  might  be  expected  ;  and,  as  the  ground  is 
excellent  for  holding,  a  vessel  may  safely  anchor  here  during  the  sum- 
mer  months. 

Gaspe  Harbor.— Sandy  Beach  Point  makes  out  to  the  northward. 
It  is  a  low  and  narrow  point  of  sand,  convex  to  seaward,  on  which  side 
the  water  deepens  gradually  for  a  distance  of  nearly  J  mile ;  on  the 
inside  it  is  as  bold  as  a  wall.  The  water  deepens  immediately  outside 
of  3  fathoms,  all  along  the  outside  of  Sandy  Beach  Point,  and  also  off 
its  north  extremity  ;  so  that  it  is  both  dangerous  and  difficult  to  beat 
in  or  out  of  the  harbor  at  night. 

Peninsula — To  the  northward  of  Sandy  Beach  Point,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  nearly  a  mile,  is  the  Peninsula,  which  is  a  low  sand,  covered 
with  spruce  trees.  The  narrowest  part  of  the  entrance  to  the  harbor 
is  850  yards  wide  from  the  depth  of  3  fathoms  to  3  fathoms,  and  has  a 
depth  of  upwards  of  11  fathoms  in  the  center. 

Gaspd  Basin. — The  harbor  is  divided  into  the  NW.  and  SW.  Arms. 
The  NW.  Arm  has  deep  water  for  nearly  3  miles  above  the  Peninsula, 
and  continues  navigable  for  keeled  boats  about  3  miles  farther,  where 
the  Dartmouth  River  enters  the  arm  between  Marsh  and  Meadow 
Islands. 

SW.  Arm.— The  entrance  of  the  SW.  Arm  is  about  360  yards  wide. 


■I 

ji 


112 


MIUAMICIII    KAY    TO    UKEKN    IHLANU. 


i  :: 


ami  iM^twcicii  two  HiiiHly  pointH,  but  tlie  iiavipible  channel,  which  is 
buoyiMl,  JH  cdiitractiMl  by  hIiouIh  on  citliur  Hide  to  about  V2{)  yanlH;  and 
'21  t'(>«>t  of  water  ean  be  carried  in  niid-cliannel.  The  deep-water  part  of 
the  8\V.  Ann,  which  continucH  for  ^  mile  within  the  entramtc,  \h  named 
(iaspe  Hasin  ;  it  Iuih  a  depth  of  tVom '» tolM'atlioniH,  over  a  mud  bottom, 
and  is  sntllcicntly  capacious  to  hold  a  great  nnud)er  of  veNsels.  Boats 
can  ascenti  HW.  Arm  by  a  narrow  channel,  between  shoals,  about  S 
miles,  as  in  the  NW.  Arm,  and  tlie  navigation,  for  all  but  canoes  or  tiat- 
b«>ttom  boats,  is  termimited  by  shallow  channels.  Above  this  part  of 
the  river  it  becomes  contracted  and  rapid,  and  the  water  fresh. 

Supplies. — A  small  rivulet  in  the  bay,  on  the  inside  of  the  south 
point  of  the  entramu*  of  <ras|)6  Hasin,  \n  the  nu)Ht  convenient  watering 
place  in  the  harbor.  Most  «)f  the  families,  as  well  as  those  of  the  NNV. 
Arm  and  the  harbor  generally,  are  farmers,  but  several  of  them  are 
also  (Migaged  in  the  whale  llshery,  which  they  prosecute  in  sunill  schoon- 
ers. The  cud  tishery  is  carried  on  by  the  peoph^  of  the  bay  outside, 
for  the  most  part  in  connection  with  the  Jersey  merchants. 

'I'he  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul. 

Tides. — There  are  regular  but  weak  streams  of  Hood  and  ebb  in  th? 
entrances  of  the  harbor  and  basin.  In  the  bay  the  streams  of  the  Hum 
are  so  irregular  that  nothing  certain  can  be  said  res])ectiiig  then). 
They  are,  however,  usually  almost  imperceptible,  excepting  near  the 
shores,  and  even  there  they  are  80  weak  as  to  be  of  little  or  no  conse- 
qiience  to  a  vessel. 

Caution. — The  current  down  the  St.  Lawrence  runs  strongly  past 
Cape  Gaspe  over  towards  Flat  Rock,  especially  during  the  ebb  tide, 
which  often  increases  its  rate  to  2  knots,  and  this  should  he  remembered 
by  vessels  making  GaHi)6  Hay  with  a  northerly  wind.  This  current, 
when  it  meets  the  swell  which  so  often  prevails  from  the  south  and  SK., 
causes  a  high,  short,  and  breaking  sea,  all  along  the  coast  from  above 
Cape  Hosier  to  Cape  Gaspe,  and  extending  across  the  entrance  of 
Gasi)(!'  Bay.  When  the  wind  is  light  a  vessel  becomes  quite  unmanage- 
able in  this  sea,  and  it  is  extremely  dangerous  to  be  caught  in  it,  close 
to  the  shore,  by  a  light  breeze  on  the  land. 

Winds. — In  tine  summer  weather  there  is  often  a  sea  breeze  blow- 
ing right  up  Gaspe  Bay  from  about  9  a.  m.  until  sunset.  At  such  times 
there  is  generally  a  light  land  breeze  at  night  down  the  arms,  which 
often  extends  for  several  niiles  out  into  the  bay.  In  the  outer  part 
of  the  bay,  however,  it  will  generally  befouud  tobecalm,  even  at  times 
when  a  fresh  breeze  is  blowing  outside  Cape  Gaspe  and  Point  St.  Peter. 
The  wind  at  sea  on  such  occasions  is  generally  from  the  SW. 

Aspect  of  Coast. — The  bold  and  high  coast  between  Cape  Gasp6 
and  Cape  Chatte,  a  distance  of  117  miles,  will  require  only  a  brief 
notice,  as  it  is  free  from  danger — with  the  exception  of  Serpent  Reef — 
and  destitute  of  harbors.  The  mountains  everywhere  approach  the 
shore,  which  is  steej)  and  rocky,  displaying  cliffs,  often  of  great  height, 


^Jas-j*^u».jf4v-M<ww(»BW>afe'«»!i80!ia»Ma»B>5t^^ 


CAPE    R08IKH — IRIOATK    POINT. 


11.-? 


iniml,  wliicli  Ih 
120  yanlH;  and 
i|»-wat»M'  part  of 
raiMH*,  '\H  naiiKMi 
a  iiiiul  bottom, 

VUHMt'ls.      HoatM 

Hlioals,  about  3 
t  caiioiis  or  Hat- 
>vo  tliiH  part  of 
r  fresh. 

0   of  tllM   HOUtb 

iniont  watering 
)He  (»f  the  NW. 
'al  of  tliein  are 
II  Hiiiall  Ncbooii- 
he  bay  outHide, 

lt8. 

and  ebb  in  th? 
iiiiH  of  the  tiuOK 
spectinpf  theiD. 
ptiiig  near  the 
e  or  no  couHe- 

Htrongly  past 

the  ebb  tide, 

be  remembered 

This  current, 

8oath  and  SE., 

at  from  above 

le  entrance  of 

iiiteunmanage- 

gbt  in  it,  close 

breeze  blow- 

At  such  times 
e  arms,  which 
he  outer  part 

even  at  times 
»oint  St.  Peter. 
SW. 

Cape  Gasp^ 
e  only  a  brief 
erpent  Reef — 
approach  the 

great  heigbt, 


aiitl  witlioiit  iM'ach.  After  heavy  rains,  waterfalls,  which  are  not  to  bti 
MfiMi  at  other  times,  descend  from  great  heiglits,  and  small  bays,  willi 
sandy  beach  and  rapid  streams  at  their  head,  occur  occasionally;  yet 
these  features  are  not  generally  so  strongly  marked  as  to  enable  a 
stranger  to  make  out  one  part  of  this  (;oast  from  another  with  facility. 

Caution. — Along  the  coast  between  (Jape  (tasp*\  and  (Jape  Oliatte 
the  water  is  everywhere  too  deep  to  afford  snlllcieiit  warning  by  the  lca(t 
for  the  safety  of  vessels.  The  shore  along  its  whole  extent,  excepting 
in  some  of  the  bays,  is  of  highly  inclined  slate  and  graywacke  rocks, 
which  wonhl  cut  through  a  vessel's  l>otto!n  in  a  very  short  time;  and 
HU(!li  is  the  iiatiir"  of  the  (Miuiitry  that  those  who  might  es(  ape  to  shore 
would  run  a  great  risk  of  peiisliiiig  from  want  before  they  could  reach 
a  settlement. 

Cape  Rosier  is  low,  and  of  graywacktt  and  slate  rocks.  The  shoal 
water  does  not  extend  oil'  it  above  )^  mile,  but  in  the  bay  to  the  south- 
ward of  it,  at  the  distance  of  1]  miles,  there  is  a  reef  which  runs  out 
A  mile  from  the  shore.  Vessels  may  Mud  shelter  under  Cape  {{osier 
from  NW.  winds,  but  the  ground  is  not  very  good,  and  the  easterly 
swell  that  frequently  rolls  in  renders  it  a  dangerous  anchorage.  There 
are  tlshing  establishments  on  the  cape  and  in  its  vicinity. 

OrifBn  Cove  and  River. — A  small  bay  here  atlbrds  shelter  to  thu 
boats  of  the  fishermen,  whose  houses  will  be  seen  around  it.  There 
are  from  2  to  .'5  fathoms  water  in  this  bay,  over  sandy  bottom. 

Supplies. — This  bay  is  of  no  use  to  shijiping,  e\(!ept  to  obtain  sup- 
plies of  water,  wood,  and  occasionally  fresh  provisions. 

Pox  River  is  u  mere  brook,  which  enters  a  small  bay  about  J{  mile 
wide  and  J  mile  deep.  Oft"  each  point  of  the  bay  there  are  reefs, 
which  diminish  the  breadth  of  the  entrance  to  less  than  i  mile  and 
afford  shelter  to  boats  and  to  small  schooners  in  from  2  to  2|V  fathoms, 
over  a  bottom  of  fine  dark  sanil.  Round  the  head  of  the  bay  there  is 
a  flue  sandy  beach. 

Supplies. — In  fine  summer  wesither  a  vessel  might  anchor  off  Fox 
River  and  obtain  water,  wood,  and  supplies  of  fresh  provisions,  but  it 
is  otherwise  of  no  use  to  shipping. 

Serpent  Reef,  the  only  danger  on  this  coast,  extends  from  Fox 
Point  to  Cape  Serpent,  its  outer  edge  being  nowhere  more  than  J  mile 
from  the  shore. 

G-reat  Pond  is  a  small  creek  which  affords  shelter  only  to  boats, 
and  will  be  known  by  the  houses  and  stages  of  the  fishermen.  The 
creek  is  16  miles  from  Fox  River,  and  here,  as  well  aa  in  every  other 
cove  along  this  coast  to  the  westward,  are  seen  the  neat  houses  of  the 
Canadian  fishermen,  by  wliich  the  bays  are  so  distinctly  marked  that 
a  ship's  position  in  clear  weather  may  easily  be  determined  by  bear, 
ingsof  them,  and  of  the  beacons  on  the  coast. 

Prigate  Point  is  marked  by  a  white  beacon  38  feet  high.     It  may  also 
be  recognized  by  a  conspicuous  waterfall  west  of  the  point. 
5489 8 


I)' 


^^^^V«e^J^»:*di'^^i^ 


-  :if4:'«^  ■iaiiiRlESio.rf.Vc  ■  .M;5*>r.--  ■ 


114 


MIHAMU'III    HAY    TO    GRKKN    INLAND. 


Magdalen  Rivor.— TItf  moiitli  ol'  tliis  rivor  in  on  tliu  NW.  Hide 
of  II  Hiiixly  Way,  liiul  cIuhu  uii«lor  (7a|M>  Msi^<liiliMi,  wliicli  Ih  rocky,  with 
uliirs  of  iiioiloniu^  lu'l^iit,  iukI  jiits  ttiit  ii  \(«ry  HJiort  (liMtiinctt  t'roiii  u 
mmn^  of  liilLs  wiiicli  tonus  tiu^  v.oAHt  lino.  A  ruel  of  lociis,  wliicli  in 
dry  ill  piirt  at  low  wutur,  cxtoiidH  t'roiii  Oapi^  MiiK<laluii,  alioiit  100 
yarils  to  tlit^  8H.,  paraliul  to  the.  coast,  and  sludtcrs  tlio  viitraticu 
of  tiic  rivi'r  iVoin  northerly  winds.  Tim  river  is  M)  yards  wide  at  tlie 
(•iitraii«M',  witli  a  dcptli  of  7  luut  at  low  water.  VVitliiii,  for  a  sliort  dis- 
tance, tliere  are  10  feet  over  u  clean  bottom  of  line  sand.  Fartlu-r  up 
the  river  heeoiiies  shallow  and  rapid. 

At  HpriiiK  tides  13  feet  water  can  be  carried  into  this  river,  wliiiili  is 
occasionally  visited  by  sciiooners  of  30  to  80  tons.  Tliey  warp  in  wiieii 
the  sea  Ih  smooth  and  the  weather  tine.  The  bay  is  not  deep,  bein^r 
merely  a  gentle  curve  with  a  sandy  beach  for  about  a  mile  to  the  SH. 
of  the  river.  Vessels  may  anchor  herein  7  fathoms,  over  a  bottom 
of  8nnd,  tine  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  at  the  distance  of  '^  mile 
from  the  sandy  Ixmch.  It  is  only  a  tine- weather  anchorage,  which  may 
be  of  use  to  vessels  wanting  wood  and  water. 

During  two  occasions  a  regular  alternation  of  the  stream  of  flood 
and  ebb  was  oliserved.  The  flood  extended  about;  1^  miles  from  the 
shore,  running  one  knot,  and  at  the  line  of  jiinutiou  with  the  almost 
constant  downward  current  there  was  a  strong  ripple. 

Pleureuae  Point  is  marked  by  a  white  beacon,  38  feet  high. 

Mont  Louis  River  is  liO  yards  wide  at  the  entrance,  and  capable 
only  of  admitting  a  small  boat  at  low  water.  There  are  7  feet  in  the 
entrance  at  high  water,  and  for  a  sliort  distance  within. 

The  small  bay,  with  sandy  beaoh  at  its  head,  into  which  this  river 
falls,  is  a  mile  wide  and  nearly  ]{  mile  deep.  Vessels  may  anchor  in  it 
during  fine  weather,  in  from  8  to  10  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  nearer  the 
west  than  the  east  side.  The  holding  ground  is  excellent  but  since 
a  vessel  ought  not  to  be  distant  more  than  000  yards  from  the  west 
side  of  the  bay,  there  is  not  much  room  to  work  out,  and  therefore  it 
would  be  dangerous  for  a  large  vessel  to  be  caught  there  by  a  wind  on 
the  land.  Small  vessels,  or  ships  having  occasion  to  stop  for  a  few 
hours  for  wood  or  water,  may  safely  anchor  there  in  fine  weather,  and 
will  find  shelter  in  southerly  winds. 

Mont  Louis  Uiver  may  be  thus  recognized  :  In  a  vessel  off  this  part 
of  the  coast,  four  well-marked  openings  will  be  seen  in  the  high  laud 
in  a  space  of  10  miles.  The  eastern  opeuing  is  Grande  Matte  or  Pleur- 
euae River,  the  next  westward  is  Mont  Louis  River,  and  the  two  others 
Claude  and  Pierre  Rivers.  None  of  them  att'ord  good  anchorage  ex. 
ceptiug  Mont  Louis. 

St  Anne  Mountains.— Westward  of  Cape  St.  Auue  the  mountaius 
begin  to  recede  a  little  from  the  shore  and  to  diminish  in  height.  There 
is,  however,  another  range  of  mountaius  in  the  rear  of  the  coast,  uamed 
the  St.  Auue  or  Sbickshoc  Mountains,  which  can  be  seen  from  a  dis- 


^•sS^RMil 


.)g>lK,,a^JL-l^u^^3^l^aBahwgl^(a^^a«i»^l>ww>i8tt^^MB^^  . 


»  the  NW.  Mitl« 
li  Im  I'orkj,  with 
(liMtiiiKu^  t'roiii  It 
r«)cks,  whirh  Ih 
lulcii,  alioiit  100 
US  the  iMitnuico 
iViU  wide  lit  tliu 
I,  for  a  Hhort  *liH- 
iiid.     Fartlu'r  ui» 

is  river,  whiiiii  is 
ey  wiirp  in  when 
not  deep,  Itcint; 
I  mile  to  the  Sli. 
,  over  u  bottom 
itiince  of  H  mile 
:)rage,  which  may 

)  Htream  of  tlootl 

.^  miles  from  the 

with  the  almost 

feet  high, 
jice,  and  capable 
are  7  feet  in  the 
u. 

which  this  river 

may  anchor  in  it 

)ttoni,  nearer  the 

cellent  but  since 

8  from  the  west, 

and  therefore  it 

ere  by  a  wind  ou 

sto])  for  a  few 

ne  weather,  and 

Hsel  off  this  part 
lu  the  high  laud 
Matte  or  Pleur  • 
id  the  two  others 
)d  anchorage  ex. 

e  the  mountains 
in  height.  There 
the  coast,  named 
seen  from  a  dis- 


8T.   ANNE    MOUNTAINH — MAlANK    UIVER. 


tance  of  HO  to  00  miles,  under  favorable  (tircnmstances;  and  their  high- 
est peak,  wiiieh  is  alMiiit  14  miieM  iteiiind  Cape  Chatte,  rises  .'t,070  feet 
abovt>  sea. 

St  Anne  River,  which  is  <t  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  high  cape 
of  the  same  name,  :u)d  10  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Cape  Chatte,  can  be 
entered  Ity  snmll  selin  )ners  at  high  water.  The  entrance  is  dilllenlt  to 
a  stranger-.  A  large  KXik  above  water  divides  it  into  two  very  narrow 
channels,  through  which  a  rapid  (turretit  almost  always  runs.  It  flows 
into  the  sea  through  the  sandy  beach  of  u  bay  which  affords  very  indif- 
ferent anchorage,  the  depth  of  water  being  too  great,  ex(!eptiiig  at  a 
less  distance  Irom  the  shore  than  would  be  consideretl  prudent  for  any 
but  small  vessels. 

Supplies  of  provisions  can  in  general  bo  obtained,  and  also  at  Chatte 
River. 

Beacon. — A  beacon,  painted  white,  and  38  feet  high,  is  placed  a  lit- 
tle westward  of  Anne  Point. 

Chatte  River,  '2'1  miles  eastward  of  Capo  Chatte,  enters  between 
large  bowlders  a  small  sandy  bay,  affording  no  anchorage  for  ships; 
and  admits  small  schooners  with  ditllculty  at  high  water.  The  east 
point  of  this  bay,  2  miles  eastward  of  the  river,  is  a  low  spit  with  a  reef 
otf  it  ^  mile.  8mall  coasting  schooners  occasionally  anchor  under  it  in 
westerly  winds. 

Cape  Chatte,  when  seen  from  the  eastward  or  westward,  so  that  it 
appears  as  the  extreme  point,  can  easily  be  distinguished,  being  a  round 
bill  separated  from  but  of  less  height  than  the  land  l)ehind  it. 

Aspect  of  coast — The  coast  from  Cape  Chatte  to  Matane  is  straight, 
bold,  and  of  the  same  rocks  as  that  which  has  been  just  described.  Al- 
though not  a  high  coast,  it  is  still  of  (tonsiderable  elevation  above  the 
sea,  and  Ht.  Anne  Mountains  continue  in  the  rear  of  it,  at  a  distance  of 
about  15  miles  to  their  southwestern  termination,  which  is  15  miles  south 
of  Cape  Balance,  the  last  being  li5  miles  westward  of  Cape  Chatte. 
Several  detached  hills  will  be  seen  farther  to  the  westward,  which  are 
also  at  a  considerable  distance  from  the  coast.  Two  of  these  have  been 
named  the  Paps  of  Matane,  though  they  can  with  difftculty  be  made 
out  when  bearing  S.  20°  W. ;  on  any  other  bearing  it  is  still  less  easy 
to  distinguish  them,  but  they  are  of  no  use  except  to  enable  a  vessel, 
obtaining  a  sight  of  land,  to  Judge  how  far  she  is  up  the  estuary. 

Capuchin  Cove,  and  another  cove  on  the  west  side  of  Cape  Michaux, 
attbrd  shelter  to  boats.  There  are  settlements  at  Little  Matane,  a  small 
stream  3  miles  eastward  of  the  lliver  Matane. 

River  Matane. — The  depth  over  the  bar  is  usually  4  feet  at  low 
wat^r,  and  15  at  high-water  springs.  The  depth  of  water  seems  to  de- 
pend so  much  upon  the  winds  which  prevail  in  the  estuary  that  it  is 
impossible  to  calculate  it  at  any  time  exactly.  Easterly  winds  were 
observed  to  cause  high  tides,  aud  westerly  winds  the  contrary.  The 
channel  is  very  narrow,  and  there  are  several  large  bowlder  stones  in  iti 


A 
'•1. 

■X 


^:!aS^X--' 


I 


;'''*W.>iA-'fi»-J^«"-w.'-"''-*.t'ce«!«>-*v/-iS.-- 


i 


116 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


lying  ou  the  sand,  which  diminish  the  depth  2  feet,  and  are  extremely 
dangerous  when  there  is  any  swell.  The  bar  is  continually  shitting 
from  the  etiVcts  of  gales  of  wind,  so  that  no  directions  can  be  given  for 
sailing  in.  A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  7  fathoms,  about  f 
of  a  mile  oft' shore,  northward  of  the  entrance  to  Mataue  liiver. 

Pilots  reside  here  and  no  vessel  should  attempt  the  entrance  without 
one. 

Supplies  of  provisions  can  usually  be  obtained  at  Matano  River,  and 
it  will  be  easily  made  out  from  a  vessel,  since  the  entrance  shows 
plainly.  The  clifty  mound  on  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  and  the 
buildings  and  large  stone  church  will  also  serve  to  point  it  out. 

Matane  is  the  name  of  the  seignory  containing  about  oOU  inhabitants, 
most  of  whom  live  by  the  combined  means  of  tishing,  farming,  and  pi- 
loting. The  soil  is  good  and  gives  good  crops  of  wheat  and  other  grain^ 
excepting  in  batl  seasons. 

Anchorage. — Outside  the  bar  there  is  anchorage  in  5  fathoms  J  mile 
off" shore,  and  in  JO  fathoms  a  little  further  out,  the  bottom  being  of 
sand  and  clay. 

Littlft  Metis  Bay  is  small  and  divided  into  two  rocky  coves  which 
are  open  to  the  eastward,  and  dry  at  low  water.  The  coast  ^'rom  Ma- 
tane to  Metis  is  low,  rocky,  wooded,  unbroken,  and  nay  be  approached 
with  care  by  the  le.ad,  the  bank  of  soundings  becoming  gradually  wider 
as  we  proceed  to  the  westward. 

Little  Metis  River,  a  small  stream,  is  at  the  head  of  the  southern 
cove.  There  are  several  buildings  and  a  fishing  establishment  on  Metis 
Point,  the  outer  extreme  of  the  bay.  A  reef,  which  is  bold  on  the  north 
side,  and  has  some  of  its  rocks  always  above  water,  extends  from  this 
point  nearly  ^  mile  to  the  eastward,  and  enables  small  vessels  to  re- 
main at  anchor  in  3  fathoms,  over  mud  bottom,  with  the  wind  as  far  to 
the  northward  as  NW.  In  this  berth  vessels  lie  midway  between  the 
eastern  end  of  the  reef  and  a  large  round  rock  near  the  shore  on  the 
SE.  side  of  the  bay.  Larger  vessels  may  anchor  further  out  in  5  or  6 
fathoms  water,  but  not  in  the  stream  of  the  reef,  where  the  ground  is 
foul  and  rocky. 

Grand  Metis  Bay  is  separated  from  Little  Metis  by  Metis  Point- 
Grand  Metis  Uiver,  a  small  stream  is  near  the  west  end  of  the  bay,  and  is 
nearly  dry  outside  of  the  very  narrow  entrance  at  low  water.  The  bay  is 
rather  more  than  Smiles  wide,  and  f  mile  deep;  but  it  is  all  shoal.  Small 
vessels  may  anchor  in  S^  or  4  fathoms,  under  its  east  point,  close  to  the 
edge  of  the  shoal  water,  and  in  tolerable  shelter  from  winds  along  the 
coast,  but  there  is  no  shelter  for  shipping.  Nevertheless,  vessels  lie 
here  all  the  summer  months  for  the  purpose  of  taking  in  timber.  They 
are  usually  moored  in  G  fathoms,  at  low  water,  over  mud  bottom,  and 
with  the  river  bearing  about  south,  distant  li  miles. 

Cock  Cove  aftbrds  good  anchorage  for  schooners,  in  3  fathoms  at 
ow  water,  well  sheltered  from  the  winds  along  the  coast.    The  summit 


.j-«w.MJMi'ji<g8F;'.w*t-iww.');yrmte.'.i*^  - 


ND. 

b,  and  are  extremely 
continually  Hhil'tiiig 
ons  can  be  given  for 
I  7  fatlioms,  about  ^ 
ataue  liiver. 
tUe  entrance  without 

t  Matano  River,  and 
the  »:!n trance  shows 
10  entrance  and  the 
point  it  out. 
out  500  inhabitants, 
ig,  farming,  and  pi- 
leat  and  other  grain 

in  5  fathoms  J  mile 
le  bottom  being  of 

rocky  coves  which 
'he  coast  *"rom  Ma- 
nay  be  approached 
mg  gradually  wider 

ad  of  the  southern 
iblishraent  on  Metis 
is  bold  on  the  north 
,  extends  from  this 
mall  vessels  to  re- 
1  the  wind  as  far  to 
id  way  between  the 
ir  the  shora  on  the 
urther  out  in  5  or  6 
here  the  ground  is 

bis  by  Metis  Point* 
id  of  the  bay,  and  is 
'  water.  The  bay  is 
t  is  all  shoal.  Small 
;  point,  close  to  the 
m  winds  along  the 
thelesa,  vessels  lie 
g  in  timber.  They 
•  mud  bottom,  and 

's,  in  3  fathoms  at 
oast.    The  summit 


MATANE — OLD    HIC    HARBOR. 


IIT 


of  Mount  Oamille  bears  from  the  west  point  of  Oock  Oove  S.  48°  E.  8 
miles.  A  can  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  5  fathoms,  northward 
of  Oock  Point,  to  indicate  the  edge  of  the  shoal  ground  ott"  that  point. 

Anchorage — It  may  be  remarked  here  that  vessels  of  large  draft 
may  anchor  in  flue  weather  all  along  the  coast  from  Metis  to  Green 
Island. 

Father  Point  is  low,  aud  covered   with  houses ;  many  of  the  St. 
Lawrence  pilots  reside  here. 

Rimouski  Road.— Between  the  eastern    point  of  Bar  naby  Island 
aud  Fatlier  Point  is  the  anchorage  or  road  of  Rimouski,  where  vessels 
ride  throughout  the  summer  to  take  in  cargoes  of    lumber.    The  best 
sheltered  berth  is  with  Rimouski  Church   S.  50  VV.  in  4  fathoms  over 
mud  bottom.    Small  vessels  can  anchor  further  to  the   westward  in  3 
fathoms  at  low   water,  with   the  east  end  of  the  rocks  ott"  the  eastern 
point  of  Barnaby  Island  bearing  N.  80  W.,  and  distant  i  mile.     The 
reef  does  not  extend  above  ^  mile  off  the  eastern  point  of  Barnaby 
Island,  and  may   be  passed  by  the  lead  in  4  fathoms.    A  landing  pier 
has  been  built  at  Rimouski  2,160  feet  long,  and   having  at  its  end  a 
depth  of  8^  feet  at  low-water  springs. 

Rimouski.— The  European  mails  are  landed  aud  shipped  at  Rimouski, 
special  trains  running  with  them  to  and  from  Quebec  and  Halifax  by 
the  Intercolonial  Railway.  Both  mails  aud  passengers  are  transhipped 
by  a  steam  tender,  the  mail  steam  vessels  stopping  about  2  miles  from 
the  pier.    The  anchorage  off  Rimouski  is  not  good. 

Coal.— Ouly  sufficient  coal  for  the  supply  of  the  tender  to  the  mail 
steam  vessels  is  kept  at  Rimouski. 

Barnaby  Island  is  low,  wooded,  aud  uninhabited,  and  is  composed 
of  slate  and  greywacke  roeks,  like  all  the  coast  aud  islands  on  this 
side  of  the  estuary.  In  the  interior  of  the  island  there  is  a  long  pond 
of  fresh,  but  not  good,  water,  which  last  must  be  obtained  from  the  Ri- 
mouski River. 

The  channel  between  the  island  and  Rimouski  is  dry  at  low  water. 
From  7  to  12  feet  can  be  carried  through  it  at  high  water,  according  as 
it  is  neap  or  spring  tide,  but  at  no  time  should  a  vessel  drawing  more 
than  8  feet  attempt  this  passage,  since  there  are  rocks  and  large  stones 
here  and  there,  and  also  fl^h  stakes. 

Shoal.— Off  the  outside  of  Barnaby  Island  there  is  a  3-fathom  shoal, 
extending  out  fully  §  mile,  and  the  reef  off  its  western  end  runs  out  in 
the  direction  of  the  island  more  than  ^  mile. 

Barnaby  Road.—Midway  betweeu  the  western  points  of  Barnaby 
Island  and  Bare  Kock  there  are  2  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  muddy 
bottom,  in  Barnaby  Road,  which  affords  good  anchorage  to  small  ves- 
sels. Rimouski  Caurch  in  line  with  the  eastern  end  of  the  rock  will 
lead  over  the  tail  of  the  reef  off  the  west  eud  of  Barnaby,  and  into 
this  anchorage. 

Old  Bio  Harbor  dries  at  low  water,  and  has  many  rocks  in  it.    Two 


'^MHi^siMhid^&^m^^s^iAi^A-^^^S&^f,  ~ 


118 


MIRAMICHI    BAY   TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


round  aiui  liigh  rocky  islets,  called  the  Bicoques,  will  be  seen  extend- 
ing to  the  westward  of  its  oast  point.  Midway  between  these  rocky 
islets  atid  the  west  point  of  the  harbor  small  vessels  may  anchor  in  Old 
Bic  Road  in  3  fathoms  at  low  water,  with  a  muddy  bottom,  and  with  the 
point  bearing  S.  70°  W.  distant  ^  mile.  To  run  into  this  anchorage 
from  the  NW.,  keep  the  westernmost  of  the  two  rocky  islets  its  own 
breadth  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  west  point  of  the  harbor,  antl  this 
will  clear  the  eastern  rock  of  the  Arignole  Reef,  which  is  the  only  danger 
in  the  way. 

Water  may  be  obtained  in  a  river  in  the  SB.  corner  of  Old  Bic  Har- 
bor. 

Arignole  Reef  is  composed  of  two  rocks  lying  across  the  mouth  of 
the  shallow  Arignole  Bay.  The  western  rock  is  J  mile  long  and  very  nar- 
row ;  its  west  end  is  always  <ibove  water,  and  it  is  distant  o'dy  ^  mile 
from  the  rocks  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  cape.  The  eastern  rock  is 
small,  covered  in  high  tides,  and  distant  ^  mile  from  the  other. 

Ha-Ha  Bay,  on  the  western  side  of  Cape  Arignole,  affords  excellent 
anchorage,  in  easterly  winds,  off  its  entrance  in  4  fathoms  at  low  water, 
and  farther  in  for  small  vessels  in  3  fathoms;  but  it  is  seldom  used, 
because  the  equally  sai'f)  and  more  roomy  anchorage  under  Bic  is  justly 
preferred. 

Bic  Island  lies  directly  oft'  Cape  Arignole,  at  the  distance  of  nearly 
2|  miles,  and  is  about  3  miles  long,  without  including  the  reefs,  in  a  di- 
rection parallel  to  the  coast  and  a  mile  broad.  Its  shores  are  of  slate 
rocks ;  it  is  thickly  wooded  and  uninhabited. 

Beacons. — On  the  west  end  of  Bic  Island  are  three  wooden  beacons, 
two  white  and  one  red ;  the  red  beacon  in  the  form  of  a  sugar  loaf,  and 
the  western  white  beacon  in  the  form  of  a  cross  reverse,  in  line  lead 
west  ward  of  N  W.  Reef. 

Water. — Supplies  of  water  can  only  be  obtained  from  the  bay  be- 
tween the  east  and  SE.  points  of  Bic  Island,  and  not  always  there  in  dry 
seasons,  and  from  a  stream  on  the  west  side  of  a  small  bay  of  the  main- 
land, 4  miles  westward  of  Cape  Arignole. 

Bicquette  Island,  lying  |  mile  to  the  northward  of  Bic,  is  ^  mile  long, 
^  mile  broad,  and  about  100  feet  high  above  the  sea. 

Reefs. — Several  large  rocks  above  water  extend  ^  mile  to  the  east  and 
SE.  of  Bicquette  Island,  and  diminish  the  breadth  of  the  channel  be- 
tween it  and  Bic  to  little  more  than  ^  mile.  Off  the  west  end  of  Bic- 
quette in  a  S.  40°  W.  direction,  there  are  two  large  rocks  always  above 
water,  and  a  third  which  covers  at  high  water,  and  extend  off  a  mile 
from  the  island. 

The  NW.  Reef  is  composed  of  two  rocks  about  300  yards  long,  and 
which  just  cover  at  high  water ;  both  it  and  Bicquette  are  bold  to 
the  northward.  There  is  deep  water  all  along  the  line  from  the  north 
side  of  Bicquette  to  this  reef,  and  also  between  the  latter  and  the  rocks 
to  the  SE.  of  it,  the  west  end  of  Bic  in  one  with  the  NW.  point  of  Ha- 


BICQUETTE    CHANNEL — ALCIDE    ROCK. 


119 


te  seen  exteiid- 
LMi  fliesw  rocky 
ly  anchor  in  Old 
in,  and  witU  the 
this  anchorage 
r  islets  its  own 
arbor,  and  this 
the  only  danger 

)f  Old  Bic  Har- 

is  the  mouth  of 
ig  and  very  nar- 
ant  o'dy  ^  mile 
eastern  rock  is 
other. 

Iford^  excellent 
IS  at  low  water, 
I  seldom  used, 
er  Bic  is  justly 

tance  of  nearly 
le  reefs,  in  a  di- 
res  are  of  slate 

ooden  beacons, 
sugar  loaf,  and 
se,  in  line  lead 

im  the  bay  be- 
i.ys  therein  dry 
ay  of  the  main- 
is  ^  mile  long, 

to  the  east  and 

le  channel  be- 

4t  end  of  Bic- 

always  above 

nd  of}'  a  mile 

irds  long,  and 
are  bold  to 
om  the  north 
and  the  rocks 
point  of  Ha- 


Ela  Bay,  bearing  S.  50°  E.,  leads  on  the  reef.  In  approaching  the  reef 
from  the  westward,  the  north  extremity  of  Cape  Arignolc  should  not  be 
shut  ill  behind  the  west  point  of  Bic.  The  beacons  on  ISic  in  line  also 
lead  clear. 

Bicquotte  Channel.— There  are  no  leading  marks  for  running 
througii,  but  it  may  easily  be  done  with  tl  •  assistance  of  the  charts  in 
case  of  necessity.  Tlie  southwestern  reel  of  Hicquette,  and  two  small 
round  rocks  on  the  liic  side,  400  yards  offshore,  bearing  S.  20°  E.  from 
the  west  end  of  Bic(]uette  are  the  only  dangers. 

To  avoid  the  first  of  these  dangers,  do  not  bring  the  south  extremity 
of  the  rocks  off  the  SB.  side  of  Bicquette  to  bear  to  the  eastward  of  N. 
51°  E. ;  and  if  the  north  side  of  Bic,  near  its  east  end,  is  not  brought 
to  bear  to  the  northward  of  N.  03°  E.,  the  second  will  be  cleared.  The 
best  time  to  run  through  is  at  low  water,  when  all  the  dangers  show, 
and  a  vessel,  keeping  in  mid-channel  between  them,  will  have  from  i)^ 
to  5  fathoms,  with  irregular  soundings  and  foul  ground  occasionally. 

SE.  Reef  extends  from  the  SE.  point  of  Bic  Island  to  the  distance 
of  nearly  V\  miles,  in  about  an  easterly  direction.  The  outer  part  of 
this  reef  is  formed  of  three  rocks  lying  in  a  straight  line,  and  always 
above  water.  Small  schooners  can  pass  on  either  side  of  the  western 
rock,  keeping  close  to  it,  if  they  pass  to  the  westward.  The  inner  part 
of  the  reef,  extending  under  water  from  the  Sl'3.  point  of  Bic,  reaches 
farther  to  the  southward  than  the  direction  of  the  rocks,  and  must  be 
avoided  by  not  bringing  the  south  side  of  Bic  to  bear  to  the  southward 
of  S.  60°  W. 

NE.  Reef.— The  NE.  Reef  is  a  small  patch  of  black  rocks,  which 
'shows  at  low  water,  lying  M .  3-1°  E.  800  yards  from  the  NE.  point  of  Bic. 
To  pass  to  the  eastward  of  this  reef,  keep  both  the  rocky  islets  on  the 
east  si<le  of  Old  Bic  Elarbor  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  SE.  Reef. 

TVest  Grounds  of  Bic  are  an  extensive  tiat  of  slate,  which  i)artly 
dries  at  low  water.  The  outer  point  of  these  grounds  is  distant  nearly 
^  mile  from  the  west  point  of  the  island. 

Alcide  Rock,  is  small  and  has  4  feet  on  ij  at  low  water.  It  ri  jes 
from  a  small  rocky  shoal  which  is  so  bold  all  round  that  there  is  no  warn- 
ing whatever  by  the  lead.  From  the  N\V.  extremity  of  Cape  Arigiiole 
the  rock  bears  S.  65°  W.,  distant  5  miles;  and  it  is  rather  more  thin  V\ 
miles  distant  from  the  shore  to  the  southward.  The  two  white  beacoiis 
on  Bic — one  in  the  form  of  across  reversed  and  the  otht^r  in  a  diamond 
form-— in  line,  lead  directly  on  Alcide  Rock;  and  the  two  white  beacons 
on  the  south  shore  of  the  river,  about  5  miles  westward  of  Cape  Arig- 
uole — one  of  which  is  of.a  diamond  shape  and  theother  of  a  sugar  loaf — 
in  line,  also  lead  on  th.^  rock.  Vessels  will  be  in  no  danger  from  it  if 
Mount  Camille  be  not  entirely  shut  in  behind  Cape  Arignole.  A  black 
and  white  can  buoy  is  moored  in  9  fathoms  northward  of  the  rocks  on 
the  alignment  of  the  two  white  beacons  on  the  south  shore. 

Anchorage. — There  is  excellent  anchorage  under  either  end  of  Bic, 


120 


MIRAMICHl    BAY    TO    GREEN    ISLAND. 


and  also  between  it  and  the  inainlaiul,  according  to  the  wind  ;  and  ves- 
sels whicli  may  be  met  by  an  easterly  wind  had  better  anchor  than 
»ttem|)t  to  beat  down  the  estuary  in  the  long  and  foggy  nights  of  the 
fall  of  the  year. 

Tides.— To  the  westward  of  Bic  the  first  of  the  fioo<l  comes  from  the 
NE.,  but  there  is  but  little  stream  of  flood  in  neap  tides  bt'tween  Bic 
and  the  mainland,  excepting  close  to  the  latter.  lu  spring  tides  it  runs 
through  the  channel  at  the  average  rate  of  1^  knots,  being  strongest 
near  the  mainland.  It  also  runs  Itetween  Bic  and  Bicquette,  but  the 
stream  extends  oidy  a  very  short  distance  outside  the  latter  island. 

The  stream  of  Hood  continues  its  course  close  along  the  mainland, 
passing  inside  and  also  very  close  outside  of  the  Razade,  Basque,  and 
Apple  Islands,  but  nowhere  extending  a  sufficient  distance  offshore 
to  be  of  use  to  ships  beating  to  the  westward  much  below  Green  Island. 
That  part  of  the  stream  of  Hood  which  passes  farther  out  towards  Bic, 
and  also  that  which  passes  between  Bic  and  Bicquette,  runs  at  its  full 
rate  oidy  until  at  half  flood,  after  which  it  becomes  gradually  weaker 
turning  to  the  N  W.,  around  the  west  end  of  the  island,  and  finally  to  the 
north  and  NE.,  towads  the  end  of  the  tide. 

The  stream  of  flood  becomes  weaker  and  of  less  duration  as  we  pro- 
ceed to  the  westward  of  the  islands.  Half  way  between  Bic  and  the 
Razade  Islets  there  is  slack  water  for  about  an  hour  at  the  end  of  tlio 
ebb,  after  which  a  weak  flood  makes  during  the  first  quarter  of  that  ride 
at  the  rate  of  one  fourth  knot ;  and  this  is  succeeded  by  the  eddy  flood 
at  the  rate  of  1^  knots,  or  2J  at  the  edge  of  the  bank  of  soundings,  which 
comes  from  the  westward,  running  in  the  same  direction  as  the  ebb 
during  the  remainder  of  the  flood  tide. 

From  these  remarks  it  will  be  seen  that  vessels  will  make  little  way 
to  the  windward  against  a  westerly  wind  on  the  bank  of  soundings  be- 
tween Bic  and  the  Razade  Islets ;  and  indeed  all  the  way  to  Green 
Island. 

The  set  of  the  latter  part  of  the  flood  to  the  northward  past  the  west 
end  of  Bic  shouhl  be  remembered  by  vessels  weifc,hing  from  the  western 
anchorage,  or  approaching  the  island  with  light  winds,  especially  in 
the  night  or  thick  weather. 

The  first  of  the  ebb  .sets  offshore,  or  from  the  southward,  and  this  is 
more  particularly  remarkable  at  the  eastern  anchorage,  but  it  only  lasts 
for  a  very  short  time,  after  which  the  stream  runs  fairly  betwe^.  the 
islands  and  along  the  coast  to  the  eastward  for  the  remainder  of  the  tide. 
Its  rate,  in  westerly  winds,  varies  from  2  to  2^  knots,  according  as  it  is 
neap  or  spring  tide,  but  it  does  not  run  so  strongly  in  easterly  winds. 
Anchorage — There  is  anchorage  on  the  bank  in  10  or  12  fathoms, 
with  good  holding  ground,  all  along  the  south  coast  from  Bic  to  Green 
Island. 

Coast— The  coast  of  the  mainland  between  Bic  Island  and  Razade 
Islets  is  high  and  rocky.     With  the  exception  of  Alcide  Rock  it  is  free 


■*! 


RAZADE    ISLKT8 — GREKN    ISLAND    KEEF. 


121 


)  wind  ;  and  ves- 
ter  anchor  tlmn 
gy  iii<;lit.s  of  the 

I  conies  from  the 
lo8  between  Bic 
ring  tides  it  rnns 
,  being  strongest 
icquette,  but  the 
hitter  ishind. 
^  the  niainhmd, 
ide,  Basque,  and 
listance  ofltahore 
ow  Green  Island, 
out  towards  Bic, 
e,  runs  at  its  full 
.•adually  weaker, 
and  tinally  to  the 

:atiou  as  we  pro- 
een  Bic  and  the 
,t  the  end  of  llio 
irter  of  that  tide 
ly  the  eddy  flood 
loundings,  which 
ition  as  the  ebb- 

make  little  way 
of  soundings  be- 
way  to  Green 

rd  past  the  west 

om  the  western 

ds,  especially  in 

ard,  an<l  this  is 
but  it  only  lasts 
ly  betwei.  ,   the 

nder  of  the  tide. 

ccording  as  it  is 
easterly  winds. 

)  or  12  fathoms, 

>ni  Bic  to  Green 

md  and  Razade 
3  liock  it  is  free 


I 


from  danger  to  small  vessels,  which  may  stand  close  in  ;  but  vessels  of 
large  draft  should  not  stand  in  farther  than  7  fathoms  at  low  aiul  0 
fathoms  at  high  water,  because  of  a  long  ridge  of  rocky  ground,  ex- 
tending ri  miles  N.  45^  E.  from  the  XIO.  Razade  Islet,  with  17  feet  least 
water  near  its  eastern  eiul.  To  clear  every  part  of  this  ridge  keep 
Basque  Island  its  own  breadth  open  to  the  northward  of  the  NK. 
Bazade. 

Razade  Islets  are  two  large  rocks  about  ^  roile  long ;  they  are  low, 
bare  of  trees,  and  1^  miles  apart.  There  is  no  passage  for  vessels  be- 
tween them  and  the  shore. 

Basque  Island,  is  rocky,  wooded,  and  uninhabited,  and  there  is  no 
passage  for  ships  between  it  and  the  shore. 

Shoals. — The  shoal  water  extends  ^  mile  to  the  northward  of  Basque 
Island,  and  there  is  a  reef  of  rocks  to  the  westward  of  its  western  point. 
On  the  west«rn  extremity  of  this  reet,  and  about  1,201)  yards  distant 
from  the  island,  is  a  round  rock,  which  shows  at  half  tide. 

Apple  Island  is  formed  by  one  principal  and  several  smaller  rocks; 
the  whole  about  one  mile  long  by  300  yards  wide.  Ic  is  30  or  40  feet 
above  the  sea  at  high  water,  without  any  trees,  and  distant  2^  miles 
from  the  nearest  point  of  the  mainland.  There  is  no  passage  for  ships 
between  it  and  the  shore,  but  its  north  side  is  bold-to. 

Green  Island  has  a  long  and  narrow  point  of  rocks,  always  above 
water,  and  running  out  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  trees  towards  Apple 
Island.  Half  this  distance  towards  Apple  Island  is  occupied  by  reefs 
of  slate,  which  dry  at  low  water.  The  line  of  shoal  water  is  continuous 
from  each  of  these  islands  to  the  other,  and  may  be  safely  approached 
with  care  to  7  fathoms  at  low  or  10  fathoms  at  high  water ;  as  may  also 
the  islands. 

Oreen  Island  Reef,  which  is  extremely  dangerous,  extends  from 
the  lighthouse  northward  1^  miles  to  the  3-fathom  line  of  soundings 
Its  shape  is  irregularly  triangular,  and  the  rocks  on  it  dry  at  low  water 
nearly  ^  mile  out  from  the  high-water  mark.  On  the  eastern  side  this 
reef  may  be  safely  approached  to  the  depth  of  7  or  eyen  6  fathoms  at 
low  water,  but  on  the  north  and  west  sides  there  is  no  bottom  with  the 
hand  lead  until  close  to  it.  To  avoid  Green  Island  Beef  in  the  daytime 
and  clear  weather  keep  the  summit  of  the  high  land  to  the  southward  of 
Cape  Arignole  (or  the  high  land  of  Bic)  open  to  the  northward  of  Basque 
Island. 

Anchorage. — There  is  excellent  anchorage  in  westerly  winds  under 
Green  Island  Reef,  and  it  is  the  general  rendezvous  of  vessels  waiting 
for  the  Hood  to  beat  through  between  Green  and  Red  Islands.  Vessels 
should  not  anchor  with  the  light  bearing  to  the  westward  of  S.  29°  W.  or 
in  less  than  7  fathoms  at  low  water.  If  they  wish  still  more  room,  they 
may  choose  their  berth  in  9,  10,  or  11  fathoms,  and  will  find  a  bottom 
of  stiff  mud  in  either  depth.t 

Tides.— Ft  is  higli  witer,  fall  ati I  change,  at  Green  Island  at  2h. 


.ifsJ^iSffiifs- 


'im^ms&maia&iijmmsr;, 


»..-'i,i* 


122 


MIRAMICHI    BAY    TO    ORKEN    ISLAND. 


45rii.;  ami  ordinary  springs  rise  16  feet,  and  neaps  9^  feet.  At  tlie  an- 
chorage northward  of  Green  Island  the  first  of  the  Hood  was  observed 
to  come  from  the  northward;  then  tending  gradually  round  to  the  SB. 
at  the  end  of  the  tide.  Tlie  vessel  continued  to  go  around  witli  the  Hrst 
of  the  ebb  which  came  from  the  southward  off  the  shoals  to  tlie  NW., 
win(!h  latter  point  she  reached  at  about  4  hours'  ebb ;  and  slie  con- 
tinued with  her  head  in  that  direction,  from  which  the  tide  came,  until 
near  tiie  end  of  the  tide.  The  vessel  then  began  to  tend  again,  with 
her  head  to  the  north  and  NB.,  as  before,  going  completely  around  the 
compass  in  12  hours.  It  was  never  entirely  slack  water,  the  stream 
continuing  to  run  more  or  less  during  the  whole  time.  The  rate  of  the 
ebb  was  3  knots,  and  that  of  the  flood  2  knots.  This  occurred  in  quite 
a  calm  day. 


ki 


feet.  At  tlie  aii- 
0(1  was  observed 
roiiud  to  tlie  SB. 
imd  witli  tlie  first 
oals  to  tlie  NW., 
b ;  and  she  con- 
tide  came,  until 
tend  again,- with 
\etii\y  around  the 
ater,  tlie  stream 
The  rate  of  the 
•ccurred  in  quite 


CHAPTER  V. 

GULP    OF    ST.     LAWRENCE,    NORTH    COAST,    ORAND    POINT    TO   CAPE 

WHITTLE. 

General  Observations.— Greenly  Island  lies  southward  U  miles 
from  Grand  Point,  which  is  on  the  northern  or  Labrador  side" of  the 
entrance  of  the  Gulf  of  St.  Lawrence,  throujjh  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle. 
The  coast,  which  will  form  the  subject  of  this  chapter,  lies  between  that 
island  and  South  Makers  Ledge,  near  Cape  Whittle,  a  distance  of  128 
miles. 

The  mariner  is  reminded  that  in  shaping  a  course  along  the  coast  the 
variation  of  the  compass  alters  half  a  point  within  the  limits  of  this- 
chapter,  for  which  alteration  due  allowance  should  be  made;  attention 
should  also  be  given  to  the  soundings.  A  vessel  steering  a  direct  course 
for  the  east  point  of  Anticosti  would  carry  soundings  out  to  60  fathoms, 
at  the  distance  of  15  miles  from  Greenly  Island.  She  would  then  find 
a  greater  depth,  or  no  soundings,  until  she  had  increased  her  distance 
to  67  miles  from  the  island,  when  she  would  again  strike  ground  in 
from  30  to  50  fathoms,  and  continue  to  And  soundings  from  time  to  time 
in  various  depths,  and  over  mud,  sand,  and  gravel  bottom  until  she  had 
passed  South  makers  Ledge.  These  soundings  are  on  detached  banks 
lying  parallel  to  the  coast  at  the  distance  of  se'-eral  leagues.  They  are 
very  irregular,  and  there  is  in  general  much  deeper  water  between 
them  and  the  shore  and  also  to  the  southward  for  a  great  distance,  or 
until  we  approach  the  opposite  coast  of  Newfoundland. 

Currents  and  Icebergs — In  navigating  along  this  coast  the  current 
iu  through  the  Strait  of  Belle  Isle  (page  8)  must  be  taken  into  consid- 
eration, and  it  should  also  be  remem  bered  that,  in  addition  to  the  |»er- 
nianent  dangers  of  the  coast,  drifting  icebergs  are  frequently  to  be  met 
with.  There  is  a  weak  stream  of  flood  from  the  eastward  inshore  and 
among  the  islands,  and  an  equally  weak  ebb  stream  in  the  contrary  di- 
rection; but  both  are  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 

Aspect  of  Coast.— The  coast  between  Greenly  Island  and  Cape 
Whittle  is  exceedingly  dangerous  at  night  or  iu  togs;  and  even  in  day- 
time  and  flne  weather  it  requires  the  intimate  knowledge  of  the  position 
of  every  ledge  possessed  by  the  fishermen,  or  a  good  chart  on  a  large 
scale,  to  navigate  along  it  with  safety.  The  mainland  and  islands  are 
of  granitic  rocks,  bare  of  trees  excepting  iu  the  heads  of  bays,  where 
small  8i)ruce  and  birch  trees  are  met  with  occasionally.    When  not  en- 

123 


-#s6sssissB«i*asssi*ti<tajs* 


'j'z;!^;V'<4'8»*S!i" 


5! 


a  ill  i 


124 


GRAND    POINT   TO    CAPE    WHITTLE. 


tirely  bare,  tlio  iiiaiiiliiiHl  mid  isliiiuk  iiro  covered  with  moss  or  scrubby 
spruce  bushes,  and  there  are  many  ponds  of  dark  bog  water  frequented 
by  water  fowl  and  Hocks  of  the  Laltrador  curlew.  The  maiidand  is 
broken  into  inlets  and  bays  and  fringed  with  islands,  ro(!ks,  and  ledger 
whiciii  frecjuently  rise  abruptly  to  within  a  few  feet  of  the  surface,  from 
dei)ths  so  great  as  to  atlbrd  no  warning  by  the  lead.  In  some  pails  the 
islands  and  rocks  are  so  numerous  as  to  form  a  complete  labyiinth,  in 
which  nothing  but  small  egging  sciiooners  or  shallops  can  find  their 
way. 

lu  general  tlie  mainland  does  not  exceed  the  height  of  500  feet  above 
the  level  ot  the  sea  and  is  often  very  much  lower,  as  are  all  the  islands 
excepting  Great  and  Little  Mecattina.  These  two  high  islands,  the 
Iligh  Land  of  Mecattina,  685  feet  above  the  uea,  and  the  Uradore  Hills, 
e.  J  all  very  remarkable,  and  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her  position 
from  great  distances  at  sea.  The  Bradore  Hills  are  three  contiguous 
round-backed  mountains  situated  inland  4  or  5  miles  northeastward 
from  the  head  of  Bnulore  Hay.  TheNW.  summit  is  the  highest,  being 
1,'JU4  feet  above  the  sea,  and  the  highest  land  on  this  coast. 

Climate. — The  climate  is  very  severe,  and  the  dangers  are  increased 
tenfold  by  the  fogs  which  accompany  the  prevalent  southerly  winds. 
It  is  probable  that  the  mean  temperature  of  the  year  does  not  exceed 
the  freezing  point.  The  ice  does  not  usually  leave  the  coast  before 
June,  and  young  ice  begins  to  form  again  in  the  pools  and  slieltered 
small  bays  in  September,  when  frosts  are  very  frequent  at  night.  At 
midsummer  we  found  only  a  very  few  of  the  earliest  plants  in  tlower, 
the  grass  had  not  sprung  up,  and  the  moss  still  retained  the  brown 
color  of  winter.  Large  masses  of  snow  still  occupied  the  ravines  and 
hollows  and  the  shaded  northern  sides  of  steep  hills. 

In  the  sheltered  bays  the  temperature  is  much  higher  and  the  fogs 
less  frequent  than  among  the  outer  islands,  whilst,  at  the  distance  of 
5  or  G  leagues  inland,  the  water  is  said  to  be  quite  warm  in  summer 
and  the  country  thickly  wooded  with  spruce,  juniper,  birch,  and  poplar 
trees,  which  grow  in  valleys  where  the  soil  is  of  sandy  clay,  ouly  the 
sammits  of  the  hills  being  of  bare  granite  like  the  coast. 

Inhabitants  and  Productions.— There  are  a  few  Indians  of  the 
Montanes  tribe,  and  a  family  or  two  of  half-civilized  Esquimaux  occa* 
sionally  visit  the  coast  from  the  northward.  There  are  deer  (caribou), 
bears,  wolves,  foxes,  martens,  otters,  beavers,  aud  Canadian  porcupines 
in  the  interior,  most  of  which  are  hunted  for  their  skins  by  the  few  in- 
habitants of  the  coast.  The  Canadian  partridge  and  the  ptarmigan,  or 
willow  grouse,  are  also  plentiful. 

The  oidy  permanent  inhabitants  are  a  few  widely  scattered  families, 
residing  at  seal  and  salmon-tlshiugand  fur-trading  establishments,  which 
are  visited  periodically  by  small  schooners  from  Quebec.  Seals  and 
salmon  are  very  plentiful.  The  establishments  alluded  to  are  at  Bradore, 
Esquimaux  Bay,  St.  Augustin  Harbor,  Little  Fish  Harbor,  aud   Eta- 


CLIMATE HRADOKK    MAY. 


125 


E. 

;h  moss  or  scrubby 
g  water  fruqiieiitctl 

The  mainlaiid  is 
,  ro(;k8,  and  letltfos 
if  tlie  surface,  from 

lu  80IUU  pHi'ls  the 
plete  lubyiiutli,  in 
opa  can  find  their 

it  of  500  feet  above 
are  all  the  islands 
>  high  islands,  the 
the  Bradore  Hills, 
vessel  her  position 
i  three  contiguous 
lies  northeastward 
the  highest,  being 
s  coast. 

gers  are  increased 
b  southerly  winds, 
r  does  not  exceed 
»  the  coast  before 
tola  and  .sheltered 
ent  at  night.  At 
;  plants  in  dower, 
baiued  the  brown 
d  the  ravines  and 

;her  and  the  fogs 
at  the  distance  of 
warm  in  summer 

birch,  and  poplar 
iidy  clay,  only  the 
ist. 
w  Indians  of  the 

Esquimaux  occa- 
ire  deer  (caribou), 

adiaa  porcupines 
ins  by  the  few  iu- 
the  ptarmigan,  or 

cattered  families, 
blishments,  which 
lebec.  Seals  and 
to  are  at  Bradore, 
larbor,  and  Eta- 


inamu.  These  are  the  otdy  places  which  could  be  relied  on  for  much 
assistance  by  the  crews  of  vessels  which  might  be  wrectked  upon  the 
coast.  There  is  a  family  residing  on  the  island  between  Bonne  Ksper- 
iiuce  and  Salmon  Bay  in  summer,  and  in  Old  Fort  Bay  in  winter,  wlii(;h 
might  be  added  to  the  list.  The  remaining  two  or  three  fiunilies  are 
very  poor  people,  who  seem  just  able  to  make  out  an  inditl'erent  livoli- 
hooil  by  hunting  and  fishing. 

Codflshery. — OodHsh  are  abundant  on  tli'  coast,  espeeiaily  t«>  the 
eastward  of  Mistanoqne.  The  flsheiy  for  tliem  is  not  carried  on  only 
by  resident  inhabitants,  but  by  schooners  which  visit  the  coast  every 
summer. 

Bradore  Bay, — In  the  NE.  part  of  the  bay  is  Ledges  Island,  of 
granite,  surrounded  by  small  islets,  rocks,  and  ledges,  as  its  name 
implies,  and  forming  the  harbor  of  Bradore.  On  the  NW.  side  of 
the  bay,  just  within  Belles  Amours  Point,  is  Belles  Amours  Harbor. 
Between  these  harbors  there  are  straggling  rocks  and  no  ai.(;horage, 
which,  together  with  the  heavy  sea  sent  in  by  the  southerly  winds, 
makes  this  bay  a  very  dangerous  place.  Grand  I'oint,  the  SK. 
point  of  the  bay,  has  a  reef  of  rocks  off  it  700  yards  to  the  south  and 
west.  The  end  of  the  point  is  low,  but  immediately  in  rear  of  it  there 
lises  a  ]>recipice  having  a  round  knoll  upon  it,  and  behind  that  a  still 
higher  precipice,  being  the  SVV.  extremity  of  the  extensive  table  lands 
of  sandstone  extending  eastward  along  the  northern  side  of  the  strait 
of  Belle  Isle,  and  northward  to  near  the  head  of  Bradore  Bay. 

Peroquet  Island,  which  is  high,  of  sandstone,  and  the  abode  of 
myriads  of  pultins,  is  on  the  eastern  side  of  Bradore  Bay,  1 J  miles  to 
the  northward  of  Grand  Point. 

Bradore  Bay. — There  is  no  channel  between  the  Pero(iuet  and  the 
mainland,  the  entrance  of  the  channel  lejiding  to  the  harbor  being  be- 
tween the  Peroquet  and  the  rocks  oft"  the  Island  of  Ledges. 

On  the  eastern  side  are  Gull  Rock  and  Ledge,  which  bear  S.  21°  W., 
andaredistantflOOand  l,000yard8 respectively  from  Jones  Pointon  which 
the  houses  stand.  The  rock  just  covers  at  high  water,  and  therefore  can 
always  be  seen,  but  the  ledge  has  2  fathoms  least,  water  on  it,  and  is, 
therefore,  extremely  dangerous.  On  the  western  side  of  this  ledge,  the 
western  extremes  of  Peroquet  and  Greenly  Islands  appear  in  one.  The 
only  other  dangers  on  this  side  are  several  rocks  above  water,  near  the 
shore,  just  within  the  houses,  and  the  shoal  water,  which  extends  400 
yards  oft'  shore,  and  continues  to  the  head  of  the  bay. 

The  islets  which  lie  in  a  straight  line  close  along  the  eastern  si<le  of 
the  Island  of  Ledges,  and  form  the  western  side  of  the  channel,  are 
quite  bold.  They  are  distinguished  by  letters,  and  the  southernmost  or 
outermost  of  them  («),  which  has  a  small  rock  oft'  it  200  yards  to  the 
southward,  although  small  and  low,  can  always  be  seen. 

Blubber  Cove. — Between  the  third  and  fourth  islets  (c  and  d)  is  the 
very  narrow  channel,  carrying  2  fathoms,  that  leads  into  Blubber  Cove 


I 


f.  i.-i.-js^ie*.v » wJk^"--*-*' 


!*»'*<*•",■>»—  ..i.-1 


J 


GRAND    POINT   TO    CAPK    WHITTLE. 

on  tli(^  MiiHt  8i<l(>  of  the  IhIuikI  of  Ledt^eH,  and  which  in  At  only  for  Hmull 
vhshoIh. 

Bradore  Harbor.— lietweuii  the  islots  {d  and  e)  is  the  untranue  to 
Bradoro  Harbor,  lUO  yards  wide,  and  carry in^;  a  depth  of  7  fatlionis. 
Tli»i;-i>  are  two  more  islets  close  together  (/')  at  \  of  a  mile  N.  U4°  VV. 
of  islet  (e).  The  harbor,  which  is  l)etween  the  north  poiitt  of  Ledges 
Island  and  the  islets  (d)  and  (0),  is  qnite  land-locked,  and  has  a  depth 
of  from  i  to  17  futlioins  water  over  muddy  bottom;  but  it  is  capa- 
ble of  holding  only  a  small  number  of  vessels,  the  space  in  which 
they  can  anchor  being  about  |  mile  long  by  3(M)  yards  wide.  There  is, 
however,  plenty  of  room  and  good  anchorage  for  large  vessels  farther 
up  the  bay  to  the  northward  of  islets  («)  and  (/),  in  from  10  to  L'O  fath- 
oms over  muddy  bottom ;  some  sea  rolls  in  there  with  SW.  winds,  but 
not  enough  to  endanger  a  vessel  with  good  anchors. 

There  is  no  channel  for  vessels  into  Bradore  Harbor  to  the  northward 
and  westward  of  Ledges  Island,  on  account  of  the  innumerable  rocks, 
although  it  is  possible  for  small  craft  to  pass  through  a  narrow  and 
very  deep  channel  close  along  the  NW.  side  of  the  island.  The  only 
navigable  channel  therefore  is  that  which  wo  have  described,  and  which 
is  nearly  r^  mile  wide  in  the  narrowest  part,  and  15  fathoms  deep. 

Water  may  be  obtained  at  a  small  stream  near  the  houses,  and  also 
from  small  rivers  in  the  head  of  the  bay  at  high  water. 

Directions. — In  coming  from  the  eastward  give  Grand  Point  a  berth 
of  ^  mile,  or  in  hauling  around  it  to  the  northward  take  care  that  the 
west  extreme  of  the  Peroquet  does  not  bear  to  the  westward  of  N.  35^ 
W.,  for  the  reef  is  very  dangerous,  and  there  is  no  warning  by  the  lead. 
The  west  side  of  the  Peroquet  may  be  passed  as  near  as  ^  mile.  Having 
passed  it,  haul  to  the  eastward  till  the  mark  for  clearing  the  Gull  Hock 
and  ledge,  namely,  the  western  point  of  Greenly  Island,  open  half  a 
point  to  the  westward  of  Peroquet  Island,  bearing  S.  2P  B.,  comes  ou. 
Then  steer  with  that  mark  on,  or  N.  21°  W.  until  Gull  Rock  is  seen,  or 
until  Jones's  house  bears  N.  32°  E.  and  the  islet  (e),  which  will  appear 
as  the  NE.  extreme  of  Ledges  Island,  N.  2°  W.  Steer  now  for  the 
latter,  leaving  Gull  Rock  to  the  eastward,  and  looking  out  for  the  other 
small  rock  on  the  opposite  side,  which  has  been  mentioned  as  lying  off 
islet  (a).  As  soon  as  this  rock  is  i>a8sed,  the  channel  will  be  clear 
ahead  by  keeping  nearer  the  islets  than  the  mainland.  When  opposite 
Jones's  house,  a  run  of  about  1,400  yards  farther  along  islets  (c)  and 
(d),  which  are  quite  bold,  will  lead  to  the  entrance ;  and  she  must  haul 
sharp  round  to  the  westward  between  (d)  and  (e),  into  the  harbor,  unless 
the  more  roomy  and  deep  water  anchorage  is  preferred  farther  up  the 
bay,  in  which  case  there  is  nothing  in  tiie  way,  excepting  the  shoal  ex- 
tending off  the  maiu  shore  already  mentioned. 

In  approaching  Bradore  from  the  westward,  beware  of  the  reefs  which 
extend  J  mile  to  the  SW.  from  Ledges  Island.  In  order  to  give  these 
a  wide  berth,  do  not  bring  the  Peroquet  to  beai  tc  the  southward  of  east 


HKADOKK    AND   liKLLES    AMOURS    irARROKB. 


127 


lit  only  for  hiuuII 

the  Hiitraiice  ti) 
itli  of  7  fatlioiiiH. 
I  mile  N.  li4o  VV. 
point  of  LedKe.H 
and  liaH  a  depth 

but  it  is  cai>a- 
Hpace  in  whiuli 
wide.  There  iH, 
e  veHHels  fartlier 
^ni  10  to  20  fath- 
SW.  windH,  but 

o  the  northward 
iumerable  rocks, 
ti  a  narrow  and 
land.  Tiie  only 
'ibed,  aud  which 
loms  deep, 
louses,  and  also 

id  Point  a  berth 

<e  care  that  the 

tward  of  N.  35<= 

ing  by  the  lead. 

mile.    Having 

the  Gull  Hock 

id,  open  half  a 

'^  E.,  comes  ou. 

iock  is  seen,  or 

ich  will  appear 

ir  now  for  the 

ut  for  the  other 

led  as  lying  off 

will  be  clear 

When  opposite 

islets  (c)  aud 

she  must  haul 

harbor,  unless 

farther  up  the 

g  the  shoal  ex- 

the  reefs  which 

to  give  these 

thward  of  east 


until  .Ioiu^h'm  house  bears  N.  2P  B.,  then  steer  for  the  latter  until  the 
marks  come  on  fur  eltuiring  Gull  Uouk  and  Ledge,  when  the  veHsel  must 
pnKjeed  as  before  directed. 

Tides. — A  weak  stream  of  dood  sets  into  Bradore  Bay  from  the 
soutiiwiird.  Tlie  ebb  sets  out  in  a  contrary  dinuitioii,  and  is  at  times 
accelerated  by  8VV.  winds,  but  its  rate  never  amounted  to  one  knot. 

Aspect  of  Coast — The  country  separating  Belles  Amours,  Middle 
Bay,  and  Five  Leagues  Harbor  is  of  low  granite,  on  wiiicli  are  ridges  of 
bowldei'H,  with  tioarse  grass  and  moss,  extending  out  to  seaward  sev- 
eral miles  from  the  range  of  steep  granite  hills,  401)  or  oUO  feet  high, 
which  trend  westward  from  the  head  of  Bradore  Bay. 

Belles  Amours  Point  will  be  easily  recogni/.e<l,  being  a  mound  of 
bare  granite,  GO  or  70  feet  high,  at  tlie  SI'),  extremity  of  the  low  penin- 
sula separating  the  harbor  of  the  same  name  from  Middle  Bay. 

Belles  Amours  Harbor. — Stony  Point,  which  is  low  and  green,  aud 
Flat  Uocks,  which  lie  off  it  1^  miles  southeastward,  form  the  east  side 
of  the  channel  between  them  aud  Belles  Amours  Point,  leading  north- 
ward to  Belles  Amours  Harbor. 

Shoal. — Nearly  midway  between  Belles  Amours  Point  and  Flat 
Uocks  lies  a  rocky  patch  with  13  feet  least  water.  Between  this  patch 
and  the  point  there  are  other  patches  with  li^  fathoms,  which  is  as 
much  water  as  can  be  counted  on  through  the  western  pa^isage. 

Niobe  ShoaL — A  dangerous  shoal  lies  about  400  yards  to  the  west- 
ward of  Flat  Hocks,  ou  the  eastern  side  of  the  east  passage,  into  Belles 
Amours  Harbor.  ()i;  the  edges  of  the  shoal  the  rock  inside  Harbor 
Point  was  touching  the  point. 

The  soundings  are  extremely  irregular  and  the  ground  foul  in  the 
East  Passage. 

Harbor  Point  is  about  1^  miles  within  Belles  Amours  Point,  and  on 
the  west  side  is  a  bare  granite  hill,  about  loO  feet  high,  with  several 
beacons  of  stones  upon  it,  which  are  erected  upon  almost  every  hill, 
and  are  said  to  be  for  the  guidance  of  travelers  in  winter.  Tlie  shore 
between  these  points  incloses  a  large  and  shallow  pond,  the  center  of 
which  is  within  Pond  Point.  The  shoal  water  extends  off  on  this  side 
300  yards  from  the  high-water  mark.  The  NVV.  side  of  Harbor  Point 
is  of  sand,  extending  (together  with  a  Hat  which  dries  at  low  water) 
partly  across  the  inner  entrance  of  the  harbor.  Northward  of  Harbor 
Point,  and  at  a  distance  of  about  160  yards,  th^^re  is  a  small  rock  always 
above  water ;  200  yards  farther  out  in  the  same  direction  lies  another 
small  rock,  which  dries  only  at  low  water.  There  is  no  passage  for 
vessels  of  auj*  size  between  these  rocks  aud  Harbor  Point.  On  the 
east  side  of  the  entrance  the  shoal  water  and  large  stones  extend  from 
Stony  Point  northward  to  the  point  of  the  North  Cove,  which  is  only 
fit  for  boats. 

VSTater  may  be  obtained  in  the  NW.  corner  of  Belles  Amours  Har. 
bor  aud  also  from  a  considerable  stream  at  the  head  of  the  North  Cove, 


■V-.,,Ji4,.Wk'W* 


ViS 


(IRANI)  roiNT  TO  caim:  whittle. 


I 


i 


H 


vIhih'  tlu'MMin*  11  («vv  tn't'H ;  Imt  wooil  for  f'lHil  Is  v«m\v  noiirco  on  tliis  (ioiiit. 

Directiona. — To  t^itur  lt«^ll«>H  Aiiioiii'm  llurbor  by  tlio  (MiHfi'^rti  pii'i- 
Miin«',  Mtt'or  N.ACP  W.,Ho  »H  to  piiHH  iJ  iiiil(>  to  tim  woMtwiii'd  of  tlio  Kliit 
HoitkH.  (Jontiniio  tliiM  coiii-Hii  until  tliu  oiiMt  hIiIo  of  llnrlior  Point  Ih 
)i|*|>roit(;li)Ml  witliin  liOO  yiinls;  tlitMi  Ht«'«r  X.  .T*''  \V.  till  tli«  niintly  part 
of  tUii  point  is  opiMiiMl  out,  or  tiid  vt^ssi'l  is  alu'iMiit  of  liiu  rork  al)ovi^ 
water  otr  it,  wIkmi  hIio  must  haul  a  little  to  the  westwaid,  ho  an  to  brin^ 
the  oitNt  Hiilf  of  Harbor  Point  and  Pond  Point  in  one.  Keep  tlieni  in  line, 
n  order  to  nnirnl  the  north  extrenu^  ol'  the  flat,  until  Mark  Point  (tlie 
extreme  on  the  north  side  within  the  harlxtr)  (tomes  on  with  Peak  Point 
(a  riwMy  point  in  .Middle  itay),  seen  over  the  low  land  at  the  head  of 
the  harbor,  and  bearing  H.  (14^  VV.  As  soon  as  this  nnirk  ecnne.".  on, 
haul  sharp  roiintl  to  tlit*  w*>stward,  keeping'  at  a  less  distance  than  1200 
yards  from  the  hi^li  north  shore  until  the  vessel  is  well  within  the 
sainly  spit,  when  she  may  haul  to  the  southward  and  ant^hor  anywhere, 
the  bottom  bein;;  of  mud  and  thei  de|itli  from  />  to  7  fathoms. 

To  enter  by  the  western  passajje,  whittli  is  preferable  with  a  westerly 
wind,  approaeh  Belles  Amours  I'oint  on  a  bearing;  nothin;;  to  the  east- 
ward of  N.  32'^  IC,  ami  taktunire  not  to  shut  in  Stony  I'oint  Ixdiind  it, 
for  tear  of  the  middle  ledges.  Pass  lielles  Amours  Point  at  a  distance 
of  too  yards,  and  (^o  no  nearer  the  shore  on  that  side  until  past  Pond 
Point ;  then  proceed  as  before  directed.  As  soon  us  the  marks  come 
on  for  hauling  into  the  harbor  to  the  westward,  put  the  helm  down  and 
Hhoot  the  vessel  in  as  far  as  she  will  go ;  then  let  go  the  anchor,  and 
warp  in  the  remainder  of  the  way.  It  is  only  with  easterly  and  south- 
erly winds  that  a  vessel  can  sail  in.  The  bottom  is  good  for  anchoring 
outside  Harbor  Point,  but  not  outside  Stony  Point. 

Middle  Point,  which  has  several  rocjks  oft'  it  200  yards  to  the  west 
and  south,  lies  rather  more  than  1^  miles  from  Belles  Amours  Point. 

Middle  Ledges  lie  to  the  southward  of  Middle  Point.  Several  of 
these  ledges  dry  at  low  water,  but  the  outermost,  which  is  1,200  yards 
ot!"  shore,  has  l.'i  feet  least  water.  There  is  no  safe  passage  between 
these  and  the  shore. 

Five  Leagues  Point  is  the  SW.  extreme  of  another  low  but  smaller 
peninsula,  separating  Five  Leagues  Harbor  from  Middle  Bay.  On  this 
peninsula,  fj  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  extremity  of  the  point,  there 
is  a  precipitous  hill  nearly  200  feet  high,  which  marks  the  position  of 
Five  Leagues  Harbor  from  the  westward. 

Leagues  and  Barrier  Reefs. — Leagues  Reef,  ott'  Five  Leagues  Point, 
is  partly  above  water,  and  extends  ^  mile  to  the  southward,  and  the  two 
Barrier  Reets  extend  to  the  distance  of  1'^  miles  to  the  south  westward 
of  the  same  point,  but  are  not  Joined  to  it.  The  south  extremes  of 
Middle  and  Belles  Amours  Points  in  line,  lead  ff  mile  to  the  southward 
of  the  Barrier  Reefs. 

Middle  Bay  is  a  tine  open  roadstead,  free  from  all  danger,  more  than 
a  mile  wide,  and  extending  inland  2  miles  to  the  northward.    lu  the 


I     11  ■ 


a:    :< 


MIDDLK    HAY — KHCJjITIMArX    IHLANDH. 


121) 


ii-il  of  Mii^  Flat 
arhiM'  I'oiiit  iit 
liK  Miiiiily  part 
liu  nxtk  ahovo 
,  HO  an  to  briii^ 

>|)  tlllMII  ill  lilH>, 

ink  I'oiiit  (tlio 
itii  IVak  Point 

lit  tllM  luMul  of 
lark  (tonic.",  on, 
r.aii<'(>  tlian  L*(M) 
n\\\  wiMiiii  Mio 
lior  aii,vwlntr«, 

IMlH. 

ntli  a  westi'i'Iy 
n^  to  tlie  cuMt- 
'oiiit  boliiiul  it, 
t  at  a  (liHtancu 
ilil  past  Pond 
[i«^  niai'kH  come 
lelni  down  and 
HI  anchor,  and 
rly  and  south- 
for  anchoring 

ds  to  the  west 
lourH  Point, 
t.    Several  of 
in  1,200  yards 
4sage  between 

■w  but  smaller 
Bay.  On  this 
0  point,  there 
he  position  of 

leagues  Point, 
1,  and  the  two 
)uth  westward 
extremes  of 
le  southward 

er,  more  tlian 
irard.    In  the 


outer  pari  of  the  bay,  for  the  llrst  mile  in,  the  shore,  on  either  side, 
should  not  be  appi'oa<tlicd  nearer  than  .'100  yards,  but  farther  in  it  l» 
4piite  bold,  excepting  in  the  heads  of  the  coves,  The  depth  (»f  water  iu 
this  bay  is  IVoiii  4  to  13  fathoms  over  mindy  bottom. 

West  Cove  is  a  mile  within  the  entranire  on  tlie  west  side  of  Mi(ldli> 
Hay.  Its  tiead  is  separated  by  a  low  and  swampy  isthnnis  trotn  Kive 
Leagues  Harbor.  In  tin;  month  of  this  «;ov(t,  in  4  fathoms,  in  the  an- 
clioragt^  with  westerly  winds. 

Shallop  Cove,  on  the  east  si<le  of  Middh^  Hay,  is  only  lit  for  boats. 

Peak  Point  is  forked;  its  s«mth  extremity  is  a  ragged  isolated 
mound  or  peak  ;  ami  otf  its  west  side,  at  the  distance  of  100  yards,  there 
is  a  large  rock  above  wat(*r. 

lathmusCove  is  a  small  place,  in  which  two  or  three  llshing  vessels 
are  occasionally  moored,  under  a  reef  which  extends  from  the  south 
side  of  the  cove  northward  towards  Peak  Point.  The  reef  atVords  in- 
ditVerent  shelter  with  8VV.  winds,  which  blow  right  in  with  a  heavy  sea. 
The  entraiKM'  between  the  reef  and  Peak  Point  is  only  140  yards  wide; 
neither  is  there  much  more  room  between  thu  reef  and  the  shore  to  the 
eastward. 

To  enter  Isthmus  Uove,  Peak  Point  must  be  kept  close  aboard;  and 
when  the  vessel  is  100  yards  past  it  to  the  eastward,  haul  her  sharp 
round  to  the  southward  between  the  reef  and  the  shore.  The  part  of 
the  cove  which  runs  in  to  the  northward  of  Peak  Point  is  ipiite  shoal 

Water  may  be  obtained  in  Isthmus  Cove,  as  well  as  in  the  head  of 
Middle  Hay,  where  there  are  a  few  small  trees. 

Five  Leagues  Harbor  is  altogether  unfit  for  anything  larger  than  a 
schooner  of  100  tons.  A  8VV.  wind  rolls  in  a  considerable  swell,  and 
there  would  be  no  lying  there  if  it  were  not  for  the  indifferent  shelter 
afforded  by  the  Barrier  Reefs  ott"  its  mouth.  The  channels  leading  in 
are  about  000  yards  wide,  and  on  either  side  of  the  Barrier  Reefs. 

There  is  also  a  channel  \  mile  wide  between  the  two  Barrier  Keefs, 
but  they  overlap  in  such  a  way  as  to  make  it  diftlcult  for  a  stranger 
There  are  parts  of  each  of  them  that  dry  at  low  water,  and  the  sea 
almost  always  breaks  on  them. 

Salmon  Bay. — Salmon  islet  lies  close  to  the  SE.  extreme  of  Caribou 
Island,  off  which  the  shoal  water  extends  nearly  J  mile  to  the  eastward. 
Carril)ou  Island  can  not  be  distinguished  from  the  mainland  from  a 
vessel  off  the  coast.  The  eastern  entrance  to  Salmon  Bay  has  a  depth 
of  only  0  feet  in  It  at  low  water.  The  other  entrance  to  this  deep  bay 
is  from  Bonne  Esperance  round  to  thenorthward  of  Caribou  Island. 

Esquimaux  Islands  are  bare  of  trees,  excepting  some  of  those  which 
are  far  in  near  the  mainland.  Off  these  islands  lie  many  small  rocks 
and  ledges,  the  outermost  of  which  are  fully  4  miles  from  the  mainland 
To  attempt  to  describe  all  these  islands,  or  all  the  channels  between 
them,  would  be  an  endless  task  ;  and  a  good  chart,  upon  a  large  scale, 
will  in  most  cases  be  far  more  useful  than  any  written  description. 
5489 9 


? 


.■flte'ot»#iof*.i5i*v«-  - 


j^33C^5cr^ 


"  ^' 


i  Ml' 


130 


GRAND    POINT    TO    CAPE    WHITTLE. 


Whale  Island  is  about  ^  mile  loug,  aiid  about  ^  mile  broad.  It 
does  not  exceed  100  feet  iu  height,  in  the  iii^he.st  part,  which  is  around 
hill  near  the  center  of  the  ishmd,  on  whicli  there  is  a  beacon,  or  pile  of 
stones,  supporting  a  pole  of  driftwood  30  f»'t't  high. 

All  vessels  bound  to  Bonne  Bsperance  endeavor  to  make  this  island. 
There  are  rocits,  botli  above  and  under  wiiter,  extending  G()()  .yards  ott' 
the  south  point  of  Whale  Island  ;  but  off  its  NE.  point  the  shoal  water 
readies  only  to  the  distance  of  loO  yards.  There  is  also  a  ledge,  with  9 
feet  water,  lying  SW.  700  yanls  from  its  SVV.  point;  and  there  are 
several  rocks,  dry  at  low  water,  lying  200  yards  ott  shore,  on  tUe  east 
side  of  the  same  point. 

Bonne  Esperance  Harbor. — The  ishmds  whicli  form  the  harbor  of 
Bonne  Esperance  are  steep,  and  of  bare  granite ;  the  largest  of  them 
look  much  higher  than  they  really  are,  an  effect  which  is  also  owing  to 
the  contrast  of  the  much  lower  islands  to  the  westward  of  them.  There 
are  none  of  them  higher  than  200  feet  above  the  sea,  and  there  are  bea- 
cons or  j)iles  of  stones  upon  almost  every  summit. 

The  Main  Channel  leading  to  this  harbor  is  between  (ioddard  and 
Beacon  Islets,  Goddurd  Islet  being  the  westernmost  of  two  low  islets 
joined  by  a  reef  to  tlie  SW.  extreme  of  Caribou  Island. 

Bold  Rock,  at  the  end  of  a  reef  extending  270  yards  off"  the  south  point 
of  Goddard  Islet,  is  small,  always  above  water,  and  quite  bold.  God- 
dard  Rock,  which  is  also  small,  and  dries  only  at  low  water,  bears  S. 
35°  E.,  atul  is  distant  700  yards  from  the  same  point.  These  are  the 
only  dangers  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  channel.  On  the  western  side 
Beacon  Islet,  which  is  low,  about  250  yards  long,  and  with  a  pile  of  stones 
on  its  summit,  will  be  seen  bearing  S.  38°  W.,  nearly  a  mile  from  God- 
dard Islet.  Tail  Islet  lies  800  yards  to  the  south,  and  Lark  and  another 
low  islet  to  the  northward  of  Beacon  Islet,  but  they  are  out  of  the  way. 
To  the  southwestward  of  Beacon  Islet,  and  distant  ^  mile,  is  Red  Head 
Island,  from  which  Whale  Island  bears  S.  32°  W.,  and  is  distant  nearly 
a  mile.  Fish  Islet,  a  large  low  rock,  lies  between  the  two  last-named 
islands. 

Within  Red  Head  Island,  and  lying  in  a  line  to  the  northward,  are 
Chain  and  Bonne  Esperance  Islands,  the  former  being  two  peninsulas, 
joined  together  by  a  narrow  stony  isthmus,  and  the  latter  being  150  feet 
high  and  ^  mile  long.  Lion  Island  is  distant  ^  mile  to  the  eastward 
from  Bonne  Esperance  Island,  and  there  is  a  low  islet  and  a  narrow 
and  difficult  3-fathoms  channel  between  them.  Off"  the  east  side  of 
Lion  Island,  and  at  the  distance  of  100  yards,  lies  Whelp  Rock,  always 
above  water.  Between  this  rock  on  the  west  and  Goddard  and  Cari- 
bou Islands  on  the  east,  may  be  termed  the  inner  entrance  from  the 
Main  Channel ;  it  is  900  yards  wide,  and  has  from  10  to  13  fathoms 
water,  over  rock,  sand,  and  mud  bottom. 

Western  Side.— Watch  Rock,  small,  and  always  shows,  lies  i 
mile  to  the  northeastward  of  Beacon  Islet,  and  at  the  same  distance 


'■'^'"-•■^""'^■•'■^  •fBTftmrimit' 


LE, 

lit  J^  mile  broad.  It 
•art,  which  is  around 
J  a  beacon,  or  pile  of 

to  make  this  island. 
3nding  000  yards  off 
»oint  tlie  shoal  water 
8  also  a  led {j^e,  with  9 
>irit;  and  there  are 
If  shore,  on  the  east 

!  form  the  harbor  of 
the  largest  of  them 
Inch  is  also  owing  to 
ard  of  them.  There 
I,  and  there  are  bea- 

woen  (xoddiird  and 
St  of  two  low  islets 
and. 

Is  off  the  south  point 
1  quite  bold.  God- 
low  water,  bears  8. 
»iut.  These  are  the 
)n  the  western  side 
with  a  pile  of  stones 
\y  a  mile  from  God- 
d  Lark  and  another 
are  out  of  the  way. 
^  mile,  is  Red  Head 
nd  is  distant  nearly 
the  two  last-named 

the  northward,  are 
ing  two  peninsulas, 
latter  being  150  feet 
le  to  the  eastward 
islet  and  a  narrow 
>tt"  the  east  side  of 
t^help  Rock,  always 
Goddard  and  Carl- 
entrance  from  the 
1  10  to  13  fathoms 

s-ays  shows,  lies  ^ 
the  same  distance 


BONNE    ESPERAXCE    HARBOR. 


--     131 


to   he  northward  of  ,t,  and  to  the  eastward  of  Link  Islet  lies  Breakin^r 
Ledge,  Which  .,ast  covers  at  high  water.    The  only  other  da  .gerT  '"d 
they  are  only  dangerous  to  a  vessel  of  largo  draft    .ir."  t  vn   i  f^'n 
patches,  the  easternmost  of  which  (Middle' Pat'^l''  he  rs  S    ^Tl 
mile  from  Beacon  Island;  and  the  other  (Whale  Patch),  N  to     "  l 
m,  e  from  the  beacon  on  Whale  Island.     Thie  is  foul  and  rooky  Juua 
with  from  5  to  10  fi.thoms  between  these  patches,  which  ma^  b    avoi     d 
by  a  vessel  approaching  the  harbor  from  the  westward,  by  not  c^n 
in  o  a  less  depth  than  10  fathoms  until  the  leading  maks         l  a X.: 
into  the  harbor  come  on.  ^-^^  uu  naiiiiug 

at  ojf  ?r~^^  ^'  *"^''  ''.^*"''  ^""  ^"^^  ''l'''^"^'^.  at  Bonne  Esperance  Harbor 
at  Oh.  ir^ra. ;  springs  rise  5  feet,  neaps  2^  feet 

Directions  through  Main  ChanneL-Being  off  the  coast  to  th'^  east- 
ward,  and  with  an  easterly  wind,  stand  in  towards  Caribou  Island   the 
position  ot-  which  with  respect  to  Whale  Island  has  bee,    p     "    '^^^ 
When  a   the  .listance  of  J  nnle  from  the  south  side  of  Caribou     he  ves 
.e   will  be  in  10  fothoms  water,  and  the  south  sides  of  Beacon  and  Red 

^:i^^:fmo7V'''  ^'  ^'^"  ''''''^  ''''  '^  --'  to  come  iu 
line   bearing  S  00°  W.     Bear  up  upon  this  leading  mark,  or  if  not  sure 

of  the  island,  steer  S.  55o  w.  with  the  lead  going  and  a  good  ookout 
for  Goddard  Rock  Island.  The  depth  will  bt  about  9  fathoms  at  low 
water  until  the  vessel  is  past  that  rock,  when  it  will  deepen  suck  enl^ 
into  15  or  19  fathoms,  and  she  will  then  be  in  the  channel  '"'^"'^ 

The  vessel  must  now  haul  in  immediately  N.  20°  W.,  and  Whelp 
Rock  wil  be  seen  right  ahead,  and  iu  line  with  the  west  s  de  of  Hou  e 
Island,  which  IS  low,  has  a  house  upon  it,  difficult  to  be  seen  and  lies 

nf  .H    «,w     '"  "^'/  '^''  '""^'^  ""'  ^'''^"""'  ^»*'  ^I'^"  past  Bold  Rock 
off  the  SW  pom   of  Goddard  Island,  haul  a  little  f.>  the  eastward  so 

1 1  n-,T     "  r?"^^  '  '^^^'  "'  '''  >'^'-^«-    ^«  -«"  as  the  vessel    s 
wi^hm  Uns  rock,  bear  up  S.  77°  W.,  and  run  along  the  inner  sides  of 
Lion  and  Bonne  Esperance  Islands,  passing  between  the  latterand  An 
chor  Islana  into  the  harbor,   between  Bonne  Esperance  amf  Grfni 
Islands,  and  where  the  depth  is  from  12  to  16  fathoms  over  muddy  bot 

Whnt'fi''  ^^T  rffT**  ""''^  ^  ''^'^''^^  ^^•"^»'  l^ass  the  south  point  of 
oT  N  I^o'f  t  *^^,t*^r;  «*•  ^  ""•«'  steering  none  to  the  northward 
IT'  f  ;■  r^  ^''^'''  "'^  ^■^'^''^'^'^  P'^t^'^^^'  ""til  Whelp  Rock  and  the 
wes  side  of  House  Island  is  brought  in  line  bearing  N.  20o  W  •  then 
haul  in  upon  that  bearing,  and  proceed  as  before,  excepting  in'dise  of 
the  wind  not  being  free  enough  to  allow  of  passing  between  Bonne  Es 
Perance  and  Anchor  Islands.  In  this  case  a  vessel  must  go  Znd  to 
the  nortbward.of  Anchor  Island,  and  must  not  haul  up  higher  than  K 
Oio  W.,  nor  close  in  the  Whelp  Rock  with  theSW.  extreme  of  Goddard 


■.-i:'->;*sfi^"\"-ViJ>4»?i*=T-. " 


loJ  GRAND   POINT    TO   CAPE   WHITTLE. 

Island,  iiutil  she  is  past  Anchor  Reef,  which  covers  at  high  water,  ami 
lies  400  yards  to  the  northeastward  of  Anchor  Island,  and  is  the  only 
detached  danger  within  the  bay. 

Esquimaux  Channel  leads  direct  to  the  eastern  entrance  of  Esqui- 
maux Bay ;  ic  should  be  approached  through  Whale  Channel,  between 
Whale  and  Tent  Islands,  the  latter  island  being  the  next  westward  of 
the  former.  Whale  Channel  is  J  mile  wide,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  10 
to  18  fathoms  water. 

The  course  through  the  center  of  Whale  Channel  to  the  entrance  of 
Esquimaux  Channel  is  N.4o  E.  Esquimaux  Channel  is  between  Grand 
and  Fair  Islands  on  the  east,  and  Spit  and  Stone  Islands  on  the  west ; 
between  the  inner  islands  (Pair  and  Stone)  is  the  narrowest  part,  only 
150  yards  wide,  and  with  5  fathoms  water.  In  passing  through  this, 
the  equally  narrow  entrance  to  Esquimaux  Bay  will  be  seen  and  the 
vessel  must  stand  close  over  to  it,  before  she  hauls  to  the  eastward 
through  the  NW.  channel  into  Bonne  Esperance  Bay.  Then  keeping 
within  200  yards  of  the  main  shore,  to  avoid  the  shoal  which  extends 
from  Fair  Island  fully  half  way  across  the  channel,  she  should  '^teer 
for  the  south  side  of  the  small  and  high  Star  Island,  and  passing  close 
to  it  continue  her  course  towards  Anchor  Island  till  past  the  shoal, 
which  extends  400  yards  off  Grand  Island,  when  she  may  haul  to  the 
southward  into  the  harbor.  Esquimaux  Channel  is  the  only  other  be- 
sides Main  Channel  which  has  water  enough  for  large  ships,  but  it  is 
too  narrow  for  vessels  of  ordinary  size  excepting  incases  of  emergency. 

West  Channel,  lying  between  Spit  and  Stone  Island  on  the  east, 
and  Esquimaux  Island  proper  on  the  west,  has  a  bar  with  only  2  fathoms 
water  across  from  Stone  Island  to  a  point  on  the  western  side  of  the 
east  entrance  to  Esquimaux  Bay. 

Esquimaux  Bay.— The  eastern  entrance  to  Esquimaux  Bay  is  by  a 
very  narrow  channel  between  the  island  and  mainland  to  the  eastward, 
which  opens  into  a  wide  space  with  two  islets  in  it.  But  if  the  mainland 
to  the  eastward  be  followed,  it  will  lead  to  the  entrance  of  the  Esquimaux 
Eiver,  where  Mr.  Chevalier's  house  and  trading  post  will  be  seen  ou  a 
sandy  point,  backed  with  spruce  trees.  The  river  is  navigated  by  canoes 
for  many  miles  inland,  and  abounds  with  salmon. 

Only  small  schooners  can  pass  through  the  narrow  channel  between 
Esquimaux  Island  and  the  main  to  the  eastward,  but  there  is  water 
enough  for  larger  vessels  to  the  westward  of  the  island.  We  must, 
however,  refer  to  the  chart  for  this  route,  for  it  would  be  quite  impos- 
sible to  convey  any  intelligible  idea  of  such  an  intricate  navigation 
through  such  a  multitude  of  islands. 

Old  Fort  Bay.— Fort  Rocks  are  a  number  of  low  rocks  extending  § 
mile  to  the  SW.  from  the  SW.  point  of  Old  Fort  Island,  which  is  of  a 
very  moderate  height,  and  about  1^  miles  in  diameter.  From  this  island 
a  number  of  smaller  islands  extend  northward  into  the  mouth  of  Esqui- 
maux Bay.    There  are  also  a  number  of  steep  and  high  islands  ex- 


'^•*^ 


OLD  FORT  BAY — PERIL  ROCK. 


133 


igh  water,  atul 
iiid  is  the  only 

ance  of  Esqui- 
auuel,  between 
xt  westward  of 
epth  of  from  10 

he  entrance  of 
between  Grand 
Is  on  tlie  west ; 
west  part,  only 

through  this, 
)  seen  and  the 
)  the  eastward 

Then  keeping 
[  which  extends 
he  should  steer 
id  passing  close 
past  the  shoal, 
lay  haul  to  the 
J  only  other  be- 

ships,  but  it  is 
s  of  emergency, 
^nd  on  the  east, 
1  only  2  fathoms 
itern  side  of  the 

aux  Bay  is  by  a 
to  the  eastward, 
if  the  mainland 
the  Esquimaux 
ill  be  seen  on  a 
jated  by  canoes 

lannel  between 

there  is  water 

,nd.    We  must, 

be  quite  impos- 

ate  navigation 

eks  extending  % 
d,  which  is  of  a 
rom  this  island 
nouth  of  Esqui- 
ligh  islands  ex- 


tending northwestward  from  Old  Fort  Island  across  the  bay  of  tlie 
same  name.  There  are  deep-water  channels  leading  to  Old  Fort  Hay 
between  the  islands  last  mentioned,  but  too  intricate  for  a  written  de- 
scription to  be  useful. 

Old  Fort  Channel  leads  in  from  sea  between  the  Fort  Rocks  and 
Mermot  Islet,  and  fartiier  in  between  Old  Fort  Island  and  Channel 
Island;  which  last,  together  with  Crumb  Island  to  the  northward,  must 
be  kept  close  aboard  until  a  vessel  is  in  the  wide  and  open  space  within 
the  islands  and  oti"  the  mouth  of  Old  Fort  Bay.  This  wide  opening 
through  the  outer  islands  is  the  only  navigable  one  besides  Whale 
Channel.  Through  it  vessels  may  run  in  between  the  islands  in  the  way 
just  mentioned,  or  westward  between  the  Dog  Islands  and  the  main  ; 
but  this  we  must  leave  the  chart  to  explain.  In  some  places  between 
the  islands  there  's  more  than  50  fathoms  water,  and  the  nearer  the 
main  the  fewer  the  ledges. 

Dog  Islands. — To  the  northward  of  Mermot  Islet  is  the  Eider  (rroup, 
and  westward  of  them  the  Dog  Islands,  surrounded  by  rocks  and  in- 
numerable ledges.  The  outermost  of  these  rocks  lies  4  miles  S.  73o 
W.  from  the  outermost  Fort  Rock.  The  southwesternmost  of  the  Dog 
Islands  are  very  low,  but  tlie  highest  islands  next  the  main,  although 
small,  are  of  considerable  elevation.  There  is  good  anchorage  between 
them  and  the  main,  but  it  can  only  be  got  at  easily  by  running  down 
with  a  westerly  wind  from  Shecatica,  close  along  the  mainland,  and  in 
the  channel  between  the  latter  and  the  scattered  rocks  and  ledges 
which  lie  off  it,  where  there  is  very  deep  water  the  whole  way. 

Porpoise  Rocks  are  two  or  three  small  black  rocks  above  water, 
lying  S.  77°  W.,  3^  miles  from  the  outer  Dog  Rocks. 

Tlie  Boulet,  ah.  't,  259  yards  in  diameter,  is  a  smooth,  round-backed 
islet,  green  at  th  ;'t<>  •'  •'  "''"iit  70  feet  in  height.  Together  with  the 
opening  to  Lobster  ,  ,  'hich  bears  from  it  N.  32°  E.  IJ  miles,  it  serves 
to  point  out  the  p  ,o..;»on  of  a  vessel  off  the  coast.  Ciab  Islai.ul  is  J 
mile  NW.  from  it,  and  the  Four  Rocks  (within  which  is  Inner  IsU>t)  3 
miles  to  the  westward.  These  are  the  only  islets  between  it  and  She- 
catica ;  but  there  are  many  rocks  and  ledges  between  them,  and  also  off 
the  Bonlet,  to  seaward. 

Peril  Rock,  which  is  very  small,  dries  at  half  tide,  and  lies  J^  miles 
S.  13°  E.  from  the  Bonlet,  is  the  outermost  and  greatest  danger  off" this 
part  of  the  coast;  the  sea,  however,  almost  always  breaks  upon  it,  and 
also  upon  the  others  which  lie  between  it  and  the  Four  '.locks.  There 
is  no  warning  by  the  hand  lead  in  approaching  any  of  these  rocks. 

Lobster  and  Rocky  Bays  are  two  narrow  inlets  extending  to  the 
northward  between  steep,  rocky  shores.  There  is  deep  water  at  the 
entrance  to  both  of  them,  diminishing  gradually  towards  the  head.  One 
mile  within  the  entrance  of  Rocky  Bay,  on  the  east  side,  there  is  a  house 
and  a  tish  stage,  off  which  there  is  anchorage  in  5  fathoms,  muddy  bot- 
tom, well  sheltered  from  all  winds. 


1, 


I 


184 


GRAND    POINT   TO    CAPE    WHITTIE. 


Napetepee  Bay  ia  a  straight  aud  uarrow  iulet,  very  similar  to  Lob- 
ster Bav.  Its  entrance  is  about  li  miles  uortliwartl  of  tlie  Four  Rocks, 
wiiicli,  togetlier  with  the  Inner  Islet  just  within  tiiem,  must  be  left  to 
the  eastward  in  approaching  this  bay.  In  ,3ntering  Napetepee  Bay  a 
vessel  must  ])ass  200  yards  to  the  westward  of  some  rocks  above  water, 
b'iiiR  jii^^  within  the  mouth  of  the  bay.  At  the  distance  of  1^  miles* 
within  the  entrance,  ti'ere  is  a  small  islet ;  pass  to  the  westward  of  it, 
when  the  east  shore  must  be  kept  close  aboard  until  through  the  Nar- 
rows. Several  small  streams  run  into  this  bay ;  but  the  principal 
stream  is  on  the  east  side,  |  mile  from  its  head,  and  is  the  outlet  of  a 
considerable  lake,  which  can  not  easily  be  entered  by  boat  excepting  at 
high  water.    A  river  abounding  with  salmon  enters  this  lake. 

Directions. — The  three  bays  just  described  have  no  dangers  in  them, 
but  they  are,  nevertheless,  by  no  means  desirable  places  for  vessels  to 
go  into,  being  so  narrow,  and  having  such  deep  water.  Besides,  a  sail- 
ing vessel  can  not  get  out  of  them  without  a  northerly  wind,  which  in 
the  summer  months  seldom  occurs.  Lobster  and  Rocky  Bays  are  pref- 
erable to  Napetepee;  and  the  safe  and  proper  way  of  approaching  them 
is  from  the  westward,  with  a  westerly  wind,  passing  inshore  between 
Shecatica  and  the  Four  Rocks,  aud  then  eastward  close  along  the  main- 
land. 

The  Inner  Channel,  between  the  islets  and  the  mainland,  is  not  less 
than  600  ya^ds  wide,  and  the  depth  of  water  is  from  33  to  4S  fathoms, 
over  muddy  bottom.  This  deep-water  channel,  close  along  the  main- 
land, free  from  all  dangers,  continues  eastward  all  the  way  to  the  Dog 
Islands.  Vessels  might  pass  between  the  latter  and  the  Porpoise  Rocks 
in  clear  weather,  when  shoal  water  could  be  readily  seen,  and  when 
there  is  a  sea  running  heavy  enough  to  break  upon  the  ledges,  but  the 
other  is  the  safer  plan  of  proceeding. 

Shecatica  and  Mistanoque  He  close  to  the  mainland,  and  would  be 
difficult  to  distinguish  from  it  if  it  were  not  for  the  Boulet  and  the 
opening  of  Na|)etepee  to  the  eastward  aud  the  Shag  Islet  to  the  west- 
ward. Shecatica  is  the  eastern,  the  smaller,  and  the  higher  island  of 
the  two,  being  ^  mile  long  and  150  feet  high. 

Mistanoque  Island,  separated  from  Shecatica  by  an  unnavigable 
channel  300  yards  wide,  is  nearly  1^  miles  long,  parallel  to  the  coast ; 
broken  into  coves  on  the  outside,  and  in  the  highest  part  120  feet  above 
the  sea.  Mistanoque  Bay,  the  mouth  of  which  is  about  300  yards  wide 
with  a  depth  of  23  faihoms  in  the  entrance,  expands  to  the  breadth  of 
550  yards  within  and  runs  inland  rather  more  than  3  miles  nortliward. 
It  is  not  until  a  vessel  arrives  within  less  than  ^  mile  of  its  head  that 
the  depth  decreases  so  as  to  be  convenient  for  anchoring.  The  bottom 
is  everywhere  of  mud  ;  there  are  no  dangers,  and  wood  and  water  are 
plentiful. 

Mistanoque  Harbor,  though  small  aud  with  inconveniently  deep 
water,  is  a  valuable  harbor.    It  is  situated  directly  opposite  the  mouth 


MISTANOQUE    AND   CUMBERLAND   HARBORS. 


135 


similar  to  Lob- 
tlie  Four  Uocks, 

must  be  left  to 
apetepee  Bay  a 
ks  above  water, 
,nce  of  1^  miles ) 
westward  of  it, 
lirougb  tlie  Nar- 
it  the  principal 
s  the  outlet  of  a 
>at  excepting  at 
s  lake. 

[angers  in  tbem, 
es  for  vessels  to 

Besides,  a  sail- 
'  wind,  which  in 
y  Bays  are  pref- 
tproaching  them 
inshore  between 
along  the  main- 

iland,  is  not  less 
3  to  48  fathoms, 
ilong  the  main- 
way  to  the  Dog 
Porpoise  Rocks 
seen,  and  when 
ledges,  but  the 

d,  and  would  be 
Boulet  and  the 
ilet  to  the  west- 
igher  island  of 

iu  unnavigable 
to  the  coast ; 
120  feet  above 
300  yards  wide 
the  breadth  of 
les  nortijward. 

)f  its  bead  that 
.  The  bottom 
and  water  are 

veniently  deep 
osite  the  mouth 


of  the  bay,  and  has  a  depth  of  from  15  to  20  fathoms  ;  farther  to  the 
eastward  the  depth  is  12  fathoms,  but  the  channel  is  narrow  ;  vessels 
must  moor  in  any  case. 

Enter  and  Diver  Islets  are  both  low.  To  the  west  of  them,  at  the 
distance  of  800  yards,  lies  a  group  of  small  islands. 

Directions.  — No  other  directions  seem  necessary  than  to  run  through 
the  center  of  either  passage  which  may  be  preferred.  The  south  pas- 
sage between  Enter  Island  and  the  west  shore  of  Mistanoque  is,  how- 
ever, the  best  channel,  being  800  yards  wide  and  bold  to  the  rocks  on 
either  side.  On  arriving  at  the  west  passage  of  Mistanoque  Harbor, 
■give  the  NVV.  point  of  Mistanoque  a  berth  of  about  100  yards,  or  keep 
well  over  to  the  mainland  side  of  the  entrance ;  but  as  soon  as  the  ves- 
sel has  entered  this  narrow  channel,  keep  Mistanoque  aboaru,  because 
there  is  shoal  water  off  the  west  side  of  the  entrance  of  the  bay  to  the 
distance  of  60  yards. 

The  East  Passage,  off  the  northwest  point  of  Shecatica,  is  only  CO 
yards  wiile  and  has  only  3  fatliomi)  water  in  it. 

Shag  Islet,  bearing  S.  44°  W.  7^  miles  from  Mistanoque,  is  the  best 
guide  for  making  the  latter  from  tije  westward,  as  the  Boulet  is  from 
the  eastward.  Shag  Islet  is  small  and  high,  with  a  round  peaked  hill 
looking  green  in  the  middle.  There  are  many  rocks  off  to  the  eastward 
of  this  islet,  the  outermost  of  which,  distant  from  the  islet  2  miles,  is 
Shag  Rock. 

Aspect  of  Coast. — The  coast  between  Mistanoque  and  Cape  Mecat- 
tina  is  broken  into  large  bays  and  inlets,  between  large  islands  of  mod- 
erate height  above  the  sea,  and  partially  covered  with  moss.  Many 
smaller  islands,  islets,  and  rocks  are  interspersed,  and  outside  all  the 
coast  is  lined  with  small  islets,  rocks,  or  ledges,  in  grou|.:\  or  scattered 
here  and  there.  The  greatest  diflQculty  is  to  pass  safely  throuj,  i  between 
the  last ;  for  within  the  islands,  in  most  of  the  channels  and  wide  spaces 
between  them,  as  well  as  in  the  bays  of  the  utainland,  there  is  a  great 
depth  of  water,  amounting  in  one  or  two  places  to  50  or  60,  and  often 
exceeding  30  fathoms.  In  these  deep-water  channels  and  bays,  which 
are  so  intricate  as  to  defy  any  attempt  at  a  written  description,  small 
rocks  are  not  nearly  so  numerous  as  they  are  outside,  and  are  for  the 
most  part  above  water. 

From  Shecatica  Bay  to  Ba-Ha  Bay  the  mainland  does  not  appear,  as 
the  i»»land8,  great  and  small,  and  of  different  heights  above  the  sea,  are 
so  numerous  and  so  near  together,  that  the  coast  can  not  be  distinguished 
till  a  vessel  is  among  them. 

Cumberland  Harbor,  the  entrance  to  which  is  between  Dukes 
Island  on  the  west  and  the  Cumberland  Island  on  the  east,  is  known 
by  a  high  hill  on  the  mainland  about  lOJ  es  north  from  the  entrance- 
That  hill  is  the  highest  in  the  neighborho^v.,  and  resembles  a  castle  at 
the  top,  having  steep  cliff's  like  walls.  The  islands  forming  the  harbor 
are  of  moderate  height,  the  easternmost  making  in  two  round  hills. 


-rii(U^i*»J^6l(W?i>      ^*^'■ 


.  rt^rt-nE«£4^S^M>ud?<^£^?^Z^^3^^!^WlA« 


186 


OKANU    POINT   TO    CAPE    WHITTLE. 


rf'u 


»■  r!   • 


m 


This  iH  an  exoellenf  liarbor,  tlio  best  and  eaHiest  otacuess  on  the  coast. 
Good  water  can  be  ha<l  in  plenty  on  the  east  .side  of  the  harbor,  but  for 
wood  yon  niust  go  up  Shecatica  Bay,  which  lies  .'3  or  4  miles  to  the 
northeastward  of  tlie  harbor,  and  runs  inland  to  the  northward  many 
miles. 

Directions. — Cumberland  Harbor  should  be  approached  from  be- 
tween Siiufj  Hock  and  Three  Uocks.  There  is  no  danjjer  in  the  way 
but  what  appears  above  water,  exceptins:  a  small  rock  lyinj^  S.  2',i°  E., 
rather  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  west  point  of  entrance,  which  is  about 
400  yards  wide.  As  soon  as  the  vessel  is  within  its  outer  points,  haul 
over  t«)  the  west  side,  and  run  alonjj  it  to  the  inner  point  on  that  side, 
bearing  N.  52°  W.,  about  ^  mile  from  the  outer  east  |)oint  of  entrance. 
As  soon  as  she  arrives  there  she  may  haul  to  the  eastward  and  anchor 
anywhere  in  I'rom  7  to  20  fathoms  of  water  over  {jood  (ground. 

Sandy  Hprbor,  on  the  southern  shore  of  Bandy  Island,  is  a  safe  har- 
bor with  good  ground. 

Water. — There  is  no  wood  to  be  had  in  Sandy  Harbor,  but  plenty  of 
water. 

Directions.— On  approaching  oamly  Harbor  there  are  two  ledge» 
under  water  to  be  avoided.  The  first  of  these  bears  S.  55^  VV.  from 
iShag  Rock,  and  S.  35°  E.  from  Shag  Island,  being  distant  from  the  lat- 
ter one  mile.  The  second  bears  S.  43^  E.  nearly  a  mile  from  the  east 
side  of  Egg  Kocks,  and  S.  (56'^  W.  from  the  summit  of  Shag  Island.  A 
small  reef  with  shoal  water  extends  |  mile  from  Shag  Island  towards 
this  ledge,  leaving  a  deei>  channel  between  more  than  ij  mile  wide. 
The  course  through  the  (senter  of  this  channel,  direct  for  the  west  ex- 
treme of  Duke  Island,  is  N.  40°  W. 

To  enter  this  harbor  pass  to  the  eastward  of  Egg  Rocks,  and  keep 
the  west  extreme  of  Duke  Island,  which  bears  N.  10°  E.  more  than  J 
mile  from  Egg  Rocks,  aboard  ou  going  in.  A  small  rock  will  then  be 
seen  above  water  to  the  northwestward,  lying  over  towards  the  east 
side  of  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  Pass  ou  either  side  of  that  rock 
aud  then  steer  in  for  the  harbor,  there  being  nothing  in  the  way  but 
■what  appears. 

Port  Augustine  has  a  very  narrow  and  intricate  entrance,  aud  is  fit 
for  small  craft  only.  The  Augustine  Chain,  the  outermost  of  which  is 
a  round  smooth  rock,  has  a  high  black  rock  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of 
it.  Between  these  last-named  rocks  there  is  a  ledge,  which  shows  at 
one-third  ebb.  The  passage  is  on  either  side  of  this  ledge,  and  then 
northward  along  the  west  side  of  Augustine  Chain. 

Square  Channel,  the  largest  in  between  the  islands,  towards  the 
mainland,  is  too  intricate  for  description  ;  but  14  or  15  miles  up  it  ui  a 
•westerly  direction  is  the  entrance  of  St.  Augustine  River. 

St.  Augustine  River  is  a  stream  of  considerable  length  and  empties 
into  a  bay  full  of  rocky  islands.  Its  mouth  is  full  of  shifting  sand 
banks.    Schooners  anchor  in  St.  Augustine  Harbor  outside  the  river  3 


if 


PORT   AUGUSTINE — HA-HA    BAY. 


137 


188  on  the  coast. 

)  harbor,  but  for 

4  miles  to  the 

ortliward  many 

liuihed  from  be- 
ifjer  in  the  way 
lyinjj;  S.  '23°  E., 
,  whicli  is  about 
Iter  points,  haul 
nt  on  that  side, 
int  of  entrance, 
ard  and  anchor 
round, 
id,  is  a  safe  har- 

)r,  but  plouty  of 

are  two  ledger 
S.  nryc^  VV.  from 
[lut  from  the  lat- 
te  from  the  east 
Ihag  Island.  A 
Island  towards 
in  ^  mile  wide, 
or  the  west  ex- 

ocks,  and  keep 
E.  more  than  ^ 
jk  will  then  be 
wards  the  east 
e  of  that  rock 
n  the  way  but 

ance,  and  is  fit 
lost  of  which  is 
le  westward  of 
hich  shows  at 
dge,  and  then 

8,  towards  the 
liles  up  it  ui  a 

th  and  empties 

shifting  sand 

ide  the  river  3 


miles  below  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  post.  The  river  is  formed  of 
two  branches,  the  NVV.  branch  and  the  NB,,  or  main  river,  which 
receives  the  tributary  river,  Aus  Mouches.  At  the  latter  end  of  .June 
salmon  ascend  the  main  river  to  a  distance  of  80  miles  above  the 
first  rapids.  The  Aus  Mouches  is  also  visited  every  fall  by  a  large 
number  of  fish  resorting  thereto  for  the  i)urpose  of  spawning.  IJoth 
branches  are  easily  ascended  in  flats  or  canoes,  but  the  river  sonietiMies 
falls  very  low  in  summer.    There  is  i)len(y  of  wood  at  this  river. 

Eagle  Harbor,  in  Long  Island,  has  room  and  depth  enough  for  the 
largest  ships  within,  but  the  entrances  are  too  narrow  for  auytiiing  but 
•small  vessels.  The  east  i)as8age,  between  the  islets  which  form  the 
harbor  and  Long  Island,  bears  about  N.  llio  W.  2^  miles  from  the  Fox 
Islands,  and  is  the  best  and  deepest,  but  has  only  li  fathoms  water. 
This  part  of  the  coast  is  dangerous,  being  lined  with  small  low  islets 
and  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  nnd  nothing  but  a  chart  upon 
a  large  scale  would  enable  any  one  •    fl  igle  Harbor.    The  ap"* '""h 

to  it,  however,  is  on  either  side  L.  '""ox  '■  ids,  which  bear  N.  b  '^.  i) 
miles  from  Treble  Hill  Islet,  and  S.  05°  W.  about  14  miles  from  Augus- 
tine Chain. 

rieh  Harbor,  bearing  X.  39°  W.  4^  miles  from  Boule  Islet,  at  the 
north  extreme  of  Great  Mecattina  Island,  is  a  small  cove  of  the  main- 
land running  in  to  the  westward,  with  an  islet  covered  with  wood* 
and  hence  called  Wood  Island,  lying  olf  its  entrance.  There  is  a  pas- 
sage on  either  side  of  Wood  Island,  but  that  to  the  northward  is  the 
best,  there  being  a  ledge  in  the  bay  to  the  southward  of  the  island, 
part  of  which,  however,  always  shows,  and  a  rock  with  2  feet  least  win- 
ter, S.  (W°  E.  nearly  )f  mile  from  the  east  point  of  Wood  Island.  In  the 
cove  there  are  7  or  8  fathoms,  with  good  ground  and  room  to  moor. 
It  is,  however,  only  fit  for  small  vessels.  Both  wood  and  water  may 
be  obtained.  There  Js  no  danger  but  what  appears  in  approaching 
this  harbor  from  either  side  of  Great  Mecattina  Island  excei)ting  the 
ledges  which  have  been  mentioned. 

Ha-Ha  Bay. — Seal  Point,  about  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  Wood 
Island,  is  the  west  point  of  entrance  into  Ila-lIaBay.  The  islands 'o  the 
eastward  contract  the  channel  into  this  bay  to  the  breadth  of  about  ^ 
mile,  but  there  is  plenty  of  water,  and  no  danger  but  what  appears  above 
water.  The  best  channel  is  close  along  the  mainland,  between  Seal 
Point  aud  Itound  Islet,  leaving  all  the  islets  and  rocks  to  tlie  eastward. 
The  bay  runs  in  about  8  miles,  and  has  many  good  anchoring  i)laces. 

Qreat  Mecattina  Island  is  distant  rather  more  than  2  miles  from 
Red  Point,  the  nearest  part  of  the  mainland  to  the  westward.  The 
central  part  of  the  island  is  the  highest,  and  rises  about  oOO  feet  above 
the  sea.  The  granitic  hills  of  this  island  are  fissured  in  a  remarkable 
manner,  by  empty  basaltic  dikes  traversing  the  island,  in  a  north  and 
south  direction,  from  one  side  tt)  the  other.  These  features,  together 
with  the  position  of  the  island,  in  relation  to  the  high  land  inside  of 


-•«Bir3K-vS3*!»»?«!se^ 


'  -'■   .. 


k 


f  w^ 


ili 


188 


GRAND    POINT   TO    CAPE    WHITTLE. 


Cape  Mecattina,  4  or  5  mil»8  from  it  to  the  wustward,  distiiiguiHb  tluH 
iHlaiid  from  any  other  land  in  tlie  Gulf. 

The  Boule  Ih  a  \\'\n\i  and  round  islet,  nearly  joined  to  the  north  point 
of  Great  iMecattina  Inland.  There  is  a  small  rock  above  water  close  oft' 
it  to  the  westward,  and  at  the  distance  of  about  ^  mile  in  the  same  di- 
rection, a  |)atch  of  rocks  with  about  4  fathoms  least  water.  Round 
Head,  on  the  8\V.  side,  is  a  high  peninsula,  connected  to  the  island  by 
a  low  isthmus.  An  islet  and  small  rock,  at  a  distance  of  ^  and  one 
mile  respectively,  lie  oft'  the  south  point  of  the  island.  About  3  miles 
N.  07°  E.  from  the  center  of  the  island,  lies  Treble  Dill  Island.  S.  02° 
E.  3  miles  from  the  south  point  lies  Flat  Island,  and  S.  11°  W.  about 
4  miles  from  the  same  point  of  the  islaiui,  lie  the  two  I^Iiirr  Islets, 
about  4  "die  apart,  of  considerable  heigiit,  Hat  at  the  top,  (.Jid  pre- 
cipitous all  round.  Treble  Ilill  and  Flat  Islands  are  quite  bold  all 
round,  and  so  also  are  the  Murr  Islets,  which  swarm  with  sea  fowl.  A 
beacon,  constructed  of  wood,  pyramidal  in  shape,  surmounted  by  a  cone, 
with  a  vane,  the  whole  34  feet  high,  and  painted  white,  bu«  been  erected 
on  Flat  Island,  southeastward  of  the  south  point  of  Great  Mecattina 
Island.  Murr  Kocks  are  two  small  and  low  rocks  above  water,  lying 
about  ^  mile  to  the  SB.  of  the  southernmost  Murr  Islet.  To  the  north- 
ward of,  and  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  easternmost  Murr  Kock,  there 
lies  a  ledge  on  which  the  sea  generally  breaks. 

Island  Harbor  is  a  cove  one  mile  deep,  and  about  400  yards  wide 
between  Blutt'  Head,  the  high  NE.  point  of  Great  Mecattina  Island, 
and  the  Boule.  This  harbor  is  sheltered  from  easterly  winds  by  a  cluster 
qf  small  islets  and  rocks,  lying  oft'  its  mouth,  and  leaving  a  safe  passage 
on  either  side  of  them.  If  the  south  passage  is  used,  keep  Bluft'  Head 
aboard,  and  if  the  north  passage,  pass  between  the  cluster  just  men- 
tioned, and  a  small  rock  by  itself,  lying  ^  mile  to  the  west  of  it,  and  200 
yards  from  the  shore  of  the  Great  Mecattina.  The  anchorage  is  near  the 
Lead  of  the  cove  in  from  14  to  20  fathoms  water  over  good  ground,  and 
both  wood  and  water  may  be  had. 

Mecattina  Harbor  is  a  small  but  safe  harbor  between  Mecattina 
Island  and  the  mainland,  being  only  about  56  yards  wide  in  the  western 
entrance,  and  about  130  yards  wide  within.  In  a  vessel  of  any  size  it 
is  therefore  necessary  to  moor  head  and  stern  and  with  hawsers  to  the 
shore.  The  depth  within  is  6  and  7  fathoms  over  good  ground,  but  only 
3  fathoms  at  low  water  can  be  carried  in  through  either  entrance. 

Western  Entrance. — In  the  small  bay  between  Mutton  and  Mecat- 
tina Islands,  wherein  is  the  western  entrance,  there  is  no  anchorage  in 
consequence  of  the  great  depth  of  water;  but  there  is  no  danger  in  the 
way,  and  it  is  only  necessary  to  keep  in  the  middle  to  pass  safely  through 
the  narrow  western  entrance.  The  eastern  entrance  is  rendered  difficult 
by  a  reef  of  rocks  under  water  running  across  it  to  the  northward  from 
the  north  part  of  the  island,  and  should  only  be  attempted  in  fine 
weather,  unless  by  those  who  are  well  acquainted   with  the   place. 


MECATTINA    AND    I'OKTAOE    HAKHORS. 


139 


4li8tiiif;uiHh  tliJH 

tlie  nortii  point 
)  water  close  oft" 

in  the  Hame  <li- 

water.  Hound 
to  tile  island  by 
ie  of  ^  and  one 

About  3  miles 
I  Island.  S.  02° 
3.  11°  W.  about 
vo  Wnrr  Islets, 
e  top,  t'jid  pre- 
)  quite  bold  all 
tb  SBci  fowl.  A 
iQted  by  a  cone, 
nm  been  erected 
^^eat  Mecattina 
»ve  water,  lying 
,  To  the  north- 
urr  Kock,  there 

400  yards  wide 
icattina  Island, 
nds  by  a  cluster 
I  a  safe  i)a8sage 
eep  Bluft'  Head 
ister  just  men- 
st  of  it,  and  200 
'age  is  near  the 
od  ground,  and 

^een  Mecattina 
I  in  the  western 

of  any  size  it 
lawsers  to  the 
ound,  but  only 
entrance, 
on  and  Mecat- 
3  anchorage  in 

danger  in  the 
safely  through 
dered  difficult 
)rthward  from 
rapted  in  fine 
th  the  place. 


Strangers  in  tine  weatlu'r  may  anclior  outside,  between  the  east  »'m<1  of 
tlie  isliiud  and  tlie  main,  and  send  a  boat  in  to  exatniiie  tlie  cliaiiiiel. 

Wood  and  Water  maybe  obtained  in  Meiuittinu  Harbor,  and  there 
is  a  Canadian  residing  there  who  carries  on  the  si>a!  tlsliery. 

Directions. — Wlien  sailing  Into  Mecattiiui  Ihubor  from  the  east 
point  of  the  island,  steer  N.  t.j'^  W.  over  to  the  mainland,  and  keep  it 
close  aboard  until  the  NW.  point  of  the  island,  at  the  western  entrance, 
is  brought  in  one  with  the  point  of  the  nuiinland  at  the  eastern  en- 
trance; the  latter  point  l)eing  the  south  point  of  Dead  Cove,  which  is 
small,  open  to  the  eastward,  and  immediately  to  the  northward  of  the 
•eastern  entrance  of  the  harbor.  Sail  in  with  this  mark  on  till  the  luuth 
extreme  of  the  island  and  the  north  extreme  of  (Jull  Islet  come  in  one. 
The  vessel  will  then  be  within  the  reef,  and  must  haul  to  the  southward, 
towards  the  island,  to  avoid  a  ledge  which  stretches  oft'  thu  south  point 
of  Dead  Cove.  Being  close  over  to  the  island,  she  must  haul  to  the 
westward  into  the  harbor. 

O-ull  Islet  lies  N.  67°  K.  nearly  a  mile  from  the  east  end  of  Mecat- 
tina Island,  and  there  is  no  danger  between  them;  but  if  a  vessel  ap- 
proaching Mecattina  Harbor  from  the  eastward  wishes  to  pass  between 
Gull  Islet  and  the  main,  she  must  keep  either  the  one  or  the  other 
aboanl,  in  order  to  avoid  the  ledge,  with  3  feet  least  water,  which  lies 
nearly  halfway  between  them. 

Portage  Bay,  on  the  east  side  of  Cape  Mecattina,  runs  in  about  l\ 
miles  to  the  northward,  between  steej)  and  high  hills,  fissured  like  Great 
Mecattina  Islatid,  and  there  is  a  rapid  river  at  its  head.  The  deep  water, 
with  space  for  a  vessel  to  ancljor,  extends  only  about  400  yards  within 
the  entrance,  and  there  is  a  snug  cove  on  the  east  side  for  small  ves- 
sels. 

Portage  Harbor  is  formed  by  a  small  and  moderately  high  islet  in 
the  mouth  of  Portage  Bay,  lying  over  towards  the  east  side.  In  this 
harbor  vessels  of  considerable  size  might  find  shelter  in  time  of  need, 
although  it  is  inconveniently  small  for  general  use,  like  most  of  the  har- 
bors on  this  coast. 

Directions.— The  passage  into  Portage  Harbor,  to  the  eastward  of 
the  islet,  is  flt  only  for  very  small  vessels.  The  western  entrance  is  about 
200  yards  wide,  and  has  from  6  to  8  fathoms  in  it.  There  is  still  more 
water  within,  over  muddy  bottom.  But  approaching  this  harbor  in  a 
vessel  of  large  draft,  there  are  two  ledges  with  15  feet  least  water  to 
be  avoided.  They  lie  in  the  line  from  the  south  extreme  of  Cape  Me- 
cattina to  the  western  entrance  of  Mecattina  Harbor.  The  northeast- 
ernmost  of  these  ledges  bears  S.  28°  E.  about  800  yards  from  the  west 
end  of  Mutton  Island,  and  the  other  N.  22°  E.  ^  mile  from  the  south- 
ernmost Seal  Rock,  which  lies  near  the  shore  on  the  east  side  of  Cai)e 
Mecattina,  and  about  f  mile  north  from  its  south  extremity.  Shoal 
water  extends  .about  200  yards  oft"  the  Seal  Rocks  to  the  eastward,  but 
Mutton  Island  is  quite  bold. 


'^     MSiHtifsiii'aai.viii 


1; 


1^. 


140 


OKANl)    POINT    TO    CAPK    WHlTTLK. 


Cape  Mecattina  irt  of  inoiIiM-ato  lici^Mit  for  Horiiu  (ILstanou  to  Mio  iiortli- 
wanl  of  ilH  oxtr«iiiit.v;  but  about  3  miles  to  tlio  nortliwaril  it  riscH  to  tiio 
lu'ijflit  of  «t85  fti't  iil)ove  tlic  stuv.  Tim  lii^^lieMt  purt  of  whiit  in  callcU 
tlHt  IliKli  Lund  of  Mt'cattiiia,  wiiicii  Hhon  direutly  iu  ruar  of  Mt'cuttiim 
ilai-l>or,  (;aii  not  l)o  leH.s  tliaii  7IH)  feet  above  tlie  him^  anil  in  tlie  liiulx^^st 
land  upon  tills  coaKt  tioin  Itrailoro  westward  to  tin;  vicinity  of  Miiifran. 
Tilt'  i^ranilc  of  tliis  promontory  is  travfised  fr<»ni  8W.  to  NK.  l»y  tliose 
enormous  itasaiiii;  dil\es  wliicli  liave  lu'en  nuMitionod  as  o(HMirrin|{  in 
Great  .Meenttina  Island.  In  Dike  Island  several  of  tlieni  are  empty  as 
low  down  as  tlie  surface  of  the  sea,  dividing  the  island  by  ininiensu 
open  fissures  in  sueli  a  way  as  to  distinguish  it  from  all  others  in  the 
nei^'lihorhood.  Then'  is  a  small  islet  less  than  200  yards  from  the  end 
of  the  point  with  no  channel  between.  At  the  distanite  of  nearly  400 
yards  farther  out  is  Kntrance  Island,  about  400  yards  in  diameter. 
Dike  Island  is  composed  of  two  islands  at  high  water,  but  there  is  no 
piissafje  even  for  a  boat  between.  It  is  abttut  150  feet  hijj''.  At  the 
distance  of  a  mile  from  the  south  point  of  Dike  Island  lie  the  two  Outer 
liocks.  They  are  above  water,  and  there  are  several  rocks  and  ledges, 
and  no  safe  passages  betweeu  them  and  the  island. 

The  Northern  Murr  Islet,  which  is  the  nearest  of  the  two,  is  'J<^  uiiles 
from  the  Outer  Rocks,  and  there  is  a  clear  and  exceedingly  deep  chan- 
nel between.  For  vessels  bound  to  Mecattina  Harbor  the  channel 
between  Entrance  and  Dike  Islands  is  the  best,  and  has  13  fathoms  of 
water  in  it.  The  shoal  water  extends  about  100  yards  off  the  east  side 
of  the  former  of  those  islands,  but  the  latter  is  quite  bold. 

The  Coast  from  Cape  Mecattina  to  Capo  Whittle  is  as  dangerous  as 
can  well  be  imagino<l  to  a  stranger  falling  in  with  it  at  night  or  in  thick 
weather ;  and  even  to  those  who  are  <pute  acquainted  with  it  the  navi- 
gation is  not  without  much  difficulty.  Formerly  it  was  not  often  visited 
except  by  fishermen,  eggers,  and  a  few  Quebec  trading  schooners.  The 
depth  of  water  immediately  off,  and  even  within,  the  outer  islands  and 
rocks  is  in  general  very  great,  often  exceeding  70  or  SO  fathoms,  so  that 
there  is  no  warning  by  the  lead;  but  in  the  offing,  at  a  distance  of  4 
or  o  leagues,  there  are  occasional  banks  of  sand  and  gravel  with  from 
30  to  '){)  fathoms  water.  The  outer  islands  are  entirely  bare  of  wood, 
\m\  there  are  more  trees  on  the  maiidand  than  in  parts  farther  to  NE., 
indicating  a  slight  improvement  in  the  clinnite  as  we  proceed  to  tlie  SVV. 

Little  Mecattina  Island  is  nearly  7h  milos  long  and  about  3  miles 
wide.  Salaberry  Bay,  on  its  west  side,  cuts  it  nearly  in  two  parts.  All 
outside  the  narrow  isthmus  is  high  land,  which  can  be  seen  from  a  great 
distance  out  at  sea  long  after  che  other  islands  have  disappeared  below 
the  hori/.on.  The  highest  hill  on  the  island  is  alMut  .WO  feet  above  the 
sea.  The  jiart  of  the  island  within  th'i  isthmus  is  a  lew  and  mossy 
swamp,  resting  on  sand,  with  isolated  ridges  .md  mounds  of  granite 
piercing  through  it  here  and  there.  Within  the  island,  to  the  north  and 
west,  are  extensive  flats  of  sand,  with  bowlder  stones  and  small  rocky 
inlets. 


'^^'Aiiu- 


CAPK    MKCCATINA — IIAKF.    HARHOH. 


141 


nofito  fh«nortl»- 
rd  it  rlscH  to  tlio 
)f  what  In  calU'd 
»iii'  of  Me(!Httiiin 
i<l  \h  tlio  lii;;li(>Ht< 
iiiity  ot  Miiigaii. 
to  NK.  I»,v  tliose 
iiH  ociMirriiti;  in 
'in  lire  t'inpty  »a 
111(1  by  iinnienHu 
all  othci'N  in  the 
'(1h  Ironi  tliu  end 
vx'  of  nearly  400 
(Im  in  (lianu'ter, 
,  but  tliuro  is  no 
t  hig>>.  At  the 
ie  the  two  Outer 
>ckH  ami  ledges, 

two,  is  LM  uiiles 
ngl.\  deep  chan- 
lor  the  channel 
18  13  fathoms  of 
ait'  the  east  side 
)ld. 

us  (hiDgeroHs  as 

ight  or  in  thick 

ith  it  the  uavi- 

lot  often  visited 

lehooners.    The 

Iter  islands  and 

athoins,  so  that 

rt  diatance  of  4 

ivel  with  from 

bare  of  wood, 

farther  to  NE., 

;eed  totlieSVV. 

1  about  3  miles 

two  parts.    All 

en  from  a  great 

ppeared  below 

feet  above  the 

o\v  and  mossy 

inds  of  granite 

the  north  and 

1(1  small  rocky 


Little  Meuattina  River  diHchargeM  its  waters  through  these  tiats 
by  several  shallow  channels,  the  largtvst  of  whicli  Hows  into  Avlincr 
Hound  to  the  west  ward,  and  the  shallowest  into  the  May  of  Uocks  to  the 
eastward  of  the  island.  The  latter  chaniKU  has  only  .'<  feet  in  it  at  low 
water,  so  that  it  is  possible  to  wade  across  it  and  from  the  island  to  the 
main  when  the  tide  is  out.  Little  Mecu-attiiia  Island,  having  thus  no 
chaiin(«l  between  it  and  the  main  for  vessels,  and  scarcely  even  for  boats 
at  low  water,  may  be  considered  as  forming  the  west  side  of  a  large 
bay.  The  promontor.v  of  Mecattina  forms  the  east  side  of  this  bay, 
which  is  tilled  with  islands  and  rocks  innumerable,  among  which  no 
vessel  coul'l  find  her  way  and  where  it  is  possible  to  lose  oncfielf  for  a 
time  ill  a  boat. 

Fin  Rocks  lie  mnirly  250  yards  off  Whale  Head,  the  south  extreme 
of  (lore  Islands,  and  bearing  N.  o4°  M,  0.3  miles  froiuAiitrobus  Point,  a 
Rmall  peninsula  at  the  HE.  extreme  of  Little  Mecattina  Island.  To  the 
westward  of  Fin  Uocks,  at  thedistauc(^of2and  3  miles  respectively,  lie 
Herriot  Isles  and  Single  Rock,  with  two  or  three  sunken  rocks  close  to 
it.  Hetween  these  and  Little  Me(;attlna  Island  there  is  a  large  open 
bay,  the  head  of  which  is  called  the  Bay  of  Hocks.  Antrobus  I'oint  is 
the  8W.  point  of  this  bay,  and  has  a  ledge  oif  it,  200  yards  to  the  south- 
ward, which  is  the  only  danger  otf  the  south  side  of  Little  Mecattina 
Island. 

Little  Mecattina  Cove,  on  the  east  side  of  Little  Mecattin-i  Island, 
about  '^  mile  to  the  northward  of  Antrobus  I'oint,  is  1}  mile  long,  and 
from  l-iO  to  280  yards  wide,  between  high,  bold,  and  precipitous  rocks. 
It  has  iU  fathoms  water  in  the  entrance,  and  there  are  17  fathoms  over 
mud  bottom  within.  It  is  open  to  the  NE.,  but  as  the  islands  are  only 
distant  3  miles  in  that  direction,  there  is  uo  doubt  but  that  a  vessel  well 
moored  wouhl  be  quite  safe  in  it.  The  SE.  point  of  entrance  is  called 
Cove  Point,  and  is  quite  bold. 

Water  may  be  obtained  at  the  head  of  the  cove. 

Hare  Harbor,  also  on  the  east  side  of  Little  Mecattina  Island,  has 
depth  and  room  enough  for  the  largest  vessels,  but  has  several  rocks  and 
ledges  ill  it,  which  render  it  ditlicult  for  strangers.  As  it  opens  to  the 
southward,  the  prevailing  westerly  or  easterly  winds  are  favorable  for 
sailing  in,  and  are  generally  accompanied  with  a  smooth  sea  in  the 
entrance.  It  is  only  when  the  wind  is  well  to  the  southward  that  there 
is  any  swell,  and  even  then  it  never  rolls  into  the  harbor  so  as  to  att'ect 
a  vessel. 

Directions. — To  enter  Hare  Harbor  steer  N.  3°  E.  so  as  to  pass 
Antrobus  Point  and  Cove  Point  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile.  When  the 
vessel  has  run  '^  mile  past  Cove  Point,  she  will  be  close  to  the  eastern- 
most of  the  two  Cat  Rocks,  which  are  above  water,  about  400  yards 
apart.  At  the  distance  of  300  yards  to  the  northward  of  the  eastern- 
most rock  lies  Staff  Islet,  about  150  yards  in  diameter,  off  which  there 
is  a  rocky  patch  dry  at  low  water,  about  200  yards  to  the  eastward ; 


■  ^^it^iaiiiitisix  >fii.aiaaa!3SSS*SES.": 


:~^\^:^.'Z^::^rjrtssr^TyR^x^cr;^ 


J 


:s  ii  Ji 


11  '-^ 


142 


OKANl)    POINT    TO    CAI'K    WIIITTLK 


tliiH(!>iii  ithviiyM  Ik)  .stn'ii  t'roiii  t\w  r'xnniwa,  hut  tliuro  M  iiIho  ti  lod^t^  witli 
2  fiithoins  |»>iiHt  wiit,«'r,  .{'JO  yivrds  X.  .'JP  10.  from  tho  NIO.  oxtrt'iiiHof  tli« 
JNlcf.  On  tliJM  Ictlfjo  tli(>SiO.  (>.\rn>iiHMir  I'Mt'ii  IhIuihIm  uimI  the  hiiiiiII  tiiid 
lii^li  Nob  Islet  art'  in  liiu*;  tlit' liiltt>i' liciirint;  tioiii  lln^  t'onniT  N.lili'  H., 
li^  iiiilfs,  Tlicso  artf  tlii>  nnl.v  <lan^'«^r'M  on  tli«>  port  hand,  or  on  tht>  sido 
ot  Little  Mccattiini  Ishinil ;  anil  to  th(M'aHt\var*l,  tliiMican'Mt  (hint;crH 
will  hi>  more  than  a  niih^  from  th**  cMtiirso. 

NVIuMi  on«<  iniln  past  ('ovo  Toint,  StalV  Isit^t  will  h«  aboani  on  tlu*  port- 
hand,  and  ou^rht  not  to  bit  ncartM-  than  \  mile.  From  this  position  Ihu 
jMitrant'c  "if  the  harbor  will  bcsi'cn  biMirin^  N.  .'{l»o  VV.,  on«' ndio.  It  can 
not  bi^  niisttiktMi,  IxHtanst^  tluM'tns  no  oIIhm' (thannt'l  tliroii^rh  which  a  pcr- 
Hon  can  stn^  clear  into  the  harbor  from  that  position.  The  entrance, 
abont  .'UO  yards  wide,  and  20  tat  bonis  water  in  it,  is  between  Daly  and 
Pri(re  Islands,  ami  the  only  other  (;hannel  is  between  the  latter  and  the 
lOdcn  Islands,  which  have  been  already  mentioned. 

When  tlu!  entrance  bears  N.  otJ'^  W..  Iiani  directly  in  Cor  the  entrancie, 
leaving;  the  Kden  Islands,  and  also  l'ri(!e  Island,  to  the  eastward,  and 
yivinjj  the  SW.  extreme  of  the  latter  a  berth  of  not  less  than  <K)  yards. 
Daly  Island,  on  the  port  hand,  or  to  the  westward,  is  (piite  bold. 

Nearly  midway  between  Bate  Rock  and  Hold  Islet  lies  Hag  Led^re, 
which  just  dries  at  low  water.  There  is  a  clear  channel  on  either  side 
of  it,  but  the  western  is  the  best :  and  the  course  from  the  center  of  the 
entrance  to  it,  so  uh  to  pass  witliiu  KM)  yards  of  the  Safe  Uock,  is  N.  3(P 
W.,  ^  mile.       i 

The  Anchorage  nuist  be  chosen  by  the  lead,  for  there  are  several 
|>atches  of  rock  with  from  4  to  (5  fathoms,  althouuh  the  bottom  is  iu 
general  of  mud,  with  from  i)  to  14  fathoms  water.  Foul  Rock,  a  2-fathom 
patch,  bears  N.  .'{3°  W.,  1,200  yards  from  the  SVV.  point  of  Price  Isl- 
and ;  and  N.  40°  F,,  nearly  800  yards  from  the  south  side  of  the  water- 
iufl  cove,  which  will  be  seen  on  the  west  side  of  the  harbor.  Until 
within  this  rock,  therefore,  a  vessel  should  keep  more  than  halfway 
over  from  the  islands  forming  the  east  side  of  the  uarbor,  towards  its 
western  shore.  She  may  if  requisite  run  in  nearly  ^  mile  farther  thau 
this  patch,  and  anchor  to  eastward  of  (Jlust'u-  Point,  which  cousists  of 
some  low  small  islets  and  rocks  extending  off  the  Little  Mecattiua 
shore;  this  position  being  the  most  secure  in  the  harbor. 

Rocks. — All  the  bay  within  or  northeastward  of  Eden  Islands,  as 
well  as  to  the  eastward  of  the  line  from  them  to  Single  Rock,  is  danger- 
ous, being  full  of  sunken  rocks,  and  shoal  rocky  jiatches,  springing  up 
through  great  depths  of  water. 

Supplies. — There  is  a  good  watering  place  iu  the  small  cove  on  the 
west  side  of  Hare  Harbor,  and  wood  may  also  be  obtained  iu  various 
places.  There  is  usually  a  couple  of  men  either  in  the  entrance  ot  Lit- 
tle Mecattiua  River  or  near  Little  Mcoattina  Cove,  but  they  do  not 
remain  during  the  winter.  There  are  plenty  of  blue  and  cloud  berries, 
etc.,  on  the  hills  of  Little  Mecattiua  Island. 


^^i. 


HAHR    AND    I.OUI8A    HAKHOR8. 


148 


1 


)4o  u  I(><1k<«  witii 
oxtrcinnof  tlio 
I  Mh>  Hiiiiill  and 
niuT  N.'JL'T  K., 
<U'  nil  tlio  HJtlo 
eari'Mt  <laii);(>rH 

luii  (Ml  the  port- 
JH  position  Miu 
I-  iiiih>.  It  (Mill 
fli  which  apcr- 
Till'  eiitruiiiHt, 
ivtHMi  Daly  and 
i  iattor  aud  tho 

r  tim  (Mitraiiue, 
eastward,  and 
than  GO  yards, 
ite  bold. 

oil  either  side 
e  center  of  tlio 
iock,  is  N.  3(P 

re  are  several 
)  Imttoin  IS  ill 

k,  a  li-fathom 

of  Price  Isl- 
of  the  water- 
arbor.  Until 
than  halfway 
towards  its 

farther  tliau 
ch  consists  of 

e  Mecattiua 

Islands,  as 
ik,  is  danger- 
iprinjjing  up 

cove  on  the 
d  in  %-ariou8 
ranee  of  Lit- 
they  do  not 
ond  berries, 


Aylmer  Sound. — The  south  shore  of  Little  Me(uittiiia  Island  is  high 
and  liold,  with  remarkable  beaches  of  white  bowlder  stones  (xutasioii* 
ally.  There  is  a  long  cove  (tlose  to  the  eastwaiil  of  (Jape  Mackinnon, 
but  it  is  of  no  use  to  vessels.  Aylmer  Hound  is  formed  by  Little  Mecrat- 
tina  Island  on  tlii«  east  and  narriiigton  Islands,  together  with  thi^  main- 
land, on  the  west,  and  is  navigable  about  i  miles  to  the  northward  Idiii 
Cape  .NLu^kinnon. 

Paynter  Point  is  formed  of  small' islets  close  to  the  mainland,  and 
the  course  and  distance  to  it,  along  the  east  side  of  tho  Ihnriiigtoii 
Islands,  is  X.  17°  K.,  1  miles. 

■  Aid  and  Close  Islets. — Tliere  is  no  danger  on  the  west  side  of  Ayl- 
mer Sound  but  what  appears  and  is  close  to  the  shore;  but  on  thei'ast 
side  there  are  two  small  islets,  the  outermost  oi'wliit!!!,  Aiil  Islet,  bears 
N.  73°  VV.,  and  is  distant  a  little  less  than  a  iniU'  from  Cape  .Macki>)iioii, 
and  is  S()()  yards  offshore.  The  other,  (Jlose  Islet,  lies  about  hi  /'way 
between  the  (Mpe  and  Aid  Islet,  and  about  L'OO  yard.-'  off  shore. 

Spray  Reef,  small,  awash  at  low  water,  and  bold  all  round,  lies  H. 
08°  W.,  U  miles  from  Cape  iMackinnon  ;  and  S.  40°  W..  one  mile  fvoni 
Aid  Islet.  This  is  the  only  danger  in  the  eiitrani;e  of  the  sound  that 
can  not  always  be  .seen;  and  vessels  had  better  j)ass  to  the  westward 
of  it,  because  the  |)a.ssage  between  it  and  Aid  Islet  has  not  been  sounded. 

Doyle  Islands  are  four  in  tiuini)er,  but  they  appear  from  s(ni  as  two 
only.  The  two  western  islands  are  very  low,  and  close  together,  being 
joined  at  low  water;  the  two  e.-isterii  are  of  moderate  height,  and  also 
clo.se  together.  Their  east  point  bears  N.  10°  VV,,  2  miles  from  Craig 
Point,  which  is  the  west  extreme  of  Little  Mecattiua,  distant  one  mile 
from  Cape  Mackiiinon. 

Lou  Road.^-North  of  the  Doyle  Islands,  between  them  and  Louisa 
Harbor,  there  is  a  line  roomy  roadstead  called  Lou  Road,  in  which  vessels 
may  anchor  in  from  12  to  4  fathoms,  over  muddy  bottom,  the  soundings 
decreasing  gradually  to  the  westward  from  the  line  Joining  the  eastern 
Doyle  Island  and  Boot  Point,  over  to  Crescent  Point,  a  distance  of  about 
a  mile. 

Louisa  Harbor  is  about  400  yards  wide  at  the  entrance.  Ti>e  points 
of  entrance  are  quite  bold,  and  the  best  anchorage  is  300  ypr.'s  .  ithin 
them,  in  4  fathoms,  and  in  the  southern  part  of  the  harbor. 

Directions. — The  only  directions  for  sailing  into  Louisa  Harbor,  or 
into  Lou  Road  between  it  and  the  Doyle  Islands,  are  to  ir.jcp  the  east- 
ern side  of  the  latter  aboard,  to  avoid  the  ledges  lying  across  the  en- 
trance of  Salaberry  Bay,  as  already  mentioned.  When  once  inside  of 
the  island  there  is  nothing  in  the  way,  so  that  a  vessel  may  either  anchor 
in  the  road  or  run  into  the  harbor  as  convenient.  In  the  sound  outside 
of  the  Doyle  Islands  the  only  thing  to  be  guarded  against  is  Spray 
Reef.  There  are  irregular  soundings  with  as  little  as  11  fathoms  over 
rocky  bottom  here  and  there,  but  in  general  the  depth  is  from  19  to  23 
fathoms,  with  rock,  sand,  and  mud  bottom.  The  ground  can  not  be 
trusted  until  within  the  Doyle  Islands. 


I 

r 


i 


-■»   ■ilemtliSltmtmKiXtsSlSBSm'^tasSslMjiii^        ^v:. 


144 


GRAND    POINT   TO   CAPE    WHITTLE. 


Harrington  Islands  extend  northward  4  miles,  from  Gape  Airy  to 
the  mainland,  there  being  no  channel  within  them.  They  are  high 
islands,  the  highest  being  estimated  at  350  feet  al>ove  the  sea.  Between 
the  outer  and  largest  islands  there  is  indifferent  anchorage  and  deep 
water,  but  the  channels  leading  to  it  are  narrow,  and  too  intricate  for 
any  directions  to  avail.  It  is  a  very  dangerous  place,  and  useless,  ex- 
cepting to  small  vessels  intimately  acquainted  with  the  coast. 

Black  Reef,  bearing  from  Cape  Airy  S.  16°  E.,  2  miles,  is  composed 
of  low  black  rocks  above  water,  about  300  yards  in  diameter,  bold,  but 
with  very  irregular  soundings  around  it,  varying  from  6  to  70  fathoms 
over  rocky  bottom. 

Major  Reef,  awash  at  low  water  and  very  small,  bears  S.  68°  W., 
IJ  miles  from  Cape  Airy. 

Netagamu  Islands,  bearing  S.  68°  W.,  4^  miles  from  Cape  Airy,  are 
small,  with  a  remarkable  mound  on  the  largest  of  them.  Between 
them  and  the  Harrington  Islands  there  is  a  bay  of  the  mainland  with 
clay  clitfs  and  sandy  beach  at  its  head  and  innumerable  small  rocks 
across  its  mouth. 

Netagamu  River. — The  entrance  to  this  river  may  be  known  by  the 
sandy  beach,  backed  with  a  thick  growth  of  spruce  trees  on  either  side 
of  its  entrance.  It  is  a  large  stream  with  deep  water  in  the  narrow  en- 
trance, and  also  close  up  to  the  falls,  which  are  1^  miles  from  the  en- 
trance, and  can  be  partly  seen  from  the  sea,  when  they  bear  N.  23°  B. 
A  semicircular  bar  of  sand,  dry  at  low  water,  with  the  exception  of  a 
narrow  channel  with  3  feet  water  in  it,  extends  a  mile  out  from  the 
entrance,  and  is  extremely  dangerous  to  boats  because  of  the  heavy 
surf.  On  the  eastern  side,  a  mile  within  the  entrance,  there  are  two 
huts,  the  temporary  residence  of  salmon  fishermen  during  the  season. 

St.  Mary  Islands  lie  7  miles  off  the  mainland,  and  their  east  extreme 
bears  8.  37°  W.,  10  miles  from  Cape  Airy.  There  are  two  of  those 
islands  so  close  together  that  they  may  be  considered  as  one  narrow 
island  about  3  miles  long.  They  are  of  bare  steep  granite  and  bold  all 
round. 

Cliff  Islands  lie  '^  mile  west  of  the  south  point  of  the  St.  Mary  Is- 
lands. There  is  a  ledge  which  shows  to  the  SVV.  of  them.  The  Cliff" 
Islands  are  one  round  and  steep  island  ^  mile  in  diameter,  with  several 
small  islets  and  rocks  close  to  the  westward  of  it,  and  deep  water  be- 
tween them  all.  Between  these  and  the  Boat  Islands  there  is  a  safe 
channel  ^  mile  wide. 

Boat  Islands,  a  cluster  of  small  islands  close  together,  lie  S.  65°  W., 
2J  miles  from  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Mary  Islands. 

Middle  Islands  are  a  chain  of  islands,  nearly  joined  at  low  water, 
•with  several  small  islets  adjacent.  The  westernmost  island  is  2^  miles 
long  and  150  feet  high.  The  whole  group  covers  a  space  of  3J  miles  in 
a  SW.  direction,  by  about  a  mile  wide.  There  is  a  good  anchorage  in 
10  or  12  fathoms  between  the  westernmost  island,  and  two  smaller 


from  Cape  Airy  to 
m.  They  are  high 
e  the  sea.  Between 
ucborage  and  deep 
nd  too  intricate  for 
ce,  aud  useless,  ex- 

the  coast. 

\  miles,  is  composed 
diameter,  bold,  but 
om  6  to  70  fatboms 

1,  bears  S.  68°  W., 

rom  Cape  Airy,  are 
of  them.  Between 
the  mainland  with 
lerable  small  rocks 

ly  be  known  by  the 
trees  on  either  side 
jr  in  the  narrow  en- 
miles  from  the  eu- 
hey  bear  N.  23°  E. 

the  exception  of  a 
mile  out  from  the 
3au8e  of  the  heavy 
mce,  there  are  two 
uring  the  season. 

their  east  extreme 

are  two  of  those 

red  as  one  narrow 

ranite  and  bold  all 

)f  the  St.  Mary  Is- 
them.  The  Cliff 
neter,  with  several 
ad  deep  water  be- 
nds there  is  a  safe 

ither,  lie  S.  65°  W., 

ined  at  low  water, 
:  island  is  2^  miles 
pace  of  3^  miles  in 
^ood  anchorage  in 
,  and  two  smaller 


MIDDLE    I8I,ANDS — WATA0HEI8TIC    SOUND, 


14.5 


Islands  to  the  northward  of  it;  but  it  is  too  small  for  large  vessels  and 
too  intricate  for  description,  andean  only  be  approached  from  tije  east- 
ward. 

Middle  Islands  lie  IJ  miles  from  the  main,  and  there  is  no  safe  chan- 
nel between,  in  consequence  of  the  numerous  islets  and  rooks.  Between 
these  islands  and  Bout  Islands  there  is  a  safe  channel,  more  than  a  mile 
wide.  In  all  these  channels  the  soundings  are  irregular,  and  the  t^iound 
foul.  In  some  places  there  are  only  15,  whilst  in  others  there  are  40  or 
50  fathoms  water. 

Tender  Reef  is  small  and  awash  at  low  water.  It  bears  N.  50°  W. 
iwarly  a  mile  from  the  northernmost  of  the  St.  Mary  Keefs,  8. 40°  VV.,  1^ 
miles  from  the  8VV.  extreme  of  the  Boat  Islands. 

St.  Mary  Reefs,  the  most  dangerous  off  the  coast,  are  four  ledges 
just  under  water,  on  some  of  which  the  sea  always  breaks.  From  the 
northern  to  the  southern  ledge  tlie  distance  is  a  mile,  and  the  latter 
bears  S.  40°  W.,  3:^  miles  from  the  soutli  extreme  of  tlie  Boat  Islands  ;  8. 
40°  \V.,  G  miles  I'rom  the  SW.  extreme  of  St.  Mary  Islands ;  and  8.  72° 
B.,  3^  miles  from  the  westernmost  of  SW.  Islands,  which  are  a  group  of 
small  islets,  of  which  the  westernmost  is  high  and  round.  There  is  a 
patclj  of  12  fathoms  lying  2  miles  to  the  southward  of  St.  Mary  Reefs, 
and  another  of  8  fathoms,  nearly  as  far  to  the  southwestward  of  them. 

Channels — There  are  irregular  soundings  and  deep  water  around 
aud  between  all  these  rocks  ;i:«d  islets,  but  no  warning  by  the  hand- 
lead.  There  is  a  clear  channel  between  Tender  Reef  and  SW.  Islands, 
and  also  between  St.  Mary  Reefs  and  Boat  Islands ;  at  least  there  is 
nothing  with  so  little  water  as  3  fathoms. 

Watagheistic  Island  and  Sound.— Watagheistic  is  a  large  and 
hilly  island  3  miles  long  by  more  than  1^  miles  wide.  It  is  much  broken  " 
into  coves,  and  lies  in  the  mouth  of  a  large  bay  of  the  mainland,  from 
which  it  is  difficult  to  distinguish  it  from  a  vessel  out  at  sea.  Wata- 
gheistic Souad  is  a  secure  harbor  between  the  island  and  the  mainland. 
The  eastern  entrance  is  narrow  and  intricate ;  but  the  western  entrance 
is  J  mile  wide ;  aud  although  there  are  several  rocks  and  ledges  in  it, 
yet  it  may  be  safely  sailed  through,  with  proper  care,  in  the  largest 
vessels. 

Cove  Island  is  ^  mile  in  diameter,  and  surrounded  with  rocks  and 
ledges.  It  bears  N.  55°  W.,  4  miles  from  the  north  point  of  St.  Mary 
Islands,  and  there  are  thickly  scattered  rocks,  both  above  and  under 
water,  all  the  way  from  it  to  the  Netagamu  Islands. 

Caution. — The  following  brief  directions  are  given,  with  the  caution 
that  their  use  must  be  accompanied  with  a  good  lookout  from  the  rig. 
ging,  for  it  is  impossible  to  be  certain  that  every  ledge  has  been  found 
in  such  a  place,  although  there  is  e  rery  reason  to  suppose  that  none  have 
escaped  notice. 

Directions  for  Eastern  Entrance. — Being  to  the  westward  with  a 
westerly  wind,  a  vessel  may  either  pass  between  Tender  Reef  and  SW. 
5489 10 


ll 


'A 


Jl 


146 


GRAND   POINT    TO    CAPE    WHITTLE. 


^*i 


:lr 


illr 


lalaiuls,  ur  she  may  riiu  down  outside  St.  Mary  Keefs,  and  then  haul 
ill  to  the  northward  between  Boat  and  Clitf  IsUinds,  which  iH  the  safer 
route,  and  tlie  one  for  which  the  following  directions  are  given.  Being 
then  in  luidchannel  between  Boat  and  Clitt'  Islands,  steer  N.  22°  W., 
which  will  lead  close  to  Bold  Kock,  lying  N.  57°  B.  J  mile  from  the 
east  point  of  the  Middle  Islands.  The  Center  Reef,  which  always  shows, 
bears  N.  46°  E.  U  miles  from  Bold  Rock ;  and  there  is  a  clear  channel 
between  them,  but  not  between  Bold  Rock  and  Middle  Islands.    ' 

Passing  to  the  eastward  of  Bold  Rock  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile, 
alter  course  to  N.  44°  W.,  and  when  she  has  run  2;^  miles  farther 
she  will  be  midway  between  Black  Ledge  and  Bare  Rocks,  the  latter 
bearing  from  the  former  N.  37°  E.  IJ  miles.  Do  not  go  near  this  ledge, 
which  has  not  been  sounded  off.  Alter  course  now  to  N.  5°  W.,  passing 
to  the  westward  of  all  the  islets  to  the  northwestward  of  Cove  Island, 
and  when  the  vessel  has  run  IJ  miles,  Beacon  Islet  will  be  seen  (close 
to  the  SB.  extreme  of  Watagheistic  Island,  a  ad  with  a  smaller  islet  ^ 
mile  to  the  westward  of  it)  ^  mile  ahead.  Run  past  this  islet  sufficiently 
far  to  avoid  a  reef  and  S-fathoms  patch,  which  together  extend  800  yards 
off  it  to  the  northward. 

When  the  vessel  has  run  ^  mile  from  the  time  Beacon  Islet  was  abeam 
a  deep  bay  will  be  observed  in  the  east  side  of  Watagheistic  Island. 
Steer  for  the  narrow  channel  between  the  north  point  of  this  bay  and 
two  small  islets  which  lie  nearly  300  yards  off  it  to  the  NE.  As  soon  as 
she  arrives  at  these  islets  another  deep  cove  will  be  seen  in  Watagheistic 
Island,  with  an  islet  nearly  filling  up  its  mouth.  Steer  to  pass  close  to 
the  <;i\8tward  of  this  islet,  and  then  westward  for  the  channel  between 
Watagheistic  Island  and  the  islands  to  the  eastward  which  extend  across 
to  the  mainland  in  that  direction.  The  channel  is  at  first  only  about 
170  yards  wide,  but  it  soon  expands  to  320  yards,  with  a  depth  of  15 
fathoms  in  the  middle  over  mud  bottom,  where  the  vessel  may  anchor 
in  great  security.  After  she  has  passed  the  reef  off  Beacon  Island  there 
is  nothing  in  the  way  by  this  route,  the  islands  being  quite  bold. 

Reef. — If  wishing  to  run  through  into  the  Upper  Sound  beware  of  a 
reef  which  lies  across  the  mouth  of  the  channel  at  the  distance  of  300 
yards.  As  there  is  no  safe  channel  to  the  eastward  of  Cove  Island,  a 
vessel  can  not  approach  this  anchorage  with  an  easterly  wind  without 
first  beating  up  along  the  south  side  of  Watagheistic  Island,  after  she 
has  passed  between  the  Bare  Rocks  and  Black  Ledge,  so  that  in  that 
case  the  western  entrance  to  Watagheistic  Sound  is  to  be  preferred. 

Directions  for  Western  Entrance. — Being  to  the  eastward,  steer 
for  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Mary  Islands,  which  may  be  passed  at  the 
distance  of  400  yards,  and  then  bringing  it  astern,  steer  from  it  S.  88° 
W.,  and  the  Center  Reef,  which  is  bold  all  around,  may  be  passed  on 
either  side  at  the  distance  of  400  yards,  but  to  the  southward  of  it  is  to 
be  preferred. 

Continue  this  course  for  a  mil    past  the  reef,  then  haul  up  N.  47°  W., 


aad  then  haul 
licli  ia  the  safer 
i  giveu.  Being 
iteer  N.  22°  W., 

mile  from  the 
h  always  shows, 
a  dear  chanuel 
Islauds.  ' 
auce  of  )(  mile, 
^  miles  farther 
ocks,  the  latter 
near  this  ledge, 
.  5°  W.,  passing 
of  Cove  Island, 
I  be  seen  (close 

smaller  islet  ^ 
slet  sufQcieutly 
xteud  800  yards 

[slet  was  abeam 

gheistic  Island. 

»f  this  bay  and 

fE.    As  soon  as 

in  Watagheistic 

to  pass  close  to 

hannel  between 

h  extend  across 

st  only  about 

depth  of  15 

iel  may  anchor 

n\  Island  there 

lite  bold. 

nd  beware  of  a 

istance  of  300 

Uove  Island,  a 

wind  without 

and,  after  she 

80  that  in  that 

)e  preferred. 

eastward,  steer 

passed  at  the 

from  it  S.  88° 

be  passed  on 

ward  of  it  is  to 

up  N.  470  W., 


WATAGHEISTIC  SOUND — CORMORANT  ROCKS. 


147 


a 


and  when  the  vessel  has  run  3  miles  the  channel  to  the  westward  be- 
tween Watagheistic  Island  and  the  mainland  will  be  open,  and  two 
small  islets  will  be  seen  nearly  in  its  center,  in  one,  bearing  S.  77°  W. 
They  are  4  mile  from  each  other,  and  quite  bold,  but  bear  in  mind  that 
exactly  in  the  line  from  the  one  islet  to  the  other,  and  700  yards  from 
the  easternmost  of  them  is  Kettle  Rock,  very  small,  and  just  covered  at 
low  water.  This  rock  lies  exactly  in  a  line  from  Seal  Islands  to  the 
point  of  a  shoal  covo  of  Watagheistic  Island,  which  is  open  to  the  east- 
ward. There  is  a  rock  awash  IGO  yards  off  the  point  of  this  cove  to  the 
southward.  The  channels  on  feither  side  of  Kettle  Rock,  which  is  quite 
bold,  are  each  ^  mile  wide,  and  have  from  20  to  20  fathoms  water  in 
them.  Having  brought  the  islets  in  one,  the  vessel  has  only  to  avoid 
Kettle  Rock,  running  in  S.  77°  W.  on  either  side  of  it,  and  the  two  islets 
to  the  westward  of  it,  and  then  hauling  up  to  the  northward  under  the 
west  end  of  Watagheistic  Island,  where  she  may  anchor  in  from  17  to 
20  fathoms  over  mud  bottom,  well  sheltered  from  all  winds. 

Upper  Sound. — Wood  and  water  may  be  had  there  in  plenty,  and 
in  Hamelle  Harbor,  at  the  eastern  extremity  of  the  sound,  a  hunter  and 
salmon  fisher  resides ;  and  there  is  another  in  Bouissier  Bay,  which  has 
been  noticed  as  lying  to  the  westward  on  the  way  to  the  western  en- 
trance into  the  sound. 

Anchorage.— There  is  no  good  anchorage  on  the  route  to,  or  outside, 
either  entrance  to  Watagheistic,  the  soundings  being  irregular,  with 
deep  water  and  generally  foul  ground.  The  breakers  on  every  side,  on 
so  many  rocks  and  ledges,  make  the  place  look,  as  it  really  is,  extremely 
dangerous. 

Btamamu  River. — Between  the  Middle  Islands  and  Wapitagun,  the 
mainland  is  broken  into  coves,  and  lined  with  islets  and  rocks  innumer- 
able, among  which  nothing  but  a  very  small  vessel,  well  acquainted 
with  the  coast,  could  find  her  way.  There  is  nothing  there  worthy  of 
notice,  excepting  Etamamu  River,  which  enters  a  bay  open  to  the  SW. 
full  of  islets  and  rocks.  The  river,  consisting  of  a  succession  of  rapids, 
is  generally  narrow ;  it,  however,  widens  in  several  places,  forming 
lakes  with  still,  deep  water. 

Trading  Post. — At  the  mouth  of  this  river  theie  is  a  trading  and 
salmon  fishery  post,  at  which  two  men  reside  all  the  year. 

South  Makers  Ledge  is  a  small  rock  which  is  never  entirely  cov- 
ered when  the  sea  is  smooth.  Its  whole  extent,  above  and  under  water, 
is  250  yards  east  and  west  by  100  yards  north  and  south,  and  there  is 
no  danger  near  it  excepting  a  patch  of  4  fathoms,  bearing  from  it  S.  66° 
E.,  and  distant  400  yards.  The  soundings  are  very  irregular  round 
this  ledge.     It  bears  from  Cape  Whittle  S.  78°  E.  6^  miles. 

Cormorant  Rocks  lie  directly  between  Cape  Whittle  and  South 
Makers  Ledge,  leaving  a  channel  between  those  rocks  and  the  ledge 
nearly  2^  miles  wide.  There  is  no  danger  excepting  the  claws  of  Cor- 
morant Rocks,  one  of  which,  with  4  fathoms,  stretches  750  yards  S-  27° 


'-  'v;.-.'!i^;i-<ni'-- 


J 


148 


GRAND    POINT    TO   CAPE    WHITTLE. 


M  i 


E.  from  the  southeasternmoat  Oorinoraut  Rock ;  another  N.  34°  E.  from 
Nest  Kock,  and  8,  78°  B.  from  Slime  Rock  (the  NE.  Cormorant),  .^  mile 
from  each,  with  only  2  fathoms;  and  a  2-fathom8  patch  which  bears  N. 
7°  E.  4  mile  distant  from  Slime  Rock.  There  is  no  channel  between 
Cormorant  Rocks,  or  between  them  and  Lake  Island. 

Wapitagun  Harbor.— Mistassini,  or  the  Great  Stone,  is  a  remark- 
able block  of  granite  lying  on  the  east  extreme  of  the  Outer  Wapi- 
tagun  Islands.  It  resomblea  a  mortar,  especially  when  seen  from  the 
SW.,  and  has  been  called  The  Gun  by  the  tishermen.  It  serves  as  an 
excellent  guide  to  the  east  passage  into  Wapitagun  Harbor,  the  entrance 
to  which  is  '^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  it,  and  N.  22°  W.  3^  miles  from 
South  Makers  Ledge.  The  Outer  Wapitagun  Islands,  which  are  of  bare 
granite,  about  70  or  80  feet  high,  are  so  close  together  and  so  overlap 
that  they  appear  like  one  island.  They  completely  shelter  the  harbor, 
which  is  a  long  and  narrow  channel  running  east  and  west  between  them 
and  Wapitagun  Island,  which  in  next  to  the  northward  of  them.  The 
west  passage  of  the  harbor  is  2  miles  to  the  westwanl  from  the  Mistas- 
sini, N.  60O  W.  4  miles  from  South  Makers. 

It  is  about  160  yards  wide,  and  there  are  parts  of  the  channel,  be- 
tween islets  within  the  east  passage,  which  are  not  more  than  120  yards 
wide.  The  harbor  is  nowhere  more  than  280  yards  wide,  excepting 
where  there  are  small  bays;  so  that  although  the  depth  of  water  is 
more  than  sufficient  for  the  largest  vessels,  yet  the  navigation  is  so 
intricate  that  this  harbor  is  not  fit  for  those  of  a  greater  burden  than 
160  or  200  tons. 

Water.— There  is  water  to  be  had  on  Lake  and  Wapitagun  Islands ; 
but  for  wood  the  boats  must  proceed  through  the  islands  to  the  main- 
land, distant  from  the  harbor  about  3  miles  to  the  northward. 

Tides.— The  flooc*  from  the  eastward  and  ebb  from  the  westward 
usually  run  past  the  entrances  of  the  harbor,  at  a  rate  varying  from  ^ 
to  one  mile;  but  both  streams  are  much  influenced  by  the  winds. 


•is' 


li  ' 


I 


ier  N.  34°  B.  from 
ormoraiit),  .|  mile 
)h  wliicb  bears  N. 
channel  between 

tone,  is  a  reniark- 
the  Outer  Wapi- 
len  seen  from  the 
It  serves  as  an 
[•bor,  the  entrance 
W.  3^  miles  from 
which  are  of  bare 
er  and  so  overlap 
lelter  the  harbor, 
est  between  them 
d  of  them.  The 
from  the  Mistas- 

tbe  channel,  he- 
re than  120  yards 

wide,  excepting 
lepth  of  water  is 
navigation  is  so 
iter  burden  than 

pitagun  Islands; 
bnds  to  the  main- 
thward. 

•m  the  westward 
e  varying  from  ^ 
the  winds. 


CHAPTER  VI. 

GULF    AND    RIVER    ST.  LAWRENCE,    NORTH    COAST— OAPB    WHITTLE 

TO  SAGUENAT  RIVER. 

Aspect  of  Coast — From  Cape  Whittle  to  Natashquau  Point,  with 
the  exception  of  the  first  13  miles  eastward  of  Natashquan  Point,  where 
the  shore  is  of  sand,  this  coast  is  of  granite,  which  rises  into  steep  hills 
and  ridges,  with  rounded  summits,  having  between  them  morasses  and 
stagnant  ponds.  The  mainland  is  seldom  higher  than  200  feet,  even  in 
the  heads  of  the  bays,  and  it  diminishes  in  height  towards  the  sea,  as 
do  also  the  innumerable  small  islands,  islets,  aid  rocks,  which  fringe 
the  coast,  and  which  in  some  parts  extend  fully  5  miles  from  the  near- 
est point  of  the  mainland.  The  islands  are  bare  of  wood,  and  so  also  is 
the  main,  excepting  up  the  bays  or  where  sandy  tracts  occur,  which 
are  always  covered  with  a  thick  growth  of  spruce,  with  occasional  birch 
and  poplar. 

Soundings. — The  outer  rocks,  both  above  and  under  water,  are  so 
bold  that  there  is  no  warning  from  the  use  of  the  hand  lead  ;  but  there 
are  soundings  with  the  deep  sea  lead  which  are  sufficient  to  warn  a 
vessel  of  her  approach  towards  danger  at  night  or  in  fogs,  since  these 
depths  do  not  amount  to  50  fathoms  at  any  less  distance  than  5  miles 
from  the  outer  rocks. 

The  Tides  are  weak,  irregular, and  influenced,  both  in  their  strength 
and  direction,  by  the  winds. 

VIThittle  Rocks  are  the  outermost  of  the  many  small  rocks  above 
and  under  water,  lying  off  to  the  southward  and  westward  of  Cape 
Whittle.  They  are  two  half-tide  rocks,  and  are  distant  fronj  the  cape 
2|  miles. 

All  these  rocks  are  steep,  with  from  20  to  40  fathoms  of  water  be- 
tween them,  and  small  fishing  and  egging  schooners  find  their  way 
among  them,  being  guided  by  the  eye. 

Wolf  Bay  is  6  or  7  miles  deep.  There  is  plenty  of  water  in  its  intri- 
cate channels,  and  few  dangers  that  do  not  show,  but  a  number  of  rocks 
and  ledges  extend  across  its  mouth  from  Cape  Whittle  to  Wolf  Island, 
and  are  so  scattered  about  that  no  direction  would  be  of  the  least  use. 

Wolf  Island  may  be  easily  recognized,  being  higher  and  larger  than 
the  outer  islands  usually  are  off  this  part  of  the  coast.  It  is  about  J 
mile  long,  and  makes  in  two  hills,  which  are  about  150  feet  high. 

Outer  Islet  is  small,  low,  and  lies  about  a  mile  to  the  southward  of 

149 


I 


: 


] 


I 


\\ 


V 

fi! 


i| 


150 


CAPE    WHITTLE    TO    SAGUENAY    RIVER. 


Wolf  iHland.  Ah  itH  iitMiio  implies,  it  is  the  outermost  of  a  chain  of 
islands,  wiiich  extends  -k  or  5  miles  from  the  point  of  the  mainland 
dividing;  Wulf  and  Coacoacho  Bays.  It  has  on  it  a  white  conical  beacon 
30  feet  high. 

Coacoacho  Bay  is  the  only  place  aflbrding  anchorai;e  to  lar^^e  ves- 
sels upon  this  part  of  the  coast.  It  is  not  at  all  ditlicult  of  entrance, 
although  the  number  of  islets  and  rocks  in  every  direction  makes  it 
ai)i)ear  so.  There  is  an  excellent  harbor  in  the  head  of  the  bay,  called 
the  Basin,  and  another  formed  by  an  arm  running  into  it,  and  named 
Tertiary  Shell  Bay,  which  is  equally  safe.  Farther  out  than  these  har- 
bors the  bay  is  more  than  ^  mile  wide,  and  quite  sufficiently  sheltered 
from  the  sea  for  the  safety  of  any  vessel  with  good  anchors  and  cables. 

Beacon. — On  Outer  Islet  is  a  white  conical  beacon  30  feet  high. 

Orange  Rock  is  the  shallowest  part  of  a  narrow  ridge  of  rocks  about 
5  mile  long  in  a  SW.  direction,  and  which  is  shown  by  breakers  only 
when  there  is  a  heavy  sea  running.  From  the  least  water  on  it,  15  feet, 
Outer  Islet  bears  noith  nearly  1|  miles,  and  from  its  southwestern  end, 
in  3  fathoms,  the  same  islet  bears  N.  7°  B.  H  miles. 

South  Breaker,  which  also  shows  only  in  heavy  weather,  bears  from 
Outer  Islet  S.  75°  W.  2  miles,  and  from  Grange  Rock  N.  72°  W.  2  miles. 
It  has  less  than  !2  feet  of  water  on  it,  and  is  near  the  northeastern  end 
of  a  ridge  of  rocks,  which  extends  from  it  5  mile  to  the  southward,  with 
16  feet  water  near  its  outer  extremity. 

SW.  Breaker,  with  only  3  feet  water  on  it,  bears  K  66°  W.  2J  miles 
from  the  Sonth  Breaker,  and  S.  59°  W.  2^  miles  from  Audubon  Point. 
There  are  clear  channels  between  these  ledges. 

Directions. — Being  not  less  than  3  miles  from  Outer  Islet,  bring  it 
to  bear  between  N.  18°  E.,  and  N.  52°  E.,  and  steer  for  it  until  the  ves- 
sel is  within  Grange  Rock  and  South  Breaker,  when  the  rocks  which 
lie  about  4  mile  to  the  northward  of  the  islet  will  be  plainly  seen.  Pass 
to  the  westward  of  those  rocks  at  the  distance  of  J  mile,  and  when 
abreast  of  them,  a  chain  of  low  rocks  which  project  to  the  SW.  from 
Emery  Island,  will  be  seen  right  ahead.  Bring  the  point  of  this  chain 
to  bear  N.  7°  E.,  when  it  will  appear  on  with  the  extreme  point  of  the 
mainland  on  the  NW.  side  near  the  head  of  the  bay. 

Steer  in  upon  this  leading  mark  or  bearing  until  the  vessel  is  past  some 
rocks  which  lie  about  ^  mile  from  the  east  side  of  the  Audubon  Islets. 
These  rocks,  which  are  dry  at  low  water  and  can  always  be  seen,  must 
be  left  on  the  port  hand.  When  up  to  the  Emery  Rocks  the  bay  will 
be  seen  open  right  ahead  and  clear  of  danger,  excepting  Milne  Reef, 
which  is  partly  dry  in  low  tides,  and  extends  nearly  J  mile  out  from  the 
low  rocks ;  its  outer  end  lying  nearly  in  a  line  from  Tertiary  Point  to 
Crocodile  Islet  on  the  west  side  of  the  bay.  To  pass  to  the  westward 
of  it,  keep  Audubon  Point  shut  in  behind  Milne  Point  and  (Jrocodile 
Islet.  The  best  berth  is  on  the  western  wide  of  the  bay,  ^  mile  within 
Crocodile  Islet,  in  0  fathoms  mud. 


ER. 

most  of  a  chain  of 
t  of  the  maiiilaiul 
lite  conical  beacon 

rape  to  large  ves- 
iciilt  of  entrance, 
irection  makes  it 
of  tile  bay,  called 
•  to  it,  and  named 
It  than  these  har- 
iciently  sheltered 
chors  and  cables. 
30  feet  high, 
gre  of  rocks  about 
jy  breakers  only 
Iter  on  it,  15  feet, 
)uthwe8tern  end, 

ather,  bears  from 
r.  720  W.  2  miles, 
lortheasteru  end 
southward,  with 

66°  W.  2i  miles 
iudubon  Point. 

iT  Islet,  bring  it 
it  until  the  ves- 
he  rocks  which 
ulyseen.  Pass 
mile,  and  when 
)  the  SW.  from 
nt  of  this  chain 
ne  point  of  the 

isel  is  past  some 
LUdnbon  Islets. 
s  be  seen,  must 
ks  the  bay  will 
ig  Milne  Reef, 
le  out  from  the 
rtiary  Point  to 

the  westward 
and  (Jrocodile 

i  mile  within 


COACOACHO    BAY — OLOMANOSHEEBO    RIVER. 


151 


Tertiary  Shell  Bay  has  nothing  in  the  way  excepting  a  small  rock 
above  water  ]  mile  within  the  entrance,  which  must  be  left  on  the  star- 
board hand.  This  bay  is  not  more  than  200  yards  wide  A  mile  from  the 
entrance,  but  it  becomes  wider  within,  with  from  5  to  11  fathoms  water 
over  mud  bottom,  and  is  there  qnite  landlocked. 

Basin. — In  running  in  for  the  nasir,  keep  the  N\V.  side  of  the  bay 
aboard  until  the  vessel  is  within  \  mile  ot  the  island  in  the  head  of  the 
baj'.  Then  sheer  over  to  the  eastwanir  towards  that  island,  to  avoid  a 
shoal  of  bowlder  stones  which  extend  nearly  400  yards  oft' the  west  side  of 
the  bay.  The  channel  between  this  shoal  and  the  island  is  only  200 
yards  wide,  but  deej)  enough  for  the  largest  shi|)s.  Give  the  island  a 
berth  of  100  yards,  leaving  it  to  the  eastward.  As  soon  as  she  is  past 
the  inner  end  of  the  island  haul  to  the  westward  into  the  mouth  of  a 
small  bay,  and  the  water  will  soon  shoal  to  8  fathoms,  muddy  bottom, 
where  she  must  anchor,  and  will  be  quite  sheltered  from  every  wind. 

Coacoacho  River  flows  through  a  wide  and  shallow  channel  full  of 
bowlders,  and  discharges  the  waters  of  a  large  lake,  which  boats  can 
ascend  to  with  the  tide.  Its  shores  are  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and 
water  may  be  oV)tained  near  the  western  side  of  the  entrance. 

Trading  Post. — The  Hudson  Bay  Company  have  a  post  on  the  east 
bank  just  above  the  basin. 

Tides. — There  is  very  little  stream  of  tide  in  Coacoacho  Bay,  but  a 
weak  and  irregular  stream  of  flood  and  ebb  sets  through  and  between 
the  islands. 

Olomanosheebo  River.— The  coast,  for  the  first  12  miles  westward 
of  Coacoacho,  is  formed  of  innumerable  islets  and  rocks  to  Olomano- 
sheebo, or  Paint  River,  which  is  called  also  by  the  Canadians  "La  Ro- 
raaine."  This  is  a  considerable  river,  falling  20  feet  overgranite  into  the 
head  of  a  bay  4  miles  deep,  but  so  shoal  that  boats  can  scarcely  enter 
it  at  low  water.  There  is  a  trading  post  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  on 
the  east  side  near  the  Falls,  neither  of  which  can  be  seen  from  the  sea, 
being  hidden  by  the  islands ;  but  the  place  may  be  known  by  the  low 
sandy  cliffs,  thickly  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  on  either  side  of  the 
entrance  of  the  bay.     The  tide  flows  2  miles  up  the  river. 

Treble  Islet  and  Loon  Rocks  lie  to  the  westward,  the  latter  at  the 
distance  of  6  miles  from  the  above  bay.  The  Loon  Rocks,  which  can 
always  be  seen,  are  distant  3  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  main- 
land, and  are  the  outermost  danger  oft"  this  part  of  the  coast. 

Washsheecootai  Bay. — ^'loudberry  Point  is  the  west  point  of  this 
bay,  and  is  formed  by  the  mainland.  Theeast  point  of  the  bay  is  formed 
by  small  rocks  and  islets.  At  the  distance  of  3  miles  within  Cloudberry 
Point  the  bay  contracts  to  a  very  narrow  inlet,  having  several  rocks  and 
islets  in  it,  and  from  4  to  2.J  fathoms  water,  over  muddy  bottom,  for  the 
first  4  miles  up  ;  after  which  it  becomes  shallow  for  4  miles  farther,  to  the 
falls  of  a  considerable  river,  where  there  is  a  trading  post  and  salmon 
fishery  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company. 


152 


CAPE    WHITTLE   TO    8A0UENAY    HIVER. 


TliJH  inlet  aifbrdH  Hcarcoly  any  shelter  for  the  first  5  uiileH  within 
Cloudberry  Point,  and  it  ia  too  intricate  a  place  for  the  general  pur- 
])oHe8  of  navigation,  or  for  any  written  directions  to  be  of  avail. 

ShoaL — A  rock  has  been  reported  lying  l.|  miles  IS.  6°  W.  of  Cloud- 
berry k'oint. 

Musquarro  River,  where  there  is  a  Hudson  Bay  Conipany  trading 
and  fishing  post,  is  situated  3  miles  within  the  west  point  of  a  bay  full 
of  small  islets  and  rocks.  This  river  becomes  rapid  a  short  distance 
within  the  entrance,  and  is  useless  excepting  to  boats  or  very  small 
schooners.  It  will  be  known  by  the  houses  which  are  on  the  east  side 
of  the  entrance,  and  also  by  a  remarkable  red  and  preci|)itous  ridge  of 
granite,  about  20U  feet  high,  and  about  2  miles  to  the  westward  of  the 
river. 

Kegashka  Bay,  situated  between  Curlew  and  Kegashka  Points,  is 
3  miles  wide  and  1^  miles  deep.  It  is  only  in  the  NVV.  corner  of  the 
bay,  within  Kegashka  Point,  that  a  vessel  can  be  secure  from  southerly 
winds;  there  is  room  there  for  several  small  schooners,  but  for  only 
one  large  vessel,  and  she  must  be  moored  with  au  open  hawse  to  the 
eastward,  with  a  third  anchor  on  shore  to  the  SW.,  so  as  to  be  able  to 
haul  in  close  under  the  point  when  it  blows  hard  from  the  southward. 
The  depth  of  water  within  the  islets  is  from  4  to  6  fathoms,  over  fine 
sandy  bottom. 

Kegashka  Point  is  formed  by  an  island  separated  from  a  rocky 
peninsula  by  a  very  narrow  channel,  dry  at  low  water.  Both  the  island 
and  peninsula  are  distinguished  by  being  partly  covered  with  spruce 
trees.  Theie  are  also  a  few  spruce  trees  on  an  islet,  ij  mile  to  the 
westward  of  the  point,  and  as  no  other  islands  on  this  part  of  the  coast 
are  wooded,  the  bay  may  be  recognized  by  that  circumstance.  There 
is  a  line  sandy  beach  and  low  sandy  cliffs  in  the  NW.  corner  of  the  bay, 
and  there  are  also  similar  cliffs  for  about  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the 
isthmus  above  mentioned.  This  sandy  tract  is  densely  wooded  with 
dwarf  spruce,  another  circumstance  which  serves  to  distinguish  this 
bay  and  is  the  origin  of  its  name,  which  signifies  impenetrable  woods. 
Green  Island  is  of  low  granite,  covered  with  grass,  and  is  the  outermost 
and  largest  islet  sheltering  the  bay,  being  about  GOO  yards  in  diameter, 
and  situated  ^  mile  to  the  eastward  of  Kegashka  Point. 

Wood  and  water  may  be  obtained  without  difficulty  in  the  western 
part  of  Kegasiika  Bay,  where  there  were  several  Canadian  families, 
consisting  in  all  of  50  persons,  in  the  year  1868.  Their  houses  are  visible 
from  the  sea.  They  have  gardens  and  keep  sheep  and  oattle,  and  they 
also  prosecute  the  fisheries  and  winter  hunting. 

Directions. — The  safest  channel  into  Kegashka  Bay  is  between  the 
low,  bhick  islet  and  Kegashka  Point,  and  is  3t0  yards  wide  ;  it  carries 
8  fathoms  water,  and  is  quite  clear.  When  coming  from  the  westward 
give  the  south  extremity  of  Kegashka  Point  a  berth  of  ^  mile,  or  go 
no  nearer  than  the  depth  of  8  fathoms;  then  run  along  the  east  side  of 


t  5  iiiiles  within 
the  general  pur- 

1  of  avail. 
8o  W.  of  Cloud. 

'ouipany  trading 
►int  of  a  bay  full 
1  8hort  distance 
ta  or  very  small 
on  the  east  side 
uipituus  ridge  of 
westward  of  the 

ashka  Points,  is 
V.  corner  of  the 
»  from  southerly 
rs,  but  for  only 
n  hawse  to  the 
as  to  be  able  to 
the  southward. 
;homs,  over  fine 

I  from  a  rocky 
Both  the  island 
ed  with  spruce 
^  mile  to  the 
irt  of  the  coast 
stance.    Tnere 
ner  of  the  bay, 
est  ward  of  the 
y  wooded  with 
stingnish   this 
etrable  woods, 
the  outermost 
Is  in  diameter, 

in  the  western 
idian  families, 
ses  are  visible 
ittle,  and  they 

I  between  the 
lej  it  carries 
the  westward 
i  mile,  or  go 
e  east  side  of 


KE0A8UKA    UAY — NATA8H(iUAN    POINT. 


153 


the  point,  which  is  quite  bold,  lenving  all  the  islets  on  the  starboard 
hand.  Haul  around  the  inner  end  of  Kegashka  Point  to  the  westward 
at  the  tlistance  of  100  yards,  and  when  within  it  not  more  than  the  same 
distance  anchor  in  5  fathoms. 

When  approaching  Kegasiika  from  the  eastward  give  the  low  and 
small  islets  ofi  Curlew  Point  a  berth  of  ^  mile  to  avoid  the  ledges  ottthem, 
which  dry  at  low  water;  then  steer  N.  70°  W.,  or  so  as  to  pass  outside 
of  Green  Island,  going  no  nearer  than  liOO  yards.  Continue  on  that 
course  till  the  inner  or  NE.  extremity  of  Kegashka  Point  bears  N. 
31°  W.,  which  will  be  a  distance  of  rather  more  than  3^  miles  from  the 
■ledges  ott"  Curiew  Point;  then  haul  in  and  pass  between  the  point  and 
the  westernmost  islet  as  before  directed,  giving  the  south  side  of  that 
islet  a  berth  of  at  least  200  yards. 

Kegashka  River  attbrds  shelter  only  for  boats.  It  has  falls  40  feet 
high,  and  a  ttshing  statiou  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  a  mile  within 
its  entrance;  neither  the  falls  nor  the  house  can  be  seen  from  the  sea. 

Natashquan  Point — At  the  distance  of  2^  miles  to  the  westward 
of  Kegashka  River,  flue  sandy  beaches,  in  front  of  sandy  clitts,  70  or 
80  feet  high,  and  a  country  thickly  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  commence 
and  continue  to  Natashquan  Point.  It  is  a  sandy  promontory,  the  most 
southern  point  on  the  north  coast  of  the  gulf  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Seven  Island. 

Natashquan  Cod  Banks.—Parallel  to  the  coast  from  Musquarro 
Point  to  Natashquan  Point,  and  at  distances  varying  from  6  to  11  miles, 
there  are  banks  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  on  which  the  depth 
of  water  is  between  24  and  40  fathoms.  Codfish  are  often  caught  in 
abundance  upon  these  banks,  principally  by  American  schooners. 

Ruisseau  Rock,  lies  8  miles  S.  72°  W.  from  Kegashka  Point.  It  has 
only  2  feet  water  on  it,  and  lies  exactly  in  the  line  between  Natashquan 
and  Kegashka  Points,  and  is  distant  1^  miles  S.  10°  B.  from  the 
entrance  of  a  small  stream  named  Long  Kiver.  A  vessel  will  avoid  it 
by  not  going  nearer  to  the  shore  than  the  depth  of  17  fathoms. 

Bank.— One  and  a  half  miles  to  the  southward  of  Natashquan  Point 
lies  a  small  cod  bank,  with  4^  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  gravel 
bottom. 

Aspect  of  Coast— From  the  south  extremity  of  Natashquan  Point 
to  Collins  Shoal,  the  outer  danger  off  St.  Genevieve,  the  coast  is  low 
near  the  sea,  rising  a  short  distance  back  into  mounds  and  ridges,  but 
nowhere  exceeding  400  feet  in  height.  It  is  composed  of  primary  rocks, 
with  the  exception  of  a  sandy  tract  at  Agwanusand  Nabesippi  Rivers. 
The  sandy  tracts  are  always  thickly  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and  the 
country  generally  is  here  less  bare  than  it  is  farther  to  the  eastward. 

The  coast  is  broken  into  numerous  coves  and  small  bays,  affording 
shelter  everywhere  to  boats,  and  occasionally  to  very  small  schooners. 
The  small  and  bare  islets  and  rocks  are  innumerable,  along  it,  but 
nowhere  extend  farther  out  from  the  points  of  the  mainland  than  2 
miles. 


■iiiiifiinfliimia^ftiMaa 


154 


CAPE    WIIITTLK    TO    SAOITKNAY    RIVER. 


iVi 


When  tliure  is  (i  heavy  hoii  niiiriiiiKt  M  thuMO  datif^erH  Hhow,  or  thuj' 
ciiii  \m  Hitt'ii  t'rotn  tint  iiiiiHthoad  in  (;l(>ar  wi'athur;  but  iiii«l«>i- other  cir- 
cinnNtancoH,  tho  depth  of  '_'0  latlioins  is  as  near  to  tlieni  as  a  veMMel 
on(;lit  to  approacli,  tliat  depth  being  in  u\nuy  plaeeH  not  more  tlnin  a 
mile  rn»ni  the  outer  Ietl;;es. 

Currents  and  Tides. —  riie  eurreni  down  aloiif^the  coaHt  in  wenterly 
winds  lias  also  l)een  mentioned  in  paues  I'J  and  M;  its  rate  seldoni  ex- 
ceeds luiif  a  knot,  ami  is  usually  much  less,  so  that  a  vessel ean  alw*ayn 
imtke  way  to  windward  in  moderate  weather. 

In  shore  there  are  weak  tidal  streams  too  irregular  tc  be  depended 
upon.  It  is,  however,  imjtortant  to  remark  that  tlie  tiood  draws 
stronH;ly  into  NataAh(|(iau  Uiver,  and  the  bay  at  Little  Natashquan  ; 
while  the  ebb  sots  stroiifjly  otV  Natashiiuan  Point  to  the  SK.,  and 
causes  a  very  heavy  sea   ipoii  tlie  ban'.cs  otl'  it  in  soutlierly  winds. 

On  approaching  St.  Genevieve,  a  strong  indraft  of  the  flood 
towards  the  cliannel,  bet\>een  that  island  and  the  main,  will  be  experi- 
enced ;  and  the  ebb  will  be  foun<l  setting  strongly  out  in  the  contrary 
direction  :  that  is,  to  the  SE.  The  rate  of  those  streams  seldom  exceeds 
a  utile  ])('r  hour. 

Natashquan  River. — The  mouth  of  the  river  is  occupied  by  a  low 
sandy  island,  having  narrow  channels  on  either  side  of  it.  The  north- 
ern channel  is  nearly  dry  at  times,  but  the  southern  one  has  a  <lepth 
of  6  feet  at  low  water,  and  from  9  to  11  feet  at  high  water,  according 
to  neap  and  spring  tides. 

Tlie  bar  of  sand,  on  which  there  is  usually  a  heavy  surf,  extends 
out  '^  mile  and  is  exceedingly  steep  to  seaward,  where  iiO  fathoms  will 
be  found  within  |  mile. 

Trading  Post.— The  houses  of  the  rfudson  Bay  Company's  trading 
and  tishing  post  are  on  the  south  bank,  A  mile  within  the  entrance. 
Above  it  the  river  is  full  of  sand  banks,  dry  at  low  water. 

Little  Natashquan  River  admits  only  boats  at  high  water. 

Little  Natashquan  Harbor,  formed  by  a  number  of  islets  and  rocks, 
is  only  fit  lor  vessels  lot  exceeding  100  tons,  although  it  has  water 
enough  for  large  vi'.ssels.  The  entrances,  of  which  there  are  two, 
formed  by  a  reef  of  rocks  in  the  center ,  are  not  more  than  180  yards 
wide  between  reefs,  tlio  extent  of  which  under  water  can  not  be  seen, 
because  the  water  is  discolored  by  the  dark  streams  of  the  neighboring 
rivers. 

The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in  at  low  water  bv  the  west  channel  is 
.3  ffi thorns,  II nd  5  fathoms  by  that  which  is  between  the  central  reef  and 
the  islets  on  the  east  side.  The  space  within  the  reefs  in  which  vessels 
can  ride  in  from  3  to  ~y  fathoms,  over  sand  and  mud  bottom,  is  oidy  J 
mile  in  diameter.  The  anchorage  is  defended  by  the  main  and  islets 
from  all  winds  excepting  the  SW.,  in  which  direction  there  are  reefs  ot 
rocks,  some  parts  of  which  are  always  above  water.  In  a  strong  SW. 
wind  some  sea  comes  over  these  reefs  at  high  water,  but  never  enough  to 


^-^; 


NATA8HQUAN    AND    NABKHU'I'I    RIVEKH. 


IftS 


mIiow,  or  tlioy 
ii«l«'r  other  cir- 
III  us  a  veMsel 
t  inoro  tliaii  » 

iiHt  ill  westerly 
ute  Heliloiii  ox- 
Nelciiii  iilwayH 

be  ilepeiided 
)  Hood   <lni\V8 

Niitasliqiiaii  ; 

the  SK.,  and 
ly  winds. 

of  the  rtood 
will  be  experi- 
I  tlie  contrary 
Dhloin  exceeds 

pied  by  a  low 
;.    The  north- 
has  a  depth 
ter,  according 

surf,  extends 
fathoms  will 

my's  trading 
the  entrance. 


ater. 

ts  and  rocks, 
has  water 
re    ai»'  two, 

III  180  yards 
not  be  seen, 
neighboring 


8t  channel  is 
tral  reef  and 

hich  vessels 
m,  is  only  J 
n  and  islets 

are  reefs  ot 
strong  SW. 
er enough  to 


endanger  a  vessel  daring  the  siiniiiier  months.  Tliereaie  several  rocky 
]>atches,  with  from  2A  to  ',i  fatiionis  ott'the  harbor's  month;  these,  with 
the  want  i»f  hpace  to  work  in,  and  thedilllciiity  oi  getting  out  witli  the 
prevailing  southerly  winds  of  suiiiiiu>r,  render  this  phuie  of  littU'  use 
for  the  purposes  of  navigation;  but  it  is  a  valiialile  hailiur  for  tlie  tlsh- 
ermeii,  wliose  schoonris  of  from  ;{()  to  KKl  tons  are  well  suited  to  the 
m?.e  and  nature  of  the  place,  which  is  <!oiitigiioiis  to  exiielleiit  llshing 
ground,  and  atlbnls  every  facility  for  drying  tlsh.  'riitt  harbor  slioiild 
not  be  entered  by  a  stranger  without  a  pilot. 

Settlement. — In  IstSH  the  population,  mostly  French  Canadians, 
■was  2iH).  The  majority  of  the  people  live  on  the  eastern  side  of  Little 
Natashipian  Htream,  where  there  is  also  a  Roman  ('atholic;  chnrcli. 
There  is  a  ilersey  establishment  on  the  north  shore  of  the  harbo 

Washtawooka  Bay,  r>  miles  northwestward  of  Little  NataHlii|iniii, 
is  full  of  small  islets,  rocks,  and  ledges,  atfording  shelter  to  shallops 
and  boats.  It  is  an  intriitate  and  dan(;eroiis  place,  and  may  be  known 
by  Shag  Islet,  a  large  black  rock  lying  ofT  it,  and  farther  out  than  the 
rest,  being  1^  miles  8.  55°  E.  from  the  projecting  point  of  the  main. 

AgwanuB  River,  the  entrance  to  which  is  narrow,  has  only  (>  feet  in 
it  at  low  water.  There  is  no  bar,  but  many  small  rocks,  both  above 
and  underwater,  lie  ott"  its  mouth  to  the  distance  of  1^  miles,  and  ren- 
der the  approach  extremely  dangerous.  There  is  a  small  islet,  '^  mile 
from  the  river's  mouth,  above  which  the  river  expands  into  a  basin,  ^ 
mile  wide,  and  carrying  5  fathoms  close  up  to  the  foot  of  the  rapids. 
There  is  sandy  beach  for  l\  miles  to  the  eastward  of  this  river,  and  also 
westward  of  it  to  Nabesippi. 

Nabesippi  River  will  only  admit  boats  in  fine  weather.  On  the  west 
bank,  a  short  distance  within  the  entrance,  stands  a  house  and  store, 
being  a  trading  post  of  the  Hu  Ison  Bay  (Jompany,  which  can  be  readily 
seen  from  the  sea. 

Pashasheeboo,  Mushkoniatawee,  and  Washatnagunashka,  are 
small  bays,  full  of  small  islets  and  rocks,  which  render  Micir  entrances 
so  difUcult  and  dangerous  that  no  directions  would  be  of  the  least  avail. 

Watcheeshoo,  18  miles  west  of  the  Nabesippi  River,  is  a  hill  of 
granite,  l'i7  feet  high,  and  bare  of  trees.  It  is  apeninsula,  but  appears 
like  an  islet,  higher  than  the  rest,  when  seen  in  a  vessel  from  a  dis- 
tance. There  is  a  fishing  post  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company  in  a  (iove 
among  the  rocks,  to  the  westward  of  it.  Watcheeshoo  and  Saddle  Ilill, 
which  is  374  feet  high  above  the  sea,  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her 
position  oft"  the  coast.  The  latter  is  situated  0  miles  inland  from  the 
former,  in  a  northerly  direction. 

Quetachoo-Manicouagon  aud  Feashtebai  are  two  contiguous 
bays,  4  miles  westward  of  Watcheeshoo.  The  first,  which  is  the  east- 
ernmost, is  2i  miles  wide,  and  carries  from  3  to  14  fathoms  water,  but 
so  full  of  rocks  and  ledges  as  to  be  useless,  excepting  to  the  smallest 
schooners;  it  is  open  to  the  westward.    The  other  is  a  much  smaller 


I5r> 


CAPK    WIHTTLK   TO   SAOIIENAY    RIVKR. 


li 


b»y,  uupitblu  of  attbnliiitf  hIiuIUm'  only  to  boiitH,  and  o|iuii  to  the  Houtl 
wnnl. 

Appeetetat  Bay  Ih  lull  of  nxtkH,  of  no  nse  to  v«H«elH,  bucanse  of  the 
Ictl^rtm  un(l<>r  wator  oft'  its  iMitranct^  an<l  uIho  within. 

The  Mlngan  Island*  at-u  eHtinuit»il  nowhurc  to  attain  an  eU>vati«)n 
oxcctMliuK  •'(00  ft*et  abovu  thti  Hua, and  are  in  ((unutal  nuicli  1ow«m'.  They 
poHMfMH  vury  littlu  Hoii,  but  UMVcrtheluHH  aru  tliiolvly  woodt>d  witli  H|iru(]«;, 
birch,  and  poplar  on  thu  Midu  towardn  the  mainland  ;  though  towardn 
the  Hua  barren  tractH  often  ocuur,  ()onipoH»<l  either  of  bare  liuieMtone, 
or  of  ItankH  and  ridtceM  of  linieHtone  gravel. 

The  Coaat  of  the  uiainlan<l,  from  St.  John  Uiver  to  Mingan  Uiver,  is 
of  Hand  and  clay,  low  and  thickly  wooded,  and  with  a  line  Handy  beach. 
Fartiier  eastwanl  the  Hhore  in  sometimeH  of  (granite,  and  at  otherH  of 
liuieHtone,  the  latter  rock  lyin^  immediately  over  the  former. 

There  are  '20  of  these  islandH,  in  none  of  which  are  there  any  inhabit- 
antH ;  Nome  of  them  are  very  HUiall,  and  the  largest  does  not  exceed  11 
or  V2  mileH  in  circunilerence.  They  are  arranged  parallel  to  the  coast, 
aud  extend  along  it  45  miles  from  St.  Genevieve  Island,  at  the  eaotern 
end,  to  the  Perroquets  at  the  western  end  of  the  chain. 

Supplies  of  wood  and  water  can  readily  be  obtained  from  the  prin- 
cipal of  the  Mingan  Islands  ;  wild  berries  are  abundant  in  their  season, 
and  so  are  dilferent  kinds  of  wild  fowl.  Quadrupeds  are  scarce,  but 
there  are  plenty  of  seals  upon  the  limestone  reefs,  and  a  few  codflah  off 
the  coast. 

Tides  — The  tides  are  not  strong  among  the  Mingan  Islands,  never 
exceeding  a  knot,  excepting  in  very  narrow  channels.  They  are  often 
rendered  irregular  by  the  winds,  but  in  tine  settled  weather  there  is  a 
const'iiit  alternation  of  the  streams  of  tlood  and  ebb  between  the  island 
and  the  main,  aud  also  within  the  distance  of  2  or  3  milea  from  the 
outer  or  southern  shores  of  the  islands. 

St.  Qenevleve. — Us  NK.  point  is  a  blutf  headland,  being  the  termi- 
nation in  tiiat  direction  of  the  highest  part  of  the  island,  which  is  about 
200  feet  above  the  sea,  and  slopes  irregularly  down  to  the  southward. 

Mount  St.  Genevieve  is  an  isolated  table  hill  on  the  mainland,  332 
feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water,  about  a  mile  inward,  and  bearing  N. 
26°  W.  from  the  NB.  point  of  the  island.  This  mountain  and  the  high 
NE.  point  of  the  island  distinctly  point  out  to  a  vessel  at  sea  the  posi- 
tion of  the  channel  between  the  island  and  the  main. 

The  Saints  are  two  low  and  bare  rocks,  lying  rather  more  than  ^ 
mile  to  the  southward  of  St.  Genevieve.  There  is  a  channel  carrying  5 
fathoms  of  water,  but  with  foul  ground,  between  them  and  the  island  ; 
and  reefs  under  water  extend  off  from  each  of  them  fully  600  yards. 

The  NW.  Bo'wen  Rock,  with  3  feet  least  water,  lies  one  mile  N. 
76'3  K.  from  the  Eastern  Saint,  and  with  the  south  side  of  the  latter  on 
with  the  center  of  the  Western  Saint. 

The  SB.  Bowen  Rock,  with  6  feet  least  water,  lies  S.  70°  E.  ^  mile 


■Sjr 


MtNOAN    ISLANDS — IIUNTINO    ISLAND. 


157 


11  to  the  Houti 

I>ucaii8ti  of  the 

II  till  eUn-iitluii 
h  lower.  They 
sd  with  Mpruot!, 
loiiifh  towanlH 
are  liineMtoue, 

iij^aii  Uiver,  in 
«  sandy  bench, 
il  at  others  jf 
iiier. 

e  any  inhabit- 
not  exceed  11 
I  to  the  coast, 
\t  the  eaHtern 

Toni  the  prin- 
1  their  8ea8on, 
re  scarce,  but 
Bw  codfish  off 

stands,  never 
iiey  are  often 
er  there  is  a 
en  the  island 
lies  from  the 

ig  the  termi- 
hich  is  about 
B  southward, 
lainland,  332 
i  bearing  N. 
md  the  high 
sea  the  posi- 

more  than  ^ 
b1  carrying  5 
1  the  island  : 
DO  yards, 
one  mile  N. 
he  latter  on 

Oo  E.  §  mile 


from  the  NVV.  Howen  Rook,  and  N.  88^  E.  l'i{  niiles  from  the  ICiiHterii 
Saint,  which  is  jii«t  open  tu  the  iiortli  ward  of  the  Western  Saint.  ThtT© 
is  very  deep  water  between  and  eJose  to  them,  mid  also  for  rather  more 
than  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  them  ami  the  SainlH.  The  souiHliiiKs 
are  extremely  irregular,  and  the  whole  of  this  <liiiigerous  piirt  shoiihl  be 
avoideil  by  vesHels. 

Hunting  Island  is  low,  thic^kly  wooded,  broken  into  many  coves, 
fringed  with  small  islets  and  rocks  on  all  sides,  ex<;eptiiig  toward  ihe 
inaiiilund.  OtV  its  S\V.  point, ami  extending  to  the  tlistan(;*M)f  \\  miles, 
lie  Wood  and  (hiii  Islands,  leaving  no  passage  between,  and  having 
■  reefs  running  «I(M»  yards  to  the  southward.  They  are  both  low,  and  the 
latter  is  bare  of  trees,  but  covered  with  grass  and  peat,  in  which  iiinum> 
erable  purtlns  burrow  and  n«ar  their  young. 

Oarde  Rock,  always  above  water,  lies  rather  more  than  a  mile  to 
the  southward,  and  is  tin;  termination  of  a  long  ridge  of  sunken  rocks. 
The  southeastern  eiul  of  the  island  is  likewise  beset  with  several  ret^fs, 
some  of  which  extend  'f  mile  to  the  southward. 

Collins  Shoal,  a  small  patch  of  rocks,  with  15  feet  least  water,  lieu 
2^  miles  from  the  HV).  point  of  Hunting  b.Iand,  with  the  east  point  of 
St.  Genevieve  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  the  Western  Haint,  !)eariiig 
N.  t)"^  B.,  and  the  north  iioiiit  of  W^ood  Island  in  lino  with  the  south 
side  of  the  Garde  Uock,  N.  73^  W. 

Caution. — Between  Collins  Shoal  and  the  reefs  otl'  the  SE.  point  of 
Hunting  Island  the  soundings  are  irregular,  from  l  to  17  fathoms,  over 
rocky  bottom,  and  vessels  should  not  pass  between  them. 

St.  Genevieve  and  Betchewun  Harbors. — The  first  of  these  har- 
bors  is  situated  between  St.  Genevieve  Island  and  the  mainland,  and 
the  second  between  Hunting  Island  and  the  main.  Both  are  excellent 
harbors,  not  difficult  of  access  or  egress  with  the  assistance  ot  the  chart 
and  fit  for  the  largest  ships.  ^ 

Wood  and  water  may  be  obtained ;  the  latter  from  small  streams 
either  on  the  main  or  on  the  islands. 

By  East  Channel. — To  enter  by  the  East  Channel  bring  the  NE.. 
point  of  St.  Genevieve  in  line  with  Indian  Point  (a  low  wooded  point 
of  the  main,  forming  the  east  point  of  Pillage  Bay),  bearing  N.  64^  W. 
Run  in  with  this  mark  on,  and  it  will  lead  J  mile  to  the  eastward  of  the 
Bowen  Rocks. 

When  the  SE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve  and  the  West  Saint  co'ne  in 
line  steer  a  little  to  the  northward,  so  as  not  to  go  too  near  a  fiat  tihoal, 
which  extends  nearly  600  yards  from  the  east  side  of  St.  Genev  ieve. 
Give  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve  a  berth  of  200  yards.  Auclioi"  in 
10  fathoms,  mud  bottom,  halfway  between  it  and  Anchor  Isla.id, 
close  off  the  NV7.  point  of  St.  Genevieve. 

Caution. — The  distance  across  from  the  NE.  point  of  St.  Genevieve 
to  the  main  is  about  a  mile,  but  the  navigable  breadth  of  the  entrance 
is  reduced  to  ^  mile  by  the  rocks  and  shoal  water  off  Ledge  Point. 


1 


158 


CAPE    WHITTLE    TO    8AGUENAY    RIVER. 


» it  mi 


</| 


The  shoal  water  extends  from  Ledge  Poiut,  directly  across  Pillage  Bay, 
to  Partridge  Poiut,  aud  a  vessel  must  not  approach  those  shoals  nearer 
than  7  f'atiioms. 

Betchewun  Harbor. — If  wishing  to  proceed  to  Betchewun  Harbor, 
pass  to  the  northward  of  Anchor  Island,  which  is  quite  bold  on  that 
side.  The  north  poiut  of  Hunting  Island  is  a  cliffy  mound,  with  a 
cove  on  its  eastern  side.  It  is  quite  bold,  and  a  vessel  must  pass  close 
to  it  to  avoid  the  shoal  off  Partridge  Point,  which  extends  J  mile  to 
the  southward,  and  diminishes  the  navigable  breadth  of  the  entrance 
to  700  yards.  VVhea  in  the  entrance  a  low  islet  will  be  seen  in  the  cen- 
ter of  the  harbor ;  steer  for  it  and  anchor  with  it,  bearing  S.  G9°  W., 
and  distant  J  mile.  The  depth  of  water  in  the  harbor  is  from  9  to  18 
fathoms,  over  mud  bottom. 

Ey  Saints  Channel. — To  »nter  these  harbors  by  the  Saints  Channel, 
bring  the  west  points  of  St.  Genevieve  and  Anchor  Islands  in  line, 
bearing  N.  3l<^  W.,  at  a  distance  of  not  less  than  5  miles  from  the 
former,  to  be  sure  that  the  vessel  is  outside  of  Oollins  Shoal  Run  in 
upon  this  leading  mark  until  the  north  sides  of  the  two  Saints  come  in 
line,  bearing  ^.  73°  E.  The  east  sides  of  Mount  Partridge  aud  of 
Hunting  Island  (or  rather  of  an  island  joined  to  it  at  low  water)  will 
come  in  one  at  the  same  time,  bearing  N.  61°  W. ;  steer  upon  this  last- 
named  leading  mark  (to  avoid  a  reef  which  extends  760  yards  from  the 
SW.  point  of  St.  Genevieve)  until  the  east  side  of  Mount  St.  Gene- 
vieve, seen  over  the  sandy  SE.  point  of  Anc'ior  Island,  comes  in  line 
with  NW.  poiut  of  St.  Genevieve  Island,  bearing  north.  Thence  by 
steering  N.  31°  W.  it  will  lead  in  through  the  center  of  the  channel 
between  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands,  aud  the  vessel  may  either 
proceed  to  St.  Genevieve  or  Betchewun  Harbors. 

Inner  Harbor. — There  is  an  inner  harbor  at  Betchewun  to  the  wjst- 
ward  of  the  low  islet  which  has  been  mentioned,  but  from  thence  chere 
is  no  chanuel,  excepting  for  boats,  to  pass  out  to  the  westward  between 
Hunting  Island  aud  the  main. 

.  Tides.— The  tides  between  St.  Genevieve  and  Hunting  Islands  imd 
the  mainland  iire  much  intlueuced  by  the  winds,  but  their  rates  seldom 
amount  to  a  knot  at  any  time,  and  are  usually  much  less,  excepting 
through  the  shallow  and  narrow  channel  at  the  west  end  of  Betchewun 
Harbor,  where  there  is  at  times  a  complete  rapid. 

Charles  Island  is  about  'MO  feet  high,  bold,  and  free  from  shoals ; 
but  at  the  distance  of  J  mile  southward  of  its  east  point  there  is  a 
patch  of  rocky  ground  on  which  no  less  than  5  fathoms  have  been  found, 
but  whicii  had  better  be  avoided  by  vessels  of  large  draft. 

PufiBn  Bay. — Between  the  east  point  of  Charles  Island  and  the  west 
point  of  Gun  Island  is  the  entrance  to  Puffin  Bay,  which  is  open  to 
southerly  winds.  Within  the  east  point  of  Charles  Island  and  half- 
way towards  Shoal  Cove  there  is  a  good  anchorage  in  7  fathoms,  mud 
bottom,  at  the  distance  of  400  yards  from  the  island ;  but  the  SE. 


across  Pillage  Bay, 
those  sboals  nearer 

3etchewuu  Harbor, 
[uite  bold  ou  that 
itty  raouud,  with  a 
3el  must  pass  close 
I  extends  J  mile  to 
th  of  the  entrance 
be  seen  in  the  ceu- 
bearing  S.  09°  W., 
or  is  from  9  to  18 

le  Saints  Channel, 
[•  Islands  in  line, 
5  miles  from  the 
3  Shoal     Run  in 
fro  Saints  come  in 
Partridge  and  of 
t  low  water)  will 
er  upon  this  last- 
50  yards  from  the 
Mount  St.  Gene- 
id,  comes  in  line 
orth.    Thence  by 
r  of  the  channel 
ressel  may  either 

iwun  to  the  wjst- 
'om  thence  there 
38tward  between 

ing  Islands  imd 

leir  rates  seldom 

less,  excepting 

id  of  Betchewun 

ee  from  shoals ; 
t)oint  there  is  a 

ave  been  found, 
ift. 

id  and  the  west 
hich  is  open  to 
Jland  and  half- 
r  fathoms,  mud 
;  but  the  SE. 


MINQAN    ISLANDS — CHARLES    HARBOR. 


159 


winds  send  in  a  considerable  swell.  In  the  NE.  corner  of  this  bay  is 
the  narrow  entrance  (between  shoals  otiKagg  Point  and  Ilunting  Island) 
to  Ragg  Bay,  which  has  tolerable  anchorage  in  its  NW.  part,  but  has 
very  dee|)  water  on  the  side  towards  Hunting  Island,  and  is  separated 
from  the  western  part  of  Betchewun  Harbor  by  a  shoal  channel  for  boats 
between  the  island  and  the  main. 

Charles  Harbor,  between  Charles  Island  and  the  main,  though  very 
narrow  is  (piite  secure  and  deep  enough  for  vessels  of  any  size,  but  its 
entrances  are  only  160  yards  wide.  Within,  the  harbor  expands  to  J 
mile  wide  by  ^  mile  in  length,  parallel  to  the  shore.  Both  entrances 
<5arry  a  depth  of  7  fathoms,  but  a  vessel  must  pass  over  4  fathoms  if 
she  enters  from  the  eastward,  through  Puffin  Bay.  The  depth  within 
the  harbor  is  from  4  to  6^  fathoms,  with  mud  bottom. 

Tides.— Strong  winds  occasionally  cause  the  tides  to  run  at  the  rate 
of  2  knots  in  the  entrances  of  the  harbor,  but  in  general  there  is  only  a 
weak  stream  with  either  tide. 

Trilobite  Bay.— Whale  Island,  lying  ^  mile  from  the  east  side  of 
Ammonite  Point,  and  with  shoal  water  between  them,  is  distant  $  mile 
to  the  westward  of  Charles  Island.  Both  islands  are  bold  and  cliffy, 
and  Trilobite  Bay  is  between  them  with  excellent  anchorage,  well 
sheltered  from  all  but  southerly  winds.  The  only  danger  to  be  avoided 
when  working  into  this  bay  is  a  reef  off  Ammonite  Point,  which  includes 
a  small  islet,  and  extends  J  mile  off"  shore  to  the  southward.  The  mark 
to  clear  this  reef  when  running  along  the  coast  is  to  keep  Gun  Island 
open  to  the  southward  cf  Charles  Island,  and  when  hauling  in  from  the 
westward  into  Trilobite  Bay  keep  the  north  point  of  Charles  well  open 
to  the  southward  of  Whale  Island. 

Directions.— To  enter  Charles  Harbor  from  Puffin  Bay  bring  the 
NE.  point  of  Charles  Island,  which  is  high  and  cliffy,  to  bear  N.  76°  W., 
then  steer  for  it  and  give  it  a  berth  of  about  300  yards  as  the  vessel 
hauls  round  it  to  the  westward  into  the  harbor. 

To  enter  from  Trilobite  Bay  give  the  NW.  point  of  Charles  Island  a 
berth  of  between  120  and  380  yards  as  the  vessel  hauls  round  it  into  the 
harbor.  All  the  way  from  the  eastern  narrow  entrance  into  Charles 
Harbor  there  is  a  broad  zone  of  shoal  water,  which  curves  round  parallel 
to  the  mainland  till  it  joins  Whale  Island,  and  nearly  fills  up  all  the 
NVV.  part  of  Trilobite  Bay,  rendering  the  entrance  of  the_  harbor  too 
narrow  for  convenient  or  general  use. 

Clearwater  Point  is  low,  and  the  shoal  water  does  not  extend  more 
than  i  mile  oft"  it  to  the  southward. 

The  Coast  between  Clearwater  and  Esquimaux  Points  forms  a  large 
bay,  along  which  there  are  high  and  conspicuous  cliffs  of  sand  and 
clay  that  distinguish  this  part  of  the  coast  to  a  vessel  at  sea.  The 
shoal  water  extends  a  considerable  distance  from  the  shore  all  round 
this  bay,  and  abreast  Sea  Cow  Island  the  3  fathoms  line  of  soundings 
is  a  mile  out  from  the  sandy  beach. 


^:,.^i'ii 


160 


CAPE   WHITTLE    TO    8AGUENAY    RIVER, 


Clearwater  Shoals. — 1^  miles  8.  59°  W.  from  Clearwater  Point  lies 
a  rouk)'  3  fathoms  shoal,  and  there  are  three  others  with  2  fathoms 
lyiug  to  the  northward  of  the  first,  and  in  a  line  from  the  point,  towards 
Walrus  Island  ;  the  outer  and  westernmost  of  them  being  rather  more 
than  2  miles  from  the  point.  To  pass  outside  these  shoals,  at  the  dis- 
tance of  i  mile,  keep  the  south  points  of  Gull  and  Fright  Islands  in 
one,  bearing  N.  83°  W. 

Sea  Cow  and  Walrus  Islands  lie  about  4  miles  west  from  Clear- 
water Puint.  They  are  steep  and  precipitous,  excepting  to  the  south- 
ward, in  which  direction  the  reef  off  Sea  Cow  Island  extends  J  mile,  and 
that  of  Walrus  Island  400  yards. 

Sea"  Cow  Channel. — There  is  a  clear  channel  na.ned  Walrus  to  the 
westward  of  Sea  Cow  and  Walrus  Island,  and  also  between  them  and 
the  Clearwater  Shoals.  This  latter  channel,  named  Sea  Cow,  is  1^  miles 
wide,  and,  although  not  as  good  as  the  Walrus,  maj'  be  used  in  proceed- 
ing to  Esquimaux  harbor  from  the  eastward  by  running  upon  the  leading 
mark  which  has  been  given  for  clearing  the  shoals  to  the  westward  of 
Clearwater  Point,  until  the  east  side  of  Esquimaux  and  Walrus  Islands 
come  in  one.  Then  steer  for  the  NE.  side  of  Sea  Cow  Island,  and  haul 
round  it,  at  the  distance  of  not  less  than  400  yards  to  the  northwest-- 
ward  for  the  east  entrance  of  the  harbor. 

Green  Island  is  low,  covered  with  grass,  with  reefs  stretching  north 
and  south  nearly  600  yards,  but  bold  to  the  east  and  west;  it  lies  nearly 
a  mile  west  of  Walrus  Island. 

Gull  Island  is  distant  ^  mile  to  the  southward  from  the  SE.  point  of 
Esciuimaux  Island,  but  there  is  no  passage  for  ships  between  them. 
The  south  point  of  the  island  is  bold,  and  may  safely  be  passed  at  the 
distance  of  400  yards. 

Esquimaux  Island  is  high  towards  its  north  side,  sloping  to  the 
southward.  From  its  SW.  point  a  shoal  extends  towards  Fright 
Island,  which  also  has  a  shoal  stretching  towards  Esquimaux  Island. 
The  channel  between  these  is  nearly  800  yards  wide,  with  deep  water, 
but  as  there  are  no  leading  marks  for  it,  and  the  reefs  on  either  side  are 
extremely  dangerous,  it  can  not  be  recommended. 

Fright  Island  is  bold  on  the  south  and  SW.  sides,  but  reefs  extend 
off  it  to  the  eastward  and  northward  to  the  distance  of  GOO  yards. 

Quin  Island  lies  north  from  Fright  Island,  from  which  it  is  distant 
a  short  ^  mile.  Its  shores  are  bold,  with  the  exception  of  a  broad  reef 
running  out  i  mile  to  the  westward  from  its  north  point. 

Fright  Channel  is  deep,  but  only  400  yards  wide  between  Quin 
Island  and  the  reefs  off"  Fright  Island.  It  can  not  be  recommended,  but 
might  be  used  in  case  of  necessity  by  hauling  up  to  the  east  of  Niapisca 
Island  till  the  south  end  ot  Quin  Island  conies  in  one  with  the  south  side 
of  the  cove  in  Esquimaux  Island,  bearing  N.  82°  E.,  then  steering  so  as 
to  i)ass  close  round  the  south  point  of  Quin  Island,  which  is  quite  bold. 

Quin  Channel  is  tlie  best  for  vessels  approaching  Esquimaux  Har- 


MINUAN    ISLANDS — KSQUIMAUX    HARHOR. 


h;i 


ater  Point  lies 
ith  2  fatlioms 
poiut,  towards 
g  ratlier  more 
als,  at  the  (lis- 
|[ht  Islands  in 

est  from  Clear- 
j  to  the  south- 
ids  '^  mile,  and 

Walrus  to  the 
reeu  them  and 
low,  is  1^  miles 
ed  in  proceed- 
on  the  leading 
le  westward  of 
\ralrus  Islands 
land,  and  haul 
the  northwest-  • 

retching  north 
;  it  lies  nearly 

e  SE.  point  of 

letween  them. 

passed  at  the 

loping  to  the 
wards  Fright 
imaux  Island, 
h  deep  water, 
)ither  side  are 

t  reefs  extend 

DO  yards, 
it  is  distant 
a  broad  reef 

etween  Quin 
amended,  but 
It  of  Niapisca 
le  sotith  side 
jteering  so  as 
is  quite  bold, 
uimaux  Har- 


bor from  the  westward.  The  depth  in  this  channel  is  from  5  to  7  fath- 
oms, over  rocky,  gravelly,  and  sandy  bottom.  Tfie  shoal  water  extends 
only  to  the  distance  of  'JOO  yards  from  the  island,  but  oft"  Pointe  des 
Morts,  and  the  small  islets  to  the  westward  of  it,  the  reefs  extend  to  the 
distance  of  JOO  yards  to  the  southward. 

Bsquimauz  Harbor  lies  between  Esquimaux  Island  and  the  main- 
land. The  Esquimaux  Point,  having  the  entrance  of  a  small  river  on  its 
west  side,  consists  of  sand,  and  is  quite  bold  to  the  soutiiward,  al- 
though shoals  extend  from  it  across  the  bays  in  either  side.  The  north 
Hud  NPj.  points  of  Escpiimaux  Island  are  also  bold,  and  may  l)e  passed 
at  the  distance  of  IW  yards  by  the  largest  ships.  The  depth  within 
this  secure  harbor  is  from  5  to  15  fathoms,  over  a  sandy  bottom.  The 
«pace  in  which  vessels  may  anchor  is  nearly  IJ  miles  long,  and  the 
iiverage  breadth  is  800  yards. 

Water. — Supplies  of  good  water  may  be  procured  from  the  river  at 
Esquimaux  Poiut,  or  from  small  streams  on  the  island,  and  wood  is 
plentiful. 

By  Niapisca  Channel. — Niapisca  Channel  is  the  best  with  westerly 
winds.  The  dangers  to  be  avoided,  besides  the  reefs  of  Fright  and  Quin 
Islands,  are  the  reefs  of  tiat  limestone  extending  ^  mile  out  from  the 
south  and  SE.  points  of  Niapisca  Island.  Between  those  points,  a  re- 
markablegroupof  flowerpot  rocks  will  be  seen  standing  on  the  limestone 
just  above  high-watermark.  From  thft  east  point  of  the  island  another 
reef  runs  out  ^  inUe  to  the  NE.,  but  there  is  ample  space  between  these 
reefs  and  Fright  Island,  the  channel  being  over  a  mile  wide  in  the  !:ui- 
rowest  part,  and  carries  between  30  and  40  fathoms  water. 

In  running  for  this  channel  from  the  westward,  the  leading  mark  for 
clearing  the  south  reef  of  Niapisca  Island  by  more  than  400  yards  is 
the  NW.  point  of  Fright  Island  in  line  with  the  south  end  of  Quin  Is- 
land. Do  not,  therefore,  open  those  islands  clear  of  each  other  until 
Moniac  Island  (bearing  N.  25'^  W.  2^  miles  from  the  nearest  point  of 
Niapisca)  is  brought  in  sight  to  the  t.istwaid  of  Niapisca.  Having 
done  so,  haul  in  through  the  channel,  steering  N.  3°  VV'.,  and  when 
Moutange  Island  (next  westward  of  Moniac)  opens  to  tue  northward  of 
Niapisca,  the  vessel  will  be  clear  of  the  reef  ofif  the  east  point. 

Haul  up  now,  if  necessary,  tu  clear  the  reef,  which  projects  K  mile 
westward  of  the  north  point  of  Quin  Island,  until  the  north  point  of 
Esquimaux  Island  is  not  only  open  to  the  northward  of  Quin  Island, 
but  also  the  north  point  ot  Sea  Cow  Island  is  open  to  the  noiiliward 
of  Esquimaux  Island.  Run  in  between  Quin  Island  and  the  main,  with 
the  last-named  marks  just  open,  and  they  will  lead  past  the  north  point 
of  Quin  Island,  at  the  distanc^j  of  about  400  yards. 

The  Mark  for  the  shoals  ofif  Pointe  des  Morts,  and  the  small  it>let8 
westward  of  it,  is  the  north  and  NE.  points  of  Esquimaux  Isl.ind  in 
one;  if  a  vessel  opens  them,  b»  ""ore  she  is  as  far  to  the  eastward  as  Qiiin 
Island,  she  will  be  ashore. 
54S9 11 


¥?! 


m 


mm 


1H2 


CAPE   WHITTLE    TO    SAQUENAY    KIVER. 


Tides. — The  tides  uaually  run  at  the  rate  of  about  oue  knot  through 
Esquiintuix  Harbor,  the  flood  coming  round  Clearwater  Point  from  the 
eastward,  and  passing  to  the  westward  between  Quiu  Island  and  the 
main.    The  ebb  flows  iu  the  contrary  direction. 

The  flood  also  draws  in  between  Fright  and  Niapisca  IslandH,  and  the 
ebb  sets  out  through  the  same  (;hannel.  But  these  streams  are  much 
influenced,  both  in  their  rate  and  duration,  by  the  winds,  and  the  ebb 
is  mucii  a(!celerated  by  westerly  winds  in  Esquimaux  Harbor,  running 
there  at  times  fully  2  knots. 

Niapisca  Island  is  ratlier  more  than  2  miles  long,  north  and  south, 
is  only  partially  wooded,  and  has  three  principal  hills,  not  exceeding 
200  feet  high. 

Quarry  Island,  about  the  same  height  as  Niapisca,  is  separated  from 
the  latter  by  a  channel  nearly  800  yards  wide,  with  a  small  islet  in  it, 
but  no  safe  passage  for  shipping,  because  of  a  shoal  in  the  buy  to  the 
southward,  and  of  a  reef  which  stretches  beyond  tlifi  small  islet.  Other 
reefs  also  run  out  ^  mile  from  the  west  side  of  Niapisca,  and  froiL  the 
south  side  of  Quarry  Island. 

Quarry  Cove,  ua  the  north  side  of  Quarry  Island,  has  2!i  fathoms 
water  in  th<>  entrance,  shoaling  gradually  to  ."*  fathoms  with  uhk^  bot- 
tom close  to  its  head.  The  island  and  shoals  along  the  mainland  are 
distant  only  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  this  cove,  which  thus  becomes 
a  completely  land-locked,  though  very  small,  liarbor.  No  other  direc- 
tions are  re(piisire  than  keeping  the  west  side  nearest  on  board  in  enter- 
ing, and  to  anchor  near  the  center  in  9  or  10  fathoms. 

"Water. — Good  water  may  be  obtained  from  a  small  stream  in  the 
SW.  corner  of  Quarry  (Jove, 

Quarry  Channel. — There  is  a  clear  channel  between  Quarry  and 
Large  Island,  which  is  the  next  westward.  The  only  directions  neces- 
sary are  to  bring  the  channel  to  bear  N.  8^  W.,  and  then  run  in,  keep- 
ing in  its  center  until  g  mile  within  the  SW.  point  of  Quarry  Island, 
after  which  that  island  may  be  kept  close  aboard,  as  the  remainder  of 
the  chaunel,  IJ  miles,  is  quite  bold  on  that  side,  while  the  shoal  water 
extends  to  the  distance  of  300  yards  from  Large  Island.  The  flood  runs 
slowly  in  through  this  channel,  and  the  ebb  as  slowly  out. 

Large  Island  is  thickly  wooded,  and  its  highest  part  about  200  feet 
above  the  sea.  Reefs  of  flat  limestone  extend  off"  its  south  and  SW 
points  nearly  '^  mile,  and  the  mark  for  the  south  point  of  these  reefs,  in 
2  fathoms,  is  the  south  points  of  Niapisca  and  Fright  Islands  in  one. 
On  its  west  side,  a  mile  to  the  northward  of  its  SW.  point,  there  are 
many  flowerpot  and  arched  rocks,  standing  on  the  flat  limestone  above 
the  present  high-water  mark. 

Middle  Reef  lies  Just  within  the  line  joining  the  south  points  of 
Large  and  Miugan  Islands  and  2  miles  westward  of  the  former.  A  part 
of  this  reef  is  alwa.vs  above  water,  but  it  is  not  GO  yards  in  diameter, 
though  the  shoal  around  it  is  ^  mile  long  and  ^  mile  wide.     From  the 


knot  througb 
•oint  from  the 
stand  and  the 

lantlH,  and  the 
ains  are  much 
5,  and  the. ebb 
irbor,  running 

rth  and  south, 
not  exceeding 

separated  from 
iiall  islet  in  it, 
the  bay  to  the 
II  islet.  Other 
i,  and  iron,  the 

las  iiU  fathoms 
witii  mini  bot- 
Q  mainland  are 
1  thus  Ijecomos 
■To  other  direc- 
board  in  euter- 

streain  in  the 

n  Quarrj'  and 
rections  necea- 
i  run  in,  keep- 
Juarry  Island, 
remainder  of 
e  shoal  water 
he  tiood  runs 
t. 

about  300  feet 
uth  and  SVV 
tliese  reefs,  in 
slands  in  one. 
)int.  there  are 
uestoue  above 

)uth  points  of 

rmer.    A  part 

in  diameter, 

le.     From  the 


MINGAN  ISLANDS — LAHOE  ISLAND. 


106 


east  side  of  this  reef,  in  4  fathoms,  the  east  sides  of  the  two  Birch  Islands 
are  iu  one. 

Large  Channel,  between  Middle  Beef  and  Large  Island,  should 
be  used  by  a  vessel  proceeding  to  Mingan  Harbor  witii  an  easterly 
wind,  and  in  doing  so  the  only  thing  necessary  to  be  observed  is  that 
the  reefs  extend  to  the  westward  off  the  shore  of  Large  Island,  from 
400  to  (iOO  yards,  as  far  in  as  the  Flowerpot  Columns,  after  which  the 
island  becomes  bold.  There  is  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead  on  the 
Large  Island  side,  but  Middle  Reef  may  be  approached  to  the  depth  of 
13  fathoms,  which,  on  Uie  east  side,'  is  r.iore  than  ^  mile  from  it. 

Outer  and  Inner  Birch  Islands. — The  cliannel  between  the  two 
Birch  Islands  is  (JOO  yards  wide,  but  the  ground  is  all  foul,  and  not  more 
tiian  '3.\  fatiioms  could  be  carried  through  by  a  stranger.  The  Outer 
Birch  Island  is  about  a  mile  in  diameter  and  about  300  feet  in  height, 
and  it  has  a  remarkable  Hower-pot  rock  on  its  S  ..  point.  Tiie  Inner 
Birch  Island  is  rather  larger;  its  N\V.  point  is  long  and  low,  extending 
i  mile  to  the  westward  from  the  body  of  the  island,  with  a  curve  to  the 
SW. ;  oft  tliis  point  there  is  a  reef  running  out  h  mile  to  the  westward, 
ai;d  having  12  fatiioms  within  tli'Mlistance  of  200  yards  of  its  edge. 

'Sulk  Rock. — Half  a  mile  SVV.  from  the  same  point  there  is  a  small 
low  islet,  (ilose  to  the  south  point  of  which  stands  a  very  remarkable 
rock,  called  the  Hulk  Rock,  from  its  resemblance  to  the  hulk  of  a 
wrecked  vessel  The  reef,  of  Hat  limestone,  dry  at  low  water,  which 
connects  this  islet  and  rock  to  the  low  west  point  of  the  Inner  Birch 
Island,  extends  OOO  yards  off  the  rock  to  the  southward,  and  also  400 
yards  to  the  wi'stwaid. 

Middle  Reef  Channel,  between  Outer  liirch  Islant!  and  the  Middle 
Reef,  is  almost  a  mile  wide,  and  the  shoal  water  extends  only  300  yards 
from  the  south  point  of  the  former ;  but  there  i.s  a  dangerous  reef  ott' 
the  west  side  of  the  Outer  Birch  Island,  extending  jf  mile  from  the 
shore. 

Tides — The  flood  tide  sets  out  to  the  SW.  between  the  Birch  Is- 
lands, and  also  between  them  and  the  Middle  Reef. 

Birch  Channel,  between  the  Birch  Islands  and  Mingan  Island,  is  the 
best  by  which  to  proceed  to  Mingan  Harbor  with  westerly  winds.  It 
is  3  miles  wide  and  all  deep  water. 

Mingan  Island,  3J  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  Inner  Birch  Island, 
is  about  100  feet  in  height  and  bare  of  trees.  The  shoal  water  does  not 
extend  above  000  yards  oft"  its  south  point ;  but  to  the  SW.  and  west 
the  reefs,  including  the  islets,  run  out  nearly  1,200  yards.  The  island 
is  bold  on  its  north  and  east  sides. 

Mingan  Patch  lies  S.  0°  W.  3|  miles  from  the  south  point  of  Min- 
gan Island,  and  with  the  south  point  of  the  Outer  Birch  tou(!hing  the 
north  point  of  Large  Island  ;  it  is  a  patch  of  rocky  ground  with  0  fath- 
oms wuter  on  it,  yet  there  is  a  heavy  swell  upon  it  at  times. 

The  Perroquets,  the  westernmost  of  the  Mingan  Ii*lan<ls,  are  four 


164 


CAPE    WHITTLE    TO    8A01JENAY    RIVE  II. 


mm 


small  islets,  low  and  bare  of  trees.  The  northwesterninost  is  higher 
than  the  others,  surrounded  with  cliffs,  and  has  a  superstratum  of  peat 
on  its  flat  summit.  The  two  easternmost  of  these  islets  have  a  reef  of 
flat  limestone  extending  off  them  ^  mile  to  the  southward.  There  is 
also  a  shoal  to  the  northward  of  them  ^  miie,  and  a  narrow  channel 
between  them  and  the  other  two,  but  of  no  use  to  vessels.  The  north- 
westernmost  islet  has  shoal  water  off  it  to  the  distance  of  |  mile,  both 
to  the  eastward  and  westward,  but  a  vessel  may  pass  to  the  northward 
of  it,  at  the  distance  of  400  yards,  in  14  or  15  fathoms  water. 

Perroquet  Channel,  between  the  Perroquets  and  Miugan  Islands,  is 
1^  miles  wide,  and  with  a  depth  varying  from  30  to  40  fathoms  in  the 
center.  Both  the  flood  and  ebb  set  out  through  the  channel,  the  for- 
mer to  the  8W.  and  the  latter  to  the  southward. 

Mingan  Channel. — All  the  islands  just  described,  from  Niapispa 
Island,  are  bold  and  free  from  danger  on  their  north  sides,  so  that  Min- 
gan Chan  nel,  which  lies  between  them  and  the  main,  is  safe  throughout. 

Moniac  Island,  on  the  mainland  side  of  this  channel,  is  less  than  J 
mile  in  diameter,  and  lies  nearlj'  abreast  Niapisca  Island,  from  which 
it  is  distaf  i  tibout  2^  miles.  Moutange  Island,!^  miles  farther  west- 
ward, is  ii '  lut  l^  miles  in  diameter,  and  situated  oft'  a  bay  full  of  p.mati 
islets  ant'  ii  wliioh  there  are  several  small  rivers.  It  is  directly  abreast 
Quarry  Isii-f  ^  at  the  distance  of  2^  miles.  These  Islands,  Moniac  and 
Mo'u;!ii;re,  avi  distant  ^  mile  from  the  nearest  point  of  the  main,  but. 
sh<><  ip  .'  itliiii  and  between  them  are  nearly  dry  at  low  water. 

The  S;  5  '"  do  not  project  above  the  distance  of  GOO  yards  off  to  !,he 
soutv''wa'  ■«■'  'hese  islands,  but  there  is  rocky  ground,  with  irroijular 
soundings  c- uween  4  and  10  fathoms,  out  to  the  distance  of  a  mjle  to 
the  southward  of  them  both;  so  that  a  vessel  beating  in  the  Mingan 
Channel  had  better  not  stand  over  U>  the  northward  beyond  H  miles 
from  the  northern  shores  of  the  outer  islands,  or  into  less  than  10 
fathoms. 

Long  Point,  on  which  is  a  fishing  establishment,  consists  of  sand, 
and  there  Is  a  fine  beach  from  thence  to  the  eastward,  .is  far  as  Mingan 
Harbor  inclusive.  There  is  a  sandy  shoal  immediatelv  to  th«*  westward 
of  it  whicli  extends  J  mile  off  shore  and  as  far  to  the  wentward  as  the 
St.  John  River. 

Sand  Lark  Reef,  lying  2^  miles  eastward  of  Harbor  'niand,  and 
rather  more  than  a  mile  from  the  maitdand,  is  small  and  low,  but  always 
above  water.  There  is  a  clear  channel  with  deep  water  on  all  sides  of 
it;  but  there  is  a  rocky  patch,  with  5  fathoms  water,  U  -..'Ip*  from  it, 
on  1  line  towards  the  south  side  of  Moutange  Island.  Tlii.s  shoal  water 
has  not  been  particularly  examined,.!,-;  sh.d  therefore  be  avoided. 

Harbor  Island  is  of  limestone,  abou^  iOO  f e  a  in  height,  bold  towards 
Mingan  Harbor,  but  shelving  and  8b<^;!  to  the  southward  to  the  dis- 
tance of  I  mile  from  the  shore.  The  leii^th  of  the  island  is  2  mileii,  its 
greatest  breadth  does  not  amount  to  ^  mile,  and  It  is  thickly  wooded. 


iii: 


i;;?rf 


noat  id  higher 
^ratum  of  peat 
have  a  reef  of 
ird.  There  is 
.rrow  channel 
I.  The  north- 
f  ^  mile,  both 
he  northward 
iter. 

;an  Islands,  ia 
'athoins  in  the 
linnel,  the  for- 

"rora  Niapispa 
s,  80  that  Miu- 
fe  thronghout. 
,  is  less  than  ^ 
d,  from  which 

farther  west- 
y  full  of  Kinall 
irectly  abreast 
is,  Moniac  and 
the  main,  but. 
ater. 
ards  ofiF  to  'he 

ith  irroijular 

e  of  a  mile  to 
the  Mingan 
»yoiid  H  miles 

less  than  10 

isists  of  sand. 

far  as  Mingau 

the  westward 

*t:»ard  as  the 

T  Aland,  and 
<w,  but  always 
)ii  ail  sides  of 

'l<^«  from  it, 
is  shoal  water 
e  be  avoided, 
bold  towards 
■d  to  the  dis- 
is  2  mile^,  its 
ickly  wooded. 


MINGAN    ISLANDS — MINOAN    RIVKU. 


ir{5 

1  mile 


The  reefs  ott"  the  east  and  west  ends  of  the  island  extend  nearly 
out  from  the  high-water  mark. 

Mingan  River.— The  mainland  recedes  from  the  island  in  theeast(M-n 
part  of  the  Uarl)()r,  which  would,  inconstHjuence,  be  exposed  to  easterly 
winds,  if  it  were  not  for  a  sandy  shoal,  dry  at  low  water,  which  (ixtonds 
400  yards  out  from  the  entrance  of  the  Mingau  liiver.  This  river  is 
only  capable  of  admitting  boats  at  high  water,  and  its  mouth  is  opposite 
the  east  end  of  the  island. 

Mingan  Harbor. — The  eastern  entrance  between  the  sandy  shoal  and 
the  island  is  400  yards  wide,  the  western  entrance  bntween  the  main- 
land and  the  island  is  nearly  as  wide,  the  whole  breadth  in  both  entrances 
being  in  deep  water.  The  space  within,  in  which  vessels  may  anchor 
in  safety,  is  about  a  mile  long  by  rather  more  than  \  mile  wide,  w'ith 
plenty  of  water  for  the  largest  ships,  over  a  bottom  of  tine  sand, 

Directions. — In  approaching  Mingan  Harbor  from  the  eastward, 
bring  the  north  or  inner  side  of  Harbor  Island  to  bear  N.  72°  W.,  and 
the  houses  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  post  ought  then  to  appear 
open  fully  their  own  breadth  to  the  northward  of  the  island.  Steer  for 
those  houses  so  open,  leaving  the  east  end  of  the  island  300  yards  to 
the  southward,  and  taking  care  to  keep  the  south  side  of  the  sandy 
point  of  the  main,  which  forms  the  western  entrance  of  the  harbor,  shut 
in  behind  the  north  side  of  the  islan<l,  for  when  they  are  in  one  the  ves- 
sel will  be  on  shore  on  the  sandy  shoal  off  Mingan  River.  After  the  east 
end  of  the  island  is  passed,  run  along  its  north  side  at  the  distance  of 
200  yards,  and  choose  a  berth  anywhere  near  the  center  of  the  harbor, 
in  from  9  to  13  fathoms,  sand  bottom. 

When  running  for  the  harbor  from  the  westward,  run  in  towards  the 
sandy  beach  of  the  mainland  at  the  distance  of  ^  mile  to  the  westward 
of  the  island  until  the  sandy  point  of  the  mainland,  which  forms  the 
west  end  of  the  harbor,  comes  in  one  with  the  face  of  the  clay  cliffs  to 
the  eastward  of  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  houses,  bearing  N.  7 1°  E., 
or  until  the  depth  is  11  fathoms.  Bun  upon  this  mark  along  the  beacli 
and  give  the  above  sandy  point  of  the  mainland  a  berth  of  100  yards 
as  the  vessel  passes  into  the  harbor,  and  choose  a  berth  as  before 
directed. 

River  St.  John. — The  course  of  the  river  for  several  miles  up  from 
the  entrance  is  between  high  cliffs  of  sjtratifled  sand  and  gravel  over 
clay,  with  small  sandy  islands  occasionally.  The  country  on  either 
side  is  covered  with  a  thick  growth  of  small  spruce  trees.  At  the  eu- 
trance,  between  the  clay  cliffs  on  the  west  and  a  sandy  point  on  the 
east  side,  the  river  is  260  yards  wide.  The  breadth  increases  to  nearly 
^  mile  immediately  within  the  entrance,  and  then  decreases  again  grad- 
ually. 

Fishing  Post. — There  were  two  log  houses  on  the  \s  -  'st  bank,  ^  mile 
within  the  entrance,  where  a  party  of  men  oecaaionally  resided  to  flsh 
for  salmon;  and  vessels  may  lie  close  to  them  in  2  fathoms  at  low 
water. 


166 


CAPE    WUITTLK    TO    SAGUENAY    KIVEK. 


Bar. — An  extensive  bar  of  siinil,  A  mile  out  from  the  entrance,  Hhifts 
Nvitii  every  gale  of  wind,  ami  has  seldom  more  tiian  3  or  4  feet  over  it 
«t  low  water;  at  high  water  there  are  7  or  10  feet  on  the  bar,  according 
us  it  may  be  neap  or  8i)ring  tide.  Soutlierly  and  westerly  winds  cause 
so  heavy  a  surf  as  to  render  tiie  bar  impassable. 

Anchorage. — Tliere  is  good  anciiorage  outside  the  bar  which  may 
be  safely  upproaciied  by  the  lead,  the  soundings  decreasing  gradually 
from  20  to  i<  fathoms  over  sand  and  clay  bottom ;  the  greater  depth 
being  at  2^  miles  and  the  lesser  at  !|  mile  from  the  river's  mouth. 

Tides. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  the  entrance  of  8t.  John 
River  at  Ih.  20m. ;  ordinary  springs  rise  7  feet  and  neaps  4  feet. 

Aspect  of  Coast — From  the  river  St.  John  to  the  river  Moisic  the 
whole  line  of  coast,  with  the  exception  of  its  two  extremities,  that  is  to 
say,  all  between  Magpie  and  Trout  Rivers,  is  composed  of  primary  rock, 
rising  immediately  from  the  sea  in  steep,  although  often  rounded  hills, 
which  are  either  bare  or  partially  wooded  with  small  trees  of  the  pine 
species.  The  hills  in  front,  or  next  to  the  sea,  seldom  exceed  200  or 
300  feet  in  height ;  but  others,  a  short  distance  back  from  the  shore, 
fnrm  a  range  of  greater  elevation,  varying  from  500  to  700  feet,  and 
nowhere  exceeding  1,000  feet  of  height  above  the  sea. 

The  appearance  of  thi^  coast  from  a  vessel  is  slightly  undulating, 
bold,  and  unbroken,  presenting  features  so  little  diversified  that  it  is 
very  difficult  to  make  out  one  part  of  it  from  another  at  a  distance  of 
6  or  8  miles ;  but  upon  a  nearer  approach  the  mouths  of  the  rivers, 
taken  in  connection  with  the  features  of  the  neighboring  land,  will  in 
general  supply  distinguishing  characters  by  which  the  situation  of  a 
vessel  may  be  ascertained. 

Local  Attraction  of  the  Shore. — The  black  oxide  of  iron,  besides 
being  a  constituent  mineral  in  the  granitic  rocks  of  this  coast,  is  found 
abundantly  in  nests  and  veins,  particularly  in  the  vicinity  of  the  Sawbill 
River.  Its  magnetic  action  on  the  needles  of  com[)assos  on  shore  is 
such  as  to  cause  the  variition  obtained  by  them  to  vary  from  14  to  29 
degrees  west.  At  the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles  the  error  from  this  cause 
never  exceeded  half  a  point,  and  at  the  distance  of  3  or  6  miles  it  be- 
came insensible. 

Caution.— This  coast  is  not  by  any  means  so  bold  as  it  appears  from 
a  distance,  for  there  are  many  rocks  along  it  both  above  and  under 
water,  several  of  which  are  very  dangerous,  and  nearly  a  mile  from  the 
shore.  Strangers  should  not  approach  the  shore  between  Magpie  and 
Bason  Rivers  nearer  than  the  depth  of  20  fathoms.  Still  greater  can- 
tion  becomes  necessary  between  the  last  '^araed  river  and  St.  Charles 
Point,  where  40  fathoms  is  as  near  as  a  large  ship  can  approach  with 
prudence,  for  that  depth  in  several  places  will  be  found  within  a  mile 
of  the  rocks. 

Mount  St.  John,  an  isolated  saddle-backed  hill,  1,416  feet  above 
the  sea,  bears  N.  ^o  B.  11  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  river  St. 
John. 


sr.    JOHN    AM)    MANliOU    KIVKUH. 


1()7 


itraiico,  (thit'ts 
•  4  foot  over  it 
bar,  acuordiiiiif 
y  winds  cause 

»ar  which  may 
Aug  gradually 
greater  <leptlt 
i  inoutli. 
ice  of  St.  John 
i  4  feet, 
'er  Moisic  the 
ties,  that  i»  to 
primary  rock, 
rounded  hills, 
es  of  the  pine 
exceed  200  or 
>ia  the  shore, 
700  feet,  and 

f  uudulatinj;, 
led  that  it  is 
I  a  distance  of 
of  the  rivers, 
land,  will  in 
situation  of  a 

iron,  besides 

oast,  is  found 

of  the  Sawbill 

on  shore  is 

from  14  to  29 

om  this  cause 

6  miles  it  be- 

appears  from 
e  and  under 
mile  from  the 
Magpie  and 
greater  cau- 
8t.  Charles 
pproach  with 
within  a  mile 

.6  feet  above 
the  river  St. 


Coast. — Between  the  St.  .lolin  and  Magpie  Rivers  the  coast  consists 
of  white  cliffs,  with  a  superstratum  of  sand,  which  is  fast  (;onsolidating 
into  sandstone  by  means  of  the  red  oxide  of  iron  furnished  by  numor< 
ous  small  streaniM. 

Magpie  River  has  several  rocks  above  and  under  water  oil'  its  east 
point  of  entrance  and  r^  mile  ottshors.  At  300  yards  within  the  narrow 
entrance  the  river  falls  about  30  feet  over  granitic  rocks.  There  are 
from  7  to  9  feet  at  low  water  over  the  bar  outside,  but  as  this  river  is 
of  no  use  either  to  vessels  or  boats,  It  is  unnecessary  to  describe  it  fur- 
ther. 

Magpie  Bay. — Rather  more  than  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  Magpie 
River,  and  nearly  }  mile  ott'shore  on  the  west  side  of  Magpie  Bay.  there 
is  a  rocky  shoal,  on  which  the  sea  almost  always  breaks  at  low  water. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage,  with  winds  off  the  land,  in 
the  baj' ;  and  vessels  may  stand  in  to  7  fathoms  at  low  water  in  every 
part  of  it,  but  the  southerly  and  westerly  winds  roll  in  a  very  heavy 
sea. 

Four-Fathom  Ridge. — Three  and  a  half  miles  westward  of  Magpie 
Point  is  liidge  Point,  from  which  a  long  and  narrow  ridge  of  rocky 
ground,  with  from  4  to  6  fathoms  at  low  water,  extends  4^  miles  to  the 
westward  across  a  rocky  bay,  wherein  there  is  one  large  and  several 
small  rocks  above  water.  The  western  side  of  this  rocky  ground  is  nearly 
one  mile  southward  of  Thunder  Point.  There  is  a  very  heavy  sea  upon 
this  ridge  at  times,  and  it  thet  becomes  dangerous  to  large  ships. 

Sawbill  River,  situated  ir  the  bay  between  Sheldrake  and  Ore 
Points,  may  be  distinguished  Ly  the  clay  cliffs  immediately  within  the 
entrance,  and  by  the  peculiar  hills  on  either  side  of  it,  which  are  bar- 
ren and  of  gray  feldspar,  thickly  studded  with  small  round  mounds. 

This  river  can  only  be  entered  in  very  tine  weather,  in  consequence 
of  the  heavy  surf.  It  has  scarcely  any  bar,  but  the  entrance,  at  the 
western  extremity  of  a  long  and  narrow  sriuot  sand  which  extends 
across  the  river's  month,  is  very  narrow,  v  ith  a  depth  of  from  4  to  11 
feet  in  it,  according  to  low  or  high  water,  in  ordinary  spring  tides.  At 
high-water  neaps  there  is  seldom  more  than  9  feet.  The  same  depth 
continues  only  for  a  very  short  distance  within  the  entrance. 

Cod  Bank. — Nine  miles  SE.  of  the  entrance  of  the  Sawbill  there 
is  a  bank  of  sand,  gravel,  and  broken  shells,  on  which  cod&sh  abound, 
and  the  depth  is  upwards  of  60  fathoms  between  it  and  the  shore. 

Shallop  River  affords  shelter  only  to  boats,  and  can  only  be  entered 
when  there  is  no  surf.  There  are  several  rocks,  both  above  and  under 
water,  off  this  river,  and  also  off  Sandy  River,  a  sra?*.!'  stream  about  2J 
miles  farther  westward. 

Manitou  River  is  the  largest  on  this  coast,  excepting  the  rivers  St. 
John  and  Moisic.  It  may  be  readily  distinguished  from  a  vessel  several 
leagues  off  the  coast  by  two  remarkable  patches  of  clay  cliffs,  one  of 
which  is  close  to  the  eastward,  the  other  about  one  mile  to  the  west- 
ward of  its  entrance.  - 


1C8 


OAPK    WHITTLE    TO   8A0UKNAY    RIVER. 


M 


!;.>■!» 


Directions.  —To  enter  this  rlvor,  ktep  vAoho  uhma  the  nw.ky  went 
si(U' of  IVIiinitou  !'i>inf,  Icavi-if;  on  thu  port  si<lo  tho  Hiindy  spi:.  cIoho 
within  it,  whirh  Mtr<r<'-lu>s  out  from  tii«  siind.v  west  point  of  the  entrance. 
Ihe  ehiinnel  iu  alwiiyH  in  this  positiini,  but  it  is  more  or  less  deep  and 
wide  according  to  thu  seanon  and  the  winds  wiiicli  may  have  reeently 
I)rev,:iled.  In  general  the  channel  is  abont  (10  yards  wide,  witli  a  depth 
of  n  feet  in  it  at  low  wai  r  and  I'i  feet  in  sprinjj  tides.  Stronj;  souta- 
eriy  and  westerly  winds  ciinsoa  heavy  snrf  and  render  the  entrance  i'li- 
practicable.  A.  short  distance  within  the  entrance  there  are  9  feet  at 
low  water,  dee|)eninf;  ^''''dually  to  5  fathoms  at  the  (irst  ra|)id,  one 
mile  up  the  river. 

Water  will  be  found  at  a  small  stieam  nn  the  western  shore  a  sliort 
distance  within  the  entrau(;o. 

Anchorage. —  I'liere  is  good  anchorage  off  Manitou  River.  VesseU 
may  safely  anchor  in  ttne  weather  with  the  wind  offshore,  having  the 
entrance  of  the  river  bearing  N.  21^  K.,  U  miles,  where  th'jy  will  have 
15  fathd.  <  over  mud  bottom,  and  be  more  than  one  mile  distant  from 
Manitou  I  oiut,  the  n<  nest  poin^  of  tlie  shore. 

Small  vessels  may  anchor  farther  inshore  to  the  westward  of  the  bar, 
aud  in  the  bay  between  Manitou  and  Buchan  Points;  for  the  .soundings 
decrease  regularly  in  towards  the  shore,  with  sand  ani  clay  bottom, 
and  there  is  no  other  danger  but  a  small  rocky  shoal  which  bears  IS. 
69°  E.  nearly  a  mile  froui  Buchan  Point,  and  is  about  '^  mile  offshore. 

Buchau,  Fall,  and  LIctteurs  Rivers  fall  in  cascades  into  the  sea  oi*^ 
close  to  it,  and  thus  serve  to  point  out  to  a  vessel  her  position  off  the 
coast ;  and  there  is,  moreover,  a  remarkable  white  patch  close  to  the 
westward  of  Buchan  Kiviir. 

Bason  River  has  a  spi.*:  c'  large  stones  extending  about  300  yards 
out  from  its  i;a.if  i-  >int  of  b'lCi'atice.  The  entrance  is  very  narrow,  with 
a  varying  depth,  whicti  is  less  or  mor;)  according  to  the  prevalence  or 
infrequency  of  the  3VV.  win'  .s ;  but  there  is  in  general  enough  water  for 
very  small  coasting  craft  or  large  boats.  There  are  rapids  4  mile  within 
the  entrance. 

Cape  Cormorant,  at  1^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Basoa  River,  is  a 
small  peninsula,  on  the  inuer  side  of  which  there  are  the  log  huts  of  a 
trading  post  always  occupied,  aud  which  cau  not  easily  be  seen  fromt 
the  sea. 

Blaskowitz  Point  lies  5 J  miles  S.  80°  W.  from  Oape  Cormorant. 
Betwenu  them  are  Cormorant  Islets,  jvjined  to  the-  shore  at  low  water^ 
and  not  readily  distinguishable  from  the  mainland. 

Cormorant  Reef,  which  is  small  and  dangerous,  lies  off  Cormoraut 
Islets,  and  about  a  mile  from  the  shore.  It  lias  12  feet  least  water  aud 
bears  S.  6S°  VV.  3  miles  from  Oape  Cormorant.  When  on  the  inner  edge 
of  the  reef  Blaskowitz  and  St.  Charles  Points  are  iu  line,  bearing  S. 
84°  VV.,  so  that  vessels  a[)proaching  this  part  of  the  coast  should  keep 
the  latter  point  well  open.  , 


I{. 

i  the  r(M!k.v  \v«»t 
«iiii(l.y  H|(L  clo8e 
tof  tlietiiirraiico. 
or  loss  (It'op  and 
i.V  liavo  recoil  tli 
kits  with  a  tloptlj 
.  Stroiij;  souta- 
theoiitriuifte  i'mj 
•TO  ar<!  9  JViot  at 
Hrsfc  rapid,  one 

ru  shore  a  short 

River.  Vessels 
lore,  having  the 
a  t>vjy  will  have 
ile  distant  from 

ward  of  the  bar, 
)r  the  soundings 
iJ  clay  bottom, 
which  bears  S. 
mile  offshore, 
into  the  sea  or 
position  off  the 
ch  close  to  the 

bout  300  yards 
py  narrow,  with 
I  prevalence  or 
lough  water  for 
ds^  mile  within 

son  River,  is  a 
e  log  huts  of  a 
y  be  seen  from 

pe  Cormorant, 
at  low  water, 

off  Cormorant 
least  water  and 

the  inner  edge 
ine,  bearing  S. 
St  should  keep 


MOISIC    BAY    AM)    lUVKR. 


169 


The  C'ixnt  bntwecMi  (^ape  Cormorant  and  Sf.  (Miarh's  Point  is  bioluMi 
into  ODves,  two  of  whicii  are  nearly  a  mile  diH'|»,  lull  of  nxrks.  and  alfcird 
shelter  i)nl,v  to  boats.  Tlie  shore  is  Ihmhi  fiingeil  wirli  rock-i  lioth  iibove 
and  untler  w.iWr,  and  siioiiM  nor  tlinn^l'ore  be  ntade  too  free  with. 

St  Charleo  Point  will  nMilily  be  knovvn  by  tiie  cove  on  its  tMstein 
side,  and  by  the  frendingof  the  I  uid  on  the  woso  side  nurllnvard  towards 
Trout  Itiver. 

St  Charles  Reef,  lyingoff  at.  Charles  Point,  is  extremely  dangnnms, 
being  so  bolil  that  there  is  no  warning  by  tho  hand  lead,  and  v«'ry  little 
with  the  decpsea  lead.  It  is  eomi»osHdof  a  great  number  of  rocks  near 
to  each  other,  but  having  a  considerable  depth  of  water  between  them. 
Some  of  them  always  show,  but  tiie  outermost  patches  are  always  cov- 
ered. The  last  lie  rather  more  than  i  mile  to  the  southward  fi^  •  the 
southern  extreme  of  St.  Charles  Point;  and  the  reef  coiiriii  k,  Hie 
tirstcove,  l.l  miles  to  the  northwestward  of  the  point,  but  do.  >,  tUero 
extend  so  far  olfshore  as  off  the  point  itself. 

Cautioa— Vessels  beating  to  the  westward  should  take  car  it  to 
be  becalmed  to  the  westward  of  the  St.  Charles  Heef,  lest  tho  heavy 
swell  from  the  S  W.,  so  frequent  on  this  coast,  should  heave  them  towards 
the  reef,  for  the  water  is  too  deep  to  anchor  until  close  to  the  breakers. 

Moisic  Bay  intervenes  between  St.  Charles  Point  and  Moisic  River. 
Trout  River,  a  small  stream,  is  in  the  center  of  this  bay  and  (i^  miles 
NW.  from  St.  Charles  Point.  Here  the  rocky  shores  terminate  and 
the  bold  sandy  beaish,  which  extends  0^  miles  8W.  to  the  river  Moisic, 
commences. 

Seal  House  Cove,  on  the  east  side  of  Moisic  Bay  and  2J  miles  from 
St.  Charles  Poi.it,  affords  shelter  only  to  boats.  There  are  two  log 
houses  there,  which  are  occasionally  occupied  as  a  fishing  and  trading 
post. 

The  granitic  hills,  which  leave  the  shore  at  Trout  River,  continue 
inland  until  they  join  the  ridges  in  rear  of  the  Bay  of  Seven  Islands. 
Between  the  hills  and  the  sea  there  is  an  extensive  tract  of  low  sandy 
country,  thickly  wooded. 

River  Moisic  enters  the  sea  on  the  east  side  of  Moisic  Point,  which 
is  the  southern  extremity  of  the  sandy  country  just  mentioned.  It 
brings  down  from  the  interior  great  quantities  of  sand,  which  so  obstruct 
its  wide  and  shallow  channel  in  the  first  2J  miles  from  the  sea  that  boats 
can  not  ascend  at  low  water.  The  traders  report  that  flat  bottomed 
boats  can  ascend  to  the  first  rapids,  at  the  distance,  following  the 
stream,  of  6  or  7  leagues  from  the  sea.  The  bar,  which  is  of  sand,  dry 
at  half  tide,  runs  out  from  the  long,  low,  and  nirrow  east  point  of 
entrance  nearly  J  mile  to  the  southwestward  and  nearly  parallel  to  the 
east  side  of  the  west  point  of  entrance. 

The  entrance  of  the  river,  between  this  bar  and  the  west  point,  is 
from  the  SW.,  and  continues  for  the  distance  of  J  mile  witli  a  breadth 
of  }  mile  and  a  depth  varying  with  the  seasons  and  the  winds  which 


u.;., 


170 


CAI'K    WHITTLK    TO    HAOI  KNAY    KIVKR. 


pntviill,  tliosn  from  tho  soiiiliwiml  iiml  t'listwiinl  Iniviii};  a  UMidiMMty  to 
(ilofU  ii|)  tilt)  cliitiiiiol.  It  i.H  siiitpostiil  tliiit  tlioi'o  is  .tuldoiii  a  Iosh  il(!|itli 
Miaii  !>  ftMU.  at  low  wator,  tlio  Mam»  as  IimjiIh,  oIoho  iiiidtir  tlu!  \v«st  point 
of  ttntruncu,  wliiuli  is  the  only  placu  wlioru  a  .small  vussnl  can  Iiml  sliolror, 
closo  to  two  lo^  lioiistvs  occasionally  tMnploycil  as  a  salmon  tlslicry  by 
tho  people  (»r  the  Hntlsoii  May  (Jompaay.  Tho  Mheltcr  horn  is  uxtiomuly 
import'eut  in  (falos  of  wind  from  the  sonthward  and  eastward,  which 
send  ill  8o  heavy  a  sea  that,  after  breaking  compkitely  over  the  bar  and 
u(!roMM  the  entrance,  it  still  retains  power  enoii),'h  to  Herio.isly  att'ect  a 
Hinall  vcHHel. 

Tides. — At  the  entrance  of  the  Moisiu  it  Itt  hi^jfh  water,  fall  and 
ciian);e,  at  Ih.  •iOm.,  and  ordinary  springs  rise  from  5  to  H  feet. 

Moislc  Shoal  extends  to  the  westward  .'(|^  miles  past  Moisic  Point 
in  such  a  manner  as  to  form  an  extensive  triangular  Handy  shoal,  with 
from  3  to  U  fathonis  on  it  at  low  water. 

Moisic  Rock,  near  the  south  extremity  of  tho  Moisic  Shoal,  and  in 
■3  fi'et  least  water,  brars  8.  5(P  \V.  1."^  miles  from  Moisic  Point,  and  is 
nearly  1.^  miles  from  the  shore.     This  is  an  extremely  dangerous  shoal, 
being  as  bold  as  a  wall. 

Mark. — The  oidy  direction  that  can  be  given  to  a  vessel  standing 
towards  it,  is  to  tack  when  the  northern  side  of  the  Manowiu  Island 
conies  on  with  the  southern  point  of  Great  Boule  Island,  bearing  S.  S'2^ 
W. ;  she  will  then  bo  one  milo  from  the  edge  of  the  shoal,  and  iu  up- 
wards of  30  fathoms  water. 

East  Rocks,  which  are  low,  bare  of  trees,  and  always  above  water, 
lie  ill  Boule  Bay,  between  Moisic  Sh^al  ant^  Boule  Islands.  Vessels 
ought  not  to  stand  into  this  embayed  ;  \ce,  -i.ice  there  is  generally  a 
heavy  southerly  swell  rolling  iu,  whic!)  would  render  it  ditlicult  to  beat 
out. 

Seven  Islands  are  high  and  ^teep,  of  primary  rocks,  very  thinly 
"n'ooded,  and  can  be  made  out  from  a  distance  of  about  20  miles,  being 
unlike  anything  else  in  the  Gulf.  The  easternmost  of  these  islands  are 
the  Great  and  Little  Boule,  the  former  of  which  is  the  highest  of  all,  its 
auininit  being  695  feet  above  the  sea  at  high  water.  Next,  westward, 
and  parallel  to  these  two,  are  Little  and  Great  Basque  Islands.  Great 
Basque  Island  is  500  feet  high.  Manowiu  and  Carousel  lie  to  the  SW. 
of  Basque  Islands ;  Manowiu  is  457  feet  high ;  Carousel,  the  southern- 
most of  the  islands,  is  much  lower.  West  Bocks  lie  between  Manowiu 
And  the  ])eninsula,  which  forms  the  west  point  of  the  bay  of  Seven  Is- 
lands. They  arc  too  small  >  ud  low  to  appear  as  the  seventh  island ; 
but  the  peninsula  has  that  nearance  when  seen  at  a  distance  from 
fiea,  being  higher  than  any  of  io  islands,  and  737  feet  above  the  sea  at 
high  water. 

Caution. — In  the  narrow  passes  between  the  islands  the  tide  sets 
strongly  towards  and  through  them ;  the  flood  to  the  west,  and  the  obb 
to  the  eastward,  a  circumstance  that  should  bo  attended  to  when  be- 
calmed at  night  or  when  tacking  in  their  entrances. 


! 


VKR. 

iviiijf  a  tcMidoiKiy  to 
Ltuldoiii  a  loHH  iloptli 
iii(l<;r  tlio  \v«st  |i(iiiit 
isttluaii  find  Mliulror, 
1  miliiioii  llsliury  by 
«<r  lior«  is  iixtromuly 
id  «astward,  wliiciii 
jlyovor  tlio  l»ar  and 

0  Herio.isiy  attoct  a 

jfli  watHP,  full  and 

'i  to  8  feot. 

past  Moisic  Point 
r  sandy  shoal,  with 

loisio  Shoal,  and  In 
loisio  Point,  and  in 
ly  dangerous  shoal, 

•  a  vessel  standing 
le  Manowiii  Island 
and,  bearing  S.  82"^ 
B  shoal,  and  in  up- 

Iways  above  water, 

1  Islands,  Vessels 
here  is  generally  a 
r  it  ilUllcult  to  beat 

rocks,  very  thinly 
tout  20  miles,  being 
of  these  islands  are 
le  highest  of  all,  its 
Next,  westward, 
ue  Islands.  Great 
usel  lie  to  the  SW. 
•usel,  the  southern - 

between  Manowin 
e  bay  of  Seven  Is- 
he  seventh  island ; 
at  a  distance  from 
et  above  the  sea  at 

[inds  the  tide  sets 
>  west,  and  the  ebb 
ended  to  when  be- 


I 


SE55aSS^p-i'5^B;*S5?s«'-a5!B?- 


r 


.%, 


^ 


V] 


<^ 


/# 


^/ 


\  '^ 


^V>.;^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


Photographic 

Sdsnces 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)872-4503 


#■ 


,.<* 


^ 


V'^^ 

'^A' 


<* 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Institute  for  Historical  IVIicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


^ 


K^^i 


T-'" 


SKVEN   ISLANDS. 


171 


Seven  Islands  Bay. — The  Seven  Islands  are  so  placed  as  to  com- 
pletely shelter  the  bay  within  them,  which  is  2J  railes  wide  at  the  en- 
trance,  between  Ohasse  Point,  the  east  end  of  the  Peninsula,  and  Sandy 
Point,  which  is  opposite  the  northern  end  of  Great  Basque  Island. 

Trading  Post— A  fine,  broad,  bold,  sand  beach  extends  for  3  miles 
northward  from  the  east  point  of  the  bay  to  the  entrance  of  the  prin- 
cipal river,  near  which  stands  the  Hudson  Bay  Company's  trading  post. 
The  houses  at  this  post  can  not  be  seen  from  the  outer  parts  of  the 
bay,  but  there  is  a  wooden  store  on  the  beach  oflf  which  vessels  usually 
jinchor.    Water  can  be  obtained  from  this  river  at  high  tide. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  for  a  vessel  of  large  draft  is  with  Sandy 
Point  and  the  north  side  of  Little  Boule  Island  in  line,  and  Chass6 
Point  in  line  with  the  west  side  of  the  West  Rocks.  The  NW.  extrem- 
ity of  the  sandy  beach  near  the  entrance  of  the  river  will  then  bear  N. 
11°  W. ;  the  vessel  will  be  in  9  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  clay  bottom, 
nearly  one  mile  from  the  sandy  beach  to  the  eastward,  and  nearly  f 
mile  from  the  .^fathoms  edge  of  the  shoals,  which  occupy  the  northern 
part  of  the  bay.  Smaller  vessels  may  lie  closer  to  the  shore,  in  6  fath- 
<)ms  at  low  water,  which  is  as  near  as  any  vessel  ought  to  anchor. 

In  this  anchorage  there  is  a  considerable  swell,  with  a  strong  south- 
erly wind,  but  never  enough  to  endanger  a  vessel,  although  sufficient 
to  prevent  boats  from  landing.  Those  that  may  wish  to  lie  quite 
smooth  may  anchor  in  the  SW.  part  of  the  bay  in  13  fathoms,  soft  clay 
bottom,  where  they  will  be  quite  landlocked. 

The  Bast  Channel,  between  Great  l^asque  Island  and  Sandy  Point, 
may  be  approached  from  between  Boale  Islands  and  East  Bocks  or 
from  between  Boule  and  Basque  Islands,  both  routes  being  entirely 
free  from  danger.  It  is  seldom  used,  having  a  rock  in  its  center,  which 
is  covered  only  in  high  tides.  A  reef,  with  from  6  to  9  feet  of  water, 
extends  for  J  mile  to  the  eastward  of  this  rock.  The  passage  on  either 
side  of  it  is  wide  and  has  from  13  to  15  fathoms.  Vessels  should  only 
attempt  it  with  a  fair  wind,  and  should  keep  within  200  yards  of  Basque 
Island,  or  as  near  to  the  sandy  point  of  the  main  land ;  the  latter  is 
recommended  as  preferable. 

The  Middle  Channel  (which  is  also  the  principal  and  best)  is  up- 
wards of  1|  miles  wide,  and  so  free  from  danger  that  a  vessel  of  the 
largest  draft  may  approach  the  shore  within  100  yards  in  every  part, 
excepting  at  Chass^  Point,  where  a  reef  runs  out  250  yards  from  the 
shore.  This  channel,  between  Basque  Islands  on  the  east  and  Carousel, 
Manowin,  West  Books,  and  the  Peninsula  on  the  west,  is  preferable  in 
every  wind,  excepting  the  north  and  NW.,  with  which,  to  save  beat- 
ing (since  they  blow  out  of  the  bay),  it  might  be  desirable  to  enter  by 
ifche  West  Channel. 

The  West  Channel,  between  the  West  Bocks  and  Croix  Point,  at 
the  southern  extremity  of  the  peninsula,  is  f  mile  wide  and  quite  free 
£roia  danger.    There  are  two  or  three  rocks  lying  200  yards  to  the  north- 


]. 


172 


CAPE    WHITTLE    TO    8AGUENAY    RIVER. 


ward  of  West  Rocks,  but  they  always  show,  excepting  in  very  iiigh 
tides  and  the  smoothest  sea. 

Caution.— The  ebb  tide  is  turned  ott  by  Oroix  Point  towards  West 
Bocks,  a  circumstance  which  must  be  attended  to  la  taking  this  chan- 
nel wiih  a  scant  northerly  wind. 

Anchorage.— The  water  is  too  deep  for  anchoring  in  any  of  these 
channels  and  the  bottom  generally  rocky,  excepting  to  the  eastward 
and  northward  of  Boule  Islands.  The  ground  Is  not  fit  for  anchoring 
until  well  into  the  bay.  The  water  is  extremely  deep  outside  of  those 
islands,  and  they  are  so  bold  that  a  vessel  may  stand  in  close  to  their 
rocky  shores. 

Tides.— The  rate  of  the  stream  of  the  tides  in  the  bay  and  in  the 
principal  channels  between  the  Seven  Islands  seldom  amounts  to  » 
knot;  but  in  the  narrow  channel  between  Boule  Islands,  Basque  Isl- 
ands, and  in  the  Bast  and  West  Channels,  it  may  amount  to  2  knots  in 
spring  tides,  or  even  more  in  the  narrowest  of  these  channels  when 
accelerated  by  strong  winds.  The  flood,  coming  along  from  the  east- 
ward, strikes  Boule  Islands  and  passes  between  them,  and  also  between 
the  two  Basque  Islands.  It  is  turned  off  by  Great  Boule  towards 
Carousel  Island  and  the  West  Channel ;  but  the  greater  part  of  the 
stream,  which  passes  within  the  Boule  Islands,  enters  the  bay  by  the 
Bast  Channel,  between  Great  Basque  Island  and  the  mainland.  There 
is  very  little  flood  in  the  Middle  Channel,  excepting  an  eddy  outward 
stream  close  along  the  shores  of  the  peninsula  and  the  narrow  stream 
from  between  Basque  Islands,  which  sets  across  towards  the  West 
Channel. 

The  ebb  sets  fairly  out  of  the  bay,  part  of  it  by  the  East  Channel 
and  part  of  it  by  the  Middle  Channel,  where  it  meets  the  stream  through 
the  West  Channel,  which  turns  it  to  the  eastward,  past  the  southera 
points  of  Basque  and  Boule  Islands. 

Winds. — In  fine  nights  the  winds  are  almost  always  light  and  baf- 
fling between  Seven  Islands,  particularly  if  the  wind  be  from  the  west- 
ward in  the  o£Sng.  At  such  times  there  is  generally  a  northerly  land 
wind  in  Seven  Islands  Bay,  but  it  does  not  often  reach  far  out  among 
the  islands  in  the  early  partof  the  night,  although  it  often  does  towards 
the  morning. 

Aspect  of  Coast. — The  coast  between  Carousel  Point  de  Monts 
is  less  bold  in  appearance,  being  less  elevated  th.  .  ^nat  to  the  east- 
ward of  the  Seven  Islands.  The  hills  are,  for  the  most  pari,  far  back 
in  the  country,  and  the  shores  are  of  very  moderate  height  above  the 
sea.  The  country  near  the  sea  is  formed  of  small  and  low  granitic  hills, 
partially  wooded  with  spruce  trees.  Marshes  and  ponds  are  frequent 
between  the  hills ;  sandy  beaches  occur  occasionally,  and  the  sandy 
tracts  in  rear  of  them  are  always  the  most  densely  wooded  parts. 

St  Margaret  River,  although  a  large  stream,  affords  shelter  to 
boats  only.    It  has  a  bar  of  sand  extendingf  mile  out  from  the  entrance 


in  very  high 

toward  a  West 
ioff  this  cban- 

1  any  of  these 
)  the  eastward 
for  anchoring 
itside  of  those 
close  to  their 

ay  and  in  the 
amounts  to  a 
Is,  Basque  Isl- 
it  to  2  knots  in 
shannels  when 
from  the  east- 
d  also  between 
Soule  towards 
er  part  of  the 
he  bay  by  the 
nland.  There 
eddy  outward 
larrow  stream 
,rds  the  West 

East  Obaunet 
tream  through 
it  the  soutberD 

light  and  baf- 
from  the  west- 
northerly  land 
far  out  among 
a  does  towards 

!*oint  de  Monts 
at  to  the  east- 
parl,  far  back 
ight  above  the 
7  granitic  hills. 
Is  are  frequent 
md  the  sandy 
ed  parts, 
rds  shelter  to 
1  the  entrance 


^:iJiiS^i^~"^.Vii^.iii^^^\.. 


m 


ST.    MARGARET    RIVER — CAWEE    LEDGE. 


173 


and  having  several  small  channels  through  it,  with  only  3  feet  at  low 
water.  Immediately  within  the  entrance,  which  is  350  yards  wide, 
there  are  6  feet  water,  and  only  3  feet  can  be  carried  up  to  the  low  falls, 
which  are  over  granitic  roclis,  34  miles  from  the  entrance.  Below  the 
falls  theriver  flows  between  clitfs  ot  sand  and  clay,  and  is  full  of  sand- 
bars, dry  at  low  water. 

St.  Margaret  Point  is  rocky,  of  moderate  height,  and  has  a  round 
hill  a  short  distance  within  its  extremity.  There  are  several  rocks 
which  cover  at  high  water,  and  which  extend  to  the  distance  of  nearly 
^  mile  oft'  this  point.    They  are  extremely  bold. 

The  Coast  from  St.  Margaret  Point  to  Great  Oawee  Island  is  low, 
and  fringed  with  small  islets  and  rocks  close  to  the  shore,  which  may 
be  closely  approached  by  the  leatl,  but  the  depth  of  20  fathoms  is  near 
enough  to  it  for  a  stranger. 

Cawee  islands  are  two  small  and  hilly  islands  of  gray  granite,  and 
nearly  bare  of  trees.  Great  Oawee  Island,  which  is  the  larger,  the 
higher,  and  the  eastern  of  the  two,  is  about  f  mile  in  diameter,  and 
about  250  feet  high.  Little  Oawee  Island,  lying  a  mile  farther  to 
the  sonthwestward,  is  composed  of  two  islets,  which  occupy  a  length  of 
^  mile  parallel  to  the  coast.  It  has  several  rocks  above  water  close  off 
it  to  the  SW.,  and  a  reef  250  yards  to  the  northwestward  of  its  west 
point. 

Water. — There  is  neither  wood  nor  water  in  Oawee  Islands,  but  both 
may  be  obtained  from  the  opposite  mainland. 

Cawee  Rock,  small,  round,  and  high,  and  distant  ^  mile  to  the 
southward  of  the  south  point  of  Great  Oawee,  is  so  bold  that  a  large 
ship  might  lie  alongside  of  it. 

Great  Cawee  Cove,  on  the  NE.  sid.  of  great  Oawee  Island,  is  secure 
for  boats,  with  plenty  of  water,  but  too  small  and  narrow  in  the  entrance 
for  vessels. 

Great  Cawee  Shoal  lies  off  the  mouth  of  Great  Oawee  Oove,  400 
yards  to  the  northward.    The  least  water  on  it  is  15  feet. 

Cawee  Ledge. — Half  a  mile  north  from  this  shoal  is  a  small  round 
ledge,  awash  at  low  water,  and  J  mile  from  the  mainland.  Prom  it  the 
south  side  of  the  large  rocks,  between  Great  Oawee  and  the  main,  is  in 
line  with  the  point  of  the  main  to  the  westward. 

Large  Rocks. — Between  Groat  Oawee  and  the  main  there  are  two 
large  rocks  close  together ;  they  lie  300  yards  from  the  mainland  and 
have  a  reef  extending  400  yards  from  their  SW.  point.  Nearly  J  mile 
N.  30°  E.  from  these  rooks,  and  at  the  same  distance  from  the  main, 
there  is  a  small  rook  which  always  shows. 

Anchorage. — There  is  anchorage  in  the  month  of  the  bay  on  the 

west  side  of  Great  Oawee  Island,  in  7  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  and  at 

the  distance  of  200  yards  from  the  islands ;  but  the  SW.  winds  blow 

right  in  and  send  in  a  very  heavy  sea. 

Tides.— The  tides  ran  fair  through  between  the  islands  and  the  main- 


■;ii 

i! 


if! 


V 


1 ', 
1/ 


"'1^ 


M 


174 


CAPE    WHITTLE   TO   SAGUENAY    RIVKR. 


land,  at  a  rate  which  seldom  exceeds  IJ  knots,  and  which  is  in  general 
much  less. 

Sproule  Point,  $  mile  to  the  westward  from  Little  Cawee  Island,  is 
the  eastern  point  of  Lobster  Bay.  A  reef  extends  oflF  its  south  side,  200 
yards  towards  Little  Cawee,  but  the  principal  reef  off  it  runs  out  ^  mile 
to  the  southward. 

Lobster  Bay  is  between  Sproule  Point  and  Crooked  Islands,  which 
are  a  group  of  small  islets  and  rocks,  running  out  from  the  shore  3  miles 
to  the  westward  of  Sproule  Point.  All  the  northern  part  or  head  of 
Lobster  Bay  is  occupied  by  an  extensive  flat  of  sand  and  bowlders,  dry 
at  low  water,  and  on  which  lobsters  abound ;  but  it  is  an  excjellent 
open  roadstead  with  plenty  of  room  for  the  largest  ships. 

Anchorage.— Vessels  may  anchor  midway  between  the  reef  and  the 
islands,  choosing  their  depth  from  5  to  13  fathoms,  according  as  they 
may  wish  to  lie,  at  the  distance  of  J  mile  or  of  one  mile  from  the  3- 
fathom  edge  of  the  flats  in  the  head  of  the  bay.  The  bottom  is  of  fine 
sand  over  clay. 

Fentacost  River  enters  the  sea  on  the  SW.  side  of  a  rocky  point, 
IJ  miles  to  the  southward  of  Crooked  Islands;  the  opposite  point  of 
entrance  is  of  sand.  Two  miles  south  of  the  mouth  of  the  river  there 
is  a  remarkable  round  and  wooded  hill.  The  entrance  of  the  river  is 
only  30  yards  wide,  with  a  depth  of  7  feet  at  low  water,  and  there  are 
9  feet  within  for  a  short  distance. 

A  fine  bold  sandy  beach  extends  from  this  river  to  English  Point,  a 
distance  of  7  miles  to  the  southward. 

English  Point,  at  IJ  miles  to  the  northward  and  eastward  from  the 
north  rocks  of  Egg  Island,  has  a  shoal  of  large  stones  extending  oflf  it 
to  the  distance  of  J  mile.  On  the  SW.  side,  or  towards  Egg  Island, 
this  shoal  may  be  approached  to  the  depth  of  6  fathoms  at  low  water, 
but  on  the  SE.  and  east  It  is  very  bold. 

Egg  Island  is  low,  narrow,  and  of  granitic  rocks,  without  trees,  and 
J  mile  long.  The  North  Rocks,  always  above  water,  lie  800  yards  dis- 
tant from  the  island  to  the  northward ;  they  form  a  low,  narrow,  black 
reef,  which  is  600  yards  long,  in  the  same  direction,  bold  towards  the 
mainland  and  also  towards  English  Point.  A  reef  under  water  runs 
out  from  these  rocks  iu  the  direction  of  their  length  to  the  southward 
and  to  the  distance  of  J  mile,  leaving  only  a  very  narrow  3-fathom 
channel  between  them  and  the  island. 

*  The  NE.  Reef  runs  out  more  than  ^  mile  from  the  NE.  point  of 
Egg  Island,  and  is  the  greatest  danger  between  the  Seven  Islands 
and  Point  de  Monts.  Some  of  the  rocks  upon  it  show  in  low  tides,  and 
the  sea  generally  breaks  on  them  at  low  water.  This  reef  prevents  the 
swell  from  rolling  in  between  the  north  rocks  and  Egg  Island,  and  thus 
assists  in  sheltering  the  anchorage. 

Water. — There  is  no  water  on  Egg  Island,  but  it  may  readily  be  ob- 
tained from  small  streams  on  either  side  of  Roadstead  Point,  on  the 
mainland  opposite. 


is  in  geueral 

ee  Island,  is 
iiith  side,  200 
as  oat  ^  mile 

lands,  which 
»hore3  miles 
•t  or  head  of 
owlders,  dry 
bn  excellent 

reef  and  the 
ling  as  they 
from  the  3- 
;om  is  of  flne 

rocky  point, 
>site  point  of 
>  river  there 
the  river  is 
ad  there  are 

lish  Point,  a 

ird  from  the 
ending  off  it 
Egg  Island^ 
;  low  water^ 

it  trees,  and 

0  yards  dis- 
irrow,  black 
towards  the 

water  runs 

1  soatUward 
>w  3-fathom 

E.  point  of 
v^en  Islands 
w  tides,  and 
prevents  the 
id,  and  thus 

adily  be  ob- 
[)int,  on  the 


EGO    ISLAND — POINT   DE   M0NT8. 


175 


Anchorage. — Egg  Island  and  its  reefs  form  a  natural  breakwater, 
which  is  1^  miles  long  and  inclines  slightly  towards  the  shore  at  its 
northern  end  in  such  a  manner  as,  with  the  nssistance  of  the  shoal  off 
English  Point,  to  shelter  the  anchorage  from  NE.  winds.  The  best 
position  is  with  the  8W.  end  of  E?g  Island  bearing  S.  59°  E.  and  the 
inner  side  of  the  North  Bocks  N.  20°  E. ;  English  Point  will  then  be 
open  half  a  point  to  the  westward  of  the  latter.  It  is  too  small  to  be  a 
favorite  resort  for  large  vessels,  but  in  time  of  need,  or  as  a  place  of 
refuge  in  case  of  distress,  it  would  be  found  of  great  value  on  a  coast 
so  destitute  of  good  harbors. 

Directions  are  unnecessary  for  running  into  this  anchorage  from  the 
southward  and  westward,  since  the  SW.  end  of  Egg  Island  is  quite 
bold.  But  if  it  be  intended  to  run  through  between  the  island  and  the 
main,  stand  in  to  the  northward  to  8  or  9  fathoms,  or  until  English 
Point  is  open  half  a  point  to  the  northward  of  the  North  Rocks,  then 
steer  for  English  Point,  giving  the  inner  side  of  the  North  Bocks  a 
berth  of  200  yards  until  the  vessel  has  passed  the  North  Bocks  a  full 
J  mile.  She  will  then  be  in  about  7- fathoms  at  low  water,  and  may 
haul  out  to  sea,  taking  care  to  avoid  the  NE.  reef. 

Tides.— The  rate  of  the  tides  between  Egg  Island  and  the  main  is 
from  J  to  one  knot,  and  part  of  the  stream  of  ebb  sets  towards  and  out 
through  the  narrow  and  dangerous  3-fathom  channel  between  the 
island  and  the  North  Bocks.  Part  of  the  stream  of  flood  comes  in 
through  the  same  channel. 

Calumet  River  is  a  small  stream  2^  miles  to  the  southward  of  Egg 
Island ;  along  the  shore  for  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  its  entrance 
there  are  reefs  of  large  stones  extending  out  to  the  distance  of  1,200 
yards  from  high-water  mark. 

Caribou  Point,  8^  miles  southward  from  Egg  Island,  is  a  small  rocky 
peninsula,  having  sandy  coves  on  either  side  of  its  isthmus,  in  which 
pilot  boats  find  shelter. 

Trinity  Bay,  at  5  miles  to  the  southward  of  Caribou  Point,  is  2  miles 
wide  and  nearly  one  mile  deep,  with  a  flne  sandy  beach  extending  from 
its  south  point  to  Trinity  Biver,  which  is  a  small  and  rapid  stream^ 
abonnding  with  trout  and  salmon,  where  water  can  be  bad  only  at  high 
water,  because  of  the  large  stones  about  its  entrance*  The  south  point 
of  the  bay  is  rocky,  and  off  the  NE.  point  there  are  two  low  black  rocks. 

Anchorage. — ^This  bay  affords  excellent  anchorage,  in  a  moderate 
depth  of  water  with  good  ground,  and  plenty  of  room  to  weigh  in  any 
wind.  It  is  a  valuable  stopping  place,  in  westerly  winds,  for  vessels 
bound  up  the  St.  Lawrence,  to  wait  their  opportunity  to  proceed  round 
Point  de  Monts,  and  up  the  estuary. 

Rocks. — The  south  extremity  of  Point  de  Monts  is  about  1}  miles 
8.  W.  of  the  lighthouse.  To  the  SE.  of  the  extremity  of  the  point 
and  ^  mile  off  shore  lie  a  ledge  of  rocks  with  9  or  10  feet  least  water. 
Southward  ^  mile  from  the  lighthouse  is  another  rock  with  2  fathoms 


I 


HI 

i\ 


~''^WWl 


'I 


1. 


I- 


msmm^' 


li^ 


176 


CAPE    WHITTLE    TO   8AGUENAY    RIVER. 


on  it,  and  there  is  a  third  with  a  little  more  water  and  nearly  as  far  off 
from  the  lli^lithoiise  to  the  eastward. 

Aspect  of  Coast.— The  laud,  which  on  the  eastern  side  of  Point  de 
Monts  is  rather  low,  begins  to  rise  immediately  from  that  point  to  the 
westward ;  and  granitic  hills,  very  sparingly  wooded  and  in  no  part 
above  1,000  feet  in  height,  form  the  north  coast  of  the  estuary  as  far 
as  St.  Giles  Point,  distant  30^  miles  west  of  Point  de  Monts.  The  sec- 
tion of  coast  just  indicated  is  as  bold  as  any  in  the  St.  Lawrence,  there 
being  little  or  no  warning  by  the  lead,  neither  is  there  any  good  anchorage 
sufQciently  roomy  for  the  occasional  use  of  shipping. 

St.  Augustine  Cove,  H  miles  westward  of  Point  de  Monts,  aff^ords 
shelter  only  to  boats,  and  pilots  are  generally  found  waiting  here  with 
easterly  winds. 

Godbout  River,  8^  miles  westward  from  Point  de  Monts,  enters 
the  sea  at  the  extremity  of  a  sandy  point.  There  is  usually  at  low 
water  not  more  than  4  or  5  feet  over  the  bar,  on  which  a  heavy  surf  very 
frequently  breaks.  There  is  a  trading  and  salmon  fishing  post  of  the 
Hudson  Bay  Company  at  this  river,  and  the  houses  can  readily  be 
seen. 

Anchorage. — It  is  possible  to  anchor  on  either  side  of  the  bar  of 
Godbout  River,  but  the  anchorages  are  too  near  to  the  shore  to  be  of 
general  use.  The  anchorage  to  the  westward  of  the  bar  may  ocnasion- 
ally  be  useful  in  easterly  winds  to  small  vessels.  They  should  anchor 
about  midway  between  the  bar  and  the  first  rooky  point  to  the  west- 
ward of  it. 

At  this  anchorage,  which  is  only  safe  in  summer,  the  bottom  is  of 
co'Tse  s&nd.  The  tides  are  weak  and  irregular,  rendering  it  difficult 
to  keep  the  anchoi  clear  in  calm  weather;  they  also  frequently  set 
owards  the  shore,  coming  in  with  long  ripplings  parallel  to  the  coast. 

St  Nicholas  Harbor  lies  3  miles  to  the  northeastward  from  Cape 
St.  Nicholas,  which  is  a  high  bare  point  of  granite,  bearing  8.  79°  W. 
17  miles  from  Point  de  Monts.  This  harbor  is  a  narrow  inlet  between 
granitic  hills  from  500  to  700  feet  in  height.  On  the  SW.  side  a  vessel 
may  lay  alongside  of  the  rocks  as  alongside  a  wharf. 

The  depth  that  can  be  carried  in  at  high  water  is  from  12  to  17  feet, 
according  as  it  may  be  neap  or  spring  tides.  The  bottom  in  the  en- 
trance is  of  sand,  with  some  few  large  stones  upon  it,  which  can  be  seen 
and  avoided  if  the  tide  be  not  high  enough  to  pass  over  them.  The 
entrance  is  situated  in  the  center  of  a  small  bay,  J  mile  wide  and  rather 
more  than  4  mile  deep  to  the  rocky  point  on  the  west  side  of  the  en- 
trance to  the  harbor,  which  will  be  readily  seen  projecting  out  into  the 
bay,  and  is  named  Cross  Point,  from  a  small  wooden  cross  upon  it.  .  An 
extensive  shoal  of  sand  and  boulders,  which  dry  at  half  tide,  extends 
from  the  east  point  of  the  bay,  nearly  700.  yards  to  the  SW.,  and  con- 
tinues northward  at  the  entrance  of  the  harbor.  This  shoal  can  always 
be  seen,  is  quite  bold,  and  completely  shuts  out  the  sea  from  tho  harbor 


■mr^wmxMWiXAi 


ii'i;jY.^"'T^^iiS^ 


i'lr  iif ^&'Mitei.^(i<iBM 


P^lll^ 


irly  ns  far  off 

,e  of  Point  de 
:  point  to  the 
[I  in  no  part 
stuary  as  far 
its.  The  see- 
vrence,  there 
0(1  anchorage 

[onts,  affords 
ng  here  with 

E^outs,  enters 
lually  at  low 
)avy  surf  very 
g  post  of  the 
in  readily  be 

of  the  bar  of 
hore  to  be  of 
nay  ocnaHion- 
tionld  anchor 
to  the  west- 
bottom  is  of 
ig  it  difficult 
reqaently  set 
to  the  uoast. 
rd  from  Cape 
ng  9.  790  W. 
inlet  between 
side  a  vessel 

12  to  17  feet, 
)m  in  the  en- 
>h  can  be  seen 
r  them.  The 
de  and  rather 
le  of  the  en- 
f  out  into  the 
upon  it.  .  An 
tide,  extends 
IW.,  and  con* 
tal  can  always 
>m  the  harbor 


ST.   NICHOLAS   HARBOR — ENGLISH   BAY. 


177 


"»a£.',ia):''r'y«iittffiSit..:. 


in  southerly  and  easterly  winds.  The  shoals  on  the  west  side  extend 
aoro88  a  small  bay  on  the  west  side  of  Oross  Point,  and  continue  off- 
shore to  the  distance  of  200  yards. 

The  Anchorage  between  these  shoals,  in  the  bay  off  the  harbor's 
•mouth,  is  only  G(H)  yards  wide,  and  consequently  too  small  to  be  con- 
sidered  a  roadstead  for  large  vessels,  but  the  ground  is  good  and  the 
depth  convenient  for  anchoring  preparatory  to  warping  into  the  harbor. 

Water. — There  are  several  smalk  streams,  on  the  eastern  side  of  St. 
Nicholas  Harbor,  where  water  can  be  obtained ;  and  it  can  also  be  had 
at  high  water  from  the  two  small  rivers  at  the  head  of  the  inlet. 

Caution. — Southeast  winds  blow  right  into  St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  and 
are  consequently  the  most  favorable  for  running  in ;  but  with  a  strong 
wind  in  that  direction,  and  at  high  water,  when  the  shoals  are  covered, 
there  is  generally  some  sea  outside  the  narrow  entrance.  A  S  W.  wind  is 
the  safest  for  running  in,  for  the  entrance  and  bay  outside  are  then  quite 
smooth;  but  this  wind  will  seldom  take  a  vessel  completely  in;  it  will 
usually  only  enable  her  to  shoot  so  far  within  Cross  Point  that  a  line 
may  be  sent  ashore,  or  a  kedge  ahead,  for  the  purpose  of  warping  in  the 
remainder  of  the  way,  which  may  be  quickly  done  if  due  preparation 
has  been  made  beforehand. 

The  entrance  should  be  attempted  in  the  last  quarter  flood ;  then  if 
the  vessel  touches  the  ground  she  will  receive  no  damage,  and  there 
will  be  time  for  her  to  warp  in  before  the  tide  begins  to  fall. 

Directions. — A  vessel  wishing  to  enter  St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  and 
being  off  the  mouth  of  the  bay,  should  bring  the  end  of  Cross  Point  to 
bear  N.  3°  W.,  then  steer  so  nearly  for  it  as  to  leave  it  not  more  than 
50  yards  nor  less  than  30  yards  distant  on  the  port  hand.  If  the  wind 
will  allow,  continue  to  run  in  at  the  same  distance  from  the  shore  on 
the  west  side  until  the  water  deepens. 

The  shoal  water  commences  at  Cross  Point  and  continues  for  a  dis- 
tance of  400  yards,  and  the  channel  is  rendered  narrow  by  shoals  off 
the  eastern  side  for  an  equal  distance  farther  up  the  harbor.  In  order 
to  have  as  much  room  as  possible,  a  vessel  should  anchor  farther .  . 
than  the  three  large  rocks,  which  will  be  seen  on  the  eastern  side  of 
the  harbor.  To  run  out  again,  wait  for  a  N  W.  wind,  or  take  advantage 
of  the  land  wind  in  the  early  part  of  the  morning,  which  often  occurs 
In  fine  weather  when  westerly  winds  prevail,  or,  lastly,  warp  out  in  a 
light  breeze  or  calm  to  the  entrance  of  the  bay  outside,  and  to  a  posi- 
tion from  which  sail  can  be  made. 

St.  Pancrace  Cove  is  only  about  320  yards  wide,  between  steep 
rocks,  and  open  to  the  southward,  with  very  deep  water,  and  is  of  no 
use  to  vessels.  The  depth  is  32  fathoms  in  its  entrance,  shoaling  grad- 
ually to  17  fathoms  within  ^  mile  of  its  head. 

English  Bay,  between  St.  Pancrace  Point  and  St.  Giles  Point,  affords 
no  good  anchorage,  in  consequence  of  the  great  depth  of  water.;  a  heavy 
sea  rolls  into  it  in  easterly  winds,  and  its  shores  are  high  and  rocky. 
5489 12 


?~'5i,iiij(H 


178 


CAPE    WHITTLE   TO   8AGUENAY    RIVER. 


8t  Giles  Point,  the  iiortliera  point  of  entrance  to  Manioou»Kan 
River  i»  high  and  rooky,  like  the  coast  to  the  eastwartl ;  while  Mani- 
couagan  Point  is  low  ami  thickly  wooded,  with  a  broad  sandy  beach, 
like  the  rest  of  the  const  westward  to  Outarde  Bay.  This  complete 
change  in  the  character  of  the  coast  points  out  to  a  vessel  her  approach 
towards  the  Manicouagan  Shoal. 

Anchorage.— The  principal  channel  is  on  the  north  side  of  the  en> 
trance,  and  there  is  a  deep  place,  or  large  hole,  in  itlij  miles  long,  from 
i  to  i  mile  wide,  and  with  a  depth  from  3  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water, 
with  muddy  bottom.  This  large  hole  Is  close  to  St.  Giles  Point,  and 
extends  li  miles  within  it.  Although  this  place  appears  completely 
open  to  easterly  winds,  no  swell  of  consequence  rolls  Into  it,  and  we 
believe  a  vessel  well  moored  on  its  north  side  within  St.  Giles  Point 
would  be  in  safety.  But  to  get  in  there  it  is  necessary  to  pass  over  the 
bar,  which  extends  out  2  miles  to  the  eastward  from  St.  Giles  Point;  It 
has  7  feet  over  It  at  low  and  from  14  to  19  feet  at  high  water,  acconl- 
Ing  as  It  may  be  neap  or  spring  tides. 

Tides.— The  ebb  runs  out  over  the  Manicouagan  Bar  to  the  eastward 
at  the  rate  of  about  1^  knots,  and  the  flood  Is  nearly  as  strong. 

Manicouagan  Shoal  Is  of  sand,  with  many  large  bowlders  scattered 
about  its  eastern  and  southern  parts,  and  probably  deposited  there  by 
the  ice.  The  bearing  of  S.  9°  W.  from  St.  Pancrace  Cove  passes  along 
the  eastern  side  of  the  shoal,  which  Is  so  bold  that  there  are  60  fathoms 
of  water  at  the  distance  of  little  more  than  IJ  miles  and  40  fathoms  at 
half  that  distance  from  the  breakers.  On  this  side  the  shoal  dries 
nearly  out  to  Its  edge  In  low  tides.  The  south  point  of  the  shoal  ex- 
tends 2*  miles  to  the  southward  of  Manicoufigan  Point,  and  here  only  Is 
there  any  sufficient  warning  by  the  deep-sea  lead.  It  continues  from 
Its  south  point  to  the  westward  for  a  distance  of  16  miles,  the  outline 
of  Its  edge  corresponding  to  the  shape  of  the  sandy  shore  as  far  as 
Outarde  Point,  ofif  which  It  extends  to  the*  southward  IJ  miles,  and, 
filling  up  all  the  eastern  part  of  Outarde  Bay,  stretches  out  its  western 
point  fully  3^  miles  8W.  of  Outarde  Point. 

The  tides  are  tolerably  regular ;  not  very  strong  along  the  shore ;  the 
rate  of  either  tide  does  not  exceed  2  knots  at  any  time,  and  Is  usually 
much  less.  But  great  ripplings  are  met  with  occasionally  both  near 
the  shoals  and  In  the  offlug,  where  they  are  caused,  as  mother  parts  of 
the  estuary,  by  the  unequal  velocities,  or  the  opposing  directions  of  the 
streams,  as  will  be  readily  Imagined  when  It  is  remembered  that  the 
carrent  Is  always  down  on  the  south  side,  slack,  in  the  middle,  and  up 
during  the  flood  on  the  north  side  of  the  estuary.  These  ripplings  are 
very  common  oft"  the  eastern  and  southern  parts  of  Manicouagan  Shoal, 
where  they  were  observed  to  move  much  faster  than  the  streams  of 
the  tides.  They  often  give  to  the  tides  the  appearance  of  a  rapidity 
which  does  not  exist. 

Outarde  Point  Is  II  miles  to  the  westward  of  the  south  extremity 


"M 


ManioouAK^i^ 
while  Maiii- 
saiuty  beacli, 
iii8  uoinplotie 
tier  approach 

de  of  the  eD^ 
08  loot;,  ft'om 
it  low  water, 
en  Point,  and 
:8  completely 
to  it,  aud  we 
t.  Giles  Point 
pass  over  the 
^iles  Point;  it 
mter,  acconl- 

tbe  eastward 
trong. 

If  rs  scattered 
lited  there  by 
Q  passes  along 
ire  60  fathoms 
40  fathoms  at 
le  shoal  dries 
the  shoal  ex- 
id  here  only  is 
mtinaes  from 
s,  the  outline 
ihore  as  far  as 
l^  miles,  and, 
)Ut  its  western 

the  shore;  the 
ind  is  usually 
lly  both  near 
other  parts  of  - 
rections  of  the 
ered  that  the 
liddle,  and  up 
i  rippliugs  are 
onagan  Shoal, 
;he  streams  of 
)  of  a  rapidity 

ath  extremity 


MANICOUAOAN    81I0AL — BKR8IMI8    RIVER. 


179 


of  Manioonagau  Point,  and  the  shore  between  them  is  of  low  sandy 
cliffs,  with  a  sandy  beach. 

Outarde  River.— The  entrance  to  Oiitarde  River  is  by  several  intrl- 
oate  aud  narrow  channels  through  the  western  part  of  Manicouagan 
Shoal,  and  as  there  are  only  2  or  3  feet  of  water  through  these  chan- 
nels at  low  tide  for  the  distance  of  4  or  5  miles,  the  place  is  useless  to 
vessels,  and  therefore  requires  no  further  description. 

The  water  of  this  river  holds  a  white  earth  suspended,  and  frequently 
covers  the  whole  surface  of  Outarde  Bay,  floating  on  the  heavier  sea 
water  beneath,  and  giving  the  whole  bay  the  appearance  of  being 
shoal.  A  vessel  sailing  through  this  superstratum  of  fresh  water  dis- 
places  it  and  leaves  a  blue  streak  in  her  wake. 

Outarde  Bay,  between  Outarde  and  Bersimis  Points,  has  three  small 
rocky  islaruls  in  it,  which  appear  as  two  from  seaward,  and  serve  to 
distinguish  the  bay  to  strangers ;  they  are  far  within  the  edge  of  the 
shoals,  which  extend  quite  around  the  bay,  and  occupy  the  greater  part 
of  it,  being  a  continuation  of  the  Manicouagan  Shoal. 

Anohorage.— Good  anchorage  will  be  found  on  the  west  side  of 
Outarde  Bay  in  14  fathoms  at  low  water,  over  muddy  bottom,  with  Ber- 
simis  Point  bearing  8.  9°  W.,  3i  miles.  Manicouagan  Point  will  then 
be  open  3  or  4  degrees  to  the  southward  of  Outarde  Point,  the  south 
side  of  which  will  bear  N.  54°  B.,  and  the  vessel  will  be  nearly  J  mile 
from  the  3  fathom  edge  of  the  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  the  hay ;  small 
vessels  may  lie  closer,  in  7  fathoms. 

Directions.— In  standing  in  for  this  anchorage  with  a  westerly  wind 
beware  of  the  bar  of  Bersimis  River,  which  is  extremely  steep.  If  the 
first  rocky  point  can  be  made  out  to  the  northward  of  the  river,  and 
which  bears  from  its  entrance  north  ^  miles,  take  care  that  it  does  not 
bear  to  the  eastward  of  N.  25°  W.,  and*  the  vessel  will  clear  the  bar. 
When  it  is  passed  she  may  haul  in  to  the  northward  into  soundings, 
going  no  nearer  than  10  fathoms.  This  anchorage,  which  is  not  gen- 
erally known,  is  excellent  in  westerly  gales,  and  may  occasionally  be 
very  useful  to  vessels  bound  up  the  St.  Lawrence.  The  tides  are  not 
so  strong  as  has  been  supposed,  the  ebb  seldom  exceeding  the  rate  of  2 
knots,  and  the  flootl  being  much  weaker.  The  direction  of  these  streams 
is  reversed  by  the  effect  of  Outarde  River. 

Bersimis  River  enters  the  sea  to  the  eastward  and  IJ  miles  north 
of  the  south  extremity  of  Bersimis  Point.  The  wide  mouth  of  the  river 
is  closed  by  sands  dry  at  lo\r  water,  with  the  exception  of  a  very  nar- 
row channel.  The  river  within,  for  the  first  3  miles,  is  wide  and  full  of 
43and  shoals. 

The  Bar  is  of  sand,  which  dries  in  parts  at  low  water,  aud  shifts  fre- 
quently, being  completely  exposed  to  southerly  and  easterly  gales ;  it 
extends  nearly  IJ  miles  to  the. eastward  of  the  south  point  of  entrance. 
Directions  for  entering  the  river  must  therefore  be  useless ;  but  it  may 
be  as  well  to  remark,  that  within  the  bar  the  channel  is  always  close  to 


■n 


.1 
If 


■*m 


p- 


180 


CAPE   WHITTLE   TO   SAOUENAY    RIVER. 


the  80Hth  point  of  entrance,  fuid  keepB  on  that  Hide  through  the  wide 
part  within,  with  a  depth  of  9  feet  at  low  water.  The  depth  that  could 
be  carriecl  in  over  the  bar,  in  the  month  of  July,  was  6  feet  at  low  water, 
and  from  13  to  18  feet  at  high  water,  according  as  it  might  be  neap  or 
spring  tideH. 

Beralmia  Point  Is  low,  of  sand,  wooded  with  spruce  trees,  and  diffl- 
cult  to  be  seen  at  night.  On  its  east  side,  the  low  south  point  of  the  river 
extends  to  the  distance  of  2  miles  from  the  trees,  and  the  bar  1^  miles 
farther ;  and  to  the  soutl  ward,  the  sand  shoal  extends  ^  mile  from  the 
sandy  beach,  yet  It  is  so  b«.1d  that  the  lead  affords  no  warning,  there 
being  60  fathoms  muddy  bottom  at  a  distance  of  a  mile  from  the  edge 
of  the  shoal.  On  the  east  and  west  sides  of  the  point  the  shoals  are 
equally  steep,  so  that  this  point  Is  very  dangerous,  especially  to  vessels 
beating  at  night  or  in  foggy  weather. 

The  Tides  are  regular,  but  the  flood  is  rather  stronger  than  the  ebb 
within  «  miles  from  the  shore,  where  the  rate  of  either  seldom  exceeds 
1^  knots,  and  is  often  much  less. 

Jeremy  Island.— From  Bersimis  Point,  a  low  and  sandy  shore  con- 
tinues 6i  miles  to  the  westward  to  Jeremy  Island,  which  is  very  small, 
rocky,  and  close  to  the  coast.  There  is  a  trading  post  of  the  Hudson 
Bay  Company  on  the  main,  the  buildings  of  which  can  usually  be  seen; 
but  if  not,  its  position  will  always  be  known  by  some  patches  of  white 
sand  and  clay  cliffs,  which  are  close  to  the  eastward  of  the  island. 
Vessels  may  stand  in  by  the  lead,  and  anchor  off  this  place;  but  it  is 
a  bad  anchorage,  and  the  shoal  water  extends  a  mile  out  from  the  shore. 
Cape  Colombier—Prora  Jeremy  Island  a  rocky  and  broken  shore 
extends  6  miles  to  Cape  Oolombier,  which  is  a  rooky  peninsula,  with  a 
small  islet  on  its  west  side. 

Gulnare  Shoal  is  a  narrow  ridge  of  granite  rock,  nearly  2  miles  long^ 
parallel  to  the  shore,  and  having  from  2  to  3  fathoms  over  it  at  low 
water.  The  inner  or  north  side  of  Laval  Island  nearly  in  line  with 
Orient  Point,  the  east  point  of  Laval  Bay,  bearing  8.  69°  W.  leads  40O 
yards  to  the  southward  of  this  shoal  in  20  fathoms  water. 

Wild  Fowl  Reef  is  a  large  bed  of  rocks  extending  ^  mile  from  the 
shore  between  Plongeur  Bay  and  Laval  Bay.  There  are  9  fathoma 
water  ^  mile  outside  this  reef. 

Flongenr  Bay,  between  Wild  Fowl  Reef  and  Cape  Oolombier,  may 
may  be  known  by  a  round  and.  rocky  peninsula  on  its  west  side.  The 
inner  part  of  this  bay  is  full  of  rocks  dry  at  low  water,  and  the  whole 
bay  is  shoal  out  to  the  line  jolniug  Wild  Fowl  Beef  and  Oar)e  Oolombier. 
Laval  Bay,  situated  4  miles  to  the  westward  of  Wild  Fowl  Reef,  will 
be  known  by  the  rocky  island  in  its  mouth,  and  by  the  clay  cliffs  which 
commence  IJ  miles  to  the  SW.  of  it  and  continue  to  within  the  same 
distance  of  Port  Neuf. 

This  bay  within  the  island  is  all  dry  at  low  water.  Vessels  may 
safely  stand  in  towards  it,  the  water  shoaling  gradually  from  10  fath- 


{h  the  wide 
h  that  could 
t  low  water, 
b  bo  neap  or 

)M,  and  diffli- 
i  of  the  river 
bar  14  uiiles 
lile  from  the 
rning,  there 
oiu  the  edge 
3  slioala  are 
ly  to  vesselH 

;han  the  ebb 
lorn  exceeds 

y  shore  eon- 

1  very  small, 
the  Hudson 
ally  be  seen ; 
hes  of  white 
f  the  island. 
ice ;  but  it  is 
)ui  the  shore. 
)roken  shore 
iisnla,  with  a 

2  miles  long^ 
)ver  it  at  low 

in  line  with 
W.  leads  400 

nile  from  the 
re  0  fathoma 

ilombier,  may 
St  side.  The 
ad  the  whole 
[)e  Oolombier. 
owl  Reef,  will 
ly  cliffs  which 
bin  the  same 

Vessels  may 
from  lOfath- 


PORT    NEirF — EHtiUAMINK    I8LET8. 


181 


oms,  whi(5h  Ih  at  the  diHtanoe  of  Hi  mllOM  fioui  the  Hhoro.  There  Ih  good 
anulior>ige  iu  ti  or  7  fathoms,  over  uluy  bottom,  off  the  clay  clitl'M  above 
mentioned. 

Fort  Neuf.— There  is  a  fur-trading  and  salmonflnhing  establiMhnient 
belonging  to  the  tludHon  Bay  Company,  at  this  pottt,  which  standH  upon 
a  steei>.  Handy  biink,  and  is  4  miles  to  the  Nl*}.  of  Mille  Vaohes  Point; 
there  are  several  buildings.    These  can  readily  be  seen  by  a  vessel  off 
the  coaHt. 

SB.  from  the  church,  distant  nearly  ^  mile,  is  the  south  end  of  a  low 
and  narrow  sandy  peninsula,  with  a  clump  of  pine  or  spruce  trees  upon 
it. 

Port  Nenf  Rivor  is  entered  from  the  SW.,  but  is  so  shallow  that  a 
boat  can  not  enter  it  at  low  water. 

Port  Neuf  Banda.— The  eastern  patch  of  these  shoals,  carrying  .3} 
fathoms  least  water,  and  which  might  be  dangerous  to  a  vessel  of  heavy 
draft  in  a  high  sea,  bears  N.  5Q°  E.,  and  is  dist>tnt  l^  miles  ftom  the 
eouth  western  end  of  the  sand  and  clay  cliffs  at  the  entrance  of  Port 
Neuf  River.  , 

BCille  Vachea  Point  is  low,  sandy,  and  wooded  with  spruce  trees. 
From  its  souch  extremity  the  K  W.  reef  of  Bicquette  bears  S.  44°  E.  12^ 
miles,  and  the  navigable  breadth  uf  the  channel  is  diminished  by  Mille 
Yacbes  Shoals  to  little  more  than  11^  miles.  As  the  dangers  on  either 
«ide  are  so  bold,  and  as  the  course  of  a  vessel  running  up  the  estuary 
must  ever  be  more  or  less  uncertain  in  consequence  of  the  set  of  the 
tides  and  currents,  this  pass  is  justly  considered  dangerous  to  a  vessel 
running  up  in  dark  nights  or  foggy  weather. 

MiUe  Vaohea  Bay,  on  the  west  side  of  Mille  Vacbes  Point,  is  very 
large,  with  several  small  rivers,  which  descend  by  falls  or  rapids  down 
the  granitic  shores.  The  principal  of  these  rivers  is  the  Saut  de  Mon- 
ton,  44  miles  west  fi'om  the  poin^.  and  which  has  a  fall  of  80  feet  visible 
A:om  a  vessel  when  abreast  of  it.  Ail  the  interior  of  this  bay  is  occa- 
pied  by  shoals  of  sand,  mud,  and  large  bowlders,  which  dry  at  low 
water. 

Anohorage. — There  is  anchorage  in  Mille  Vaohes  Bay  in  15  fathoms, 
aand  and  mud  bottom,  with  the  south  extremity  of  Mille  Vaches  Point 
in  line  with  the  inner  or  north  side  of  the  pine  trees  on  the  peninsula 
of  Port  Neuf  bearing  N.  28°  B.,  at  the  distance  of  2  or  3  miles  from  the 
point  and  |  of  a  mile  from  the  shoals.  The  ground  is  good  and  there 
is  not  mnch  tide. 

SscoQinaiiui  laleta  are  two  large  rocks,  which  have  three  small  ones 
nearly  a  mile  to  the  southward  of  them.  The  coast  to  the  southwest- 
ward  from  these  islets  to  Little  Bergeron,  a  distance  of  16  miles,  con< 
aibts  of  granite  rook,  steep  and  bold,  and  free  from  all  danger,  except- 
ing a  flat  which  occupies  a  bay  on  the  west  side  of  Gape  Bondesir,  bat 
which  does  not  extend  above  ^  mile  outside  of  a  line  joining  the  points 
of  the  bay,  and  is  conseqnently  very  little  in  the  way  of  vessels. 


^-^^^^^mmmmmmmk 


BHB 


182 


CAPE  WHITTLE    TO    SAGUENAY    RIVER. 


Tides.— The  tidal  streams  are  regular,  iucreasing  in  strength  as  we 
approach  the  comparatively  narrow  pass  on  either  side  of  Bed  Islet. 
The  flood  is  the  stronger  tide  of  the  two,  the  ebb  being  deflected  over 
towards  the  southern  shore  by  the  stream  out  of  the  great  Saguenay 
Biver.  The  flood  does  not  extend  above  5  or  6  miles  off  the  north  shore 
below  Bergeron,  and  the  closer  to  that  shore  the  stronger  is  the  stream* 
Its  rate  at  Mille  Vaches  Point,  where  it  does  not  extend  far  offshore, 
is  from  IJ  to  2  knots,  and  off  Bergeron  from  2  to  3  knots,  in  spring 
tides. 

Great  and  Little  Bergeron  are  two  coves  separated  by  a  point. 
They  are  both  full  of  large  bowlders,  which  dry  at  low  water,  and  hav© 
small  streams  at  their  heads.  Little  Bergeron  is  of  the  two  the  most 
totheSW. 


1'  I 


:  i! 


strength  as  w& 
e  of  £ed  Islet. 
r  deflected  over 
rreat  Saguenay 
the  north  shore 
)risthe  stream* 
nd  far  offshore, 
knots,  in  spring 

ted  by  a  point, 
vater,  and  have< 
le  two  the  most 


CHAPTER    VII. 

BIVEB    ST.    LAWRENCE,    GBBEN    ISLAND    TO     MONTREAL— SAGUENAY 

BIYEE. 

Q«neral  Remarks. — Chapter  7  commences  at  what  may  be  consid- 
ered the  first  difBcnlt  pass  ascending  the  St.  Lawrence,  the  difficulty 
arising  not  only  from  the  dangerous  reefs  of  Green  Island,  Red  Islet, 
and  Saguenay  River,  but  also  from  the  great  velocity  and  transverse 
direction  of  the  tidal  streams. 

Some  remarks  and  directions  have  already  been  given  respecting  the 
passage  on  either  side  of  Red  Islet  and  its  reef,  the  Oreen  Island  light- 
house and  reef,  and  the  anchorage  under  the  latter. 

Red  Islet  is  small,  low,  and  of  shingle,  partially  covered  with  grass 
and  resting  on  slate  rock. 

Red  Islet  Bank.— Red  Islet  is  quite  bold  at  its  SW.  end,  but  a  rocky 
bank  or  reef,  nearly  dry  in  some  parts  at  low  water,  extends  2^  miles 
to  the  northward,  and  is  1|  miles  wide.  There  is  good  warning  by  the 
lead  in  approaching  this  bank  from  the  eastward,  but  vessels  should  be 
cautious  in  approaching  it  from  the  northward,  because  the  water  is 
deep,  and  the  ebb  tide  sets  strongly,  upon  it  on  thnt  side.  In  flue  sum- 
mer weather  vessels  becalmed  or  bound  up,  and  wishing  to  wait  for 
the  tide,  may  safely  anchor  to  the  east  and  SE.  of  this  bank  in  10 
fathoms  at  low  water,  where  they  will  have  good  ground  and  find  the 
strength  of  the  ebb  much  broken  by  the  bank.  In  case  of  need,  they 
may  also  anchor  in  the  same  depth  at  the  distance  of  400  yards  from 
the  south  side  ol  the  islet,  but  the  ebb  tide  runs  there  at  the  rate  of  6^ 
knots  per  hour. 

Marks.— The  lighthouse  and  beacon  on  Green  Island  are  both  white, 
and  when  in  line,  bearing  S.  43°  E.,  lead  to  the  eastward  of  Red  Islet 
Bank.  (Page  23.)  A  red  buoy  is  moored  at  its  east  end  in  5^  fathoms, 
from  which  the  south  side  of  Red  Islet  and  the  north  side  of  Hare  Island 
appear  in  line,  and  the  lighthouse  on  Green  Island  open  a  little  lo  the 
eastward  of  the  beacon.  The  lead  should  never  be  neglected,  nor  the 
vessel  taken  nearer  than  the  depth  of  9  fathoms  at  low  water  in  passing 
to  the  southward.  There  are  no  marks  for  leading  to  the  northward  of 
this  bank,  nor  do  the  soundings  there  afford  sufficient  warning  for  the 
safety  of  a  vessel. 

White  Islet,  bearing  S.  27°  W.,  nearly  10  miles  from  Red  Islet,  is 
small,  low,  and  wooded,  presenting  the  appearance  of  a  clump  of  trees 
on  the  only  part  of  Hare  Island  North  Reef  which  does  not  cover  at 

183 


iJi 


w 


n 


.11 


i  r 


184 


GREEN    ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


high  water.  This  reef,  which  is  commonly  called  White  Island  Reef,  is 
composed  of  a  narrow  ridge  of  highly  inclined  slate  rocks,  and  extends 
3  miles  to  the  northward  of  the  islet.  On  its  NB.  end,  which  is  ex- 
tremely dangerous,  because  the  flood  tide  sets  strongly  upon  and  over 
it  into  the  North  Channel,  a  light  and  bell  buoy,  painted  red,  and  show- 
ing a  ^.ve(2  ichite  gaslight,  is  moored  in  8  fathoms.  The  beacon  in  Oaco- 
una  Pariah,  open  to  the  westward  of  the  church,  leads  to  the  eastward 
of  the  east  end  of  the  reef,  which  vessels  should  approach  no  nearer 
than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms  at  low  water. 

Hare  Island  is  7\  miles  long  in  Ihe  direction  of  the  river,  and  less 
than  a  mile  wide.  Its  height  does  not  exceed  250  or  300  feet ;  and  it  is 
of  greywack6  and  slate  rocks,  dipping  at  a  high  angle  to  the  SB.,  and 
thickly  wooded.    It  has  no  inhabitants. 

Brandy  Pots  are  three  round  backed  islets  of  steep  gray  wacke  rocks, 
lying  ott'  the  east  side  of  Hare  Island,  at  the  distance  of  J  of  a  mile. 
The  channel  between  them  and  Hare  Island  is  only  tit  for  boats.  There 
is  a  good  spring  well  on  the  8W.  point  of  the  Northern  Islet,  but  it  fails 
in  very  dry  seasons. 

Brandy  Pot  Bank.— The  east  point  of  Brandy  Pots  bears  8. 1(P  B. 
nearly  2  miles  from  the  NB.  end  of  Hare  Island;  it  is  extremely  bold, 
but  a  bank,  with  from  1^  to  2f  fathoms  at  low  water,  extends  both  to 
the  northward  and  southward  of  it  along  the  east  side  of  Hare  Island. 
Anchorage.— Small  vessels  anchor  on  this  bank  ^  mile  to  the  SW. 
of  Brandy  Pots  in  2J  fathoms,  hard  clay  and  sand  bottom,  and  well 
sheltered  from  easterly  winds.  Vessels  of  large  draft  anchor  farther 
out  in  the  stream  in  from  9  to  14  fathoms  at  low  water,  this  being  con- 
sidered an  excellent  anchorage,  although  so  much  exposed  in  easterly 
winds.  Vessels  may  go  as  near  as  the  depth  of  6  fathoms  at  low  tide 
as  far  down  as  White  Islet  and  have  good  ground  and  plenty  of  room 
to  get  under  weigh.  Brandy  Pots  anchorage  is  the  usual  rendezvous 
for  vessels  bound  down  the  St.  Lawrence  and  waiting  for  a  wind. 

Mark.— A  good  mark  for  clearing  Brandy  Pot  Bank  for  the  first  IJ 
miles  to  the  SW.  of  those  islets,  as  well  as  to  guide  vessels  of  large 
draft  in  anchoring  with  easterly  winds,  is,  not  to  shut  the  whole  of 
White  Island  in  behind  the  SE.  point  of  Brandy  Pots.  The  bank,  which 
extends  to  the  NB.  of  Brandy  Pots,  will  be  cleared  by  keeping  the  whole 
of  Pilgrim  Islands  open  to  the  southward  of  Brandy  Pots,  or  by  going 
no  nearer  than  the  depth  of  6  fathoms  in  a  large  vessel. 

Hare  Island  South  Reef  and  Bank.— The  part  of  this  reef  which 
the  tide  does  not  cover  lies  2J  miles  to  the  of  SW.  Hare  Island,  is  small 
and  low,  of  shingle  covered  with  grass  and  spruce  bushes,  and  rests  on 
slate  rocks,  which  dry  at  low  water  for  a  considerable  distance  from  it, 
both  up  and  down  the  river.  This  reef  is  situated  towards  the  northern 
side  of  the  Hare  Island  Bank,  which  is  of  great  extent,  with  not  more  than 
9  feet  at  low  water  over  the  greater  part  of  it.  About  J  mile  to  the 
westward  of  the  east  end  of  the  bank  there  is  a  small  rocky  knoll,  with 


Mi«^ 


and  Reef,  is 
iind  extends 
?hich  is  ex- 
on  and  over 
1,  and  show- 
Bon  in  Oaco- 
he  eastward 
li  no  nearer 

^er,  and  less 
et;  and  it  is 
bhe  SB.,  and 

wacke  rocks, 

^  of  a  mile. 

Dats.    There 

t,  bat  it  fails 

W8  8.  lOo  B. 
remely  bold, 
ends  both  to 
Hare  Island. 
»  to  the  8W. 
>n],  and  well 
ichor  farther 
is  being  con- 
d  in  easterly 
18  at  low  tide 
anty  of  room 
I  rendezvous 
A  wind. 
\r  the  first  1} 
isels  of  large 
the  whole  of 
)  bank,  which 
ing  the  whole 
,  or  by  going 

8  reef  which 
land,  is  small 
,  and  rests  on 
ance  from  it, 
the  northern 
not  more  than 
4  mile  to  the 
:y  knoll,  with 


HARE   ISLAND    REEF BARRETT    LEDGES, 

2J  fathoms  least  water,  from  which  White  Islet  is  only  just  shut  in  be- 
hind the  south  side  of  Hare  Islauf' :  and  the  SW.eud  of  Hiire  Island 
bears  N.  66°  W.  IJ  miles.  A  ru?  vy  is  moored  near  it  in  3  fathoms, 
with  the  south  side  of  Hare  Islani.  ;.d  the  middle  of  White  Islet  in  line, 
and  the  8W.  end  of  Hare  Island  bearing  N.  71°  W. 

Middle  G-round.— At  the  distance  of  %  mile  from  the  east  end  of 
Hare  Island  Bank  there  is  a  small  2J  fathoms  patch,  bearing  from  Hare 
Island  South  Keef  N.  52°  E.  and  from  the  8W.  end  of  Hare  Island  8. 
87°  E.  2  miles.  It  is  marked  by  a  buoy,  painted  red.  There  is  no  chan- 
nel here  for  a  ship  of  heavy  draft  at  low  water,  for  a  ridge  of  sand  and 
rock,  called  Middle  Bank,  with  not  more  than  from  3  to  4  fathoms  in  low 
tides,  extends  all  the  way  from  the  Hare  Island  Bank  to  Middle  Shoal 
and  nearly  to  Barrett  Ledge. 

Between  Hare  Island  Bank  and  the  SW.  end  of  Hare  Island  there 
is  an  unfrequented  channel  J  mile  wide  and  with  from  2^  to  3  fathoms 
water  in  it.  To  the  SW.,  Hare  Island  Bank  extends  6  miles  from  the 
reef  of  the  same  name,  and  its  SW.  end  will  be  cleared  in  3J  fathoms 
by  keeping  Grand  Island  just  open  to  the  eastward  of  Kamourasca 
church,  bearing  8.  4°  E.  A  red  buoy,  in  4  fathoms,  is  moored  on  its 
southern  edge. 

Anchorage. — There  is  good  anchorage  all  along  the  south  side  of 
Hare  Island  Bank  in  7  fathoms,  which  depth  is  near  enough  for  a  vessel 
of  large  draft. 

Barrett  Ledges  are  two  small  patches  of  rocks,  ^  mile  apart,  and 
having  7  and  8  fathoms  between  them.  The  western  ledge  has  12  feet, 
and  the  eastern  10  feet,  at  low  water.  From  the  eastern  ledge,  Brandy 
Pots  Lighthouse  bears  S.  76°  W.  2J  miles ;  center  of  white  Islet  N.  40° 
W.  3J  miles.  A  light  buoy,  checkered  black  and  white,  and  showing  an 
intermittent  gas  light,  is  moored  in  2^  fathoms,  on  the  eastern  end  of  the 
ledges. 

The  western  ledge  lies  exactly  in  the  line  joining  Loup  Point  with 
the  NE.  point  of  Hare  Island,  and  with  the  SW.  side  of  the  Bay  of 
Bocks,  the  two  last  bearing  in  line  from  the  rock  N.  63°  W.  and  the 
south  point  of  Brandy  Pots  S.  77°  W.  2  miles.  A  black  and  white 
buoy  is  moored  on  the  east  side  of  this  ledge  in  6  fathoms. 

Middle  Shoal  is  a  small  patch  of  rocks  at  the  NE.  end  of  Middle 
Bank ;  it  has  6  feet  least  water,  and  bears  from  the  western  Barrett 
Ledge  8. 29°  W.  1^  mUes. 

Marmen  Rock. — A  black  can  buoy  is  moored  northeastward  of  Mar- 
men  Rock,  which  is  situated  S.  74°  E.  a  little  more  than  1^  miles  from 
Brandy  Pots  light-house,  and  carries  7  feet  water. 

Demers  Rock. — A  red  can  buoy  is  placed  southwestward  of  Demers 
Bock,  which  carries  11  feet  of  water,  and  lies  700  yards  southwestward 
of  Middle  Shoal,  and  8.  57°  E.  1^  miles  nearly  from  Brandy  Pots  light- 
house. 


*  i 

i* 
II 

i 


ill 'I 


186 


GREEN  ISLAND  TO  MONTREAL. 


SOUTH  SHORE,  BELOW  THE  TRAVERSE. 

Green  Island  (see  page  121)  extends  5  miles  SW.  from  the  lighthouse, 
with  bold  and  rocky  shores.  Its  SW.  point  is  low  and  bare,  and  has  a 
dangerous  reef  extending  from  it  a  mile  to  the  westward.  The  north 
side  of  this  reef  is  so  bold  that  there  is  no  warning  by  th<  'ead. 

The  flood  tide  sets  strongly  over  the  tail  of  this  reef  towauls  Oacouna, 
and  the  ebb  the  contrary.  There  is  generally  a  great  rippling  oflf  the 
end  of  the  reef,  caused  by  the  meeting  of  the  flood  tides  from  eitherside 
of  Green  Island. 

Anchorage.— Midway  between  the  SW.  end  of  Green  Island  Reef 
and  Cacouna  Kock  there  is  good  anchorage  and  shelter  from  easterly 
winds,  in  6  fathoms,  muddy  bottom,  but  there  might  be  delay  and  diffi- 
culty in  getting  out  when  the  wind  changed  to  the  westward,  on  which 
account  it  is  seldom  nsed. 

Caconna  is  a  remarkable  rocky  peninsula,  about  1^  miles  long,  300 
or  400  feet  high,  and  joined  to  the  main  by  a  low  and  and  marshy  isthmus, 
A  reef  of  slate,  dry  at  low  water,  extends  from  it  northward  to  the 
Cacouna  Rock,  which  is  small,  bare,  bold,  and  always  above  water. 

Pero^e  Rocks  form  a  long  reef  which  extends  2  miles  parallel  to  the 
shore.  They  can  almost  always  be  seen,  since  they  are  only  covered  in 
high  tides.  There  is  a  narrow  channel,  with  3J  fathoms  water  in  it, 
between  this  reef  and  the  mainland. 

The  west  point  of  Cacouna  peninsula  just  touching  south  side  of 
Green  Isl&nd,  and  bearing  N.  35°  E.,  leads  along  the  north  side  of  the 
rocks  in  3  fathoms  water. 

Loop  River  has  3  feet  at  low  water  in  its  entrance.  Vessels  have 
laid  aground  just  within  the  entrance,  and  taken  in  their  cargoes  of 
lumber;  but  they  now  load  outside.  A  pier  having  16  tfeet  water  at  it» 
end  in  the  lowest  tides  extends  in  a  westerly  direction  from  Loup  Point. 
There  are  rapids,  mills,  and  a  bridge,  rather  more  than  a  mile  up  the 
river,  where  boats  may  be  sent  for  water  when  the  tide  is  in. 

Anchorage.— The  best  berth  is  rather  to  the  eastward  of  the  line 
joining  the  point  of  the  river  and  Brandy  Pots,  in  4J  fathoms,  mud'bot- 
tom,  and  from  f  to  one  mile  off  shore. 

Zionp  Bank  consists  of  slate,  thinly  covered  with  sand  and  mud,  and 
extends  3  miles  out  from  the  shore  to  the Sfathoms  line, reaching  from 
the  river  in  a  SW.  direction  as  far  as  the  Pilgrim  Islands. 

Pilgrim  Shoal  is  a  long  and  narrow  ridge  of  red  slate  rocks,  thinly 
covered  with  sand,  and  extending  4  miles  parallel  to  the  northern  edge 
of  the  Loup  Bank.  The  shoal  is  not  above  ^  mile  wide,  and  has  from 
12  to  15  feet  least  water.  The  channel  between  it  and  the  Loup  Bank 
is  less  than  400  yards  wide,  and  with  only  3^  fathoms  water  in  it.  On 
the  eastern  end  of  this  shoal,  in  3  fathoms,  the  eastern  side  of  Brandy 
Pots  and  the  NB.  end  of  the  trees  of  Hare  Island  are  in  line,  bearing  N. 
10°  W ;  Cape  Eat^le  and  the  NE.  side  of  Hare  Island  reef  are  just  open 
S.  650  W. 


■' I'lmliW >ii        T. 


-■^ 


PILGRIM    SHOAL — KAM0URA8CA   BAY. 


187 


le  ligbthouse^ 
ire,  and  has  a 
.  The  north 
^  lead. 

lids  Gaconna^ 
)pling  off  the 
om  either  side 

1  Island  Beef 
From  easterly 
elay  anddiiH- 
ard,  on  which 

liles  long,  300 
Tshy  istbnins, 
bward  to  the 
Bve  water. 
[)arallel  to  the 
ily  covered  in 
3  water  in  it^ 

south  side  of 
;h  side  of  the 

Vessels  have 
ir  cargoes  of 
)t  water  at  its 
n  Loop  Point. 
I  mile  up  the 
in. 

rd  of  the  line 
>m8,  mad'bot- 

and  mud,  and 
reaching  from 

rocks,  thinly 
aorthern  edge 
and  has  from 
e  Loup  Bank 
ter  in  it.  On 
de  of  Brandy 
DC,  bearing  N. 
'  are  just  open 


On  the  SW.  end  of  the  Pilgrim  Shoal,  Cape  Salmon  appears  well 
open  to  the  westward  of  the  Uare  Island  Reef,  the  SW.  side  of  the  latter 
bearing  N.  88°  W.  The  black  buoy  moored  on  the  uortii  western  side 
of  Pilgrim  Shoal  exhibits  an  intermittent  gas  light. 

The  Pilgrims — The  two  westernmost  islands  are  nearly  white,  bare 
of  trees,  and  so  nearly  joined  together  as  to  appear  like  one;  hence 
they  are  called  the  Long  Pilgrim,  and  form  a  narrow  precipitous  ridge 
3  miles  long,  in  a  SW.  direction.  The  two  Middle  Pilgrims  and  the 
Great  Pilgrim,  which  is  the  easternmost,  are  connected  by  reefs,  dry  at 
low  water;  but  between  them  and  the  Long  Pilgrim  there  is  a  narrow 
channel,  with  not  more  than  2  feet  water  iu  one  part. 

Great  Pilgrim  is  the  highest,  being  about  30U  feet  high,  partially 
wooded  with  scrubby  spruce  trees.  Shoal  water,  less  than  5  fathoms^ 
extends  from  ^  to  ^  of  a  mile  off  the  northern  side  of  the  Long  Pilgrim, 
being  widest  at  the  SW.  end.  There  is  no  channel  between  the  Pd- 
grims  and  the  main,  where  it  is  so  shallow  that  carts  can  cross  in  low 
tides. 

St.  Andre  Bank  extends  from  the  Pilgrims  to  the  Eamourasca  Is- 
lands, ltd  northern  edge  is  very  steep,  but  there  is  an  excellent  mark 
for  it,  namely,  the  south  side  of  Grande  and  Burnt  Islands  in  line,  bear- 
ing S.  30°  W.,  which  leads  along  it  at  the  distance  of  300  yards  from  the 
3fathom8  line  of  soundings. 

Kamonrasca  Islands.— Grande  and  Burnt  Islands  are  loiig  and 
narrow  ridges  of  greywack^  rock,  and  are  extremely  bold  to  the  north- 
ward.  Grow  Island  is  distant  about  $  mile  from  the  shore  at  the  church 
and  town  of  Kamonrasca.  There  is  a  wharf  and  good  landing  near  the 
church,  and  water  may  be  obtained  at  any  time  of  tide  when  there  i» 
depth  enough  for  boats  over  the  shoals,  bnt  there  is  no  water  on  the 
islands. 

Beacons.— On  the  eastern  end  of  Grande  Island  there  are  two  bea- 
cons, the  one  red  and  the  other  white.  When  in  line,  and  bearing  S. 
230  E.,  they  form  a  cross  mark  for  the  red  bnoy  on  the  SW.  end  of  the 
Hare  Island  Bank,  in  4  fathoms. 

SCamonrasoa  Bay  is  well  sheltered,  and  small  vessels  may  safely 
lie  aground  and  winter  there,  on  a  mad  bottom,  which  dries  at  low 
water.  Vessels  in  distress,  when  they  have  lost  their  anchors,  may  be 
saved  by  running  tliem  iu  at  high  water,  between  the  reef  of  Cape 
Diable  and  Crow  Island,  leaving  the  latter  from  i  to  ^  mile  to  the  east- 
ward in  passing ;  and  when  within  the  reef,  hauling  into  the  bay  to  the 
SW^.  In  high  spring  tides  13  or  14  feet  of  water  will  be  found  over  the 
mud,  bnt  in  neap  tides  there  is  seldom  more  thao  9  or  10  feet. 

Anchorage. — ^The  best  berth  is  with  the  <>hnrch  of  Eamourasca  just 
open  J»  the  westward  of  Crow  Island,  bearing  S.  67°  E.,  and  Grande 
Island  just  open  to  the  northward  of  Burnt  Island,  N.  34°  E.,  in  7  fath- 
oms, over  stiff'  mud.  Large  vessels  wishing  for  more  room  may  anchor 
farther  ont  anywhere  to  the  westward. 


'i?l 


1^ 


V 


188 


GREEN    ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


li 


Cape  Diable. — Keefs  of  slate  eJtend  northward  from  it  halfway  to 
Crow  Island,  and  northwestward  ^  mile. 

St  Denis  Point  is  nearly  3  miles  to  the  SW.  from  Cape  Diable. 

Oiigneauz  Point  (where  there  is  a  landing  pier,  1,200  feet  long,  and 
with  15  feet  water  at  its  end  in  the  lowest  tides)  is  an  extreme  of  the 
land  running  out  to  within  ij  mile  of  the  edge  of  the  bank,  and  the  land 
trends  from  it  southward  IJ  miles  to  Iroquois  Point. 

River  Quelle  has  its  entrance  to  the  westward  on  the  south  side  of 
Ouelle  Point.  In  high  spring  tides,  15  feet  water  can  be  carried  about 
1^  miles  from  the  entrance. 

St  Roch  Point  is  9  miles  from  Ouelle  Point ;  and  from  the  line  be- 
typeen  them  to  the  shore,  a  distance  of  2J  miles,  the  bay  of  St.  Anne 
dries  at  low  water,  the  bottom  being  mud,  but  with  thousands  of  bowl- 
ders or  large  stones. 

Shoals  of  St.  Anne  extend  5  miles  out  from  the  high-water  mark 
and  are  very  dangerous.  They  are  of  sand  and  mud  thickly  strewed 
with  large  stones,  many  of  which  show  at  low  water.  The  St.  Anne 
buoy  is  black  and  moored  on  the  western  edge  of  these  shoals  with  St. 
Anne  church  bearing  S.  46°  E.,  and  St.  Roch  church  8.  11°  W. 

Anchorage.— All  along  the  edge  of  the  bank  from  Kamourasca  up 
to  St.  Anne  buoy  there  is  excellent  anchorage  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms, 
stiff  mud  bottom. 

EngUsh  Bank  is  a  ridge  of  sand  varying  in  breadth  from  ^  to  1^ 
miles,  and  extending  NE.  from  the  Middle  Ground  of  the  Traverse. 
For  the  first  7  or  8  miles  (that  is,  nearly  abreast  the  river  Ouelle)  it  runs 
nearly  parallel  to  the  edge  of  St.  Anne  Shoals,  at  the  average  distance 
of  a  mile;  farther  eastward  it  trends  to  the  northward  towards  Muiray 
Bay,  which  it  approaches  to  within  2^  miles,  and  its  northeastern  ex- 
tremity in  10  fathoms  is  more  than  ^  mile  to  the  westward  of  a  line 
from  the  church  at  that  place  to  the  church  at  Kamourasca.  On  the 
western  and  greater  part  of  this  bank  the  depth  is  between  6  and  8  fath- 
oms, and  on  the  eastern  part  from  9  to  11  fathoms. 

SOUTH  CHANNEL,  BELOW  THE  TEAVEBSB. 

Qeneral  Observations.— The  South  Ohannel  is  Justly  preferred  for 
the  common  purposes  of  navigation.  In  that  part  of  it  which  is  below 
the  Traverse  the  tides  are  not  so  strong  nor  the  water  so  inconven- 
iently deep  as  they  are  in  the  corresponding  part  of  the  North  Channel 
below  Coudres  Island.  Moreover  it  possesses  good  anchorage  almost 
in  every  part,  and  water  enough  for  vessels  of  the  largest  draft  at  aU 
times  of  the  tide.  It  is  true  that  several  large  ships  have  touched  the 
ground  in  passing  the  southwest  end  of  Hare  Island,  but  that  has  arisen 
from  their  following  the  usual  route  to  the  northward  of  the  Barrett  Ledges 
And  into  the  Brandy  Pot  Channel,  a  course  which  has  been  erroneously 
represented  in  former  directions  as  always  to  be  preferred  by  vessels  of 
large  draft.    It  is,  on  the  contrary,  only  ships  of  heavy  draft  which 


',|y  _ 


it  halfway  to 

pe  Diable. 
feet  long,  and 
xtretne  of  the 
,  and  the  land 

south  side  of 
carried  about 

>m  the  line  be- 
y  of  St.  Anne 
sands  of  bowl- 

h  water  mark 
lickly  strewed 
The  St.  Anne 
hoals  with  St. 
HOW. 

atnourasca  up 
;o  10  fathoms, 

from  ^  to  li 
the  Traverse. 
Quelle)  it  runs 
erage  distance 
twards  Mutray 
rtheastern  ex- 
^ard  of  a  line 
■asca.  On  the 
Bn6and8fath. 


y  preferred  for 
which  is  below 
r  so  incooven- 
N^orth  Channel 
Bhorage  almost 
St  draft  at  all 
ve  touched  the 
that  has  arisen 
Barrett  Ledges 
len  erroneously 
3d  by  vessels  of 
vy  draft  which 


DIRECTIONS. 


189 


need  to  shun  that  course  as  entailing  upon  them  the  necessity  of  cross- 
ing the  Middle  Bank  in  from  3^  to  4  fathoms  at  low  water,  or  even  in  a 
less  depth  if  they  cross  it  according  to  the  old  directions,  with  Whit© 
Island  open  between  Huro  [sliiud  ami  tho  Brivnily  Pots. 

There  is  deep  water,  from  14  to  20  fathoms,  between  the  Middle  Bank 
and  Hare  Island,  but  it  ends  in  a  <'  cul  de  sac; "  there  is  no  getting  out  of 
it  into  the  main  chanatii  without  crossing  the  Middle  Bank  to  the  south- 
ward, which  should  never  be  attempted  in  a  vessel  of  deep  draft  before 
half  flood.  It  would,  however,  be  far  better  for  such  vessels  to  pass  to 
the  southward  of  Barrett  Ledges,  Middle  Shoal,  and  Middle  Bank, 
where  the  channel  is  direct,  and  for  a  very  large  ship  (that  is,  from  5 
fathoms  to  5  fathoms  at  low  water)  a  mile  wide  in  the  narrowest  part, 
with  from  6  to  11  fathoms  water  over  clay  and  mud  bottom. 

The  circumstance  which  has  given  a  preference  to  Brandy  Pot  Chan- 
iiel  to  the  northward  of  Barrett  Ledges,  and  which  will  continue  to  do 
so  for  the  common  purposes  of  navigation,  is  the  advantageous  position 
of  the  anchorage  at  the  Brandy  Pots,  especially  in  northerly  winds, 
when  it  is  absolutely  necessary  that  vessels  bound  down  the  river  should 
be  to  windward  on  account  of  the  rapid  tide  setting  to  the  southward 
from  between  White  Islet  Reef  and  Red  Islet.  Moreover  vessels  bound 
to  sea  usually  rendezvous  at  the  Brandy  Pots  to  wait  for  a  wind  or  the 
tide,  one  ebb  being  suflBcient,  with  a  moderately  good  working  breeze, 
to  take  them  down  below  Green  Island,  where  they  can  always  gain 
ground  to  the  eastward  whilst  the  weather  remains  fine.  The  Brandy 
Pots  also  are  about  the  point  that  a  fair  sailing  merchant  vessel  can 
reach  in  one  flood  from  the  anchorage  under  Green  Island  Reef,  where 
they  usually  wait  for  the  tide  when  beating  up  with  westerly  winds. 

Directions  from  O-reen  and  Red  Islands  to  the  Brandy  Pots.— 
In  a  vessel  coming  up  the  river,  and  being  under  the  north  shore  with 
a  northerly  wind,  proceed  as  follows:  If  wishing  to.  take  the  South 
Channel,  bring  Green  Island  lighthouse  and  beacon  in  one  and  ran 
down  upon  this  leading  mark  (passing  to  the  eastward  of  Bed  Islet 
Bank  light  vessel)  till  White  Islet  is  opened  fully  twice  its  own  breadth 
to  the  northward  of  Hare  Inland.  Then  haul  up,  and  if  the  tide  be 
flood  she  has  merely  to  take  care  not  to  close  those  marks  for  clearing 
the  south  side  of  Red  Islet  Bank,  which,  with  the  flood,  she  need  not 
approach  nearer  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms.  It  is  of  consequence  to 
observe  (more  particularly  with  a  southerly  wind  than  in  this  case)  that 
the  flood  sets  through  between  Bed  Islet  and  White  Islet  Reef,  and 
strongly  over  the  tail  of  the  latter  into  the  North  Channel. 

But  with  the  ebb  tide  a  vessel  must  luff  up  close  under  Red  Islet 
Bank,  taking  care,  however,  to  keep  White  Islet  fully  twice  its  own 
breadth  open  to  the  northward  of  Hare  Island,  and  not  to  approach  the 
bank  nearer  than  7  fathoms  water,  till  Rod  Islet  bears  N.  05°  W.,  when 
she  can  keep  her  luff  as  close  as  it  may  be  found  necessary  to  prevent 
her  being  set  over  to  the  lee  shore  by  the  strong  ebb  coming  from  the 


'i 
'I 


i 


1 


iilf 


-^-al^ 


fsm 


t:.i 


i  I 


190 


ORKEN    ISLAND   TO    MONTREAL. 


North  Channel  between  White  and  Red  Islets,  and  setting  over  to- 
wardH  Green  Island  Keef.  The  same  marks  (White  Islet  open  of  Hare 
Island)  may  be  kept  on  until  she  approaches  White  Islet  Reef  (Hare 
Island  north  reef)  to  10  fathoms  water,  when  she  muHte<lge  away  along 
the  south  side  of  that  reef,  where  the  tides  set  fairly  up  and  down  the 
river  and  are  of  moderate  strength. 

It  is  scarcely  necessary  to  mention  that  in  the  voyage  down  the  river, 
also,  these  tides  must  be  attended  to.  For  instance,  with  a  northerly 
wind  and  ebb  tide,  keep  well  to  windward  under  White  Islet  Reef,  and 
so  as  not  to  be  set  down  towards  Green  Isfand  Reef.  With  a  southerly 
wind  and  flood  tide,  on  the  contrary,  a  vessel  must  keep  well  to  the 
Houthward,  in  order  to  avoid  being  carried  by  the  tide  into  the  North 
Channel. 

At  Night,  when  the  lights  on  Oreen  and  Red  Islands  can  be  seen, 
their  bearings  and  the  soundings  in  the  chart  will  prove  sufficient  guides, 
even  although  the  land  should  not  be  seen.  ■  In  a  vessel  under  the  north 
shore,  coming  up  with  a  northerly  wind,  bring  Red  Islet  bank  lightves- 
sel  in  line  with  Green  Island  light  bearing  S.  42^  E.  and  pass  eastward 
of  the  lightvessel,  allowing  for  the  tide.  Whilst  crossing  on  that  bear- 
ing she  will  have  11  or  12  fathoms  when  in  the  stream  of  the  bank,  and 
be  14  miles  distant  from  its  eastern  end.  Keep  the  lead  quickly  hove 
and  do  not  shoal  less  than  10  fathoms ;  if  the  tide  be  flood,  care  must 
be  taken  that  it  does  not  set  her  too  near  the  end  of  the  bank. 

Continue  the  course  towards  the  Green  Island  light  until  the  sound- 
ings deepen  to  20  fathoms,  or  until  the  Red  Islet  light  bears  iS.  48°  W., 
then  haul  to  the 'south  westward  under  Red  Islet  bank.  Pass  it  in  20 
fathoms  water,  which  is  near  enough  for  a  stranger  at  night,  and  when 
Green  Island  light  bears  S.  79°  E.  the  south  point  of  the  Brandy  Pots 
will  bear  S.  30°  W.,  13^  miles. 

In  a  vessel  coming  up  with  an  easterly  wind,  as  directed  in  page  21, 
and  having  made  the  Green  Island  light,  run  up  in  20  fathoms  until  she 
is  within  3  miles  of  it,  or  till  it  begins  to  bear  to  the  southward  of 
S.  250  W.  Then  haul  out  into  more  than  30  fathoms  and  run  up  in  the 
deep  water  till  the  light  bears  8.  640B.,  when  she  will  be  well  past  the 
reef,  and  may  continue  to  run  up,  coming  no'nearer  to  Green  Island 
than  25  fathoms  water,  in  order  to  avoid  its  western  reef. 

Abreast  the  west  end  of  Green  Island  Brandy  Pots  light  will  come 
in  sight,  and,  guided  by  the  bearing  of  the  light,  a  vessel  may,  if  de- 
sired, proceed  to  Brandy  Pot«  anchorage.  In  thick  weather,  haul  over 
to  the  northwestward,  toward  White  l8let,into9  orlO  fathoms,  and  run 
up  in  that  depth  till  Brandy  Pots  light  is  seen ;  do  not  come  to  the 
southward  into  deeper  water  for  fear  of  Barrett  Ledges. 

A  vessel  bound  up  the  river  southward  of  Barrett  Ledges  should  keep 
Green  Island  light  only  just  shut  in  behind  the  west  end  of  Green  Is- 
land, bearing  K  35°  B.,  sheering  to  the  northward  occasionally  to  sight 
it,  or  going  no  farther  to  the  southward  than  8  fathoms  until  sure  that 


VJiMRnSMEWtMiKaOWOMHttMM^feUlX^W 


''  X"  ^ 


mSF^ 


:rtiiig  over  to- 
open  of  Hare 
i  Reef  (Hare 
i;e  away  along 
ind  down  the 

)wn  the  river, 
li  a  northerly 
slet  Uoef,  and 
th  a  southerly 
p  well  to  the 
I  to  the  North 

can  be  seen, 
Bcient  guides, 
ider  the  north 
}ank  lightves- 
paas  eastward 
on  that  bear- 
the  bank,  and 
quickly  hove 
tod,  care  must 
jaiik. 

til  the  sound- 
ars  S.  480  W., 

Pass  it  in  20 

^ht,  and  when 

Brandy  Pots 

ed  in  page  21, 
loms  until  she 
southward  of 
run  up  in  the 
well  past  the 
Qreen  Island 

gbt  will  come 
lel  may,  if  de- 
bar, haul  over 
horns,  and  run 
t  come  to  the 

3S  should  keep 
I  of  Green  Is- 
onally  to  sight 
intil  sure  that 


v>IRECTI0N8 — NOKTH    CHANNEL. 


191 


Perc^e  Rocks  are  passed.  Green  Island  light  only  just  shut  in  behind, 
or  kept  only  just  in  sight  over  the  low  west  extreme  of  Green  Island, 
beiiring  N.  37°  K.,  will  lead  to  the  southward  of  Barrett  Ledges,  nearly 
in  mid-uhauuel  between  Middle  Bank  and  Pilgrim  IShoal.  Abreast  Bar- 
rett Ledges  Long  Pilgrim  light  will  come  in  sight. 

DirectionB  from  the  Brandy  Pots  to  the  Traverse.— Having 
crossed  the  Middle  Bunk,  and  deepened  the  water  to  the  southward 
into  8  fathoms,  steer  S.  35°  VV.  If  the  weather  be  clear,  Burnt  Island 
will  be  distinguished  from  Grande  Island  when  the  vessel  is  abreast  of 
Great  Pilgrim.  Open  the  north  side  of  Burnt  Island,  only  just  in  sight 
to  the  northward  of  Grande  Island,  and  keep  it  so  as  a  Uadiug  mark, 
should  the  buoy  not  be  in  its  place,  to  clear  the  western  part  of  Pilgrim 
Shoal.  When  past  that  shoal,  with  a  leading  wind  and  clear  weather, 
nothing  more  seems  requisite  than  to  pay  attention  to  the  soundings  in 
the  charts,  and  regulate  the  course  accordingly. 

In  Thick  Weather,  or  at  Night,  after  crossing  the  Middle  Bank  to 
the  southward,  as  before  directed,  either  one  side  of  the  channel  or  the 
other  should  be  taken  as  a  guide  for  running  up  by  the  lead,  say  in  7 
fathoms.  Either  side  may  be  taken  as  high  up  as  Long  Pilgrim  light- 
house, or  until  Kamourasca  light  is  in  sight,  after  which  the  south  side 
of  Hare  Island  Bank  should  in  thick  weather  be  followed  in  the  same 
depth  ;  for  the  western  part  of  the  Long  Pilgrim,  the  St.  Andrd  Bank, 
and  Kamourasca  Islands,  have  deep  water  close  to  them,  affording  no 
guidance  by  the  lead.  After  having  passed  th6  red  buoy  on  the  8W. 
end  of  Hare  Island  Bank,  agd  proceeded  5  or  6  miles  beyond  it,  Kam- 
ourasca Islands  will  have  been  passed,  and  the  edge  o/  the  South  Bank 
may  be  easily  followed  in  7  fathoms,  or  in  10  fathoms,  if  the  vessel  be 
of  large  draft,  up  to  St.  Anne  black  buoy. 

With  a  good  breeze  and  a  fair  sailing  vessel,  the  anchorage  off 
Kamourasca  will  be  gained  from  the  Brandy  Pots  in  one  tide;  if  not, 
there  is  goo<l  anchorage  and  easy  tides  all  along  the  southern  side  of 
Hare  Island  Bank,  as  well  as  off  its  SW.  end.'  A  vessel  with  a  good 
breeze  will  beat  from  Kamourasca  to  St.  Anne  buoy  with  one  good  tide ; 
but  not  always  in  neap  tides,  when  the  flood  is  weak  in  that  wide  and 
dear  part  of  the  river.  English  Bank  will  be  an  excellent  guide  to  a 
vessel  beating  at  night,  and  she  may  anchor  on  any  part  of  it  in  fine 
weather,  out  will  find  the  tides  becoming  strong  upon  it  in  proportion 
as  she  approaches  the  Traverse.  The  anchorage  all  along  the  south 
shore,  up  to  within  2  or  3  miles  of  the  light-vessel  at  the  Traverse,  is 
far  preferable.  For  directions  continued  through  the  Traverse,  see 
page  204. 

NORTH  SHORE,  BELOW  OOUDRES  ISLAND. 

Aspect. — ^The  northern  shore  of  the  St.  Lawrence  from  Saguenay 
Biver  to  Coudres  Island  is  bold  and  mountaintms.  The  granitic  hills  in 
most  parts  rise  Immediately  from  the  river,  forming  steep  or  precipitous 


t~t4H>4K!i«B.MiWHIClM 


L 


VJ2 


GREEN    ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


headlands.  Near  the  entrance  of  the  Saguenay  theMe  bills  are  not 
above  1,U00  feet  high,  but  tlioae  of  Eboulements  attain  an  elevation  of 
2,547  feet. 

At  page  182,  thecoast  of  the  estuary  was  described  up  to  Little  Berge- 
ron Oove.  We  shall  now  recommence  from  that  point,  and  proceed  with 
the  deNcription  to  the  westward. 

Vaches  Point  is  the  east  point  of  (entrance  of  Saguenay  River.  The 
high  clay  clitt's  are  easily  recognized,  and  are  known  by  the  name  of 
SagniMiay  Cliffs. 

Moulin  Baude  Anchorage. — From  this  anchorage,  in  7  fathoms, 
mud,  Saguenay  Cliffs  bear  8. 68°  W.,  distant  3  miles,  and  Red  Islet  and 
the  8VV.  end  of  Green  Island  are  in  line ;  the  vessel  will  here  be  800 
yards  distant  from  the  3fathom  line  of  soundings  and  nearly  a  mile 
offshore. 

Vaches  Patch.— Vaches  Reef  dries  out  ^  mile  from  Vaohes  Point, 
and  shallow  water  continues  nearly  to  Vaches  Patch,  which  has  a  depth 
of  24  fathoms,  and  bears  8.  77°  B.  IJ  miles  from  Vaches  Point.  A 
buoy  colored  red  and  black  horizontal  bands  is  moored  to  the  south- 
ward of  the  patch. 

Prince  Shoal  Is  a  narrow  ridge  of  stones  and  bowlders  with  17  feet 
least  water.  From  Prince  8hoal,  which  is  marked  by  a  red  and  black 
buoy  on  its  southern  edge,  Lark  Islet  lighthouse  bears  N.  88°  W., 
Lark  Patch  8.  35o  W.,  Red  Islet  lighthouse  8. 48°  E. 

Lark  Point,  the  southwestern  point  of  entrance  of  the  Saguenay,  is 
also  of  clay  cliffs,  but  much  lower  than  those  of  Vaohes  Point. 

Lark  lalet  lies  oft'  this  point  and  Is  joined  to  It  by  sand  and  bowlders 
dry  at  low  water. 

Lark  Reef  is  of  sand  and  bowlders,  dry  at  low  water  nearly  out  to 
the  edge  of  the  shoal  water,  which  extends  nearly  3^  miles  in  a  SB. 
direction  from  Lark  Point.  Lark  Patch,  near  the  southern  end  of  this 
reef,  never  covers,  and  outside  of  It,  In  4^  fathoms  water,  lies  a  blaok 
buoy.  Between  this  extensive  reef,  including  Bar  Reef  and  Prince 
Shoal  and  those  which  extend  If  miles  to  the  SE.  of  Vaches  Point,  Is 
the  entrance  of  Saguenay  River ;  but,  as  the  navigation  of  that  river  is 
quite  distinct  from  that  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  we  shall  reserve  it  for  the 
latter  part  of  the  chapter,  and  have  here  only  mentioned  the  extensive 
reefs  off  its  entrance  in  so  far  as  they  are  dangers  to  be  avoided  by  ves- 
sels bound  up  the  North  Channel  of  the  St.  Lawrence. 

The  Mark  for  leading  clear  to  the  SB.  of  all  these  reefs  is  the  Brandy 
Pots  just  open  east  of  White  Islet,  bearing  8. 15°  W.  The  least  water 
found  on  the  rocky  patches  was  7^  fathoms,  but  as  they  may  be  ex- 
tending to  the  eastward,  and  the  depth  over  them  be  decreasing  (as  has 
been  recently  found  to  be  the  case  with  the  Lark  and  Bar  Reefs  and  the 
outer  patch,  which  Is  now  Prince  Shoal),  the  Brandy  Pots  had  better 
be  kept  well  open  to  the  eastward  of  White  Islet,  by  vessels  desiring 
to  pass  outside  of  them. 


LARK    RKEF — MURRAY    BAY. 


193 


il'.s  are  not 
elevatiou  of 

[jlttle  Berge- 
iroceed  with 

River.    The 
the  name  of 

I  7  fathoms, 

ied  iHlet  and 

here  be  800 

learly  a  mile 

aohes  Point, 
1  has  a  depth 
es  Point.  A 
to  the  south- 

s  with  17  feet 
red  and  black 

9  N.  880  W., 

Saguenay,  i» 
Point, 
and  bowlders 

nearly  out  to 
illes  in  a  SE. 
rn  end  of  this 
',  lies  a  black 
»f  and  Prince 
ohes  Point,  is 
)f  that  river  is 
srve  it  for  the 
the  extensive 
roided  by  ves- 
ts the  Brandy 
le  least  water 
ey  may  be  ex- 
easing  (as  has 
ieefs  and  the 
ts  had  better 
ssels  desiring 


Oanard  River  Ih  h  Hiiiall  Htrcam,  celebrated  for  wild  dncks,  2^  miles 
SW.  of  Lark  Point,  and  can  only  be  approached  in  a  boat  near  high 
water. 

Bohafaud  Islet  is  a  small,  steep,  and  rocky  islet,  lying  otf  the  month 
of  a  cove  full  of  rocks  5  miles  SVV.  of  Lark  Point. 

Oape  Basque,  the  first  mountainous  headland  SW.  of  the  Saguenay, 
is  0^  miles  from  Lark  Point.  It  is  quite  bold,  having  20  fathoms  close 
to  it. 

Basque  Road,  between  Cape  Banqueand  Lark  Reef,  is  a  good  anchor- 
age, and  well  sheltered  by  the  reef.  There  is  plenty  of  room  for  many 
vessels,  but  the  best  bertli  is  with  Echafaud  Islet  bearing  N.  88 <3  VV., 
and  distant  rather  less  than  a  mile,  where  the  vessel  will  be  in  10  or  11 
fathoms,  with  clay  bottom,  and  at  the  distance  of  nearly  ^  mile  from 
the  3-fathoms  line.  Vessels  may  anchor  farther  out  in  13  fathoms;  but 
the  farther  out  the  stronger  the  tide.  At  the  anchorage  recommended 
the  tides  are  tiot  strong,  and  the  holding  ground  is  everywhere  good. 
There  is  no  anchorage  on  the  north  shore  to  the  SW.  of  this  before  we 
arrive  at  Murray  Bay,  a  distance  of  28  miles. 

Cape  Dogs,  ii^  miles  southward  of  Cape  Basque,  is  quite  bold,  high, 
precipitous,  and  bare  granite.  Halfway  between  these  capes  is  the 
Bay  of  Rocks,  having  an  island  and  many  large  rooks  in  it,  as  its  name 
implies,  and  affording  shelter  only  to  boats. 

Oape  Salmon  is  high  and  bold,  like  Cape  Dogs,  from  which  it  is 
distant  Oj  miles.  Between  these  capes  are  Shettle  Port,  Black  River, 
and  Port  Parsley.    They  are  merely  places  for  boatst 

Cape  d  I'AigleisS:^  milesSW.  from  Cape  Salmon,  and  of  the  same  bold, 
high,  and  precipitous  character.  The  bay  between  these  capes  affords 
no  anchorage  for  shipping,  in  consequence  of  the  great  depth  of  water. 
In  it  is  Port  3almon,  a  small  cove,  which  large  boats  can  enter  at  high, 
water,  situated  about  1^  miles  to  the  westward  of  Cape  Salmon.  The 
settlements  on  the  north  shore  spread  to  the  eastward  of  this  place, 
and  they  are  continuous  from  it  all  along  the  coast  to  Quebec. 

Murray  Bay  is  all  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  the  shallow  channels 
leading  to  the  river  at  its  head.  The  river,  flowing  down  a  valley  from 
two  or  three  small  lakes  among  the  hills,  Is  rapid  and  unnavigable. 
There  is  a  church  and  village  round  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  the  set- 
tlements extend  some  miles  back  from  the  St.  Lawrence.  There  are 
grist  and  saw  mills  on  the  river.  At  the  latter  deals  are  made,  and 
are,  for  the  most  part,  shipped  to  Quebec  in  small  schooners,  which  lie 
aground  near  or  in  the  entrance  of  the  river;  occasionally,  however, 
vessels  anchor  oft',  and  take  in  cargoes  of  lumber.  A  pier  has  been  con- 
structed here,  having  18  feet  of  water  at  its  end  in  the  lowest  tides. 

Anchorage. — The  anchorage  off  Murray  Bay  is  close  under  the  high 

rocky  shore,  a  little  to  the  eastward  of  the  bay,  with  Pio  Point,  its  east 

point,  bearin  S.  83°  W.,  distant  about  800  yards.    The  bottom  is  of  clay, 

good  for  holding,  and  the  depth  10  or  12  fathoms  at  the  distance  of 

5489 13 


IV 


li)4 


ORKKN    ISLAND   TO    MONTREAL. 


alioiit  000  yanlN  from  tlio  nhore,  but  not  ubovu  \  mile  from  the  edffe  of 
tliu  hIioiU  w  it«r.  VenHi^lH  livru  will  bt^  out  of  tliu  Htr(Mi((tti  of  tlie  tides, 
welt  Hheltored  from  tlio  prevailing;  windn,  and  in  Hiifuty  if  well  moor«Ml, 
altliouKh  inconveniently  near  tliu  nhore,  except  in  the  cane  of  a  veHHel 
taking;  in  her  ciirKo.  It  i>*  poft^iblu  to  anchor  a  little  farther  out  In  15 
or  10  fathoniH,  ttut  the  tideN  there  are  very  Htrong. 

OooM  Oape  is  bold  and  rocky,  an<l  about  11  mileM  Houth  of  IMc 
Point.  At  Mai  Ray  and  in  Little  Mai  Hay,  between  those  two  points 
the  shoals  dry  out  4  lulle  from  the  shore,  but  there  is  no'  good  an- 
chorage. 

Oape  Martin,  the  east  point  of  Bboulemonts  Kay,  is  3  miles  SW,  of 
Goose  Cape.  Nearly  halfway  between  these,  but  rather  nearer  (loose 
Ca|ie,  a  stream  descends  a  ravine,  and  otf  the  mouth  of  the  latter  there 
is' a  very  large  bowlder  stone  called  Orosse  Rouk.  A  landing  pier  has 
been  constructed  at  Bboulements  having  0^  feet  water  at  its  extreme 
end  in  the  lowest  tides. 

Anohorage. — The  anchorage  between  Goose  Oape  and  Cape  Martin 
is  good  and  well  sheltered  flrom  easterly  winds.  To  avoid  the  strong 
tides  anchor  in  7  fathoms,with  Grosse  Rook  bearing  N.  3P  W.,  and  Cape 
Corbeau,  the  east  point  of  St.  Pauls  Bay,  only  Just  shut  in  behind  Cape 
Martin,  bearing  8.  07°  W.  Here  a  vessel  will  have  good  holding 
ground  about  400  yards  firom  the  Sfatboms  edge  of  the  shoals.  Small 
vessels  anchor  farther  to  the  eastward,  close  in  under  Goose  Cape. 
Mount  Ebouleraents  is  about  3  miles  to  the  northward  of  that  anchor- 
age, and  one  of  the  highest  sammits  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  St. 
Lawrence,  being  2,547  feet  high. 

NORTH  OHANNBL,  BELOW  OOUDBES  ISLAND. 

Direotloiui. — If  with  a  strong  NW.  wind  a  vessel  has  kept  the  north 
shore  aboard  until  she  has  passed  Bergeron  Coves,  and  if  night  be  ap- 
proaching, and  the  flood  tide  nearly  done,  endeavor  to  reach  the  anchor- 
age 2  or  3  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Vaches  Point  (page  102),  and  re- 
main there  till  daylight.  Having  sufficient  daylight  to  take  the  vessel 
through  between  Red  Islet  and  the  shoals  off  the  Saguenay,  proceed  as 
follows: 

First,  with  the  ebb  tide,  keep  well  to  windward,  running  along  under 
the  north  laud  at  the  distance  of  a  mile  until  about  the  half  of  Cacouna 
is  open  to  the  westward  of  Red  Islet.  Then  steer  so  as  to  open  out  the 
western  extreme  of  the  Brandy  Pots  to  the  eastward  of  White  Islet, 
bearing  S.  15°  W.,  and  keep  them  so,  and  they  will  h-ad  clear  to  the 
southward  of  all  the  shoals  off  the  Saguenay.  But  that  leading  mark 
can  seldom  be  made  out ;  a  matter  of  less  consequence  than  formerly, 
since  buoys  have  been  placed  on  the  shoals  off  the  Sagaenay.  When 
the  lighthouse  on  Bed  Islet  and  Green  Island  come  in  one  the  vessel 
will  be  off  the  SB.  extreme  of  Lark  Beef,  and  should  not  be  in  less  than 
0  fathoms  at  low  water. 


NOKTII   CIIANNKL — TIDKM. 


195 


in  tlie  utltie  of 

(tt*  the  tiilt'M, 

well  mooiHMl, 

HH  of  a  veMHel 

her  out  \n  15 

»oiith  of  Tic 
n8e  two  poiiitH 
)  DO  good  aii- 

3  mllert  8W.  of 
r  nearer  GooHe 
he  latter  there 
tnding  pier  has 
at  its  extreme 

(I  Cape  Martin 
(roid  the  Mtrong 
P  W.,  and  Cape 
in  behind  Cape 
e  good  holding 
shoaln.  Small 
er  Goose  Cape, 
of  that  anchor- 
shore  of  the  ISt. 


lMD. 

«  kept  the  north 
a  if  night  be  ap- 
eaoh  the  anchor- 
age 192),  and  re- 

0  take  the  vessel 
leuay,  proceed  as 

uing  along  under 
e  half  of  Cacouna 
ts  to  open  out  the 

1  of  White  Islet, 
had  clear  to  the 
hat  leading  mark 
36  than  formerly, 
iagaenay.  When 
I  in  one  the  vessel 
lot  be  in  less  than 


Tlio  lead  hIiouM  Iw  k(>pt  Koiiig  with  r<'f«>ri>ii<!(«  to  the  HoundingH  in  the 
'liliurt;  and  wiiuii  the  Iioum«^m  at  TudtMicai;  (i|H>n  to  the  wostward  iil'  Laik 
iHlut,  the  vuHHcl  will  bu  otf  l\\v  I'lid  of  tin*  r»«>f,  in  tVoui  lA  to  L'O  futlioiiiM 
watiM',  and  may  thither  procut'd  to  tliti  iMirli(>ni{;u  m  |SHHl|lu^  Kotid  (|nige 
1U;{),  or  may  continue  her  courHe  up  thu  rivt'i,  l<i-eping  woll  iiutlcr  the 
north  sliore  with  theebl),  and  more  in  the  uiiiidlM  >  T  the  clianncl  with 
the  Hood  tide,  tlieru  being  nothing  in  the  n\  .ty  uutil  near  (Joiidrt'H  iHland. 

Secondly:  Coming  up,  and  having  paxNed  licrgoron  Cove  with  the 
Hood  tide,  it  is  not  nec(>MMary  to  keep  thu  nortlioru  uliore  quito  ho  close 
aboard.  Upun  the  half  of  Cacouna  to  thu  wcHtward  of  Ued  Ulct,  as  bit- 
fore  directed,  and  then  steer  ho  as  to  open  the  iiiandj'  Pots  to  the  Houth- 
ward  of  White  Islet,  about  the  breadth  of  the  latter,  and  bearing  S, 
IQo  W. 

Having  opened  the  Brandy  Pots  to  the  southward  of  White  Islet, 
kee|>  them  so  as  the  vessel  runs  towardrt  them  until  Green  Island  light- 
house is  well  open  to  thesouthwardof  Ued  Islet,  or  until  past  the  black 
buoy  on  Lark  Reef,  when  she  may  steer  directly  up  thu  middle  of 
the  channel  between  Hare  Island  and  the  north  shore.  In  the  event  of 
the  wind  and  tide  failing,  anchorage  will  be  found  on  llaru  Island  Bank, 
£!uglisli  Bank,  Murray  Bay,  and  to  thu  westward  of  Goose  Cape.  For 
directions  for  the  North  Channel  fromCoudres  to  Quebec,  «ee  page  213. 

Tides.— The  principal  stream  of  flood  ascends  along  the  northern  side 
of  the  estuary.  One  part  of  this  stream  sets  from  below  Bergeron  Cove 
towards  and  over  the  tail  of  Bed  LsletBank,  which  it  curves  round  to  the 
southward,  and  then  passes  into  the  North  Channel  between  Ued  Islet 
and  White  Islet  tieef.  At  the  same  time  an  inferior  stream  of  flood 
ascends  along  the  south  shore  close  outside  Bazades,  Basque,  Apple, 
and  Green  Islands ;  and  inside  of  them  also  after  the  shoals  are  covered. 
When  these  two  streams  of  flood  meet  the  last  of  the  ebb,  and  after- 
wards each  other,  between  Green  and  Bed  Islands,  they  cause  high 
breaking  ripplings.  Each  of  these  two  streams  of  flood  is  strongest 
□ear  its  own  side,  and  there  is  consequently  little  or  no  flood  in  mid- 
ohannel,  particularly  in  neap  tides  and  westerly  winds. 

To  the  westward  of  Cacouua  the  flooil  in  thesouth  channel  sets  fairly  up 
the  river  on  either  sideof  Barrett  Ledges,MiddleShoal,and  Middle  Bank; 
but  the  strongest  part  of  it  passes  up  the  deep  water  to  the  northward 
of  these  shoals,  between  them  and  Brandy  Pots  and  Hare  Island,  and 
at  the  rate  of  2^  or  3  knots  in  spring  tides.  On  arriving  at  Hare  Island 
Bank,  great  part  of  this  stream  passes  into  the  North  Channel  between 
that  bank  and  Hare  Island ;  the  rest  over  the  tail  of  the  bank  into 
the  South  Channel.  The  flood  sets  fairly  up  the  Sonth  Channel,  and 
between  the  Pilgrims  and  Hare  Island  Bank,  but  becomes  very  weak 
above  them,  especially  in  neap  tides,  until  we  arrive  as  high  as  Origneaux 
Point,  whence  it  gradually  increases  in  strength,  being  aided  by  a 
branch  of  the  northern  stream  from  between  English  and  Hare  Island 
.Banks,  antil  it  attains  its  full  rate  of  5  knots  in  the  Sonth  Traverse. 


1^ 


:> 


a 

!  i 


fi 


.11 


( 


I. 


196 


GREEN   ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


To  return  again  to  tlie  principal  stream  of  flood  ;  another  part  of  it 
passes  between  Hed  Islet  Bank  and  the  shoals  off  the  Saguenay,  whilst  a 
third  part  ascends  that  river  70  miles  to  the  rapids.  When  the  flood  flrst 
makes,  it  meets  the  ebb  down  the  channel  to  the  northward  of  Har& 
Island,  and  causes  a  tremendous  rippling,  extendi;<g  from  the  Lark  Beef 
to  Ked  Islet.  Above  that  islet,  the  stream  of  flood,  after  sweeping  round 
to  the  westward  past  Liocky  Bay,  pursues  a  tolerably  fair  course  up  the 
!North  Channel  as  high  as  Cape  h  I'Aigle,  off  which  it  divides ;  the 
southern  part  proceeding  to  the  southward  of  English  Bank,  on  its  way 
to  the  South  Traverse ;  whilst  the  northern  part  passes  between  English 
Bank  and  the  north  shore  up  to  Goose  Cape. 

Off'  Gooae  Cape  this  northern  part  of  the  stream  of  the  flood  again 
divides;  one,  the  lesser  and  weaker  part,  passing  to  the  southward  of 
Coudres,  throws  oft'  at  the  flrst  of  the  tide  branches  to  the  south,  which 
pass  over  the  western  part  of  English  Bank,  on  either  side  of  the  Mid- 
die  ground,  and  between  the  latter  and  the  shoals  eastward  of  the  Seal 
Keefs  into  the  South  Channel.  This  seems  to  arise  from  the  flood  being 
earlier  in  the  Il^orth  than  in  the  South  Channel,  and  hence  the  flrst  of 
the  flood  comes  from  the  north  at  the  Traverse  and  sets  for  about  an 
hour  on  the  shoals  of  St.  Anne  and  St.  Boque.  The  other  and  princi- 
pal part  passes  between  Coudres  Island  and  the  north  shore,  where  it 
attains  the  same  race  of  5  knots  in  spring  tides  as  in  the  South  Traverse. 
.  Little  need  be  added  respecting  the  ebb  tide  beyond  what  has  already 
been  said  in  the  coiir^e  of  this  chapter.  We  may,  however,  remark 
generally  that  the  direction  of  the  ebb  stream  is  always  nearly  the  con- 
trary to  that  of  the  flood,  excepting  between  Red  and  Green  Islands, 
and  to  the  eastward  of  the  former.  The  principal  part  of  the  ebb 
down  the  North  Channel,  being  turned  to  the  SE.  by  Lark  Beef, 
comes  through  between  White  Islet  Beef  and  Bed  Islet,  setting  over 
towards  the  east  end  of  Green  Island  at  the  rate  of  5  or  6  knots  in 
spring  tides.  The  ebb  out  of  the  Saguenay  Biver  is  equally  strong, 
and  sets  over  towards  the  east  end  of  Bed  Islet  bank,  whence,  curving 
to  the  eastward,  it  unites  with  the  St.  Lawrence  ebb,  from  which  it  can 
be  readily  distinguished  by  the  dark  color  of  its  water,  and  both  to- 
gether set  down  the  estuary,  as  has  been  explained  in  other  parts  of 
these  directions. 

Although  the  duration  both  of  the  rise  and  fall  of  the  tides  will  be 
found  in  the  table  at  page  218,  yet  it  may  be  useful  to  remark  here  that 
the  flood  and  ebb  are  less  unequal  in  duration  in  the  North  than  in  the 
South  Channel ;  and  that  in  both  channels  the  streams  of  flood  and  ebb 
upon  an  average  continue  three-quarters  and  one  hour,  respectively^ . 
after  it  is  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore. 

At  the  Brandy  Pots  the  flood  rises  5h.  50m.  and  the  ebb  falls  6b.  34m., 
so  that  the  ebb  by  the  shore  is  about  f  hour  longer  than  the  flood.  This 
inequality  of  the  tide  increases  hs  we  proceed  up  the  river;  thus  at  St^ 
Boque  Point,  opposite  the  South  Traverse,  the  flood  is  only  5b.  35m.. 


m 


*"^*"'"ii'' ' 


another  parfc  of  it 
Sagaeuay,  whilst  a 
i^heu  the  flood  flrst 
orthward  of  Har& 
roin  the  Lark  Eeef 
er  sweeping  round 
fair  course  up  the 
(h  it  divides;  the 
I  Bank,  ou  its  way 
s  between  English 

of  the  flood  again 
I  the  southward  of 
)  the  south,  which 
r  side  of  the  Mid- 
itward  of  the  Seal 
Dm  the  flood  being 
hence  the  flrst  of 
sets  for  about  an 
other  and  princi- 
th  shore,  where  it 
le  South  Traverse. 
1  what  has  already 
however,  remark 
ys  nearly  the  con- 
id  Green  Islands, 
part  of  the  ebb 
S.  by  Lark  Reef, 
Islet,  setting  over 
f  5  or  6  knots  in 
is  equally  strong, 
,  whence,  curving 
from  which  it  can 
Iter,  and  both  to- 
I  in  other  parts  of 

the  tides  will  be 
remark  here  that 
N^orth  than  in  the 
i  of  flood  and  ebb 
our,  respectively, 

3bb  falls  6b.  34m., 

n  the  flood.    This 

river ;  thus  at  St. 

is  only  6h.  35m^ 


80UTH  AND  NOKTH  CHANNELS. 


197 


and  the  ebb  6h.  50ui.  The  times  of  the  high  and  low  water  by  the  shore 
<io  not  seem  to  be  much  affected  by  winds;  but  the  amount  of  the 
rise  and  fall  of  the  tides  and  the  duration  of  the  streams  are  consider- 
ably affected  by  strong  winds;  nevertheless,  as  an  approximation  near 
enough  for  practical  purposes,  we  may  state  that  when  the  stream  of 
flood  makes  in  mid-channel  the  tide  has  risen  by  the  shore  at  the 
Brandy  Pots  IJ  feet  and  at  the  Traverse  2^  feet;  and  also  that  when 
the  stream  of  ebb  makes,  the  tide  has  fallen  about  2  feet  by  the  shore. 
But  as  it  is  of  importance  to  know  the  proportional  amount  of  the  rise 
and  fall  of  the  tides  for  any  part  of  their  whole  duration,  when  a  large 
ship  is  to  be  taken  over  certain  shallow  parts  of  the  river  above  the 
Traverse,  we  shall  have  occasion  to  notice  this  subject  again. 

The  vessel  has  now  arrived  at  the  most  diflacult  part  of  the  naviga- 
tion of  the  St.  Lawrence,  where  the  river  becomes  divided  into  three 
channels  by  shoals  and  islands.  The  eastern  entrances  of  all  three  of 
these  channels  are  rendered  more  or  less  difficult,  either  by  their  nar- 
rowness, the  want  of  good  anchorage  in  them,  or  by  the  strength  of  the 
tides. 

The  South  Channel  lies  along  the  southern  shore,  and  between  it 
and  the  shoals  and  islands  occupying  the  central  part  of  the  rivur  from 
the  South  Traverse  to  Quebec.  This  channel  is  the  one  generally  used ; 
it  is  buoyed,  and  is  preferable  to  the  others  for  the  general  purposes  of 
navigation,  having  excellent  anchorage  and  moderate  tides  in  every 
part,  excepting  for  a  few  miles  in  the  Traverse.  The  channel  between 
Beaujeu  Bank  and  Crane  Island  has  also  been  buoyed  for  the  use  of 
large  vessels,  for  not  more  than  17  feet  at  low  water  can  be  carried 
.through  to  the  southward  of  that  bank,  where  nearly  all  vessels  used 
formerly  to  pass. 

The  Middle  Channel  lies  between  the  shoals  and  islands  which 
form  the  northern  side  of  the  South  Channel  and  the  long  line  of  shoals 
and  reefs  which  extend  from  Coudres  Island  to  Beaux  Island.  In  one 
part  of  it,  near  the  eastern  entrance  of  the  Middle  Traverse,  there  are 
not  more  than  3  fathoms  at  low  water.  Having  passed  this  shallow 
part,  there  is  both  room  and  water  enough  for  the  vessels  of  the  largest 
draft,  until  they  arrive  at  the  group  of  islands  between  Crane  Island  and 
the  Isle  of  Orleans,  where  the  Middle  Channel  communicates  with  the 
^outh  Channel  by  various  narrow  passages  between  the  islands.  There 
is  plenty  of  water  in  most  of  these  passages  at  all  times,  but  the  tides 
set  strongly  through  them  and  they  are  too  intricate  and  difficult  for 
general  navigation.  The  other  and  better  channels  will  always  be  pre- 
ferred  for  general  use;  nevertheless,  the  Middle  Channel  ought  to  be 
known  to  the  pilots  in  common  with  every  other  channel  in  the  river. 

North  Channel  was  formerly  in  general  use,  but  it  is  now  little 
known  to  the  majority  of  the  pilots.  It  is  broader  than  South  Channel» 
but  the  tides  are  much  stronger,  and  the  narrovvs  at  its  western  end 
have  a  depth  of  only  24  feet  at  low  water;  while,  with  the  exception  of 


■.is 


mam 


K~ 


198 


OREEN    ISLAND   TO   MONTREAL. 


I  '.  ! 


il! 

-    J    * 

ill 


i  i 


if'   ! 


in  the  contracted  paHsage  westward  of  Beaujeu  Bank,  there  are  not  Ie8» 
than  28  feft  in  South  Channel. 

Starting  with  the  beginning  of  a  fair  tide,  a  steam-vessel  may,  how- 
ever, gain  an  hour  in  the  passage  from  Green  Island  to  Quebec  by 
taking  Nurtli  rather  than  South  Channel. 

The  anchorage  generally  in  North  Channel  is  not  good,  the  bottom 
being  foul  from  St.  Paul  Bay  westward  to  Cape  Maillard ;  also  because 
of  the  strength  of  the  tidal  streams.    Vessels  may,  however,  anchor  on 
the  northern  edge  of  the  bank,  southward  of  the  channel,  in  a  depth  of 
about  10  fathoms. 

Between  Condres  Island  and  the  northern  shore  of  the  river  there  ia 
anchorage  only  in  Prairie  and  St.  Paul  Bays,  both  of  which  afford 
security  under  all  conditions  of  wind  and  weather,  but  with  northerly 
winds  heavy  squalls  sweep  down  from  the  north  shore  hills. 

Orleans  Channel  has  a  good  passage  for  small  vessels,  but  is  not 
available  for  those  of  large  draft.  It  is  marke<l  by  red  buoys  on  the 
northern  side,  and  by  black  buoys  on  the  southern  side. 

SOUTH  CHANNEL,  THROUGH  THE  SOUTH  TBAYBBSE  TO  OBANE  ISLAND^ 

Sonth  Channel — ^The  southern  shore  of  the  river  St.  Lawrence,  Arom 
St  Koch  I*oint  tu  St.  Thomas  is  low  and  composed  of  slate ;  inland  it> 
rises  gradually  in  a  series  of  lidges  to  a  long  wooded  range,  which  i» 
4^  miles  distant  from  the  river,  and  attains  an  elevation  of  1,220  feet. 
The  houses  are  almost  continuous  on  this  shore,  with  villages  near  the 
churches.  Supplies  in  small  quantities  may  generally  be  obtained  at 
the  villages,  with  the  exception  of  coal. 

Chnrches. — ^The  churches  at  St  Jean,  St.  Eugene,  St.  Ignace,  St. 
Thomas,  and  Berthier  havt  each  one  spire ;  those  at  St  Boch  and 
I/Islet  have  each  two  spires. 

Piers.— The  pier  at  St  J?an  has  a  depth  of  3  feet  at  low  water  at 
its  outer  end;  at  L'Islet  the  pier  is  1,200  feet  long,  with  a  depth  of 
7  feet  at  low  water  close  xo  its  outer  end ;  a  wooden  firame  beacon^ 
painted  black,  stands  on  the  extremity  of  this  pier.  A  small  pier  haa 
been  erected  at  Anse  k  Giles,  3  j  miles  south  westward  from  L'Islet,  and 
another  1}  miles  soutliwestward  of  Cape  St  Ignace,  but  both  dry  at 
about  half  tide.  TLere  is  also  a  wharf  on  the  eastern  side  of  Cape  St. 
Ignace,  but  it  oiii  only  be  approached  at  or  near  high  water. 

Lifeboats  are  stationed  at  L'Islet  and  St  Ignace  to  rescue  the  crewa 
of  vrc^tsels  caught  in  the  ice  during  the  autumn. 

Railway  and  Telegraph. — St.  Jean,  Port  Joli,  I/Islet,  St.  Ignace,  and 
St  Thomas  are  connected  with  Quebec  and  Halifax  by  the  Intercolonial 
linilway,  which  runs  along  the  right  bank  of  the  St  Lawrence  about 
one  mile  inland  from  these  villages.  The  railway  stations  are  also  con- 
nected with  all  parts  of  Canada  and  the  United  States  by  telegraph. 

Trois  Sanmons  River,  nearly  4  miles  southward  of  St.  Jean,, 
has  a  large  saw  mill  near  its  mouth.    This  river,  also  the  stream  at 


■Hiili 


e  are  not  les» 

el  may,  bow- 
5  Quebec  by 

the  bottom 
also  because 
er,  anchor  on 
in  a  depth  of 

river  there  i* 
which  afford 
rith  northerly 
lis. 

els,  but  is  not 
buoys  on  th» 


IBANB  ISLAND. 

iawrence,  fcom 
ilate ;  inland  it 
*ange,  which  i» 
1  of  1,220  feet, 
llages  near  the 
be  obtained  at 

• 

St.  Ignace,  St. 
St.  Eoch  and 

at  low  water  at 
Nith  a  depth  of 
frame  beacon^ 
small  pier  ha» 
■om  Ulslet,  and 
>at  both  dry  at 
}ide  of  Cape  St. 
rater, 
'oscue  the  crews- 

,  St.  Ignace,  and 
he  Intercolonial 
Lawrence  about 
ms  are  also  con- 
by  telegraph, 
rd  of  St.  JeaUy 
so  the  stream  at 


.4k. 


L'lSLET — ST.    ROCII    SHOALS. 


199 


Port  Joli,  one  mile  northeastward,  will  admit  small  craft  at  about  half 
tide. 

L'Islet — A  conspicuous  cross  is  erected  on  a  cliff  59  feet  high,  situ- 
ated  one  mile  northeastward  of  L'Islet  church. 

The  telegraph  and  signal  station  at  L'Islut  is  distant  300  yards  north- 
eastward of  the  church,  and  close  westward  of  the  convent,  which  is  a 
square  stone  building  surmounted  by  a  turret. 

St  Ignace.-^The  church  is  6^  miles  south  westward  from  L'Islet,  and 
nearly  f  mile  southeastward  of  Cape  St.  Ignacp,  which  is  a  conical 
rocky  mound,  52  feet  high,  covered  with  small  bushes. 

St.  Thomas. — Two  rivers  unite  and'  discharge  their  waters  here, 
Bras  St.  Nicholas  flowing  from  the  eastward,  and  Bivi^re  du  Sud  from 
the  westward.  The  combined  streams  fall  in  a  cascade  about  30  feet 
high  to  a  small  bight,  ^  mile  eastward  of  the  church.  A  sawmill  is  in 
operation  on  the  eastern  side  of  the  falls.  St.  Thomas  church  is  situ- 
ated on  the  left  bank  of  Bivi^re  dn  Sud,  5^  miles  southwestward  from 
St.  Ignace. 

The  channel  from  St.  Thomas  to  the  Biver  St.  Lawrence  trends  north- 
easterly In  one  bend,  and  is  generally  marked  by  cask  buoys.  It  nearly 
dries  at  low  water. 

The  high-water  bank  near  St.  Thomas  has  receded  considerably  since 
the  survey  of  1827,  about  600  feet  apparently  having  been  washed 
away,  and  each  year  more  is  broken  away  by  ice  and  sea.  The  low- 
water  line,  however,  is  nearly  the  same  as  at  that  date,  except  that 
bowlders  are  now  visible,  at  low  water,  beyond  the  northeastern  extreme 
of  St.  Thomas  Bank. 

Shoals  of  St.  Roch  are  extremely  dangerous,  being  composed  of  a 
thin  covering  of  sand,  mud,  and  stones  over  a  slate  rock.  The  depth 
of  water  in  many  parts  of  these  shoals  does  not  exceed  9  or  10  feet. 

Tho  Narrows  are  less  than  ^  mile  wide,  and  the  depth  of  water 
through  is  from  5  to  14  fathoms.  The  ebb  tide  runs  at  the  springs  at 
the  rate  of  7  knots,  and  the  flood  5  or  6  knots ;  and,  as  the  ground  is 
hard,  there  is  no  anchorage  in  the  stream.  The  want  of  good  leading 
marks,  and  the  prevalence  of  strong  tides,  render  the  lightvessels  and 
buoys  indispensable  for  the  safety  of  large  vessels. 

St.  Roch  Shoals. — A  black  can  buoy  lies  in  28  feet  water  westward 
of  a  shoal  with  16  feet  water  over  it,  N.  46°  E.,  2^  miles  from  the  Lower 
Traverse  lightship.  The  first  black  buoy  southward  of  the  Upper 
Traverse  lightship  now  lies  outside  a  newly  discovered  rock  with  24 
feet  of  water  over  it.  with  St.  Boch  Church  bearing  N.  78°  E.,  and  St. 
Jean  Church  S.  7°  E. 

There  is  no  mark  for  leading  through  the  Narrows  ;  and  that  which 
leads  up  to  them  from  the  eastward,  viz,  Gape  Origneaux  and  the  high- 
land of  Kamourasca,  can  only  be  made  out  in  clear  weather.  The  west- 
em  leading  mark  given  in  the  old  directions,  that  is,  the  Wood  Pillar 
just  touching  the  south  point  of  Goose  Island,  must  never  be  trusted. 


I 


f 


200 


GREEN   ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


This  mark  will  not  lead  through  5  nud,  moreover,  Goose  Island  is  so 
distant  that  more  or  less  of  it  becomes  invisible  according  to  the  state 
of  tlie  weather  or  the  atmosphere.  On  the  weather-tide,  however,  the 
•channel  is  pretty  well  marked  out  by  the  rougher  or  breaking  sea  in 
the  deep  water,  as  compared  with  the  smoother  surface  over  the  shoals 
on  either  side. 

The  edge  of  the  South  Bank  above  the  Narrows  is  not  quite  so  steep 
or  shoal,  but  it  has  many  outlying  patches  of  from  2^  to  3  fathoms  off 
it,  which  render  it  difficult  to  run  a  vessel  of  large  draft  safely  along  it 
by  the  lead,  excepting  within  2  hours  on  either  side  of  the  time  of  high 
water  by  the  shore. 

Channel  Patch,  marked  by  a  bell  and  light  buoy  checkered  black  and 
white,  and  showing  an  intermittent  gas  light,  lies  directly  in  the  way  of 
vessels ;  from  the  patch,  Stone  Pillar  bears  S.  35°  W.,  distant  2^  miles, 
with  its  north  extreme  just  shutting  in  the  highest  part  of  Goone  Island 
Reef;  and  a  sugarloafshaped  beacon  near  St.  Jean  Port  Joli  Church 
is  just  open  eastward  of  the  church,  bearing  S.  60°  E.  This  buoy  alters 
its  position  about  200  yards  with  the  tides,  and  is  frequently  adrift. 
The  least  depth  that  could  be  found  on  Channel  Patch  in  1886  was  21 
feet,  although  three  examinations  were  made  of  the  locality  at  slack 
water;  probably  a  bowlder  has  been  carried  away  from  the  summit, as 
the  depth  recorded  in  1827  was  only  18  feet. 

Several  shoals  with  depths  of  15  to  18  feet  over  them  lie  between 
Stone  Pillar  and  Channel  Patch  ;  they  may  all  be  avoided  by  keeping 
the  highest  part  of  Goose  Island  Beef  just  open  southward  of  Stone 
Pillar,  bearing  8. 38°  W.  This  mark  must  only  be  kept  on  while  a 
vessel  is  southward  and  westward  of  Channel  Patch.  The  NB.  end  of 
Middle  Ground  is  marked  by  a  red  buoy,  from  which  the  steeple  of 
Notre  Dame  Church,  bearing  N.  39°  W.,  is  open  to  the  westward  of 
Cape  Martin.  On  the  shoals  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle  Ground 
there  is  as  little  as  1|  fathoms  water,  and  the  slate  rock  dries  in  patches 
more  than  3  miles  out  to  the  NE.  of  Seal  Islands.  The  outline  of  these 
shoals  is  extremely  irregular,  and  there  are  several  detached  shoals  to  the 
southward  of  them,  with  2  to  3  fathoms.  There  are  no  marks  for  leading 
clear  of  them,  and  the  soundings  are  too  irregular  to  be  a  sufficient  guide » 
hence  the  northern  side  of  the  Traverse  is  rendered  dangerous,  and 
shonld  not  be  made  too  free  with,  especially  in  a  vessel  of  large  draft. 

Seal  Islands  consist  of  a  long  reef  of  slate,  which  is  covered  at  high 
water,  with  the  exception  of  three  islets,  each  of  which  is  elevated  6 
feet  above  high  water.  There  are  three  houses  on  the  eastern  islet, 
with  a  cross  and  two  high  bushes  near  them  ;  on  the  western  islet  a 
conspicuous  spruce  tree  is  surrounded  by  low  bushes. 

Wood  Pillar,  which  is  81  feet  above  high-water  mark,  has  trees  upon 
it,  and  is  the  higher  and  steeper  of  the  two ;  it  is  marked  by  a  beacon 
in  the  form  of  a  sugarloaf,  with  a  cross  in  the  center,  but  being  par- 
tially  obscured  by  trees,  can  only  be  seen  from  a  short  distance. 


fj... 


HKlWMnMHI 


rimmWMWKB'! 


m 


fsluiHl  is  so 
to  the  state 
owever,  the 
iking  sea  in 
r  the  shoals 

lite  so  steep 
fathoms  off 
eiy  along  it 
iine  of  high 

d  black  and 
I  the  way  of 
nt  2\  miles, 
ooHe  Island 
Foli  Church 
buoy  alters 
intly  adrift. 
886  was  21 
ity  at  slack 
summit,  as 

ie  between 
by  keeping 
rd  of  Stone 
on  while  a 
NE.  end  of 
I  steeple  of 
estward  of 
die  Ground 
in  patches 
ine  of  these 
hoals  to  the 
for  leading 
tient  guide ; 
jerons,  and 
large  draft, 
red  at  high 
elevated  6 
stern  islet, 
kern  islet  a 

I  trees  upon 
y  a  beacon 
being  par- 
noe. 


CHANNEL    PATCH — GOOSE    ISLAND. 


201 


Stone  Pillar  lies  1\  miles  to  the  eastwanl  of  Wood  Pillar,  and  is 
quite  bare  of  trees.  Slioal  water  extends  from  it  a  mile  to  the  NE. 
There  is  a  half-tide  rock,  named  Middle  Rock,  marked  by  a  beacon,  be- 
tween the  Pillars,  and  a  passage  too  intricate  for  any  but  small  ves- 
sels. 

Algernon  or  South  Rock,  lying  S.  5'\°  E.,  \  mile  from  the  SE.  point 
of  tlie  Stone  Pillar,  is  of  slate  rock,  about  100  yards  in  diameter,  dry 
soou  after  half-ebb,  and  bold  all  round  except  to  the  NE.  The  highest 
part  of  Goose  Island  Reef  just  open  southward  of  South  Rock  light- 
house, bearing  S.  43°  W.,  leads  southward  of  these  shoals;  and  the 
whole  of  Crane  Island  well  open  southward  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  bear- 
ing S.  47P  W.,  leads  southward  of  South  Rock,  and  of  the  shoals  be- 
tween it  and  Goose  Island  Reef. 

Qoose  Island  Reef,  2  miles  southwestward  of  Stone  Pillar,  consists 
of  a  ledge  of  rock,  1§  miles  in  length,  trending  with  the  direction  of  the 
river.  Several  small  heads  are  visible  at  all  times  of  tide;,  the  high- 
est part,  a  rugged  conical  mound,  29  feet  high,  is  situated  near  the 
western  extreme  of  the  reef,  and  is  occasionally  surmounted  by  a  bea- 
con. An  isolated  rock,  which  dries  2  feet  at  low  water,  lies  nearly  J 
mile  N.  38°  E.  from  the  NE.  extreme  of  Goose  Island  Reef.  There 
are  five  shoal  spots  between  Stone  Pillar  and  Goose  Island  Reef,  with 
depths  of  16,  11,  12,  13,  and  18  feet  on  them,  and  bearing  S.  49°  W., 
distant  one  mile;  8.  52° W.,  IJ  miles;  S.  40°  W.,  1^  miles;  S.  38o 
W.,  1^  miles ;  and  S.  32°  W.  distant  IJ  miles,  respectively,  from  Stone 
Pillar  lighthouse.  Several  small  detached  rocks  lie  off  the  southeast- 
ern side  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  bnt  they  do  not  extend  more  than  200 
yards  from  it;  a  rock  with  a  depth  of  8  feet  is  situated  midway  be- 
tween the  southwestern  extreme  of  Goose  Island  Reef  and  Goose  Is- 
land. 

A  long  spit,  with  shoals  on  it  varying  in  depth  from  9  to  11  feet,  ex- 
tends for  a  distance  of  nearly  1^  miles,  from  the  southwestern  extreme 
of  Goose  Island  Reef.  Stone  Pillar  lighthouse  open  southward  of  the 
highest  part  of  that  reef,  bearing  N.  38°  E.,  leads  southward  of  this 
spit ;  and  the  deepest  water  in  the  channel  will  be  foand  by  passing 
about  800  yards  southeastward  of  Goose  Island  Reef,  and  the  above 
spit. 

Ooose  Island  is  composed  of  wooded  hilly  ground,  divided  by  a  val- 
ley into  north  and  sonth  ranges ;  near  the  south-western  extreme  are 
two  round  summits,  elevated  203  feet  above  high  water.  A  chain  of 
hillocks,  that  from  a  distance  appear  like  islands,  and  on  which  are 
several  oonspiouons  houses,  with  barns  near,  extends  southwestward 
from  the  northern  range.  From  an  elevation  of  168  feet,  the  northern 
range  falls  in  cliffy  banks,  and  at  its  northeastern  extreme  is  a  large 
white  barn,  which  is  very  conspicuous  from  all  northerly  directions.  A 
targe  sugarloaf  beacon,  painted  red,  stands  on  a  small  detached  islet 
«lo8e  southward  of  the  northeastern  extreme  of  Goose  Island. 


J 


202 


OREKK    ISLAND    TO    MONTREAL. 


The  meadows  of  Goose  Island,  extending  4J  miles  south  westward 
from  its  SW.  extreme,  connect  it  with  Oraue  Ishind;  the  meadows  are 
only  JHst  above  high  water  of  ordinary  spring  tides,  and  are  intersected 
by  numerous  streams,  that  have  cut  deep  channels  in  the  mud,  and 
are  impassable  between  half  flood  and  half  ebb.  After  the  harvest  the 
meadows  are  covered  with  haystacks,  which,  from  a  distance,  resemble 
small  houses  and  are  erected  on  framework  to  prevent  the  loss  that 
would  otherwise  be  occasioned  by  exceptionally  high  tides. 

Several  rocks  lie  oflf  the  southern  shore  of  Goose  Island,  all  of  which 
cover  at  high  water,  except  Rocher  aux  Grfilons  (formerly  miscalled 
Cbapel  Rock),  which  is  4  feet  above  high  water,  and  situated  on  the 
outer  edge  of  the  shore  that  dries  at  low  water;  and  Hospital  Rock^ 
which  is  10  feet  high.  Ohapel  Rock  is  on  the  meadows,  and  is  named 
from  a  church  which  formerly  stood  there,  the  foundations  of  which 
are  still  to  be  seen.  A  wooden  pyramidal  beacon,  painted  white,  aud 
about  30  feet  high,  stands  on  the  southern  shore  of  Goose  Island  mea- 
dows at  a  little  more  than  2  miles  westward  of  Hospital  Rock. 

Dtmscombe  Rook  has  14  feet  least  water,  with  5  fathoms  close  to. 
From  the  rock  Mount  Tourmente  appears  in  line  over  summit  of  Union 
Island,  bearing  S.  83°  W.,  aud  the  north  side  of  Wood  Pillar  touching 
the  south  side  of  Goose  Island. 

Crane  Island  rises  to  an  elevation  of  132  feet,  and  is  generally  flat 
in  outline.  The  lower  part  of  the  land  is  cultivated,  but  the  summit 
and  southwestern  slope  are  wooded.  Macpherson  House  and  the  barns 
near  are  conspicuous  objects  at  the  northeastern  extreme  of  the  island^ 
and  numerous  beacons  are  erected  on  the  southern  shore ;  on  the  north- 
ern side  there  is  an  almost  continuous  line  of  houses,  with  a  church 
built  of  bricks  and  surmounted  by  a  spire  in  the  middle  of  them  This 
church  can  rarely  be  seen  from  South  Ohannel. 

Prohibited  Anchorage.— On  Crane  Island,  about  ^  mile  SW.  of 
Macphersor  s  house,  two  white  sugar-loaf  beacons,  bearing  NB.  and 
SW.  of  each  other,  and  two  white  sugar-loaf  beacons  oa  a  similar  bear- 
ing,  situated  about  J  mile  NE.  of  the  same  house,  mark  a  space  within 
which  no  ships  are  allowed  to  anchor,  as  the  entrances  to  the  channels 
north  and  south  of  Beauieu  bank  are  here  much  contracted.  Between 
these  beacons,  two  diamond-shaped  beacons  have  been  erected,  which  in 
line  led  to  the  white  buoy  previously  moored  at  the  southwestern  end 
of  the  Beaujen  Bank. 

Beaiqeu  Bank  is  a  narrow  shoal  of  sand  and  gravel  over  slate,  and 
has  not  more  than  10  feet  at  low  water  over  some  parts  of  it.  Its  west 
end  ap|>roaches  to  within  J  mile  of  Crane  Island. 

Light  Bnoys.— The  northeastern  extreme  of  Beaujeu  Bank  is  marked 
by  a  light  buoy  painted  red  and  black  in  horizontal  stripes,  and  show- 
ing a  pink  light,  moored  with  LTslet  Church,  bearing  N.  70°  E.,  dis- 
tant 4  miles,  and  St.  Ignace  Church  S.  4°  E ;  and  the  southwestern  ex- 
treme by  a  light-buoy  painted  white,  and  showing  an  intermittent  gas 


iSM 


.iW 


I 


ith  westward 
ueailowei  are 
e  intersected 
le  mud,  and 
harvest  tlie 
ice,  resemble 
he  loss  that 

• 

all  of  which 

ly  miscalled 

nated  on  the 

9si)ital  liock^ 

nd  is  named 

[>n8  of  which 

d  white,  and 

Island  m(>a- 

ock. 

oms  close  to. 
mit  of  Union 
liar  touching 

generally  flat 
t  the  summit 
ind  the  barns 
>f  the  island^ 
on  the  uorth- 
irith  a  church 
>f  them    This 

milt  SW.  of 
ing  NE.  and 
similar  bear- 
space  within 
the  channels 
id.  Between 
ted,  which  in 
ti  western  end 

er  slate,  and 
it.    Its  west 

nk  is  marked 
3s,  and  show- 
70°  E.,  dis. 
h  western  ex- 
irmittent  gas 


BEAUJEU    BANK   CHANNELS. 


203 


light,  moored  with  Crane  Island  light-house,  bearing  S.  41°  W.,  dis* 
tant  2  miles,  and  St.  Ignace  Church  S.  49°  E.,  B'ly. 

Buoys. — A  buoy  paiuted  red  is  moored  in  24  feet  on  the  northern 
side  of  Beaujeu  Channel,  nearly  a  mile  westward  of  the  light  buoy  at 
the  uortheastera  extreme  of  Beaujeu  Bank,  and  another  buoy  painted 
red  is  moored  in  the  same  depth  200  yards  westward  of  the  light  buoy 
at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  that  bank,  and  on  the  western  side  of 
the  narrow  channel  westward  of  Beaujeu  Bank. 

Channel  South  of  Beai^en  Bank. — The  depth  in  this  channel  is 
irregular,  varying  from  5  to  3  fathoms,  and  there  is  one  rocky  patch  of 
17  feet  in  the  way,  and  difficult  to  avoid,'  so  that  the  latter  depth  is  all 
that  could  be  carried  through  there  without  buoys  at  low  spring  tides, 
unless  the  vessel  were  conducted  by  an  unusually  skillful  pilo|;,  in  which 
case  34  fathoms  might  be  reckoned  upon.  The  channel  is  ^  to  }  niil& 
wide. 

The  marks  for  passing  the  southern  edge  of  Beaujeu  Bank,  along  the 
eastern  half  of  its  length,  are  Stone  Pillar,  its  own  breadth  open  to  tb& 
southward  of  Goose  Island  Beef,  and  for  the  western  part  of  the  bank,. 
St.  Vallier  Point,  a  quarter  of  a  point  open  south  of  Crane  Island.  But 
these  marks,  from  their  grea.,  distance,  can  seldom  be  seen. 

Channel  North  of  Beaujeu  Bank. — ^This  channel,  which  is  |  to  ^ 
mile  wide,  has  from  4^  to  0  fathoms  water,  the  sboalest  and  narrowest 
part  being  near  the  western  end  of  the  bank.  The  marks  for  leading 
north  are  Stone  Pillar  lighthouse,  in  line  with  the  summit  of  Goose  Is- 
land Beef,  N.  3S°  E.,  which  leads  200  yards  southward  of  Dnnscombe 
Bock ;  the  best  water  to  dear  the  patches  off  the  SW.  end  of  the  bank 
is  on  a  line  N.  4°  E.  and  S.  4°  W.,  passing  close  west  of  the  gas  buoy.. 

Farther  westward  the  south  side  of  Crane  Island  is  so  bold  that  it 
may  b^  approached  to  the  distance  of  400  yards,  bat  the  channel  be- 
tween it  and  the  western  part  of  Soaih  Bank  is  narrowed  to  600  yards 
by  a  patch  of  2$  fatbouis  lying  S.  7°  E.,  1,200  yards  from  Crane  Island 
lighthonse.  This  patch  is  marked  on  its  eastern  side  by  a  black  buoy. 
Two  white  sugar-loaf  beacons,  situated  at  the  west  end  of  Crane  Island,, 
are  used  as  cross  marks  to  lay  this  buoy. 

Bank  of  St.  Thomas  extends  rather  more  than  2  miles  offshore  at 
the  village  of  St  Thomas.  It  consists  of  sand,  mud,  and  stones,  and  is 
dry  at  low  water  nearly  to  its  northern  edge,  which  is  very  steep,  and 
the  marks  for  leading  to  the  northward  of  it  are  Belle  Chasse  Island 
and  St.  Vallier  Point  touching.  This  mark  can  seldom  be  seen,  bat 
the  apparent  northern  extreme  of  the  range  of  hills  <m  the  southern 
shore,  just  open  southward  of  Crane  Island  lighthouse,  bearing  N.  52^ 
E.,  will  lead  northward  of  St.  Thomas  Bank  in  the  deepest  water.  A 
baoy  painted  black  marks  a  shoal  with  a  depth  of  16  feet  on  the  south- 
em  side  of  the  channel  abreast  Crane  Island  lighthouse. 

The  northern -edge  of  the  shoal  ground  off*  St.  Jean  is  distant  only  ^ 
mile  southeastward  of  Channel  Patch;  two  shoals,  with  depths  of  Id 


H 


yj 


;i 


i 

1 


■I  I 

ii 


f-   : 


f\  ;■ 


if  jt 


■  u 


'  i-   ' ! 


■M  W 


204 


GREEN    ISLAND   TO    MONTREAL. 


foot,  and  8  fatiiums,  300  yiirds  NW.  from  them,  liaving  been  found  tn 
that  imsition. 

Directions  for  Sonth  Traverse. — A  vessel  coming  np  the  river 
with  a  fair  wind,  and  having  arrived  off  8t.  Anne  Buoy,  in  from  7  to  10 
fatiioms,  shouhl  proceed  as  follows :  Traverse  lightvessel  will  bear  8. 
38°  W.  nearly  5  miles,  but  the  course  to  be  steered  will  vary  on  either 
side  of  that  bearing  according  to  the  tide.  The  first  of  the  flood  will 
«et  to  the  southward  towards  the  shoals  ot  St.  Koch,  and  the  ebb  in 
the  contrary  direction ;  the  mariner  must  therefore  be  guided  by  the 
bearing  of  the  lightvessel,  but  more  especially  by  the  soundings  in  the 
■chart 

Keep  the  southern  side  of  the  chauuel  aboard,  but  do  not  go  into 
less  than  from  7  to  10  fathoms  water,  according  to  the  time  of  tide,  until 
up  to  Traverse  lightvessel,  lest  the  ship  get  into  the  shallow  inlet  in 
the  shoals  of  St.  Roch,  which  runs  in  to  the  southward  of  the  light- 
vessel.  In  passing  the  lightvessel,  steer  8.  41°  W.,  leaving  her  to  the 
southward,  at  a  short  distance.  Run  past  her  about  J  mile,  and  then 
steer  so  as  to  pass  about  300  yards  northward  of  Upper  Traverse  light- 
vessel,  whence  the  course  to  Stone  Pillar  is  S.  24°  W.  But  here,  too, 
the  course  alone  must  not  be  trusted,  for  there  is  no  calculating  exactly 
the  set  of  the  tides.  Generally,  a  vessel  will  have  to  steer  a  little  to  the 
southward  of  8.  24°  W.  with  the  flood-tide  to  keep  along  the  edge  of  the 
South  Bank,  and  with  the  ebb  a  little  to  the  westward,  but  the  lead, 
buoys,  and  lightvessels  are  the  only  sure  guides. 

Having  passed  Upper  Traverse  lightvessel,  take  now  6  fathoms  at 
low  water,  or  a  depth  corresponding  to  it  at  other  times  of  the  tide,  as 
a  guide  along  the  edge  of  the  Sonth  Bank,  keeping  the  lightvessels  in 
line,  bearing  N.  27°  E.  until  past  the  black  buoy  on  the  S  W.  point  of  the 
49hoals  of  St.  Boch,  and  taking  care  not  to  cross  to  the  northward  of  the 
line  of  deep  water  (9  to  13  fathoms),  which  extends  southwestward  from 
the  Narrows  all  through  the  Traverse.  The  patches  oflf  St.  Jean  Church 
will  be  avoided  by  passing  500  yards  to  the  northward  of  the  black 
buoy  on  them,  or  by  not  going  to  the  southward  into  less  water  than  has 
been  directed,  if  the  buoy  can  not  be  seen.  If  the  cheokertsd  black  and 
white  buoy  on  the  Ohannel  Patch  can  be  seen,  pass  200  yards  to  the 
southward  of  it;  if  not  seen,  run  along  the  edge  of  the  Sonth  Bank,  in 
the  depth  before  directed,  nntil  St.  Jean  Ohurch  bears  S.  40^  B. ;  then 
open  the  sonth  side  of  Goose  Island  Reef  only  jnst  8n£Bcit>ntly  to  be 
4seen  nearly  in  line  with  the  sonth  side  of  Stone  Pillar  and  run  npon  that 
leading  mark  until  St.  Jean  Ohurch  bears  S.  56°  E.,  when  the  vessel  will 
be  about  300  yards  to  -the  southward  of  Channel  Patch,  and  should 
sheer  again  to  the  southward  and  follow  the  edge  of  the  Sonth  Bank 
in  the  same  depth  as  before,  remembering  that  the  mark  tbr  clearing 
Algernon  Rock  is  the  whole  of  Crane  Island,  well  open  southward  of 
Goose  Island  Eeaf,  8. 46°  W.  When  the  lighthouse  on  the  Stone  Pillar 
bears  N.  41°  W.  Algernon  rock  will  have  been  passed. 


)en  found  fa 

ip  the  river 
from  7  to  10 
will  bear  8. 
iry  on  either 
he  flood  will 
1  the  ebb  in 
aided  by  the 
idings  ia  the 

oot  go  ioto 
of  tide,  until 
dlow  inlet  in 
9f  the  light- 
g  her  to  the 
le,  and  then 
averse  light- 
nt  here,  too, 
iting  exactly 
a  little  to  the 
e  edge  of  the 
at  the  lead, 

(  fathoms  at 
F  the  tide,  as 
j^htvessels  in 
point  of  the 
iward  of  the 
tstward  from 
Jean  Church 
}fthe  black 
bt«r  than  has 
3d  black  and 
yards  to  the 
nth  Bank,  iu 
bOo  E.;  then 
cit>ntly  to  be 
ua  upon  that 
le  vessel  will 
,  and  should 

South  Bank 
tor  clearing 
louthward  of 

Stone  Pillar 


SOUTH   TRAVERSE — DIRECTIONS — ANCHORAGE. 


205 


Vessels  should  not  proceed  northward  of  Channel  Patch,  several 
shoals  having  been  found  between  it  and  Stunt;  Pilliir  Lighthouse. 

To  pass  south  of  Beat^eu  Bank  iiroceed  an  follows,  remembering 
that  there  is  not  more  than  17  feet  at  low  water.  Ah  hoou  an  the  ves- 
sel is  1^  or  2  miles  past  Goose  Island  Ueef,  steer  so  as  to  bring  Stone 
Pillar  (distinguished  by  its  lighthousef  its  own  breadth  open  to  the 
•southward  of  (loose  Island  Keef,  bearing  N.  32°  K,  Kun  from  those 
marks,  steering  about  S.  32°  W.,  or  so  as  to  keep  them  open  as  just  de- 
scribed, and  they  will  lead  400  yards  to  the  southward  of  the  NE.  (red 
and  black  horizontal  stripes)  buoy  of  Beaujeu  Bank ;  continue  the  same 
course,  and  when  St.  Vallier  Point  opens  to  the  southward  of  Crane 
Island  about  a  quarter  of  a  point,  bearing  S.  52°  W.,  haul  up  for  St. 
Vallier  Point,  which  will  lead  about  800  yards  to  the  soutliward  of  the 
buoy  (white)  of  Beaujeu  Bank.  Then  keep  away  to  the  southward,  and 
run  along  the  southern  shore  of  Crane  Island,  so  as  to  pasH  northward 
of  the  black  buoy  on  the  patch  lying  1,200  yards  from  Crane  Island 
Lighthouse,  or  in  from  7  to  10  fathoms  water,  according  to  the  time  of 
tide. 

To  pass  Northward  of  Beaiqeu  Bank. — When  Hospital  Bock  bears 
N.  52°  VV.,  bring  Stone  Pillap  Lighthouse  just  open  southward  of  the 
southern  extreme  of  the  highest  part  of  Goose  Island  lieef,  bearing  N 
38°  E.;  leading  between  the  light  buoy  at  the  northeastern  end  of 
Beaujeu  Bank  and  the  red  buoy  otf  Goose  Island,  also  close  to  the 
white  light  buoy  marking  the  southwestern  end  of  Beaujeu  Bank. 
Leave  the  white  light  buoy  on  the  port  hand,  steer  through  S.  4°  E., 
between  that  buoy  and  the  red  buoy  to  the  westward,  which  will  lead 
in  the  best  water  27  feet.  When  Channel  Bock  is  visible  the  beacon 
should  be  its  own  height  open  eastward  of  the  rock,  when  tifis  leading 
mark  is  on. 

Anchorite  in  South  Traverse. — Vessels  may  anchor  off  the  shoals 
of  St.  Anne  in  6  fathoms  low  water  up  to  within  a  mile  or  two  of  the 
light  vessel.  The  ground  is  better,  aad  there  is  less  tide  thao  on  the 
tail  of  the  Middle  Ground ;  but  the  latter  is  the  better  position  for 
weighing  with  the  first  of  the  flood  in  aortherly  winds.  Vessels  do 
occasionally  anchor  for  a  tide,  in  fine  weather,  on  the  edge  of  the  bank 
of  St.  Boch,  between  the  two  lightvessels ;  bat  this  can  not  be  recom- 
mended, for  the  ebb  tide  runs  there  at  the  rate  of  6^  knots,  and  the 
ground  is  not  to  be  depended  on ;  hence,  if  the  anchor  once  started,  it 
would  be  diificnlt  to  bring  up  again,  and  there  would  be  great  danger 
of  losing  the  anchor.  Should  the  wind  begin  to  fail,  or  the  flood  be 
done,  it  would  be  better  to  run  down  below  Traverse  lightvessel,  if  an 
anchorage  2  or  3  miles  above  Upper  Traverae  lightvessel  can  not  be 
gained. 

Vessels  often  anchor  off  the  black  buoy  on  the  SW.  point  of  St.  Boch 
Shoal  in  6  or  7  fathoms  in  good  groand,  but  the  anchorage  is  not  reck- 
oned very  good  until  arriving  above  St.  Jean  Ghurch.    All  along  the 


206 


OREEN    ISLAND   TO    MONTREAL. 


oil^e  of  the  Houth  bftiik,  from  oppoMite  the  Pillars  to  Crane  ImIhikI,  tiie 
lioldiiiR  Kroniul  is  n  Htitf  clay,  and  ho  good  that  it  Ih  soinetimes  difHoalt 
to  weigh  an  anchor.  Oft'  Crane  Island,  a  mile  above  Beai^jeu  Bank  in 
(*  or  7  fathoms  of  low  water,  there  Ih  excellent  anchorage  in  westerly 
winds ;  and  under  the  west  end  of  the  island,  in  5  fathoms,  there  is 
equally  good  anchorage  with  t^o  winds  from  eastwanl.  Vessels  bound 
4I0W11,  and  meeting  a  strong  easterly  wind  anywhere  above  the  light- 
vessel,  had  better  run  back  to  the  anchorage. 

Tides.— The  flood  begins  much  earlier  in  the  North  Channel  than  in 
the  South,  and  the  first  of  the  stream  therefore  comes  from  the  north- 
ward, setting  at  first  about  south  upon  the  shoals  of  St.  Anno  and  St. 
Roch,  but  inclining  gradually  more  to  the  westward,  until  at  a  quarter- 
flood  it  sets  fair  to  the  SW.  between  the  buoys  of  the  South  Traverse. 
After  half-flood  it  sets  SW.,  and  towvrds  the  end  of  the  tide  still  more 
to  the  westward ;  perhaps  because,  the  time  of  high  water  being  some- 
what earlier  in  the  North  Channel,  the  water  has  begun  to  fall  before 
the  flood  has  quite  ceased  in  the  south. 

The  ebb  stream  sets  nearly  in  the  contrary  direction  to  the  flood,  as 
just  stated ;  the  first  of  the  ebb  setting  off  from  the  shoals  of  St.  Anne 
and  St.  Roch,  through  the  channels  to  the  westward  of  the  Middle 
Ground  and  over  the  tail  of  the  latter  to  the  northward. 

Above  the  Pillars  both  tides  set  fairly  up  and  down  the  river. 

In  the  Narrows  of  the  South  Traverse  the  rat«  of  the  ebb  is  from  6 
to  7  knots,  and  that  of  the  flood  from  5  to  6  knots.  The  rates  of  the 
flood  and  ebb  tides  decrease  gradually  as  we  proceed  to  the  westward 
until  off  the  Pillars ;  the  ebb  stream,  southward  of  the  Pillnrn,  attains 
a  velocity  of  ri|  knots  per  hour  at  spring  tides;  and  of  4^  \  tot»  past 
Channel  Patch. 


I 


SOUTH  OHAJYNBL,  ABOVE  OBANK  ISLAND. 


SOUTH  8B0RB,   FROM  ST.  THOMAS  TO  LBVIS  POINT. 


I    I 


St  Thomas  Point  is  low  and  lies  3  miles  west  of  the  entrance  of  the 
Riviere  du  Sud,  and  the  church  and  village  of  St.  Thomas  on  its  west 
bank. 

Wye  Rook,  with  a  depth  of  one  foot  over  it  at  low  water,  is  about 
400  yards  long  in  the  direction  of  the  river,  and  100  yards  broad ;  it  is 
separated  from  St.  Thomas  Bank  by  a  channel  fiearly  ^  mile  wide,  but, 
with  dopths  greater  than  3  fathotns,  only  2U0  yards  wide. 

A  buoy,  painted  black,  is  moored  in  6}  fathoms  northwestward  of 
Wye  Book ;  from  this  buoy  St.  Thomas  Point  bears  S.  18^  E.  distant  f 
mile. 

The  mark  for  leading  northward  of  St.  Thomas  Bank  also  leads  in  the 
deepest  water  in  South  Channel,  northward  of  Wye  Rook ;  the  chapel 
near  the  summit  of  Cape  Tonrmento  in  line  with  the  flagstaff  on  Grosse 
Island,  bearing  N.  3^  W.,  leads  eastward  of  Wye  I»ook  in  16  feet  water ; 


•'•-.■swamMiiin 


»-T' 


jk 


UKLLE   CHASSE    ISLAND — BEAUMONT    SHOALS. 


207 


ne  IhIaikI,  the 
times  (littlcalt 
Mtjeu  Utink  in 
{e  iu  westerly 
liom8,  there  is 
V^ easels  boand 
ove  the  light- 

lannel  than  in 
am  the  north- 
Anne  and  St. 
1  at  a  quarter- 
rath  Traverse, 
tide  still  more 
)r  being  some- 
t  to  fall  before 

;o  the  flood,  as 
klsof  St.  Anne 
of  the  Middle 

B  river. 

i  ebb  is  Arom  6 
tie  rates  of  the 
>  the  westward 
Pillf^rDl,  attains 
:  4^  k  /ots  past 


entrance  of  the 
las  on  its  west 

ivater,  is  about 
ds  broad ;  it  is 
mile  wide,  bnt, 

B. 

irthwestward  of 
[SO  E.  distant  f 

il'so  leads  in  the 
>ck;  the  chapel 
[Staff  on  Oiosse 
n  16  feet  water; 


and  the  same  cliapel,  iii  line  with  the  weHtern  wharf  on  Orosse  Isle, 
bearing  N.  S-lo  W.,  Iea4l8  westward  of  tiiat  rock.  The  Seminuire  In  now 
rarely  visible  ft-om  South  Channel,  except  wlieii  the  sun  is  MliiniiiK  on  it. 
Belle  ChMse  Island,  of  higli,  steep,  and  btire  graywuckd  rocks,  it* 
600  yards  long,  parallel  to  the  shore,  from  which  it  is  distant  more  than 
i  mile.  The  west  point  of  the  Island  bears  S.  83°  w.  one  mile  from 
Berthier  Church,  and  not  more  than  2^  fathoms  water  can  be  carried 
through  between  the  island  and  the  niaui. 

Northward  of  the  center  of  the  Island  and  200  yards  distant  lies  a 
small  rock  nearly  dry  at  liw  water  and  with  from  4  to  0  fathoms  be- 
tween it  and  the  island.  Within  the  island  to  the  8W.  is  a  shallow 
bay  and  the  river  Belle  Chasse. 

Trou  de  Berthier.— The  church  at  Berthier  has  a  single  spire,  and 
is  situated  about  i  mile  southward  of  Tron  de  Berthier;  which  latter 
has  a  wharf  at  its  eastern  entrance  point,  with  a  depth  of  14  feet  close 
to  Its  end  at  low  water.  The  former  site  of  the  church  at  this  place  is 
now  occupied  by  a  large  house  with  a  flagstaff  near  it. 

Rooke.— Two  rocks,  with  depths  of  one  foot  and  6  feet  over  them, 
are  situated  800  yards  oflfshore  between  Berthier  East  point  and  Ber- 
thier wharf.  These  rocks  are  heads  of  a  narrow  ledge  with  depths  of 
9  to  17  feet  over  it,  running  parallel  to  the  shore,  and  with  its  north- 
eastern extreme  bearing  N.  49°  B.,  distant  i  mile  from  the  above  one 
foot  rock.  Belle  Chasse  light,  kept  bearing  southward  of  S.  56o  W., 
leads  northward  of  all  the  above  shoal  water. 

St.  ITallier  Point  is  higher  than  any  other  point  below  it  on  the 
south  shore,  above  the  Traverse.  The  church  and  village  of  St.  Val- 
uer are  on  the  shore  of  the  shoal  bay,  between  St.  Michel  and  St.  Val- 
uer Points ;  and  2  miles  SW.  from  the  extremity  of  the  latter.  A  stone 
mill  will  be  seen  on  the  ridge  in  rear  of  the  church,  and  the  small  river 
Boyer  enters  the  bay  IJ  miles  to  the  westward  of  St.  Vallier. 

St  Michel  Point  is  very  low.  Beefs  of  slate,  dry  at  low  water,  ex- 
tend a  considerable  distance  to  the  northward  from  this  point. 

Bank  of  St.  Vallier  fills  the  whole  bay  between  St.  Vallier  and  St. 
Michel  Points,  and  extends  nearly  f  of  a  mile  to  the  NE.  from  St. 
Michel  Point.  The  eastern  leading  marks  for  clearing  this  bank  are, 
Berthier  East  Point,  just  open  to  the  southward  of  Belle  Chasse  Island, 
and  the  lead  also  gives  sufficient  warning.  The  western  leading  marks 
are,  Beaumont  Church,  just  open  to  the  northward  of  Durantaye  Point. 
The  village  and  church  of  St.  Michel  stand  on  the  shore  of  the  bay 
nearly  2  miles  SW.  of  the  point  of  the  same  name.  At  Durantaye 
Point,  a  mile  to  the  westward  of  the  church,  the  shoal  water  extends  200 
yards  oft  shore. 

Beaumont  Shoals  are  rocky,  and  dry  in  part  at  low  water;  and 
their  northern  edge  is  steep,  with  deep  water  close  to  it.  The  warning 
by  the  lead  is  ipsuffident  in  a  vessel  going  fast,  and  therefore  these 
shoals  should  be  approached  with  great  caution.    A  black  buoy  is 


i  :'l 


!  lig 


mmm'"^ 


-.iB.iLt..iiuaLij.u 


208 


OKEKN    ISLAND    TO    MONTRKAL. 


iiio<u-e<l  tictir  the  NB.  extremity  of  thette  hUouIh  in  (  ftithoniH  of  wnter, 
witli  8U  Lttureut  Oliuroli,  bourliiK  N.  24°  W.,  and  tlieeburuli  on  Levl» 
Point  juHt  oi»en  to  tli«  nortliwanl  of  iMartinit>ro  I'oiiit. 

Iteauiiiout  Cliuruli  and  Iteaumont  Mill  are  Hitiiated  />  milex  8VV.  of 
St.  Micliel.  Tlj«  cliurul!  staiulH  on  tlie  liigli  and  Mteep  lianks  of  the 
river,  whieh  extend  several  niileu  on  either  Hide  of  it,  and  the  millH  low 
down  at  the  foot  of  the  liank.  lioyn  Mill,  wh«^re  there  Ih  a  waterfall, 
also  stands  low  down,  near  the  water's  edge,  and  a  mile  to  the  westward 
of  Hoauinont  Mill. 

Levis  Point.— St.  Joseph  Church,  on  Levis  Point,  bears  H.  80°  VV.^ 
and  is  disumt  0^  miles  from  Ueauiuout  (Jhurch,  and  the  sh«ial  water 
nowhere  extends  above  \  mile  from  the  shore  between  Levis  Point  and 
Koys  Mill. 

Levis  Reef  extends  360  yards  offshore  to  the  northward,  and  should 
not  be  api>roauhed  nearer  than  W  fathoms  water  from  between  the  north 
and  west,  or  7  fathoms  from  between  the  north  and  east.  Oi»  the  NW. 
extreme  of  this  reef,  St.  Joseph  Ohuruh  is  in  lino  with  the  eastern  side 
of  a  small  rocky  mound  near  the  water's  edge,  bearing  about  .50°  B., 
and  Pavilion  and  St.  Pierre  Points,  on  the  NW.  side  of  Orleans  Isle, 
are  in  one. 

I8LANU8  AND  8HOAt,8  VORMINa   1T8  NOKTUKKN   81DE8. 

The  Islands  in  order  westward  of  Crane  Inland  are,  Haystaek,  Mill^ 
Race,  Margaret,  Cliff,  and  Grosse  Islands.  All  these  islands  are  of 
grey  wack^  rock,  more  or  less  st  ei>,  partially  wooded.  The  highest 
is  Orosse  Isle,  which  is  elevated  214  feet  above  high  water. 

To  the  westward  of  Grosse  Isle  are  Keaux  and  Madame  Islands,  of 
slate  rock,  low,  wooded,  and  connected  by  reefs  of  slate  nearly  dry  at  low- 
water.  The  8W.  point  of  Madame  Island  is  nearly  1 1  miles  from  Crane 
Island,  and  opposite  Belle  Chasse  Island,  from  which  it  is  distant  24 
miles.  Extending  from  almost  all  these  islands  there  are  reefs  of  slate 
rook,  thinly  covered  with  sand  and  mud,  and  bounding  the  South 
Channel  on  its  northern  side  for  nearly  14  miles  to  the  westward  of 
Crane  Island. 

Crane  Island  Spit  has  5  feet  water  over  the  shallowest  part,  and 
extends  S.  58°  W.,  with  less  depths  than  18  feet,  to  a  distance  of  1| 
miles  from  Pointe  aux  Pins.  The  western  extreme  of  this  spit  is  marked 
by  a  red  buoy,  moored  with  two  beacons  on  the  southern  shore  of 
Orane  Island  in  line,  bearing  N.  65°  B.  The  eastern  of  these  beacons, 
painted  red,  is  situated  250  yards  westward  of  Crane  Island  Wharf ; 
and  the  western,  painted  white,  200  yards  further  westward.  These 
beacons,  in  line,  lead,  in  not  less  than  24  feet  water,  southward  of 
Crane  Island  Spit,  but  with  that  depth  only  as  far  westward  as  the 
above  red  buoy.  The  southern  extreme  of  Crow  Island,  in  line  with 
the  northern  extreme  of  Middle  Island,  bearing  N.  20°  E.,  leads  north- 
westward of  the  buoy  and  the  spit. 


TiMiHWaWll 


oiiiH  of  wiiter, 
urcli  oil  LtiviH 

inile>«  SVV.  of 
liuiikH  of  the 
tbe  luillH  low 
iti  a  waterfall, 
the  wuHtWiird 

its  8.  80O  VV., 
u  Mh«)iil  water 
ivi8  Point  and 

'd,  and  Hhoiild 
^een  the  north 
Oi»  theNW. 
e  eaHtorn  Hide 
(out  .SOofi., 
f  Orleans  Isle, 

8. 

aystack,  Mill^ 
viands  are  of 
The  highest 
er. 

me  Islands,  of 
trly  dry  at  low 
es  from  Crane 
t  is  distant  2^ 
i  reefs  of  slate 
ng  the  South 
e  westward  of 

est  part,  and 
listance  of  IJ 
spit  is  marked 
heru  shore  of 
these  beacons, 
sland  Wharf; 
tward.  These 
southward  of 
»tward  as  the 
1,  in  line  with 
3.,  leads  north- 


CRANE    ISLAND   SPIT — OROSSE    ISLE   PATCH. 


209 


A  bank,  having  several  sIiou'h  with  20  to  23  feot  water  on  them,  now 
Joins  Crane  Island  Spit  t^t  the  bank  extending  sonthwestward  from 
Margarets  Tail.  The  ebb  tide  sets  strongly  to  the  NK.  through  this 
channel  and  between  the  iNhuids  into  the  Middle  Traverse,  thus  caus- 
ing a  powerful  indraft,  widcli  should  be  guarded  against  in  lieating 
down  the  river,  especially  i  \  light  winds,  and  with  a  heavy  or  slow 
working  vessel. 

Murgarotii  Tail,  extending  a  mile  to  the  SW.  from  Margaret  and 
Cliff  Islands,  which  are  nearly  Joined  at  low  water,  is  a  dangerous  shoal, 
tbe  slate  being  awash  in  soaie  parts  of  it  in  low  tides.  A  lightbuoy, 
painted  yellow,  and  showing  a  Jixed  white  gaslight,  is  nioore<l  in  4| 
fathoms,  4(M)  yards  sonthwestward  of  a  20foot  patch,  at  its  southwest- 
ern extreme;  from  this  buoy  the  southwestern*  extreme  of  Margaret 
Island  bears  N.  24<>  B.,  distant  1  ^  miles,  and  the  western  extreme  of 
small  islet  southwestwani  of  Grosso  Isle  N.  (lOo  w.  Vessels  entering 
the  quarantine  ground  should  leave  this  lightbuoy  on  the  starboard 
band.  If  from  any  cause  this  buoy  is  removed  it  will  be  replaced  by  a 
red  can  buoy.  The  church  on  Crane  Island  in  line  with  the  southern 
extreme  of  Haystack  Island,  bearing  N.  02°  B.,  leads  southward  of 
Margarets  Tail  and  the  above  buoy,  but  in  a  least  depth  of  22  feet  only. 
The  northwestern  extreme  of  Two  Heads  Island  in  line  with  the  west- 
ern extreme  of  Cliff  Island,  bearing  N.  21°  B.,  leads  westward  of  Mar* 
garets  Tail,  and  between  it  and  Grosse  Isle  Patch. 

Gkrosse  Isle  Patch  is  a  narrow  rooky  shoal,  t,200  yards  long  in  a 
SW.  direction,  and  with  7  feet  least  water;  it  lies  to  the  west  of  Mar- 
garets Tail,  and  the  channel  between  them  is  i  mile  wide  and  carries  a 
depth  of  5  fathoms.  A  buoy,  painted  black  and  white,  in  vertical 
stripes,  marks  the  northeastern  end  of  the  Patch. 

Tbe  rook  southward  of  Grosse  Isle,  and  lying  NW.,  distant  nearly 
600  yards  f)rom  the  above  buoy,  is  marked  by  a  buoy,  painted  black  and 
white  in  vertical  stripes. 

A  Rock  with  15  feet  water  over  it  lies)  westward  of  Grosse  Isle 
Patch,  and  with  the  outer  end  of  Grosse  Isle  West  Wharf  bearing  N. 
16°  B.,  distant  1,200  yards.  The  new  Bpiscopal  church  at  Grosse  Tsle 
in  line  with  tbe  inner  end  of  the  West  Wharf,  bearing  north,  leads  in 
3}  fathoms  between  this  rock  and  the  western  extreme  of  Grosse  Isle 
Patch ;  and  the  summit  of  Margarat  Island  in  line  with  the  northern 
extreme  of  Cliff  Island,  bearing  S.  54°  B.,  leads  northward  of  Grosse 
Island  Patch  to  the  Quarantine  Anchorage.  A  good  cross  mark  for 
that  anchorage  is  to  have  the  Bpiscopal  church  Just  open  eastvirard  of 
West  Wharf.  The  whole  cf  Race  Island  a  little  open  southward  of 
Margaret  Island,  bearing  N.  52°  E.,  leads  in  23  feet  southward  of 
Grosse  Isle  Patch. 

Quarantine  Anchorage. — Vessels  generally  lie  between  the  Grosse 
Patch  and  Island,  to  be  near  the  establishment ;  but  the  anchorage  far- 
ther eastward  in  tbe  Quarantine  Passage  to  the  northward  of  Margaret 
5489 14 


■II 


.ynwa 


iiiMminn 


*'«l5r*««i 


210 


OBEEN   ISLAND   TO   MONTRKAL. 


IslHud  is  by  far  preforablo.  All  merchant  vessels,  as  the  law  now 
stands,  are  obliged  to  anchor  off  Orosse  Island,  from  whence,  after 
examination,  they  are  allowed  to  proceed  to  Quebec,  if  not  detained  at 
the  Quarantine  Anchorage.  These  vessels  in  the  first  instance  gener- 
ally anchor  outside  Grosse  Patch,  and  to  the  westward  of  Margarets 
Tail,  choosing  their  berth  in  5  fathoms,  where  there  is  one  of  the  best 
roadsteads  for  riding  out  an  easterly  gale  in  the  river. 

Grosse  Isle  may  be  readily  recognized  by  the  number  of  buildings 
forming  the  Quarantine  establishment.  Two  piers  are  built  on  the 
soutliern  shore,  one  near  the  western  extreme,  the  other  near  the  mid- 
dle ot  the  island.  The  hospital,  a  conspicuous  brick  building,  stands 
near  the  eastern  extreme,  and  the  superintendent's  house  is  immedi- 
ately behind  the  dagstaff.  The  churches  visible  from  the  ?>outh  Guan- 
nel  are  the  Episcopal  church,  a  brown  wooden  building,  with  a  low 
tower,  standing  on  an  eminence  immediately  northeastward  of  West 
Wharf;  and  the  Roman  Catholic  church,  with  a  small  spire,  situated 
near  the  middle  of  the  southern  shore,  and  visible  only  from  the  east- 
ward and  westward;  being  hidden  from  the  southward  by  a  rocky 
mound  in  front  of  it. 

Grosse  Isle  Tail  is  row  joined  by  a  bar,  having  no  more  than  16 
feet  over  it  at  low  water,  to  the  banks  of  Madame  Island.  Two  shoals 
with  11  feet  of  water  on  them  lie  on  this  bar  about  midway  between 
Grosse  Isle  Tail  and  the  Banks  of  Madame  Island.  For  crossing  the 
bar  the  best  mark  is  the  western  fall  of  the  hill  over  Cape  Tourmente 
in  line  with  the  small  rock  near  the  eastern  extreme  of  Beaux  Island, 
bearing  N.  26°  W. 

Banks  of  Madame,  in  their  eastern  part,  extend  1$  miles  to  the 
southward  of  Reaux  Island ;  and  from  their  SE.  extreme,  in  2^  fathoms, 
the  south  side  of  Two  Heads  Island  is  just  open  to  the  southward  of 
Grosse  Island.  The  mark  for  clearing  the  southern  side  of  these  banks 
as  well  as  Grosse  Island  Tail  and  Grosse  Patch,  is,  Race  Island  kept 
open  to  the  southward  of  Margaret  Island.  A  lightbuoy  painted 
red,  moored  in  6  fathoms,  and  showing  a  yu-ed!  white  gas  light,  marks 
the  southwestern  edge  of  the  banks.  From  this  buoy  Belle  Chasse 
Lighthouse  bears  about  N.  86°  E.  distant  3^  miles;  and  southwestern 
extreme  of  Madame  Island  N.  ^2°  E.  A  beacon  painted  white  is  erected) 
on  the  beach  at  high-water  mark  near  St.  Vallier  Church,  and  when  in 
line  with  the  steeple  of  the  said  church  forms  a  mark  for  the  lightbuoy 
on  the  SW.  end  of  Madame  Shoal. 

Isle  of  Orleans  is  Of  grey  wack^  and  slate  rocks,  dipping  generally 
at  a  high  angle  to  the  SE.  It  is  18  miles  long,  with  an  extreme  breadth 
of  4§  miles.  The  church  of  St.  Jean  stands  low  and  close  to  the  .water, 
on  Orleans  Point,  2  miles  west  from  the  Madame  Reef,  and  1^  miles 
firom  St.  Michel  Point,  on  the  opposite  south  shore. 

At  the  distance  pf  2  and  3  miles  respectively,  above  St.  Jean,  are  the 
small  rivers  Lafleur  and  Macheux,  off  which  there  is  good  anchorage 


loati 


,  as  the  law  now 
•ora  whence,  after 

if  not  detained  at 
ret  instance  gener- 
ward  of  Margarets 

is  one  of  the  best 
ir. 

imber  of  buildings 
)  are  built  on  the 
)ther  near  the  mid- 
jk  building,  stands 
a  house  is  imniedi- 
m  the  South  Cnan- 
ilding,  with  a  low 
tieastward  of  West 
nail  spire,  situated 
only  from  the  east- 
;hward  by  a  rocky 

g  no  more  than  16 
sland.  Two  shoals 
at  midway  between 
For  crossing  the 
er  Cape  Tourmente 
le  of  Beaux  Island, 

Bud  1§  miles  to  the 
reme,  in  2^  fathoms, 

0  the  southward  of 
sideoi  these  banks 
s,  llace  Island  kept 

lightbuoy  painted 
ite  gas  light,  marks 

buoy  Belle  Chasse 
I ;  and  southwestern 
ited  white  is  erected 
Jhurch,  and  when  in 
,rk  for  the  lightbuoy 

8,  dipping  generally 

1  an  extreme  breadth 
id  close  to  the  water, 
i  Keef,  and  Ig  miles 

ove  St.  Jean,  are  the 
*e  is  good  anchorage 


ORLEANS   ISLE — QUEBEC   HARBOR. 


211 


in  7  or  8  fathoms ;  and  in  their  mouths  small  schooners  and  boats  find 
shelter,  but  lie  aground  at  low  water. 

St.  Laurent  Church  also  8ta;ids  low,  and  close  to  the  water,  near  St. 
Laurent  Point,  and  0  miles  SW.  of  St.  Jean.  Around  both  these 
churches  there  are  villages ;  and  along  the  shore  between  them,  as  well 
as  on  the  bank  above,  the  bouses  are  numerous. 

Patrick  Hole  is  a  small  shallow  bay  1^  miles  to  the  westward  of 
St.  Laurent  Church.  A  small  brook  enters  the  head  of  the  bay ;  and 
off  it,  in  from  6  to  U  fathoms,  there  is  good  anchorage,  well  sheltered 
from  easterly  winds.  Here  vessels  bound  down  the  liver  frequently 
anchor  for  a  short  time  previous  to  their  final  departure  for  sea. 

Marand  Rocks. — The  west  end  of  Orleans  Isle  is  quite  bold.  In 
the  bay,  a  mile  to  the  eastward  of  it,  lie  Maraud  Bocks,  always  covered ; 
but  they  are  out  of  the  fairway,  and  within  the  3  fathoms  line,  which 
there  extends  ^  mile  from  the  shore  at  high  water. 

Anchorage. — Under  the  west  endofOrIean8,iu  from  8  to  15  fathoms, 
there  is  a  good  place  for  a  vessel  arriving  with  an  easterly  wind  to  an- 
chor, which  she  ought  to  do,  and  wait  for  daylight  rather  than  risk 
rnnniug  among  the  crowd  of  shipping  off  Quebec  in  a  dark  night  and 
rapid  tide-way. 

Basin  and  Harbor  of  Quebec. — The  port  of  Quebec  extends  from 
Barnaby  Island  to  the  first  rapid  above  Montreal;  and  a  book  con- 
taining the  by-laws  and  harbor  regulations  of  the  Trinity  Board  is 
delivered  to  each  vessel  on  her  arrival  by  the  harbor- master.  The  pi- 
lots are  obliged  to  give  all  due  information  respecting  quarantine  to  the 
commanders  of  vessels  when  they  first  come  on  board. 

Quebec  Basin. — Off  the  Beauport  shore  a  bank  of  slate,  thinly 
covered  with  mud,  and  great  part  of  which  is  dry  at  low  water,  extends 
more  than  a  mile  from  the  shore.  A  can  buoy,  painted  red,  moored  in 
5  fathoms,  indicates  the  southern  edge  of  the  bank.  The  observation 
bastion  in  line  with  the  Martello  tower  in  the  suburb  of  St.  John  marks 
the  southern  edge  of  this  bank  from  abreast  the  west  end  of  Orleans  to 
within  ^  mile  of  the  India  wharf;  but  a  stranger  would  not  easily  make 
out  the  bnstion,  which  ought  to  be  distinguished  by  a  white  mark.  The 
breadth  of  the  channel  between  this  bank  and  the  shoal  off  Levis  Point 
is  1,200  yards,  and  the  depth  of  water  nearly  3(1  fathoms.  The  water 
is  so  deep  in  the  basin  that  there  is  no  good  anchorage,  excepting  under 
Orleans  and  off  the  mouth  of  the  river  St.  Charles. 

Quebec  Harbor  may  be  considered  as  extending  from  off  the  river 
St.  Charles  up  to  the  Cbaudi^re  Biver,  a  distance  of  5  or  6  miles,  which 
all  through  the  navigable  season  is  thickly  occupied  by  vessels  em- 
ployed in  the  timber  trade,  for  the  most  part  lying  alongside  the  numer- 
ous wharves  and  blocks  for  embarking  lumber,  and  consequently  out 
of  the  stream. 

But  sometimes  the  spring  or  fall  fleet  arrives,  to  the  amount  of  several 
hundred  sail  together,  and  then  before  they  have  had  time  to  take  their 


fmmmmimm 


'■■mm^ws^ 


^jmntmmmiMi' 


M 


m^. 


i|.  '■: 


212 


OREEN   ISLAND   TO   MONTREAL. 


places  for  loading  the  river  is  so  crowded  with  sbipping  that  it  is  diffl- 
cult  to  flud  a  clear  berth.  A  gale  of  wind  occurring  under  such  cir- 
cumstances is  sure  to  do  damage,  siuce  the  water  is  deep,  the  ground 
(sand  and  gravel)  not  good,  the  tide  strong,  and  th<)  vessels  often  care- 
lessly anchored. 

Anchorage. — The  breadth  of  the  St.  Lawrence  at  Quebec  is  very 
little  more  than  a  mile,  but  it  expands  immediately  above  the  city  to  1^ 
miles.  The  depth  is  28  fathoms  at  low  water  abreast  the  city,  and  20 
fathoms  in  the  wide  part  above,  the  deepest  water  being  over  towards 
the  Levi  Point  shore.  The  best  anchorage  is  on  the  Quebec  side,  in 
from  11  to  17  fathoms,  there  being  nothing  in  the  way  excepting  an  old 
wreck  with  9  fathoms  water  over  it.  The  position  of  this  wreck  is  shown 
by  a  rippling  during  the  ebb  tide.  Above  the  city,  from  off  Diamond 
Harbor,  all  along  the  Lamouche  Bank  nearly  to  Pizeau  Point,  the  an- 
chorage is  much  better  than  off  it,  the  depth  of  water  being  much  less 
and  the  ground  good. 

The  Mark  for  clearing  the  outer  or  southern  side  of  the  Lamouche 
Bank  along  its  whole  extent  is  the  N  W.  sides  of  Levis  and  Orleans  Points 
in  line. 

Ice. — Sometimes,  although  rarely,  the  navigation  closes  by  the  mid. 
die  of  November,  and  remains  closed  to  the  8th  or  10th  of  May ;  at 
others  it  would  be  possible  to  navigate  it  till  near  Christmas,  and  shipg 
have  arrived  in  the  middle  of  April ;  but  these  are  extraordinary  seasons, 
and  the  period  first  named  is  that  during  which  the  navigation  usually 
remains  closed.  The  river  seldom  or  never  freezes  acrosii  below  Quebec, 
and  only  occasionally  opposite  the  city ;  but  it  is  full  of  heavy  ice,  mov- 
ing up  and  down  with  the  tides  with  irresistible  force.  There  is  gener- 
ally, but  not  always,  a  bridge  of  packed  ioe  formed  5  or  6  miles  above 
Quebec ;  and  higher  up,  as  far  as  Lake  Ontario,  the  St.  Lawrence  is 
everywhere  ffozeu  across,  excepting  in  places  where  the  current  is 
very  strong. 

The  Town  of  Quebec  occupies  the  extremity  of  a  range,  the  highest 
part  of  which  is  surmounted  by  the  citadel,  320  feet  high ;  the  town 
thence  extends  o'liefly  lu  a  northeasterly  direction  to  the  water's  edge. 
Its  population  is  about  65,000.  Though  not  a  manufacturing  town, 
Quebec  has  distilleries,  breweries,  and  tobacco,  soap,  and  candle  wcrks : 
and  numbers  of  fine  wooden  ships  have  been  launched  fh)m  its  yards. 

Supplies  of  all  kinds  may  be  obtained  by  shipping.  There  are 
several  machine  shops  for  repairs  at  Qnebec ;  also,  at  Point  Levi  there 
are  large  works. 

The  Louise  Basin  is  in  course  of  construction  on  the  north  side  of 
the  custom-house,  at  the  entrarce  to  St.  Oharles  Rh'er.  From  end  to 
end  the  basin  is  4,000  feet  long,  900  feet  wide,  and  will  inclose  a  water 
area  of  60  acres — 40  acres  of  which  are  to  be  wet  dock,  and  20  acres 
tidal  basin,  with  a  minimum  depth  of  27  feet  and  42  feet,  respectively, 
below  high  water. 


xmUMMHl 


mi^ 


A_ 


lat  it  is  diffl- 
ier  such  cir- 
,  the  ground 
is  often  oare- 

Bbeo  is  very 
the  city  to  IJ 
city,  and  20 
jver  towards 
ebeo  side,  in 
eptiug  an  old 
*eck  is  shown 
off  Diamond 
»oint,  the  an- 
ng  much  less 

le  Lamoncbe 
rleans  Points 

I  by  the  mid. 
I  of  May ;  at 
las,  and  ships 
inary  seasons, 
;ation  usually 
»eIow  Quebec, 
javy  ice,  mov- 
here  is  gener- 
6  miles  above 
.  Lawrence  is 
be  current  is 

;e,  the  highest 
igh;  the  town 
water's  edge. 
Bturing  town, 
candle  wcrks: 
rom  its  yards. 
5.  There  are 
tint  Levi  there 

north  side  of 

From  end  to 

Qclose  a  water 

,  and  20  acres 

b,  respectively^, 


QUEBEC — NORTH  CHANNEL. 


213 


Time  Signal.— A  time  signal  is- established  at  the  citadel.  The 
signal  is  made  once  daily,  except  on  Sundays,  and  is  a  ball,  which  is 
hoisted  close  up  as  preparatory  at  5  minutes  before  signal,  and  dropped 
at  Ih.  Om.  Os.  p.  m.  mean  time  of  the  75th  meridian,  equivalent  fo  Oh. 
Om.  Os.  p.  m.  Greenwich  mean  time. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul  and  vice-consul. 

Anchorage. — Besides  the  best  places  for  riding  with  easterly  winds, 
there  is  anchorage  almost  everywhere  between  Crane  Island  and  Que- 
bec. The  best  ground  for  holding  is  generally  on  the  northern  side  of 
the  channel  5  and  one  of  the  best  places  in  strung  westerly  winds  is 
under  St.  John  Point,  Orleans  Isle. 

Tides. — The  tides  are  regular  and  not  strong  below  Beaumont  Keefs, 
seldom  exceeding  the  rate  of  2^  knots ;  but  in  the  narrow  channel  and 
deep  water  (nearly  20  fathoms)  between  these  shoals  and  Orleans  the 
rate  of  the  ebb  sometimes  amounts  to  4  knots ;  above  the  shoals  the 
rate  of  the  tide  is  from  2^  to  3  knots,  increasing  again  as  we  enter  the 
basin  of  Quebec. 

Between  Quebec  and  Levis  Point,  in  strong  spring  tides,  assisted  by 
a  strong  wind,  the  flood  will  run  at  the  rate  of  nearly  4J  knots  per 
hour;  and  the  ebb,  in  the  spring,  just  after  the  melting  of  the  winter 
snow,  5  knots;  but,  under  common  circumstances,  3^  and  4  knots,  re- 
spectively, are  the  usual  rates  of  the  tides.  A  good  range  of  cable 
should  always  be  ready,  for  it  is  not  easy  at  times  to  bring  a  vessel  up 
off  Quebec,  especially  in  the  deep  water  and  loose  ground  in  the  center 
of  the  channel. 

NORTH  OHANNEL,  NORTH  TRAVERSE,  AND  ORLEANS  CHANNEL. 

North  Channel — The  northern  shore  of  the  river,  westward  of  St. 
Paul  Bay,  falls  steeply  from  the  summits  of  high  wooded  hills  that  at- 
tain an  elevation  of  2,650  feet,  dose  westward  of  Petite  Riviere.  At 
1^  miles  southwestward  from  Cape  Labaie,  a  small  strip  of  low  flat 
land,  lying  between  the  tbot  of  the  hills  and  high- water  mark,  com-- 
mences,  and  extends  westward  to  Grande  Point,  a  distance  of  5  miles. 
Numerous  houses,  forming  a  parish  of  Petite  Riviere,  are  built  on  this 
flat;  and  among  them  is  a  church,  with  a  single  spire,  dedicated  to  St. 
Fran90i8  Xavier.  Several  valleys  indent  the  hills,  the  most  marked 
being  about  2  miles  eastward  of  Petite  Riviere  Church. 

The  entrance  to  the  North  Channel,  between  the  reef,  which  extends 
a  mile  to  the  northward  from  the  NE.  end  of  Goudres  Island,  and  the 
shoals,  which  stretch  across  Ebouletneuts  Bay,  is  1^  miles  wide.  The 
narrowest  part  of  phe  c^'aunel  between  Coudres  and  the  main  is  be- 
tween Prairie  Shoal,  off  the  west  point  of  Prairie  Bay,  and  the  opposite 
side,  near  Cape  Corbean.  The  leading  mark  for  this  part  of  the  pas- 
sage, as  well  as  for  clearing  the  shoal  on  the  west  side  of  Cape  St. 
Joseph,  on  the  mainland  side,  is  Cape  Martin  and  Goose  Cape  in  line. 


-^elOitiik 


iaiil5inniilM>i<ii<«ii»M<a>W 


214 


GRr.SN   ISLAND  TO   MONTREAL. 


St.  Paul  Bay  is  nearly  abreast  the  west  end  of  Ooadres,  and  is  shoal 
and  dry  at  low  water,  excepting  a  very  narrow,  shallow  channel  into 
the  Bi  ver  du  Gonfre,  the  entrance  of  which  forms  a  secure  tide  harbor  for 
small  schooners.  There  is  a  church,  bridge,  and  village  a  mile  up  the 
river.  Off  Gape  Corbean,  at  half  ebb,  the  spring  tides  run  at  the  rate 
of  7  knots,  causiug  a  great  and  whirling  ripple,  dangerous  to  boats  in 
bad  weather. 

Petite  Riviere.— The  church  and  settlement  of  Petite  Bivifere  is  sit- 
uated on  a  narrow  strip  of  low  alluvial  land  at  the  foot  of  the  granitic 
hills.  Landing  may  be  effected  iu  boats  after  half  flood,  at  L' Abatis, 
Petit  Abatis,  and  Orande  Pointe,  and,  generally  speaking,  along  the 
coast  of  Petite  Bivi^re ;  but  care  must  be  taken  in  approaching  the 
shore  to  avoid  the  bowlders  that  stand  above  the  general  level  of  the  flat 
ground  between  high  and  low  water  marks. 

Labaie  Bank.— Shoals  of  mud  and  large  bowlders  extend  J  mile  off 
Gape  Labaie,  the  eastern  extreme  marked  by  a  red  buoy.  Their  edge  will 
be  cleared  by  keeping  the  extreme  western  capes,  llouge  and  Gribanue, 
open  to  the  southward  of  Gape  Maillard.  The  anchorage  in  good  along 
the  edge  of  the  shoals  of  Petite  Bivi^re,  where,  in  5  fathoms,  clay  bot- 
tom, vessels  will  be  out  of  the  strength  of  the  tides. 

La  Petite  Bntte  Ronde,  a  conical  wooded  hill,  774  feet  high,  rises 
above  Gape  Maillard,  and  is  conspicuous  from  the  eastward  or  west- 
ward. Two  small  shingle  beaches,  named  Petit  Abatis  and  L'Abatis, 
are  situated  westward  of  Gape  Maillard ;  and  on  UAbatis,  which  is  1} 
miles  distant  from  that  cape,  there  are  several  couspicnous  houses.  At 
Sant  au  Gochon  there  is  another  group  of  houses,  a  small  church,  a  dis- 
used mill,  and  a  wharf  which  marks  the  limit  of  the  low-water  line. 
From  Gape  Labaie  westward  to  Saut  au  Gochon,  the  "^at,  which  dries 
at  low  water,  extends  about  $  mile  from  high- water  mark,  and  the  water 
deepens  to  5  fathoms  about  400  yards  beyond  the  edge.  Westward  of 
Saut*aa  Gochon  the  low-water  line  extends  only  a  short  distance  from 
high-water  mark.  The  first  notch  in  the  hills  northward  of  Mount 
Eboulements,  in  Hue  with  the  northern  extreme  of  Goudres  Island, 
bearing  N.  35°  E.,  leads  in  upwards  of  5  fathoms,  southward  of  the  shoal 
water  off  the  northern  shore. 

Condres  Island,  the  largest  island  below  Quebec,  excepting  Orleans, 
is  nowhere  above  260  feet  above  the  sea.  It  is  composed  of  grey  wack6 
and  slate  rocks,  is  tolerably  fertile,  forms  a  parish  by  itself,  and 
has  a  church  standing  low  down  near  its  SW.  extreme  which  has  two 
small  spires  at  its  western  end.  The  southern  side  of  the  island  is 
lined  with  rocky  shoals,  which  extend  fully  a  mile  out  from  the  shore, 
but  the  north  side  is  bold  for  about  2  miles  to  the  eastward  of  Prairie 
Bay. 

Prairie  Bay,  on  the  north  side  of  Goudres  Island  is  1^  miles  wide 
ttom  Gape  k  I'Aigle  to  Prairie  Point,  is  not  deep,  only  slightly  curved, 
and  shows  a  sandy  beach  at  high  water.    Off  Prairie  Point,  its  west 


UMiiiMMMHailWIMiWII 


mmmn 


aanr' 


I 


PRAIRIE   BAY — COUDRE8   BANK. 


215 


and  is  shdal 
haunel  into 
0  harbor  for 
mile  up  tlie 
at  tbe  rate 
to  boats  in 

vi^re  is  sit- 
the  granitic 
at  L' Abatis, 
along  the 
oaching  the 
el  of  the  flat 

id  J  niile  off 
eir  edge  will 
d  Gribanue, 
( good  along 
us,  clay  bot- 

)t  high,  rises 
ard  or  west- 
id  L'Abatis, 
,  which  is  1} 
hoases.  At 
burch,  a  dis- 
r-water  line, 
wbiuh  dries 
id  the  water 
iVestward  of 
istance  from 
i  of  Mount 
ilres  Island, 
of  the  shoal 

iug  Orleans, 
f  greywaok^ 
'  itself,  and 
lioh  has  two 
he  island  is 
n  the  shore, 
rd  of  Prairie 

\  miles  wide 
titly  curved, 
nt,  its  west 


extreme,  Prairie  Shoal,  the  greater  part  of  which  is  of  mud  ami  grass 
resting  on  slate,  and  only  covered  at  high-water,  extends  %  mile  to 
the  NW.  from  high  water  marls,  sheltering  tbe  bay  from  SVV.  winds. 
The  line  of  Notre  Dame  Church,  in  one  with  the  NE.  end  of  the  low 
day  cliff  of  St.  Joseph  Point,  passes  200  yards  within  the  3  fathoms 
north  extreme  of  this  shoal ;  but  if  the  church  be  kept  on  with  the  NW, 
end  of  the  same  cliff  it  will  lead  clear  of  the  shoal  in  deep  water. 
From  the  north  point  of  the  shoal— near  which  a  black  buoy  is  ]ilaced — 
St.  Pierre  Church  is  in  line  with  the  cast  side  of  St.  Paul  Bay ;  the 
buoy  lies  in  3  fathoms  with  tbe  church  its  own  breadth  open  to  the 
westward  of  the  :>ast  point  of  the  bay. 

Anchorage. — Goose  Cape  shelters  Prairie  Bay  from  easterly  gal(>s, 
and  prevents  any  sea  of  consequence  from  rolling  in,  so  that  this  an- 
chorage is  quite  safe  in  all  winds;  the  ground,  of  clay,  being  good  for 
holding,  and  the  tides  easy  if  the  vessel  be  not  anchored  too  far  out. 
There  is  room  for  many  vessels,  the  space  to  anchor  in  being  almost  a 
mile  long,  and  about  if  mile  wide,  reckoning  from  3  fathoms  mark  to  10 
fathoms,  beyond  which  the  water  deepens  rapidly,  and  the  tides  are 
of  great  strength.  The  best  berths  is  in  6  fathoms,  near  the  center  of 
the  bay.  Ships  meeting  with  an  easterly  wind  below  the  Traverse  will 
find  this  a  good  anchorage  to  run  for,  and  should  proceed  as  follows : 

DirectionB. — Being  below  the  Middle  Ground,  stand  over  towards 
Eboolements,  going  no  nearer  to  the  reef  off  the  NE.  end  of  Coudres 
Island  than  the  depth  of  10  fathoms.  Having  passed  the  reef  and 
opened  out  the  channel,  bear  up  along  the  shore  of  Coudres,  passing 
dose  to  Cape  ik  I'Aigle  into  the  anchorage.  A  pproaching  this  anchorage 
from  the  westward,  bring  the  leading  marks  on  for  clearing  the  reef  off 
Prairie  Point,  namely,  Notre  Dame  Church  on  with  or  open  to  the 
northward  of  the  NW.  extreme  of  the  clay  cliff  off  St.  Joseph  Point. 
Bun  upon  these  marks  uutd  St.  Pierre  Church  is  shut  in  behind  the  east 
side  of  St.  Paul  Bay,  when  the  vessel  may  haul  to  the  southward  into 
tbe  anchorage.  The  anchorage  under  Coudres  in  easterly  winds  is  very 
good,  the  best  riding  being  in  7  fathoms,  with  the  south  point  of  Cou- 
dres bearing  about  N.  65^  E. 

Tides. — In  Prairie  Bay  tbe  flood-tide  by  the  shore  is  longer  than  the 
ebb,  the  water  flowing  for  6h.  20m.,  and  ebbing  only  6b.  Om.,  which  is 
ooutrary  to  the  observations  taken  in  every  other  part  of  tbe  river. 
The  stream  of  flood  at  tbe  anchorage  in  6  fathoms  is  stronger  than  that 
of  the  ebb,  and  about  4  knots  in  spring  tides.  The  stream  of  the  ebb 
for  the  first  '^  honrs  of  tbe  tide  is  about  2  knots.  Vessels  should  moor 
at  Prairie,  or  at  least  have  a  kedge  oat  to  insure  keeping  a  clear  an* 
ohor. 

Condree  Bank. — The  southern  side  of  tbe  north  channel  ft*oni  Cou* 
dres  Island  to  Burnt  Cape  Ledge  is  formed  by  Coudres  Bank,  tbe 
northern  edge  of  which  is  of  sand,  and  so  nearly  straight  that  it  may 
easily  be  followed  by  the  lead.    Tbe  soundings  approaching  it  are  such 


^^i^iiiMm^mmgsmmmtt' 


'fMXMUin.. 


.imM\M<^ 


21G 


OREEN   ISLAND   TO   MONTREAL. 


i^' 


as  to  give  good  warning,  and  vessels  may  anchor  in  line  weatlier  all 
along  tliat  side  in  6  or  7  fathoms,  clay  bottom,  and  out  of  the  strength 
of  the  tides. 

Neptune  Rook  lies  about  ^  mile  to  the  southward  of  the  edge  of  the 
shoals.  It  has  two  heads,  both  of  which  are  one  foot  above  high-water 
spring  tides. 

La  Longue  Pointe.— A  red  can  buoy  is  moored  in  30  feet  south  of 
La  Longue  Point,  a  shual  extending  out  from  Cape  Gribanne,  having 
deptiis  on  it  from  8  to  21  feet. 

From  the  buoy,  Cape  Brul6  lighthouse  bears  8.  43°  W.,  and  the 
houses  at  L'Abatis  are  first  open  south  of  8aut  au  Cochon  Wharf. 

Bnmt  Cape  Ledge  is  an  extensive  chain  of  greywack^  and  slate 
rocks,  the  southwestern  part  of  which  is  always  above  water.  The 
western  extreme  is  an  islet  12  feet  above  high  water,  and  on  the  reef 
southeastward  of  this  islet  a  hut  has  been  built,  the  roof  of  which  is  S 
feet  above  high  water. 

Brul^  Banks  are  sands  which  dry  in  part  soon  after  half-ebb,  and 
lie  to  the  westward  of  Burnt  Cape  Ledge.  The  ohdnnel  between  these 
banks  and  the  north  shore  is  1,200  yards  wide,  and  has  from  7  to  10 
fathoms  water  in  it.  This  is  the  only  channel,  but  between  the  north- 
eastern part  of  the  Brul6  Banks  and  Burnt  Capo  Ledge  there  is  a  cul 
de  sac  in  the  banks,  which  must  be  avoided  by  keeping  the  north  shore 
aboard,  after  arriving  off  the  eastern  part  of  the  ledge.  The  black 
buoy  marking  the  northeastern  extreme  of  the  bank  is  moored  in  4 
fathoms,  with  Cape  Brul6  principal  lighthouse  bearing  8.  60^  W.,  dis- 
tant 1-1%  miles. 

The  depth  of  18  feet  at  the  northeastern  end  of  Brnl^  Bank  is  on  the 
line  of  the  western  end  of  Two  Heads  Island  in  one  with  the  western 
end  of  Burnt  Cape  Ledge,  bearing  8.  28°  E. 

Eastern  Narrows.— The  passage  now  is  only  300  yards  wide,  with 
depths  greater  than  3  fathoms,  and  Traverse  Spit  is  apparently  ex. 
tending  northeastward.  A  black  baoy  marks  the  eastern  side  of  the 
Narrows,  at  the  southwestern  extreme  of  Brul^  Banks,  in  18  feet  water; 
and  a  red  buoy  is  moored  near  the  northeastern  end  of  Traverse  8plt 
and  on  the  western  side  of  the  Narrows,  to  mark  the  same  depth. 

Western  Narrows  are  only  300  yards  wide,  with  depths  over  18  feet, 
and  are  comprised  between  West  Sand  and  Traverse  Spit.  West  Sand 
has  extended  eastward  a  considerable  distance,  and  has  on  its  north- 
eastern extreme  a  depth  of  12  feei,  marked  by  a  checkered  black  and 
white  buo3'.  The  southern  extremes  of  Orleans  Island  just  open  of  each 
other,  bearing  S.  36°  W.,  leads  northward  of  West  Sand ;  and  the  islet 
at  the  west  extreme  of  Grosse  Isle  in  line  with  the  eastern  extreme  of 
Beaux  l8land,  bearing  S.  71°  E.,  leads  close  eastward  of  that  sand. 

St  Fran9ois.— The  southwestern  lighthouse,  30  feet  high  and  110 
feet  above  high  water,  stands  in  a  field,  }  mile  sonthwestward  of  St. 
Francois  Church ;  and  the  northeastern  lighthouse,  28  feet  high,  is  sit- 


" 


I 


v 


weather  all 
the  strength 

I  edge  of  the 
I  high-water 

eet  south  of 
inne,  having 

W.,  and  the 
Wharf. 
i6  aud  slate 
water.  The 
oa  the  reef 
f  which  is  ft 

alf-ebb,  and 
tween  these 
from  7  to  10 
n  the  uorth- 
tiere  is  a  cul 
north  shore 
The  black 
moored  in  4 
60O  W.,  dia- 

nk  is  on  the 
the  western 

s  wide,  wiih 
parently  ez> 

side  of  the 

feet  water; 
raverse  Spit 
depth, 
over  18  feet, 

West  Sand 
1  its  north- 
1  black  and 
>pen  of  each 
ind  the  islet 

extreme  of 
t  sand, 
gh  and  110 
ward  of  St. 
high,  is  sit- 


' 


'ifiaiSiimtiii^meammtmittP'- 


ST.    FRAN9OIS — ORLEANS   CHANNEL. 


217 


nated  at  high-water  mark,  ^  mile  eastward  of  that  church.  Beacons 
have  been  erected  near  both  these  lighthouseH,  which  in  Hue,  bearing 
S.  41°  W.,  lead  close  southward  of  Traverse  Spit,  but  over  a  shoal  with 
12  feet  water  on  it,  lyiug  ^  mile  northeastward  of  the  checkered  buoy 
on  West  Sand. 

Directions  for  North  Channel — After  passing  Saut  au  Cochon  the 
houses  at  L/ Abatis  must  be  kept  well  open  of  the  wharf  at  Saut  aa 
Oochon,  bearing  N.  24°  E.,  to  clear  the  ledgo  eastward  of  Cape  Qri* 
banne,  after  which  the  northern  shore  should  be  kept  well  on  board 
until  abreast  Cape  Bruld.  The  leading  lighthouses  on  that  cape  (the 
northern  aud  the  eastern  of  the  three)  must  then  be  brought  in  line, 
bearing  fT.  14°  E.,  aud  kept  so  through  Eastern  Narrows,  between  the 
buoys  there,  and  until  St.  Fran9ois  beaconn  or  lighthouses  are  in  line, 
bearing  S.  41°  W.  Then  steer  for  those  lighthouses,  with  the  upper 
one  slightly  open  southward  of  the  lower  one,  and  before  the  islet  at 
the  western  extreme  of  Orosse  Isle  is  in  line  with  the  eastern  eztrome 
of  Beaux  Island,  bearing  S.  71°  E.,  the  southern  extremes  of  Orleans 
Island  must  be  brought  nearly  in  line,  bearing  S.  35°  W.  to  pass  be- 
tween West  Sand  and  Traverse  Spit.  When  St.  Vallier  Church  opens 
westward  of  Madame  Island,  or  St.  Joachim  Church  is  shut  in  with 
Orleans  Island,  haul  a  little  to  the  southward,  and  keep  ^  mile  distant 
from  Orleans  Island,  further  on. 

Tides.— The  tides  set  fairly  through  the  North  Traverse,  seldom  ex- 
ceeding the  rate  of  3^  or  at  the  utmost  4  knots  at  the  springs.  The 
accession  of  the  stream  from  the  northward  of  Orleans  and  the  com- 
parative narrowness  of  the  channel  increase  the  rate  to  flrom  4  to  5 
knots  off  Cape  Brnl6,  below  which  it  decreases  until  below  Cape  Mail- 
lard.  Below  Petite  Riviere,  the  ebb,  receiving  a  great  accession  from 
the  Middle  Channel,  especially  during  the  first  quarter  of  the  tide,  runs 
with  great  rapidity,  the  usual  rate  being  6  knots  in  the  springs. 

Orleans  Channel,  between  the  isle  of  Orleans  and  the  north  shore, 
being  in  several  places  not  above  200  yards  wide,  is  too  narrow  and 
intricate  tor  directions  to  be  of  any  use,  especially  as  there  are  no  lead- 
ing marks.  With  a  fair  wind  and  the  assistance  of  buoys  4  fathoms 
water  could  be  carried  through  this  channel,  which  lies  between  shoals 
of  mud  and  slate  extending  to  a  great  distance  from  the  shore  on  either 
side,  and  nearly  all  dry  at  low  water. 

The  Etominaire  is  a  large  building  with  a  tinned  cupola  and  cross, 
standing  on  a  rising  ground  not  far  from  the  water,  and  3  miles  west- 
ward of  Cape  Tonrmeute.  The  church  and  village  of  Si.  Joachim,  one 
of  the  leading  marks  for  the  West  Sand,  is  If  miles  to  the  westward  of 
the  Seminaire.  The  other  churches  and  villages  on  the  north  shore,  in 
order  westward,  and  from  4  to  5  miles  apart,  are  St.  Anne,  Chateau 
Bicher,  and  Ange  Oardien,  the  last  being  2|  miles  from  the  falls  of 
Montmorency. 

Tides. — The  following  table  has  been  formed  from  the  mean  of  the 
observations  of  several  spring  tides.    The  neap  tides  rise  and  fall 


if 


'MJkk'm  I.,  . 


^Ir- 


218 


TIDES — SAOUKNAT  BIVEB. 


nearly  at  the  same  rateae  in  ordinary  spring  tides ;  so  nearly  tliat  any 
difference  that  there  may  be  is  far  exceeded  by  the  action  of  strong 
winds.  Bat,  as  iu  neap  tides,  the  whole  rise  and  fall  is  not  so  great  as 
in  the  ordinary  spring,  shown  in  the  following  table;  therefore  the  pro. 
portionate  part  of  the  rise  and  fall  for  every  hour  after  low  and  high 
water  will  also  be  less,  and  an  allowance  mast  be  made  accordingly. 

Table  $howing  tht  height  of  the  tide  at  every  hour  after  low  and  high  uiater  in  ordinary 

epring  tides. 


Hoora 

Flood  tide, 

Hours 

Ebb  tide, 

P!f ' 

after 

heiKbt  In 

after 

W.1S 

low 

feet  and 

high 
water. 

Remarks. 

water. 

iDofaee. 

inohea. 

h.  m. 

ft.  in. 

h.  m. 

ft.  in. 

<)aebM 

0    0 

1.  w.     0    0 

0   0 

h.w.  17    6 
IB    0 

The  tides  of  Qroase  laland 
were  obserred  to  rise  and 

1    0 

8    6 

1    0 

2   0 

10    0 

2   0 

11   4 

fall  nearly  In  the  same 

8    0 

14    9 

8    0 

8    0 

manner,   ezoeptluK    that 

4    0 

U    8 

4   0 

8  10 

the  rise  after  low  water 

4  46 

h.w.  17    « 

8    0 
«    0 
7    0 

8    4 
1    6 
0    2 

was  not  quite  so  rapid. 

StBooh 

0    0 

I  w      0    0 

78ft 

0  0 

1  0 

l.w.     0    0 

h.w.  17    0 

14    t> 

1    0 

S    0 

2    0 

ft    3 

2    0 

i:   » 

8    0 

9    0 

8    0 

8    6 

4    0 

18    6 

4    0 

ft    6 

ft    0 

16    8 

ft    0 

8    0 

S88 

h.w.  17    0 

6    0 

1    6 

The  Brandy  Foto 

0    0 

2  w      0    0 

680 

0  0 

1  0 

l.W.     0    0 

h.w.  17    0 

16   0 

1    0 

1    8 

2    0 

4    7 

2    0 

12   0 

■v 

8    « 

a  6 

8    0 

8    6 

' 

4    0 

18    8 

4    0 

ft    6 

ft    0 

16    0 

e  0 

8    0 

S60 

h.w.  17    0 

6    0 

1    0 

Tadonaao  enti'UMM  of  Sagne- 

0    0 

l.w.     0    0 

684 
0    0 

I.W.     0    0 
b.w.  17    0 

nay  BiTcr. 

1    0    1              18 

1    0 

18    0 

S    0    1              4    6 

2    0 

12    0 

8    0                  8    0 

8    0 

8    0 

4    0                IS    0 

4    0 

4    0 

ft    0                IS    0 

8    0 

0    0 

6    8    i  h.w.  17    0 

6  16 

1.w.     10 

THE  BIVEB  SAOUBNAT. 

For  the  first  50  miles  up  from  its  conflaence  with  the  St.  Lawrence 
the  Sagaenay  is  from  §  mile  to  2  miles  wide,  filling  op  a  deep  transverse 
valley  through  monntains  of  syenitic  granite  and  gneiss.  These  moon- 
tains  rise  everywhere  more  or  less  abruptly  from  the  water,  forming,  in 
«ome  parts,  precipitons  headlands  more  than  1,000  feet  ill  height.  The 
irranitic  hills  are  in  general  quite  barren,  but  the  valleys  througli  whfoh 
the  rapid  tributary  streams  descend  are  filled  with  a  deep  deposit  of 
«and  and  day,  and  are  thickly  wooded.  At  Ahah  Bay  and  at  Ohi- 
ooutimi  there  are  considerable  tracts  of  good  land,  as  there  are  also 
around  Lake  f^t.  John ;  so  that  it  seems  probable  that  this  country  will 
be  settled  at  no  very  distant  day,  especially  as  the  lumberers  have 
turned  their  attention  in  that  direction. 

Within  the  same  part  of  the  Saguenay  the  water  is  almost  as  deep  as 


'  i* 


AWMB*"^ 


-«ii 


t 


Ij  that  any 
n  of  BtroDg 

80  great  as 
bre  the  pro. 
w  and  high 
ordlnglj. 

er  in  ordinary 


iinarkt. 


of  OroMe  Itlud 
trred  to  riM  and 
\y  In  the  mie 
exocptlDK  that 
after  low  water 
inlte  Ml  rapid. 


.  Lawrence 
transverse 
hese  moan* 
forming,  in 
igbt.  The 
ingli  wbfoh 
>  deposit  of 
nd  at  Ohi- 
"e  are  also 
>antry  will 
Brer8  have 

as  deep  as 


mm 


TIDES  AND  CURRENTS. 


the  nioontains  are  high.  Between  the  shoals  at  the  entrance  of  the 
river  there  is  a  bar  across,  on  which,  however,  there  are  from  18  to  20 
fathoms  water,  bat  immediately  within  that  the  depth  increases  to  up* 
ward  of  100  fathoms;  and  fartlier  up,  for  a  distance  of  many  miles^  it 
is  folly  145  fathoms  deep  in  the  center  of  the  oh^  anel,  decreasing  to  100 
fathoms  oti  either  side,  often  within  less  than  as  many  feet  of  the  pre- 
cipitous shores. 

It  is  navigable  for  the  largest  ships  to  Roches  Point,  07  miles  from 
the  St.  Lawrence ;  and  schooners,  with  the  assistance  of  the  flood  tide, 
can  ascend  to  Ohicoutimi,  8  miles  farther.  Just  above  Roches  Point 
the  river  becomes  suddenly  very  shoal,  there  being  only  1|  fathoms 
water  in  its  narrow  and  intricate  channels,  and  among  its  shoals, com- 
posed of  large  bowlders.  Above  this  shallowest  part,  where  at  low 
water  there  is  a  complete  rapid,  the  depth  varies  from  2  to  8  fathoms, 
but  between  shoals  of  large  stones,  and  the  river  contracts  to  little  more 
than  ^  mile,  retaining  that  breadth  nearly  to  the  rapids,  6  miles  above 
Ohicoutimi,  where  the  tide  ends. 

Tides  and  Currents. — It  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  Tadous- 
sac,  at  the  entrance  of  the  Saguenay,  at  2h.  45m.,  and  the  rise  in  ordi- 
nary springs  is  17  feet,  and  in  neaps  10  feet.  At  Ohicoutimi  it  is  high 
water  at  4h.  11m.,  and  the  rise  in  ordinary  spring  and  neap  tides  is  12 
and  8  feet. 

The  flood  tide  is  extremely  weak  and  of  short  duration ;  above  Si. 
Marguerite  River  it  is  almost  imperceptible,  excepting  a  weak  stream 
which  may  be  found  running  up  close  to  the  shores.  The  water,  how* 
ever,  has  often  been  observed  to  be  flowing  up  at  the  depth  of  several 
fathoms,  whilst  it  was  stationary  or  descending  on  the  surface.  The 
tide  flows  to  the  foot  of  the  Terres  Rompnes  Rapid,  about  6  miles  above 
Ohicoutimi,  and  about  71  miles  from  the  St.  Lawrence.  The  stream  of 
the  ebb  tide  is  very  strong,  varying  from  3  to  5  knots,  according  to  the 
breadth  of  the  river.  It  is  strongest  in  the  mouth  of  the  river,  wherO' 
it  sometimes  runs  at  the  rate  of  7  knots,  and  sets  strongly  ovef  Lark 
Islet  Spit  and  the  SW.  extremity  of  Vaches  Point. 

The  meeting  of  the  spring  ebb  tides  down  the  Saguenay  and  the  St. 
Lawrence  causes  breaking  and  whirling  eddies  and  ripplings,  so  strong 
as  to  interfere  with  the  steerage  of  a  vt* ssel  unless  she  has  a  command* 
ing  breeze.  These  streams,  opposed  to  a  heavy  easterly  gale,  cause  an 
exceedingly  high,  cross,  and  breaking  sea.  On  the  flood  tide  at  such 
times  there  is  not  more  sea  there  than  in  other  parts  of  the  river. 

Oapt.  O.  Tramblay,  in  a  report  to  theOovemmentof  the  Dominion  of 
Oanada,  1875,  made  the  following  remarks  on  the  currents  in  Saguenay 
River : 

From  the  entrance  of  Ohicoutimi  River  to  Roches  Point  the  current 
is  steady  and  even,  in  some  parts  setting  on  the  shoals,  but  without 
any  undercurrent. 

From  Roches  Point  to  St.  Jean  Bay,  situated  36  miles  to  the  eastward. 


220 


SAOUENAY   RIVEH. 


tbo  surfaoe  current  is  not  stroog  at  any  timo.  In  many  partH  there  is 
a  strong  and  variable  nndercurrent,  e8|)eoially  daring  springa,  strong 
with  the  liuod,  bnt  scarcely  perceptible  during  the  ebb.  Thiti  under- 
current, acting  on  vessels  drawing  ft-oin  19  to  25  feet,  sometimes  renders 
them  unmanageable  even  when  assisted  by  a  steam  tug. 

At  spring  tides  a  large  body  of  water  passes  over  the  Chiooutimi 
Shoals  (at  a  very  rapid  rate  during  ebb  tides),  and  falling  suddenly 
into  deep  water,  seems  to  strike  downward  at  once,  leaving  but  a  slight 
current  on  the  surface. 

The  strong  flood  tides  over  the  bar  at  the  entrance  of  Sagueuay 
River  falling  suddenly  into  deep  water  may  also  ooutributeto  a  certain 
extent  to  check  the  strength  of  the  surface  current  of  the  river. 

Entrance  of  the  Saguenay.— The  river  Saguenay  enters  the  St. 
Lawrence  opposite  Ked  and  Oreen  Islands,  as  see  page  102,  wherein  haa 
been  described  its  points  of  entrance.  It  will  be  seen  that  the  entrance 
channel  between  Princes  Shoal,  Bar  Reef,  and  Lark  Islet  Spit  on  the 
one  side,  and  Vaches  Patch  and  Reef  on  the  other,  is  f  mile  wide,  with 
deep  water  and  very  irregular  soundings.  The  shallowest  part  is  be- 
tween Bar  Reef  and  Vaches  Patch,  where  there  is  as  little  as  11  fathoms. 
Immediately  within  it  the  depth  increases,  and  off  Tadoussac  exceeds 
80  fathoms.  And  it  is  $  mile  wide  from  Hot  Point,  the  NW.  point  of 
Tadousao  Harbor,  across  to  Noire  Point 

8t  Catherine  Bay.— Between  Lark  Islet  and  Noire  Point  is  St. 
Catherine  Bay,  in  which  vessels  may  anchor  in  20  or  30  fathoms  water 
oot  of  the  strength  of  the  tides,  bnt  exposed  to  a  considerable  swell  in 
easterly  winds.  On  the  NW.  side  of  this  bay  there  are  several  large 
iron  rings  in  the  steep  granitic  shore,  which  were  probably  used  for 
mooring  or  heaving  down  vessels. 

Tadonaaao  Harbor  is  a  bay  between  Rouge  and  Hot  Points,  with  a 
sandy  l)eaoh  at  its  head,  and  rather  more  than  ^  mile  wide  and  j^  mile 
deep.  The  anchorage  is  in  flrom  7  to  18  fathoms,  clay  bottom.  Vessels 
onght  always  to  moor,  and  have  a  heavy  anchor  close  in  shore,  for 
the  gusts  from  the  NW.  are  at  times  exceedingly  powerful,  and  should 
the  anchor  start  there  would  be  little  chance  of  bringing  up  again  be- 
fore the  vessel  had  dragged  her  anchor  down  hill  into  deep  water. 
Besides,  eddies  often  set  into  the  bay,  so  that  it  would  be  almost  im- 
possible to  keep  a  clear  auchor. 

The  shelter  is  rendered  complete  in  every  direction  by  either  land  or 
reefs,  excepting  SB.,  and  there  Red  Islet,  with  the  south  coast  beyond 
it  at  no  great  distance,  prevents  any  sea,  of  consequence  eveU  to  a  boat^ 
from  ever  entering  the  harbor. 

Trading  Post. — ^The  Hudson  Bay  Oompany's  trading  post,  consisting 
of  a  good  dwelling  house,  stores,  and  a  small  chapel  for  the  Indians,  is 
sitnated  at  the  head  of  the  bay,  and  backed  by  ste«p,  high,  and  rugged 
hills  of  granite.  It  is  the  principal  of  those  posts  for  trading  with  the 
Indians  which  are  known  by  the  name  of  the  **  Kings  Posts,"  and  were, 
in  1829,  leased  to  the  Hudson  Bay  Oompany. 


'wasmsmms^ms^^mism 


TADOIT88AC    HARBOR — ANCH0RA0E8. 


221 


)Hrt8  there  is 

■inK8,  ptroiig 

This  undtir- 

imes  renders 

e  Chiooutiini 
ng  Budtienly 
Cbnta  slight 

Df  Sagueuay 
)  to  a  certain 

river. 
Iters  the  St. 

wherein  has 
the  eutranca 
b  Spit  OD  the 
le  wide,  with 
it  part  is  be- 
1 11  fathoms, 
ssao  exceeds 
f  W.  point  of 

Point  is  St. 
thorns  water 
able  swell  in 
several  large 
My  used  for 

oints,  with  a 
)  and  j[  mile 
•m.  Vessels 
n  shore,  for 
,  and  should 
up  agaiu  be- 
deep  water. 
I  almost  i ra- 
ther laud  or 
oast  beyoud 
en  to  a  boat, 

It,  consisting 
e  lodiHus,  is 
and  rugged 
ling  with  the 
I,"  and  were, 


Dirttoticos.— The  buoys  placed  at  the  entrance  of  the  Sagueuay  will 
be  found  of  great  assistance  to  a  vessel  beating  into  the  river,  there 
being  no  clearing  mark  for  the  reefs  on  the  SW.  side  of  the  entrance; 
and  if  buoys  were  added  to  Bar  Keef  and  the  Lark  Islet  Spit,  vessels 
might  beat  in  and  out  at  all  times  with  safety.  On  the  NE.  or  Vaches 
Point  side  observe,  that  Hot  and  Laboule  Points  in  line,  bearing  N.  81° 
W.,  pass  over  the  SW.  side  of  Vaclies  Point  Keef,  and  must  be  kept 
open  to  clear  it;  Hot  Point  being  the  low  NW.  point  of  the  harbor  of 
Tadoussac  and  Laboule  a  high  and  round-backed  bill,  forming  a  steep 
headland,  4  miles  above  Tadoussao. 

Winds  from  SW.,  round  south,  to  NE.  will  enable  a  vessel  to  enter 
the  Sagueuay  on  the  flood-tide.  The  first,  which  is  the  prevailing  sum- 
mer  wind,  will  not  carry  her  far  up,  since  she  will  be  becalmed  under 
the  mountainous  shores ;  but  the  NE.  wind,  or  wind  up  the  St.  Law- 
rence, tlraws  also  up  the  Sagueuay,  and  is  the  only  wind  which  can  be 
depended  on  for  running  a  vessel  up  to  the  anchorages  above  Tadoussao. 
The  NW.  wind  often  blows  down  the  river  in  furious  squalls,  especially 
in  the  fall  of  the  year. 

Caution.— The  ebb  sets  rapidly  over  Lark  Island  Spit  and  Vaches 
Point  Keef,  and  it  is  dangerous  to  be  becalmed  just  within  eifher  of 
them,  because  the  water  is  so  deep  that  it  is  difficult  to  anchor.  If 
night  be  coming  on,  or  the  tide  or  the  wind  be  unfavorable,  anchor  off 
Moulin  Baude  or  in  Brnque  Road,  according  to  circumstances,  and  wait 
for  an  opportunity  for  i  unning  in,  unless  a  vessel  has  a  pilot  sufficiently 
skillful  to  beat  her  in  with  safety. 

AMCHOBAGES  IN  THE  BA-GUENAY. 

Barqua  Oova,  rather  more  than  a  mile  above  Tadoussac,  and  on  the 
same  side  of  the  river,  is  400  yards  deep.  A  vessel  or  two  might  be 
moored  in  it. 

8t  Btlanna  Bay  and  Rivar  are  10^  miles  up  the  Saguenay,  and  on 
its  SW.  shore.  The  bay  is  a  mile  wide,  and  forms  a  harbor  where  a 
number  of  vessels  may  ride  in  from  10  to  30  fathoms  clay  bottom,along 
the  edge  of  the  bank  which  dries  out  ^  mile  ft'om  the  shore. 

8t  Louia  lala,  17  miles  up  the  river,  forms  an  excellent  anchorage, 
either  under  its  east  end  or  between  it  and  the  south  shore ;  the  depth 
of  water  being  flrom  10  to  30  fathoms,  sand  and  mud  bottom. 

8t  Barthalami  lala,  a  mile  higher  up,  and  on  the  opposite  side  of  the 
river,  lies  close  to  the  month  of  the  river  Oaoard.  A  vessel  or  two 
might  be  secured  there ;  the  place  being  small,  and  the  depth  of  water 
from  6  to  20  fathoms. 

8t  Jaan,  on  the  southern  shore,  and  24  miles  up  the  Saguenay,  is  a 
large  bay  with  a  small  islet  off  its  NW.  point.  It  is  If  miles  wide 
and  li  miles  deep.  The  river  St.  Jean  and  several  small  streams  enter 
at  its  head.  Off  these  streams,  and  along  the  edge  of  the  bank  which 
dries  out  J  mile  from  the  shore,  there  is  good  anchorage  for  many  ves- 
sels, in  from  8  to  40  fathoms  mud  bottom. 


u-^^^i.^^ 


■ji^Sgf 


wm 


Ju-^ 


222 


BAOIJENAY    HIVER. 


BtamlM,  ou  the  Hame  side  ait  8t.  Jean,  and  0  miles  higher  op  the 
river,  is  a  large  cove,  ^  mile  wide  and  l^  miles  deep,  with  a  river  of  the 
same  name  at  its  head.  At  the  head  of  this  cove  vessels  may  lie  se- 
curely, in  from  8  to  30  fiithoms,  mud  bottom,  and  securely  land-locked. 

Deaoento  d«a  rammaa  is  a  cove  700  yards  long,  witn  a  depth  of 
30  fatlioms  at  its  entrance,  decreasing  to  S  fathoms  near  its  head. 
Boversi  vcHsels  might  lie  moored  in  it  in  great  security.  It  is  42  miles 
up  tlie  river,  and  on  its  northern  shore. 

Ahah  Bay  is  U  miles  deep  and  from  1^  to  2}  miles  wide,  the  widest 
part  being  at  its  liead  where  four  considerable  streams  tiow  into  it.  The 
best  anchorage  is  on  either  side  of  a  small  islet  joined  to  the  shore  at 
low  water  in  the  8W.  corner  of  the  bay,  and  from  7  out  to  30  fathomt, 
clay  bottom.  it; 

Patitaa  naa,  on  the  northern  shore  of  the  river,  52  miles  from  its 
entrance  and  ^  above  Cape  Bast,  are  three  small  rocky  islets  Joined  to- 
the  shore  at  low  water.  The  bay  on  the  east  side  of  them  forms  a  small 
but  secure  anchorage.  The  depth  of  water  is  from  0  to  17  fathoms, 
mud  bottom.  The  8aguenay,  which  is  here  nearly  2  miles  wide  and 
with  a  depth  of  65  fathoms,  is  contracted  to  |  mile  by  a  higli  rocky 
point  projecting  from  its  northern  shore.  On  the  north  side  of  the 
river,  from  the  high  point  to  within  a  mile  of  Uoohes  Point,  there  is 
good  anchorage  in  any  depth  out  to  20  fathoms. 

Roohea  Point  is  57  miles  from  the  entrance  of  the  river,  and  here  the 
navigation  ends  for  shipping,  but  continues  for  schooners  to  Chicoatimi, 
8  miles  farther.  The  river  is  still  1^  miles  wide  at  Roches  Point,  but 
contracts  rapidly  above  it,  assuming  at  the  same  time  the  usual  char- 
acter of  a  river,  such  as  mud  banks  ou  eitiier  side  dry  at  low  water,  shoals 
of  large  bowlder  stones,  drift  trees,  &c.  The  water  also  becomes  fresh 
when  the  tide  is  out. 

CUooatimi  River  and  Trading  Post  are  on  the  south  side  i"  ae 
Baguenay,  and  65  miles  from  its  entrance.  This  river  is  the  ngest 
tributary  to  the  Baguenay.  It  Hows  40  or  50  feet,  through  a  narrow, 
rocky,  and  rugged  channel,  oidy  a  short  distance  within  its  entrance. 

The  trading  post  of  Cbicoutimi  is  one  of  the  Kings  Posts,  and  leased 
to  the  Hudson  Bay  Company.  It  stands  on  the  west  side  of  the  River 
Chicoatimi  at  its  continence  with  the  Baguenay,  and  consists  of  a  good 
dwelling-house,  store,  barp,  and  inferior  buildings.  Potatoes  and  gar- 
den vegetables  are  raised  for  the  use  of  the  people  of  the  establishment. 

Direotiona.— No  directions  are  necessary  for  ascending  the  Baguenay 
to  the  anchorages  just  mentioned,  since  there  is  not  a  single  rock  or 
ahoal  in  the  way  from  Tadoussac  to  the  anchorage  below  Roches  Point. 


!V'; 


BIYBB  ST.  LAWRENCE.     QUEBEC  TO  MONTREAL. 

Sant  Paaa. — Just  above  the  entrance  of  the  Chaudiere  River  the 
St.  Lawrence  is  rather  less  than  800  yards  wide,  between  steep,  high, 
and  partially-wooded  banks,  composed  of  grey wack6  and  slate  rooks. 


RIVER   ST.    LAWRENCE — RICIILIEU   RAPID. 


tt» 


ligberap  the 
Ik  river  of  the 
*  may  lie  se* 
land-looked, 
til  a  depth  of 
)Ar  its  head. 
It  is  42  inilee 

e,  the  widest 

iutoit.   The 

the  shore  at 

30  t'atboine, 

liles  from  its 
lots  joined  to- 
forms  a  small 

0  17  fathoms, 
lies  wide  and 
a  high  rooky 

1  side  of  the 
9int,  there  is 

and  here  the 
)  Chioontimi, 
38  Point,  bat 
>  usual  char- 
water,  shoals 
ecomes  fresh 

I  side  if  ne 
!i  the  it.'gest 
;h  a  narrow, 
its  entrance. 
8,  and  leased 
of  the  Eiver 
sts  of  a  good 
toes  and  gar- 
itablishmeut. 
;he  Saguenay 
ingle  rock  or 
tocbes  Point. 

X. 

re  River  the 

steep,  high, 

.  slate  rooks. 


The  channel  of  the  river  it  still  farther  reduced  at  low  water  by  rocky 
thoaU,  which  dry  out  from  the  shore  on  either  side.  The  breadth  of 
the  stream  is  then  only  550  yards,  bnt  the  depth  is  nearly  .'iO  fathoms, 
and  the  rate  of  the  stream  at  ebb  about  U  knots.  This  narrow  pass  i» 
called  the  Bault. 

Anohorag*. — At  Oarouge  Point,  on  the  northern  shore,  and  abontft 
miles  above  Quebec,  there  is  an  excellent  anchorage ;  and  the  river  here 
begins  to  expand  into  a  magnificent  reach,  from  '2  to  2^  miles  wide,  wtiich 
extends  to  the  westward  as  far  as  the  eye  can  reach. 

Tremble  Shoal*.— The  navigation  of  the  river  is  devoid  of  all  ditfl. 
oulty  as  fur  as  the  dangerous  shoals  of  **ointe  aux  Trembles,  on  the 
northern  shore,  and  18or  10  miles  above  '^.ebec.  These  shoals  extend 
westward  for  many  miles  up  the  rlvor,  leaving  a  channel  between  them 
and  the  soutliern  shore,  in  some  places  only  800  yards  wide.  Still  there 
•  are  no  ditUculties  in  the  navigation  that  may  not  be  easily  overcome, 
even  in  the  largest  ships,  as  high  as  Port  Neuf,  which  is  on  the  northern 
shore,  and  32  miles  above  Quebec. 

Riohlieu  Rapid. — The  tirst  great  difllculty  in  the  navigation  is  llioh- 
lieu  Rapid,  which  commences  just  ai>ove  Port  Neuf,  and  extends  nearly 
to  Orondine,  41  miles  above  Quebec.  In  the  narrowest  part  of  the  Rich- 
lieu  the  channel  at  low  water  is  between  extensive  shoals  of  immense 
bowlder  stones,  and  only  460  yards  wide.  There  is  water  enough  for 
any  vessel,  but  there  is  only  about  an  hoar  of  very  weak  stream  of  flood, 
while  the  ebb  runs  in  spring  tides  at  the  rate  of  fully  7  knots.  The 
steamers  regulate  the  time  of  their  departure  from  Queb'jc  so  as  to  ar- 
rive at  the  foot  of  the  Richlieu  with  the  flood  tide. 

Tides. — At  Port  Neuf  the  spring  tides  rise  14  feet,  while  at  Orondine 
they  only  rise  9  feet ;  there  is,  therefore,  a  great  diflference  in  the  rise  of 
the  tides  at  the  foot  and  head  of  the  Richlieu,  namely,  5  feet  in  9  miles, 
BO  that  it  seems  that  the  descent  in  the  bed  of  the  St.  Lawrence  is  there 
very  considerable. 

The  villages  of  Ohamplain  and  Qentilly  are  opposite  to  each  other,  and 
68  miles  from  Quebec,  the  former  being  on  the  northern  and  the  latter 
on  the  southern  shore.  They  may  be  said  to  mark  the  extent  of  the 
stream  of  flood  tide,  which  was  not  observed  above  the  Shoals  of  Gentilly, 
where  the  ordinary  springs,  unless  assisted  by  an  easterly  gale,  do  not  rise 
above  2  or  3  feet.  Here  also  a  considerable  change  takes  place  in  the 
character  of  the  coui/try,  for  the  high  banks,  which  had  continued  to 
form  the  southern  shore  of  the  river  all  the  way  from  opposite  Quebec, 
turn  back  into  the  country,  and  the  shores  on  both  sides  become  low  and 
of  an  alluvial  appearance. 

At  the  town  of  Three  Rivers.  68  miles  above  Quebec,  the  ordinary 
spring  tides  rise  one  foot,  and  it  is  high  water,  full  and  change,  at  11^ 
hours.  In  the  spring  and  fall  easterly  gales  often  occur  with  the  spring 
tides,  and  cause  them  to  rise,  it  is  said,  a  foot  or  two  higher. 

At  Point  du  Lac,  at  the  lower  entrance  of  Lake  St.  Peter,  and  7& 


•MMHI 


QUEBEC    TO    MONTREAL. 

miles  from  Quebec,  the  ueap  tides  are  almost  imperceptible,  and  the 
spring  tides,  unless  assisted  by  an  easterly  gale,  do  not  rise  above  3  or 
4  inches.  The  eflTect  of  the  tides  may  be  said  to  be  lost  in  Lake  St. 
Pet3r,  since  no  alternate  rise  and  fall  of  tbe  water,  tbat  could  be  at* 
triliuted  to  their  influence,  was  observed  among  the  islands  at  its 
heiul. 

Lake  St  Peter. — The  distance  up  this  lake  from  Point  du  Lac  to  the 
islands  is  about  18  miles,  of  which  about  4  miles  are  over  a  flat  of  sand 
end  clay  through  which  a  ship  channel  300  feet  wide  and  with  27^  feet 
water  in  it  has  been  completed. 

Tbe  channel  above  Lake  St.  Peter  is  often  narrow  and  difficult  for 
sailing  vessels,  and  the  current,  tbe  average  rate  of  which  does  not  ex- 
ceed 2  or  3  knots,  is  in  some  narrow  places  of  considerably  greater 
strength.  -At  th«  rapid  o^  St.  Afary,  just  below  the  city  of  Montreal, 
the  rate  of  the  current  amounts  to  7  knots,  and  used  formerly  to  detain  • 
vessels  many  days  waiting  for  a  fair  and  strong  wind  to  ascend ;  but 
the  whole  river,  as  well  as  Lake  St.  Peter,  is  now  so  well  buoyed  and 
lighted  that  sailing  vessels  are  towed  night  and  day,  without  stopping, 
except  in  fogs,  through  tbe  narrowest  parts  of  the  channel,  and  tbe 
whole  distance  from  Quebec  to  Montreal  is  often  accomplished  in  24 
hours,  by  leaving  Quebec  so  as  to  arrive  at  Richlieu  Rapid  with  the  flood 
tide. 

Montreal  Harbor. — Tbe  dredges,  which  have  so  greatly  improved 
the  navigation  of  the  river,  have  also  been  successfully  employed  during 
many  years,  as  the  necessity  demanded,  in  deepening  tbe  harbor  of 
Montreal.  The  depth  is  now  sufficient  for  vessels  as  large  as  can  pass 
through  Lake  St.  Peter.  Immediately  above  Montreal  the  navigation 
for  shipping  is  closed  by  the  commencement  of  the  rapid  of  Lachine  or 
St.  Louis. 

Directions. — In  tbe  channel  between  Quebec  and  Montreal  improve* 
ments  have  recently  been  made  by  which  the  channel  has  been  dredged 
to  a  depth  of  27  feet.  These  improvements  will  necessitate  numerous 
alterations  in  the  system  of  lights,  which  will  be  altered  to  show  the 
newly  dredged  channel.  In  the  long  line  of  river  navigation  which  has 
been  briefly  described,  written  directions  would  be,  in  most  parts,  to- 
tally unavailing;  and,  in  all  cases,  could  only  give,  very  imperfectly, 
the  same  information  which  is  given  on  the  charts.  These  plans  will  be 
of  great  use  in  pointing  out  possible  improvements  in  the  navigation, 
in  the  selection  of  the  best  route  to  be  pursued  by  vessels,  and  in  buoy- 
ing and  lighting  the  channels  to  the  best  advantage. 

Some  of  the  lighthouses  are  small  and  portable,  so  that  they  may  be 
removed  on  the  approach  of  winter,  and  thus  escape  being  carried 
away  by  tbe  ice ;  for  in  spring  those  low  islets  are  overflowed,  and  the 
ice,  moreover,  in  moving  down  the  river,  often  packs,  forming  a  *'  digue  " 
or  dam,  behind  which  the  waters  rise  many  feet,  until  their  pressure 
overcomes  and  bursts  through  the  impediment  with  such  force  tbat 


-mm 


septible,  and  the 
t  rise  above  3  or 
lost  in  Laife  St. 
bat  could  be  at- 
e  islands  at  its 

)int  da  Lac  to  the 
rer  a  flat  of  sand 
lud  with  27i  feet 

and  difflcalt  for 
hich  does  notex- 
liderably  greater 
iity  of  Montreal, 
brmerly  to  detain  • 
I  to  ascend;  bat 
fvell  buoyed  and 
vithout  stopping, 
channel,  and  the 
somplished  in  24 
pid  with  the  flood 

greatly  improved 
employed  daring 
ng  the  harbor  of 
large  as  can  pass 
al  the  navigation 
pid  of  Lachine  or 

lontreal  improve- 
has  been  dredged 
issitate  nnmeroas 
tered  to  show  the 
'igatioQ  which  has 
n  most  parts,  to- 
very  imperfectly, 
hese  plans  will  be 
n  the  navigation, 
ssel8,andin  buoy- 

)  that  they  may  be 
ipe  being  carried 
rerflowed,  and  the 
brmiaga"digae" 
til  their  pressure 
ih  such  force  that 


^ 


MONTREAL. 


225 


not  only  buildings  would  give  way  before  it,  but  even  many  trees  are 
often  prostrated  in  the  low  grounds,  and  great  banks  of  rolled  stones 
are  forced  up  by  the  ice  on  the  upper  ends  of  islands  which  are  exposed 
to  the  current. 

Besides  the  lights  the  navigation  is  assisted  by  rough  buoys,  formed 
of  logs  and  attached  spruce  bushes,  placed  in  the  most  difficult  parts 
of  the  channel.  The  numerous  leading  marks  used  by  the  pilots  are 
seldom  permanent,  or  of  a  nature  to  admit  of  such  a  description  as 
would  enable  a  stranger  to  distinguish  them  from  many  other  similar 
objects  in  their  vicinity. 

Time  Signal. — From  the  tower  of  the  harbor  commissioners'  build- 
ing a  time  ball  is  dropped  daily  at  noon,  Montreal  meau  time,  corre- 
sponding to  5h.  Greenwich  mean  time.  The  ball  is  dropped  by  elec- 
tricity from  the  Montreal  Observatory.  The  signal  is  made  during  the 
season  of  navigation,  but  not  on  Sundays. 

City  of  MontreaL — ^The  position  of  Montreal  at  the  head  of  the  ship 
navigation  of  the  St.  Lawrence,  and  near  the  confluence  of  that  river 
with  the  Ottawa,  as  well  as  its  situation  with  respect  to  the  United 
States,  make  It  the  most  important  manufacturing  city  in  the  Dominion, 
and  there  is,  consequently,  much  activity  observable  in  trade.  In  ad- 
dition to  Its  numerous  and  handsome  public  buildings  are  cast-iron 
foundries,  distilleries,  soap,  candle,  and  tobacco  manufactories,  several 
ship-building  establishments,  and  machinery  for  steam  engines.  Sup- 
plies of  all  kinds  may  be  procured  by  shipping. 

In  the  year  1886  the  population  was  estimated  to  be  180,000,  of  whom 
the  greater  number  are  of  French  descent. 

Along  the  bank  of  the  river  is  an  extensive  line  of  quays  and  ware- 
houses. For  vessels  of  24  feet  draft  there  is  a  length  of  1^  miles  of 
wharfage;  for  20  feet  draft,  2  miles;  and  for  10  to  20  feet  draft,  one 
mile.  And,  in  addition,  the  basins  of  Lachine  Canal  in  the  city  afford 
to  vessels  of  18  feet  draft  of  water  a  wharfage  of  %  mile,  and  for  vessels  - 
of  12  feet  draft,  2g  miles.  All  the  wharves  in  the  harbor  are  in  the 
tbrm  of  shore  wharves  and  piers  which  are  entirely  submerged  in  the 
winter.  The  wharfiAge  in  the  Lachine  Oanal  is  afforded  by  basins  or 
inclosed  docks  to  which  access  is  supplied  by  locks  of  270  feet  long,  45  ■ 
feet  wide,  and  18  feet  deep. 

Railways.— The  Grand  Trunk  ana  Oanadian  Paoiflo  Railways  have 
their  headquarters  in  thiscity.  The  (/entral  Vermont  and  Southeastern 
Bailwajs  connect  these  two  systems  with  the  railwayed' of  the  United 
States.    Besides  the'-.e  there  are  several  minor  roads  centering  here. 

The  United  States  is  represented  by  a  consul-general  and  vice-consul- 
general. 

5489 15 


r 


226 


LIST  OF   LIGHTS. 


«  5  M  J)  —  ►  ^  a 


§*1 


niftm 


a 


S    S       3      S 


S       S 


8    S 


1^ 

..M 

I'" 

-In 


I 


'i 


i^'F 


^   j3  a     I 
I    -rf    2 


I 

i 


•      «      k 

S    2 


!  -ll  ?i  I 


* 

a       d 


I  5  ^ 


1^  i 


I 

8 


S 


I 


H 1^  M 


<3 


I 


fti  h 


1 


i 


fi    A    ii 


1 


^^4 


e 


I 


I 


I 

3- 


e 
•9    -e 


Sis    I 


1  I 


S  S   !^ 


e  a 


I 


f 


8 

1 

I 


•  I 
I  ^ 


mtm 


e 

2      S 

s 

s    s 

s 

ja 

» 

£ 

•e       s 

4 

a       .a 

:  red  a 
stripes. 

ood;  w 

» 

11  :- 

t  s 

&i   § 

s 

£s   3 

s 

S^  S 

1 


1 


I 


LI    5 

Hi  ^ 

1     ^M    I        » 

I  Is  *"&  1 
"I  IS  ^ 
5   »     E     ^ 


H 


E  S 


g 
'S 
Ph 

3 


& 


ik 


LIST   OF   LIQHTS. 


227 


•g 


;3     s  8  s 


s     s     s  s; 


S3  r: 


3*3 

I  s    1 


•8 


I  ^      I  «   it 


83f 

If 


I 
I 


<? 


■s  ^ 


111     ill     i  I 


»><    h 


h'    h    Pti       (ti    »{    h 


I 


I 


•8 

•s- 

I 

1^ 


h 


s 


il  1 1 
r  1 1 


3 

I 

I 


1  1 


5 
B 


I 


1 1 


■li 


!■-■ 


%»■  ■'* 


.^  ^ 


228 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


lllHIi 


e  S 
■^  3 

•Is 


5 


§1 


N'^ 


\-,., 


e  S 
.s  I 


1 


5ji  * 


^8 


■ 

•S 
I 


I 
1 


^1 
IS 

h 


I 


kK 


LIST  OF  LIGHTS. 


229 


i 
§ 

s 


I 

I 


s 
s 

I 


o 


i 


I       I 


IMII|||  I 


I 


I 


1      « 

"  ^  ■^ 

ill 


I 


S3  a 


e       §f    S$     898 


UK    8 


I 

I 


n 


I 

.3 


I 


■i 


»5         5> 

H  5 


J3 

i" 


F 


»4       ^ 


s 

a5-9 

a  9 

1^  _ 


8      8      So      §8   8   88   88   8 


I 


30    t^   ... 

li  il  I 


(M       «N 


i  : 
I. 


'^OMIMI 


>v 


280 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


;  ,1!!.; 


S    88    tiM    »      S       »a    8 


s 


-«li 


w 


i    s  a 


IV 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


=1 


231 


i1 


l3 


■S-g 


a    a 


■f       at 


1^1 


*       S    m 


.9 


8    » 


•4 


j       S 


.a  6c 

'      1 


I 


1 


.1 

5    ^, 


I      I 


^        ^        l»  W     W         OB        bB 


I 


I 


II 


3     9h 

3    «i 


% 


0 

a 
1 


P«    h    Dm 


i 


W4  M        p4       M  v^ 


iatw 


.^v 


232 


LIST  OP  LIGHTS. 


i;': 


ii!f     . 


"8 

B 
I 

a 
o 

I 


>  3 


V 

i 


III' 

llll 

i 


gfl 


u 


I 


ml  8b  8  n 

ra"?      So 


Mil- 


4^i 


I 


« 


^ 


» 


1^ 


I 

a 


I 


I 


K      S       S3 


S      8 


«    3    « 


«      5 


S 
t 

8 

I 

li 


laj 


I 


la 


il 


I* 


I   I 

i    *     i 

I- 111 


I    I 


I 


I 

a 


! 


i  1 


1 


S 


1      ^1 


1 


s     &     ^ 

il  ^1  ! 


^   1 

S.     !3 

<3    i 


!    H  i 


I 

I    a 


f 


i 

I 

at 


■.^.> 


;*  VS,'#^*^«'''>    >v»(t«'-;!;*-vn>i5S  *--.5:^^''i^Ti-«SS^- ' 


1! 


1 1 


3      U 


I 


1 


I 
I 


1  ^1 


i 


^4 


1^    1^    I 


i 


LIST  OF  LIGHTS. 


238 


^Wt 


184 


LIST  OP  LIGHTS. 


f 


i  ■'  I. 


:  :i 


i  '; 


ll 

I  :3 


M 
M 


s 

N 


M 


fl^ 


BB-g-l 


t1 


4l 

I 


41 


I 


£ 


i         1 


I    i 


r 


i!  i 


gs 


4 


I    n     « 

«         •^         p^ 


!i 


ill  1 1 


i 

I 

I 


*     tS  «• 


11 


1  1 


I 


I 

I' 


I  I 


I 


I 


i 


V 

nil 


a 
■ 


r 


.    M  1 

h      I       h 


i 


1 1 


4  r  s, 


,? 


II 


8    •=    « 


lip 


i 


t, 


1    •!  1 

h       I      h 


■    ^   I 

^  III 


8 


I 


MS 


LIST  01    LIGHTS. 


285 


im  S 


alp 

I1    ^'p  111  I  i  U  I 


i 


III 


»    s 


I 


i^a 


«» 


It 


"I        HP 

-  i^ 


In  'A 


i! 


!i  III  iii 


^1  III?  i^ii  i^L  Ft  :i 


i 


r 


.a 
a 

r 


i    \ 

•      % 


9* 


r 

I! 


[^11  pll  P  |! 


I 

I 

a 

r 


I 


% 


s 

i       I 


32 


if 
s 
a 
-J 

-I 


i 

OB 


^ 


jS 

% 

^ 


II   I 


P 


il 


1^ 

si 

1 

1^^ 


s 

I 
§ 


•8 


\ 


a 


r 


I 

e 

I 


I 


I 


".,atifi^iail'<MiliMUSfr^<<i*ai.W.^-:^-ai<-  >. 


>'.     ^ 


986 


LIST  OF  LIOIITB. 


p  iiiiiiirii: 


^A* 


\  .. 


! 


S 
r 


i 


i 


^ 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


237 


a 


1 


r 

ii 


i 
I 


1 


i 
i 

i 


?5 


s     a     a     3  a  a 


sf] 


«    B    S      S      »    » 


«« 


i 


ill  I 


i  I  H  i' 

^     3      (5      .y 


^        1 

•     -I       ■* 

I  11^  F 


ill 


I 

8 


»N      »k      tM 


»H      »M 


I      I 


•s 


Itlll 


i  I 


& 

"8 


I* 


1 


a 


I 


^    i 


I  3       I 


^    S     & 

M  s  3 


i 


I 

•9 


M 

I 


I 


SfiJ 


ill 


^N 


2^§^    I 


Sal 


1!^ 


ill  I 


1 

ij 


I 


■) 


•'  >!. 


■:=f 


•  m 


Ii 


ifi^i' 


238 


LIST   OF   LIGHTS. 


.•:?■■ 


'  'Vii 


•was 


^ 


il 


§w8 


e 
B  a 


S     3 


^       jB      S  ^ 

r-4  vH  ^H      ^aCQ 


S   S;    ;!$   S 


s 
a 


o     = 


.8 

8 


•-I 


■s 

.a 


1 


E 
1 


is  - 
•-I  I 


2  g 

a    ? 


5 

13 


111 


I 


I     I 

i  a 


1 


■8 


I  I 

^1 


■I     M 


I 


r 


1*8 


s 


I 

I 


P 


h      ^ 


««      k<     bt     h     N 


«5 


»q 


•s 


I 


s. 


i    £ 


C9 


I 


i 


.2    sr' 


^    I 


II  |6  ?l    ;» 


g 


4 


Zf 


m 


I 


a 


so 


;  ^r 


3  a  *  a 


g   S;    ?$    S 


• 

•a 

1 

g 

1  1 

H 

J 

2 

►     f 

1 

» 

1 1 1 1 

i" 

*    s    >    ^ 

* 

White 
White 
White, 

1^ 

fc«    bt    ^    N 


T3 
O 


e 


1^    4^ 


qS 


I  ■ 


'I 


II 


ill 


ill 


'    I 


I 
I 


iSil^ 


LIST  OF  LIGHTS. 


239 


515 

It 


ll| 


9 

ill 


»-J 


h 
II 

fa  M 


O 


1 

0 


i 

P4 


1 


S^        '^ 


&    ^ 


t 


\    ' 


240 


1 

5.S 


>i 


i 


1 

I 


i 


COALING  AND  BEPAIBINO  FACU^ITIES. 


I 


« 


I 


^ 


I 


fill 


f 
I 


I 


9  fi  1> 

I   I    I 


I 


I 


a  ■  S 

S| 

so 


CO 


-i  I 


in   I 


I 


I 


^      I 
I      S 


1^ 


9      -o 


I 

I 
I 


I 


I 


1^1 


I 


8  5.^ 

III  0 


a\ 


■  ■'II 


8 


'.1 

s 

a-  :3 


e 
i 


8 

I  IP  1 


I. 


8 


8 

s 

8      8      8 

tit 


WA  INN 


1 


11 


UOMi^ 


^  1^ 


s 


^ 


iq 


« 


oon   Hf 
33      ^ 


!zi 


li 


I 


»q 


lis 

I  I  I 


I 


.a  . 


IP- 


E  a 
S  S 

S;3 


0 

I 


I 


8 
t 


,;s,KaiKwa«aw»i^**wwi'^'  ■iWMwwguMwa 


OOALINO  AND    BEPAIEISO  FA0IUTIE9. 


i 


'A 

a 


m 


AVERAGE  TIME  OF  OPENING  AN 


PiSM. 


Harbor  froMS  orrr. 


DlMppMraore  of  harbor  ice. 


Arrivilofttelil  ice. 


Dluppetininoo  ol  field  ice. 


Dopartareuflut  t 
fero  lea  mmo 


Port  U«wkMbnrj,  Cape  Broton P«b.t,IIM Apr.».lH6 Feb.3,18M 

Loalabarg  Harbor  (KK.ariBK Cap* BrotoD Jmi.U Braakt  up  wtib  aontberly     ^bout  Mtr.  17  ... 

wind. 

Dow  B«7,  Capo  Breton lUral;  firaooo*;  three  timta  None,  except  In  docks Feb.iStuSH 

ialaatnTeara. 

Sydney,  Capo  Breton  Jna.l«,lMr Apr.M,18M OcBenlly  in  Jan 

Port  Hood,  Capo  Hretoa i  Jan.  15  to  Fok.  1 Apr.  IS  to  If  ay  1 Jan.  19  to  Peb.l  . 

BaMeek, Cape^Ktoa I  Jaa.B Apr.M None 

I 
Qeorntowa,Prin«oBdwardIalaad |  Deo.M. 


Feb.23,lfi|M Dec.22,1885. 

About  Apr.  30 Feb.  20 


Apr.21 Jan.. 

Dee.n None 


_  or«oL 

Chariott*  Town.  PHnc*  Idwatd  lalaad 

BaaiBMraldo,  Priaee  Edward  lalaad I  Dae.  11  ^    . 

Oaacuaipeqna, Prtaoo Bdward lalaDd i  JaB.a,IH7 i  AprtilBSS Jao.4,i887 

RlchaM&IBay.  Priaee  Edward  lalaad ▲bvatDoe.15 About  Apr.  1;  bay  iee  often     -       -     •■ 


Vaiieii;  about  May  I  About  Feb.  I. 

With  weatrrly  wiDiU   Jan.S.l^M... 

Apr.  15  to  Hay  1 Jan.  I 

None ■•'  Jan.O 


EadofApr  

Mono Deo.20 


Apr.  M  , 


do 


MalpequcPrinee  Edward  laUad Not  mntil  eioaed  by  flold  ice 


Boaria,  Priaca  Edward  lalaad. 
Plrtoa,iroTa8e*tla 


Bhadlaa^NawBniaawiak 

If  liaakkl  Bay,  Now  Bnaawtok 
MMppaiaa.  How  Bmaawtek 


Caraaaattak  Haw  Bmawlek 
OalhoMiarKaw  Btnaawiek .. 

OaapAHaw  Bmaawtek 

Cape  HagdalaB,  Qaabaa 


Vatkar  Palat,  Qaebee . 


■iPtom 

SkFaalaUand. 


Apr.  1  i  drlrea  back  harbor 
thick  and  hard  on  May  1.        ic*. 
Mayl Jan.  16 


...do Dee.  II 

May  10 Dec.  20  to  IS  . 

Apr.  1  to  May  I End  of  Deo., 


Jaa.4tal0 Apr.  1  to  10 About  Feb.  I 

Doo-M Apr.U But  little  Held  Ice. 


May  15 MlddleofDec.;  eel 

leetoproTontTea 
Ing  natll  Jan. 

Apr.  1  to  Mayl Jaa.2: 

...: D«o.ai 


D*a.t.. 
Dao.1. 
Dae.S. 


NOM. 

do. 


II 

Daa.f 

Oae.M 

Oae.UtaJaa.1. 


Blvar  taialy  fraaaai;  aaly 
••Ttaila*. 


Apr.M 

Apr.  11 

MaT4 !  Hob*  alnce  aprioc  of  1870, 

I     then  May  li. 

lt«y« I  H«wt 

Apr.l5 ....d* 

MayW ....do 

Apr.  10  to  19 do 


None DocS 

..  do HoT.25 

Jnne4,1870 Not. II 

None '  HoT.SS 

...  do -.    NoT.ie 

...do Deo.4t*0 

....do HoT.SStoD**.5. 


Doe.  0^  mean  of  4  year* Apr.  1  mean  of  4  year* Not.  Mi  mean  of  • ; 


OMataMyoan fbb.  t*  Mar.,  fleatiag  ioa    Vab.l9;  dapond*  upon  wind.  Baroly  reaains  aaylaagtk    Opaaatall 

*         "       *  oftime. 


ikaai  a^Jacaat  eoTc*. 


▲iik*nL8.1fu|dal*a  lalaa 
AaMeaiu.  SMlSwaal  Patat 
Cap*  Hataa 

WktUBt^i' 


Cap*  Hir"Mai.H*wfcaadlaad 
~      'kBt^awtoudkMd 


JV H*wroBadlaad  ..*... 

(BaMaOara),  Nawfbaadknd . 


Jaa.ll May  31 Deo.li.. 

Jaa.1 I  M^IO Jaa.» May  13 Dae. IT.. 

Daa,li Mar.Sl Jaa.llol5 Mar.  SI  to  A  or.  SO Dae.5... 

D*a.»t*JaaM May8«,Mli 0*cS4,iaBT !  Junall.Uar Nor.  16'. 

May  10  to  June  26. 


■xpMtaBantUaMt 

.HawtMikUaai. 


Ha>k*r.3r*w«MM«lHd . 
r,H*wllMndkHid.. 


iHaikar.HawtNwdlaai. 
TMattj  Harbor,  HawCMwttaad ... 


Baata  Harkar,  Nawtkaadlaad . . 
Heart*  CoatHit,  XawfcaadhMd. 

Haiber  Otaeo,  Howfbaadlaad .. 


M^JakM  Haibar,HawCMBdkBd. 

FMtylaad,Hawfbaadlaad 

Guf  Baa%  HowllwiadUad 

TNpaiay  Hatbav,  H*wa 
Placaatia,  Howlbaadkurf . 


ImmUb  Harkar.HowfiNadlaad. 


Onadl 
Harbor 


HowtMndfaMd. 


U  Haa*  Bay,  Hawlbaadlaad . 
Banro,  Nawlbaadlaad 


La  Paila  Harbor,  Hawlbiiadlaad. 
Ckaaaal,  KawfoMBdlaad 


Bay  of  lalaad*  {Haaibar  RItw),  N*wfoaadlaad. 

BeaaoB^iMawfeaadlaBd 

BtohPoiat^Newlboadlaad 

Oiaaaly  lalaad 

Balte  Ua 

Battle  Harbar.  '.«1iimIm 


Jaa.tt 

JaM.lt*M. 


Jaa.!...; 

Jaa.lt*nk.M,aTi 


Jaa-tSalf. 

Jaa.! 

JBB.U 


Jaa.M. 
JaB.91. 


abairtVMk.1. 

Jaa.UtaVak.ia 


Baialjr 


Many    kiwkad    If 


▲kaatVakl. 


•aU  iaaltdvaat  a  ttoa, 
aatftma  rrg  il  IbI» 
Tatoraiylt  fkaa  ■  t*  M 
yaafa. 
HafW 


Qatar  aa*k**aa*  aaldam 
ftaaMtar  BMMlkaB  S«r 
S4aya.  la—r  aaakarag* 
fk«ailaB.ltaApr.  IS. 

AkoBt  Daa.  I,  k«t  aaalljr 


VavavnaaMii  __^ 

Ua^udkiy  drill  laa  ftaai 
aMaaaat  «*Taa. 

w^^wZ. 


Baraly  fkaaaa. 


MayM. 


Mays 

Mayl  to  10. 


Doe.  as.  to  Jaa.  10. 


May  10  to  June  IS. 


NaT.  SO. 


Apr.  15  to  Jaa*  4.  aTcragiaK 

about  May  10. 
▲pr.tt 

^y::::::r:;..:::::"" 


Mar.M. 
Mar.  IS. 


Mar.  4 1*  May  a,  aT*iaglBg 

Apr.  It. 
Mar.ltoApr.l 


Mar.M. 


Apr.l. 


▼■Mil*  eaa  aaarly  alway* 

*at«rbyAprU. 
Mot**  oir  witk  aorthcrly 

wiad,  aad  diaappaar*  la 

Mar^. 


vhB*  *v  ■••■  >  >■•■•■  <■>•>■  ••• 

A^Na  AVo  ••>•«■■■■••••■•  ••■■• 

D*e.Ut*Jaa.tl 


Da&U.    Ha< 
4  waak* 


Apr  M 

Apr.  15 

May  10 

Mar.  1  to  10 

•  •••••  •■••■••••■•■ 

May  II 


Iieb.lOtell Apr.M 

Jaa.  10 Mayl  to  10. 


Jaa.  IS  to  80 1  May  lte20 

Jaa.  11 j  M^IS 

JaB.14 MayltoJnaol. 


Mar.  11 May  11 


VakM., 
Apr.  10  . 


M«ylS. 

Apr.  31 . 


Apr.l ;  Uneertaia  .. 

Apr.lS I  May  15 

Jaa.  10  to  Feb.  20 '  MayltelO. 


Dae.T 

Jaa.lt*  10. 


About  Job.  1. 


Jaa.M.. 
Jaa.'?"! 


Dae.  IS 
Jaa.n.< 

OacM.. 


Jaa.toF*kU i  Apr.orMay 

Fab.  10  to  Apr.  10,  iBMn  of  '  F*b.3S  to  Apr.  SO, 
IS  yoai*.  IS  yaara. 

Jaa.10  to  Mar.lT,Bi«an  of  Mar.U  ta  Jnn*  7. 
M  y*ar*.  1     28  y 


of 
•f 


Raraly  aay.  aaly  witk  aantk- 
arly  wlaa  alrar  to*  haa 
louded  C^e  Baee. 


AbaatMar.l |  AbantApr.  I. 

VaklS i  Marts 


Feb.  (rare  oocnrraBC*) 


Barely 


For  a  fbw  day*  fai  Feb.  i 
aad  Mar. 

JaB.l  

JaB.  IS.... .......■...■>. 

V  H^h  A0... .....*..■...... 

JaB.ltolO 

Jaa.StoFob.lS 

Jaa. to  Apr.lS 


Apr.  1 . 


Apr.lS , 

Apr.lS 

May  IS  

Jane  10  to  SO. 

JnaaM...... 

MayU 


Vaaaali  aoaiB  aad  gt 
ranadiaaoM 
byMdiea. 


Daa-M.. 
De«.lS., 


OpaaataUaaaaoa* 
ArrlT*  and  d*part  I 

NaTlgatbm  aaariy 

opaafaibay. 
0*a*rally  opoa  all 


Jaa.1 

Jaa.1 

NaT.  10 

KaT.Stall. 


6489^fiM)e  p.  242 


IME  OF  OPENING  AND  CLOSING  OF  PORTS. 


iDM  ol  fleld  Ice. 


Departara  of  ImI  retmel  b«- 
hra  Ic*  MMOU. 


ArriTnl  of  ttrat  tmmI  allrr 
tea  I 


Completely  or  partially 
cloicti. 


Inlf  rTal.  If  complctaly  i-loned. 


Tbicknaas  of  Iva. 


Keniarka,  anil  rrcorda  of  previiiui 
yeara. 


I Dac.22,lM5. 

30 Feb.20 


Apr.I>.iaM AttotarraU   

Maris At  InterraU  by  Heltl  lee 


lilt  May  1 


Jaa.  I  to  Apr.  tS  . 
Soulbweat    arm 
wluler. 


open 


all 


...    About  Feb.l... Qenerally  In  Uar At  Inlerrata   by  fleld   lee, 

never  by-  harbor  lee. 

riy  wloila   Jan.S.l^M Apr.M,lM0 AveraReS month* eaoh year    Jan.toApr 

oloaed. 

lav  1 Jan.l Ifayl Completely  at  llmea 

Jan.S Apr.M liome   yeara  at    Interrala, 

other  yeara  oompletely. 

Completely 

Da«.20 Apr.ta do 


Jan.  IK  to  Apr.  IS 
Jan.  W  to  Apr.  IS 


Jan.  to  Apr .... 
L»«e.  lOto  Apr 


AboiitJfeet 

Northeakt  arm  6  to  IS  Incbea. 

Harbor  Ice  a'uuat  t  Incbea  . .    Keeord  23   yeara,  open  generally  all 

the  year  rouLd. 
•  to  10  Inches 

18 Incbea  

— do Mean  of  30  yeara. 


do 


ajl. 


Deo.ll Apr.24 

DecWtoSS Apr.M 

BndofDeo Mayltol*. 


do. 
do. 
do  . 


Dec.  10  to  Apr.  10  . 


Middle  of  Dec.;  aeldom  any     M«y  IS At  latorrala  natil  Feb.  I . 

leetopreTentTeaeelaleaT- ' 

ing  natll  Jan. 

ay  1 Jaa.2'. I  Apr.M Completely 

Deo.31 Apr.M d« 


Jan.  1  to  Apr.  10 
Deo.  10  to  May  1 , 
plaea  open  later 


rn^ffi!"' 


l2Mltlochea Mean  of  13  yeant' cloaing;  remainder 

mean  of  31  yeara. 

13ineuaa.  Mean  of  •  yeara. 

Stol2  Incbea 

Abuatlfect Mean  of  12  yeara. 


Dee.8 Apr.tO 

NoT.tS I  May 7... 

NoT.lt I  May2l.. 


do. 
.do. 


Completely  (rmn  Feb.  1  to 
May  1. 


^JalLUtoApr.S. 
i  Jan.  •  to  Apr.  8  . . 


NoT.M I  May  12 i. 

-.    Mot.  18 May 8 I....00 

Dee.4to8 1  Mayll i  ..  do 

NoT.SStoDae.B I  Apr.l4toMayl Oenorally  la  motion  all  wto- 

I                                              I     tar. 
Bof4yaM'a Nor.  M^  mean  of  f  yeara....  1  Apr.Sl.maaaofTyaara  ....1  Completely  at  laterTala i 


Dro.8to  Apr.M 

Karly  la  Dee.  to  Apr.  18. 
■Mly  la  Dee.  to  May  10 

Oee.l8toMay8 

Ooe.l8toMaT8 

Dee.MtoMaTlO 

Jaa.ltoApr.M 


1  to  2  feet Mean  of  18  yeara. 

10to20inohea Mean  of  S  yeara;   ferry-boat  raa  in 

I     track  eicept  fhtni  Feb,  8  to  18. 

MtoSSlBohca i  Mean  of  S  yeara. 

I  to  8  feet I  Mean  of  S8  yeara. 

MtoMiachae ' 


ito8feet: 

4feet 

8feet 

10  to  M  iachoe  . 


any  length    Opaa  at  all  itaaona . 
Dee.  18 


17.. 
Ipr.M Dee.8... 

m. NoT.ir. 

28. 


Funei 

rune  18 MoT.M. 


Dee.7 

Jan.  lie  10. 


Apr.  18 

A^.lSleliUr^' 


AbontJiB.!. 


May  I 

MajM 

Miurltoio. 


0«3j*«^.h.»r..tadhx 


HaTigalton  eloaad  between 
Doe.  10  and  Apr.  10 1 
patba  aro  open  aboot  half 
MthotiMC 


Ordiaary  field  lee. 


Dae.  IT  to  Maj  10. 
OomplMaly 


Jan.1  toApr.l. 
Doe.toMay  .... 


MayltaM. 


Jan.  18 1  Apr.T 


Jan.? Apr.M 


Dae.M 
ttm.n.. 

Oae.M., 


kpr.N, 

Jane  7, 


Yeaaala  eeme  and  go  all  year 
T— ad  I  ionietlmea  deliared 
byflridleo. 

......do 


Doa.M.. 
Deals.. 


OpanataUaaaaoMi 

AriiTo  and  depart  at  an  I 


NaTigatfcm  nearif  ahraja 

opon  In  bay. 
Gonerally  open  all  the  year 

ronnd. 

Jaa.l 

Jaa.1 : 

Not.  10 

KoT.8toU 


MiVKatintorralai 

tar). 
Mar.8 


Apr.U. 


Mar.8.. 

Apr.M. 


May  IS 

May  I 

May  18 

Jane  18  to  M  . 


Coapletely 1  Doo.toMay  . 


.do. 
do. 


Oo«pMaly Jan.l8toApr.n 


Jan.  a  to  Apr.M. 
Jan.8toMayU.. 


rob.  1  toApr.l, 


OiwplHily. 


At  brtwata  turn  Jan.  M 
taMivU. 

Attatatralai  allar  twenty* 
Umr  kona  of  aentkwvat 
wind  ^ 
harbor. 

At 


At  IntorTalaftoBi  Jan.  M  to 
Mar.SS. 

At  iatorrala  by  toM  lea . . . . 


Completely  oloaed  twtee  in 

Myeaia. 
At  Interrala  by  Md  loo .... 


Only  at  IntorTala , 


At  IntarTaU  turn  Mar.  1  to 
At  interrala  by  field  ioe  .. . 


Coapletely. 
do 


At  interrala. 


OoMplotely  flroM  Fob.  •  lo 
Mar.  9,  atlntarralafkMi 
Jan.UtoFA& 


ItoOfcet 
ISInebca. 


StoSfeot. 

...do 

Sfoot 

...do 


SfM. 


FebMtoMar.M. 


Dee.  28  to  Apr.M 

Jan.toApr 

Ooe.lStoMayM 

Oompleteiy  at  Umea  by  field 


fitolSinehea. 


8tol8iaehaa. 


Harbor  too  1  or  2  iaebeo . 


•  iaehea . 
4  inchca. 


18  iaehea.. 

SIbet 

8feet 

StoSfeot. 


Mean  of  8  yeare. 
Mean  of  IS  yeara. 


There  ia  rarely  any  beOTy  ieo  nntU 
end  of  Dee.  There  ia  alwaya  a  eban. 
nel  of  open  wator  on  north  or  aoath 
aide  or  tbo  rlTer,  depending  open 
wlad.  Wind  Teloeity  of  7  ■Deo  per 
boor  aaflleient  to  diiTo  too  to  aild. 
ehannoL  gometiatoa  o 
laato  amonth  at  a  daM. 


Mean  of  8  yeara  1  heoTy  leofkoniaboat 
Feb.  18  to  Apr.  SO. 

Mean  of  M  yeare 

Mean  of  M  yeaia. 

FloU  loo  baa  remained  antfl  Joly  1 
and  baa  diaappearod  by  Apr.  18. 

Meaaof  10  yeara  1  acoliagatoaaaoraen- 
tor  all  montba;  other  atooaMn  ean 
fni^iaalnaally  entor. 
Open  at  IntorTala  batwoaa  Apr.  1  abd 

Oeen-yjllyop.. 


Datea  Tariable 
Mean  of  IS  yeara. 

Mean  of  10  yeaiai  noTor 
■ore  than  8  weeka  at  a  " 


eloaad  for 


Mail  Bteamer  nnaMa  to 
8  ttanea  In  M  yeara. 


enlat  «n^ 


NaTigation  cloaod  only  8  or  8 
M  yeara. 


tlmoain 


NoTor  froien  until  arriral  of  field  loo. 


INDEX. 


Pue. 
A. 

L'Abatis 814 

Abatis,  Petit  814 

Aooni  Point CA 

AgwaniisKiver 155 

Abab  Bay 2« 

Aid  Islet 143 

Al'AigleCape 193,814 

Airy  Cape 144 

AloideRook 119 

Alemek  Bay 96 

Aleinek,  Little,  Bay 96 

Alexander  Polut 97 

Algernon  or  South  Rook 801 

AlrightCape 33 

Alright  Island  and  Reef 33 

Alston  Point 100 

American  Bank 110 

Amherst  Harbor 34 

Amherst  Island 34,35 

Ammonite  Point 159 

Anchor  Ijland  and  Reef. 131, 138, 167 

Andre,  St.,  Bank 187 

Andre,  St.,  Church  and  Point. ..  188 

Andromache  Rocks 35 

Ange  Oardien  Church 317 

Anne  Point,  beacon 115 

Anne,  St.,  Bay 188 

Anne,  St.,  buoy 188 

Anne,* St.,  Cape 114 

Anne,  St.,  Church 188,817 

Anne,  St.,  Mountains 114 

Anne,  St.,  River 115 

Anne,  St.,  supplies 4..  115 

Anne,  St.,  shoals 188 

Anticosti  Island 38 

Antioosti  Island,  aspect  of  coast.  38 
Anticosti  Island,   banks  off  K. 

coast 14 

Anticostj  Island,  caution 41 

Anticosti  Island,  climate 39 

Antioosti  Island,  currents 45 

Anticosti  Island,  direction  boards  40 


Anticosti  Island,  exportR,fl8heriea  39 

AnticoHti  Island,  N.  point,  beacon  43 

AntiouHti  Island,  passage  N.  of. .  14 

Anticosti  Island,  passage  S.  of. . .  16 

Antioosti  Island,  productions  ...  39 

Anticosti  Island,  provision  posts.  39 

Antioosti  Island,  S.  point,  beacon  40 

Anticosti  Island,  SW.  point 41 

Anticosti  Island,  tides ...  45 

Anticosti  Island,  W.  cliff,  beacon  43 

Antioosti  Island,  W.  point 43 

Anticosti  Island  to  Point  deMonts  16 

Antrobus  Point 141 

Appeetetat  Bay 156 

Apple  Island 181 

L'Archevequo  Cove 64 

Archibald  Point 68 

Arignole  Bay 118 

Arignole  Cape  and  Reef 118 

AspeeBay 68 

Aspee  Bay,  anchorage 69 

Aspee  Bay,  supplies 69 

Aspee  Bay,  telegraph... :.< 69 

Atlantic  Cove 88 

Audubon  Isle  and  Point 150 

AudnbonRocks 150 

Augustine,  Chain 136 

Augustine,  St.,  Cove 176 

Augustine,  St.,  Harbor 184, 136 

Augustine,  St.,  fishing  establish- 
ment  V 134 

Augustine,  St.,  Port 136 

Augustine,  St.,  River 136 

Ana  Monohes  River... 137 

AylmerSonnd 143 

B. 

Baddeok 73 

Baddeck,  supplies 78 

Baddeck  Bay 78 

Baddeck  Harbor 72 

Baddeok  Harbor,  directions 73 

Baddeck  River 73 

348 


244 


INDEX. 


I 


I'»gr 

HftdNeiKhlior    M 

Balance  Capn 1 1& 

Baleiiie  Harbor M 

Ballaiii  Head HO 

Ballam  Shoal HO 

Baraohiii^  Harbor 77 

Bar  Point :.8,6« 

Bar  B«ef 68,  IIW 

Bar  Stone fiS 

Bit  re  Rook 117 

Bare  Rockn 14(i 

Ilarnaby  Inland  91,117 

Biiriiaby  Road,  xlioal 117 

Barometer,  marine ft 

Bar<|iie  CovM 'iSl 

Barra  Shoal 74 

Barra  Strait 74 

Barra  Stntit,  tlintctions 75 

Uarra  Htrait,  titlea 75 

Barreaii  Point 112 

Barrett  LeAgeB 185 

Barrier  Reefs '.....  I'ii 

Burthelenii,  8t.,  Iiile 'HI 

Bartilmqne  Island 87 

Bartihn(ine  River 88 

Ba.si  1 1  ( Coaooaclio  Bay ) 15 1 

Basin  (Magdalen  Islands) :I5 

Bason  River   168 

Basque  Cape 193 

Basque  Harbor(  Magdalen  Island)  34 

Basqne  Island 121 

Basque  Ronfs 121 

BaH(|iio  Islands 54,170 

Basque  Roa<l  ■ 193 

Basque  Shoal 64 

Basse  Bay 97 

Bathurst  Harbor 100 

Bathnrst  Harbor,  anchorage 101 

Bathurst  Harbor,  bar 101 

Bathurst  or  Indian  Islet 101 

Bathurst,  pilots lUl 

Bathurst  River 101 

Bathurst,  tldet. 101 

Batti  ry  Point 57 

Battery  Shoal 67 

Bay  of  Rooks 143,185,19:1 

Beach  Point 66 

Beacon  Islet 130,146 

Beacon  Islet,  recf  off 130 

Bear  Bay,  anchorage 44 

Buar  Head,  beacon 44 

BearHiU 53 

Bear  R    er.: 44 

Beanb^.-e  Island 90 


Psf*. 

Heat^eu  Hank Wi 

Beanjen  Mitnk,  buoys 202,203 

Beaujeu  Bank,  cbannoU 203 

Beaujeu  lUiik,  to  pass  N.ol' 203,205 

Beaujeu  Bank,  to  pass  S.  of 203, 206 

BeuHiuout  churuli  and  mill 207,208 

Beaumont  Shoals 807 

Beanport  Bank 911 

Beaver  Point 102 

Becket  River 60 

Becscie  River 49 

Belle  ChMMse  Island 203. 207 

Belle  Cliasse  RIvMr 207 

Belledune  Point 101 

Belle  Isle  Strait 123 

Belle  Isle  Strait,  ice 123 

Belle    Isle    Strait,    not    recnm- 

tnendeil 25 

Belle  Isle  Strait,  tides  and  cur- 
rents   8,123 

Belles  Anionrs  Harbor 125, 127 

Belles  Amours,  directions.   .....  128 

Belles  Amours,  water 127 

Belles  Amours  Point 125,127 

Belles  Amonra  Shoal.. 127 

Bell  Point 54 

Bell  Rock 73 

Bentinok  Point 67 

Bergeron  Coves -181 

Bernache  Point 97 

Bersimis  Point 180  . 

Bersi  mis  Pol  nt,  shoal  off 1 80 

Borsimls  River 179 

Bersimii  River,  bar  179 

Bertbier,  church 198,207 

Berthier,  east  point 207 

Bertbier,  east  point  rocks 207 

Betchewun  Harbor 158 

Betohewnn  Harbor,  dir<.olionB  ..  158 

Betchewnn,  inner  harbor 158 

BovisPort 71 

Bevis  Port,  anchorage 71 

BicChannel ISO 

BioChannel,  anchorages 119 

Uio  Island 118 

Bic  Island,  anchorage 119 

Bio  Island,  northeast  reef 119 

Bio  Island,  northwest  reef 118 

Bio  Island,  southeast  reef 119 

Bic  Island,  tides 120 

Bio  Island,  beacons,  water 118 

Bio  Island,  west  grounds *  1 19 

Bic,  Old,  baibor 117 

Bic,  Old,  harbor,  water 118 


L   |:t 


1  SC?? 


p*gf>. 

^n 

■Mi,  406 
a07,'i08 

ao7 
iill 

lOD 

60 

49 

803.807 

807 

101 

183 

183 


nu- 


ll r- 


....* 


25 

8, 183 
185, 187 
188 
187 
185, 187 
187 
64 
73 
67 
181 
97 
IHO 
180 
179 
179 
198,807 
807 
207 
158 
158 
158 
71 
71 
ISO 
119 
118 
119 
119 
118 
119 
120 
118 
119 
117 
118 


Ai 


INDEX. 


245 


Bio,  Old,  road 118 

Bioo(]iieti  Inlet* IIH 

Bloquette  Channel 119 

BioqiiHtto  Channel,  dirtntioni  ..  119 

Bioqiietto  Island lio 

BioquHtte  Inland,  to  pass IH 

Bicquette  Island,  reefs Ug 

Big  Loran  Harbor 58 

Big  Shoal 74 

Birch  Channel ltt:< 

Birch  Islnnds 163 

Birch  Point, 93 

Bird  Island  flO 

Bird  Rock 64 

Bird  Rooks 89 

Bird  Rooks,  bank  of  aonndings..  89 

Bird  Rocks,  oantion 89 

Bird  Rocks,  tides 37 

Bird  RookH  to  Antiooati . ....  14 

Black  Breaker 'i4 

filaokbrook  Cove M 

Blackbrook  Mill 86 

Blaokland  Point 88,91 

Black  Ledge 146 

Black  Point 53, 74,  lOi,  106 

Black  Reef 144 

Black  River 80,87,193 

Black  Rook 53,59 

Blaokrock  Point 64 

Blackrock  Shoal 65 

Blanchard  Point 1^9 

Blaakowitz  Point 168 

BlnbberCove 135 

Bluff  Head 138 

Boatlslands 114 

Bold  Islet 142 

Bold  Rock 130,146 

Bonaui  Point 103 

Bonanii  Rocks 1U3 

Bonar  Head 64 

Bonar  Rocks 64 

Bouaventnre  laland » 109 

Bonaventure  Point 106 

Bonaventnre  Point,  anchorage..  106 

Bonaventure  River 106 

BondesirCape 181 

Bonue  Esperanoe  Harbor 185, 1'W 

Bonne  Esperanoe,  directions 131 

Bonne  Esperanoe,  supplies 131 

Bonne  Esperanoe,  tides  131 

Bonne  Esperanoe  Island 130 

Boot  Point 143 

Boulaoeet  Harbor 73 

Boulardrie  Island 65,70 


I'h||«. 

BouleHay 170 

Itoule  Islands 170 

Uoule  Islet 138 

Bonlet  Islet 133 

BouMier  Itay 147 

Uowen  Rooks 156 

Uoyor  llivor 807 

BradoniBay 185 

Bradore  Harbor 184,186 

Mrador**  Harbor,  aspect  of  uoaHt.  127 

Hradore  Harbor,  dirootions 186 

Uradore  Harbor,  flNhing    estab- 

iinhnient 184 

Brudoro  Harbor,  tides 187 

Hradore  Harbor,  water 186 

Bradore  Hills 184 

Brandy  Pots 184 

Brandy  Pots  Bank 184 

Brandy  Pots  Bank,  anchorage..  184 

Brandy  Pots  Channel 184 

Brandy  Pots  to  the  Traverse  .   .  191 

Bros  D'orOreat 64,70 

Bras  D'or  Great,  Channel 70 

Bran  D'or  Great,  directions 65 

Bras  D'or,  Great,  supplies 65 

Bras  D'or,  Little,  Channel 64 

Bras  D'or  Lakes 73,75 

Bras  D'or  Lake,  Little 64, 73 

Bras  D'or  Lake,  Little,  tides 66 

Breakiug  Ledge 131 

BruedingCove 67 

Breton  Cape 58 

Breton  Island 47 

Breton,  NE.  noast 69 

Breton,  NE.  coast  currents 69 

Breton,  NW.  coast 47 

Breton,  SB.  coast 53 

Brideau  Point 100 

Bridgeport  Harbor 62 

Broad  Shoal 57 

Brul6  Banks 816 

Brul<S  Cape Ill 

Brul(<  Point 9« 

Biyoii  Island 21* 

Bryon  Island,  fishing  grounds..  30 

Brj'ou  Island  Reefs 39 

Bryon  Island,  tides 37 

Bryon  Island,  water 89 

BuohanPoint 168 

Buohan  River 168 

Bnpyage,  system  of 85 

Burnt  Cape  Ledge 816 

Burnt  Church 88 

Burnt  Church  Village 88 


INDEX. 


Burnt  ItUnil .• 

Bnnit  point 

Burnt  Sbokl 

Botte  Ronde  Hill 

Butte  Rumle,  La  Petite 

o. 

Cabane  Hay 

Cabot  Strait 

Caoard  River 

Caooiina  Beacon  and  Cbnroh .... 

Caoonna  Peninsula 

Caoouna  Rook 

Calumet  River 

Cameron  Island 

Camille  Mount 

Caiupbelltown 

Canard  River 

Cape  Breton  Island 

Cape  Breton  Island,  ourrents... 
Cape  Breton  Island,  NE.   coast, 

description  of 

Cape  Breton  Island,  NW.  coast, 

description  of 

Cape  Breton  Island,  population . 
Cape  Breton  Island,  resources  .. 
Cape  Breton  Island,  S£.  coast  .. 
Cape  Breton  Island,  W.  coast  . . 

Capelin  Cove 

Caplin  River 

Capuchin  Cove 

Oaraqnette,  anohoraKe 

Caraqnette  Bay 

Caraqnette  Buy,  ice 

Caraquette  Channel 

Caraqnette,  directions 

Caraqnette  Harbor 

Caraquette  Island 

Caraquette,  Lower  and  Upper.. 

Caraquette   Shoal 

Caraquette  Steeple 

Careening  Point 

Carey  Po'nt 

Caribou  Island 

Caribou  Point 

Carleton 

Carleton  Mountains 

Carleton  Road 

Carleton  Road,  anchorage 

Carleton  Road,  directions 

Carleton  Road,  tides 

Carlisle »■•. 

Carlisle  Point < 


Caronge  Point  and  Anchorage.. 

Carousel  Island 

Carron  Point 

Gary  Rock 

Casonp«diac  Bay 

Cascapediao  Bay,  anchorage .... 
Casuapediao  Bay,  direotlons  — 
Casoapedlao  Bay,  settlements  .. 

Cascapediao  River 

Catalogue  Lake 

Catherine,  St.,  Bay 

Catherine  Pond 

Cat  Rocks 

I  Caveau  Point 

Caveau  Shoals 

Ca wer,  Oreat,  Island 

Cawee,  Oreat,  Island,  large  rocks 

Cawee,  Oreat,  anchorage 

Cawee,  Oreat,  Cove 

Cawee,  Oreat,  Shoal 

Cawee,  Little  Islands 

Cawee  Ledge. 

Cawee  Rock 

Cawee,  tides 

Cent«n'  Reef 

Chain  Islands 

Chaleurs  Bay 

Chaleurs  Bay,  climate 

Chaleurs  Bay,  direotlons 

Chaleurs  Bay,  features 

Chaleurs  Bay,  fogs 

Chaleurs  Bay,  navigation 

Chaleurs  Bay,  settlemenU 

Chaleurs  Bay,  soundings 

ChalenrsBay,  tides 

Chamean  Rock ... 

Champlain  Village 

Channel  Island 

Channel  Patch 

Channel  Patch  Buoy 

Channel  Patch  Shoals 

Chapel  Islet 

Chapel  Point 

CbapelRock 

Charles  Harbor 

Charles  Harbor,  directions 

Charles  Harbor,  tides 

Charles  Island 

Charles,  St.,  Point 

Charles,  St.,  Reef 

Charles,  St.,  River 

Charles,  St.  Rlvor,  Docks  

Charleton  Point ■ 

Charlo  River 


\.Vifr7yrL 


r 


INDKX. 


247 


3113 
170 
100 

59 
106 
106 
106 
106 
106 

61 

48 

141 

59 

59 

173 

173 

178 

173 

173 

173 

173 

17;l 

173 

146 

130 

94 

94 

94 

94 

94 

94 

94 

95 

94 

&H 

i»3 

133 

SiOO 

300 

300 

76 

70 

802 

159 

169 

169 

168 

109 

1G9 

311 

312 

44 

102 


L 


Pacv. 

OhM«4  Point 171 

Gta«th»ni 0U 

ChAthfttii,  »<>h1 MO 

Obathsm,  ion 89 

Oh»(h»in,  poptiUtloii 89 

OhAthum,  rkllroMl  f» 

Ohatham,  repkira >^ 

Ob»th»ni,  MiippllM 89 

Olutliam,  t«lMKr»pli Ht* 

Obftteau  RlohetC'hiiroh 317 

ObattoCApe 115 

Ob«tt«  Cape  t<>  Mataa  River,  aa- 

paotofouaat 115 

Cbatte  River 115 

Obaudiftre  River 311,333 

Obatiean  Inland 51 

Ohetican  I«la:ul,  anohoraKe 53 

Obetioan  Harlior 53 

Ohetican  Harbor,  eiipplleii 53 

Obetioan  1  (arbor,  tidea 53 

Obetioan  Point v 53 

Cbeval  Point h7 

Obioontimi  River 333 

Cbioontimi  River,  tidee 319 

Gbiooutimi,  tradioKpuHt 333 

Obriatmai  Island 74,  77 

Ohriatuiaa  Island,  anoborage ....  74 

Cbri  stmae  Island,  bnoy age 74 

Cbristmaa  Pond 77 

Oiboux  Island 6U 

ClbouxRook m 

OlarkeCove 80 

Clande  River 114 

Olear water  Point 159 

Clearwater  Shoals 16*i 

Cliff  Islands 144,  308 

Oliniate 134 

Close  Islet 113 

Cloudberry  Point 151 

Cloudberry  Shoal 153 

Cluster  Point  143 

CoaooaoboBay    150 

Coaooacho  Bay,  Basin 151 

Coacoacbo  Bay,  directions 150 

Coacoaobo  Bay,  tidea 151 

Coaooaoho  River 151 

Coacoaobo  River,  trading  post..  151 

Cook  Cove,  anchorage 116,  117 

Cook  Point 117 

GodSboal  7« 

Coffin  Island 33,71 

CofflnPoint 71 

Collins'  Shoal  ( Mingan  Island ) . .  157 

Collins' Shoal  (N.  ooaat) 153 


Coiomltier  Cape IHO 

Colnnibino  Shoals 33 

CorbeanCape 194,313 

C'orlllalldi^re  Rooks 60 

Cormorant  Cap«^ 168 

Cormorant  Iwlets 168 

Cormorant  I'oliit  (Antloosti) ....  40 

Cormorant  Reef 168 

Comiornnt  Rocks 55,  147 

Coaaot  I'oint 77 

Comlres  Manic 315 

Condres  Island 314 

Cove  Island 145 

Cove  Point 141 

CowBay 61,  78 

Cow  Bay,  coal 61 

Cow  Bay,  ice 61 

CowPolnt 73 

Cow  Reef 01 

Crab  Island 133 

Craiguish  Churob 47 

Craig  Point 143 

Crammond  Island 81 

Cranberry  Head 64 

Cranberry  Point 73 

Crane  Island 801,  303.  308 

Crane  Island,  Beacons 303,  308 

Crane  Ibland,  prohibited  anchor- 
age   302 

Crane  Island  Spit 808 

Crane  Island  to  Quebec 806 

Crane  Island  to  Qnebec,  aucbor- 

ages 813 

Crescent  Point 143 

Crocodile  Islet 150 

Croix  Point 171 

Crooked  Islands 174 

CroHS  Point 176 

Crow  Island 187,308 

Crumb  Island 133 

Cumberland  Harbor 135 

Cumberland  Harbor,  directions  .  136 

Cumberland  Island 135 

Cnrlew  Point 73,  152 

Currents  and  tides 8 

D. 

Dalbousie 104 

Dalhousie,  anoborage 1 04 

Dalbousie,  directions 104 

Daihousie,  supplies 104 

Dalhousie,  tides 105 

Dalbousie  Harbor 103 

Dalbousie  Island 103 


i-K-i,-/.'  ^'^'--rV  «■"*.■■  Mi^'^-i^-pi" 


':.fmi^iiii'fia^e!as^^jft^»admhA.%.  V"^^^^^  " 


248 


INDEX. 


Dalhouuio  Mountain 

Dalhousie  Point 

Daly  Island 

Daily  Point 

Daniel  Hill 

Daniel, Port 

Daniel,  Port,  anchorage  — 

Daniel,  Port,  supplies 

Dartmouth  F.i  ver 

Dauphin,  Cape 

Dauphin,  Port 

Dead  Cove 

Deaduian  Islet 

Dean  Shoal 

Demers  Rock ■ 

Demoiselle  Hill 

Denis,  St.,  Point 

Denny  River 

Derby  Point 

d'Espoir,  Cape 

Descente  des  Femmes  Cove 
Deviation  of  the  compass. 


Page. 
103 
103 
142 
63 
107 
108 
108  I 
108  I 

ml 

66 

66 

139 

36 

48 
185 

33 
188 

75 

74 
109 

1 
D.able,  Cape  187,188 


Page. 

60 
31 
31 


Diamond  Harbor 

Dick  Rook 

Dike  Island 

Diver  Islet 

DockPoinf  

Doctor  Island 

Dog  Rooks 

Dog  Islands 

Dogs,  Cape 


212 

59 

140 

134 

76 

76 

133 

133 

193 

Dona  Point 98,100 

Double  Island 73 

Douglas  Roadstead,  town Ill 

Douglastovrn 89 

Doyle  Islands 143 

Doyle  Reef 32 

Duck  Rock 59 

Duflfus  Point 64,71 

Dukes  Island 135,136 

Dumpling  Island 81 

Duncan  Head 65,71 

Dunscombe  Rook 202 

Durantaye  Point 207 

Duthie  Point 106 

Dyson  Pond 62 


East  Cupe  (Saguenay  River) .... 

East  Harbor 

East  Island 

East  Point 

East  Rooks 68,170 

Eastern  Narrows 216 

Ebonlements  Bay 194 

Ebonlements,  Mount 194,214 

Ebonlements  Settlement 194 

Echafaud  Islet 193 

Eden  Islands 142 

Eddy  Rock 64 

Egg  Island 86,174 

Egg  Island,  anchorage 175 

Egg  Island,  directions 175 

Egg  Island,  tides 175 

Egg  Island,  water 174 

Egg  Rocks 136 

Egiuont,  Cape 68 

Eider  group 133 

Ellis  Bay 42 

Ellis  Bay,  anchorage 42 

Ellis  Bay,  directions 42 

Ell  Is  Bay,  provision  depot 40 

Ellis  Bay,  reefs i2 

Emersion  Point 47 

Emery  Island 150 

EnglishBank 188 

English  Bay 177 

English  Point 174 

Enter  Islet 135 

Entrance  Island I'^O 

Entry  ."Grand,  Harbor 32 

Entry  Island 35 

En  try  Island,  anchorage 35 

Entry  Island,  directions 37 

Entry  Island,  supplies 35 

Esouminao 82 

Escuminao  Point 82 

Escnmipac  Point,  reef 

Escuminac  Point,  tides 

Eskiscogumic 

Esqnimine  Isiets 

Esquimaux  Bay 124,132 

Esquimaux  Bay,  fishing  estab- 
lishment   124 

Esquimaux  Bay,  channel 132 

Esquimaux  Bay,  harbor 132, 161 

Esquimaux  Bay,  directions 161 

Esquimaux  Bay,  supplies tCl 

Esquimaux  Bay,  tides 162 

Esquimaux  Bay,  harbor  islands..  129, 160 

Esquimaux  Island 129, 132, 161 

Esquimaux  Point 159 


82 
77 
lUl 


Page. 
)r)....    S»2 
60 
31 
....     31 
....  68,170 
216 
194 
....  194, '214 
194 
193 
142 
64 

86,174 

175 
175 
175 
174 
136 
68 
133 

42 

42 
42 

40 

12 

47 

150 

188 

177 

174 

135 

I'O 

32 

, 35 

36 

37 

35 

82 

82 

82 

82 

77 

181 

1)24,132 

;  cstab- 

124 

132 

132,161 

as 161 

lei 

162 

ilauds..  129,160 
....129,132,161 
159 


INDEX. 


249 


Page. 

Esqnimanx  River 132 

Etaiuamu  River 124, 147 


Etamarau  River,  trading  post 

Etang  du  Nord  Islet 

Eternity  Cove 

Etienne,  St.,  Bay  aud  River. . 
Eug&ne,  St.,  Churcli 


F. 

Fader  Point. 

Fair  Island 

Fall  River 

FalHe  Bay  beach 

Fatlier  Point 

Father  Point,  bank  of  soundings 

Father  Point,  pilots 

Fin  Rooks 

Fish  Harbor 

Fish  Islet 

Fish,  Little,  Harbor,  fishing  es* 

tablishuient 

Fisherman  Channel 

Fisherman  Ledge 

Fishery  Cove 

Fishery  Point 

Five- Leagues  Harbor 

Five-Leagnes  Point 

Flat  Island 

Flat  Islands 

Flat  Point 

Flat  Rock 

Flat  Rocks 

Flfnrant  Point 

Flint  Island 

Flodalsland — 

Flowerpot  Colnnius 

Flowerpot  Rock 

Fogs   

Forks  Lake 

Fort  Island 

Fort  Rocks 

Fort,  Old,  Bay 

Fort,  Ol'i,  Channul 

Fort,  Old,  Island 

Foul  Rock 

Fourcli^  Bay 

Fonrch^  Head 

Fourchfe  Inlet 

Four- Fathoms  Ridge 

Fonr  Rocks  

Fowler  Point...'. 

Fox  Bay 

Fox  Bay,  anchorage 

Fox  Gully 


147 

222 
221 
198 


67 
13iJ 
168 

61 
177 

19 

19 
141 
137 
130 

1S4 

98 
9rt 
64 
49 
128, 129 
1,»8 
138 
138  ; 
47! 
110  i 
127  I 

ir-  ! 

62  ! 

81  I 

16:)  I 

110  ] 

4  ' 

81  I 

-       57  I 

132  i 
125, 13  i  I 

133  i 
132  I 
142 

55 

55 

55 

167 

133 

102 

44 

45 

82 


Page. 

Fox  Island 83 

Fox  Islands 137 

Fox  Point 44 

Fox  River 113 

Fox  River,  supplies 113 

Frambois  Cove 55 

Frambois  Rock 55 

Frambois  Shoal 55 

Francois,  St.,  Church 216 

Frazer  Point 71 

French  River 67,86 

French  River  Point 83, 86 

French  Village 83,86 

Frigate  Point  Beacon 113 

Fright  Channel  and  Island 160 

O. 

Gabarus  Bay 55 

Gabarns  Cape —  53,56 

Gabarus  Cove 56 

Gabarus  Cove,  anchorage 56 

Gabarus  Cove,  directions 56 

Gabarus  Cove,  supplies 56 

Gabarus  Cove,  tides .56 

Gauiache  River 42 

GardeRock 157 

Gasp6  Basin Ill 

Gaap6  Basin,  cautiou 112 

Gusp^  Basin,  consul 112 

Ga.'p^  Basin,  supplies 112 

Gti8p<5B»,r 110 

^asp6  Bay,  anchorage 1 10 

Gasp^  Bay,  caution 112 

Gaspi$  Bay,  winds 112 

Ga«p^Cape 110 

Gasp^  Cape  to  Cape  Chatte,  as- 
pect of  coast 112 

Ga8p6  Harbor Ill 

Gesp6,  Little 110 

General  remarks 1 

Genevieve,  St. ,  Harbor 153, 157 

Genevieve,  St., Harbor,  directions  157 

Gteaevieve,  St.,  Harimr,  Hiipplies.  157 

Genevieve,  St. ,  Island 156 

Ghjnevieve,  St ,  Island,  tides 158 

Genevieve  St.,  Mount  156 

Gentilly  Shoals 223 

Gentilly  Village 823 

George,  Cape 76 

George  Island 78,80 

George,  St.,  Cove 110 

Giles,  St.,  Anne  & 198 

Giles,  St.,  Point 176,178 

Gi!lis  Point 73,78 


,-.■.  \j&rt-;.^-'>»;iy:^«fe\sv.:«K.fi«!^'a^^attj^*'1^»MaCi>i»*,;':V-%:T^^ 


.^■^■■^??  tU^iMi'j^'^^avi.'M 


'^       -^ 


250 


INDEX. 


im 


Page. 

78 

63 

62 

130 

176 

17« 

176 

«0 

Goose  Cape 194,213 


Gillis  Shoal , .... 

Gillivray  Point 

Glaoe  Bay 

Goddard  Islet  and  Rook 

Godbcut  River 

God  bout  River,  anchorage 

Godbout  River,  trading  post.. .. 
Gooseberry  Pond. 


Goose  Cape,  anohorage 

Goose  Island 

Goose  Island  Meadows 

Goose  Island  Reef 

.-Gore  Islands 

Goufre  River 

Grand  Ause 

Grand  Entry  Harbor 

Grand  Island 

Grand  Metis  Bay  and  River. 
Grand  Pabos 


194 
201 
302 
201 
141 
214 
52 
32 
131 
116 
108 

Grand  River 54,109 

Grand  Point  ( Belle  Isle  Strait) . .  125 

Grand  Point  Reef 125 

Grande  Gr6ve 110 

Grande  Islands 11:^7 

Grande  Matte  River 114 

Grande  Point 213 

Grandoon  Island 88 

Grange  Rook 150 

Great  Anse 98,101 

Great  Anse  Bay 101 

Great  Bird  Rook 29 

Great  Bras  D'or 64,70 

Great  Bras  D'or,  anchorage 64 

Great  Bras  D'or,  cantion  66 

Great  Br.is  D'or,  channel "0 

Great  Bra.i  D'or,  directions 6.5 

Great  Bras  D'or,  Lake 75 

Great  Bras  D'or,  supplies 65 

Great  Bras  D'or,  tides 65 

Great  Pabou 108 

Great  PiMKl 113 

Great  Shag  Rock 59 

Great  Stone 148 

Green  Island 57, 80, 121, 159, 160, 186 

Green  Island,  anchorage 121, 186 

Green  Island  Beacon 183 

Green  Island  Reef 1^1,186 


Green  Island,  tides 121 

Green  Island  to  Brandy  Pota 189 

Qreenlj  Island 123 

Greenly  Island  to  Cape  Whittle, 

coast  ,...  123 

Greenly  Island  to  Cape  Whittle, 

climate 124 


Page. 
Greenly  Island  to  Cape  Whittle, 

inhabitants 124 

Greenly  Island  to  Cape  Whittle, 

fisheries  18* 

GreenPoint 73,98 

GreenRock 55 

Grdlons,  Rocher  aux 202 

Gr6ve,  Grande 110 

GribanneCape 214,216 

Gritfln  Cove  and  River 113 

Griffin  Cove,  supplies 1 13 

Grindstone  Island 34 

Grondine,  tides 223 

Oros  Cap    36,62 

Orosse  Island 206,208,210 

Grosse  Island,  quarantine  anchor- 
age    208 

Grosse  Island,  tail  210 

Grosse  Isle  (Magdalen  Islands) . .  32 

Grosse  Patch 208 

Grosse  Rock  194 

Guarde  Point 105 

Gnll  Island  160 

Gull  Islet  (Labrador)  139 

Gull  Islet  (Magdalen  Islands)  ..  36 

Gull  Ledge  and  Rock  125 

GulnareShoal 180 

Gun  Island  148,157 

Guyon  Island 56 

H. 

Haddock  Bank  65 

Ha-ha  Bay  (Bic  Channel)   118 

Ha-ha  Bay  (Labrador) 137 

HaUliinand  Cape HI 

Hamelle  Harbor  147 

Harbor  Inland  164 

Harbor  Point 66,71,127 

Harbor  Rock 5& 

HarborShoal 57 

Hare  Harbor 141 

Hare  Harbor,  anchorage 142 

Hare  Harbor,  directions   141 

Hare  Harbor,  supplies  14!* 

Hare  Island 184 

Hare  Island,  anchorage 185 

Hare  Island  Bank 184 

Hare  Island  Reefs 183 

Harrington  Islands  143,144 

Harry,  Old,  head 32 

Haulover 76 

Hay  Island   60.88 

Haystack  Island 208 

Head  bay  Cove   81 

Heath  Point 40 


fMi 


*!t. 


Page. 
Iii4 

135 

73,98 

55 

20it 

110 

214,216 

113 

113 

34 

223 

36,52 

5,208,210 

20» 

210 

32 

308 

194 

105 

160 

139 

36 

125 

180 

148, 157 

56 


65 
llc> 
137 
111 
147 
164 
,56,71,127 
55 
57 
141 
142 
..    •       141 
14ii 
184 
185 
184 
183 
..  143,144 
32 
76 
..      60,88 
208 
81 
40 


INDEX. 


Heath  Point,  anohorafce 

Heath  Point,  provision  depot  .. . 

Heath  Point,  reef 

Hector  Hill 

Hector  Point 

He£fernan  Point 

Henry,  Cape,  Reef 

Henry  Island -•- 

Heron  Island '. 

Heron  Island ,  anchorage 

Heron  Channel 

Heron  Rcrok 

Herring  Cove..... 

Herriot  Isles 

Hertford  Island 

Hertford  Ledge 

High  CliflF  Point 

High  Rook 

Horseshoe  Shoal 

Horse,  White.  Reef 

Hospital,  Cape 

Hospital    Rock    (Magdalen   Isl- 
ands)   

Hospital  Rock  (Gk)0Be  Islpnd).. . 

Hottears  River... 

Honse  Harbor 

House  Island 

Hnckleberry  Gaily 

Huckleberry  Island 

Hulk  Rock 

Hume  Islet 

Hunting  Island 


Page. 

40 

40 

40 

74 

74 

47 

42,43 

49 

101 

102 

102 

102 

82 

141 

66 

66 

43 

36 

83 

36 

36 

36 
202 
16") 

33 
131 

82 

8-i 
163 

73 
157 


Island  Harbor 

Island  Point 

L'Islet  C'mrch 

L'lslet  Cross 

L'Islet,  life-boat 

L'Islet  Pier 

L'Islet,  signals 

Isthmus  Cove 

Isthmus  Cove,  witor. 
iHthrans  Point 


I. 


Ice  1-4 

Icebergs  3 

Ice  bridge. 2 

Ice  signals 27 

Ignace,  St.,  Cape 198, 199 

Ignace,  St.,  Church 198,199 

Iijnace,  St.,  pier 19»^ 

Ignace,  St.,  Railroad 198 

Hot  Voiub 220 

Indian  Bay 62,72 

Indian  Bay,  anchorage 62 

Indian  Bay!  coal  ^ 62 

Indian  Bay,  tides 62 

Indian  Brook 68 

Indian  Island 101 

ladian  Point 76,105,106,157 

Ingouish  Bay 68 

Ingonish  Island 68 

Inner  Islet 133 

Iroquois  Poiut 188 


Jane  Point 

.Jean,  St.,  Bay 

Jean,  St.,  Church 

Jean,  St.,  Pier 

Jean,  St.,  Railroad 

Jean,  St.,  River 

Jean,  St.,  Shoal 

Jeremy  Island .; 

Jeremy  Island,  trading  post 

Jerome  Ledge 

Joachim,  St.,  Church 

John,  St.,  Mount 

John,  St.,  River  (Labrador  coast) 
John,  St.,  River  (Labrador),  as- 
pect of  coast 

John,  St.,  River  (Labrador),  cau- 
tion.  

^obn,  St.,  River  (Labrador),  lo- 
cal <tttractiou  of  shore 

Johnson  Cove 

Johnson  Harbor 

Joli  Port 

JoU  Port  Railway 

Joli  River 

Jones  House  and  Point 

Joseph,  St.,  Cape  and  Shoal 

Joseph,  St.,  Church 

Joseph,  St.,  Point 

Judique  Bank •. 

I  Judique  Church 

Judique  Pond 

Judique  Shoal 

Just  au  Corps  Island 


Kamourasoa  Bay 

Kamouraf  .**  Bay,  anchorage.. 

Kamourasi...  ChurcL 

Kbmourasca  Islands 

Kamourasca  Islands  Beacons . . 
Kate  Point 


251 

Page. 
13» 
67 
198 
199 
198 
198 
199 
12» 
129 
48 


65 
221 

198.210' 
198 
198 
321 
203- 
180 
180 
5» 
217 
166 
165 

186- 

166> 

166 
78 
77 
198 
19» 
199- 
125^ 

■!=-<* 

'15 
48 
48 
49 
47 
49' 


187 
187 

ler 

187 

187 
49' 


252 


INDEX. 


Page. 

Katon  Pond.. 64 

Kegasbka  Bay  and  Point 7  ^> 

Kegashka  Bay,  directioua 152 

Kegoshka  Bay,  supplies 152 

Kegasbka  River 153 

Kelly  Cove 64 

Kelly  Cove,  anchorage 64 

Kelly  Point 74 

Kelly  Shoal 70 

Kemp  Head 71,73 

Kenuington  Head 55 

Kettle  Rock 147 

Kidstou  Island 72 

£.. 

Labaie  Bank 214 

Labaie,Cape 213 

Laboulo  Point 221 

Labrador,  coast,  climate 124 

Labrador,  coast,  fisheries 124 

Labrador,    coast,    inhabitants, 

trade 124 

Lac,  Point  da 223 

Lachine  Canal 225 

Lafleur  River 210 

liake  Island 14« 

Lalime  Point 104 

Lamoucbe  Bank  and  Channel . . .  21'^ 

Lansecoiu  Island 58 

Large  Island 162 

Large  Channel 163 

Large  Rooko 173 

Lark  Islet 130,192 

Lark  Islet  Spit 192 

Lark  Patch 192 

Lark  Point  1*12 

Lark  Reef 192 

Laurent,  St.,  Church 208,211 

Laurent.  St.,  Point.... 211 

Laval  Bay 180 

Laval  Bay,  anchorage 181 

Laval  Island ...'. ,,.  180 

Lawler  Point 04 

Lawreno-,  St. ,  Cape 49, 53 

Lawrence,  St.,  Bay 53 

Lawrence,  St.,  Gulf    2,212 

Lawrence,   St.,  Gulf,   directions 

across  and  up  the  Estuary . .  12, 18, 21, 24 

Lawrence,  St.,  River,  caation...  25 
Lawrence,   St.,  River,  currents 

and  tides 9-12,24 

Lawrcncf,   St.,  light  and  buoy 

regulations 18 

Lawrence,  St.,  pilots 19 


Page. 
Lawrence,  St.,  River,  Quebec  to 

Montreal 289 

Lead-in  Point 69 

Leagues  Roef 128 

Leander  SLoal 109 

Ledge  Point, 157 

Ledges  Island  Rock,  &o 125 

Leggat  Shoals 88 

Levis  Point i 208 

Levis  Point,  docks 242 

Levis  Point  Reef 208 

Levis  Point  Shoal 211 

Lieutenant  Pond 74 

Lighthouse  Point 57 

Lights,  period  of  exhibition  ....  12 

I  Lights,  Aconi  Point 287 

'  Lights,  Algernon  or  South  Ruck.  238 

'■  Lights,  Amherst  Island 234 

I  Lights,  Ange  Gardieu 239 

I  Lights,  Anne,  St 227 

I  Lights,  Anne  d^  Beaupr6,  St 239 

Lights,  Anticosti  Island 2.35 

{  Lights,  Auticosti  Island,   Bagjt 

BiufiF  235 

Lights,  AnticoBti  Island,    Heath 

Point 235 

Lights,  Anticosti   Island,     SW. 

Point 235 

[  Lights,  Anticosti  Island,  W.  Point  235 

I  Lights,  Bartiboque 229 

;  Lights,  Basque  Port 233 

:  Lights,  Bathurst  Harbor 231 

j  Lights,  Belle  Chasse 238 

I  ]jigh(i>,  Bellonis  Point 231 

I  Lights,  Bersi mis  River 236 

I  Lights,  Bicquette  Island 237 

I  Lights,  Big  Shippegan  Qnlly  .. .  230 

I  Lights,  Bird  Islaud 227 

Lights,  Bird  Rock 234 

Lights,  Black  Rock  Point 227 

Lights,  Blanc,  Cape 233 

Lights,  Boar  Island i>33 

Lights,  Bonami  Point 231 

Lights,  Breton  Harbor 233 

Lights,  Brandy  Pots 23/ 

Lights,  BrnU,  Cape 2:{8 

Lights,  Burin  Island 232 

Lights,  Caraquette  Island 231 

Lights,  Campbelltown ,       231 

Liphts,  Carey  Point 227 

Lights,  Cheticamp  Island 228 

Lights,  Carleton  Point 231 

Lights,  Carousel  Island 235 

Lights,  Chatte,  Cape 235 


I 


INDEX. 


25a 


to 


Page 

222 

69 

128 

109 

157 

125 

88 

208 

242 

208 

211 

74 

57 

12 

227 

238 

234 

239 

227 

239 

235 

235 

235 

235 
235 
229 
233 
231 
238 
231 
236 
237 
230 
227 
234 
227 
233 
«33 
231 
233 
23/ 
238 
232 
231 
231 
227 
228 
231 
235 
235 


P«K»t 

LiKhts,  Cibonx  Itilaud 227 

Lights,  flifton 230 

Lights,  Cow  Bay 226 

Lights,  Crane  Island 238 

Lights,  Oalbonsie til 

Lights,  Dalhonsie  Island 231 

Lights,  Eastern  Harbor 228 

Lights,  Egg  Island 235 

Lights,  EDtr>  Island 23 1 

Lights,  d'Espoir,  Cape 231 

Lights,  Escuminao  Point 229 

Lights,  Fame  Point 23ri 

Lixhts,  t'amille,  Ste 238 

Lights,  Father  Point 236 

Lights,  Flint  Island 226 

Lights  Fox  Island 229 

Lights,  Fo.  .une  Bay 233 

Lights,  Francis,  8t 238 

Lights,  Giibarus 226 

Lights,  GH8p6  Bay    234 

Lights,  Goosv.  Oape 2;17 

Lights,  Grand  Narrows 227 

Lights,  Grand  Kiver 231 

Lights,  Green  Island 237 

Lights,  Grindstone  Island 2:<t 

Lights,  Guion 226 

Lights,  Harbor  Point 233 

Lights,  HarpersPoint 230 

Lights,  Hay  Island 229 

Lights,  Heath  Point 235 

Lights,  Hermitage  Bay 233 

Lights,  Heron  Island 23 1 

Lights,  Hood  Port 228 

Lights,  Horseshoe  Bar ¥29 

Lights,  Ingonish  Harbor 227, 228 

Lights,  Ireland  Island 233 

Lights,  Jean,  8t 238 

Lights,  Kainoarasoa 237 

Lights,  Kidstc^n  Island 227 

Lights,  Lamalin  Harbor 232 

Lights,  Larlc  Islet  (8agnenay)..  237 

Lights,  Lanrent  St.,  Point 23b 

Lights,  Lawrence  Cape,  S* 228 

Lights,  Lingan  Head 226 

Lights,  Little  Narrows 227 

Lights,  Little  Bellednne  Point ..  231 

Lights,  Louisburg 226 

Lights,  Lew  Point 226 

Lights,  Mabou 228 

Lights,  Macqnerean  Point 231 

Lights,  McKen/.ie  Point 227 

Lights,  McKinnon  Harbor ieti 

Lights,  McNeill  Beach 227 

Lights,  Magdalen  Cape 235 


I.  I  Page. 

Lights,  Manicouagan  Shoal 2.36 

Lights,  Margaree  Harbor 228 

Lights,  Martin  River f. 235 

Lights,  Mary's  Bay,  St 232 

LighU,  Matane  River 236 

Lights,  Menadon 226 

LighU,  Mi).is  Point 236 

Lights,  Middle  Island 229 

Lights,  Miscon  Island 230 

Lights,  MorienBay 226 

Lights,  Neguac  Gnlly  221> 

Lights,  Nenf,  Port 237 

Lights,  New     Jlle. 239 

Lights,  North  Cape 228 

Lights,  Oak  Point 229 

Lights,  Origneanx  Point 237 

Lights,  Paspebiac  Point 231 

Lights,  Panl.St.,  island    234 

Lights,  Panl,8t.,Bay 237 

Lights,  Perc^  Hay 231 

Liglita,  Perroquet  Island 235 

Lights,  Peters  Inlet,  St 227 

Lights,  Petit  Rocher 231 

Lights,  Pierre,  St 239 

Lights,  Pierre  Island,  St 232 

Lights,  Pilgrim,  Long 237 

Lights,  Pine  Cape  — 232 

Lights,  Piper  Cova 227 

Lights,  Placentia  Harbor 232 

Lights,  Plate  Point    93C 

Lights,  Point  de  Monts 236 

Lights,  Pokemoiiohe 230 

Lights,  Pnkesiiedie  Island 230 

Lights,  Portage  Island 229 

Lights,  Preston  Beach 229 

Lights,  Race  Cape 232 

Light*,  Ruy  Cape 233 

Lights,  Red  Island  Bank 237 

Lights,  Ri  vi^re  da  Lonp 237 

L'.guts,  Rose  Blanohe  Point 233 

Ligbt<<,  Rongfl  Cape 238 

Lights,  Rosier  Cape 234 

Lights,  Sagnenay  River 237 

Lights,  Sant^sprlt  Island 22C 

Lights,  Scatari  Island 226 

Lights,  Sheldrake  Island 229 

Lights,  8hippegan  Harbor 230 

Lights,  Stone  Pillar  Island 238 

Lights,  Sud  River 2.38 

Lights,  Sydney  Bar 226 

Lights,  Tabnsinta«  Gully 230 

Lights,  Tracadie  Gully 230 

Lighta,  Traverse 237 

Lights.  Yin  Island 229 


HMHawnua.' 


■i,^'^Af^^:i^^^^it^lAiili^^t^/'^^^^^'•^JM'0^i^'^^^^ 


X  iiiHU?' ' 


•4^ 


254 


INDEX. 


Lighta,  Why oooamagh 

Link  Islet... 

LinzeeCnpe 

Lion  Island .' 

Lion's  Head 

Little  Fish  Harbor 

Little  Gasp^ 

Little  Harlmr 

Little  Loran  Harbor 

Little  Pabos 

Little  Rivor 

Little  Shag  Kock 

Lobster  Bay 

Lobster  Bay,  anchorage 

Lobster  Bay,  d  irections 

Loohinore  Harbor 

Long  Beach.. 

Louglsland 

Long  Point . 

Iiong  River  .. 

Long  Spit 

Lougr.       cl'ite,  Ic 

Loon  Jr.--ik:.  — , 

Loran  iUnv^ .... 

Lonifc,  St.,  Ik';' 

Louisa  .^larboi  

Lonisa  Barbor,  cu  jotiona 

Lonisburg 

Lonisbarg,  coal .... 

iiouisburg,  description  of 

Louisbnrg,  ice 

Lonisburg,  pilots 

Louisbnrg,  supplioa 

Lonisburg  Harbor 

Louisbnrg  Harbor,  anchorage .. 
Lonisburg  Harlrar,  directions  .. 
Lonisburg     Harbor,     northoast 

cove -. 

Louisbnrg  Harbor,  tides 

LonRoad 

Loup  Bank 

Loup  Point 

Loup  SLvei' 

Loup  River,  anchorage 


P«g«!. 

287 

i:u 

130 

:U5 

1-24 

110 

79 

58 

lOrf 

106 

59 

133, 174 

174 

134 

77 

7! 

137 

47,  ie4 

153 

32 

216 

151 

57 

221 

143 

143 

56 

56 

56 

56 

56 

56 

57 

57 

57 

57 
58 
143 
18C 
185 
105,186 
186 


71 
216 
80 
80 
80 
80 
80 
73 
73 
73 
73 
75 
64 
143 
76 
75 
71 
81 
MacleodPoiut 67,  rj 


McKarlnnd  Point 

Mtiuheux  River 

Mulnnis  Point 

Mclunis  Shoal • 

Mi'Iiitosh  Cove 

MoIntuHli  Islet 

Mcintosh  Islet,  anchorage 

Muciver  Bank 

Maciver  Island.   ....   

.Maciver  Point 

McKay  Point 

Mackeane  Point 

Mackenzie  Point 

McKiunon  Cape 

McKinnon  Point 

MoKinnon  Sboal 

McLean  Point 

^Macteod  Creek 


Macnab  Creek 

Maophee  Island  . . . 

Macphee  shoal 

Maopherson  House 
Macpherson  Point . 
Maoquereau  Point. 
McRae  Islet 


, 76 

77 

74 

202 

74 

108 

80 

Macrae  Point 71,76,80 

Madame  Banks 210 

Madame  Island 208 

M,<dameReef 208 

MadDickRock 59 

Magdalen  Cape 

Magdalen  Islands 

Magdalen  Islands,  anchorage  , . 

Magdalen  Islands,  ban 

Magdalen  Islands,  climate  ..... 

Magdalen  Islands,  Aeaeiiptien. . 

Magdalen  Islands,  directi«as... 

Magdalen  lalMids,  population  . 

Magdalen  Islands,  seals 

Magdalen  Islands,  ^^plias  — . 

Magdalen  Islands,  tides 

Magdalen  Ei^er 

Magdalen  River,  current 

Ma.!'  tc  Mo  a<  .   -jtion  of  shore. 

MaRir..  Islet 

MiMtl^  <)  Bay  and  Point . 

Mai;;- >  Bay,  anchorage 

Magpie  River 

Magnacha  Point 

Magnacha  Spit 

Maillard,  Cap* 198,814 

Maitland  flat 

M^jorReef... 144 


114 
31 
37 
31 
31 
30 
37 

:n 

31 
31 
37 
114 
114 
1 
81 
167 
167 
167 
103 
103 


t 


71 
316 
80 
80 
rtO 
80 
80 
73 
73 
73 
73 
75 
64 
143 
75 
75 
71 
81 

...  67,r.i 
76 
77 
74 
202 
74 
lOB 
80 

..71.76,80 

210 

208 

208 

59 

114 

31 

37 

31 

31 

30 

tr 

:n 

31 

31 

37 

114 

114 

1 

81 

167 

167 

167 

103 

108 

....  198,814 


41 


144 


INDEX. 


255 


MalaK<iwatchkt  Basin 

Malagawatr^kt,  direotions 

Malagawatohkt  Harbor 

Malagawatohkt  Point 

Mai  Bay 

MaluolinCove 

Malcolm  Point 

Mai  Little  Bay 

Manioouagan  Bar 

Manicoungnn  Bar,  tides 

Manioouagan  Bay 

Manicouagan  Peninsula 

Manioouagan  Point 

Mauicouagan  Point,  current  — 

Manicouagan  River 

Manicouagan  River,  anchorage.. 

Manicouagan  Shoal 

Manicouagan  Shoal,  tidal  streams 

Mauiton  Point 

Manitou  River 

Maniton  River,  anchorage 

Manitou  River,  directions 

Manitou  River,  wator 

Manowin  Island 

Marand  Rocks 

Marble  Point 

Marcelle  Point 

Margaree  River 

Margaret  Island 

Margaret,  St.,  bay 

Margaret,  St.,  Bay,  anchorage.. 

Margaret,  St.,  Point 

Margaret,  St.,  River 

Margaret,  St.,  tail 

Marguerite,  St.,  River 

Mark  Point 

Marmen  Rock ,... 

Marsh  Island 

Martin  Cape...< 

Martin  Cape,  anchorage 

Martiniere  Point 

Mary,  St.,  Clifife 

Muy,  St., Cliffs, beacon .... 

Mary,  St.,  Islands  end  Ree&  — 

Matane 

Matane,  Little,  settlement 

Matane,  Paps  of 

Matane  River 

Matane  River,  anchorage 

Matane  River,  pilots ~ 

Matane  River,  supplies 

Matte,  Grand,  River 

Meadow  Island 

Meat  Cove 


Page. 

78 

78 

78 

79 

109,194 

81 

88 

194 

178 

vtn 

178 

178 

17H 

10 

178 

17fi 

178 

178 

168 

167 

168 

168 

108 

170 

211 

77 

96 

51 

208 

173 

173 

m 

172 

209 

219 

128 

185 

111 

194,213 

194 

308 

42 

42 

.  144,145 

116 

115 

115 

115 

UK 

116 

116 

114 

111 

53 


Meat  Cove,  telegraph 53 

Mecattina,  Cape 138,140 


Mecattinn  Cove,  Little 

Mecattina  Harbor 

Mecattina  Harbor,  directions 
Mecattina  Harbor,  supplies.. 

Mecattina,  High  Laud 

Mecattina  Island,  Qreat 


141 
138 
139 
139 
140 
137 

Mecattina  Island,  Little 140,143 

Mecattina  River,  Little 141 

Menadou  Bay 58 

Menadou  Harbor 58 

Menadou  harbor,  tides 59 

Mfniuloii  Passage 59 

Menadou  Passage,  directions  for,  59 

Menadou  Passage,  tides 60 

Mermot  Islet  and  Ledge 133 

Metis  to  Qreei)  Txlaud,  anchorage,  117 

Metis,  Grand,  Hay tl6 

Metis,  Grand,  River 1 16 

Metis,  Little,  Bay  and  River  —  116 

Metis,  Little,  Point 116 

MeuIeCape 33 

Men  le  Rocks 33 

Michaux  Cape 53,115 

Michaux  Cove 54 

Michaux  Cove,  anchorage 54 

Michaux  Cove,  directions 54 

Michel,  St.,  Bay  and  Church ....         207 

Michel,  St.,  Point 207 

Mid  Shoal 81 

Middle  Bank  (Hare  Island) 185 

Middle  Bay  (Labrador) 128 

Middle  Channel  (Traverse) 197 

Middle  Ground 87,104,185 

MiddleHead 68 

Middle  Island 89,208 

Middle  Islands  (Labrador) 144, 146 

Middle  Ledges  and  Point 128 

Middle  Patch 131 

Middle  Reef  (Mingan  Island ) . . . .  162 

Middle  Reef,  channel lo3 

Middle  River. ..».=  „,,, 72 

Middle  Rock  and  Beacon 201 

Middle  Shoal 65,185 

Middle  Traverse 

Militia  Point 

Mill  Cape •• 

Mill  Creek 

Mille  Yaches  Bay 

MilleVaches  Point 

Mille  Vaches  Shoals 

Mill  Island 

Milne  Reef 


197 

78 
76 
48 
181 
181 
181 
208 
150 


ifiiiaifr  I.,  iy-!Wf^'«^^^"- 


256 


INDEX. 


Minen  Point 

Mingan  Channel 

Miogan  ^(arbor 

Minitan  Harbor,  Uireotions . 


14 

15« 
156 
16:) 


Mingan  Harbor,  trading  post  . . .  165 

Mingan  Islands 156,163 

Mingan  Jslands,  banknof  sound- 
ings  

Mingan  Islands,  supplies  —   ... 

Mingan  Islands,  tides 

Mingan  Patch 

Mingan  River 156,165 

MiraBay 60 

MiraLake 61 

Mira  River 60 

Mirainibhi  Bar 83 

Miraniichi  Bar,  buoys 83,84 

Mirainiohi,  direotions '*5 

Mirainichi,  pilots 83 

Mlramiohi,  tides 84,90,91 

Mirainichi,  Inner  Bar Ki 

Miraniiobi,  Inner  Bar,auchorage.  HA 
Mirainichi   Inner  Bar,  buoys....  84 
Miraniiobi,  Inner  Bar,  ship  chan- 
nel       83,87 

Miramichi  Bay 82 

Mirainichi  Bay,  tugs 83 

Miramichi,  Inner  Bay 86 

Miramichi  River 88,90 

Miramichi  River,  description 
Miramichi  River  directions — 
Miramichi  River,  NW.  arm  . ., 
Miramichi  River,  SW.  arm — 

Miscou  Anchorage 

Miscou  Banks 

Misoon  Channel 

Miscou,  directions. 


88 
88 
90 
90 
93 
93 
95 
95 

Miscou  Flats 93,95 

Miscou  Onlly ., 95 

Miscou  Harbor 95 

Miscou  Island 93 

Misoon  Shoal 96 

Miscou,  tides 96 

Mistanoque  Bay 134 

Mistanoque  Harbor 134 

Mistanoque  Harbor,  directions..  135 

Mistanoqne  Island..... 134 

Mistassini,  or  Great  Stone 148 

Mizzenette  Ledge 98 

Mizzenette  Point 98,100 

Mizzenette  Sands 98 

MoiM«  Bay 169 

Moisic  Point 169 

Moiaic  River 169 


Page.  Pag*. 

64  i  Moisic  River  Bar 16» 

164  Mnisio  River,  tides 170 

163,165      .Moisio  River,  trading  post 170 

165  Moisic  Rock 170 

Moisic  Rock,  mark 170 

Moisic  Shoal 1 170 

MoneyPoint 53 

Moiiiao  Island 161,164 

Monr.  Loins  River 114 

Montreal 284 

Montreal  consul 225 

Montreal,  directions 224 

I  Montreal  Harbor 224 

!  Montreal,  population 225 

Montreal,  railroads 9i^ 

I  Montreal,  time  signal 225 

[  Monts,  Point  de 175 

Monts,  Point  de,  aspect  of  coast.  176 

Monts,  Point  de,  caution 17, 175' 

Monts,  Point  de,  current 11,  IH 

Monts,  Point  de,  light-house....  17 
Monts,  Point  de,  to  Bioquette  Is- 
land  17,19,21 

Monts,  Point  de,  to  Qreen  Island .  21 

Moody  Point 87 

Moque  Head 58 

Morien  Bay 61 

Morien  Cape 61 

Morrison  Head 80 

Moss  Creek 81 

Moulin  Baude  Anchorage 192 

Montauge  Island 161,164 

Murdoch  Point 87 

Murdoch  Spit 87 

Murr  Islets 138, 140 

Murr  Rocks 138 

Murray  Bay .      193 

Murray  Bay  Anchorage 193 

Murray  Bay,  settlement 193 

Murray  Bay,  tides 194 

MuBbkoniatawee  Bay 155 

Mnsquano  Point 153 

Mnsquarro  River.... 152 

Mussel  Hank 105 

Mutton  Island 138 

Nabesippi  River 156 

Nabesippi  trading  post 155 

Nag  Rock -57  . 

Napan  Bay 87 

Napan  River 87 

Napetepee  Bay 134 

Narrows,  the 19& 


ast. 


16» 

170 

170 

170 

170 

170 

53 

1({I,164 

114 

224 

825 

224 

224 

225 

225 

225 

175 

176 

...     17,175 

...       11,  W 

17 

Is- 

...17,19,21 

knd.  21 

87 

...  58 

61 

61 

80 

81 

192 

...  161,164 

87 

87 

...  138,140 

138 

...    .      193 

193 

193 

194 

156 

153 

152 

105 

13» 


155 
155 

57 

87 

87 

134 

19» 


INDnX. 


Narrows,  Church 

Narrowa,  Point 

Naab  River 

Natashqnnn  Banks 

Nataahquan,  Little,  Harbor 

Nataabquan,  Little,  Stream 

Natasbqiian,  Littif,  Stream,  aet- 

tlemeut 

Natasbqiian  Point 

Nataahquan  River 

Nataabquan  River,  trading  post. 

Nnal  Cove 

Neering  Rock 

Neguac  Oiilly 

Neguao,  Lower 

Neguac,  Upper 

Neguao  villages 

NeilbanCove 

Nelsontowu 

Neptnne  Kook  

Nest  Rook 

Netagamu  Islands  and  River.... 

Neuf,  Port 

Nenf,  Port,  River 

Nenf,  Port,  River,  sanda. ....... 

Nenf,  Port,  trading  post 

Newcastle 

Newport 

Niapiaoa  Channel 

Niapisca  Island 

Nicholas,  St.,  Cape 

Nicholas,  St.,  Harbor 

Nicholas,  St.,  Harbor,  anchorage. 
Nicholas,  St.,  Harbor,  caution  .. 
Nicholaa,  St.,  Harbor,  direotiona. 
Nicholaa,  St.,  Harbor,  water.... 

Nicholas,  St.,  River 

Niobe  Shoal 

Nipiaighit  Bay 

Nipiaighit  River 

Nob  lalet 

Noire  Point 

Noir  Point 

North  Baain 

North  Cape 


North  Cape,  anchorage,  water  .. 

North  Cape,  Fooka 

North  Channel 

North  Channel,  anchorage 

North  Channel, directions. ...... 

North  Channel,  tldea 

North  Channel,  ^elow  Coudrea. . 

North  Channel,  direotiona 

North  Channel,  directions,  tidea. 
6489 17 


T3 

n 

1(»8 
15l< 
164 
164 

155 

149, 153 

154 

154 

68 

59 

88,  iH 

88 

H8 

88,91 

74 

90 

216 

148 

144 

181,223 

181 

181 

181 

90 

108 

161 

162 

176 

176 

177 

177 

177 

177 

119 

127 

101 

100 

142 

220 

64 

75 

32,37 

37 

37 

197,213 

198 

.     217 

206,217 

194 

194 

195 


Paje. 

North  Chanofll  to  Quebec .......  213 

North  coaat  of  Gulf 123 

North  coast  of  Oulf,  aspect  of.. .  123, 153 

North  coast  of  Onlf,  oliiiiate  of . .  124 

North  coast  of  Gulf,  cod  fishery  .  125 

North  coast  of  Gulf,  inhabitants.  124 

North  coast  of  Onlf,  tides 154 

North  Cove 81.127 

Northeast  Cape 31 

Northeast  Reef 174 

NorthPoint 43,53,93 

North  Point,  beacon 43 

NorthPond 69 

North  Rooks 174 

North  shore,  below  Coudres  Is- 
land    191 

North  Traverse  216 

North  Traverse,  tides 217 

Northwest  Bird  Rock 29 

NorlhwestCove 60 

Northwest  Bo  wen  Rook  166 

Norton  Point  lOO 

Norton  Shoal  lOO 

Notre   Dame    Church    (Eboule- 

iiients)  200'214 

Nouvelle  Point  107 

Nouvelle  River  108 

O. 

Oak  Channel  85 

Oak  Point 85,88,105 

Oak  Point,  beacons  88 

Observation  Cape 43 

Ob/^er/atiou  River 39,42 

Oh  i  aic  Harbor 117 

Old  Bic  trading  post 151 

OldFort  Point  67 

Old  Port.  Bay  125 

OldHarryHead 32 

Old  Woman  Rook 110 

Olomanoaheebo  River 151 

Ore  Point  167 

OnentPoint 180 

Origneanx  Foint   188 

Orleans  Channel 198,217 

Orleanalsle  210 

Orleanalalc,  anchorage 211 

Orleans  Point 210 

Otter  Harbor 71 

Otter  Harbor,  directions 71 

Otter  Island 71 

Otter  Point 71 

Ouelle  Point  188 

Ouelle  River 188 


258 


INDEX. 


■Si 


i 


Outarde  Buy   17rt,  171) 

Ontarile  Way,  anchorage 17U 

Ontartlu  Day,  ilirectloiis 171) 

Ontanln  I'oiiit  I'H 

Oiitarde  River 171) 

Onte  -  Hreakor  55 

Outer  iHlet  149 

Outer  Itilet,  beaoou  ir>0 

Outer  Rocks 140 

OuterShoal 71) 

Ojster  Pond  32 

P. 

Paddle  Shoal  79 

PalntRiver 161 

Panorace,  St.,  Cove 177 

Panorace,  St. ,  '  'olnt 177 

Pandora  Point      90 

Parliament  Poiiu  73 

Parsky  Port 193 

Partridge  Mount  and  Point 1.58 

Pashasli  eeboo  Bay If).*) 

Paspebiao  107 

Paspebiac,  anchorage 107 

Poupebiao,  consul 107 

pAspebiao,  Bupplies  107 

Paspebiao  Bay 107 

Paspebiao  Bay,  directions 107 

Paspebiao  Point   108 

Patrick  Hole  Bay J?li 

Patrick  Hole  Bay,  anchorage  ...  211 

Paul,  St.,  iBiand .  Sf> 

Paul,  St.,  Island,  anchorit|;e  '28 

Paul,  St.,  Island,  boat  ,  28 

Paul,  St.,  Island,  oantion  13 

Panl,  St.,  Island,  supplies ^ 

Paul,  St. ,  Island,  tides '-to 

Paul,  St.,  Island,  to  Bird  Rooks 

and  Magdalen  Islands 13 

Paul,  St.,  Bay 214 

Pavilion  Point ' 208 

Pavilion  River,  bemton 41 

Paynter  Point 143 

Peak  Point 128,129 

Pearl  Reef 33 

Peashtebai  Bay 155 

Pecten  Point 96 

Pellier  Harbor 79 

Pellier  Harbor,  directions. ......  79 

Pellier  Point 1..  78 

Pellier  Reef 78 

Peninsala  Point Ill 

Pentacost  River 174 

Pero6 109 


PS|.. 

Pt!rc<f,Uay 109 

Perc/Bay,  Hil^-s 109 

Porc«5Cttpe 109 

l'vTv6  Moni,  or  Table  Roulante..  109 

Perc<^Kock 109 

P«rc:<Se  Rocks 186 

Percy  Cape 61 

Percy  Rook     63 

Peril  Rook 133 

Pttroqnet  Island 185 

Ferroqiiut  Cliannel 164 

Perroquet  Inlots 163 

Peter,  St.,  Point .  .  110 

Peter,  St.,  Lake  S!i3 

Petite  Rivifere 214 

Petitfislles 2S3 

Petre  Point 63 

PetroReel" 88 

Pic  Point I  J 

Pierre  de  Gros  Cap  Reef 36 

PierreRiver 114 

Pierre,  St.,  Church 216 

Pierre,  St.,  Point 208 

Pilgrim  Islands 187 

Pilgrim,  Great,  Island 187 

Pilgrim,  Long 187 

Pilgrim  Shoal 18fl 

Pillage  Bay 167 

Pilinr,  Stone,  and  Wood,  Islets..  201 

Pillar  Point 108 

Pilots,  stations 19 

Pizuau  Point S13 

PlaiorCove 75 

Planter  Cove,  anchorage 75 

Plaster  Point 73 

PleasantBay  34 

Pleasant  Bay,  anchorage 34 

Pleureu£8  Point,  beacon 114 

Fleurense  River 114 

PlongeurBay 180 

Pointe  aux  Pins 208 

Pointe  des  Morts 161 

PoJDtn  aux  Trembles 228 

Pokciaouche  Church 92 

Fokemouohe  Lagtion 92 

Fokemouche  River 92 

Pokesbaw 101 

Pond,  Great 113 

PondPoint 127 

Poquesnedie  Island .96 

Poqnesnedie  Point 96 

Poquesuodie  Shoal ...., 96 

Porcupine  Cape 47 

Porpoise  Bocks 133 


INDEX. 


259 


109 
109 
100 
100 
100 
186 

61 

6'2 
133 
136 
164 
163 
110 
3!{3 
214 
232 

63 

68 
»  J 

36 
114 
215 
208 
187 
187 
187 

isn 

167 

201 

108 

19 

813 

75 

75 

73 

34 

34 

114 

114 

180 

208 

161 

233 

92 

92 

92 

101 

lis 

127 
.96 
96 
96 
47 
133 


Porta^re  Day  and  Harbor  . . 
Pur  li^u  Bay,  dtreotlona — 

Porcatco  Ixlaiid 

Port  Ho.h1,  anchorage 

Port  Hooii,  <i!4|ieot  of  uoaitt. 

Port  Hooii,  vllreotions  

Port  Homl,  impi>li*)« 

Port  Hood,  tideH 

Portnora  Itland 

Port  Shoal 

Portaiuonth  Point 

Pot  Rock 


lao 
l:W 
pO 
48 
4tf 
49 
48 
49 
68 
67 
48 
66 

Prairie  Bay 19D,214 

Prairie  Bay,  auoliorage 

Prairie  Bay,  dlreotioiiit 

Prairie  Uav,  tides 

Prairie  Point 

Prairie  Shoal 

Preequ'iie 

Preston  Beaoh 

Preston  Beach,  beacons 

Price  Island 

Price  Point 

Prince  Shoal 

Puffin  Bay 


Quarantine,  auohorage 

Quarry  Channel 

Quarry  Cove  and  Island 

Quarry  Cove,  water 

Quart  Point 

Quebec 

Quebec,  auchorage 

Quebec,  basin 

Queber,  consul 

Quebec,  docks  and  harbor  works 

Quebec,  harbor 

Quebec,  ice 

Quebec,  observation  bastion 

Quebec,  port,  limits  of 

Quebec,  quarantine  anchorage.. 

Quebec,  repairs 

Quebec,  supplies 

Quebec,  tides 

Quebec,  time  signal 

Qaetachoo-Manicouagon  Bay .  .. 
Qnin  Channel  and  Island. ..  ... 

R. 

Race  Island 

Raft  Gully 

Bagg  Bay  and  Point 

Bagged  Point 

Bagged  Bock 


216 

216 

216 

314 

2i:« 

52 

85 

85 

142 

07 

192 

158 

209 

162 

162 

162 

87 

211,212 

212,213 

211 

213 

212 

211 

212 

211 

2i; 

209 
212 
212 
213 
213 
155 
160 

208 
92 

169 
49 
59 


Rag  Ledge 143 

Ranald  Islet 80 

Raza<le  Islets 191 

R.aiix  Island 208 

Red  Cape 33,55 

Red  Head 54 

Red  Head  Island i:<0 

Red  Island 54 

Red  Islands 76.77 

Red  Islands,  from,  to  Brandy  Pots  1H9 

Red  Islet 183 

Red  Islet,  bank 183 

Red  Inlet,  bank,  mark 183 

Red  Point 72,106 

Reddish  Point 108 

Reef  Point •-  44 

ReMtigouche  River lOfi 

Rustigouohe  River,  am  106 

Restigouche  River,  dir<    i  106 

Richlieu  Rapid 283 

Richmond 106 

Richmond  Church 106 

Ridge  Point,  rocky  ground 167 

Rimonski 117 

Rimonski,  coal 117 

Rimonski,  mail 117 

Rimonski  River,  water 117, 

Rimonski  Road  and  Pier 117 

Roadstead  Point,  water 174 

Robert  Cape 44 

Roches  Point 229 

Rochette 101 

Roch,  St.,  church 188,198 

Roch,  St.,  Point 188,198 

Roch,  St,,8hoal8 199 

Roch,  St.,  Shoald,  anchorage 205 

Roch ,  St. ,  Shoals,  buoys 199 

Rochfort  Point 57 

Rocks.  Bay  of 141,186,193 

Rooky  Bay 68,133 

Rocky  Bay,  directions 134 

Rocky  Island 67 

Romaiue,  la,  river l&l 

Rouge  Cape... 214 

Rouge  Point 220 

Roulante,  Table,  or  Mont  Perc6 . .  109 

RoundHead 138 

Bound  Islet 137 

Round  Rook HO 

Rouse  Point 66 

RoysMills 208 

Rosier  Cape 113 

RnisSeauRock 163 

Russell  Point 57 


..  2sS3Sa3sStt^SKS^»^'ffil2Sa«KS3iiW»fis£afac!aj«jaavifais^^ 


ml 
m 

m 


';« I 


^m    I 


960 


INDEX. 


l'nu>: 


9. 

SMidloHill Ifiri 

Salt)  Rook 14'i 

8ftKU»n»y  Cllrt* VJi 

8»K«o""»y  HI  VHf IIW,  !<IH,  'iH) 

8aK<i«'iH.v  KivHF,  Hii(;horat(0)i 'i'H 

8aKiiHiiay  Kiver,  biioyit til 

8agiiHiiAy  Klver,  ouution. tOt 

SttKiiniiay    River,    uiirrent«    and 

tIdwH   ail> 

SaKiioiiity  Rivur,  directloDs 2il 

8t.  Auilrew  Cliaiinel  70 

8t.  AiidrHvr  Channel,  anuhoraj(o.  70 

St.  Andrew  Point  8(l,rt7 

8t.  Anne  Harbor (XI 

8t.  Anne  Harltnr,  anuhoraKO  ••••  H7 

St.  Anne  Harbor,  liar M 

St.  Anne  Harbor,  directions tf7 

St.  Anne  Harbor,  nnpplieN '        67 

St.  Anne  Harbor,  tidoH ti" 

St.  Anne  Capo. U4 

St.  Aiinx  Mnnntaina 114 

St.  Anne  River 115 

St.  Anne  SlioalH 1 

St.  AuKHHtine  Cove 170 

St.  Catherine  Bay aao 

St.  Charles  Point 169 

St.  Charles  Reef 109 

St.  Denis  Point 188 

St.  Oenevieve  Harbor,  directions .  157 

St.  Oenevieve  Harbor, supplies..  157 

St.  GeoFKe  Cove  110 

St.  Giles  Point 176 

8t.  John  Mount 166 

St.  John  River 111,165 

St.  John  River,  anchorage 166 

St.  John  River,  bar 166 

St.  John  River,  fishing  post 165 

St.  John  River,  tides 166 

St.  John  River,  water  ...; Ill 

St.  Margaret  Point 17:1 

St.  Margaret  River 172 

St.  Mary  Islands 144 

St.  Mary  Reefs 145 

St.  Nicholas  Cape 176 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor 176 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  anchorage.  177 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  caution 177 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  directions  .  177 

St.  Nicholas  Harbor,  water 177 

St.  Pancraoe  Cove 177 

St.  Pancrace  Point 177 

St.  Patrick  Channel 72 

St.  Patrick  Channel,  anchorage  .  72 


St.  Patrick  Channel, directions..  7;< 

St.  Patrick  Channel,  pilots 78 

St.  Paul  Bay 814 

8t.  I'eler  Inlet 76 

St.  Petrr  Inlet,  anchorage 76 

8r.  Peter  Point 110 

St.  Hooh  Point IIW 

Saints  Channel 158 

•Saints  Rocks 150 

8alab.<rry  Bay   140,143 

Salmon  Bay  186,189 

Salmon  Cape 1M7, 193 

Salmon  Islet 189 

Salni'inPort 193 

Salmon  River 61 

Salt  Lake  B.vy 41 

Salt  Lake  Bay,  beacon  near 41 

Sand  Lark  Reef 1«4 

Hand  Top  Cape 45 

.Sandy  Bay 32 

Sandy  Beach  Point Ill 

Sandy  Harbor 136 

Sandy  Harbor,  directions 136 

Sandy  Harbor,  water 136 

Sandy  H<K)k 33 

Sandy  Hook  Channel 34 

Sandy  Hook  Flat 34 

Sandy  Island 136 

Shndy  "oint 171 

Sandy '^    or..    .    , 167 

Sant^sp'  i .  Island 5.*),  55 

Sent ,,     Cochon 814 

S  «      fie  Mouton 181 

Sa.it  Pass 822 

Sawblll  River 1«7 

Sawbill  Hiver  Cod  Bank 167 

Scallop  Patch 100 

Scatari  Island 60 

Soatari  Island,  caution 60 

Soaumenac  Mountains 103 

Schooner  Rock 61 

Scott  River 80 

Sea  Cow  Channel  and  Islands..  160 

Seal  House  dove 169 

Seal  Islands .' 70,147,200 

SealPoint 71,137 

Seal  Reefs ^O 

Seal  Rock 111,139 

Seal  Rocks 55,139 

Sea  Wolf  Island 51 

Seminairo,  The 207,217 

Serpent  Point  and  reef 113 

Seven  Islands 170 

Seven  Islands  Bay 171,172 


I 


II 


It 


Vikgf>. 
ri»..  TA 

n 

«14 
76 

no 

168 

....  140,  ua 

....  186,189 

1M7,193 

129 

193 
61 

41 

41 

164 

45 

34 

Ill 

136 

136 

136 

33 

34 

34 

136 

171 

167 

53,55 

814 

181 

828 

167 

167 

100 

60 

60 

103 

61 

80 

ands..  160 

169 

70,147,200 

71,137 

70 

111,139 

55,139 

61 

207,217 

113 

170 

171,172 


iiWalMltiiBSMJii 


-^gggtmmm^Hm 


I 


> 


t 


:-^'MM!iMiWllMiWW^ 


iilUBUm  mteinmw 


I 


,.^.. 


^.^ 


IMAGE  EVALUATION 
TEST  TARGET  (MT-3) 


1.0 


I.I 


IAS  121    |2.5 

■so   *^^     R^H 

2.0 


lis 


14.0 


H 


1.8 


l^ll'-M'-^ 

- 

"^ 

6"     

► 

FhotDsraphic 

Sciences 
Corporation 


23  WEST  MAIN  STREET 

WEBSTER,  N.Y.  14580 

(716)872-4503 


CIHM/ICMH 

Microfiche 

Series. 


CIHIVI/ICIVIH 
Collection  de 
microfiches. 


Canadian  Instituta  for  Historical  IVIicroreproductions  /  Institut  Canadian  de  microreproductions  historiques 


m^ 


INDEX. 


Seven  Islanda  Bay,  anchorage. .. 
Seven  Islands  Bay,  aspect  of  coast 

Seven  Islands,  caution 

Seven  Islands,  channels 

Seven  Islands,  tides 

Seven  Islands,  trading  post 

Seven  Islands,  winds 

Shag  Island  (Magdalen  Island) . 

Shag  Island  (Sanuy  Harbor) 

Shag  Islet  (Mistanoque) 

Shag  Islet  (Washtawooka) 

Shag  Ledge 


Pago. 
171 
172 
170 
171 
172 
171 
172 

33 
136 
135 
155 

54 


261 

Pag*. 

108 


Shag  Rock 55,59,136 


Shallop  Cove 

Shallop  Creek 

Shallop  River 

Shecatioa  Bay 

Shecatica  Bay,  supplies . 

Shecatica  Island 

Sheep  Island. 


12!) 
40 
167 
135 
136 
135 
78 

Sheldrake  Island 86,87 

Sheldrake  Point 167 

Shettle  Port 193 

Shickshoc  Mountains 114 

Shilelah  Cove 91 

Ships  Head  Rock 110 

Shippegan  Channel 97 

Shippegan  Bar 93 

Shippegan,  directions 95 

Shippegan  Flat 96 

Shippegan  Gully 93,97 

Shippegan  Harbor 97 

Shippegan  Island 95 

Shippegan  Sound 96,97 

97 
97 
158 
26 
27 
96 
55 


Shippegan  Sound,  ice 

Shippegan,  tides 

Shoal  Cove  

Signal  stations  for  passing  ships 

Signals  respecting  ice 

Simon  Inlet 

Simon  Point 

Single  Rock .141,14;;; 

Single  Tree  Point ji<«fl''~ 

Slime  Rock 148 

Smith  Island 48,49 

Smith  Point 48 

Smith  Shoal 81 

Smoke  Cape 65,68 

Soldier  Cove 76 

Sontb  Basin --.-  73 

South  Breaker 150 

South  Cape 35 

South  Channel 188, 197, 198 

Soulh  Channel,  above  Crane  Is- 
lan  d 206 


South  Channel,  below  Traverse.. 
South  Channel,  below  Traverse, 

directions 189 

South  Channel,  through  S.  Trav- 
erse to  Crane  Island 19H,  204 

South  Channel,  tides 195,218 

South  Makers  Ledge 123,147 

South  Point 40,68 

South  Point,  biiacou 40 

South  Point,  caution 41 

South  Pond 69 

South  Rock  or  Algernon  Rock. . .  201 

Sonth  Shore  below  Traverse....  186 
South  Shore,  from  St.  Thomas  to 

Levis  Point 206 

South  Traverse --  205 

Sonth  Traverse,  anchorage 205 

South  Traverse,  directions 204 

South  Traverse,  narrows 199 

South  Traverse,  tides 206, 217 

Southeast  Bo  wen  Rock 156 

Southwest  Breaker 150 

Southwest  Cape  (Amherst  Island)  35 

Southwest  Islands 145 

Sou  t  h  west  Point  ( Antioosti ) 41 

Southwest  Point,  anchorage ... .  41 

Southwest  Point,  caution 41 

Spit  Head 48 

Spit  Island 132 

Spray  Reef 143 

Sproule  Point  and  Reef 174 

Spruce  Point 81 

Square  Channel 136 

Squirrel  Pond 51 

Squirrel  Mount 51 

Staff  Islet 141 

Star  Island 132 

Steering  Hummock 59 

Stoue  Island 132 

Stone  Pillar  Island 201 

S.ony  Point liW 


Sud,  Rivifere  du 199,206 

Sugar  Loaf  Mountain 

Susan,  Cape 

Susan  Creek 

Swashway  Channel 

Sydney 

Sydney,  ^northwe8t)  bar 

Sydney,  (southeast)  bar 

Sydney  Harbor 

Sydney  Harbor,  anchorage 

Sydney  Harbor  Bridge 

Sydney  Harbor,  charges 

Sydney  Harbor,  coaling  ground. 
Sydney  Harbor,  coaling  wharves 


105 
47 

48 
83 
62 
62 
64 
62 
64 
62 
63 
63 
63 


262 


INDEX. 


I 

Page. 

Sydney  Harbor,  consul . , 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  direotiona 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  South  Arm 

6i 

Sydney  Harbor,  population 

6'2 

Sydney  Harbor,  railroad 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  steam  ferry  .... 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  tides 

64 

Sydney  Harbor,  supplies 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  telegraph 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  water 

63 

Sydney  Harbor,  West  Arm 

62 

Sydney,  North 

62 

T. 

Table  Head 

44.65 

Table  Island 

65 

Table  Roulante,  or  Pe;  c6  Mont.. 

109 

Tabusintac,  gaily 

91 

Tabnsintao  Lagoon 

91 

Tabusintac  River 

91 

Tabusintac,  Kcttleuient 

91 

Tadoussac 

220 

Tadoussac,  anchorage 

220 

Tadoussac,  trading  post 

220 

Tail  Islet •. 

130 

Tailor  Island 

81 

Telegraph  and  signal  stations. .. 

26 

Tender  Reef 

145 

Tent  Island 

132 

Terres  Roiupues  Rapid 

222 

Tertiary  Point 

150 

Tertiary  SbfU  Bav  

1>>1 

Thomas,  8t 198,199,203 

Thomas,  St.,  Biiuk 199,203, 20« 

Thomas,  St.,  Church 

198, 199 

Thomas.  St.,  Point 

20H 

Thomas,  St.,  Railroad 

19(9 

Three  Rivers,  town 

223 

Three  Rocks 

136 

Thunder  Point 

167 

Tickle  Creek 

UO 

Tide  table  from  Pi  v..          cu^Ay 

to  Quebec . 

218 

Tilbury  Rocks '.'. 

56 

TourraenteCape 

206 

Tourmente  Mount — 

202 

Tower  Point 

44 

'Tower  Rock 

35 

Tracadie  Bar 

92 

Tracadie  Lagoons . .......... 

92 

Tracadie  North  Oullv 

92 

Tracadie  Old  Gully 

92 

Tracidie  River 

92 

Tracadie  Soiith  Gnlly 

92 

Pkge. 

Tracadigash  PoMit 101,102 

Tracadigash  Spit 103 

Trap  Point 76 

Traverses 183,218 

Traverse,  Middle 197 

Traverse,  North 194,197,213 

Traverse,  North,  narrows  £,  and 

W 216 

Traverse,  North,  tides 217 

Traverse,  South 205 

Traverse,  South,  anchorage 205 

Traverse,  South,  directions 204 

Traverse,  South,  narrows 199 

Traverse,  South,  tides 206,217 

Traverse,  South,  to  Crane  Island .  198, 204 

Traverse  Spit 216 

Treble  Hill  Island 138 

Treble  Islet 137,151 

Tremble  Shoals 223 

Trembles,  Pointe  aux,  shoals  .. .  223 

Trilobite  Bay 159 

Trinity  Bay  and  River 175 

Trinity  Bay,  anchorage 175 

Trinity  Cove 28 

Trois  Saumous  River 198 

Trou  de  Borthier 207 

Trou,  le.  Cape 36 

Trout  River 169 

Two  Heads  Island 209,216 

U. 

Uniacke  Point 74 

Union  Island 202 

V. 

Vaches  Patch 192 

Vaches  Point 192 

Vaches  Point  Reef 192 

Vallier,  St.,  Bank 207 

Vallier,  St.,  Point 203,207 

Vallier,  St.,  Village 207 

Variation  of  compass 1 

Vin  Bay 87 

Vin  Harbor 86 

Vin  Harbor,  anchorage 86 

Viu  Harbor,  directions 86 

Vin  Harbor,  tides 86 

Vin  Island 86 

Vin  River 87 

Vin  Spit 86 

Walrus  Channel 160 

Walrus  Island 160 


INDEX. 


263 


Page. 

101,102 

103 

76 

183,218 

197 

..  194,197,213 

B.  aud 

......  216 

217 

205 

re 205 

8.....  204 
199 

206,217 

[Bland.  198,204 

216 

.......  138 

137,151 

223 

>als...  223 

159 

175 

175 

, 28 

198 

207 

\\ 36 

' 169 

209,216 

74 

202 

192 

192 

192 

207 

, 203,207 

207 

1 

87 

86 

86 

86 

86 

86 

87 

, 86 

160 

160 


Pagp. 

Wapitagnu  Harbor 148 

Wapitagun  Harbor,  tides 148 

Wapitagnn  Harbor,  water 148 

Wapitagun  Island 148 

Wapitagun  Islands,  Outer 148 

Washaback  River 72 

Washatnagunashka  Bay ;..  155  ! 

Washshecootai  Bay 151  [ 

Washshecootai  Bay,  trading  post  '  161  | 

Washta wooka  Bay 155  : 

Wataglieistic  Island  145  ! 

Watagheistio  Sonnd 145  j 

Watagheistic  Sound,  anchorage.  147 

Watagheistio  Sound,  caution ....  145  j 

Watagheistio    Sound,    east    en-  \ 

trance 145 

Watagheistio  Sound,  reef 146 

Watagheistio    Sound,   west    en- 
trance    146 

Watcheeshoo  Hill 155 

Watoheeshoo  Peninsula 155 

Watcheeshoo  trading  post 155 

Watch  Rock 130 

WattieRook 60 

Weed  Pond  Beach 67 

Weed  Pond.  Ledge 67 

Weed  Pond  Shoal 6fi 

West  Bay 75,79 

WestCape 35 

West  Clilf,  beacon 43 

West  Cove  (Labrador) 129 

West  Lake 36 


Page. 

West  Point 43.108 

West  Rooks  (Seven  Islands) 170 

West  Sand 216 

Western  Narrows ....  216 

Whale  Channel 132 

Whale  Head 141 

Whale  Island  (N.  Coast) 130, 132, 159 

Whale  Patch 131 

Whelp  Rock 130 

White  Clifif 42 

White  Head 69,109 

White  Horse  Reef 36 

White  Island  Reef .  184 

White  Islet 183 

White  Point 55,108 

White  liock 57 

Whittle  Cape 123,147,149 

WhittleRooks 149 

Widow  Point 81 

Wild  Fowl  Reef. 180 

Wilhausen  Point 67 

Wilkie  Sugar  Loaf 69 

Winter  Portage 83 

Winds  and  weather 5 

Wolf  Bay 149 

Wolf  Island  (Labrador) 149 

Wolf  Island  (Magdalen  Islands)  33,36 

Wood  Island 137,157 

Wood  Pillar  Island 200 

Wood  Pillar  Island  beacon 200 

Wreck  Bay  (Autioosti) -  40 

Wye  Rock 206 


BOOKS  FOR  PUIIPOSES  OF  NAVUIATION  IHIBLISHKD  BY  HYDROGRAPHIC 

OFFICK. 


No. 


Title. 


I'rioe. 


22 

45 

99 

100 

b6 


«4 

73 

78 

70 

34 

35 

60 
23 
52 

25 
37 

38 
42 

68 


NORTH   ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 


8vo.     1870. 


1887... 

1891. 


General  Examination  of  the  Atlantic  Ocean. 

Supplement  No.  1.    1886 .•".--• 

General  Directions  for  the  Atlantic  Ocean.     Second  edition 

\  Nova  Scotia  and  Bay  of  Fundy— Gnlf  and  River  St.  Lawrence. 

The  Navigation  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  the  Gnlf  of  Mexico.    Vol.  I. 

The  West  India  Islands,  including  the  Bahama  Banks  and  Islands, 

and  the  Bermuda  Islands.     1887.    Edition  exhausted 

Supplements.     1889, 1890 „•  •  V,;" "  •. 4/  V ' 

The  Navigation  of  the  Caribbean  Sea  and  the  Gulf  of  Mexico.    Vol. 
II.    Coasts  from  the  Rio  Grande  del  Norte  to  Cape   Orange,  with 

adjacent  islands  and  dangers.     1890 

Supplement.     1891 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador,    1884 

Newfoundland  and  Labrador.     Supplement.     1886 

Supplement  No.  2.    1891 - v;-.::;-' 

Sailing  Directions  for  the  Kattegat,  Sound,  and  the  Great  and  Little 

Belts  to  the  Baltic  Sea.     1881 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886 <; ••■;■";;■  "l 

Sailing  Directions  for  the  English  Channel.     Part  I.    South  Coast 

ofEngland.    1872 

Supplement.     Second  edition.     1889 ---•  — 

Sailing  directions  for  the  English  Channel.  Part  II.  1877.  Hydro- 
graphic  Offlce 

Supplement.     Second  edition.     1889 

Coasts  and  Ports  of  the  Bay  of  Biscay.     1876 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890 - 

Winds,  Cnrrenta,  and  Navigation  of  the  Gulf  of  Cadiz,  the  Western 
Coast  of  the  Spanish  Peninsula,  and  the  Strait  of  Gibraltar.    1870. 
Northwest  and  West,  Coasts  of  Spain,  and  the  Coast  of  Portugal 

from  Point  Estaca  to  Cape  Trafalgar.     1874     -. 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890.    Hydrographic  Omco 

General  Examination  of  the  Mediterranean  Sea.     1870 

Supplement  No.  1.     1887 r'n'u'" 

Mediterranean.  Part  L  S.  and  SE.  Coasts  of  Spain  from  Mala  Bahia 
to  Cape  Crenx.    Balearic  Islands,  and  N.  Coast  of  Africa  from  Ceuta 

to  La  Cala ' 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890 - 

Mediterranean.    Part  II.     South  Coast  of  France  ;  West  Coast  of 

Italy  ;  Tuscan  Archipelago ;  Corsica  and  Sardinia.     1878 

Supplement.     Second  edition.     1890 

Mediterranean.  Part  III.  Coast  of  Tunis  ;  Sardinia ;  Sicily  and 
Malta  Channels ;  Li  pari  Islands;  Sicily;  Strait  of  Messina ;  Coast 

ofTnpoli;  Coast  of  Egypt ;  Syria.     1879 

Supplement.    Second  edition.    1890  

Mediterranean.  Part  IV.  Gnlf  of  Gioja  to  Cape  Santa  Maria  di 
Leuca,  South  Coast  of  Italy,  the  Adriatic  Sea,  Ionian  Islands,  the 
C<jastH  of  Albania  and  Greece  to  Cape  Malea,  with  Cerigo  Island, 

iuoindiug  the  Gulfs  of  Patras  and  Corinth.     1883 > 

Supplement.     Second  editiou.     1890 


$2. 00 

.10 

2.00 


1.00 
.10 


L60 
.10 

1.00 
.60 
.10 

.75 
.10 

1.50 
.10 

S.50 
.10 

2.50 
.10 

1.00 

1.50 
.10 

2.00 
.10 


2.50 
.10 

2.50 
.10 


2.36 
.10 


2.35 
.10 


265 


'>&iiBiiaaaB<ia.M 


266         BOOKS  FOR  PURPOSES  O^^  NAVIGATION. 

Booktfor  purpotei  of  navigation  publiihed  by  Hjidrographio  Q^o«— Continued. 


No. 


Title. 


50-51) 
63  I 

46 


47 


i  I 


Ifi 


46 


68 


61 

54 
65 


58 
89 


84 


96 


20 


41 


41b 
41a 


Prine. 


NORTH  ATLANTIC  ocKAN— Continued. 

The  Azores,  Madeiras,  CanarieH,  and  Cape  Verde  Islands.    8vo.     1873 

and  1874.     Hydro(;rapliic  Office 

3  Supplements 

Tlie  West  Coast  of  Africa.     Part  I.     From  Cape  Spartel  to  Sierra 

Leone.     1873 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.  Part  I.  From  Cii'>«  Spartel  to  Cape  Lo- 
pez, including  the  Azores,  Madeiras,  Canaries,  and  Cape  Verde 

Islands.    Second  edition.     (In  preparation) 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.  Part  II.  From  Sierra  Leone  to  Cape  Lo- 
pez.    1875 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886 

Memoir  of  the  Dangers  and  Ice  in  the  North  Atlantic.  (Pamphlet.) 
1868 

SOUTH  ATLANTIC  OCEAN. 

The  West  Coast  of  Africa.  Part  III.  From  Cape  Lopez  to  the  Cape 
of  Good  Hope,  including  the  Islands  in  the  Bight  of  Biafra,  and 

Ascension  and  St.  Helena  Islands.     1H77 

Supplement  No.  1.    1886 

The  East  Coast  of  South  America.  From  Cape  Orange  to  Cape  Vir- 
gins,  including   Falkland,  South  Georgia,  Sandwich,   and  South 

Shetland  Islands.     1889 

Supplement.     1891 

The  Rio  de  la  Plata.     1875 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886 

Navigation  of  the  Strait  of  Magellan.     1883 

Remarks  by  Captain  M.  A.  Leffevre,  of  the  French  Navy,  on  the  voy- 
age of  the  Vaudreuil  through  the  Patagoniau  Channels  and  Magel- 
lan Strait.     (Pamphlet.).     1874 


PACIFIC  OCEAN. 


1867. 


General  Examination  of  the  Pacific  Ocean. 

Supplement  No.  1.     1886 

The  Navigation  of  the  Pacific  Ocean.     1874.    (Edition  exhausted)  .. 
The  West  Coast  of  South  America,  including  Magellan  Strait,  Tierra 

del  Fuego,  and  the  Outlying  Islands.     1890 

Supplement.     1890 

The  West  Coast  of  Mexico  and  Central  America,  from  the  Boundary 
Line  between  the  United  States  and  Mexico  to  Panama,  includ- 
ing the  Gulf  of  California.     1887 

Supplement.     1890 

The  Coast  of  British  Colnmbia.  From  Juan  de  Fuca  fltrait  to  Port- 
land Canal,  including  Vancouver  and  Queen  Charlotte  Islands. 

1891 

Directory  for  Coast  of  Alaska  and  Bering  Sea.    8vo.     1869.     Bureau 

of  Navigation.     (Edition  exhausted) 

Supplement  No.  I.    1886.     Hydrographic  Office.    (Edition  ex- 
hausted)   

The  East  Coast  of  Asia,  Vol.  1,  including  Tartary,  Korea.  .Japan,  and 

adjacent  islands.     Hydrogrtipbic  Office.    (In  preparation) 

Reported  Daugers  to  Navigation  in  the  Pacific.    Part  I.    North  of 

theEquator.    1871 • 

Supplement.     1891.    Hydrographic  Office 

Supplement  to  Reported  Dangers  in  the  North  Pacific  Ocean.     1880.. 

Supplement.     1887 

Reported  Dangers  to  Navigation  in  the  Pacific  Ocean.     Part  II. 

South  of  theEquator.     1879 

Supplement  No.  "i.     1887 

Supplement.    1891.    Hydrographic  Office 


92.  oa 
.•2a 

2.00 
.10 


'i.00 
.10 


1.50 
.10 


LOO 

L50 
.10 
.20 


.20 


L50 
.10 


1.20 
.10 


.50 
.10 


L60 


LOO 


LOO 
.10 

LOO 
.10 


!outtnued. 


Prine. 

1873 

12.00 

.20 

Sierra 

2.00 

.10 

pe  Lo- 

Verde 

pe  Lo- 

2.00 

.10 

phlet.) 

\ 

.20 

e  Cape 

ra,  and 

l.SO 

.10 

pe  Vlr- 

South 

1.00 

.la 

1.50 

.10 

.20 

he  voy- 

MageU 

.20 

1.50 

.10 

isted) 

,  Tierra 

1.20 

.10 

tindary 
inolud- 

.50 

.vy 

to  Port- 

[alauda. 

1.50 

Bureau 

tiou  ex- 

tan,  and 

forth  of 

•    1.00 

1.00 

.10 

'art  II.  . 

1.00 

.10 

1 


BOOKS    FOR   PURPOSES    OF    NAVIGATION.  267 

Book$  for  purpoHi  of  iiaHgation,  publiahedhy  Uydrogtaphio  Offivr — Contiiiiied. 


85 

24 
39 

30 

74 

76 
33 


31 


72 
9 
13 
17 
71 
66 

57 
49 

90 
91 

8 
8a 


19 

4 

77 


14 

87 


INDIAN   UCKAN. 

Sailiut;  Directions  oftheltuliiin  Ocean,  Mie  wiiiils,  iiioiihooum,  cnrreutn, 
and  paMaseH,  including  also  the  Java  Sea,  Siilii  Sua,  Afiiera  Sra, 

and  the  PLilippine  iHlaiulH.     1887 

Supplenientn.    1889  and  1890 ... 

Gflueral  Examination  of  the  Indian  Ocean,  with  DiruotioiiH  fur  the 

Navigation  of  Torres  Straits,  etc.     1870 

Supplement  No.  1.    1886 

Physical  Geography  of  the  Red  Sea,  with  Sailing  Direotionx.     1872.. 

LIGHT-LISTS. 

List  of  Lights  (No.  1)  of  North  and  South  America  (excepting  the 

United  States),  including  the  West   Indies  and  Pacitic  Islands. 

8vo.     1891 

List  of  Lights  (No.  5)  of  the  North,  Baltic,  and  White  Seas,  inclnd- 

iug  the  Coasts  of  Denmark,  Prussia,  Russia,  Sweden,  and  Norway. 

8vo 


List  of  Lights  (No.  (!)  of  the  British  Islands.  8vo.  (Edition  ex- 
hausted)  

List  of  Lights  (No.  4)  of  the  Atlantic  Coaat  of  Europe,  including  Spain, 
Portugal,  France,  Belgium,  and  Holland.  8vo.  (Edition  ex- 
hansteid). 

List  of  Lights  (No.  3)  of  the  Went  Coast  of  Africa  and  the  Mediter- 
ranean Sea,  including  the  West  and  North  Coasts  of  Africa,  the 
Mediterranean,  the  Adriatic,  thn  Black  Sea,  and  the  Sea  of  Azof. 
8vo 


Supplement,     1890 

List  of  Lights  (No.  2)  of  the  Sonth  and  East  Coasts  of  Africa  and  the 
East  Indies,  including  the  East  India  Islands,  China,  Japan,  Aus- 
tralia, Tasmania,  and  New  Zealand.    8vo  

Supplement.    1890 


MISCELLANEOUS  BOOKS. 


Edition  of  1891 


List  of  Geographical  Positions.    1883 . . . 

The  New  American  Practical  Navigator. 

Bowditch's  Useful  Tables.    1891 

Projection  Tables.     8vo.     1869 

Azimuth  Tables  for  parallels  of  latitude  bftweeu  61°  N.  and  61°  S  ... 

Arctic  Azimuth  Tables  for  paral'  !.4  of  latitude  between  70°  and  88°. 
1881 

Tables  for  Finding  the  Distance  ot  1 1\  Object  by  two  Bearings.     1874 . 

The  Route  of  Mail  Steamers  betweta  the  English  Channel  and  New 
York.    1873 

The  Development  of  Great  Circle  Sailing.     1889 

Table  of  Meridional  Parts  for  the  Terrestrial  Spheroid,  Compression 
T^^fiinr-    I**89 

Magnetism  of  Ships  and  the  Deviations  of  the  Compass.    8vo.     1867. 

Magnetism  of  Ships  and  the  Deviations  of  the  Compass.  Couiprising 
the  three  reports  of  the  Liverpool  Compass  Commission,  with  addf 
tional  papers  by  Mr.  Archibald  Smith,  F.  R.  S.,  etc.,  and  Staff-Cap- 
tain F.J.  Evans,  R.  N.    1869 

Ship's  Compasses,  including  the  snbjeot  of  Binnacles  and  Swinging 
Ship.    1869 

The  Way  to  Avoid  the  Center  of  our  Violent  Gales.    1868 

Practical  Hints  in  regard  to  West  India  Hurricanes.    1887 

Nautical  Monograph,  No.  5.  The  Great  Storm  oflf  the  Atlantic  Coast 
of  the  United  States,  March  lt-14, 1888.     1888. 

General  Instructions  for  Hydrographic  Surveyors.    1868 

International  Signal  Code.  Revised  and  corrected  to  1890,  includ- 
ing the  semaphore  and  storm-signal  service  of  the  maritime  conn- 
tries,  the  Life-Saving  Service  and  time-ball  system  of  the  United 
States.    18911 


Price. 


91.00 
.10 

2.00 


.25 

.25 
.25 

.2& 


.25 
.15 


.25 
.1» 


.7^ 

2.26 
L25 
1.50 
4.25 

.80 
.20 

.30 
LOO 

L20 
3.00 


3.00 

.40 
.10 
.10 
Not  for 
sale. 
.20 


3.00 


•  ■)  a 


268         BOOKS  FOR  PURPOSES  OF  NAVIGATION. 

Booki  for  purpoBei  of  naflnation,  publiihed  by  Ilydrograiihio  O^^ce— Contlnned. 


91 

99 

93 
65 

65te 

65b 

76 

97 


94 
95 


98 


MISCKLLANEUUS  BOOKS— COntiUlied. 

FlagH  of  Mniitinie  Nations.  5tli  viUtion.  4to.  1883.  Bnrean  of 
Nayiuatioii.     (Etlition  exlmuHtetl) 

Joe  and  Ico  Movenienta  in  the  Buring  Hea  and  Aiotio  Basin.  (Pam- 
phlet.)   1890 , 

Ico  a'  d  Ice  Movements  in  North  Atlantic  Ouenn.     1890 

Report  on  the  Telegrn|ihio  Determination  of  Ditt'erenoes  of  Longitude 
in  the  West  Indies  and  Central  America.     1877. 

Report  on  the  Telegrnpliic  Determination  of  Ditferences  of  Longitude 
on  the  East  Court  of  South  America.     1880. 

Report  on  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longitude  in  the  East 
Indies,  Cliinn,  and  Japan,     l^!8t-^4'2. 

Report  of  Telegraphic  Determiiiations  of  Longitudes  in  Mexico,  Cen- 
tral America,  and  West  Const  of  South  America.     1885. 

Report 'OD  the  Telegraphic  Determination  of  Longitudes  in  Mexico, 
Central  America,  the  West  Indies,  and  on  the  North  Coast  of  South 
America,  wiili  the  Latitudes  of  tlie  several  Stations.  To  which  iu 
appeiuled  a  Report  on  Miignetic  Observations  in  Mexico  and  the 
West  Indies.     1891. 

Report  of  the  International  Meteorologio  Conjjress  at  Paris,  1889 

The  average  form  of  Isolated  Submarine  Peaks  and  the  interval 
which  should  obtain  between  deep-sea  soundings  taicen  to  disclose 
the  character  of  the  bottom  of  the  ocean.     1S9II. 

Report  on  Uniform  System  for  Spelling  Foreign  Geographical  Names. 
1891. 


ILOO 

.SM) 

.30 

Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 
Not  for 

sale. 


.SO 
.70 


Not  for 
sale. 


i^ootinaed. 


Prloo. 

u   of 

11.00 

Pam- 

.20 

.30 

itude 

Not  for 

sale. 

itude 

Not  for 

Male. 

Eaat 

Not  for 

sale. 

,Cen- 

Notfor 

sale. 

sxico, 

Notfor 

South 

Bale. 

ioh  io 

d  the 

!9 

.20 

terval 

.70 

Bclose 

Barnes. 

Notfor 

sale. 

AGENTS  FOR  THK  SALE  OF  HYDROdllAPHIC  OFFICE  CHARTS,  SAILING 

.    DIRECTIONS,  ETC. 

UMITKD  8TATK8. 

N.C.  Wallace,  Millbridue,  Me. 

Albert  W.  B«e,  Bar  Harbor.  Me, 

Spear,  May  &.  .Stover,  40>  .Main  street,  Bocklaiid,  Me. 

George  Hliss,  Waldoboro,  Me. 

William  O.  McCobb,  Booth  Buy,  Me. 

Charles  F.  Haydeii,  Bath,  Me. 

William  Senior  &  Co.,  No.  .'it  Kxchanjte  Btreet,  Porthvnd.  Me. 

P.  A.  ChiHolm,  No.  l»)l  Main  street,  Gloucester.  .Mass. 

Henry  P.  Ives.'^%2  Essex  street,  Salem,  Mass. 

Cbas.  C.  Hutchinson,  No.  ViC)  Commercial  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

Samuel  Thaxter  &  Sou,  No.  Iii5  State  street,  Boston,  Mass. 

D.  W.  Stevens,  Vineyard  Haven,  Mass. 

C.  R.  Sherman  &,  Son,  New  Bedford,  Mass. 

Geo.  A.  Stockwell,  Providence,  R.  I. 

J.  M.  K.  South  wick,  1S5  Thames  street,  Newport,  R.  I. 

C.  C.  Ball,  Block  Island. 

D.  B.  Hempstead,  25  Bank  street.  New  London,  Conn. 
Sergt.  P.  Daniels,  New  London,  Conn. 

J)iB.  H.  Stivers,  72  Water  street,  Stonington,  Conn. 
R.  D.  Stevens,  custoiu-house,  Hartford,  Conn. 
H.  H.  Baboook,  castomhonse,  New  Haven,  Conn. 
A.  H.  Kellara,  New  Haven,  Conn. 

T.  S.  &,  J.  D.  NeguB,  No.  140  Water  street,  New  York  City. 
R,  Merrill's  Sons,  179  Water  street.  New  York  City. 
Uiohael  Rupp  &  Co.,  No.  39  South  street.  New  York  City. 
D.  Eggert's  Sons,  No.  74  Wall  street,  New  York  City. 
John  BlisB  &  Co., No.  128  Front  street,  New  York  City. 
Thomas  Manning,  No.  53  Beaver  street.  New  York  City. 
£.  Stelger  &,  Co.,  25  Park  Place,  New  York  City. 
Frank  M.  Porch,  custom-house,  Bridgeton,  N.  J. 
Riggs  &  Bro.,  No.  221  Walnut  street,  Philadelphia,  Pa. 
F.  J.  Sloane  &  Co.,  comer  Pratt  street  and  Speers  Wharf,  Baltimore,  Md. 
M.  V.  O'Neal,  No.  502  East  Pratt  street,  Baltimore,  Md. 
Wm.  J.  Pitts,  53  South  Oay  street,  Baltimore,  Md. 
J.  J.  Chapman,  No.  915  Pennsylvania  avenne,  Washington,  D.  C. 
W.  H.  Lowdermilk  &  Co.,  1424  F  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
J.  H.  Hlckcox,  906  M  street  NW.,  Washington,  D.  C. 
R.  Bell's  Sons,  South  Fairfax  street,  Alexandria,  Va.  ' 
C.  F.  Greenwood  &  Bro.,  158  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Va. 
Yiokery  &  Co.,  124  Main  street,  Norfolk,  Va. 
Godfrey  Hart,  No. 24  South  Front  street,  Wilmington,  N.  C. 
W.  N.  Harriss,  with  Geo.  Harriss  &  Co.,  North  Water  street,  Wilmington, N.  C, 

269 


,idfiS0^> 


n 


270  LIST    OF    A0ENT8. 

Agtnttfor  the  mU  of  Hydroiirnphic  Ojfflre  phnrf»,  laHlng  direel(on»,  «!?.— Contltined. 

UNITKI)  STATKfl— 0OlltitlUe<l, 

W.  A.  VVIIwu,  No,  116  Eftiit  Hay  iitr«et,  Charlenloii,  S.  C. 

Duviil  Porter,  No.  Iti  Hroiii{litoii  atrmtt,  S»rAiiniih,()a. 

W.  8.  Clierry  A,  Co.,  No.  rt9  Buy  Htroet,  Havttunali,  0». 

Horaci)  Drew,  JaokiionvlUe,  Fla. 

Koltert  KanHon,  TitiiHVille,  Fla. 

UreUforil  Hroii..  I'altii  Heuch,  Fla. 

Alfrt'd  Broiit,  office  of  llxhtUoune  iatpeotor,  Key  Weat,  Fla. 

Babbitt  &  Co.,  Franklin  atreet,  Tampa,  Flu. 

C.  D.  Webster,  "'i  and  85  Tarpon  avf-nne,  Tarpon  Springo,  Flu. 

J.E.Grady,  Apalachioola,  Fla. 

Henry  Horsier  Si  Co.,  Fenimcola,  Fla. 

J.  R.  Edwards,  Mobile,  Ala. 

Jaa.  I.  Friar,  Pasoagoula,  MUg. 

L.  Frlgerlo,  No.  1(11  Canal  street.  New  Orleans,  La. 

Woodward,  Wight  &.  Co.,  Noh.  :(8, 40, 4-^  Canal  street,  New  Orleans,  La. 

Chas.  F.Trnbe,  Galveston,  Texas. 

Rand,  MoNally  &  Co.,  144-154  Monroe  street,  Chioa|{o,  111. 

Dodge  &,  Biirbeok,  corner  Fifth  and  D  streets,  San  Diego,  CaL 

W.  L.  Banning,  San  Pedro,  Cal. 

Stolt  &.  Thayer,  47  South  Spring  street,  Los  Angeles,  Cal. 

H.  A.  C.  MoPbail,  Santa  Barbara,  Cal. 

8.  8.  Arnheim,  No.  H  Stuart  street,  San  Franoisoo,  Cal. 

Dillon  &  Son,  No.  310  California  street,  Sau  Francisoo,  Cal. 

Louis  Weule,  No.  418  Battery  street,  San  Francisco,  Cal. 

Griifen  &.  Ueed,  Astoria,  Oregon. 

J.  K.  Gill  &  Co.,  Nos.  28  and  30  First  street,  Portland,  Oregon. 

James  Jones,  Port  Townsend,  Wash. 

Waterman  &,  Katz,  Port  Townsend,  Wash. 

E.  C.  Vangban,  Tacoina,  Wash. 
Boeriuger  &  Co,,  Taonuia,  Wash, 
O.  Davies  &  Co.,  Seattle,  Wash. 
W.  H.  Piimphrey,  Seattle,  Wash. 

VORKION  PORTS, 

Garrett  Byrne,  St.  Johns,  Newfoundland. 

Robert  H.  Cogswell,  Halifax,  N.  S. 

J.  &  A.  McMillan.  St.  John,  N.  B. 

Hunter  &  Grant,  Hamilton,  Ontario. 

T.  Darling  &  Co.,  Nassau,  Bahamas. 

£.  J.  D.  Astwoud,  Turks  Island. 

Edwin  W.  Wilson,  41  and  43  Obispo  street,  Havana,  Cuba. 

Juan  B. Carbo,  U.S.  vice-consul,  Cienfnegos,  Cuba. 

J.  P.  Thorsen,  St.  Thomas,  W.  L 

James  Gall,  Kingston,  Jamaica. 

G.  Anciaux,  U.  8.  consulate,  Barbados,  W.  I. 

John  A.  Donnatien,  Port  Spain,  Trinidad,  W.  I. 

R.  D.  Mohnn,  Greytown,  Nicaragua. 

At  the  consulate.  Para,  Brazil. 

Arthur  B.  Dallas,  Pernambuco,  Brazil. 

John  Newton,  2  Calle  de  la  Constitncion,  Callao,  Pern. 

F.  A.  Markert,  Guayraas,  Mexico. 


LIST   or    AOKNT«. 


S71 


Cuntlnned. 


Agtnttfor  tht  «ii/«  of  llydrngrafthin  Offlre  oharln,  latlinij  (Urtcltoii$,  «(c.— Cniitiiuie<l 

POMRIUN    POHTK— OOlltluueil. 

M.  W.  Waltt  A  Co.,  77  Oovoriimeiit  iitre«t,  Victoria,  H.C 

Philip,  Bon  &,  Nephw,  41  to  5]  South  Cnatln  «truet,  I.lverpool,  GiiKlainl- 

AlnxRiider  Dobbit*  &.  tittn,  IH  Clyde  Place,  OlUKow,  8ootlutiil. 

V.  A,  M.  Lepi^tit,  ir>  Rue  ile  Pnrln,  Havre,  France. 

O.  W.  Lohiiiann,  Sohllefiniihle  'il,  Kreninn,  Oorinany. 

'Cbarlea  Oaiipp  A  Co.,  Hongkong,  China. 

Rusiiell  L.  Webb,  Manilla,  Philippine  Inlandi. 


-M> 


«*iV'.v 


timmmmm 


>..^*fM(girr«irrf** 


